Reb500 User Manual PDF

REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen
Edition December 2008
Numerical Station Protection System

Busbar Protection with integrated Breaker Failure,
Line and Transformer Protection
p
Operating Instructions
2002 ABB Switzerland Ltd
Baden/Switzerland
8th Edition
Applies for software version V7.50
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and
registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in
particular reproduction or making available to third parties without our explicit
consent in writing is prohibited.
The use is only allowed for the purpose laid down in the contract.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this
the reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a
warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our
customers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep
them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrep-
ancies between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
Version 7.50
1. Introduction E
2. Safety instructions A
3. Basic concept F
4. External operator program (HMI500) F
5. Configuration and settings G
6. Erection and installation A
7. Commissioning C
8. Operation and maintenance D
9. Fault-finding D
10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal A
11. Options for busbar protection G
12. Option for bay protection G
13. Appendices E
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. REB500/REB500sys................................................................ 1-2
1.2. Application ............................................................................... 1-2
1.3. Main features ........................................................................... 1-3
1.4. Options .................................................................................... 1-4
1.5. Line and feeder options (REB500sys only).............................. 1-5
1.6. Using these operating instructions........................................... 1-6
1-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. REB500/REB500sys
The digital busbar system REB500 belongs to the generation of
fully digital protection devices, i.e. the analog-to-digital
conversion of the input variables takes place immediately after
the input transformers and all further processing of the resulting
digital signals is performed by programmable microprocessors.
Its development was based on the established analog electronic
busbar protection schemes INX2 and INX5.
The main features which enable the REB500 to fully satisfy the
demands placed on a modern protective device with respect to
cost-effectiveness and functionality are compact design, just a
few different types of hardware units, modular software and
continuous self-supervision and diagnosis.
The structure of the protection system is bay-oriented. The bay
units may be located close to the switchgear in control and
protection cubicles or in a central relay room. Distributed bay
units are connected to the central unit by an optical fiber process
bus. The central unit collects all the data and executes the
protection algorithms and auxiliary functions at station level.
The standard application of the REB500 protection system is
that of busbar protection. Provision is made, however for
integrating optional functions to detect, for example, breaker
failure, end zone faults, overcurrent and circuit-breaker pole
discrepancy.
The version REB500sys also includes bay protection functions
for all power systems voltages and types of grounding in stations
with single and double busbars.
1.2. Application
The digital busbar protection REB500 has been designed for the
high-speed selective protection of MV, HV and EHV busbars in
50 and 60 Hz power systems and also for railway systems
operating at 16.7 Hz. Because of the flexible and modular
structure of both hardware and software, the protection can be
simply configured to suit the particular busbar arrangement.
1-2
It is thus able to protect all busbar layouts, whether a single set

of busbars or quadruple busbars with a transfer busbar. It is
similarly applicable to ring busbars and 1 breaker schemes.
The maximum capacity for a quadruple busbar system is 60
feeders (60 bay units) with a maximum of 7 longitudinal
breakers, 8 sections of busbars and 32 protection zones.
NOTE: Because of their limited number of inputs and outputs,

some versions of REB500sys are only applicable to single and
double busbar configurations.
The protection system REB500 detects phase and ground faults

in solidly grounded and impedance grounded power systems.
The digital REB500 scheme only evaluates the primary system
currents. The main CTs do not have to fulfill any special
requirements as is the case, for example, with a high-impedance
scheme. Even in the event of saturation of the main CTs, the
protection is still able to discriminate correctly between internal
and external faults.
1.3. Main features

Higher reliability due to the evaluation of two independent
criteria:
- differential current with restraint feature
- directional current comparison
Independent evaluation of each phase
Minimum CT performance requirements
High through-fault stability even when CTs saturate
Solid-state busbar replica
No switching of CT circuits
Only a single version for rated currents of 1 A and 5 A
Only a single version for auxiliary supply voltages between
48 and 250 V
1-3
Short operating time irrespective of station size and

configuration
Centralized system: Hardware accommodated in one or
several cubicles
Distributed system: Bay units located close to the switchgear
with short connections to CTs, isolators, circuit-breakers etc.
Signals transferred between bay units and central unit in both
centralized and distributed schemes via optical fiber cables
(max. distance approx. 1200 m)
Optical fiber communication is immune to electrical
interference even in the immediate vicinity of HV cables
Unrestricted replacement of existing busbar protection
schemes (centralized system). Combined centralized and
distributed systems are possible when adding feeders etc.
Simple addition of new feeders
User-friendly human/machine interface (HMI)
Fully digital signal processing
Comprehensive self-monitoring
Integrated event recorder
Integrated disturbance recorder for power system currents
Reduced stocks of spares due to modular design and only
few different units
1.4. Options
Breaker failure protection
End zone fault protection
Time-overcurrent protection
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection
Voltage-measuring disturbance recorder
Separate I0 measurement for impedance grounded systems
1-4
Communication with station control and supervision systems

(LON/IEC 60870-5-103/IEC 61850-8-1)
Local user-friendly human/machine interface (HMI) with
display on the bay units
Redundant power supplies for central and/or bay units
Overcurrent check feature for tripping commands
Low-voltage check feature for tripping commands.
Checkzone as release criteria for the busbar protection
1.5. Line and feeder options (REB500sys only)

Distance protection / HV distance protection
Sensitive directional ground fault protection for grounded
systems
Sensitive ground fault protection for ungrounded or
compensated networks
Auto-reclosure
Synchrocheck
Inverse time overcurrent ground fault protection
Definite time overcurrent and undercurrent protection
Inverse time overcurrent protection
Directional inverse time overcurrent protection
Directional definite time overcurrent protection
Definite time overvoltage and undervoltage protection
Peak value overcurrent protection
Peak value overvoltage protection
Three-phase current plausibility protection
Three-phase voltage plausibility protection
Transformer differential protection
Over-temperature protection
Logic (OR, AND, RS-FF)
Delay
Frequency protection
1-5
Rate-of-change of frequency protection

Definite time overfluxing protection
Inverse time overfluxing
Power protection
1.6. Using these operating instructions

The structure of these Operating Instructions is as follows:
The introduction in Chapter 1 is followed by safety instructions
and the significance of the corresponding symbols in Chapter 2.
Chapters 3 to 10 explain the basic functions and the operating
principle of the REB500 system and the standard busbar
protection functions. Optional functions and the explanation of
special applications are to be found in Chapter 11.
Chapter 3 contains a detailed description of the hardware and
software design, the functions, the blocking signals, other signals
and the technical data.
Chapter 4 describes the HMI500 (human/machine interface)
which provides facility for:
controlling and setting REB500 using a PC
querying system status (isolator and circuit-breaker positions
etc.)
viewing and changing settings
assignment of inputs and outputs
viewing measured variables, event list etc.
Chapter 5 explains the procedure for configuring the signals and
calculating the pick-up settings. Should it become necessary to
change any settings, it is advisable to read this chapter carefully.
It also includes a detailed description of the REB500 input and
output signals.
Chapter 6 contains instructions for transporting, storing and
installing REB500 and should be read before commencing
installation work.
The conditions that have to be fulfilled before commissioning
REB500 and the commissioning procedure are to be found in
Chapter 7.
1-6
Chapter 8 describes the system operating procedures in normal

operation and in the event of a fault and also the periodic
inspection of the protection chain (i.e. primary system, protection
and control and tripping functions).
Consult Chapter 9 in the event of any error messages which are
displayed in normal operation, while starting the system or when
working with HMI500.
The precautions to be taken when decommissioning REB500
are given in Chapter 10.
IMPORTANT: Optional functions are explained in Chapter 11.
Reference is made to this chapter in Chapters 3 to 8.
Chapter 12 is concerned with line and bay protection, the
standard application being covered in Section 12.1 and the
settings and signals of the individual line protection functions in
Section 12.2.
The appendices (Chapter 13) contain the meanings of special
terms and abbreviations, wiring examples, software information,
the standard REB500sys configurations and the recommended
test reports to be used in the test bay and during commissioning.
All information given for REB500 also applies to REB500sys.
REB500sys includes all the functions of REB500.
1-7
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A ABB Switzerland Ltd
January 05
2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2.1. Safety instruction flags............................................................. 2-2
2.2. General rules ........................................................................... 2-2
2.3. General safety instructions ...................................................... 2-3
2.4. Instructions for the specific product ......................................... 2-4
2-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. A
2. SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
2.1. Safety instruction flags

Safety instructions in these operating instructions are marked as
follows:
DANGER: This symbol indicates immediate danger due to high

electrical voltage, or a mechanical or other cause. Non-obser-
vance can lead to serious injury or even death.
WARNING: This symbol draws attention to a dangerous situa-

tion. Non-observance can lead to serious injury to persons or
damage to property.
NOTE: An important instruction that must be observed.
2.2. General rules

The busbar protection system REB500 corresponds to the latest
practices and guidelines and complies with the recognized safety
rules. Nevertheless, care must always be taken to avoid danger.
Only use the busbar protection system REB500 when it is in
perfect working order and in strict accordance with these
Operating Instructions.
Dangerous situations can arise if the equipment is used
improperly, especially if the user changes the configuration.
2-2
2.3. General safety instructions
DANGER: Live electrical equipment is in the immediate vicinity

of REB500/REB500sys. Before working on the system, always
ensure that it is impossible to come into contact with, or even
close to live parts.
DANGER: The busbar protection system REB500/REB500sys

can initiate operation of items of electrical plant (circuit-breakers
and isolators). Before working on the equipment, always ensure
that unwanted operation is inhibited or has no effect on persons
or plant.
DANGER: Strictly observe all safety precautions (interlocks,

locks and blocking devices), especially those issued for the
specific station.
CAUTION: Only properly authorized, professionally qualified

and correspondingly trained personnel, who have also read and
understood the operating instructions, may work on the
REB500/REB500sys system.
2-3
2.4. Instructions for the specific product
DANGER: Take care never to open the secondary circuits of

CTs conducting current.
DANGER: There is a danger of contact with live parts when

opening REB500 cubicle doors.
NOTE: Electrostatic discharge can destroy components in the

equipment.
NOTE: Other safety instructions pertaining to particular

operations are contained in the respective chapters of the
operating instructions.
2-4
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
3. BASIC CONCEPT
3.1. Application and system capacity.............................................. 3-3
3.2. System structure ...................................................................... 3-6

3.2.1. Components of the protection system...................................... 3-6
3.2.1.1. Central unit .............................................................................. 3-6
3.2.1.2. Bay unit.................................................................................... 3-6
3.2.2. System and hardware design .................................................. 3-7
3.2.3. Protection system configuration............................................... 3-7
3.2.3.1. Central installation ................................................................... 3-8
3.2.3.2. Distributed installation............................................................ 3-10
3.2.4. Standards .............................................................................. 3-11
3.3. Hardware modules................................................................. 3-12

3.3.1. Block diagram of the REB500................................................ 3-12
3.3.2. Central unit modules .............................................................. 3-12
3.3.3. Bay unit versions ................................................................... 3-20
3.3.3.1. Bay unit 500BU03 .................................................................. 3-22
3.3.4. Local control unit (local HMI) ................................................. 3-30
3.3.5. Station level control systems ................................................. 3-30
3.4. Software................................................................................. 3-33

3.4.1. System software REBSYS..................................................... 3-33
3.4.2. Customers database ............................................................. 3-33
3.4.3. Human/machine interface program HMI500 .......................... 3-33
3.4.4. Local human/machine interface (local HMI)........................... 3-33
3.4.5. Station monitoring system (SMS) .......................................... 3-34
3.4.6. Station automation system (SAS) .......................................... 3-34
3.5. Signal acquisition and processing.......................................... 3-35

3.5.1. Current measurement (analog inputs) ................................... 3-35
3.5.2. Voltage measurement (analog inputs, optional)..................... 3-37
3.5.3. Signal acquisition (binary inputs) ........................................... 3-37
3.5.4. Signal outputs (binary) ........................................................... 3-38
3.5.5. Signal designations................................................................ 3-39
3.6. Self-supervision ..................................................................... 3-44

3.6.1. Diagnostic program................................................................ 3-44
3.6.2. REB500/REB500sys self-supervision system........................ 3-46
3.6.2.1. Software supervision.............................................................. 3-47
3.6.2.2. Hardware supervision ............................................................ 3-49
3-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. F
3.6.2.3. Plausibility check ................................................................... 3-51
3.7. Basic functions of the protection system................................ 3-53

3.7.1. Event memory........................................................................ 3-53
3.7.2. Disturbance recorder ............................................................. 3-53
3.7.3. Intertripping/transfer tripping .................................................. 3-54
3.7.3.1. Busbar image......................................................................... 3-55
3.7.4. Isolator and circuit-breaker positions ..................................... 3-56
3.7.4.1. Supervising isolator and circuit-breaker statuses................... 3-57
3.7.4.2. Auxiliary contacts................................................................... 3-58
3.7.4.3. Evaluating the isolator and circuit-breaker statuses............... 3-59
3.7.4.4. Isolator alarm ......................................................................... 3-59
3.7.4.5. Delay...................................................................................... 3-59
3.7.4.6. Blocking by the isolator alarm ................................................ 3-59
3.7.4.7. Switch inhibit.......................................................................... 3-60
3.7.4.8. Acknowledging the isolator alarm .......................................... 3-61
3.7.4.9. Note on isolators and circuit-breakers.................................... 3-62
3.7.5. REB500 system blocking design ........................................... 3-62
3.7.6. Bay unit stand-alone mode .................................................... 3-68
3.7.7. Enabling the tripping command ............................................. 3-68
3.7.8. Inspection and maintenance .................................................. 3-68
3.7.9. Time synchronization ............................................................. 3-69
3.8. Busbar protection function ..................................................... 3-71

3.8.1. Protection zones .................................................................... 3-71
3.8.2. Measuring principle................................................................ 3-71
3.8.2.1. Restrained amplitude comparison ......................................... 3-73
3.8.2.2. Phase comparison ................................................................. 3-75
3.8.2.3. Safety aspects of the measuring principle ............................. 3-77
3.8.3. Tripping logic ......................................................................... 3-77
3.8.4. Differential current supervision .............................................. 3-77
3.8.4.1. Blocking the protection in the event of differential alarm........ 3-78
3.8.5. Neutral current measurement ................................................ 3-78
3.8.6. Busbar protection operating times ......................................... 3-79
3.8.7. Blocking measurement of certain CTs ................................... 3-81
3.8.7.1. Bus-tie breaker functions ....................................................... 3-82
3.8.7.1.1. When the bus-tie breaker is open .......................................... 3-82
3.8.7.1.2. In the event of a REB500 protection function
(BBP, BFP or EFP) tripping this CB ....................................... 3-83
3.8.7.1.3. Short-circuiting of a CT .......................................................... 3-85
3.8.7.2. Feeder circuit-breakers .......................................................... 3-87
3.8.7.3. Recovery time........................................................................ 3-89
3.8.7.4. CB CLOSE command (manual close signal)....................... 3-90
3.9. Technical specification........................................................... 3-91
3-2
3. BASIC CONCEPT
3.1. Application and system capacity

The protection system is applicable to all busbar layouts,
whether a single set of busbars or quadruple busbars with a
transfer busbar. It is similarly applicable to 1 breaker schemes,
ring busbars and duplex stations. The maximum capacity is 60
bay units (one per feeder or one per set of CTs on a bus-tie
breaker; in the case of a longitudinal isolator, either a separate
bay unit is needed or alternatively it is included in an existing bay
unit). Up to 32 protection zones can be selectively protected and
tripped.
It is possible to apply REB500 system without making use of its
basic busbar protection function (e.g. as an independent breaker
failure and end zone protection).
NOTE: The protection system can be used either with bay

protection functions (REB500sys) or without bay protection
functions (REB500).
NOTE: The application of the protection system in complex

stations, 1 breaker schemes and duplex configurations is
described separately in Sections 11.16. and 11.17.
The following are examples of the principal busbar configura-

tions:
HEST 055 001 C
Fig. 3.1 Single busbar
3-3
I
II
HEST 055 002 C
Fig. 3.2 Double busbar
I
II
Transfer
busbar
Fig. 3.3 Double busbar with transfer busbar
II HEST 055 004 C
Fig. 3.4 1 breaker scheme
3-4
HEST 055 005 C
Fig. 3.5 Ring busbar
II
HEST 055 002 V
Fig. 3.6 Duplex station
3-5
3.2. System structure
3.2.1. Components of the protection system

The digital busbar protection REB500 is divided into several
hardware units. Bay units measure the line and bus-tie breaker
currents and may be installed close to the respective CTs. They
communicate with the central unit via an optical fiber bus. The
central unit processes the current signals measured by the bay
units and distributes the tripping signals back to the bay units in
the event of an internal fault.
3.2.1.1. Central unit

A central unit is housed in a 19" casing (up to 2 casings in large
stations) containing a interconnecting bus plane (see Section
3.3.2.), a local control unit and several hardware modules.
Fig. 3.7 Front view of a central unit
Depending on the busbar configuration, up to 20 hardware mod-

ules are inserted into a central unit.
3.2.1.2. Bay unit

A bay unit is housed in a 1/3 size 19" casing and has the follow-
ing main features:
Single self-contained unit
Different semi-flush mounted versions
The following semi-flush mounted versions are available:
Basic version with or without local HMI
Version for conventional switch panel mounting
3-6
Terminals for optional disturbance

recorder (5 x VTs)
Link to the
central unit
Binary inputs Analog inputs

(4 x CTs)
Binary outputs
Connector for optional

local HMI
Optional
redundant Auxiliary supply
auxiliary supply
Fig. 3.8 Rear view of bay unit (example for 500BU03, i.e.
4 x I and 5 x U measurements and redundant
supplies)
3.2.2. System and hardware design

The process bus connecting the bay units to the central unit is
divided into segments. Each bus segment is assigned a node ID.
Up to 10 bay units can be connected to a segment. Each bus
segment requires a protection processor board, but two bus
segments can share a bus controller. Bay units are connected
via star couplers.
The busbar protection has capacity for up to 60 bay units, i.e. up
to six bus segments.
3.2.3. Protection system configuration

The protection system comprises a central unit and as many bay
units as there are switchgear bays in the station. The bay units
can be either installed in the control and protection cubicles as-
sociated with the individual bays or collectively in the central re-
lay room. Communication between the bay units and the central
unit is via an optical process bus. The central unit collects all the
data and executes the protection algorithms and auxiliary func-
tions.
The central and bay units used for centralized and distributed
configurations are basically the same.
3-7
3.2.3.1. Central installation

Depending on the size of the busbar system, the protection is
accommodated in one or several cubicles. In this case, the bay
units are fitted into mounting plates. Both central and bay units
are mounted in hinged frames in the cubicles for ease of access.
Fig. 3.9 Basic layout of a centralized REB500 system
3-8
Advantages of centralized installation

Modernization of old stations: The REB500 is installed in
place of the existing busbar protection scheme.
Centralised system 1-9 BU03
+R1
Terminal block 1
+1U CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 2
1-3 BU03 BU03 BU03 +5U CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 3
CT/VT Trip Signal
+13U Terminal block 4

Central unit CT/VT Trip Signal
(CU)
Terminal block 5
CT/VT Trip Signal
Air
vent
Terminal block 6
CT/VT Trip Signal
4-6 BU03 BU03 BU03 +22U
Terminal block 7
CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block 8
BU03 BU03 BU03 +30U CT/VT Trip Signal
7-9
Terminal block 9
CT/VT Trip Signal
Terminal block central unit
Terminal block power supply
Front view View

(Cabinet outer view) (Cabinet inside)
Fig. 3.10 Example of a centralized busbar protection sys-

tem
3-9
3.2.3.2. Distributed installation

The bay units are installed in the control and protection cubicles
associated with the individual switchgear bays and the central
unit is located on its own normally in a relay equipment room.
Fig. 3.11 Basic layout of a REB500 system with distributed

bay units
Control and protection cubicles close to the switchgear bays
ABB ABB ABB
Control unit Control unit

REC REC
REB500-
Central unit
AB B Ne tw ork Part n er AG REB 50 0
AB B Ne tw o rk Pa rt n er AG REB 500
REL REL
ABB N etw or k Pa rt ne r AG REB 5 00
C
C C
E
E E
Ce nt ral Un it
Bay Un it
Ba y Unit
REB500- REB500-
Bay unit Bay unit
Feeder Feeder
protection protection
HEST 005022 C
Central unit Bay unit 1 Bay unit 2
Fig. 3.12 Equipment cubicles for a busbar protection sys-

tem with distributed bay units
3-10
Advantages of distributed installation

Short cables runs between the primary process and the bay
units
All control and protection equipment close to the associated
bay
Short channels of communication between the devices
Simple maintenance and testing.
3.2.4. Standards
Refer to Chapter 12 for standard configurations of REB500sys.
3-11
3.3. Hardware modules
3.3.1. Block diagram of the REB500
Fig. 3.13 Block diagrams of a bay unit (BU03) and central

unit (CU)
3.3.2. Central unit modules
The following modules can be fitted in a central unit:
Module Type Function

Master CPU (CMP) 500CPU05 Processor module for up to 10 bay
units with a process bus interface,
RAM, local control unit interface
and non-volatile memory (flash)
Slave CPU (CSP) 500CPU05 Extension processor required per
10 additional bay units
(This module is identical to the
master CPU. Its functions are de-
termined by its position in the cen-
tral unit.)
Binary I/O module 500BIO01 I/O module with 12 optocoupler
inputs and 9 relay outputs
Optical star coupler 500SCM01 Module with 5 transmit / receive
optical pairs
Communication inter- 500CIM06 Communication processor for IEC
face 61850-8-1, LON or IEC 60870-5-
(communication CPU) 103 interfaces (optional)
3-12
Module Type Function

Bus controller (MBA) 500CPU05 Manages and controls the transfer
of data via two process bus seg-
ments.
(This module is identical to the
master CPU. Its functions are de-
termined by its position in the cen-
tral unit.)
Power supply unit 500PSM03 Auxiliary supply
Table 3.1 Central unit modules
Power supply unit 500PSM03

The power supply unit is a DC/DC converter with electrical insu-
lation between input and output and an output power of 100 W. It
has an input voltage range of 36 V DC to 312 V DC (i.e. 48 V
-25%; 250 V +25%) without any switching of ranges. The stan-
dard output voltages are +3.3 V DC (8 A), +5 V DC (16 A), +12 V
DC (3 A) and -12 V DC (0.5 A). The tolerances of the output
voltages are continuously monitored.
The input of the power supply unit 500PSM03 is protected by a
10 A / 250 V slow fuse. The current surge when energizing the
PSM03 is limited to 10 A. The use of an external miniature cir-
cuit-breaker (m.c.b.) Type S282 UC-K 6 is recommended.
There is an on/off switch on the front of the power supply unit
500PSM03, which must be in the on position when the protection
is in operation. In the OFF position, the PSU is on standby.
WARNING: A power supply unit may only be withdrawn or in-

serted when the power supply is switched off. To withdraw a
unit, turn off the switch on the power supply unit and dis-
connect the green power supply cable connector. It is not suffi-
cient to simply switch the unit off at the switch. Other modules
may only be withdrawn or inserted when the power supply unit
500PSM03 is switched off.
The power supply unit 500PSM03 has three LEDs:

Green LED: lights providing all the output voltages are within
tolerance and extinguishes in the event of a short-circuit or
overload of one or several output voltages.
Yellow LED: lights when one of a pair of redundant power
supply units has failed (corresponds to operation of the
Warning signaling relay).
3-13
Red LED: lights when one of the modules in the respective

rack (including power supply unit) has failed (i.e. not OK,
corresponds to operation of the Alarm relay).
Contacts:
1 4
2 5
3 6
Alarm: Warning:
1-3: Normal operation 4-6: Normal operation

1-2: Alarm or 4-5: Warning or
not in operation not in operation HEST 005027 C
Normally only the Alarm contact is connected.
Redundancy:
When two 500PSM03 power supply units are operating in paral-
lel, their outputs are connected via diodes such that the supply to
the protection modules is maintained should one supply unit fail.
With the exception of the contacts, the power supply unit
500PSM03 does not require any maintenance.
Front plane bus 500CUB03 (standard)

The sockets for the plug-in modules are mounted and inter-
connected on the front plane bus. The maximum capacity of
the front plane is:
2 power supply units
6 processor units (master CPU / slave CPU / communica-
tion CPU)
3 bus controller units
2 binary input/output modules
8 optical star coupler modules
3-14
Processor module Type 500CPU05
Fig. 3.14 CMP/CSP/MBA module in REB500
Two serial interfaces (8 pin RJ-45 plugs, Serial1 and Serial2), a

pushbutton (Reset) and an Ethernet LAN interface (8 pin RJ-45
plug) are located on one side of the module. There are six LEDs
on the module.
The interface marked Serial1 on the master CPU is used for con-
necting a radio clock or a GPS receiver. A modem can be con-
nected to the first bus controller module. It is not used on the
slave CPU.
The interface marked Serial2 is used on all the modules for
transferring diagnostic information.
Pin Name
1 DCD
2 RTS
3 GND
4 TxD
5 RxD
6 GND
7 CTS
8 DTR
Fig. 3.15 Pin Signal allocation for Serial1 and Serial2
3-15
An adapter cable for RJ45 to DB9 can be ordered with the ABB
order number 1MRB380081R0001.
The Ethernet interface LAN1 can be optionally utilized for con-
necting the HMI500. This option is only available on the master
CPU.
Two LEDs are integrated in the Ethernet interfaces, and flicker to
indicate data transfer.
At the bottom there are four LEDs, which indicate data transfer
on the MVB segments. On the master and slave CPUs only the
LEDs for MVB1 are activated. On the bus controller LEDs are
provided for the two bus segments - MVB1 and MVB2.
Slot Nr. 3 Slot Nr. 5
500CPU05 500CPU05
Serial 1
Serial 1
GPS/Radio Clock 4800/9600/19200Baud 8N1
(Cannot be used in parallel with a Stationsbus.)
Remote HMI (Modem) 9600Baud 8N1
Serial 2
Serial 2
LAN 1
Remote HMI via Ethernet
LAN 1
RES RES
MVB1 MVB1
MVB2 MVB2
Tx Rx Tx Rx
Fig. 3.16 Allocation of connectors for the 500CPU05 mod-

ule
3-16
Processor module Type 500CIM06
Fig. 3.17 REB500 CIM module
Two serial interfaces (8 pin RJ-45 plugs, Serial1 and Serial2),

two pushbuttons (Reset and LON Service Pin), an optical inter-
face (LON-to-IEC103) and two electrical-to-optical Ethernet LAN
interfaces (8 pin RJ-45 plugs, LAN1 and LAN2) are provided on
the module. There are ten LEDs on the module.
The interface marked Serial1 is used for IEC103 if the optical in-
terface is already being used for LON.
The interface marked Serial2 is used on all the modules for
transferring diagnostic information.
The optical interface marked LON/IEC103 is used either for LON
or IEC103. If both protocols are configured, the optical interface
is used for LON.
The Ethernet interface LAN1 is available for the connection of
the HMI500. This option is only provided on the master CPU.
The Ethernet interface LAN2 is not used in the current version.
The 500CIM06 module is fitted with a socket for inserting the
500LBI02 module needed for LON communication.
Two LEDs indicate data transfer via the LON/IEC103 interface.
Four LEDs integrated in the Ethernet interface flicker when data
is transferred.
3-17
At the bottom four LEDs indicate data transfer on the MVB seg-
ments. They are not used in the current version.
Slot Nr. 19
500CIM06
Serial 1
IEC103 9600/19200Baud 8E1
(Can be only utilised if LON is configured.)
Serial 2
LON/IEC103
Stationsbus LON or IEC103 Tx/Rx
LAN 1
Stationsbus IEC61850-8-1 optical or electrical
(100Mbit)
LAN 1
LAN 2
Provided for redundant Stationsbus
IEC61850-8-1 optical or electrical
LAN 2
LON
RES
MVB1
MVB2
Tx Rx
Fig. 3.18 Allocation of connectors for the 500CIM06 Module
Master and slave CPUs and bus controller

Since the firmware in all cases is the same, whether a
500CPU05 module acts as master or slave CPU or bus control-
ler is determined solely by the slot it is inserted in. Identical firm-
ware is loaded on all the 500CPU05, which takes on different
functions based on the inserted slot.
Rack 1 CUB03
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Function PSM CMP SCM MBA SCM CSP SCM MBA SCM CSP SCM MBA SCM CSP BIO CSP BIO CIM PSM
CSP
Rack 2 CUB03
Slot 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Function PSM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - SCM - PSM
Fig. 3.19 Functions and slots
3-18
Failure of the auxiliary supply

Capacitors are fitted in the bay units and on the backplane bus
500CUB03 of the central unit. They preserve the data stored in
the disturbance and event recorders in the case of an auxiliary
supply failure, have a capacity for 24 hours and require no main-
tenance.
Maintenance-free capacitors are also installed in the processor
module 500CPU05 in the configuration CMP, CSP or MBA to
supply the clock module. The clocks on the CSP and MBA board
are not used; however, the clock on the CMP board maintains
the REB500 date and time function in the event of an auxiliary
supply failure.
The date and time provided by the clock module are only needed
during the central unit start-up procedure to initialize time tagging
of events recorded by REB500. Should it be no longer possible
for the capacitor to maintain the function of the clock module, the
only consequence is that the absolute time tags of any events
would be incorrect the next time REB500 starts.
Star coupler module 500SCM01

The star coupler module 500SCM01 converts the electrical proc-
ess bus signals into optical signals and vice versa. Each one
provides five optical transmit/receive pairs, which are connected,
to five bay units by optical fiber cables. The transfer of data is
signaled by a yellow LED (one for each transmitter and receiver).
Both must light when the protection is in operation.
Binary I/O module 500BIO01

The binary I/O module 500BIO01 provides optocoupler inputs for
signals from the primary system process and auxiliary relays for
sending signals and commands to it. It has a complement of 12
optocoupler inputs and 9 auxiliary relay outputs. Both inputs and
outputs electrically insulate the internal electronics from the ex-
ternal circuits.
The number of I/O modules installed in the central unit is deter-
mined when engineering the specific project. A maximum of two
input/output modules can be configured.
3-19
3.3.3. Bay unit versions

The bay unit 500BU03 is used in protection systems (REB500 or
REB500sys).
Version for conventional switch panel mounting:

This version of the bay unit has a frontplate and a local HMI and
is designed for fitting into switch panel cut-outs. It is used primar-
ily for distributed REB500 systems.
Basic version with or without local HMI:

The basic version does not have a frontplate. A connector is pro-
vided for a separately mounted HMI. This version is used primar-
ily for centralized REB500 systems, because the bay units are
generally installed in a cubicle and are not visible from outside.
Basic version Basic version Version for convention
with HMI semi-flush mounting
Fig. 3.20 Bay unit alternatives
Bay unit power supply:

The auxiliary power supply is provided by an DC/DC converter
with electrically insulated input and outputs and a rated output
power of 9 W. The input voltage range is 36 V DC to 312 V DC
(i.e. 48 V 25% to 250 V 25%) without the need for switching or
adjustment.
Protecting the input of each 500BU03 by an external miniature
circuit-breaker (m.c.b.) Type S282 UC-K (2 A) is recommended.
An on/off switch is located on the front of the units and a green
LED light continuously providing the output voltages are within
tolerance. The LED extinguishes in the event of a short circuit or
overload.
3-20
Redundant auxiliary supply units are possible (option).
WARNING: The on/off switch on the power supply unit does

not isolate the unit from the input supply. Switch off the
m.c.b. to do this.
Process bus connectors:

The process bus input and output on the 500BU03 are located
above the binary outputs.
3-21
3.3.3.1. Bay unit 500BU03

A 500BU03 bay unit is designed as a single self-contained unit.
Different basic versions are available:
500BU03-1: 20 binary inputs
16 binary outputs
4 CT inputs (I1, I2, I3, I4)
5 VT inputs (U1, U2, U3, U4, U5)
Redundant power supplies
16 binary outputs
16 binary outputs
16 binary outputs
4 CT inputs (I1, I2, I3, I4 Mess.)
16 binary outputs
4 CT inputs (I1, I2, I3, I4 Mess.)
16 binary outputs
9 CT inputs (I1I9)
16 binary outputs
9 CT inputs (I1I9)

16 binary outputs
8 CT inputs (I1.. I8)
1 VT input (U1)
3-22

16 binary outputs
8 CT inputs (I1.. I8)
1 VT input (U1)

16 binary outputs
6 CT inputs (I1I6)
3 VT inputs (U1...U3)

16 binary outputs
8 CT inputs (I1I8)
3 VT inputs (U1...U3)
3-23
ABB ABB Switzerland REB500

E U I
Tx
A
I1[1A]
Tx Rx
U1 I1[5A]
1
U1 [0]
2
I1[0]
A Rx
3
U2 I2[1A]
4
U2 [0]
5
C I2[5A]
6
I2[0]
U3
7
1
U3 [0] I3[1A]
8
2
9
9
3
I3[5A]
U4
10
10
4
U4 [0] I3[0]
11
11
5
12
12
I4[1A]
6
U5
13
13
7
U5 [0] I4[5A]
14
14
8
15
15
I4[0]
9
16
10
17
11
18
12
13
14
B
15
1
2
D
H
3
4
1
5
2
HMI
3
7
4
8
5
9
6
DC
10
7
11
8
12
9
I I
13
10
14
11
0 0
15
12
R P
16
13
+ +
17
14
1
18
- -
15
2
500BU03
Process bus Voltage transformer Current transformer

1
Binary inputs Tx E U 1 I 1
A 1 OL01 U1 2
5
I1
OC01
Rx 0 0
2 2 3
OC02
3 1
4 4
4 U2 5 5
I2
5 0 0
5 6
OC03 Binary outputs
6 1 C 7
1
OC04 7
7 CR01 2 5
U3 8 I3
8 3 0 0
8 9
9 4 1
OC05 10 10
10 CR02 5 5
U4 11 I4
OC06
11 6 0 0
11 12
12 7 13
13 CR03 8
OC07 U5
14 9 14
0
OC08
15 10
CR04
16 11
CR05
12
17
OC09
18 13
CR06
B 1 14
OC10
CR07 15
2
OC11
3
OC12
4 1 D
5 2
CR08 3
6
OC13
CR09
4
7
OC14 CR10
5
8
OC15
9 6
10 7
CR11 8
11
OC16
CR12 9
12
OC17
CR13 10
13 HMI interface
OC18 H
14 11
15 12
16 CR14 Redundante
13
OC19 supply
Supply
CR15 14 R
17 1 + P 1 +
OC20
18 CR16 - -
15 2 2
Fig. 3.21 Bay unit 500BU03 (example of 4I and 5U ver-

sions)
3-24
Binary inputs and outputs on the bay unit 500BU03

Inputs.
Signal voltage 48250 V DC, 9 groups of 1 to 3 inputs. The ef-
fective pick-up voltage is set by configuring the software.
Auxiliary relay outputs (rupture current for L/R = 40 ms):
CR01CR07 Signaling contacts
max. 0.5 A at U 50 V DC
CR08CR16 Tripping contacts
The rupturing currents given below can be achieved
by externally wiring two contacts in series.
CR08CR16 Two tripping contacts in series
max. 5 A at U 50 V DC
max. 1 A at U 120 V DC
3-25
Process bus
Binary inputs Tx E
A 1 OL01
OC01
2 Rx
OC02
3
5
OC03 Binary outputs
6 1 C
OC04
7 CR01 2
8 3
9 4
OC05
10 CR02 5
OC06
11 6
12 7
13 CR03 8
OC07
14 9
OC08
15 10
CR04
16 11
CR05 12
17
OC09
18 13
CR06
B 1 14
OC10
CR07
15
2
OC11
3
OC12
4 1 D
5 2
CR08 3
6
OC13
CR09
4
7
OC14 CR10
5
8
OC15
9 6
10 7
CR11
11 8
OC16
CR12
12 9
OC17
CR13 10
13
OC18
14 11
15 12
16 CR14 13
OC19
17 CR15 14
OC20
18 CR16 15
Fig. 3.22 Binary inputs and outputs
CT and VT terminals on the 500BU03

The number of terminals for CTs and VTs depends on the type
of bay unit. The possible combinations are given in Table 3.2.
3-26
Number of CTs and VTs
CTs 4 9 8 6
VTs 5 0 1 3
Fig. 3.23 Fig. 3.24 Fig. 3.27 Fig. 3.28
Table 3.2 Number of CTs and VTs
The primaries of the input transformers have tappings for rated

currents of 1 A and 5 A. There are thus three screw terminals
per CT.
The rated voltage of the VT inputs is 200 V. The effective input
voltage is set by configuring the software. Therefore there are
only two screw terminals per VT.
VTs CTs
1
1 1 A terminal 1
5
U1 5 A terminal 2 I1
0 0
2 3
1
4 4
5
U2 5 I2
0 0
5 6
1
7 7
5
U3 8 I3
0 0
8 9
1
10 10
5
U4 11 I4
0 0
11 12
13
U5
0
14
Redundant
power supply Power supply
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
Fig. 3.23 CT/VT terminals for 4I and 5U on the 500BU03
3-27
CTs CTs
1 1
1 1 A terminal 1
5 5
2 I4 5 A terminal 2 I1
0 0
3 3
1 1
4 4
5 5
5 I5 5 I2
0 0
6 6
1 1
7 7
5 5
8 I6 8 I3
0 0
9 9
1
10
5
11 I7
0
12
13
14 I8
15
16
17 I9
18
Redundant
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
Fig. 3.24 CT terminals for 9I on the 500BU03

CTs
Stromwandler CTs
Stromwandler
1 1
1 1 A Anschluss
terminal 1
5 5
2 I4 terminal
5 A Anschluss 2 I1
0 0
3 3
1 1
4 4
5 5
5 I5 5 I2
0 0
6 6
1 1
7 7
5 5
8 I6 8 I3
0 0
9 9
1
10
5
11 I7
0
12
13
14 I8
15
VT
16
U1
0
17
Redundant
Redundante
Speisung
Speisung
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
HEST 055 006V
3-28
CTs
Stromwandler CTs
Stromwandler
1 1
1 1 A terminal
Anschluss 1
5 5
2 I4 5 A terminal
Anschluss 2 I1
0 0
3 3
1 1
4 4
5 5
5 I5 5 I2
0 0
6 6
1 1
7 7
5 5
8 I6 8 I3
0 0
9 9
VTs
10
U1
0
11
13
U2
0
14
16
U3
0
17
Redundant
Redundante
Speisung
Speisung
1 + 1 +
_ optional _
2 2
HEST 055 007V
Analog section of the 500BU03

The main task performed by the analog section is to process
nine analog input signals. The A/D converters have a range of
16 Bit and a sampling rate of 2,400 Hz per channel at a system
frequency of 50 Hz (2,880 Hz at 60 Hz). The module comprises
a microprocessor, main memory, flash program memory and
watchdog. A digital signal processor (DSP) is also included for
signal pre-processing.
NOTE: A bay unit is dealt with as a single unit. Should one fail,
the entire bay unit is replaced and not individual modules.
3-29
3.3.4. Local control unit (local HMI)

A detailed description of the local HMI is given in Section 8.2.2.
The local control unit, which forms part of every central unit and
can optionally be installed in the bay units as well, is equipped
with a four-line LCD, 3 LEDs and 6 pushbuttons. It permits all the
operations that are necessary to be carried out locally and in-
cludes an optical interface for a PC. The HMI also has 20 LEDs,
which can be assigned as necessary to output signals. The
LEDs can be configured to operate with or without latching.
The device IDs for the bay units, as well as the Ethernet address
are set by means of the local HMI (see Section 8.5.).
3.3.5. Station level control systems
Station automation and station monitoring system

By means of communication module 500CIM06, the REB500
busbar protection can be integrated in a station automation sys-
tem (SAS) or a station monitoring system (SMS).
The system supports two station bus protocols, LON and IEC
60870-5-103 (see Section 11.13. Interbay bus (IBB) connec-
tion).
Optical interface
The entire protection system can be configured, settings made
or changed and its correct operation tested using a PC. The data
in this case is transferred via a serial interface connected to an
optical reader 500OCC02 fitted to the local HMI of a central or
bay unit. For this purpose, the corresponding HMI500 software
has to be installed on the PC (see Section 4).
Optical fiber links

Two electrical-to-optical converters and 2 optical fiber cables are
required for the communication between REB500 and the PC.
Depending on the distance, cables with either plastic or glass
cores are used (see Section 11.13.).
3-30
Modem link
The PC running HMI500 can also be coupled to the REB500
protection system over long distances using a modem (see Sec-
tion 11.13.).
Remote HMI / Serial interface

In addition to the optical connectors on the control unit on the
front, the PC can also be connected to the serial interface at the
rear of the REB500 central unit. This should be used for long dis-
tance communication via either optical fiber cables or a modem
(see Section 11.13.).
For reasons of safety, only one of the three HMI connections
may be in operation at any one time, i.e. either the local connec-
tion on the front of the units (HMI), the remote communication
connector CMP at the rear or the Ethernet interface. When
REB500 is started, all the interfaces are standing by. As soon as
HMI500 is started on the PC, it establishes communication via
the interface it is connected to and the others are disabled and
remains so until the first connection is shut down (HMI500 is
closed on the PC). All the interfaces are then once again stand-
ing by and waiting for HMI500 to establish a new connection.
Both modem and optical fiber cable links are connected to the
bus controller via the connector marked Serial1 (8 pin RJ-45).
The port is configured for 9600 Baud, 8 Bit, no parity and 1 stop
Bit and cannot be changed.
Remote HMI / Ethernet interface

In addition to the optical interface on the front of the local HMI
and the serial interface at the rear of the central unit, the
REB500 protection device can also be connected to the control
PC via an Ethernet interface at the rear of the central unit. The
IP address in this case is configured with the local HMI. The de-
tailed procedure is given in Section 8.5.2. Replacing modules in
the central unit.
WARNING: For security reasons the Ethernet based HMI

should not be used over a publicly accessible network.
3-31
Built-in DHCP Server

A DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server on the
REB500 starts automatically when the IP address 192.168.0.1 is
used. This automatically assigns an IP address to the PC con-
nected via the Ethernet interface.
The REB500 is assigned the IP address 192.168.0.1 and this
has to be set on the PC (HMI) to establish communication.
3-32
3.4. Software
3.4.1. System software REBSYS

(not to be confused with the protection system REB500sys)
This software package is installed on the REB500 system proc-
essor board. It includes all the system functions and also the lo-
cal HMI (see Section 3.4.4.) and the station monitoring system
(see Section 3.6.).
There is no provision for the user to modify the system software.
REBSYS was subjected to exhaustive tests before being ap-
proved.
3.4.2. Customers database

The database was created according to the customers specifi-
cation. It is installed on the master CPU in the central unit and
for the most part can be edited using HMI500. The format is
MDB, i.e. it is an MS ACCESS database.
3.4.3. Human/machine interface program HMI500

The human/machine interface (=HMI) program HMI500 provides
convenient communication with the protection system to
view REB500 measurements and statuses
set the REB500 protection functions
configure the REB500 system
commission and maintain the REB500 system
download data to the REB500 system
control the integrated disturbance recorder
control the integrated event recorder
Detailed information on this program is given in Chapter 4 Ex-
ternal operator program (HMI500) and Chapter 5 Configuration
and settings.
3.4.4. Local human/machine interface (local HMI)

The local HMI program forms an integral part of the system soft-
ware REBSYS.
Accessed via the control unit on the central unit or a bay unit, the
local HMI software enables the following to be viewed, but for
safety reasons not changed:
3-33
current and voltage measurements

statuses of inputs and outputs
alarms
system settings
settings of the protection functions installed
The procedure for operating the local HMI is described in
Section 8.2.2.
3.4.5. Station monitoring system (SMS)

The REB500 system can be integrated in a station monitoring
system (SMS) with the aid of the communication module
500CIM06.
Refer to the description of the station monitoring system (SMS)
for further details.
3.4.6. Station automation system (SAS)

The REB500 system can be integrated in a station automation
system (SAS) with the aid of the communication module
500CIM06.
Refer to the description of the station automation system (SAS)
for further details.
3-34
3.5. Signal acquisition and processing
3.5.1. Current measurement (analog inputs)

The protection system REB500 processes the current measure-
ments digitally in the bay units. For this purpose, 48 measure-
ments a period are made of the busbar feeders currents. At a
power system frequency of 50 Hz, this corresponds to a sam-
pling rate of 2.4 kHz and at 60 Hz of 2.88 kHz. The analog/digital
converter has a range of 16 Bit.
Should a CT saturate, the signals are compensated by the digital
signal processor (DSP) according to the maximum prolongation
principle (see below). The signals then pass through a Fourier fil-
ter, which separates the real and imaginary fundamental fre-
quency components. All the other harmonics are suppressed.
These components are evaluated by all the protection functions
in the bay unit. The disturbance recorder monitors the original
non-compensated secondary current signals. The current signals
are also transferred to the central unit, which executes the bus-
bar protection function.
Maximum prolongation principle

The maximum prolongation principle is a method patented by the
manufacturer for additionally processing the current signals to
enable the protection algorithms to detect faults discriminatively
even if CTs are saturating.
Basically it uses the maximum value detected in the sampling
window should a CT saturate.
NOTE: By prolonging the maximum value, the signal is com-

pensated such that the best possible approximation of the
phase-angle and amplitude of the unsaturated signal is
achieved.
3-35
60 IN
40
I 20
-20
-40
0 10 20 30 40 ms
ta th t
to
Undistorted current signal (main CT primary)
Distorted current signal (main CT secondary)
Compensated current
Fig. 3.27 Maximum prolongation principle in the case of CT

saturation
Time t0 is the interval between the last zero crossing before the
maximum value is detected and the end of the prolongation pe-
riod. At a power system frequency of 50 Hz, this time is 12.5 ms
(at 60 Hz, 10.4 ms). The rise time from the zero crossing to the
maximum value is defined as ta. The difference between to and ta
is time th, which is then the time the maximum value in the sam-
pling window is prolonged. The longer time ta, the shorter the
maximum value is prolonged.
Example of the maximum prolongation principle applied to

the busbar protection function
High through-fault currents can cause one or more CTs to satu-
rate and could give rise to a false differential current, which, if no
precautions were taken, might be interpreted as an internal fault.
The maximum prolongation function maintains protection stability
and discrimination in the presence of CT saturation, because the
signals transferred are a good approximation of the phase-angle
and amplitude of the unsaturated signals (see Section 3.8.
Busbar protection function).
3-36
3.5.2. Voltage measurement (analog inputs, optional)

Voltages are measured essentially the same as currents with the
exception that maximum prolongation is not applied.
3.5.3. Signal acquisition (binary inputs)

Optocouplers electrically insulate all the binary inputs.
They pick up when the input voltage remains above 80% of the
rated auxiliary voltage for at least 20 ms and reset when it is be-
low 65% for longer than 20 ms.
The standard binary inputs are all equipped with anti-bounce fil-
ters. The software anti-bounce filter has no influence on a sig-
nals time stamp, i.e. the time stamp is determined by the first
occurrence of the signal at the input of the optocoupler.
Time stamp
Opto-coupler input signal
Internal REB500 signal after

the anti-bounce filter
Anti-bounce
filter time
The anti-bounce time for the special signals below is set to the
minimum of 2 ms instead of the standard time (normally 20 ms)
set generally for the system:
All disturbance recorder input signals 167nn_Start DR_x
and 36705_General Start DR
Breaker failure input signals 137nn_Start BFP_Lx and
13705_External Start BFP
31805_External release BB zone and 11605_External re-
lease Trip
The signals 1151011525_Supervison aux. voltage_x are
set to a fixed anti-bounce time of 10 ms.
WARNING: Should several signals be configured for a common

optocoupler input and one of them have a minimum anti-
bounce time of 2 ms, then 2 ms applies for all the signals.
This kind of configuration should be avoided wherever possible.
3-37
A distinction is made between input signals with a slow response

and those with a fast response. Internally, REB500 processes
the process bus signals in fast and slow cycles according to their
priority.
Signal response:
slow: These signals must be maintained at the binary input
for at least 128 ms plus the anti-bounce time and are
processed by the slow cycle.
fast: These signals must be maintained at the binary input
for at least 8 ms plus the anti-bounce time and are
processed by the fast cycle.
3.5.4. Signal outputs (binary)

The bay units generate two kinds of binary output signals, trip-
ping commands and logic signals. The central unit only gener-
ates logic signals.
Binary output signals are generated by the processors in the
central and bay units as determined by signal logics.
NOTE: Tripping commands are written in capital letters to dis-

tinguish them from logic signals.
Output signals can be assigned to auxiliary output relays to ac-

tuate either a tripping or signaling circuit. As a safety precaution,
it is impossible to assign tripping commands and logic signals to
the same output relay, i.e. tripping commands can only be com-
bined with other tripping commands and logic signals with other
logic signals. For example, the signals 21305_Trip and
21105_EXTERNAL TRIP cannot be configured to operate the
same output contact.
3-38
3.5.5. Signal designations
Busbar protection and standard options

The REB500 configuration assigns the signals to predefined in-
puts and outputs.
Signals are designated according to the following convention:
Categories abbreviations
Bay unit BU_
Central unit CU_
General signals SYS_
Busbar protection signals BBP_
Breaker failure signal BFP_
End fault protection signal EFP_
Time-overcurrent protection signal OCDT_
Disturbance recorder signal DR_
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection signal PDF_
Low-voltage check feature UV_
Input I
Output O
Internal system signal SYS_INT
Table 3.3 Abbreviations used for the different signal

categories
Function abbreviations
Busbar protection BBP
Breaker failure protection BFP
End fault protection EFP
Time-overcurrent protection OCDT
Disturbance recorder DR
Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection PDF
Low-voltage check feature UV
Table 3.4 Abbreviations used for the various functions
3-39
Category Name Upper and lower case rules

number category
1 Signal First letter upper case, other letters of the
first word lower case.
Subsequent words conform to national
upper and lower case conventions.
Functions such as BBP are always in
upper case letters.
Statuses such as Open have an upper
case first letter and the remainder written
in lower case characters.
Phase designations are written in upper
case letters, e.g. L1.
Parameters such as t1 are lower case.
2 Input signals The same rules as for category 1.
that can initi-
Secondary effects are in upper case let-
ate tripping
ters, e.g. TRIP.
3 Direct trip- All words and letters in upper case char-
ping signals acters
4 Output sig- As for category 1, in addition the effect is
nals used for written completely in upper case charac-
transfer trip- ters.
ping
Table 3.5 Relationship between category numbers and sig-

nal names
3-40
Syntax rules for signal names (examples)

Input Start BFP L1_1 Name category 1
1. Effect 2. Function 3. Phase 4. Order

Output BFP TRIP L1 Name category 1
1. Function 2. Effect 3. Phase (target)

Input Ext TRIP BB-Zone Name category 2
1. Effect 2. Location
(e.g. Zone)
Output BFP TRIP Name category 3
1. Function 2. Effect
Output BBP Remote-TRIP Name category 4
1. Function 2. Target 3. Effect
Table 3.6 Signal name syntax
Category Protection Signal function Sequence

function number
1 BU_I 0 INT 1 TRIP 05
2 BU_O 1 SYS 2 Block command 10
3 CU_I 2 BBP 3 Tripping Signal 15
4 CU_O 3 BFP 4 Blocking Signal 20
5 SYS 4 EFP 5 Bus image etc.
5 OCDT 6 Control
6 DR 7 Start
7 PDF 8 General Alarm
8 UV
Example of a signal number: 2 3 3 05 = BFP Trip t1
Table 3.7 Significance of the signal number digits
A complete list and the definitions of all the signals are given in
Chapter 5.
3-41
Bay protection options (REB500sys)

The following designations apply to the additional signals for the
bay protection function in REB500sys.
211105_DIST Trip CB L1
6 digit number Function designation Designation
IEC ANSI/IEEE Function Name

symbol No. designation
I> 51 OCINV Inverse time overcurrent
I> / I< 51 OCSTD Definite time over- and under-current
I 67 DIROCDT Directional overcurrent definite time
I 67 DIROCINV Directional inverse time overcurrent
3I0> 51N I0INV Inverse time ground fault over-current
U> / U< 59 / 27 OVSTD Definite time over- and under-voltage
SC 25 SYNC Synchrocheck
Z< 21 DIST Distance
AR 79 AR Autoreclosure
3I0 67N DIREFGND Sensitive Directional ground fault for

grounded systems
I>> 50 OCINST Peal value over and undercurrent protec-
tion
49 TH Thermal overload
I 87T DIFTRA Transformer differential protection
-- (i3ph) -- CHKI3PH Three-phase current plausibility
-- (u3ph) -- CHKU3PH Three-phase voltage plausibility
LOGIC Logic
DELAY
Table 3.8 List of bay protection functions
3-42
The previously five digit numbers have been extended to six dig-
its for the bay protection signals. The protection function is rep-
resented by two digits.
Category Protection function Signal function Sequence Nr.

1 BU_I 11 DIST 1 TRIP 05
2 BU_O 12 OCSTD 2 Block command 10
3 CU_I 13 OCINV 3 Tripping signal 15
4 CU_O 14 DIROCDT 4 Blocking signal 20
5 SYS 15 DIROCINV 5 Bus image etc.
16 OVSTD 6 Control
17 SYNC 7 Start
18 AR 8 General alarm
20 DIREFGND
21 I0INV
22 LOGIC
23 DELAY
24 CHKI3PH
25 CHKU3PH
26 OCINST
28 TH
29 DIFTRA
Example Signal number: 2 11 1 05_DIST Trip CB R
Table 3.9 Example of signal numbers
A complete list and the definitions of all the signals are given in
Chapter 5.
3-43
3.6. Self-supervision
To ensure the maximum possible reliability, the REB500 is
equipped with a self-supervision function, which enables it to re-
spond quickly to any hardware (HW) or software (SW) errors.
Some, such as an error in transmission via the process bus, only
affect a single data set and are generally of a transient nature. A
serious error would mean, for example, that reliable operation
could no longer be guaranteed. It is important to detect errors of
this kind and to take the appropriate action, which can include
blocking the protection functions and tripping outputs.
The self-supervision and diagnostic function ensures the high
availability of the busbar protection. Errors and defects are im-
mediately detected and signaled so that corrective action can be
taken without delay.
The self-supervision software forms part of the REBSYS system
software (see Section 3.4.1.).
3.6.1. Diagnostic program

The task of the diagnostic program is to manage (start and stop)
all the other applications (e.g. protection functions and binary in-
puts and outputs) and process the data of the self-supervision
function.
The system SW is object oriented, i.e. it is divided into sub-
systems that perform specific applications (protection functions,
binary inputs and outputs, database controller etc.). The struc-
ture of the diagnostic program reflects the structure and distrib-
uted architecture of the protection system, i.e. it is also dis-
tributed between every module of the central unit and bay units
having a microprocessor.
3-44
Higher levels
Enabling Status
signal
Intermediate level of Application

diagnostic program status
Enabling
signal
Status
Status Enabling
signal
Lower level (1) ... Lower level (n)
Fig. 3.28 Principle of the self-supervision system
Each level in the structure of the diagnostic program reports the

status of the applications at the same or lower levels to the next
level up. Enabling (release) signals are distributed from top to
bottom. As soon as the diagnostic program detects a critical
fault, the corresponding status is reported upwards and the
downwards distribution of the enabling signal blocked. The pro-
tection system thus propagates the blocking of the enabling sig-
nal to block all tripping outputs. In the case of critical faults, the
protection system is shut down and restarted.
3-45
3.6.2. REB500/REB500sys self-supervision system

The REB500/ REB500sys self-supervision system covers soft-
ware and hardware and includes in addition to the internal sig-
nals the monitoring of the external input values such as current
values (CT supervision) and the positions of the auxiliary con-
tacts on isolators and circuit-breakers (busbar replica).
Supervision of the external input circuits
CT
supervision
Busbar replica
supervision
Plausibility check
Hardware supervision
Software supervision
Self-supervision/diagnostics
1 See Section 3.6.2.1

5 See Section 3.8.4
Fig. 3.29 Structure of the REB500/ REB500sys self-
supervision system
3-46
3.6.2.1. Software supervision
Programming language in safety systems

The choice of program development method and programming
language is extremely important for digital protection systems.
The digital busbar protection REB500 was developed using the
programming language Ada which was especially written for
real-time and safety applications.
Apart from special features that enhance the reliability of the re-
sulting program (e.g. abstraction principle and strict data type
rules), Ada facilitates exception processing which means that
critical situations, which occur while the system is busy with
normal program execution are detected and immediately proc-
essed.
Supervising the applications

The diagnostic program can control applications by detecting
status changes (e.g. initialization and stopping at the right in-
stant). The applications report their statuses (e.g. initialization
finished, processing finished or error detected). Using status
changes to supervise the applications means that an application
that has been started must report back to the diagnostic program
within a given time.
A hard-wired watchdog per microprocessor, which the programs
have to reset at regular intervals supervises the entire SW.
Should a watchdog not be reset, the watchdog timer times out
and initiates a hardware reset.
Supervision of data transfer via the process bus

A number of supervised criteria ensure the integrity of the data
transferred via the process bus. All data transferred via the proc-
ess bus are subject to a cyclic redundancy check according to
the TC57 telecontrol algorithm. Thus in a block of up to 64 Bit,
five Bit errors can be detected. Data are also processed using
the Manchester code which further raises the standard of secu-
rity.
3-47
Supervision of the protection functions

The operation of every application is synchronized and a time
stamp is attached to all analog signal samples and binary sig-
nals. Before determining a differential current, a check is per-
formed to make sure the samples have the same time stamp.
Should this not be the case, the samples concerned are not
evaluated.
Processing and supervising the binary inputs

Every binary input is equipped with its own anti-bounce software.
As a rule, the status of a signal is considered valid for processing
if it persists 20 ms after its first incidence.
The binary inputs are also supervised with respect to oscilla-
tions. If the status of an input changes five times in 100 ms, the
input is marked as invalid. In this case, the signal is processed
such that the reliability of the system is assured, i.e. invalid
blocking inputs are assumed to be active.
Enabling binary outputs

To achieve the maximum reliability of the system, every tripping
command has an associated enabling signal and should the di-
agnostics program detect an HW or SW error, it suppresses the
enabling signals for the binary outputs, i.e. the tripping outputs
are inhibited.
Error messages in the event list

All errors and defects detected by the self-supervision function
are processed by the diagnostics program and recorded as
events. These are classified as major errors if the proper op-
eration of the protection functions can no longer be guaranteed.
In such cases, the system is automatically restarted. All the out-
put channels are blocked, the protection devices are no longer
standing by and the green LEDs on the local control units flash.
Error messages reported by HMI500 in Section 9.2.4. lists the
possible events recorded by the diagnostics program.
Errors that do not endanger the proper operation of the protec-
tion functions are classified as minor errors.
3-48
Error messages generated by HMI500

The protection system errors that are displayed in a HMI500 win-
dow are described in Table 9.13 Error messages generated by
HMI500. Some can be rectified by restarting either the operator
program or the protection system.
Starting or restarting the system

When the self-supervision function or the diagnostics program
restarts the system or a part of it, the procedure is signaled on
the local control unit. The blocked status of the system is sig-
naled by the flashing yellow LED on all the units and on the HMI.
While the system is starting, all the LEDs flash and the SW ap-
plications are indicated by a designation (e.g. MPL, TIM etc.).
The successful start-up of the system can be seen from the fact
that the main menu is displayed on all the units and that the sig-
nal 41810_In service is set.
3.6.2.2. Hardware supervision
Supervising the auxiliary supply

The power supply units in the central and bay units are designed
for an input voltage in the range 36 V DC to 312 V DC. The four
output voltages (rated +3.3 V, +5 V and 12 V) are supervised
with respect to their permissible variations. An auxiliary supply
voltage that is out of tolerance counts as a major error, i.e. the
protection system is shut down and restarted.
Supervision of the analog circuits

There are duplicate analog circuits between the secondaries of
the input CTs and, where configured, the input VTs and the A/D
converters which supervise each other. A discrepancy between
them is detected by the analog circuit supervision function, which
then blocks the respective bay unit.
3-49
Analog-to-digital (A/D) converters

To supervise the accuracy of the A/D converters and the associ-
ated components, they are also made to convert reference volt-
ages (7.5 V and 0 V) each time they convert the analog signals.
The resulting digital values of the reference voltages are then
compared with respect to permissible upper and lower limits.
Microprocessor program and main memories

All main memories are tested by writing and then reading a test
pattern.
Supervision of the tripping relay coils

Each of the tripping relays in a bay unit is fitted with a circuit for
supervising the integrity of the tripping relay coil.
Parts not covered by the self-supervision function

It is impossible to supervise all parts of the protection chain, e.g.
the binary input circuits. It is also advisable to install an external
trip circuit supervision system.
3-50
3.6.2.3. Plausibility check

As was described in Section 3.6.2.2 in the paragraph headed
Supervision of the analog circuits, all analog inputs of all the
bay units are supervised. If such supervision detects a discrep-
ancy, it blocks the respective bay unit. This is performed locally
and is complemented by a plausibility check carried out by the
central unit on the entire system which includes all the zones of
the busbar protection (BBP) application. This involves evaluating
the current changes taking place in all the bay units. The plausi-
bility check is based on the fact that at least two feeders must
have a change in current flow for a real primary fault condition
(see Fig.3.30).
Bay units without change of current
Bay units with change of current
Fig.3.30 Plausibility check releases BBP-TRIP
The busbar protection is not permitted to trip if this condition is

not fulfilled (see Fig.3.31).
Bay units without change of current
Bay units with change of current
Fig.3.31 Plausibility check blocks BBP-TRIP
3-51
There arrre situations and operating conditions in which the

plausibility check is bypassed, i.e. it bears no influence on the
tripping decision by the busbar protection.
Such situations and operating conditions are:
The protection zone comprises only a single bay unit, or all

other bay units of this protection zone are not conducting any
current (current below 0.075 x In) (see Fig.3.32).
Bay units not conducting any current (current < 0.075 x In)
Bay unit with change of current
Fig.3.32 Plausibility check is bypassed (no influence to BBP-TRIP)
Approx. 400 ms after the number of current measurements

assigned to a protection zone has changed (change of
breaker/ isolator position or blocking of coupler measurement
see Section 3.8.7.1.2).
As long as REB500/REB500sys system is in the Test mode

(see Section 4.5.5.1).
NOTE: When testing a REB500/REB500sys system by injecting

currents, the plausibility check has no influence to the test pro-
viding a busbar protection zone only has a single bay unit con-
nected to it. However, if more than one bay unit is connected to
a zone, REB500/REB500sys should be switched to the Test
mode for the duration of the test. The plausibility check then
cannot falsify the test results.
3-52
3.7. Basic functions of the protection system

Those functions that always form part of the protection system
are described in the following sections.
Some things influence several protection functions.
3.7.1. Event memory

The busbar protection includes an event memory for each indi-
vidual unit (central unit and bay units) in which changes in the
statuses of binary signal are recorded. The event memories
have a capacity for 100 events in bay units and 1000 events in
the central unit. The user can select whether the oldest event
should be overwritten (ring register) or no further events re-
corded when the memory is full.
A time stamp (date and time with an accuracy of 1 ms), a text
defined using the operator program and a status (set or reset)
are attached to every event. Individual texts can be entered for
each status.
Generally, one event is configured for every input and output, but
events can also be assigned to optocoupler inputs or relay out-
puts.
A central unit signal can only be stored in the event memory in
the central unit, while a bay unit signal can be stored in either the
event memory in the central unit or in the bay unit or in both.
When a PC running HMI500 is connected, the events can be up-
loaded from the protection to the PC. Events stored in the central
unit can only be read when connected to the central unit and
events stored in bay units when connected to the respective bay
unit.
Events that are no longer needed in the PC can be deleted ei-
ther individually or collectively in marked groups.
3.7.2. Disturbance recorder

A disturbance recorder is integrated in every bay unit of the stan-
dard REB500, which records the current measurements and up
to 32 binary input and output signals during a period of 1.5 s
(see Sections 4.5.2.7. and 5.3.9.).
3-53
Additional disturbance recorder functionality (e.g. supervision of

voltages or longer recording period) is optionally possible (see
Section 11.6.).
3.7.3. Intertripping/transfer tripping

The intertripping system establishes an image of the busbar con-
figuration and performs essentially two tasks:
1. The assignment of analog measurements to the protection
zones of the busbar protection function (assignment is re-
freshed every 8 ms, i.e. fast part, fast signal)
2. Determines the tripping logic according to protection zones
for the protection functions
busbar protection (the zone containing the fault)
end zone protection (zone with the end zone fault)
breaker failure protection (zone with the defective circuit-
breaker)
enabling tripping (external enabling signal, low-voltage
check feature)
intertripping
Example:
Fault on busbar 1 of double busbars (see Fig. 3.2)

1. Only those feeders connected to busbar 1 are assigned to
the measuring system of busbar 1. The assignment of the
feeders is carried out by the intertripping system, which
evaluates the positions of the isolators.
2. The measuring system on busbar 1 detects the internal fault
and issues a tripping command for busbar 1 to the intertrip-
ping system.
The intertripping system knows from the positions of the iso-
lators, which feeders are connected to busbar 1 and the trip-
ping command to the circuit-breakers of all those feeders with
isolators closed onto busbar 1.
3-54
It is thus extremely important for the correct isolator positions to

be reported to the protection system (see Section 3.7.4.).
The intertripping system also detects when protection zones are
connected together (e.g. both feeder isolators closed, see Sec-
tion 3.8.7.1.3.).
3.7.3.1. Busbar image

The busbar image is based on a topological principle, i.e.
REB500 only includes topological items that are necessary from
the point of view of protection. It starts with a busbar section and
checks all its electrical connections and constructs a protection
zone bounded by the following items:
circuit-breaker/CT pairs
bus-tie breakers
CT/feeder pairs
feeder
This procedure is repeated until all the sections of the busbar
have been determined.
Topological items are:
busbars
isolators and longitudinal isolators
circuit-breakers
CTs
bus-tie breaker CTs
bus-tie breakers
feeders
connections
3-55
3
6 7
1 IA IB 1
1 II A II B 1
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
Protection zone
Protection zone
4 4 4
5
5 5
Feeder Bus-tie breaker Feeder
1 Busbar (protection) zones

2 Isolators
3 Longitudinal isolators
4 Circuit-breakers
5 CTs
6 Busbars
7 Connection point HEST 005034 C
Fig. 3.33 Example of double busbars with longitudinal isola-

tors
Fig. 3.34 Station diagram used by REB500
The possibilities and advantages of a busbar image, i.e. an inter-

tripping system, based on the topological principle are illustrated
for 1 breaker and duplex schemes in Section 11.16.
3.7.4. Isolator and circuit-breaker positions

The necessity for correct isolator positions is explained in Sec-
tion 3.7.3.
3-56
It is, however also necessary to know the statuses of the circuit-

breakers that have been configured. The statuses (positions) of
the circuit-breakers can influence the following protection func-
tions:
1. Busbar protection (see Section 3.8.)
2. End zone protection:
The end zone protection function is blocked when the circuit-
breaker is closed. Should signals be incorrectly wired such
that an open signal is generated when the circuit-breaker is
in fact closed, there is a likelihood of mal-operation in the
event of a fault on the power system.
NOTE: Where CB positions signals are configured as inputs, it

is extremely important for the CB Close command to be cor-
rectly connected (see Section 3.8.7.4., CB CLOSE command
(manual close signal)).
The statuses of the auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-

breakers reflect the statuses of the latter (CLOSED or OPEN).
Each of these statuses is represented by an independent signal
(one for CLOSED and one for OPEN).
The image of the isolators is refreshed every 128 ms and the
one for the circuit-breakers every 8 ms.
WARNING: Where during inspection or maintenance the

statuses of isolators or circuit-breakers are simulated either by a
maintenance input or external jumpers, the system will respond
according to the simulated statuses of isolators and circuit-
breakers.
Therefore take care when resorting to such manipulations!
3.7.4.1. Supervising isolator and circuit-breaker statuses

A supervision algorithm detects the presence of the auxiliary
supply. To be correct, it has to be measured at either one or the
other, i.e. corresponding to CLOSED or OPEN. An alarm is gen-
erated, if after a preset delay either both are missing or both pre-
sent.
3-57
The supervision algorithm detects the following faults in the iso-

lator and circuit-breaker return confirmation circuits:
Failure of the auxiliary supply in the return confirmation cir-
cuits (e.g. tripped miniature circuit-breaker)
Undefined status of the main isolator contacts (e.g. mechani-
cal defect)
Wiring error
Undefined status due to incorrect simulation
NOTE: The supervision system cannot detect exchanged

CLOSED and OPEN signals.
This condition may be detected by the differential current super-
vision function (see Section 3.8.4.).
3.7.4.2. Auxiliary contacts

A potentially-free N/O and N/C contact must be provided for
each isolator and circuit-breaker. The N/O contact signals that
the isolator or circuit-breaker is CLOSED and the N/C contact
that it is OPEN.
NOTE: The switching sequence and wiring are given in Section

7.5.8. Checking the isolator and circuit-breaker auxiliary con-
tacts.
3-58
3.7.4.3. Evaluating the isolator and circuit-breaker statuses

The isolator and circuit-breaker statuses are evaluated as fol-
lows:
Return confirmation Return confirmation Isolator/CB image

that isolator/CB that isolator/CB
CLOSED OPEN
inactive inactive Last status retained and
delayed for the bus image
of busbar protection
- isolator alarm
- switch inhibit signal
inactive active OPEN
active inactive CLOSED
active active CLOSED
and delayed
- isolator alarm
- switch inhibit signal
An active CB CLOSE signal (CB CLOSE command) forces the circuit-
breakers into the CLOSED position.
Fig. 3.35 Evaluating isolator and circuit-breaker statuses
3.7.4.4. Isolator alarm

If the isolator and circuit-breaker supervision function detects an
error, it is signaled on the local HMI and also via the output sig-
nal Isolator alarm after the set signal delay.
3.7.4.5. Delay
Isolators require a certain time to operated and while they are in
motion, the relationship between the status signals and therefore
the integrity of the isolator image may be briefly disturbed due to
the different points at which the auxiliary contacts are actuated.
As this is quite normal, an isolator alarm should not be gener-
ated and therefore the alarm has to be delayed.
3.7.4.6. Blocking by the isolator alarm

If considered necessary, the isolator alarm can be arranged (set)
to block the protection. There are two alternative settings:
Block protection
Operation of the busbar protection and the intertripping sys-
tem is completely blocked.
3-59
Discriminative blocking (preferred alternative)

Operation of the busbar protection and the intertripping sys-
tem is only blocked for the section of busbar (protection
zone) concerned.
3.7.4.7. Switch inhibit

If the isolator alarm was initiated by an isolator or circuit-breaker
that at the time determined the assignment of protection zones,
the Switch inhibit signal is also set.
WARNING: While the Switch inhibit signal is active, it is rec-

ommended to avoid operating isolators or circuit-breakers in the
station. On no account is it permitted to operate an isolator
or circuit-breaker in the bay from which the alarm origi-
nates. This is because the last isolator status is retained in the
bus image of busbar protection, which therefore would no longer
correspond to the actual state of the station and would falsify
the intertripping system.
1. A false differential current may result, which if the isolator
alarm is not configured to block the protection would cause
mal-operation of the protection.
2. The incorrect control of the intertripping logic means that in
the event of a fault the wrong circuit-breakers are tripped.
The Switch inhibit signal is not set, however, if the isolator or

circuit-breaker concerned does not determine the assignment of
protection zones. Fig. 3.36 shows an example for a bus-tie
breaker. Isolators Q1, Q2, Q10 and Q20 are open and therefore
the bus-tie breaker Q0 is not assigned to a protection zone and
of no consequence for the circuit-breaker image.
Q11
Q21
Q2 Q1 Q20 Q10
Q0
Fig. 3.36 Circuit-breaker image of no consequence if the

isolators are open
3-60
3.7.4.8. Acknowledging the isolator alarm

Fig. 3.37 shows the responses of the signals in the event of an
isolator alarm and switch inhibit.
The isolator alarm is reset and the blocking of the protection can-
celled by applying a signal to the input Accept bus image
alarm. The signal Switch inhibit stays active.
If it is not acknowledged, the signal Isolator alarm is reset and
blocking cancelled automatically should the isolators and the cir-
cuit-breakers adopt correct statuses.
NOTE: If the isolator alarm is set due to the failure of the auxil-
iary supply for the return confirmation circuit (e.g. m.c.b. trip or
deliberately switched off for maintenance), it may be acknowl-
edged. Providing no switching operations are performed on the
feeder, a hazardous situation cannot arise because the last
status is retained for busbar protection (see Section 3.7.4.3.).
WARNING: If the isolator alarm is set due to an undefined

status of the main isolator contact (e.g. a mechanical defect),
a wiring error or incorrect simulation, station operating
guidelines must specify whether the protection should be
blocked (danger of failing to trip) or be reset (danger of mal-
operation).
Delay
Image supervision defined undefined defined
Isolator alarm
Switch inhibit
Protection blocked
(if safe)
Acknowledge
isolator alarm
Fig. 3.37 Signal responses for an isolator alarm and switch

inhibit
3-61
3.7.4.9. Note on isolators and circuit-breakers

Where the REB500 station image includes an isolator or a cir-
cuit-breaker and the isolator or circuit-breaker return confirma-
tions are not configured as binary inputs, the respective switch is
considered to be closed. This only applies to active (unmasked)
bays.
3.7.5. REB500 system blocking design

Certain central and bay unit input signals can directly influence
output signals. The REB500 blocking system can be seen from
the following diagram.
3-62
29405_BP blocked
19205_Block BP
7) BP
23405_BFP blocked
23335_Trip by BFP
13205_Block BFP
BFP
23105_BFP TRIP
23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
24405_EFP blocked
14205_Block EFP
EFP 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
25405_OCDT blocked
15210_Block OCDT
OCDT 25105_OCDT TRIP
27405_PDF blocked
17205_Block PDF
PDF 27105_PDF TRIP
11605_External release trip
22405_BBP blocked
21110_TRIP
11205_Block SP BBP
11105_External TRIP
11210_Block output relays 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
39205_Block BP
Currents
Intertrip
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
35220_Block OCDT
37205_Block PDF
32205_Block BBP BBP ITT

31205_Block SP
31210_Block output relays
31805_External release BB zone
31105_External TRIP BB zone
HEST 985017 C
Fig. 3.38 REB500 blocking system
NOTE: When signal 31210_Block output relays is activated,

the last status of all the protection function outputs is retained.
3-63
Legend:
1. Default value 1 if the input or function is not configured.
2. The output is blocked when Block output relays is active
and signal 2) on HMI500 is configured for blocking.
3. Blocked by isolator or differential current alarm (providing
correspondingly configured via HMI500).
4. Protection function disabled.
5. CTs line side: transfer tripping
CTs busbar side: busbar intertripping
6. Detected automatically by the software when, for example,
the CB is bridged.
7. Blocking the bay protection does not block the protection
function itself, but only the logical outputs of the bay protec-
tion functions (see Section 12.1.), i.e. although blocked
measurements are still displayed and trips signaled.
An input can affect the output signal as follows (see Fig. 3.39
and Fig. 3.40):
B The signal is not changed (retained) providing it was configured
for blocking.
E The signal is not changed (retained).
F Signal enabled (trip interlocked by enabling signal).
K Blocks providing this blocking function were configured using
HMI500.
M Logic signal
P Partially blocked, i.e. the busbar protection does not issue any
tripping commands or signals. Other functions (BFP, EFP),
which can also set this output, are not affected by the blocking
signal.
S The signal is set.
Z The signal is either reset and blocked or simply blocked if it was
not already blocked when the blocking signal was generated.
3-64
NOTE: When either signal "19205_Block BP" or "39205_Block

BP" is active, all the bay protection output signals are set to
inactive.
Internal processing of the protection functions continues and
therefore measurements and starting and tripping signals are
still accessible on the local HMI.
Response in the event of bay unit failure

The response of the protection functions in the event of a bay
unit failing depends on the status of the isolators.
If at the instant of failure all the isolators are open, i.e. the cur-
rent is not assigned to a measuring unit, an isolator alarm is
generated immediately and, depending on the system configura-
tion, the protection zone is blocked (setting: everything blocked
or discriminative blocking) or the busbar protection continues to
operate (setting: remain in operation).
If, on the other hand, one or several isolators are closed at the
instant of the failure, i.e. the current is being measured, the pro-
tection zone concerned is immediately blocked and the signals
Isolator alarm and Switch inhibit activated.
3-65
Input Output
Blocking inputs Alarms Enable
BU CU CU BU CU CU
31805_External release BP zone

Differential current alarm

31230_Block BB zone
15210_Block OCDT
35220_Block OCDT
32205_Block BBP
17205_Block PDF
37205_Block PDF
13205_Block BFP
14205_Block EFP
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
11205_Block SP
19205_Block BP
31205_Block SP
39205_Block BP
Isolator alarm
B E P Z F 41305_Trip BP zone
B 41310_Trip transferred
S B S 41405_SP blocked
S S B S K K 41415_BB zone blocked
B 41410_Output relay blocked
B S 41505_Isolator alarm
B 41805_Alarm
B 41810_In service
E B E S 41815_Differential current alarm
B 41825_Inspection/maintenance
B S 41830_Switch inhibit
B 41835_Test generator active
E B E F 42305_BBP trip
E B E F 42310_BBP trip L0
S B S K K 42405_BBP blocked
Z B Z F 43305_BFP trip t1
Z B Z F 43310_BFP trip t2
S S B S F 43405_BFP blocked
Z B Z F 44305_EFP trip
S S B S F 44405_EFP blocked
Z B Z F 45305_OCDT trip
S S B S F 45405_OCDT blocked
Z B Z F 45805_OCDT start
Z B Z F 47305_PDF trip
S S B S F 47405_PDF blocked
B 48805_Voltage criterion
S B S 49405_BP blocked
Fig. 3.39 Central unit blocking system
3-66
Input Output
Blocking inputs Alarms Enable
BU CU CU BU CU BU
31805_External release BP zone


312230_Block BB zone
15210_Block OCDT
35220_Block OCDT
17205_Block PDF
32205_Block BBP
37205_Block PDF
13205_Block BFP
14205_Block EFP
33210_Block BFP
34215_Block EFP
11205_Block SP
19205_Block BP
31205_Block SP
39205_Block BP
Isolator alarm
Z B Z B 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
Z B Z Z B P P F Z 21110_TRIP
Z B Z Z B P Z P F Z 21115_REMOTE TRIP
Z B Z Z B P P F Z 21305_Trip
S B S S B 21405_SP blocked
S S 21410_Output relays blocked
B B 21805_In service
B B 21815_Inspection/maintenance
B S S B S Z 22405_BBP blocked
Z B Z Z B Z 23105_BFP TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 23305_BFP trip t1
Z B Z Z B Z 23310_BFP trip t2
Z B Z Z B Z 23315_BFP TRIP L1
B B 23330_Trip transferred
Z B Z Z B Z 23335_Trip by BFP
S B S S B S 23405_BFP blocked
Z B Z Z B Z 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 24305_EFP trip
S B S S B S 24405_EFP blocked
Z B Z Z B Z 25105_OCDT TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 25305_OCDT trip
S B S S B S 25405_OCDT blocked
B B 26805_DR ready
B B 26810_DR memory full
B B 26815_DR recording
B B 26820_DR record available
Z B Z Z B Z 27105_PDF TRIP
Z B Z Z B Z 27305_PDF trip
S B S S B Z 27405_PDF blocked
B B 28805_Voltage criterion
B S B S 29405_BP blocked
Fig. 3.40 Bay unit blocking system
3-67
3.7.6. Bay unit stand-alone mode

In the event of a failure of the central unit or an optical fiber ca-
ble, a bay unit continues to perform the local breaker failure, end
fault and time overcurrent protection and disturbance recorder
functions. This, however, is an emergency mode subject to limi-
tations:
Since there is no communication with the central unit, inter-
tripping is impossible.
Operation of HMI500 running on a PC connected to the bay
unit and the local HMI is limited and they take longer to re-
spond. Events, disturbance recorder records, the binary in-
puts and outputs and currents and voltages can be viewed.
Emergency 500BU03 operation

The 500BU03 can also start without the central unit in an emer-
gency mode. The settings last used are retained. The bay pro-
tection is fully functional.
Blocking signals previously set by the central unit are main-
tained, but can be reset using the local HMI.
In the emergency mode, the time is held at its value when a
bay unit is switched off. Upon restarting in the emergency mode,
the internal time resumes from the value it was held at.
When communication is re-established, a bay unit resumes nor-
mal operation without having to be restarted.
A 500BU03 bay unit that is part of REB500sys can also be
started in a stand-alone mode. This may be necessary, for ex-
ample, when adding new feeders (see Section 7.7.2.).
3.7.7. Enabling the tripping command

For special applications, tripping commands can be interlocked
by enabling signals.
Special applications of this kind are described in Section 11.9.
3.7.8. Inspection and maintenance

Provision is made for adapting the protection system to suit spe-
cial inspection and maintenance conditions. This is described in
Section 11.11.
3-68
3.7.9. Time synchronization
Synchronizing using a minute impulse

A synchronizing impulse per minute can be applied to a binary
input on the central unit (signal 31825_Time minute synchr.).
Minute impulses are only processed when they are received at a
rate of 1 min 50 ms. An error message is generated should this
not be the case and the system switches over to the internal
REB500 clock. Valid minute impulses correct the internal clock
by a maximum of 30 seconds.
Minute impulses are normally used to improve accuracy when
synchronizing via HMI500.
Synchronizing using a second impulse

A synchronizing impulse per second can be applied to a binary
input on the central unit (signal 31830_Time second synchr.).
Second impulses are only processed when they are received at
a rate of 1 s 50 ms. An error message is generated should this
not be the case and the system switches over to the internal
REB500 clock. Valid second impulses correct the internal clock
by a maximum of 0.5 seconds.
Second impulses are normally used to improve accuracy when
synchronizing via LON or IEC60870-5-103.
Synchronizing via a LON IBB

There are three alternatives for synchronizing via the LON inter-
bay bus:
Clock with warning

A standard method of synchronization, which initially was in-
tended LON. Accuracy can be increased by using the one sec-
ond impulse rate.
VATS bit pattern / VATS pulse

Method of synchronization achieving the high accuracy of 1 ms.
VATS bit pattern is the standard method used.
See Section 11.13. Interbay bus (IBB) connections.
3-69
Synchronization via an IEC60870-5-103 IBB

The system supports synchronization via an IEC60870-5-103 in-
terbay bus. Accuracy can be increased by using the one second
impulse rate.
Should no time telegram be received for more than 60 seconds,
an error message is generated and the internal time set to inva-
lid.
See Section 11.13. Interbay bus (IBB) connection.
Synchronization by HMI500
The time is entered using HMI500. Accuracy can be increased
by using the one minute impulse rate.
Synchronization by radio clock or GPS

Synchronization by radio clock or GPS is achieved by entering a
Meinberg time telegram at serial interface Serial1 on the main
processor board. The radio clock or GPS receiver must be ca-
pable of transmitting a telegram of this kind.
See Section 11.15. Synchronization using GPS.
3-70
3.8. Busbar protection function

The REB500 busbar protection operates according to the differ-
ential protection principle. It detects and trips phase and earth
faults in MV, HV and EHV power systems.
The main demands the busbar protection has to fulfill are:
fast and discriminative isolation of the faulted section of bus-
bar
high through-fault stability
The busbar protection algorithm is executed by the central unit.
Following pre-processing in the bay units (see Section 3.5.1.),
real and imaginary components of the fundamental frequency
are transferred to the central unit for further processing every
8 ms.
3.8.1. Protection zones

The busbar protection performs a separate measurement for
each protection zone and each phase. A section of busbar that
in the event of an internal fault would be tripped as a single unit
(no further subdivision by a circuit-breaker possible) is defined
as a protection zone.
The assignment of feeder currents to the individual protection
zone measurements is achieved with the aid of a busbar image
in the intertripping system (see Section 3.7.3.).
3.8.2. Measuring principle

The busbar protection (BBP) operates according to the principle
of a combined differential current measurement with operation
and restraint features and a phase comparison function. In a
healthy condition and according to Kirchhoffs first law, all the
currents flowing towards a busbar section must leave it again.
The busbar protection scheme is based on a measurement algo-
rithm, which compares the amplitudes of the feeder currents and
derives a restraint criterion. The algorithm is executed independ-
ently for each protection zone and phase. In addition to ampli-
tude comparison, their phase relationship is also compared as a
second criterion (see Section 3.8.2.2. Phase comparison).
3-71
The neutral current has to be separately monitored in power sys-

tems with impedance grounding (optional) (see Section 3.8.5.
Neutral current measurement).It is evaluated independently of
the two conductor-sensitive protection functions.
The logical interlocking of the protection functions (Fig. 3.41)
shows that the REB500 protection can only trip when both pro-
tection functions (restrained amplitude and phase comparisons)
detect a fault on the same busbar section and phase.
Phase L1 Phase L2 Phase L3 Neutral current measuring system

measuring system measuring system measuring system (impedance grounded systems)
Inclusion of No
Restrained Restrained Restrained neutral current
amplitude amplitude amplitude permissible?
No No No
comparison comparison comparison
Yes
Internal fault? Internal fault? Internal fault?
Yes Yes Yes Restrained

amplitude No
comparison
Internal fault?
Yes
Phase Phase Phase
comparison No comparison No comparison No
Internal fault? Internal fault? Internal fault?

Phase
comparison No
Yes Yes Yes Internal fault?

No fault No fault No fault
detected detected detected
Yes
Internal fault Internal fault Internal fault Internal

on phase L1 on phase L2 on phase L3 ground fault
Intertripping No fault
command detected
Fig. 3.41 REB500 protection functions
3-72
3.8.2.1. Restrained amplitude comparison

The restrained amplitude comparison function is basically a dif-
ferential current measurement (Idiff) with the sum of all the cur-
rent amplitudes Irstnt acting in a restraining sense.
Amplitude comparison
The differential current Idiff is the geometric sum of all the cur-
rents flowing towards and away from the busbar.
The differential current Idiff is calculated from the fundamental
components of the currents conducted by the feeders and the
bus-tie breakers.
N N
Idiff = [Re (ILn )] + j [Im (ILn )]
n=1 n=1
per protection zone
Restraint current
The stability factor k is derived from the restraint current Irstnt
which is the sum of the currents of the various feeders. The fol-
lowing is an example for the determination of the restraint cur-
rent Irstnt for phase L{L1, L2 L3}:
N
Irstnt = Re(ILn ) + j Im(ILn ) per protection zone
n=1
The stability factor k thus becomes:

N N
Idiff
[Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n=1 n=1
k= = N
per protection zone
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
where
k stability factor per protection zone
ILn fundamental component after the Fourier filter in
phase L of feeder n
N total number of feeders and bus-tie breakers per pro-
tection zone
3-73
The scheme detects and internal fault on the busbar when the
stability factor k exceeds the setting (typically 0.80) and the dif-
ferential current Idiff is greater than the setting for the restraint
current IKmin. The differential current in normal operation or dur-
ing a through-fault is close to zero. By including the restraint cur-
rent in the denominator the range for the stability factor k be-
comes 0 k 1.
Simplified example:
N N
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n=1
Ln
n=1
Ln
k = diff = N
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
5 + 5 10
I1 = 5 kA I2 = 5 kA k= =0
5 + 5 + 10
I3 = 10 kA
Fig. 3.42 Through-fault
N N
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n=1
Ln
n=1
Ln
k = diff = N
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
5+5+0
k= =1
I1 = 5 kA I2 = 5 kA I3 = 0 kA 5 + 5 + 0
Fig. 3.43 Internal fault
N N
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n=1
Ln
n=1
Ln
k = diff = N
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
Irstnt
n=1
I1 = 5 kA I2 = 5 kA
I3 = -2 kA 5+52
k= = 0.67
5 + 5 + 2
I1 + I2
I3
IDiff
Fig. 3.44 Through-fault with CT saturation
3-74
Operating characteristic
The following operating characteristic results:
Fig. 3.45 Operating characteristic of the restrained differen-

tial current measurement
The operating area is above the bold line.
3.8.2.2. Phase comparison

High stability in the presence of severe CT saturation is charac-
teristic of busbar protection schemes that compare the phase-
angles of the currents. This still applies when re-energizing a
system and adding to the residual flux stored in the CT cores. It
is for this reason that phase comparison was chosen as the prin-
ciple for the second criterion of the REB500 busbar protection
system.
The function compares the phase-angles of the fundamental
components of the feeder currents.
3-75
Case 1: external fault = 139

Diagram of busbar Im
12 = 139
I1 I2 I2
I1 Re
Case 2: internal fault = 40

180
Im
external fault
Phase-shift
74 max = 74 I1 Re
I2 12 = 40
internal fault
0
Case 1 2
Fig. 3.46 Principle of the phase comparison function
Assuming an internal fault on a section of a busbar, the currents

of all the feeders connected to it flow towards the fault and have
virtually the same phase-angle. In normal operation or during a
through-fault, on the other hand, at least one of the currents is
180 out of phase with the others. The phase comparison func-
tion therefore compares the phase-angles of all the currents of
each phase individually for each zone of protection. The phase
difference for tripping is 0 to 74, i.e. if the phase-angles of all
the feeder currents of a protection zone lie within a band of 74,
the phase comparison function decides that there is an internal
fault. The pick-up angle max of 74 is a fixed setting.
For proper operation, it is necessary to exclude feeders conduct-
ing very little or no current from the comparison to prevent noise
generated by them or balancing currents during a fault from dis-
turbing the measurement. A minimum current is therefore deter-
mined when engineering the scheme for a particular application
below which a feeder is excluded from the phase comparison.
Typical settings are 0.8 IN for the phase currents and 0.25 IN for
the neutral current.
3-76
3.8.2.3. Safety aspects of the measuring principle

High through-fault currents can drive one or more of the CTs into
saturation.
The resulting distorted current signals give rise to a false differ-
ential current and an incorrect phase relationship between the
currents. In extreme cases, an internal fault might be simulated if
no precautions were taken.
The pre-processing of the current signals in the bay units en-
ables the protection algorithms to detect faults discrimina-
tively in all cases (even in the presence of CT saturation).
The maximum prolongation principle (see Section 3.5.1.)
achieves a very good approximation with respect to the real and
imaginary components (amplitude and phase-angle) of the origi-
nal current signal.
3.8.3. Tripping logic

Tripping only takes place if the differential current and the stabil-
ity factor are both above their pick-up settings and the phase dif-
ference between the currents is less than setting.
Idiff > Idiff set
Idiff
k=
Irestr
> kset & Trip
< set
HEST 005031 C
Fig. 3.47 Busbar protection tripping logic
3.8.4. Differential current supervision

Supervising the differential current is an important supervision
algorithm which detects the following protection system faults:
short-circuited CTs
faulty CTs
wrong CT ratios
incorrectly wired CT (wrong current directions and therefore
phases)
wrong isolator and circuit-breaker return confirmation signals
3-77
NOTE: Supervising the differential current therefore aug-

ments the supervision of the isolator and circuit-breaker
statuses (see Section 3.7.4.1.).
The differential current supervision feature forms part of the bus-

bar protection function and uses the same setting. It operating
value is set to a percentage of the minimum fault current (Ikmin).
If the differential current exceeds the setting for a time longer
than the time setting, differential current alarm appears on the
local HMI and the external signal 41815_Diff. current alarm is
generated.
The alarm and any blocking that has taken place are only reset
after the differential current has disappeared again.
To ensure that faults can still be detected under low load condi-
tions, the operating value of the differential alarm must be set
lower than the lowest possible load current.
3.8.4.1. Blocking the protection in the event of differential alarm

Provision is made for the differential current alarm to block the
protection (configuration). There are two alternative settings:
Block protection completely
Operation of the entire protection system is blocked.
Selective blocking (preferred)
Operation of the busbar protection is only blocked for the
section of busbar (protection zone) concerned. Intertripping
(see Section 3.7.3.) by other protection functions is still pos-
sible.
3.8.5. Neutral current measurement
NOTE: Measurement of the neutral current is only enabled for

impedance grounded power systems and at the users specific
request (see Section 11.5.).
3-78
Notes on ground faults in power systems with different types of

grounding:
System grounding Consequences for the protection
Solidly grounded Fault current IKmin to Ikmax
All faults detected by the busbar protection.
Ungrounded Capacitive fault current
Ground faults detected by other protection de-
vices. Detection by the busbar protection im-
possible.
Impedance grounded Limited ground fault current
Ground faults detected by busbar protection
(neutral current measurement)
Petersen coil Only residual ground fault current
Faults generally not detected, because the fault
arc is extinguished.
Table 3.10 Ground fault current for the different types of

power system grounding
3.8.6. Busbar protection operating times

Depending on the ratio between the actual differential current Idiff
and the setting IKmin, the system trips 20 to 30 ms after the inci-
dence of a fault. The curve below shows typical operating times
for different values of the quotient Idiff/IKmin.
[ms]
50
Operating 40
time
30
max. 30 ms
20 min. 20 ms
10
0 IDiff
1,2 5 10 20 30 40
IKmin
HEST 005032 C
Fig. 3.48 Typical operating times of the REB500 busbar

protection system
3-79
The total operating time is determined by a number of individual

operating times as listed in the table below:
Time t Diagram Definition Time

t1 Fault detection time 3 ms
(Idiff/IKmin = 10)
t2 Polling dialogue (1 bus cycle) 0 (8) ms
t3 Bay unit preparations 4 ms
t4 Transfer and processing by the 8 ms

CU
t5 Trip signal enable in the BU 1.5 ms
t6 Operation of the protection trip 5 ms

relay
t7 Safety margin 0.4 ms
t Total operating time 21.9 ms
Table 3.11 Times contributing to the total operating time
The individual functions contributing to the total operating time

are partly in the central unit and partly in the bay units. A graphic
representation of the operating time is given below. Note that the
time from 21.9 to 29.9 ms is caused by the fact that the central
unit processes cyclically, i.e. if a fault occurs at the end of a
processing cycle, the waiting time until the start of the next proc-
essing cycle is only short, but if it occurs near the beginning of a
cycle, the waiting time until it can be processed is relatively long
(max. 8 ms).
3-80
t =21.9 - 29.9 ms
4 ms 4 ms
Central unit
t4=8 ms
IDiff
=10
IKmin
Bay unit
t2=8 ms t6=5 ms
t1=3 ms t3=4 ms t5=1.5 ms t7=0.4 ms
Start of fault Protection trip

HEST 005033 C
Fig. 3.49 Contributions of the central and bay units to the

total operating time
3.8.7. Blocking measurement of certain CTs
NOTE: The operation of the busbar protection is explained for

simple station configuration in this section. Its application to
complex stations is described in Section 11.17.
NOTE: Blocking the measurement of a CT means that its

current is excluded from evaluation by the busbar protection
function even if it was assigned by the intertripping system.
Blocking is necessary for bus-tie breakers (see Section 3.8.7.1.)

and may be necessary for feeders (see Section 3.8.7.2.).
In certain conditions blocking of the measurement is delayed (re-
covery time) (see Section 3.8.7.3.).
Blocking is cancelled as soon as the cause for it has disap-
peared and the protection system receives an active CB
CLOSE signal (see Section 3.8.7.4.).
3-81
Blocking the measurement of certain CTs is a basic function of

the busbar protection, which, with the exception of the circuit-
breaker recovery time and the binary inputs for the circuit-
breaker statuses and CB CLOSE signals, must be neither con-
figured nor set.
3.8.7.1. Bus-tie breaker functions
NOTE: In the case of a bus-tie breaker with a single set of

CTs, the current measurement is assigned to both protection
zones, to one in an inverted sense.
Blocking this measurement applies to both zones.
NOTE: Two bay units are necessary in the case of a bus-tie

breaker with two sets of CTs. The current measurements are
assigned to the protection zones such that they overlap. A fault
between the sets of CTs thus trips both zones. The inversion of
one of the current signals is achieved by wiring it appropriately
to the REB500 analog input.
Blocking this measurement applies to both zones.
The busbar protection excludes the bus-tie breaker CT from

evaluation under the following conditions.
1. When the bus-tie breaker is open (see Section 3.8.7.1.1.).
2. When a REB500 station protection function (BBP, BFP or
EFP) issues an internal intertripping command to the respec-
tive breaker (see Section 3.8.7.1.2.).
3. When the CTs are bridged (see Section 3.8.7.1.3).
3.8.7.1.1. When the bus-tie breaker is open

The bus-tie breaker measurement is blocked when the breaker
is open in order to trip the busbar section effectively concerned
for a fault between a single set of CTs and the bus-tie breaker.
The CTs are not assigned to a protection zone when the bus-tie
breaker is open and therefore the protection zones extend to the
bus-tie breaker itself. The correct zone can thus be tripped for a
fault between the CTs and the bus-tie breaker.
3-82
Bus-tie breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
Bus zone I Bus zone II
Protection zone I Protection zone II
HEST 965 003 FL
Fig. 3.50 Bus-tie breaker (open) and two sets of CTs
This operation also applies to bus-tie breakers with only a single

set of CTs.
3.8.7.1.2. In the event of a REB500 protection function (BBP, BFP or

EFP) tripping this CB
When a bus-tie breaker is closed, its measurement is blocked
when a REB500 protection function (BBP, BFP or EFP) issues a
tripping command:
1. Bus-tie breaker with a single set of CTs:
To trip the section of busbar effectively concerned as quickly
as possible for a fault between the closed circuit-breaker
and the CTs:
See Fig. 3.51 Bus-tie breaker (closed) and one set of CTs.
Where a bus-tie breaker is equipped with only one set of
CTs, the latter is used for both the neighboring protection
zones and is automatically assigned to them when configur-
ing the system.
Faults on bus zone II are tripped immediately and discrimina-
tive-ly in protection zone II. Faults on bus zone I but not be-
tween the CTs and the bus-tie breaker are also tripped im-
mediately and discriminatively in protection zone I.
A fault between the CTs and the bus-tie breaker (i.e. on bus
zone I but in protection zone II) trips initially protection zone II
(including the bus-tie breaker) immediately, i.e. the bus zone
not involved in the fault.
NOTE: A fault between the CTs and a closed bus-tie breaker

is tripped after the recovery time.
3-83
2. Bus-tie breaker with one or two sets of CTs:

Detecting a possible breaker failure:
See Fig. 3.52 Bus-tie breaker (closed) and two sets of
CTs.
In the case of bus-tie breakers with a set of CTs on both
sides, both are assigned to measuring systems. CT 2 is the
limit of protection zone I and CT 1 the limit of protection zone
II. A bay unit is needed for each set of CTs.
Both sets of CTs do not have to be used and if only one is
configured, the scheme is the same as described in the sec-
tion for bus-tie breakers with a single set of CTs.
The function is the same as for bus-tie breakers with a single
set of CTs.
CTs Bus-tie breaker

Protection zone II Protection zone II
HEST 965 004 FL
Fig. 3.51 Bus-tie breaker (closed) and one set of CTs
Bus-tie breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2

Protection zone I
Protection zone II
HEST 965 005 FL
Fig. 3.52 Bus-tie breaker (closed) and two sets of CTs
3-84
3.8.7.1.3. Short-circuiting of a CT
The bus-tie breaker is excluded from the measurement when
bus zones are also connected by an isolator, for example:
1. Coupled transversely by parallel isolators
2. Coupled longitudinally by parallel longitudinal isolators
Concerning 1. Coupled transversely by parallel isolators
The current flowing via the coupling between the busbars
(Fig. 3.53) is represented in the busbar protection by two current
vectors of opposite direct (V+, V-). The vectors are assigned
according to measuring system S1 (vector V+) and S2 (vector
V-).
When switching a feeder from busbar S1 to S2 (load switching),
both isolators Q1 and Q2 are closed for a certain time, i.e. bus-
bars S1 and S2 are directly connected.
During this time, measuring systems S1 and S2 are con-
nected to form one common measuring system (S1/S2) to
match the primary system.
For the same time the bus-tie breaker measurement is
blocked, i.e. the two vectors V+ and V- are excluded.
The reasons for blocking the bus-tie breaker measurement are
the following:
While the busbar sections are in parallel (Q1 and Q2 closed), the
current (Ik1) of any fault that occurs will divide into a part flowing
directly (Ik11) and a part flowing via the bus-tie breaker (Ik12). If
included, the bus-tie breaker current (Ik12) would be represented
by the two vectors with opposing directions (V+, V-) and as-
signed to the common measuring system (S1/S2). The conse-
quence would be that the
1. directional comparison of S1/S2 would prevent any tripping
because the opposition of the current vectors (V+, V-) does
not point to a fault on the busbars (see Section 3.8.2.2.).
2. restrained differential current measurement S1/S2 would see
a restraint current larger by double the bus-tie breaker cur-
rent and this would reduce the stabilization factor K to a value
lower than setting (see Section 3.8.2.1.).
3-85
Blocking the bus-tie breaker measurement excludes the two vec-

tors V+ and V- from the measurement so that they cannot pre-
vent tripping.
Ik11
S1
S2
Ik12
Q1 Q2
Ik12
Ik1
V+
V-
Fig. 3.53 Bus-tie breaker with isolators closed in parallel
Concerning 2. Longitudinal bus-tie breaker with longitudinal

isolators closed in parallel
The bus-tie breaker in Fig. 3.54 connects busbar sections longi-
tudinally together.
In order to connect the sections of busbar 3 to left and right of
the longitudinal isolators (3A and 3B) together, the longitudinal
bus-tie breaker has to be closed first. The longitudinal isolator
Q31 can then be closed. The situation is shown in the diagram.
This is analogous to the situation described under 1. above
(transverse bus-tie breaker), i.e. measuring systems 3A and 3B
are combined to a single measuring system (3A/3B). The prob-
lem is thus also the same and the bus-tie breaker measurement
must also be blocked.
3-86
Fig. 3.54 Longitudinal bus-tie breaker
3.8.7.2. Feeder circuit-breakers
NOTE: In the case of a feeder circuit-breaker, measurement of

the CT for the busbar protection is blocked when
a feeder has the CT on the line side of the circuit-
breaker (see Fig. 3.55); and
the auxiliary contacts on the circuit-breaker (see Section
3.7.4.) and the CB CLOSE signal (see Section 3.8.7.4.)
are configured in the REB500 system; and
the circuit-breaker is opened or a REB500 protection func-
tion (BBP, BFP or EFP) issues an internal intertripping
command to the circuit-breaker.
In these circumstances (see Fig. 3.55), the measurement by the

bay unit has to be blocked to prevent the busbar protection from
tripping for a fault between the circuit-breaker and the CTs when
the circuit-breaker is open, because the fault is in the protection
zone of the end fault protection and not the busbar protection.
NOTE: Blocking the measurement is unnecessary for a CT on

the busbar side of the circuit-breaker (see Fig. 3.56), be-
cause the fault is outside the busbar protection zone and can
only be detected and tripped by the end fault protection.
3-87
HEST 055 006 V
Fig. 3.55 CT on line side of circuit-breaker
HEST 055 007 V
Fig. 3.56 CT on busbar side of circuit-breaker
In systems, which do not include an end fault protection function,

the statuses of feeder circuit-breakers are not usually configured
and they are considered to be permanently closed. No blocking
is then configured.
3-88
3.8.7.3. Recovery time

Blocking of the (feeder or bus-tie) measurement is delayed (re-
covery time) if the following conditions are fulfilled:
1. The circuit-breaker is opened (see Section 3.8.7.1.1.).
2. One of the REB500 protection functions (BBP, BFP or EFP)
issues an internal intertripping command to the respective
circuit-breaker (see Section 3.8.7.1.2.).
In both cases, the arc extinction and any re-ignition phenomena
after opening the circuit-breaker are taken into account.
NOTE: It has to be assured that the CT does not conduct any

current after the recovery time. If the delay is too short, false
tripping of a healthy section of busbar may result.
NOTE: The recovery time has to be set longer than the

maximum operating time of the bus-tie breaker plus arc
extinction time.
Example of when the recovery time is set too short

Fig. 3.57 illustrates the case of a bus-tie breaker recovery time
setting, which is too short. The circuit-breaker reports that it is
already open but the current is still flowing. The response
of the busbar protection is the following:
The measuring system for bus zone I can no longer measure the
current flowing away from the busbar through CT 2 because the
measurement is already blocked. A differential current corre-
sponding to the fault current results and the measuring system
for bus zone I trips busbar I!
The measuring system for the bus zone can no longer measure
the current flowing towards the busbar through CT 1 because
the measurement is already blocked. The other feeders con-
nected to bus zone II give rise to a differential current (sum of
currents flowing towards the busbar) and the measuring system
for bus zone II trips busbar II!
3-89
Bus-tie-breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
Fig. 3.57 Arc extinction when opening a circuit-breaker
3.8.7.4. CB CLOSE command (manual close signal)

In order to be prepared for closing the breaker onto an existing
fault (e.g. closed grounding isolator or forgotten grounding
clamp), the measurement has to be reinstated before the feeder
or bus-tie breaker is actually closed. This is achieved by acti-
vated the busbar protection input signal 11505_Close command
CB.
NOTE: The CLOSE CB command instantly cancels any

previous blocking of measurement regardless of all other crite-
ria.
As soon as the circuit-breaker has reached the closed status

(auxiliary contacts report CLOSED), the CLOSE CB command
can reset.
NOTE: The CLOSE CB command must be maintained until

the circuit-breaker CLOSED auxiliary contact has definitely
closed (the auxiliary contacts overlap).
NOTE: To avoid any risk of mal-operation, the protection

must register every signal applied to the circuit-breaker
CLOSE coil. These include, for example, local close com-
mands, close commands from remote control systems, the sta-
tion automation system or from autoreclosure schemes.
The simplest way of doing this is to take the CLOSE CB signal
directly from the circuit-breaker CLOSE coil.
The CLOSE CB signal is acquired and processed every 8 ms

(fast part and fast signal).
3-90
Example of a CLOSE CB signal which was not registered

Fig. 3.58 shows the case of closing onto an existing fault (e.g.
closed grounding isolator or forgotten grounding clamp) when
the CLOSE CB command was not registered by the protection.
The arc ignites before the circuit-breaker can report that it is
closed:
The measuring system for bus zone I is unable to measure the
outgoing fault current towards bus zone II, because the meas-
urement of the bus-tie breaker current is still blocked. A differen-
tial current equivalent to the fault current is therefore created and
the measuring system for bus zone I trips busbar I.
The measuring system for bus zone II is unable to measure the
incoming fault current flowing from bus zone I, because the
measurement of the bus-tie breaker current is still blocked.
Since, however, there are no other feeders connected to bus
zone II that could produce a differential current, the bus zone II
measuring system does not trip.
Bus-tie-breaker
CTs 1 CTs 2
Fig. 3.58 CB CLOSE command
3.9. Technical specification

In the Data Sheet for the REB500 system (1MRB520308-Ben)
you find the technical data of the system and the wiring dia-
grams.
3-91
December 08
4. HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI500)
4.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 4-3
4.2. Safety instructions ................................................................... 4-4
4.3. Installation................................................................................ 4-5

4.3.1. Minimum PC requirements ...................................................... 4-5
4.3.2. Set-up ...................................................................................... 4-5
4.3.2.1. Communication interface, off-line and simulation mode .......... 4-7
4.3.2.2. Mouse ...................................................................................... 4-8
4.3.2.3. Installation on a network .......................................................... 4-8
4.4. Starting HMI500....................................................................... 4-9

4.4.1. Window structure ................................................................... 4-11
4.4.2. Main window .......................................................................... 4-12
4.5. Operation ............................................................................... 4-15

4.5.1. File ......................................................................................... 4-15
4.5.1.1. File / Open ............................................................................. 4-15
4.5.1.2. File / Save as ......................................................................... 4-15
4.5.1.3. File / Upload from protection system...................................... 4-15
4.5.1.4. File / Download to protection system ..................................... 4-15
4.5.1.5. File / Compare.................................................................... 4-17
4.5.1.6. File / Exit ................................................................................ 4-19
4.5.2. View ....................................................................................... 4-20
4.5.2.1. View / Single-line diagram ..................................................... 4-20
4.5.2.2. View / Protection zone measurements................................... 4-22
4.5.2.3. View / Analog input measurements ....................................... 4-23
4.5.2.4. View / Binary input/output status............................................ 4-25
4.5.2.5. View / Switchgear objects ...................................................... 4-26
4.5.2.6. View / Protection zone circuit-breakers.................................. 4-27
4.5.2.7. View / Disturbance recorder................................................... 4-28
4.5.2.8. View / BP function monitoring (REB500sys only) .................. 4-32
4.5.2.9. View / Event list ..................................................................... 4-32
4.5.2.10. View / Reset latched tripping and signaling relays ................. 4-35
4.5.3. Settings.................................................................................. 4-36
4.5.3.1. Settings / System response ................................................... 4-36
4.5.3.2. Settings / Busbar protection................................................... 4-36
4.5.3.3. Settings / Overcurrent release ............................................... 4-36
4.5.3.4. Settings / Voltage release ...................................................... 4-36
4.5.3.5. Settings / Voltage / external release ...................................... 4-36
4-1
4.5.3.6. Settings / Bay protection (REB500sys only) .......................... 4-36

4.5.3.7. Settings / Breaker failure protection ....................................... 4-36
4.5.3.8. Settings / Overcurrent protection ........................................... 4-36
4.5.3.9. Settings / End zone protection ............................................... 4-36
4.5.3.10. Settings / CB pole discrepancy .............................................. 4-37
4.5.3.11. Settings / Event memory........................................................ 4-37
4.5.3.12. Settings / Communication ...................................................... 4-37
4.5.4. Configuration ......................................................................... 4-37
4.5.4.1. Configuration / Activate/deactivate ........................................ 4-37
4.5.4.2. Configuration / Voltage transformers ..................................... 4-37
4.5.4.3. Configuration / BP licenses (REB500sys only) ...................... 4-37
4.5.4.4. Configuration / Device structure............................................. 4-38
4.5.4.5. Configuration / Isolators ......................................................... 4-38
4.5.4.6. Configuration / Disturbance recorder ..................................... 4-38
4.5.4.7. Configuration / CB inspection ................................................ 4-38
4.5.4.8. Configuration / Binary module................................................ 4-38
4.5.4.9. Configuration / Local HMI LEDs (LMI LEDs).......................... 4-38
4.5.4.10. Configuration / Circuit-breakers ............................................. 4-38
4.5.4.11. Configuration / Current transformers...................................... 4-39
4.5.4.12. Configuration / GPS time synchronization ............................. 4-39
4.5.5. Testing ................................................................................... 4-39
4.5.5.1. Testing / Test mode ............................................................... 4-39
4.5.5.2. Testing / Installation mode ..................................................... 4-42
4.5.6. Tools ...................................................................................... 4-44
4.5.6.1. Tools / Version....................................................................... 4-44
4.5.6.2. Tools / Reports ...................................................................... 4-45
4.5.6.3. Tools / Export SCS data ........................................................ 4-45
4.5.6.4. Tools / Change password ...................................................... 4-46
4.5.6.5. Tools / Settings ...................................................................... 4-46
4.5.6.6. Tools / Set system time.......................................................... 4-48
4.5.6.7. Tools / MMC session manager .............................................. 4-49
4.5.7. Window .................................................................................. 4-50
4.5.8. Help (?) .................................................................................. 4-50
4.6. Error messages ..................................................................... 4-51
4.7. Corrective action .................................................................... 4-51

4.7.1. Available system resources ................................................... 4-51
4.8. De-installation ........................................................................ 4-51
4-2
4. HUMAN MACHINE INTERFACE (HMI500)
4.1. Introduction
HMI500 is the human/machine interface (HMI) for the protection
systems REB500 and REB500sys. For brevity, these Operating
Instructions refer simply to REB500 although the program
applies to both systems. There are additional menu items, which
only apply to REB500sys, and attention is explicitly drawn to
these.
HMI500 is a convenient human-machine interface which permits
the operator to view REB500 measurements and statuses, set
REB500 protection functions and configure the system,
download the latter data to REB500 and to control the
disturbance recorder and event memory integrated in the
system.
The data are transferred between the PC and REB500 via an
optical reader attached to the front of either central or bay units
and coupled to a serial interface on the PC.
NOTE: Any changes (e.g. settings, configuration etc.) made

using HMI500 are stored in a specific customer database (MDB
file) in the PC and not in the protection system. The database
then has to be downloaded from the PC to the protection
system (see Section 4.5.1.4.).
4-3
4.2. Safety instructions
DANGER: HMI500 permits circuit-breakers and isolators to

be operated. Every program operation and the possible
consequences must be considered carefully beforehand. If
switching operations have to be carried out, the same
precautions must be taken as when performing them manually.
WARNING: Earlier HMI500 versions are incompatible with

Version 7.50 of the protection system software.
WARNING: A password has to be entered to use HMI500

Operator. Passwords may only be assigned to authorized
operators. Change the standard passwords in the software as
soon as the program is installed.
4-4
4.3. Installation
The human-machine interface program HMI500 is supplied on
an installation CD.
4.3.1. Minimum PC requirements

HMI500 runs on an IBM PC, compatible under Microsoft.
Observe the information published by Microsoft on the PC
hardware requirements in relation to the operating system
installed.
4.3.2. Set-up
Administrator access rights are required for the installation of
HMI500 on PCs running the operating systems Windows NT,
Windows 2000 or Windows XP. An attempt to install the program
with lower access rights prompts an error message and the
installation is aborted. Contact your system administrator in this
case.
Insert the CD-ROM in the drive. The installation program is then
started automatically 1 .
Select the preferred language and confirm that the installation
procedure should be continued.
You are now requested to read and confirm your acceptance of
the license conditions.
1 Should the auto-start function on your PC be disabled, select and run the
program start.bat on the CD to start the installation program.
4-5
The installation program proposes a target directory. Either

confirm the proposed directory or enter a desired one. The
program is installed automatically in the prescribed directory
after clicking on Next>
4-6
A HMI500 directory and program icon 'HMI500 x.xx ss' are

created in the Windows Start menu, x.xx signifying the program
version and ss the language.
4.3.2.1. Communication interface, off-line and simulation mode

By default, the installation routine will select the first free inter-
face (COM port). The communication settings can be changed
subsequently by selecting 'Tools / Settings' (see Section
4.5.6.5.).
Aside from the interface a connection via TCP/IP is available as
communication path.
The same menu item also provides a choice of operating mode
by selecting either the radio button 'Off-line' (excludes the
functions requiring a REB500 to be connected) or 'Simulated' (no
REB500 connected, but with all the functions available for
demonstration purposes and random generation of data) (see
Section 4.5.6.5.).
NOTE: HMI500 automatically starts off-line, if an invalid COM

port is entered or another application is using the port.
4-7
4.3.2.2. Mouse
A mouse is necessary to work with the HMI500 efficiently. It is
possible to control it solely via the keyboard, but this can be a
little cumbersome. The right mouse button is also used for some
operations, and therefore it should not be configured to perform
other functions (e.g. double click).
4.3.2.3. Installation on a network

Before attempting to install HMI500 on a network, ascertain that
you are authorized to write in the corresponding Windows
directory, otherwise the installation will fail.
4-8
4.4. Starting HMI500
NOTE: The program screens in this section are based on a

typical application. Depending on the power system configura-
tion and the options configured while engineering your system,
certain menus may be missing or the display appears different.
The first screen to appear after starting the operator program is

the 'System log-on' dialog:
Fig. 4.1 System log-on dialog
The program can be run in a read only mode by appropriately

activating the 'Read only' check box, i.e. the data can be viewed
but not changed. Users that want to run the program in a
read/write mode (check box deactivated) must enter a password.
NOTE: To enable a start to be made, the password is set to

'System' when the program is supplied (case sensitive!).
HMI500 obtains the specific device data from a database in a

file, which is stored both in the PC and the protection system.
Database files on the PC have the extension '.mdb'.
4-9
Click on the 'OK' button to continue the start-up routine or on the

'Cancel' button to discontinue and close the program.
Communication with the protection system is tested after clicking
on 'OK'.
Providing communication can be established, HMI500 starts in
the on-line mode.
Should communication with the protection system fail, it starts
either off-line or in the simulation mode (see Section 4.5.6.5.).
The main HMI500 window then appears.
Some of the dialogs used by the program are standard Windows
dialogs. Should these not be in the same language as HMI500,
than a different language is set for the Windows operating
system.
NOTE: The database that was open during the last session
opens automatically. If no database was open before, select
'Open' in the 'File' menu and then the desired file. An error
message is displayed if an attempt is made to open an
incompatible file. An existing file in the protection system can
also be opened using the 'Upload' function in the 'File' menu.
4-10
7.50 7.50
Fig. 4.2 Main HMI500 window
4.4.1. Window structure

The structure and handling of the windows in the operator
program is similar to other Windows applications.
Fig. 4.3 Dialog buttons
The following buttons appear in many dialogs:
OK
The new settings are saved in the database on the PC and the
dialog closes.
Apply
The new settings are saved in the database on the PC and the
dialog stays open.
4-11
Restore
The changes that have been made are ignored and the old
settings restored. The dialog stays open.
Cancel
The new settings are not saved and the dialog closes.
Scroll (arrow) buttons

In windows permitting the selection of several bays (or isolators,
circuit-breakers etc.), there are four scroll buttons at the bottom
for scrolling through the bays.
Close
The window or dialog is closed and a warning is displayed, if
changes have been made which have not been saved.
In many dialogs with settings there is an overview tab for
selecting one of a list of bays and a details tab showing the
respective settings. Details can be viewed by either clicking on
the tab or double-clicking on the bay in the overview list.
4.4.2. Main window

The title bar is at the top of the main program window and states
the name of the program 'HMI500 (REBWIN)' and the project
information entered by the ABB engineering department. The
menu bar is located immediately below the title bar.
Fig. 4.4 Status bar
File
The menu item 'File' permits databases to be opened and saved
and a database to be uploaded from the protection or
downloaded to it.
4-12
View
The menu item 'View' contains menu items for viewing the plant
diagram, the measurements of each protection zone, inputs and
outputs, switchgear statuses, the event list and any tripping that
has taken place. For REB500sys, the application also provides
facility for viewing the bay protection measurements.
Settings
By selecting the menu item 'Settings' it is possible to set the
system parameters, the operating values for the various
protection functions and the communication parameters.
Configuration
The menu item 'Configuration' concerns the definition of the
various circuit-breakers, isolators and CTs, the activation/
deactivation (masking/unmasking) of items of plant, the
configuration of system modules, tripping logics and the
disturbance recorder and maintenance instances presented.
Other items configured are the LEDs on the local HMI
(REB500sys, bay unit type 500BU03) and the optional GPS
synchronization system. In the case of REB500sys, an overview
of the licensed bay protection functions is also provided.
Testing
The menu item 'Test' is for enabling/disabling either the test or
installation mode.
Tools
Functions for editing data file versions, producing reports,
exporting SCS communication data, changing passwords,
selecting operator program options and setting the system time
are available under the menu item 'Tools'.
Help
The online help system and information details of the software
version are accessed by clicking on Help.
Status information is displayed on the bar at the bottom of the
main window (Simulation/On-line/Off-line, Edit/Read only, Test
mode, Installation mode, Database version, Setfile). These have
the following significance:
7.50
Fig. 4.5 Status bar
4-13
On-line/Off-line
If the program can successfully establish contact with the
protection system, it is in the on-line mode. If no connection can
be established or is not desired the program is in the off-line
mode.
Simulation
The system is in the simulation mode when 'Simulation' is
displayed on the status bar. All the functions can be executed
without being connected to a protection device. Random values
are generated when viewing protection unit data, e.g. event lists
or measurements. Simulated faults can also be viewed.
Edit/Read only
'Edit' permits settings to be saved in a file or downloaded to the
protection system. In the 'Read only' mode it is only possible to
read data.
Test mode
'Test mode' is displayed on the status line whenever the test
generator is activated.
Installation mode
'Installation mode' is displayed on the status line whenever the
installation mode is activated.
Database version
The version of the database structure of the database that is
open is displayed.
Setfile
The name and path of the setfile that is open are displayed at
this location on the status bar.
4-14
4.5. Operation
4.5.1. File
4.5.1.1. File / Open

After starting the program, select 'Open' from the 'File' menu. A
dialog opens which enables you to select the desired file. The
dialog provides facility for navigating through the various drives
and directories. After making the corresponding choice, click on
'OK' to load the data into the program or on 'Cancel' to close the
dialog without making any changes.
4.5.1.2. File / Save as

The current data in the PC database can be saved in a file by
opening the 'File' menu and clicking on 'Save as'. As was the
case with 'Open', the dialog that appears gives full access to the
PC file system.
4.5.1.3. File / Upload from protection system

This menu item enables data stored in the protection system to
be uploaded to a file in the PC.
Fig. 4.6 Upload from protection system
4.5.1.4. File / Download to protection system

Open the 'File' menu and select 'Download to protection system'
to download the current data from the PC database to the
protection system.
The versions are compared before downloading proceeds and
the result is displayed. An index and a comment may also be
entered beforehand by selecting Tools/Version (see Section
4.5.6.). For safety reasons, the new data is only saved if it is
different. Data will only be saved if they are different or the version
index is different.
4-15
NOTE: Data can be correctly downloaded as soon as the

central unit has started.
After the downloading procedure is complete, the protection

system is restarted and the valid version can then be verified on
the HMI.
Fig. 4.7 Download to protection system and comparison of

versions
Fig. 4.8 Warning: Download to protection system and

comparison of versions
The progress of the downloading procedure is shown on the

screen. The correct time format must be set via the control panel
on the PC for the procedure to be presented correctly. The
procedure can be interrupted by the user as far as 'Archive data
in the protection system'.
4-16
Fig. 4.9 Download to protection system
Various check sums are calculated to establish the integrity of

the data in the database and these are examined after the
transfer of data has been completed.
Only after all the data have been successfully transferred are
they saved in the non-volatile memory. The auxiliary supply of
the central unit must not be interrupted during this part of the
procedure.
4.5.1.5. File / Compare

This menu item provides facility for comparing the PC database
loaded by HMI500 and the database stored in the protection
system or a second database file in the PC.
4-17
Fig. 4.10 Comparison of system databases
Second database is stored at PC

Activating this radio button compares the system database
loaded by HMI500 and another database in the PC. The latter is
chosen by clicking on the button 'Select file'.
Second database is at target

Activating this radio button compares the system database
loaded by HMI500 and the database already stored in the
protection system. The degree of detail is determined with the
aid of the button 'Only compare checksum'.
Show only differences

Checking the 'Show only differences' box enables the scope of
the report to be limited to the differences actually found.
Limit number of differences

The number entered here determines the number of differences
that can be found before the current comparison operation is
aborted.
4-18
Show pre-engineering changes only for feeders, modules

and switchgear objects
When this box is checked (default setting), the comparison is
restricted to determining whether changes have taken place in
relation to the pre-engineering data for bays, modules and
switchgear. Generally, the default settings should be retained as
otherwise the number of differences that will be discovered
increases considerably (events, signals etc., are then also taken
into account).
Write log file

Check the box 'Write log file' to store the results of the
comparison in a file.
Compare
The button 'Compare... ' starts the comparison operation.
4.5.1.6. File / Exit

To terminate the program, open the 'File' menu and select 'Exit'.
A warning is displayed if there are changes that have not been
saved. You then have the choice of saving or discarding them.
4-19
4.5.2. View
4.5.2.1. View / Single-line diagram

Opening the 'View' menu and selecting 'Single-line diagram'
displays a diagram of the plant corresponding to the layout and
wiring diagrams created for the project by the ABB engineering
department.
The screen below shows a typical single-line diagram:
Fig. 4.11 Single-line diagram
The name of every item of plant can be changed by pointing at

its label and clicking the right mouse button. This opens a menu
with the operation 'Change label'. Clicking the right mouse
button again on this command opens a dialog called 'New label'.
After entering the new name, click on 'OK' to confirm it.
The names can also be changed via the 'Configuration' menu.
The primary system shown above is only an example.
Providing the items of plant have been configured, updating
once or cyclically shows their actual status and the feeder
currents.
Using the right mouse button, it is also possible to display the
differential currents of the selected busbar zone. A busbar zone
is selected by clicking the right mouse button on its label, e.g.
BZ1.
4-20
Fig. 4.12 Updated single-line diagram
Click the right mouse button in an empty field in the single-line

diagram to view a dialog with a list of the symbols used. The
buttons on the right provide facility for changing the default
colors for open, closed or invalid objects to suit your needs.
4-21
4.5.2.2. View / Protection zone measurements

This dialog displays the actual values of measured variables for
each protection zone (restrained differential current of the busbar
protection function). The protection zones are determined by the
positions of the isolators and the bus-tie breakers (busbar
image).
Overview
Fig. 4.13 Overview dialog for protection zone

measurements
The currently active protection zones are listed in order showing

the associated sections of busbar and the differential current per
phase or in the neutral. The overview is not updated auto-
matically, it is necessary to click on the 'Refresh' button.
A protection zone to which no measurement has been assigned
(not a single bay unit current is processed by the busbar
protection algorithm) is shown as being invalid.
Protection zones that have been connected (e.g. via a pair of
feeder isolators or a longitudinal isolator) are also presented.
4-22
Detailed view
Fig. 4.14 Detailed view of measurements per zone
The feeders assigned to individual protection zones are listed in

the detailed views of the relevant zones.
The differential current, the restraint current and the stability
factor are also displayed.
4.5.2.3. View / Analog input measurements

The bay units and their labels and slots are listed in the overview
dialog.
Fig. 4.15 Overview dialog for protection zone

measurements
4-23
To display the values of measured variables, first select a

module (becomes highlighted) and click on the 'Open
measurements window' button or alternatively double click on
the module. Up to eight measurement windows can be open at
the same time.
The windows can be arranged under each other by clicking on
the 'Arrange windows' button.
The display can be updated either manually by clicking on the
'Update measurement' button or automatically by clicking on the
'Update cyclically' button. This updates all the measurement
windows, which are open at the same time.
A warning appears in the measurement window if measurements
cannot be correctly performed. Closing the overview window
closes all the measurement windows as well.
If a type 500BU03 bay unit is selected, the phase-angles are
displayed as well as the analog measurements (see Fig. 4.15
'Overview dialog for protection zone measurements'). The
currently valid reference channel, i.e. reference point for
displaying phase-angles, is highlighted yellow. The user can
change the reference channel by double-clicking on the desired
one. The phase-angle display is not available on the other types
of bay unit.
4-24
4.5.2.4. View / Binary input/output status
Fig. 4.16 Binary input/output status
The binary inputs and outputs are listed in the overview dialog
together with their bay labels and slot numbers.
To view a signal status, select the corresponding module and
click on the 'Open status window' button or alternatively double
click on the module. Up to eight status windows can be open at
the same time. They can be arranged under each other by
clicking on the 'Arrange windows' button.
The display can be updated either manually by clicking on the
'Update status' button or automatically by clicking on the 'Update
cyclically' button. This updates all the status windows, which are
open at the same time.
A status window shows either the inputs or the outputs. A '1' in a
field indicates that the respective input or output is set and a '0'
that it is reset. The statuses of all valid values are green (gray on
a monochrome screen).
Two windows can be opened to view the inputs and outputs of a
bay at the same time.
4-25
A status of an input or output that has been impressed is yellow

(white on a monochrome screen) (see Section 4.5.5.).
The statuses of inputs, which the supervision function has
tagged as being invalid, are red. This can also occur briefly when
the window is opened.
The signals assigned to each physical channel while configuring
the binary module are displayed in the status window. Channels
to which no signals were assigned are marked 'No signal
assigned'.
Closing the overview window closes all the status windows as
well.
NOTE: Further details of the signals assigned to the various

binary inputs and outputs can be viewed by opening the
'Configuration' menu and selecting 'Binary modules' (see
Section 4.5.4.8. 'Configuration / Binary module').
4.5.2.5. View / Switchgear objects

The detailed view shows the statuses of circuit-breakers and
isolators.
Fig. 4.17 Switchgear objects
If neither a closed nor an open position is defined, a status of

'invalid' is displayed.
4-26
4.5.2.6. View / Protection zone circuit-breakers

The detailed view shows all the circuit-breakers belonging to the
respective protection zone.
Fig. 4.18 Protection zone circuit-breakers, detailed view
These circuit-breakers are intertripped, for example, in the event

of a busbar fault in the respective protection zone.
4-27
4.5.2.7. View / Disturbance recorder
Overview
The number of records and the current status is displayed for
every bay unit:
Ready: The disturbance recorder is ready to make records.
Not ready: The disturbance recorder has to be restarted in
the detailed view of the bay (e.g. when the 'fix' mode of
recording is set and the memory is full, see Section 5.3.9.2.).
Recording: A record procedure is in progress.
Fig. 4.19 Disturbance recorder overview
Press 'Shift' and click on the desired fields to select several fields
at once.
Detailed views of all the bay units selected can be opened.
Recording can be initiated for each of the bay units selected.
The records of each of the bay units selected can be
transferred (see Fig. 4.20 'Transferring disturbance recorder
records')
The records of each of the bay units can be deleted.
4-28
Transferring disturbance recorder records (together)

The records of the bay units selected can be transferred together
in a single operation.
Fig. 4.20 Transferring disturbance recorder records
This dialog provides the following facilities:

Select a directory for storing the records
Deleting the records transferred in the protection system
Manual transfer of records using the ComTrade standard
Automatic transfer (only if 'Delete disturbance recorder data'
is selected): the user has the possibility of setting the transfer
interval and selecting the ComTrade format.
4-29
Detailed view
Dialog for viewing individual bay units and processing records.
Fig. 4.21 Disturbance recorder detailed view
The following data are displayed:

Status (defined in the overview)
Number of records available
Number of free memory addresses
Sampling rate (see Section 5.3.9. ' Configuration /
Disturbance recorder')
Type of trigger
Duration of recording
Record number (see Disturbance recorder file).
The dialog provides the following facilities:

Stop disturbance recording
Start disturbance recording
Deleting records manually (only the oldest record is
accessible)
Selection of ComTrade format, i.e. saving according to
standard 91 or 99
Manual transfer of the 'ComTrade' record (only the oldest
record is accessible).
4-30
Disturbance recorder file

COMTRADE format
Saving records in the COMTRADE format involves the automatic
creation of three files.
1. dddsssnn.CFG
2. A file with the extension .DAT
3. A file with the extension .HDR
Record file name

The disturbance recorder records are saved in files with the
following standard names in the PC:
dddsssnn.CFG
where ddd Day of the year (1...365)
sss Disturbance recorder station number
nn Consecutive disturbance recorder number.
The name of the file can be changed providing the records are
transferred manually.
4-31
4.5.2.8. View / BP function monitoring (REB500sys only)

The menu item 'BP function monitoring' is only provided with
REB500sys.
Fig. 4.22 Bay protection measurements
The bay units licensed to include bay protection are listed in the
overview dialog.
To view the measurements, select a bay unit (highlighted) and
click on the 'Continue' button or more directly, simply double
click on the desired bay unit using the left mouse button.
The 'Select function' dialog with a list of bay protection functions
and measurements available in the particular bay unit appears.
Select the desired function either by double clicking on it or
selecting and clicking on the 'Open function' button.
The protection function measurement is automatically refreshed.
Close the dialog either by clicking on 'OK' or 'Cancel'.
4.5.2.9. View / Event list

Protection system events are shown in chronological order. By
correspondingly setting the event filter, just protection events,
system events or test events can be viewed separately. Events
with an invalid time tag can be excluded from the display. You
can choose between 'User-defined' and 'System-defined' event
texts.
4-32
Fig. 4.23 Event list
The central unit event list has a maximum length of 1000 and the
bay units 100 records.
In the event of a supply failure, the events stored in the REB500
central unit remain intact for at least 24 hours.
Load events
The protection system has an event memory for every unit
(central unit and bay units).
To upload the latest events to the PC, open the 'View' menu and
select 'Event list'. This opens the 'Event list' dialog (HMI500 must
be in the on-line mode). Click on the 'Refresh' button to upload
the events. The protection system stores the events until they
are explicitly deleted.
The list viewed on the PC is refreshed either on command or
cyclically. To specify the refreshing interval, select 'Tools /
Settings' (see Section 4.5.6.5.).
4-33
There is no indication should the event memory overflow before

the events have been uploaded. The events are updated as
determined by the system response setting (see Section
4.5.3.11. 'Settings / Event memory').
The following information is shown for every event:
Type of event
P = Protection function event
S = System event
T = Test generator event
Date event occurred
Time event occurred
Time tag valid (yes / no)
Source of event with application, node and device ID
FFFSSAAAA (e.g. BPD010004)
FFF: English function designation (e.g. PDP =
Bay protection device)
SS: No. of the bus section
AAAA: Address of the hardware unit that
generated the event.
NOTE: The source data are important for locating hardware

defects.
Text as entered via 'Configuration/Binary module' (user

defined) or alternatively, the name assigned by the system
(system defined)
Value, e.g. ON or OFF.
The width of the columns can be adjusted by dragging the
border with the mouse in the table header.
Providing a printer is connected to the PC, you can print the
event list by clicking on the Print button.
The event list can be saved in a text file on the PC with the aid of
'ASCII export'.
Deleting events
An event is marked (becomes highlighted) by clicking on it, with
the mouse and several events by holding the mouse button
pressed and moving the pointer over them.
4-34
Clicking in the blank field at the top left of the window (next to
Type) marks all the events in the list.
Deleting the PC list

Mark events you wish to delete and click on the 'Delete PC list'
button. Deleting can take several seconds and single events,
groups of events or all events can be deleted.
Deleting the system list

All the events stored in the protection system are deleted.
Deleting events that have been viewed

All the protection events viewed since opening the window are
deleted.
System events when starting

A number of system signals that are generated when starting the
system are recorded as events. Up to the instant that system
clocks are automatically synchronized, events may have an
incorrect date and time. These events are not displayed if 'Only
events with a valid time tag' was selected.
4.5.2.10. View / Reset latched tripping and signaling relays
Fig. 4.24 Resetting latched tripping and signaling relays
All latched signals are reset and the corresponding display on

the local control unit deleted.
4-35
4.5.3. Settings
4.5.3.1. Settings / System response

See Section 5.4.2. Settings / System response.
4.5.3.2. Settings / Busbar protection

See Section 5.4.3. Busbar protection (settings and calcula-
tions).
4.5.3.3. Settings / Overcurrent release

See Section 11.10.1 Overcurrent release of the trip command
(option).
4.5.3.4. Settings / Voltage release

The setting dialog for the voltage release is only available
providing the function is part of the scope of supply.
See Section 11.10.2. Release logic / matrix.
4.5.3.5. Settings / Voltage / external release

See Section 11.10.2. Release logic / matrix.
4.5.3.6. Settings / Bay protection (REB500sys only)

The setting dialog for the bay protection is only available
See Section 12. Bay protection.
4.5.3.7. Settings / Breaker failure protection

The setting dialog for the breaker failure protection is only
available providing the function is part of the scope of supply.
See Section 11.1. Breaker failure protection (option).
4.5.3.8. Settings / Overcurrent protection

The setting dialog for the time-overcurrent protection is only
available providing the function is part of the scope of supply.
See Section 11.3. Overcurrent protection (def. time) (option).
4.5.3.9. Settings / End zone protection

The setting dialog for the end zone protection is only available
See Section 11.2. End fault protection (option).
4-36
4.5.3.10. Settings / CB pole discrepancy

The setting dialog for the CB pole discrepancy function is only
available providing it is part of the scope of supply.
See Section 11.4. 'Breaker pole discrepancy protection (option)'
4.5.3.11. Settings / Event memory

See Section 5.4.12. 'Event memory'.
4.5.3.12. Settings / Communication

Providing the corresponding hardware has been fitted, the
busbar protection can communicate with a station automation
system (SCS) or station monitoring system (SMS) via the
interbay bus connector.
See Section 11.13. 'Interbay bus (IBB) connection'.
4.5.4. Configuration
4.5.4.1. Configuration / Activate/deactivate

Entire bay units or individual items of plant can be activated or
deactivated, i.e. included in or excluded from the protection
system.
See Section 7.6. 'Configuring REB500 to match the layout of the
primary plant'.
4.5.4.2. Configuration / Voltage transformers

This menu item only appears if the protection system includes
VTs.
See Section 11.8. 'Configuration - voltage transformer (REB500
option)'.
4.5.4.3. Configuration / BP licenses (REB500sys only)

This menu item only appears if the protection system includes
the bay protection function.
See Chapter 12 'Bay protection'.
An overview of licensed and configured protection function
groups for each bay unit is shown. A help text appears when the
mouse pointer is over a licensed group listing the protection
functions it contains.
4-37
Fig. 4.25 Licensed bay protection functions
4.5.4.4. Configuration / Device structure

See Section 5.3.6. 'Configuration / Device structure'.
4.5.4.5. Configuration / Isolators

This menu item permits the isolator labels to be changed.
See Section 5.3.2. 'Configuration / Isolators'.
4.5.4.6. Configuration / Disturbance recorder

See Section 5.3.9. 'Configuration / Disturbance recorder'.
4.5.4.7. Configuration / CB inspection

See Section 5.3.11. 'Configuration / CB inspection'.
4.5.4.8. Configuration / Binary module

See Section 5.3.7. 'Configuration / Binary module'.
4.5.4.9. Configuration / Local HMI LEDs (LMI LEDs)

See Section 5.3.10. 'Configuration / HMI LEDs'.
4.5.4.10. Configuration / Circuit-breakers

This menu item permits the circuit-breaker labels and the
recovery time to be changed.
See Section 5.3.3. 'Configuration / Circuit-breaker'.
4-38
4.5.4.11. Configuration / Current transformers

This menu item permits the CT labels and ratios to be changed.
See Section 5.3.4. 'Configuration / Current transformers'.
4.5.4.12. Configuration / GPS time synchronization

This menu permits the GPS synchronization to be configured.
See Section 11.15. 'Synchronizing using GPS (option)'.
4.5.5. Testing
4.5.5.1. Testing / Test mode
WARNING: Switching to the test mode while the protection is

in operation should only be undertaken by especially trained
personnel. Incorrect manipulations can cause false tripping, for
example, by inadvertently operating a tripping relay, simulating
an incorrect isolator or circuit-breaker status or activating a
tripping output (e.g. External TRIP).
The test generator is activated by opening the 'Testing' menu,

selecting 'Test mode' and entering a valid password. A tick
appears next to the menu item, 'Test mode' is added to the
status line at the bottom of the screen and the 'Test mode' dialog
opens.

'Test' when the program is supplied.
The test generator is used in conjunction with the 'Status of

binary inputs/outputs' dialog (has to be opened by the operator),
see Section 4.5.2.4. 'View / Binary input/output status'.
When the test generator is active, the statuses of the tripping
commands cannot change.
Where bay protection is installed, a test sequencer can be
activated in the test mode which checks the protection functions
(see Section 12.1.4.).
4-39
Fig. 4.26 Test mode
Unblock all relays

Clicking on the 'Unblock all relays' button restores the relays to
normal operation and their statuses can change again.
WARNING: An output relay can now be set or reset either

directly (e.g. by setting an output relay) or indirectly (e.g. via
an input or by a protection function).
The greatest care must be taken when using the test mode,
especially when the protection system is in operation.
Block all relays

Clicking on the Block all relays button prevents the statuses of
all relays for which outputs have been configured from being
changed.
Block all tripping relays

Clicking on the 'Block all tripping relays' button prevents the
statuses of all tripping relays from being changed with the
exception of '41810_In service', '41835_Test generator active'
and '41410_Output relays blocked'.
Reset all overridden relays

Clicking on the 'Reset all overridden signals' button returns all
inputs and outputs which had statuses impressed on them for
test purposes to their original states.
4-40
NOTE: Blocking hierarchy

Blocking by the test generator takes precedence over all
other functions, i.e. neither a protection function nor an
External TRIP signal can initiate a trip.
Unblocking by the test generator takes precedence over all

other functions, i.e. blocking by an isolator or differential
current alarm or a signal applied to an opto-coupler input is
cancelled.
Using the test generator
Fig. 4.27 Statuses of binary inputs and outputs in the test

mode
In order to set or reset binary inputs and outputs using the test
generator, it is necessary to open the 'Status of binary
inputs/outputs' dialog. Providing the test mode is active, the
status of an input or output can be changed by simply double-
clicking on it.
Regardless of whether they are logical '0' or logical '1', inputs
and outputs are normally green, those with impressed statuses
yellow and invalid ones red. Impressed statuses are green after
the display is refreshed.
4-41
Shutting down the test generator

The test generator is deactivated by clicking on the menu item
'Test mode' a second time. All the relays are then restored to
their original statuses, any latching is reset and blocking by the
test generator is cancelled.
4.5.5.2. Testing / Installation mode

This mode is activated by opening the 'Testing' menu, selecting
'Installation mode' and entering a valid password.
A tick appears next to the menu item, 'Installation mode' is
displayed on the status line at the bottom of the screen and the
'Installation mode' dialog opens.
Click on 'Installation mode' in the 'Testing' menu to reset the
installation mode. The tick in the menu item is reset.

'Install' when the program is supplied.
Fig. 4.28 Restart the protection system
4-42
Fig. 4.29 Delete database in the protection system
Delete data base in the protection system

All the data in the protection system are deleted, i.e. the project
database (MDB file) in the protection system is deleted.
Restart the protection system

Clicking on the 'Restart the protection system' button reinitializes
the protection.
Debug mode
In the debug mode, the protection system generates additional
internal program events. As a rule, the debug mode is only used
by the ABB engineering department for test purposes. In seldom
cases should the corrective action suggested in Chapter 9 not
prove successful, it is possible that a solution can be found using
the debug mode.
Read trace ability information

The hardware data (type, serial number, revision index, date of
manufacture etc.) and software data (version) are uploaded from
the protection equipment and stored in the database to enable
previous history to be retraced.
4-43
4.5.6. Tools
4.5.6.1. Tools / Version

This menu item is for administering the database for the specific
protection system, which contains information such as settings,
event texts, configuration of the binary inputs and outputs etc.
Parts of the database can be edited on the PC using HMI500
and then downloaded to the protection. The database has a
version number and index that are displayed in the HMI main
menu.
Version: X.YY, date of the last change, description
The version is purely numerical, i.e. X {0...9} and Y {0...9}. It is
assigned by ABB while processing the contract and determined
at the time the system is accepted by the user. The user cannot
change it subsequently.
Index: XX, date of the last change, description
The index only comprises letters, i.e. X {A...Z}. The user must
change the index and its description if he changes the REB500
settings in order to document and distinguish different sets of
settings. When a new index is assigned, the current date on the
PC is recorded as the date of the last change.
Fig. 4.30 Version
4-44
4.5.6.2. Tools / Reports
Fig. 4.31 Reports
The 'Reports' dialog is opened by selecting 'Reports' in the

'Tools' menu. It contains a list of the various kinds of reports.
Either a desired report can be printed on its own or all the reports
can be printed by activating the 'Print all reports' check box.
The difference between the options in the 'Printing quality' field is
that the data are presented in tabular form if the 'Normal' radio
button is active.
Unless a printer is actually installed on the PC, the 'Reports'
menu item is grey and inactive. A printer does not, however,
have to be connected.
4.5.6.3. Tools / Export SCS data

This menu item exports any communication data contained in
the database.
Fig. 4.32 Export SCS data
4-45
In the case of the optional IEC 61850-8-1, LON and IEC 60870-
5-103 communication protocols, the 'Export' button creates files
that can be used to configure the communication interface at the
remote end.
4.5.6.4. Tools / Change password

This menu item provides facility for changing the passwords
giving access to various protected functions (changing settings
and activating the test mode or installation mode). Passwords
apply to HMI500 on the PC and not for the protection system.
4.5.6.5. Tools / Settings
HMI500 settings
Some of the operator program functions can be customized:
Fig. 4.33 HMI500 settings
Communication
Communication can be established with a REB500 or
REB500sys system either via a serial interface or the TCP/IP
protocol. The input fields for the communication parameters
presented by the program depend on which of the two is chosen.
Serial interface:
In addition to defining the serial interface (COM port), there is
also a setting for the Baud rate.
4-46
TCP/IP winsock:
Settings are provided for the TCP/IP address and the TCP/IP
port of the REB system to which communication is being
established.
It is possible to change between the communication modes On-
line, Off-line and Simulation. Clicking on the 'Check Online'
button causes HMI500 to check whether communication with
REB500 system is active or can be established (see Section
4.3.2.1.).
Write DB download/upload log file

If these checkboxes are active, a log file is saved every time the
database is downloaded to, respectively uploaded from the
protection system.
Parameters for reading and exporting event data

Settings are provided for the period for cyclically reading events
and the separator for an ASCII file when exporting events.
Database locations
HMI500 creates a number of configuration databases. The
following dialog provides facility for defining the directories where
the databases are located and changing the database names.
Default directories are created during the installation of HMI500
and it is recommended that these not be changed.
Fig. 4.34 Settings / Database locations
4-47
PSM support (option)

HMI500 automatically displays this directory when E_wineve is
installed on the PC. The directory enables you to verify the
response of E_wineve after disturbance recorder data have been
transferred.
Check the box 'Send notification after automatically uploading
data' to obtain notification as to which disturbance recorder
data have been sent. For this purpose, E_wineve has to have
been started in the batch mode.
Check the box 'Evaluate after manually uploading data from
the protection system' to be offered the possibility of
evaluating disturbance recorder data using E_wineve after
they have been manually transferred.
The button 'Select PSM' provides facility for locating the
E_wineve installation to be used for evaluating disturbance
recorder data.
Fig. 4.35 PSM support settings
4.5.6.6. Tools / Set system time

The system clock in the protection system is equipped with a
standby battery and if not synchronized periodically by an
external reference, runs independently with an accuracy of
150 ppm (13 s per day). The date and time are set by opening
the 'Tools' menu and selecting 'Set system time'. The date and
time displayed are those effective on the PC.
4-48
The settings in the fields can be incremented or decremented by

clicking on the appropriate arrow to the right of the value. After
making the necessary changes, click on the 'Set time' button to
automatically download the new date and time to the protection
system.
Fig. 4.36 Setting the system time
4.5.6.7. Tools / MMC session manager
Fig. 4.37 MMC session manager
As a rule, this function runs entirely automatically and requires

no intervention by the operator. Only if after something untoward
happens and an error message is displayed is it necessary to
manually close sessions (e.g. if the PC is switched off without
correctly shutting down the program).
Every transaction involving communication between the operator
program and the protection system (e.g. reading the event list or
4-49
setting inputs and outputs using the test generator) is managed

as a (DAC) session. Open the 'Tools' menu and select 'MMC
session manager' to open a dialog with a list of open sessions.
Mark the sessions to be closed and then click on the 'Close
session' button. Take care when doing so that no other PC is
connected to any other part of the protection system as its
communication may also be terminated.
The session 'TGR_Read EMI' refers to the main communication
between the operator PC and the protection system and must
remain open. HMI500 has to be restarted should the 'TGR_Read
EMI' session be closed by mistake.
Refer also to Section 9.2.4. 'HMI500 faults'.
4.5.7. Window
When several windows are in use, this menu provides facility for
arranging them to overlap, under each other or next to each
other.
4.5.8. Help (?)
About
This provides information on the program version and the PC
system (available memory etc.).
4-50
4.6. Error messages

4.7. Corrective action

4.7.1. Available system resources

Should your PCs system resources fall below 20% after starting
HMI500 (select About in the 'Help' menu and click on 'System
info'), HMI500 may not function correctly. In this case, close all
other Windows applications.
4.8. De-installation
To de-install HMI500 open the Windows control panel and then
'Add/remove programs'. Find the entry for HMI500 in the list of
programs presented and select it and then click on OK to
remove the program.
4-51
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G ABB Switzerland Ltd
December 08
5. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS
5.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 5-4
5.2. View menu............................................................................. 5-4
5.3. Configuration menu ............................................................... 5-5

5.3.1. Configuration / Activate/deactivate device ............................... 5-5
5.3.2. Configuration / Isolators ........................................................... 5-5
5.3.3. Configuration / Circuit-breakers ............................................... 5-7
5.3.4. Configuration / Current transformers........................................ 5-9
5.3.5. Configuration / Voltage transformers ..................................... 5-10
5.3.6. Configuration / Device structure............................................. 5-10
5.3.7. Configuration / Binary module................................................ 5-12
5.3.7.1. Overview................................................................................ 5-12
5.3.7.2. Binary inputs .......................................................................... 5-13
5.3.7.3. Bay unit binary inputs............................................................. 5-18
5.3.7.3.1. General signals...................................................................... 5-18
5.3.7.3.2. Busbar Protection (BBP)........................................................ 5-22
5.3.7.3.3. Breaker failure protection (BFP) ............................................ 5-22
5.3.7.3.4. End fault protection (EFP)...................................................... 5-24
5.3.7.3.5. Time-overcurrent (OCDT) ...................................................... 5-24
5.3.7.3.6. Disturbance recorder (DR)..................................................... 5-24
5.3.7.3.7. Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection (PDF) ................ 5-25
5.3.7.3.8. Voltage release (UV).............................................................. 5-25
5.3.7.3.9. Bay protection (BP) (REB500sys only) .................................. 5-25
5.3.7.4. Central unit binary inputs ....................................................... 5-26
5.3.7.4.1. General signals...................................................................... 5-26
5.3.7.4.2. Busbar protection (BBP) ........................................................ 5-28
5.3.7.4.5. Time-overcurrent protection (OCDT) ..................................... 5-29
5.3.7.5. Binary outputs........................................................................ 5-29
5.3.7.6. Binary outputs on the bay units.............................................. 5-34
5.3.7.6.1. General signals...................................................................... 5-34
5-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G

5.3.7.7. Central unit binary outputs ..................................................... 5-39
5.3.7.7.1. General signals...................................................................... 5-39
5.3.8. Configuration / Event text....................................................... 5-43
5.3.9. Configuration / Disturbance recorder ..................................... 5-44
5.3.9.1. Analog inputs ......................................................................... 5-44
5.3.9.2. Recording .............................................................................. 5-45
5.3.9.3. Signals ................................................................................... 5-45
5.3.10. Configuration / HMI LEDs ...................................................... 5-48
5.3.11. Configuration / CB inspection ................................................ 5-50
5.3.12. Configuration / GPS time synchronization ............................. 5-51
5.4. Settings and calculations ....................................................... 5-51

5.4.1. Rated frequency (not adjustable) ........................................... 5-51
5.4.2. Settings / System response ................................................... 5-51
5.4.2.1. System response to a differential current alarm..................... 5-51
5.4.2.2. System response to an isolator alarm.................................... 5-51
5.4.2.3. Isolator alarm delay................................................................ 5-52
5.4.2.4. Remote trip impulse width...................................................... 5-53
5.4.3. Busbar protection (settings and calculations) ........................ 5-54
5.4.3.1. Restrained amplitude comparison - IKmin and k ................... 5-56
5.4.3.2. Application example............................................................... 5-57
5.4.3.3. Busbar with just two bays ...................................................... 5-58
5.4.3.3.1. Busbar with several bays ....................................................... 5-59
5.4.3.4. Busbar fault with through current ........................................... 5-60
5.4.3.5. Differential current alarm setting ............................................ 5-63
5.4.3.6. Differential current alarm delay setting................................... 5-63
5.4.3.7. Neutral current supervision (operating characteristic L0)....... 5-63
5.4.3.8. Phase comparison ................................................................. 5-63
5.4.4. Overcurrent check for enabling tripping ................................. 5-64
5.4.5. Undervoltage check for enabling tripping............................... 5-64
5.4.6. Voltage release / External release ......................................... 5-64
5.4.7. Bay protection (BP) (REB500sys only) .................................. 5-64
5.4.8. Breaker failure protection (BFP) ............................................ 5-64
5.4.9. End fault protection (EFP)...................................................... 5-64
5.4.10. Time-overcurrent protection (OCDT) ..................................... 5-64
5-2
5.4.11. Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function (PDF) ................... 5-64

5.4.12. Event memory........................................................................ 5-64
5-3
5. CONFIGURATION AND SETTINGS
5.1. Introduction
HMI500 is the human-machine interface (HMI) for the protection
systems REB500 and REB500sys. For brevity, these operating
instructions refer simply to REB500 although the program ap-
plies to both systems. There are additional menu items, which
only apply to REB500sys, and attention is explicitly drawn to
these.
The REB500 busbar protection system is configured on the ba-
sis of the customers specification resulting from his response to
a questionnaire.
The following information is intended to enable the user to un-
derstand the choice of REB500 settings and to follow their calcu-
lation.
The basic configuration of the REB500 system is performed by
ABB. There are some additional settings that the user has to
make.
In this section, the various menus and submenus are explained
that require settings or the input of text by the user.
5.2. View menu
Fig. 5.1 Single-line diagram in the View menu
Right clicking an item opens a dialog for changing its label.
5-4
5.3. Configuration menu
Fig. 5.2 Menu items in the configuration menu
5.3.1. Configuration / Activate/deactivate device

This menu item is used to configure REB500 so that it agrees
with the actual state of the primary system in the station (e.g.
when additions are made to the station) (see Section 7.6.).
5.3.2. Configuration / Isolators

Changing isolator labels.
5-5
Overview
Fig. 5.3 Configuration / Isolators - Overview
The Overview tab opens a dialog with a list of all the isolators
in the single-line diagram with their labels and bay unit labels.
An isolator in a particular bay can be viewed by activating the
check box Feeder filter and selecting a bay from the list.
Details
Fig. 5.4 Configuration / Isolators - Details
5-6
The label in the Markings field of the Details dialog can be ed-
ited.
5.3.3. Configuration / Circuit-breakers
Overview
Fig. 5.5 Configuration / Circuit-breakers - Overview
All the feeder circuit-breakers and bus-tie breakers shown in the

single-line diagram are listed in this dialog together with their la-
bels, bay labels, type of circuit-breaker (feeder or bus-tie) and
the circuit-breaker reclaim time.
When Extended blocking function for bus tie-breaker is set to
No, the standard blocking function for bus tie-breakers is acti-
vated (see Section 3.8.7.). If this setting is Yes, the extended
blocking function for bus-ties in series is activated (see Sec-
tion 11.17.2.). This setting is relevant only for coupler breakers.
When Breaker position used for BBP is set to No, the current
measurement of busbar protection is enabled regardless of the
feeder circuit-breaker. When set to Yes, the current measure-
ment of busbar protection is enabled or disabled depending on
the position of the circuit-breaker. In this case, configuring the
signal 11505_Close command CB is imperative.
5-7
Details
The label in the Label field can be edited and the reclaim time
for each circuit-breaker is entered in the corresponding field (see
setting instruction below).
NOTE: The blocking (reclaim) time is determined as follows:

Reclaim time = bus-tie breaker operating time + arc extinction time +
60 ms
(60 ms = total transmission time + safety margin)
Parameter Min. Max. Default Step Unit

Reclaim time 20 300 120 20 ms
Table 5.1 Range of the reclaim time setting for circuit-

breakers
Fig. 5.6 Configuration / Circuit-breakers Details
NOTE: The operation of feeder and bus-tie breakers and the

reclaim time are described in detail in Section 3.8.7.
5-8
5.3.4. Configuration / Current transformers

Changing the CT labels and ratios.
Overview
All the CTs shown in the single-line diagram are listed in this dia-
log.
Details
Fig. 5.7 Configuration / Current transformer - Details
The label in the Markings field can be edited. The ratios in the
Transformer ratio fields are entered in terms of the primary and
secondary rated currents.
Min. Max. Step

Primary [A] I1, I2, I3, I4 50 10000 1
Secondary [A] I1, I2, I3, I4 1 5
The secondary setting is only for information. The selection of

1 A or 5 A as the secondary rating is achieved by appropriately
connecting the CT inputs on the REB500 bay unit (see Sec-
tion 3.3.3.).
5-9
5.3.5. Configuration / Voltage transformers

This menu item is only available when VTs are installed (see
Section 11.8.).
5.3.6. Configuration / Device structure

The device structure is configured by ABB when engineering the
system. This dialog is only for information as the configuration
cannot be changed.
Overview
The central unit and all the bay units are listed together with their
labels and type. The desired unit is selected by clicking the
mouse on it.
Fig. 5.8 Configuration / Device structure - Overview
Details
The Details dialog shows the function and ABB reference for
every type of module. The node ID indicates the assignment of
the module on the process bus.
5-10
Bay unit
Fig. 5.9 Configuration / Device structure Bay unit
Central unit
Fig. 5.10 Configuration / Device structure Central unit
The list for the central unit shows whether the modules are
masked or unmasked.
Refer to Section 3.3.2. Central unit modules for further informa-
tion.
5-11
5.3.7. Configuration / Binary module

This dialog is used while engineering the protection system to
configure the binary modules. The data entered are normally
provided in the questionnaire filled in by the user. The window
has three tabs:
Overview
Inputs
Outputs
5.3.7.1. Overview
Fig. 5.11 Configuration / Binary module - Overview
The overview tab opens a list with all the binary I/O modules for
which the following information is given:
ABB ref. (ABB designation for the bay or central unit)
Feeder (in which the bay unit is located, users label
for the bay)
Device (label)
Slot No. (module location in the bay or central unit)
Module type (designation).
These attributes cannot be changed.
5-12
5.3.7.2. Binary inputs

The overview provides facility for entering the auxiliary supply
voltage (battery voltage) and viewing the assignment of the bi-
nary inputs.
Overview (of input signals for each device)
Fig. 5.12 Configuration / Binary module - Central unit inputs
5-13
Fig. 5.13 Configuration / Binary module - Bay unit inputs
The upper part of this dialog contains a general layout of the re-
spective module. The auxiliary supply voltage for each group of
optocouplers (with a common pole) is entered below this.
All the input signals assigned to the module are listed.
Deleting a signal
A signal is deleted by marking it in the window and clicking on
the Delete button.
5-14
Details
Fig. 5.14 Configuration / Binary module - Inputs - Details
Signal allocation
The Details dialog provides facility for allocating optocoupler
inputs to the logical input signals and the event memory of every
input/output module.
The abbreviations C.x and O.x denote the CLOSE and OPEN
auxiliary contacts on the isolator or circuit-breaker respectively
as they appear in the Details dialog. Where an isolator or a cir-
cuit-breaker is only equipped with a single auxiliary contact, the
One auxiliary contact mode must be selected.
This mode is not recommended because the status of the isola-
tor or circuit-breaker cannot be properly monitored with just one
auxiliary contact.
The signals are configured at the time the protection system is
engineered and are generally not changed subsequently.
Only the CLOSED signal field is visible when the One auxiliary
contact mode is selected. The function of the OPEN signal is
achieved by inverting the CLOSED signal. In this case, we rec-
ommend connecting the auxiliary contact supply to the corre-
sponding input so that its integrity is supervised.
5-15
Inversion
The signals of optocoupler inputs can also be inverted.
Configuring events
Every signal can also be saved as an event in one or more event
memories (see Section 5.4.12. Event memory).
More check boxes and input fields appear when the Recording
radio button is selected. They determine whether the event is re-
corded on the positive or negative-going edge or on both edges.
The user can enter a text (up to 32 characters) defining the
event, but if none is entered the system assigns a default event
text. At least one event memory in the Send event to (= save
event in) field must also be selected either in the CU and/or BU
event memories. Furthermore, events can be assigned to the
event lists of interbay bus (IBB) 1 and/or 2.
Minimum input signal duration

Provision is made for prolonging the input signals in steps of
1 ms (reset delay).
New Signal
Fig. 5.15 Configuration / Binary module - Inputs -

New signal
The New signal button opens a dialog with a list for selecting
and adding a new signal.
Clicking on the arrow to the right of the Signal type field opens
a list of available signals. The effective list depends on the func-
tions ordered by the user.
5-16
The list can include as a maximum the following groups:

General signals
Busbar protection (BBP)
Breaker failure protection (BFP)
End fault protection (EFP)
Time-overcurrent protection (OCDT)
Disturbance recorder (DR)
CB pole discrepancy protection (PDF)
Voltage release (UV)
Bay protection (BP) (REB500sys only)
Signals that can only be assigned once disappear from the list
as soon as the user has assigned them once.
Clicking on the arrow button to the right of the signal name field
opens a list of the signals available according to the filter group
and module selected. Click on OK to confirm the choice or on
Cancel to close the window without making a choice. The De-
tails dialog opens automatically upon clicking on the OK but-
ton.
The new signal can now be assigned to an optocoupler and in-
verted if necessary.
Configuring optocoupler events

In addition to events generated by function signals, a physical
input can also be configured as an event. This is of advantage,
for example, when several signals are assigned to a physical in-
put or when ambivalent signals from isolators or circuit-breakers
need to be recorded. The Overview dialog provides facility for
this kind of assignment.
First select an optocoupler in the Overview dialog by clicking
on it above the signal list (column marked). Now click on the OC
event config. button to open the Configuration of events win-
dow.
5-17
5.3.7.3. Bay unit binary inputs

The following input signals are listed in ascending order in their
respective filter groups.
5.3.7.3.1. General signals
11105_External TRIP
This signal is a tripping command received from another protec-
tion device (including one in the remote station) and is used for
the REB500 tripping contact to trip faults on a line or a power
transformer (see Section 11.17.5.).
11110_External TRIP BB zone

This input is used when an external signal has to trip the entire
bus zone to which the feeder is connected (e.g. for an external
BFP signal). It is applied to all the bay units of the bus zone and
sections of busbars connected by an isolator trip together (inter-
tripping).
11115_Ext_Test_TRIP
This binary input activates the signal 21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP
which to operate several tripping relays simultaneously.
11120_AS Ext. TRIP

This is the tripping signal generated by the feeder protection part
of REB500. It trips faults on a line or power transformer with the
aid of the REB500 tripping contact. Tripping thus takes account
of the busbar configuration at the time (see Section 11.17.5.).
To function correctly, the signal has to be assigned to a feeder.
The simplest arrangement corresponds to the assignment of the
signal 11105_Ext. TRIP to feeders. If signal 11105_Ext. TRIP is
not available, a binary output has to be configured for 11120_AS
Ext. TRIP which is then assigned to a feeder.
The signal is activated by the feeder protection directly and does
not therefore appear as binary input signal.
5-18
11205_Block SP
A signal applied to this input blocks the local station protection
functions (BFP, EFP, OCDT and PDF), External Trip, tripping
by the busbar protection and intertripping of the respective bay
unit.
NOTE: The Bus Bar Protection continues to be active as a

system function. The primary injection of the concerned bay
unit can lead to a trip of the respective zone.

All the output contacts configured for a bay unit are blocked.
11215_Ext. measuring disturbed

This signal is active when invalid analog values are received
from an external device. The busbar protection (i.e. the specific
protection zone of the busbar) and all the local protection func-
tions are blocked. If the disturbance lasts longer than 400 ms,
diagnostic events are generated (BBP Minor Error 7 and BBP
Minor Error 29).
This input should only be used in special cases and only when
engineering a REB500 system.
11505_Close command CB
The circuit-breaker close command is needed by the busbar and
end fault protection functions in bus-tie breaker and configured
feeder bay units to control the REB500 measuring system (see
Section 3.8.7.).
11510...11525_Supervision aux. voltage_x

The supervision of the auxiliary supply is configured when the
compliance of the auxiliary contacts on the isolators with the re-
quired switching sequence cannot be guaranteed and for this
reason the Not CLOSED = OPEN logic has to be used. These
signals ensure that the protection responds correctly should the
auxiliary supply to the isolators fail.
This signal is only applicable in the case of Not CLOSED =
OPEN!
5-19
11530_Isolator/Breaker Position
The position of a circuit-breaker or an isolator is signaled by one
or two auxiliary contacts (see Section 3.7.4.).
11605_External release Trip

Providing they have been configured, a signal applied to this in-
put enables tripping by the busbar protection and the intertrip-
ping function in the bay unit (AND logic of tripping and enabling
signals). The input has no influence on other protection func-
tions.
This input can be used in special cases to interlock tripping by
the protection by, for example, an external undervoltage relay.
11610_External reset
Tripping commands and signals can be configured to latch after
picking up, in which case they must be reset by applying a signal
to this input.
It also resets the text display and LEDs on the local control unit.
A reset signal resets the entire system.
11615, 11625, 11635, 11645_Inspection_x-Off

These inspection inputs (x = 1 to 4) activate the isolator or cir-
cuit-breaker inspection mode for the cases 1 to 4.
As with the isolator inputs for the busbar image, two anti-
coincident signals can be connected to these inputs. If the status
of both inputs is identical, this is interpreted as an error. The last
valid position is maintained and the LHMI on the bay unit indi-
cates the error message Insp. Alarm x (x= 1..4 corresponding to
the number of the inspection input).
These signals are only used when anticoincidence supervision of
the inspection inputs is specified. The following signal pairs re-
sult in relation to the inspection cases.
Status Inspection 1 Inspection 2 Inspection 3 Inspection 4

OPEN 11615 11625 11635 11645
CLOSED 11620 11630 11640 11650
Table 5.2 Signal pairs supervised for anticoincidence
Refer to Section 11.12. Inspection and maintenance.
5-20
11620, 11630, 11640, 11650_Inspection_x-On

These inspection inputs (x = 1 to 4) activate the isolator or cir-
cuit-breaker inspection mode.
They are only used both in cases where there is only one in-
spection signal (without anticoincidence supervision) and where
there are anticoincidence signals (with anticoincidence supervi-
sion) (see Table 5.2).
11655_Maintenance-Off
Anti-coincident maintenance input. Refer to the description for
the Inspection_x-Off signals. If the status of both inputs is iden-
tical, the LHMI on the bay unit indicates MaintenanceAlarm.
11660_Maintenance-On
This input is excited by the maintenance function. It is used
should only one maintenance signal be available. Refer to Chap-
ter 8 Operation and maintenance for a detailed description of
the maintenance function.
11765_General Start DR
This signal is configured in the bay unit and together with the in-
put signal 36705_General Start DR from the central unit trig-
gers the disturbance recorder in the bay unit. Without this signal,
the bay unit does not respond to a general start of the distur-
bance recorder.
It is only used for interlocking the general start signal for the dis-
turbance recorder and may not be configured onto an optocou-
pler input. This is achieved by setting the mode to No auxiliary
contact after opening the dialog Binary module and clicking on
the tabs Inputs and Details (see Fig. 5.14).
1184011885_GP_In_x
With a properly configured event configuration, the input signal
can be transmitted via LON or IEC103 and displayed on the con-
trol system. It is also possible to display the state of the signal on
the local HMI LEDs of the bay unit.
5-21
5.3.7.3.2. Busbar Protection (BBP)
12605_Bypass Check Zone

The check zone criterion for the release of the bus bar protection
is bypassed.
5.3.7.3.3. Breaker failure protection (BFP)
13205_Block BFP
The operation of the breaker failure protection is blocked for the
corresponding bay unit. When the blocking signal is cancelled,
the timers start again at t = 0.
13210_BP Block BFP

This signal is directly activated by the feeder protection unit and
doesnt therefore appear as a binary input signal. The operation
of the breaker failure protection of the corresponding feeder is
blocked. When the blocking signal is cancelled and providing a
starting signal is present and current is flowing, the timers start
again at t = 0.
13605_Trip transferred
The circuit-breaker sets this input when it cannot open, for ex-
ample, because the air pressure is too low or there is a leak in
the case of GIS (Alarm Stage 3 - Circuit-breaker blocked).
A tripping signal is then transferred to the adjacent breakers
(busbar trip) and possibly the remote station (see Section
11.1.3.2.).
13610_BP Trip transferred

Reserved for special applications.
does not therefore appear as a binary input signal.
13705_External Start BFP

A signal applied to this input starts the breaker failure protection
timer (independently of the overcurrent measurement).
5-22
13710...13735_Start BFP Lp_x

Phase-selective (p = 1 to 3) starting of the breaker failure protec-
tion with two inputs per phase (x = 1 to 2).
The breaker failure timer is started by this input signal providing
the current in the respective phase is above pick-up.
13740...13765_Start BFP L1L2L3_x

Three-phase starting of the breaker failure protection by six in-
puts (x = 1 to 6).
The breaker failure timer is started by a signal at one of these
inputs providing the current in at least one phase is high enough.
13770...13780_Start BFP Lp
Breaker failure protection with phase-selective starting (p = 1, 2
or 3). The breaker failure protection timer starts when this signal
is activated by feeder protection function and the BFP measures
a current in the corresponding phase.
13785_BP Start BFP L1L2L3

Breaker failure protection with three-phase starting. The breaker
failure protection timer starts when this signal is activated and
the BFP measures a current in any phase.
13790_BP Ext. start BFP L1L2L3

Breaker failure protection with three-phase starting. The breaker
failure protection timer starts when this signal is activated re-
gardless of the current measurement.
5-23
5.3.7.3.4. End fault protection (EFP)
14205_Block EFP
The operation of the end fault protection is blocked for the corre-
sponding bay unit. When the blocking signal is cancelled, the
timers start again at t = 0.
14405_AS EFP Manual Close

This signal is set by the bay protection when the circuit-breaker
receives a close command to prevent the end fault protection
function from tripping.
5.3.7.3.5. Time-overcurrent (OCDT)
15210_Block OCDT
The operation of the time-overcurrent function is blocked. When
the blocking signal is cancelled, the timer starts again at t = 0.
5.3.7.3.6. Disturbance recorder (DR)
16705...16750_Start DR_x
The disturbance recorder function is started by an external signal
applied to one of these 10 inputs (x = 1 to 10), or they can be
simply used for recording purposes. The external signal may
come, for example, from the tripping contact of a bay protection
relay or the starting contact of a time-overcurrent relay. Opto-
couplers are configured for these inputs.
The signal 16750_Start DR_10 is also transferred to the central
unit where it initiates the general start of all disturbance record-
ers.
16760_BP Central start DR

Those disturbance recorders in the bay units that are configured
start. The signal Central start DR in the bay units must be con-
figured.
5-24
5.3.7.3.7. Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection (PDF)
17205_Block PDF
The operation of the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection
is blocked. The timers start at t = 0 again when the input resets.
17710_Start PDF
Providing this input is configured, the circuit-breaker pole dis-
crepancy protection is started or enabled by an external signal
(see Section 11.4.).
5.3.7.3.8. Voltage release (UV)
18205_Fuse failure superv. UV

Provision is made for a tripped m.c.b. to apply a signal to the in-
put 18205_Fuse failure superv. UV and enable tripping of the
protection zone concerned (see Section 11.9.).
5.3.7.3.9. Bay protection (BP) (REB500sys only)
19205_Block BP
The protection output signals of the respective bay unit are
blocked. (Internal processing of the functions continues and
therefore measurements and signals continue to be displayed on
the local HMI.)
19600_Activation BP ParSet_1
The protection functions and settings assigned to parameter set
1 are active.
They remain active after the signal has been reset.
2 are active.
3 are active.
5-25
4 are active.
BP input signals available for configuration

In addition to the bay protection input signals listed above, which
are always available, use can also be made of the signals con-
figured for the binary signal input block of the bay protection. The
number of these signals depends on the protection functions and
signals included in the bay protection (see Section 12.1. Appli-
cation description).
5.3.7.4. Central unit binary inputs

The following input signals are listed in ascending order in their
Most central unit signals can only be assigned once. However,
two input signals (31105_External TRIP BB zone and
31805_External release BB zone) occur for each busbar zone.
Thus the busbar section must be given when selecting one of
these signals.
31105_External TRIP BB zone (BB zone tripped by external

signal)
A busbar section can be tripped by a signal applied to this input.
Up to 32 sections can be addressed. One input can be config-
ured for each section. Sections connected by isolators are
tripped together (intertripping).
31205_Block SP
The station protection (SP) functions (BBP, BFP, EFP, OCDT
and PDF) including External Trip, External TRIP BB zone and
intertripping are blocked throughout the system.

All the output contacts configured for the central unit and all the
bay units are blocked, i.e. the current status of the relays is
maintained.
5-26
31215_Block IEC master direction

REB500 does not transfer any events, error messages, meas-
urements etc., to the master station via the station bus
IEC 60870-5-103 when this input is active.
31505_Accept bus image alarm

This signal acknowledges (resets) an isolator alarm. If it is con-
tinuously active, a new isolator alarm is immediately reset (see
Section 3.7.4.).
31805_External release BB zone

This input enables the tripping signal for a section of busbar
(AND gate with tripping and enabling inputs). One of these in-
puts can be configured for each busbar section. The entire pro-
tection zone surrounding the busbar section is enabled (transfer
tripping). Sections connected by isolators are also enabled
(transfer tripping). The input can be used in special cases, for
example, to interlock the tripping signal by an undervoltage re-
lay. This will generally delay tripping (see Section 11.10.).
31230_Block BB zone
With this signal of the bus bar protection the inter-tripping and
the external trip of the BB block is blocked. A maximum of 12
bus zones resp. blocking signals can be configured in one BIO
unit. A complete bus zone in which the BB block is located would
be blocked (inter-tripping). If the bus block is associated with an
isolator then it is also blocked (inter-tripping).
The input operates with a time delay of up to 300 ms.
31810_External reset
Tripping commands and signals can be configured to latch and
when they are, they are reset by a signal applied to this input.
The same signal also resets the LEDs (alarm and tripping). The
reset signal applies to the entire system.
31815_Ext. superv. in service_1

Input for monitoring any fans, external supplies etc. The signal
41805_Alarm is set in the central unit when this signal changes
from logical 1 to 0.
5-27
31820_Ext. superv. in service_2

Input for monitoring any fans, external supplies etc. The signal
1805_Alarm is set in the central unit when this signal changes
from logical 1 to 0.
31825_Time minute synchr.

Clock synchronization input. Synchronization takes place on the
positive edge of a minute impulse. The impulse must be at least
20 ms wide.
Should this signal be configured in a bay unit, but either not con-
nected or has otherwise failed, the error TIM Minor Error 022 is
signaled on the local HMI.
31830_Time second synchr.

Clock synchronization input. Synchronization takes place on the
positive edge of a one-second impulse. The impulse must be at
least 20 ms wide.
Should this signal be configured in a bay unit, but either not con-
nected or has otherwise failed, the error TIM Minor Error 021 is
signaled on the local HMI.
3184031885_GP_In_x
With a properly configured event configuration, the input signal
can be transmitted via LON or IEC103 and displayed on the con-
trol system.
5.3.7.4.2. Busbar protection (BBP)
32205_Block BBP
The busbar protection function is blocked throughout the system.
32605_Bypass Check Zone

The check zone criterion for the release of the bus bar protection
is bypassed.
5-28

33210_Block BFP
The breaker failure protection is blocked throughout the system.
When cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0 providing the cur-
rent is higher than setting.

34215_Block EFP
The end fault protection is blocked throughout the system.
When cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0 providing the cir-
cuit-breaker is open and the current higher than setting.
5.3.7.4.5. Time-overcurrent protection (OCDT)

35220_Block OCDT
The time-overcurrent function is blocked throughout the system.
When cancelled, the timers start again at t = 0.

36705_General Start DR
The disturbance recorders in all the bay units are started by this
input if configured. The signal General start disturbance re-
corder must also be configured in the bay units.

37205_Block PDF
The circuit-breaker pole discrepancy protection is blocked
throughout the system. The timers restart at t = 0 when the sig-
nal is resets.

39205_Block BP
The bay protection output signals are blocked throughout the
system. (Internal processing of the functions continues and
therefore measurements and signals continue to be displayed on
the local HMI.)
5.3.7.5. Binary outputs

The procedures for configuring binary inputs and outputs are al-
most identical. Therefore only the differences are dealt with in
this section.
5-29
Overview (output signals available on each device)
Fig. 5.16 Configuration / Binary module - Outputs -

Overview - CU
Fig. 5.17 Configuration / Binary module - Outputs - Over-

view - BU
5-30
The overview of the BU outputs shows which signals are as-

signed to which output relays. An output relay can be controlled
by several signals (e.g. relay CR02 by TRIP, BFP TRIP and
AR Def. Trip.7).
For reasons of safety, it is impossible to mix tripping commands
and signals, i.e. tripping commands can only be combined with
tripping commands and control signals with control signals.
Tripping commands:
21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
21110_TRIP
23105_BFP TRIP
25105_OCDT TRIP
27105_PDF TRIP
Tripping signals generated by the bay protection functions
The remaining signals and all the CU signals are control signals.
NOTE: Configuring tripping signals for operating circuit-

breakers either to latch or operate with a reset delay of at least
100 ms is recommended.
5-31
Fig. 5.18 Configuration / Binary module - Outputs - Details -

CU
Fig. 5.19 Configuration / Binary module - Outputs - Details -

BU
5-32
This Details dialog concerns the following functions.
Signal delay
Every output signal can be configured either to latch (until reset
by a signal) or to have a defined reset delay. A reset delay can
be entered in the field t and can be changed by clicking with
the mouse.
Blocking output signals throughout the system

In the case of all the output signals being blocked by the self-
supervision function or a signal applied to the blocking CU or BU
input Block output relays, the statuses of the selected output
signals cannot change. This setting determines whether a sig-
nal is really blocked or is generated anyway.
Relay output
The current signal is assigned to the output relays with checked
check boxes. Other signals of the same type (tripping command
or control signal) may also be assigned to the same relay.
Unavailable output relays (gray) already have signals of the
other type assigned to them. The remaining relays are available
for other signals.
Event configuration
The configuration of an output signal event is the same as for an
input signal event. An event is generated when the output signal
is set, respectively reset.
New signal
Same as for the binary inputs (see Section 5.3.7.3. Bay unit bi-
nary inputs).
Central unit signals

Most of the CU signals only occur once. There is an output sig-
nal Trip BB zone for each section of busbar (bus zone), there-
fore the respective zone must be given when selecting this sig-
nal.
Delete
Same as for the binary inputs (see Section 5.3.7.3. Bay unit bi-
nary inputs).
5-33
Configuring output relay events

An event is generated when an output relay picks up or resets,
i.e. this type of event takes any reset delay that has been set or
blocking by another signal into account.
Select an output relay in the overview dialog first by clicking on
its label above the signal list (its column is then highlighted).
Now open the event configuration dialog by clicking on the CR
event config. button.
As in the case of the binary input signals in Section 5.3.7.2., the
binary output signals are configured at the works.
5.3.7.6. Binary outputs on the bay units

The following output signals are listed in ascending order in their
21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
Tripping command generated by the external input 11105_EX-
TERNAL TRIP.
21110_TRIP
Tripping command generated by the station protection intertrip-
ping function (BBP, BFP t2 etc.).
21115_REMOTE TRIP
Any of the protection functions that are capable of tripping an en-
tire section of busbar (intertripping) can initiate a remote trip sig-
nal. Protection functions of this kind are:
Busbar protection
Breaker failure protection
End zone protection
The command EXTERNAL TRIP
Remote tripping can only take place if a fault cannot be cleared
by the circuit-breaker in the bay concerned. This applies in the
following cases:
1 breaker schemes (see Section 11.15.)
Bypass operation with the bus tie breaker being used for a
feeder (see Section 11.16.5.)
5-34
Circuit-breaker bypassed by an isolator (see Section

11.16.5.)
Feeder not equipped with its own circuit-breaker.
21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP
This signal is used to generate a multi-pole trip for test purposes.
It is controlled by the binary input signal 11115_Ext_Test_TRIP.
21305_Trip
Signals tripping by the bay unit and can be set by any of the sta-
tion protection functions.
21405_SP blocked
Signals that the station protection functions including EXTER-
NAL TRIP and intertripping are blocked (either the bay con-
cerned or throughout the station).
21410_Output relays blocked

All the output contacts configured in the bay unit concerned are
blocked.
21805_In service
Signal set by the diagnostic function that shows whether or not a
bay unit is operational and standing by.
21810_Loss of supply voltage

This signals a failure of the isolator auxiliary supply (Supervision
aux. voltage_x) in the bay unit.
21815_Inspection/maintenance
This signal appears when an inspection or maintenance input is
set in the bay unit and a position indicator on an isolator or cir-
cuit-breaker connected to the bay unit is forced into a particular
status.
Forcing of an isolator or circuit-breaker in this context means:
The item of switchgear changes either from CLOSED to OPEN
or from OPEN to CLOSED.
5-35
21820_Alarm
Signals an alarm situation in a bay unit. It is set in the following
cases:
An auxiliary supply fault is being signaled.
A bay unit diagnostic system has detected an analog signal
processing error.
22405_BBP blocked
Signals that the busbar protection function is blocked (either in-
dividual protection zones or the entire system).
23105_BFP TRIP
Trip generated by the breaker failure protection (after t1).
23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP

Tripping command issued to the remote station by the breaker
failure protection. This signal can be assigned to an output con-
tact by the signal REMOTE TRIP.
23305_BFP trip t1
Signals tripping by the breaker failure protection after time step 1.
23310_BFP trip t2
Signals tripping by the breaker failure protection after time step 2.
23315_BFP TRIP L1
Signals that the breaker failure protection detected a fault on
phase L1 and has tripped.
23320_BFP TRIP L2
23325_BFP TRIP L3
5-36
Signals that tripping has been redirected, providing a signal is
being applied to the input 13605_Trip transferred.
23335_Trip by BFP
Signals that the breaker failure protection has issued an inter-
tripping command.
23405_BFP blocked
Signals that the breaker failure protection is blocked (either the
bay or the whole system).
24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP

Tripping command issued by the end fault protection.
24305_EFP trip
Signals that the end fault protection has tripped.
24405_EFP blocked
Signals that the end fault protection is blocked (either the bay or
the whole system).
25105_OCDT TRIP
Tripping command issued by the time-overcurrent function.
25305_OCDT Trip
Signals tripping by the time-overcurrent function.
25405_OCDT blocked
Signals that the time-overcurrent protection is blocked (either the
bay or the whole system).
26805_DR ready
Signals that the disturbance recorder is standing by.
26810_DR memory full

Signals that the disturbance recorder memory is full.
5-37
26815_DR recording
Signals that the disturbance recorder is in the process of re-
cording.
26820_DR record available

Signals that disturbance records are available.
27105_PDF TRIP
Tripping command by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy func-
tion.
27305_PDF trip
Signals tripping by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function.
27405_PDF blocked
Signals that the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function is
blocked (either the bay concerned or the entire system).
28805_Voltage criterion
Signals that the bay unit is measuring voltage below the setting
of the low-voltage criterion.
29405_BP blocked
Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are
blocked (either the bay concerned or throughout the system).
29410_BP partial blocked

Signals certain bay protection functions are blocked (see
49405_BP blocked).
29600 ParaSet_1 active

Signals that parameter set 1 is active. This can take place via
the station bus or an input signal.
5-38



29805_BP Test Sequence active

Signals that the test sequencer is active (see Section 12.1.4.
Test sequencer).
BP output signals available for configuration

In addition to the bay protection output signals listed above
which are always available, use can also be made of the signals
configured for the binary signal output block of the bay protec-
tion. The number of these signals depends on the protection
functions and signals included in the bay protection (see Section
12.1. Application description).
5.3.7.7. Central unit binary outputs

The following output signals are listed in ascending order in their
41305_Trip BB zone (busbar designation)

Signals which busbar sections have been tripped. An output can
be configured for each busbar section, which is then correspond-
ingly designated. There are as many output relays as there are
busbar zones and where the number of busbar zones is high, a
second BIO module is needed.
Signals that tripping has been redirected by the input
13605_Trip transferred on a bay unit.
5-39
41390_Bay Unit in service

The operational readiness of a bay unit is signaled. This signal
can be configured for each bay unit. The signal can also be con-
figured as an event. A relay signal output is not possible.
41405_SP blocked
Signals that all the station protection functions including Exter-
nal TRIP, External TRIP BB zone and intertripping are blocked
throughout the system.
41410_Output relays blocked

All the output contacts that are configured are blocked.
41505_Isolator alarm
This signal indicates that at least one isolator or circuit-breaker is
not reporting a defined position (neither CLOSED nor OPEN). It
is issued at the end of the set time delay and is reset by the input
Acknowledge isolator alarm, respectively set again by the next
isolator alarm (see Section 3.7.4.).
41805_Alarm
This signal is set in the following cases:
Supply failure
Failure or disturbance of a central unit module
Failure of the communication with a bay unit
Failure of a bay unit
Failure of a bay unit function
Error when refreshing the data in the protection system
Communication error in the central unit
Ext. superv. in service_1/2 inputs not set
41810_In service
Signal set by the diagnostic function that shows that the central
unit is operational or stand-by.
5-40
41815_Diff. current alarm

The differential current of a protection zone exceeded the set
alarm level during the preset interval.
41820_Loss of supply voltage

Signals the failure of the isolator auxiliary supply on a bay unit
(Supervision aux. voltage_x). It is used in conjunction with Not
CLOSED = OPEN.
41825_Inspection/maintenance
Signals that an inspection or maintenance input is set on one of
the protection units.
41830_Switch inhibit
This signal appears together with Isolator alarm. No switching
of the primary system may take place as long as this signal is
active, because the image of the primary system in the pro-
tection would not then correspond to the actual situation (see
Section 3.7.4.).
41835_Test generator active

Signals that the test generator is active, i.e. the test generator is
in use somewhere on the busbar protection system.
41415 BB zone blocked

The blocking of a bus bar protection or of the inter-tripping of a
bus bar section is signalized with this output. This signal is a
combined signal of the blocking of a bus bar protection or of the
inter-tripping i.e. both the blocking of the bus bar and also the in-
ter-tripping are signaled.
42305_BBP trip
Signals that the busbar protection has tripped.
42310_BBP trip L0
Signals that a fault was detected on phase L0 and the busbar
protection has tripped.
5-41
42315_BBP trip L1
42320_BBP trip L2
42325_BBP trip L3
42405_BBP blocked
Signals that the busbar protection is blocked (either individual
protection zones or the entire system).
42805_ Check Zone Bypassed

Signals that the check zone release function for the bus bar pro-
tection is bypassed.
43305_BFP trip t1
Signals that the breaker failure protection tripped in time step 1.
43310_BFP trip t2
Signals that the breaker failure protection tripped in time step 2.
43405_BFP blocked
Signals that the breaker failure protection is blocked (either a
bay unit or the entire system).
44305_EFP trip
Signals that the end fault protection has tripped.
44405_EFP blocked
Signals that the end fault protection is blocked (either a bay unit
or the entire system).
5-42
45305_OCDT trip
Signals that the time-overcurrent protection has tripped.
45405_OCDT blocked
Signals that the time-overcurrent protection is blocked (either a
bay unit or the entire system).
45805_OCDT start
Signals that one of the feeder time-overcurrent functions has
picked up.
47305_PDF Trip
Signals tripping by the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function.
47405_PDF blocked
Signals that the circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function is
blocked (either individual bays or the entire system).
48805_Voltage criterion
Signals that the voltage release function has been activated (ei-
ther individual bays or throughout the system).
49405_BP blocked
Signals that the outputs of the bay protection functions are
blocked (either individual bays or throughout the system).
49410_BP partial blocked

Signals that certain bay protection output signals in specific bays
or throughout the entire system are blocked.
5.3.8. Configuration / Event text

In this window all the event signals configured in the REB500n
are displayed. For each event signal a user specific text can be
configured (32 characters).
5-43
Fig. 5.20 Event text configuration

The user can sort the list as per ABB reference or the standard
text.
5.3.9. Configuration / Disturbance recorder
5.3.9.1. Analog inputs

The currents measured by the four analog inputs are always re-
corded. The five voltage inputs may only be recorded providing
they have been licensed and engineered (optional).
The recording time is doubled if the voltage channels are not ac-
tivated.
The dialog has three tabs:
Overview
The overview shows all the bay units and their basic distur-
bance recorder configurations. A bay unit is selected by click-
ing on it with the mouse.
License status
This dialog lists all the licensed bay units and the duration of
recording (see Fig. 5.24 Disturbance recorder - License
status).
Configuration
The configuration dialog shows a bay unit together with its
recording mode and signals.
5-44
5.3.9.2. Recording
The following disturbance recorder settings can be made (see
Fig. 5.21 Disturbance recorder - Configuration):
Sampling frequency (50 Hz/60 Hz):
600/720 Hz, 1200/1440 Hz or 2400/2880 Hz.
The maximum recording time is automatically adjusted to
suit.
Number of records n
The maximum recording time available is divided by this set-
ting into n equal time periods.
For example, assuming 3 records have to be made and a
maximum recording time of 6 seconds, 3 records of 2 sec-
onds each can be recorded.
Acquisition time
This setting determines how much time before the triggering
point is included in the record.
The total recording time is at least 0.5 s. Of this, at least 0.2 s
are pre-event time and therefore at least 0.3 s post-event
time.
In the event of overflow
FIX
Recording stops. In this mode, the disturbance recorder is
stopped as soon as its memory is full. After the records
have been uploaded, the disturbance recorder has to be
started again manually.
FIFO
Overwrites the oldest record. In this mode, the oldest re-
cord is deleted to make room for new records as soon as
the DR memory is full.
This means that in this mode the number of records is re-
duced by one, i.e. for a setting of n=4 only three DR
events can be recorded.
5.3.9.3. Signals
All binary signals (input, output or internal signal) can be re-
corded. For this purpose, they must be configured for recording
and identified by their signal labels.
Up to 32 binary signals per bay can be selected for recording. Of
these, up to 12 can be configured to trigger the start of re-
cording. Triggering can take place on the lagging or leading
edge of a signal. If both edges is selected, both lagging and
5-45
leading edges are active (see Fig. 5.22 Disturbance recorder -

Configuration - Signals).
Once recording has been started, the complete recording period
that has been set is recorded.
In addition to the normal bay unit binary signals, there are up to
ten general purpose input signals that can be configured for re-
cording and for triggering the disturbance recorder (see Section
5.3.7.3.6., 16705 16750_Start DR_x).
Sorting binary signals
The order of the binary signals in the list can be changed by
clicking on the Signal No. column of the respective signal
and moving it to a new position. All other signals are sorted
automatically in relation to the signal that has been moved.
The order of the signals in the list is the order in which they
are transferred when uploading disturbance data.
NOTE: Since circuit-breakers and isolators equipped with two

auxiliary contacts (CLOSE and OPEN) can have more than two
statuses (open, in motion, closed and undefined), the distur-
bance recorder does not record their positions. The distur-
bance recorder and the evaluation software can only process
binary signals (i.e. with two possible values).
Possible solution: Configure one of the x.Start DR signals to
be connected in parallel to the CLOSE auxiliary contact on the
isolator.
Trigger operation
Recording commences when at least one of the triggering condi-
tions is fulfilled. The trigger then remains disabled until the re-
cord has been completed and is then enabled again. You must
therefore set the recording period such that all the signals you
want to record can be recorded.
WARNING: The trigger inputs are scanned every 16 ms. A

trigger signal must have a pulse duration of at least 16 ms to
be certain that it will be detected.
5-46
Fig. 5.21 Disturbance recorder - Configuration
Fig. 5.22 Disturbance recorder - Configuration - Signals
5-47
Fig. 5.23 Disturbance recorder - Overview
Fig. 5.24 Disturbance recorder - License status
5.3.10. Configuration / HMI LEDs

Bay units of the series T500BU03_x are fitted with a local HMI
with 20 LEDs the user can configure. Each of them can be as-
signed to an input or output signal by selecting the menu item
Configuration / Binary module.
5-48
This opens a dialog with a list of the bay units with this feature.
The respective configuration dialog is opened by selecting the
desired bay unit with the left mouse button and then clicking on
Next or directly by simply double clicking on the bay unit. The
number of the LED on the local HMI is given in the ID column.
Fig. 5.25 LED statuses on the local HMI
Delete signal
The assignment of a signal is cancelled by marking it in the dia-
log and clicking on Delete signal.
New signal ...

A LED is assigned to a signal by marking it in the dialog and
clicking on New signal or alternatively by double clicking on the
LED. A list of possible signals is then presented to enable one to
be chosen.
5-49
Caption
The name in the Caption column proposed by the program can
be edited by selecting it with the mouse. A caption can have a
maximum of 20 characters.
Mode
The user can determine the response of the LED by clicking in
the Mode column.
The following modes are possible:

Status: The current status of the signal is displayed.
Latching: The status of a LED is stored until one of the follow-
ing occurs
A bay protection function picks up
A station protection function trips
It is reset via the local HMI
It is reset by HMI500
It is reset by a binary signal
5.3.11. Configuration / CB inspection

The Details tab lists the plant inspection and maintenance re-
cords (see Section 11.12.).
Fig. 5.26 Configuration - CB inspection - Overview
5-50
5.3.12. Configuration / GPS time synchronization

Provides facility for optimum GPS time synchronization.
Refer to Section 11.15. Synchronization using GPS.
5.4. Settings and calculations
Settings menu
This menu accesses the system and protection function para-
meters and the corresponding setting instructions are given be-
low.
5.4.1. Rated frequency (not adjustable)

The rated frequency of the protection system (50 or 60 Hz) is en-
tered while engineering the system. It is recorded in the report
General plant data (see Section 4.5.6.2. Tools / Reports).
5.4.2. Settings / System response

Details of the differential current supervision and isolator status
supervision systems are given in Sections 3.8.4. and 3.7.4. re-
spectively.
5.4.2.1. System response to a differential current alarm

System response in the Settings menu opens a dialog that
provides a choice of how the system should react to a differential
current alarm:
Continue in operation
The busbar protection continues to function.
Block busbar protection
Operation of the entire busbar protection is blocked.
Selective block busbar protection (preferred)
Operation of the busbar protection is only blocked for the
section of busbar (protection zone) concerned.
Setting the response to Block is more likely to cause a failure to
trip and to Continue in operation a mal-operation.
5.4.2.2. System response to an isolator alarm

The same dialog also permits the response of the system to be
determined in the event of an isolator alarm:
Continue in operation
The busbar protection continues to function.
5-51
Block busbar protection and Intertripping

Operation of the busbar protection and intertripping scheme
is blocked throughout the system.
Selective block busbar protection and Intertripping (preferred)
The busbar protection and intertripping are only blocked for
the section of busbar (protection zone) concerned.
Setting the response to Block is more likely to cause a failure to
trip and to Continue in operation a mal-operation.
Fig. 5.27 Settings - System response
5.4.2.3. Isolator alarm delay

The busbar protection REB500 has a common alarm circuit and
timer for monitoring the operation of all the isolators and bus-tie
breakers. The setting of the isolator operating time thus applies
for all the isolators and circuit-breakers in the system.
NOTE: The time delay must be set longer than the slowest iso-
lator operating time.
5-52
5.4.2.4. Remote trip impulse width

The busbar and where configured, the breaker failure and end
fault protection functions can send an intertripping signal to a
remote station via PLC or optical fiber communication channel.
The duration of the impulse usually has to be limited.
Start function Signal designation See Section

Intertripping 21115_REMOTE TRIP 5.3.7.6.1.
Breaker failure protection 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP 5.3.7.6.3.
End zone protection 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP 5.3.7.6.4.
Table 5.3 Remote tripping signal
The remote tripping signal is transmitted via PLC or an optical fi-

ber link. The impulse width generally has to be limited.

Remote trip impulse 100 2000 200 10 ms
width
Table 5.4 Setting range of the remote trip impulse width
NOTE: The typical duration of the tripping impulse is 200 ms.
5-53
5.4.3. Busbar protection (settings and calculations)

The following parameters can be set using the HMI:

IKmin 500 6000 1000 100 A
Op. char. L1, L2, L3
k 0.7 0.9 0.80 0.05
Differential current alarm 5 50 10 5 % IKmin
Delay 2 50 5 1 s
(Differential current alarm)
IKmin 100 6000 300 100 A
Op. char. L0
k 0.7 0.9 0.80 0.05
Op. char. L0
Op. char. L0
Delay 2 50 10 1 S
Op. char. L0
IKmin 500 6000 1000 100 A
Op. char. Check-Zone
k 0 0.9 0.25 0.05
Delay 2 50 5 1 s
Table 5.5 Busbar protection settings
5-54
Fig. 5.28 Busbar protection - Operating characteristics
The operating characteristic shown in the above dialog only ap-

plies for the restrained current amplitude comparison algorithm.
There are no settings for the phase comparison algorithm.
'L1, L2, L3' operating characteristic

This dialog is for entering the parameters applicable to the phase
fault operating characteristic. To change a value, click on the ar-
row button to the right to open a list of possible settings and then
click on the desired value.
'L0' operating characteristic

The procedure for setting the ground fault characteristic is the
same as for phase faults.
This dialog is only available providing a neutral current meas-
urement has been configured (see Section 11.6.).
'Check Zone' operating characteristic

The procedure for setting the check zone characteristic is de-
scribed under Section 11.5.
This dialog is only available providing a check zone protection
has been configured.
5-55
5.4.3.1. Restrained amplitude comparison - IKmin and k

The restrained amplitude comparison algorithm detects an in-
ternal fault when the settings for IKmin and k are exceeded. A
tripping command is only issued, however, providing the phase
comparison function detects an internal fault at the same time.
NOTE: The pick-up setting for the fault current (IKmin) must
be less (80%) than the lowest fault current that can occur on the
busbars (IKMS). There is a risk of the protection being too insen-
sitive at higher settings.
Providing the minimum fault current (IKMS) is high enough, IKmin
should be set higher than the maximum load current.
If the CTs saturate at the minimum fault current, the feeder cur-
rents have to be reduced by an empirically determined factor CR.
The corrected current values form the basis for calculating the
setting for IKmin. The reduction factor CR is calculated as follows:
For a power system time constant TN 120 ms:
IK

0.3 IN n'
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e
For a power system time constant 120 ms <TN 300 ms:

IK

0.5 IN n'
CR = 0.2 + 0.8 e
PN + PE
In both cases: n' = n
PB + PE
where CR reduction factor due to the power system time con-

stant
IK in this case, the vector sum of feeder fault and load
currents for an internal fault
IN CT rated current
TN power system time constant
n rated overcurrent factor
n' effective overcurrent factor
PB power consumption of the burden at rated current
PE CT losses
PN CT rated power
5-56
5.4.3.2. Application example

The minimum busbar fault current is 1300 A and is supplied by
two feeders. The time constant TN of the power system is 80 ms.
Feeder 1:
Contribution to minimum fault current: 800 A
CTs: Ratio: 200 A/1 A
Class: 5P10
PB: 6 VA
PE: 5 VA
PN: 10 VA
10 VA + 5 VA
n' = 10 = 13.6
6 VA + 5 VA
800 A

0.3 200 A 13.6
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e = 0.66
Feeder 2:
Contribution to minimum fault current: 500 A
CTs: Ratio: 400 A/1 A
Class: 5P20
PB: 6 VA
PE: 8 VA
PN: 20 VA
20 VA + 8 VA
n' = 20 = 40
6 VA + 8 VA
500 A

0.3 400 A 40
CR = 0.45 + 0.55 e = 0.95
Reduced fault current IKR:

IKR = 800 A 0.66 + 500 A 0.95 = 1003 A
IKmin setting (80% of IKR):
IKmin = 1003 A 0.8 = 802 A
The factor k is normally set to 0.80. Numerous tests on a net-
work model have shown this setting to be the most favorable.
5-57
Fig. 5.29 Operating characteristic of the restrained ampli-

tude comparison function
NOTE: During a through-fault and normal operation, it is impos-

sible for the differential (operating) current to be higher than
the restraint current.
Other parameters may also influence the setting in extreme

cases and these are explained in the following examples.
5.4.3.3. Busbar with just two bays

Busbar
IB IB
Bay 1 Bay 2
Fig. 5.30 Busbar with two bays
Assuming a fault on the CT secondary of bay 1 or 2 (CT open or

short-circuit), false tripping can be prevented by settings, which
satisfy the inequality:
IKmin > IB
The fault current setting IKmin must be higher than the load cur-
rent IB.
5-58
5.4.3.3.1. Busbar with several bays

Busbar
IB1=2 kA IB2=1.7 kA IB3=0.3 kA
Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3

(infeed)
Fig. 5.31 Busbar with three bays
a) CT circuit fault on Bay 1

The CT circuit fault simulates a fault on the busbars with a cur-
rent I = IB2 + IB3 = 2 kA. False tripping can be avoided with a
setting, which satisfies the inequality:
IKmin > 2 kA (e.g. the next higher setting 2.1 kA)
b) CT circuit fault on Bay 2

The CT circuit fault in this case simulates a fault on the busbars
with a fault current I = IB2 - IB3 = 1.7 kA and the value calcu-
lated for the quotient k becomes:
I I I 17
.
k= = B1 B3 = = 0.74
I IB1 + IB3 2.3
False tripping can thus be avoided with settings for IKmin and/or
k, which satisfy the inequalities:
IKmin > 1.7 kA
and/or
k > 0.74
c) CT circuit fault on Bay 3

This case corresponds to case b), but the values for I and k are
lower:
I = IB1 - IB2 = 0.3 kA
I I 0.3
k = B1 B2 = = 0.081 i.e. k 0.7
IB1 + IB2 3.7
A CT circuit fault under normal load conditions cannot cause
false tripping.
5-59
d) Influence of the phase comparison function

Tripping can only take place when both functions (restrained
amplitude comparison and phase comparison) detect an internal
fault. The decision reached by the phase comparison function is
therefore of no consequence in the cases illustrated in this sec-
tion.
e) Summary
Considering case a), the pick-up setting for the fault current in
the example given must be:
IKmin > 2 kA
This is the only setting which will prevent tripping in the case of
a).
Both settings, k = 0.80 and IKmin > 1.7 kA prevent tripping in
case b).
A dangerous setting is impossible in case c).
Assuming a minimum fault current higher than 2.1 kA - see case
a), the settings for the above example become:
IKmin > 2.1 kA
k = 0.80
For a minimum fault current lower than 2.1 kA or even lower than
the maximum load current of 2 kA, the setting of IKmin can result
in both a failure of the protection to trip when it should or a false
trip:
With a setting of IKmin > 2 kA, the protection in the above ex-
ample would not detect a minimum fault current of 2 kA (ex-
cluding a CT fault).
With a setting of IKmin < 2 kA, a fault in the CT circuit accord-
ing to case a) would cause a false trip.
The best solution in this situation is to set IKmin to 80% of the
minimum fault current (IKMS).
5.4.3.4. Busbar fault with through current

In certain circumstances, it is possible for currents to flow away
from the busbars during a busbar fault. Two examples of this are
discussed below.
5-60
a) Through current
Busbar fault
IK1 IK2 IK3 IR
Fig. 5.32 Busbar fault with through current IR
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 IR = IK IR
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IR = IK + IR
I I I
k= = K R
I IK + IR
The busbar protection will only trip providing the total fault cur-
rent (IK) exceeds a certain minimum:
k 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7
IK 19 12.4 9 7 5.7 IR
WARNING: For the phase comparison function not to prevent

tripping, the low current check for including feeder currents in
the phase comparison (see Section 3.8.2.2. Phase compari-
son) must be set higher than the through current IR. This must
be determined when engineering the scheme.
An alternative is to disable the phase comparison function,
which also must be determined when engineering the scheme.
5-61
b) Loop current
Busbar fault
IK1 IK2 IQ IQ IK3
Fig. 5.33 Busbar fault with a loop current
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IQ IQ = IK
I = IK1 + IK 2 + IK 3 + IR = IK + IR
I IK
k= =
I IK + 2 IQ
The busbar protection will only trip providing the total fault cur-
rent (IK) exceeds a certain minimum:
k 0.9 0.85 0.8 0.75 0.7
IK 18 11.4 8 6 4.7 IQ
WARNING: For the phase comparison function not to prevent

tripping, the low current check for including feeder currents in
the phase comparison (see Section 3.8.2.2. Phase compari-
son) must be set higher than the loop current IQ. This must be
determined when engineering the scheme.
An alternative is to disable the phase comparison function,
which also must be determined when engineering the scheme.
5-62
5.4.3.5. Differential current alarm setting

The setting for the differential current alarm is entered as a per-
centage of the minimum fault current setting IKmin.

Differential current alarm 5 50 10 5 %
Table 5.6 Differential current alarm setting range
NOTE: The alarm should be set lower than the lowest load
current. A typical setting is 5%.
5.4.3.6. Differential current alarm delay setting

Should the differential current alarm pick up, alarm is not actually
given until the set time delay has expired.

Time delay 2 50 5 1 s
Table 5.7 Time delay setting range for the differential cur-
rent alarm
NOTE: A typical setting is 5 s.
5.4.3.7. Neutral current supervision (operating characteristic L0)

This setting is only available if it is enabled (see Section 11.6.)
5.4.3.8. Phase comparison

No settings have to be made using HMI500 for the phase com-
parison algorithm. The settings for this function are determined
when engineering the scheme for a particular application. The
parameters involved are the operating angle max and the two
minimum current settings (L1, L2, L3 and L0) for the inclusion of
a feeder in the evaluation.
5-63
5.4.4. Overcurrent check for enabling tripping

(See Section 11.10.)
5.4.5. Undervoltage check for enabling tripping

(See Section 11.9.)
5.4.6. Voltage release / External release

(See Section 11.9.)
5.4.7. Bay protection (BP) (REB500sys only)

This function only appears providing it is enabled (see options in
Section 12.).
5.4.8. Breaker failure protection (BFP)

Section 11.1.).
5.4.9. End fault protection (EFP)

Section 11.2.).
5.4.10. Time-overcurrent protection (OCDT)

Section 11.3.).
5.4.11. Circuit-breaker pole discrepancy function (PDF)

Section 11.4.).
5.4.12. Event memory

The busbar protection includes an event memory for each indi-
vidual unit (central unit and bay units) in which changes in the
statuses of binary signal are recorded. The event memories
have a capacity for 100 events in bay units and 1000 events in
the central unit. The user can select whether the oldest event
should be overwritten (ring register) or no further events re-
corded when the memory is full.
A time stamp (date and time with an accuracy of 1 ms), a text
defined using the operator program and a status (set or reset)
are attached to every event. Individual texts can be entered for
each status.
5-64
Generally, one event is configured for every input and output, but
events can also be assigned to optocoupler inputs or relay out-
puts.
When a PC running the operator program is connected, events
can be uploaded from the protection to the PC. The events
stored in the central unit can only be read when connected to the
central unit and the events stored in bay units when connected
to either the central unit or the respective bay unit.
Events that are no longer needed in the PC can be deleted ei-
ther individually or collectively in marked groups.
Fig. 5.34 Settings - Event memory
5-65
January 05
6. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
6.1. General .................................................................................... 6-2
6.3. Checking the shipment ............................................................ 6-4
6.4. Erection.................................................................................... 6-5

6.4.1. Material required ...................................................................... 6-5
6.4.2. Relay location and ambient conditions..................................... 6-5
6.4.3. Installation in cubicles .............................................................. 6-5
6.4.4. Decentralized installation in switch panels............................... 6-6
6.5. Installation................................................................................ 6-7

6.5.1. Grounding guidelines ............................................................... 6-7
6.5.1.1. Cubicle grounding .................................................................... 6-7
6.5.1.2. Grounding principles for central and bay units......................... 6-9
6.5.1.3. Mounting in an open frame .................................................... 6-10
6.5.1.4. Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings.................. 6-11
6.5.2. Wiring..................................................................................... 6-12
6.5.2.1. External wiring ....................................................................... 6-12
6.5.2.2. Internal wiring ........................................................................ 6-12
6.5.3. Screening............................................................................... 6-13
6.5.3.1. Cable screens........................................................................ 6-13
6.5.3.2. Terminating cable screens..................................................... 6-13
6.5.3.3. Additional grounding points along cables............................... 6-15
6.5.4. Laying optical fiber cables...................................................... 6-16
6-1
6. ERECTION AND INSTALLATION
6.1. General
The busbar protection equipment must be shipped, stored and
installed with the greatest care.
Install the cubicles such that there is adequate access from the
front and the rear for maintenance or additions.
Air must circulate freely around the equipment. Observe all the
requirements regarding place of installation and ambient condi-
tions given in Chapter 3. Basic concept.
Take care that the external wiring is properly brought into the
equipment and terminated correctly and pay special attention to
grounding. Strictly observe the corresponding guidelines con-
tained in this section.
6-2
DANGER: If parts of the station are in operation, be sure to take

all the necessary safety precautions to prevent electrical shock.
WARNING: If parts of the station are in operation, be sure to

interrupt the tripping circuits to avoid unintentional operation of
the respective circuit-breakers during erection and commis-
sioning.
NOTE: lifting and transporting of the protection equipment take

care of the weight marked on the crates or packing units.
NOTE: Cubicles, which have been removed from their packing,

may only be lifted by the lugs on the top.
6-3
6.3. Checking the shipment

Upon receipt, check that the consignment is complete. Inform
your local ABB agent or representative should discrepancies be
found in relation to the delivery note, shipping documents or
order.
Visually check all the items when unpacking. Should any
transport damage be found, lodge a claim in writing with the last
carrier without delay and inform ABB.
If the protection equipment is not going to be installed
immediately, all items must be stored in a closed room in their
original packing. The humidity should not exceed 95% at a
maximum temperature of +40 C; the permissible storage
temperature range in dry air is 40 C to +85 C.
6-4
6.4. Erection
6.4.1. Material required

All the small parts needed are included in the installation kit.
A suitable drill and spanners are required to secure the cubicles
to the floor using the plugs provided.
6.4.2. Relay location and ambient conditions

The place of installation should permit easy access especially to
front of the device, i.e. to the optical fiber cable connector and
the local control unit.
There should also be free access at the rear of the equipment for
additions and replacement of electronic modules.
Since every piece of technical equipment can be damaged or
destroyed by inadmissible ambient conditions,
the location should not be exposed to excessive air pollution
(dust, aggressive substances),
severe vibration, extreme changes of temperature, high
levels of humidity, surge voltages of high amplitude and short
rise time and strong induced magnetic fields should be
avoided as far as possible,
air must be allowed to circulate freely around the equipment.
The equipment can in principle be mounted in any attitude, but it
is normally mounted vertically (operation of the local control unit
and visibility of markings).
In all other respects, observe the limits and ranges given in
Chapter 3. Basic concept.
6.4.3. Installation in cubicles

In the case of equipment supplied in cubicles, place the cubicles
on the foundations that have been prepared as shown in the
installation diagram. Take care while doing so not to jam or
otherwise damage any of the cables that have already been
installed. Secure the cubicles to the foundations as shown in the
drawing.
6-5
Fig. 6.1 Front view and view with the hinged equipment
frame swung out of a REB500 busbar protection
cubicle
4x18.5
B-100
300
T-100
600 8x18.5
101.5
HEST 035006 C
Fig. 6.2 Cubicle layout for 1, 2 and 3 cubicles

(W = 800 mm, D = 800 mm) with floor bolt
dimensions
6.4.4. Decentralized installation in switch panels

Where the busbar protection equipment is to be mounted in
switch panel cut-outs, the racks and switch panels must be
mounted first and then the busbar protection units inserted into
the cut-outs and secured (installation kit).
6-6
6.5. Installation
6.5.1. Grounding guidelines

Switching operations in HV installations generate transient over-
voltages on instrument transformer and control signal cables.
There is also a background of electromagnetic RF fields in
electrical installations that can induce spurious currents in the
devices themselves or the leads connected to them.
All these influences can influence the operation of electronic
apparatus.
On the other hand, electronic apparatus can transmit inter-
ference that can disrupt the operation of other apparatus.
In order to minimize these influences as far as possible, certain
standards have to be observed with respect to grounding, wiring
and screening.
NOTE: All these precautions can only be effective if the station

ground is of good quality.
6.5.1.1. Cubicle grounding
Mechanical design
The RF impedance from the location of the various modules in
the cubicle to the cubicle ground must be low.
There must therefore be a good electrical contact between the
metal parts of the cubicle such as side plates, blanking plates
etc., and the frame and base of the cubicle. The contact surfaces
must not only be good electrical conductors, they must also be
corrosion-proof so that long-term good electrical conductivity is
preserved.
Non-observance of these conditions can result in the cubicle or
parts of it resonating at certain frequencies, which increase the
interference transmitted by the units in the cubicle and can lower
their immunity to electrical interference from outside.
6-7
Grounding a single cubicle

The moving parts of a cubicle such as the doors (front and rear)
or hinged frame must be connected to the cubicle structure by
three copper braid straps (see Fig. 6.3 Cubicle grounding
principles).
Door or
hinged frame
Rack
Bay unit
Mount cubicle ground rail

close to bottom of cubicle
Station ground
2
Copper braid, width 20 mm, cross-section 16 mm
Braid lug, i.e. good electrical connection
Fig. 6.3 Cubicle grounding principles
The cubicle ground rail is connected to the station ground by a

copper braid strap (see Section 6.5.1.4.).
If the distance to the station ground exceeds 5 m, two straps
must be run in parallel as closely as possible to each other.
Grounding principles for adjacent cubicles

Where cubicles are standing next to each other (less than 1 m
apart), observe the following additional conditions (example with
2 cubicles):
6-8
Cubicle
Cubicle ground rail
Station ground
Fig. 6.4 Grounding principles for two adjacent cubicles

(schematic view)
The ground rails in the two cubicles are connected together and
each one individually connected to the station ground. The
ground rails of cubicles that are more than 1 m apart do not have
to be connected.
The cubicles of a suite of several cubicles are also connected
together and each one individually connected to the station
ground.
6.5.1.2. Grounding principles for central and bay units

The grounding straps of racks and modules may be connected
on either the left or right, but whichever the case, they should be
as short as possible.
* Pre-assembled grounding bolt

** A copper braid strap can be attached at one of these positions.
Fig. 6.5 Grounding individual bay units
6-9
6.5.1.3. Mounting in an open frame

An open frame must be electrically conducting, corrosion-proof
and properly connected to the station ground (see Fig. 6.6).
Mounting plate
Electrically
conducting
connection Electrically Electrically
on both conducting conducting
sides connection connection
Open
frame
Cover
Station ground
Fig. 6.6 Methods of grounding units in open frames

(front view, semi-flush and surface mounting)
The contact surfaces between mounting plates or covers and the

frame must be electrically conducting, i.e. neither contact surface
may be painted and the contact area must be corrosion-proof
(e.g. galvanized).
The units must be grounded directly to the rack frame as shown
in Fig. 6.6 if the contact surfaces are poor conductors or to the
mounting plate as shown in Fig. 6.10 in Section 6.5.3.
Screening providing the surfaces are good conductors.
The units must be grounded such that the grounding straps are
as short as possible.
As described in Section 6.5.1.1., paragraph Grounding a single
cubicle, a second grounding strap must be run in parallel if the
station ground is more than 5 m away.
6-10
6.5.1.4. Grounding straps (copper braid) and their fittings

The interference currents conducted by the ground connections
are of high frequency and as a result of the skin effect, only the
part of the ground straps near the surface is of consequence.
Tinned copper braid is therefore used for the ground straps and
not copper rod, because the cross-section of an equivalent rod
would be much greater.
Data of copper braid straps:
Width 20 mm
Cross-section 16 mm2
(necessary for protection grounds).
Both ends of the straps must be fitted with lugs suitable for the
connecting to ground bolts.
The surfaces in contact with the lugs must be electrically con-
ducting and corrosion-proof.
Copper braid Cable lug
Ground bolt
Contact surface
Fig. 6.7 Grounding straps and fixture
CAUTION: In the case of aluminum contact surfaces, a cupal

disc (copper-plated aluminum) must be fitted between the lug
and aluminum to prevent corrosion.
6-11
6.5.2. Wiring
6.5.2.1. External wiring

The external wiring includes all the connections between the
primary system plant and the cubicle, rack or device terminals.
The corresponding cables should be run in metal cable ducts
that are connected at several points to the station ground.
The external wiring falls into the following groups:

instrument transformer leads
auxiliary supply connections
binary inputs and outputs.
Experience as shown that most interference is induced in the
instrument transformer leads and therefore these should be
run in separate cable ducts away from the other cables.
CAUTION: The instrument transformer leads in GIS stations

must be screened (see Section 6.5.3. Screening). This is also
to be recommended in other kinds of stations.
6.5.2.2. Internal wiring

The internal wiring comprises the connections between the
cubicle or rack terminals and the terminals on the devices. This
wiring should be kept as short as possible especially in open
frames.
As described in Section 6.5.2.1. External wiring, it is
recommended to separate the instrument transformer leads from
the other cables, i.e. they should not be run in the same cable
ducts or loom. To reduce the risk of parallel coupling, cables
may also be crossed at right-angles (see Fig. 6.8 Wiring of two
bay units to be performed by the customer). The minimum
cross-coupling occurs when cables cross at right angles.
Pre-wiring non-defined inputs should be avoided wherever
possible for EMC reasons (antenna for interference).
6-12
CT leads
Binary inputs and outputs

Aux. supply
CT leads
Crossed at right angles
Terminal blocks
Fig. 6.8 Wiring of two bay units to be performed by the

customer
6.5.3. Screening
6.5.3.1. Cable screens

Cables have braided screens with a cover ratio of more than
80%.
6.5.3.2. Terminating cable screens

Cable screens must be terminated such that the entire
circumference of the screen is in contact with ground. Cable
screens must be grounded at both ends.
CAUTION: The screening effect is inadequate in industrial

installations if the cable screen is grounded by a wire soldered
to it.
6-13
The screens of cables can be grounded best if the cables enter

cubicles via cable glands. Where this is not possible, proceed as
illustrated in Fig. 6.9, taking care that that the cable screens are
grounded inside the cubicle as closely as possible to the
entrance.
In order to connect the screen to ground, remove a suitable
length of the insulation, push the exposed screen back over end
of the remaining insulation and clamp it to a metal surface (see
Fig. 6.8 Wiring of two bay units to be performed by the
customer). Both the clamp and the metal surface must be
electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
Cable clamp
Cable insulation
Cores
Screen pushed
back over end
of insulation
Fig. 6.9 Cable screen termination
It is important that the screen be pushed back over the end of

the insulation as otherwise it frays with time and the quality of
the ground connection diminishes. The risk of the screen and
cores being pinched is also reduced.
Screens in the case of open frames are also secured by a clamp
to the mounting plate close to the device as shown in Fig. 6.10.
6-14
Bare mounting
plate with bay unit
Equipment
frame
Cable screen
terminations
Screened
cables
Station ground
Fig. 6.10 Cable screen terminations in open equipment

frames (rear view for semi-flush mounting, front
view for surface mounting)
The unscreened ends of the cores going to the device terminals

must be kept as short as possible and the groups of cables
should be run separately as explained in Section 6.5.2.2.
Internal wiring.
6.5.3.3. Additional grounding points along cables

Where cubicles are at different potentials, balancing currents can
flow through the screens of cables that are grounded at both
ends, which induce interference in the cable cores. Where the
distance between the cubicles is greater than approximately
10 m, the induced interference can be strong enough to affect
the equipment.
One solution is to run the cables next to the ground rails of the
station grounding mesh and to ground the cables screens every
5 to 10 m.
For this purpose, remove a suitable length of insulation and fit a
clamp to ground the exposed screen to a grounded metal
surface. The clamp and the metal surface must be clean,
electrically conducting and corrosion-proof.
The type of clamp must be chosen such that it holds the cable
firmly without pinching or crushing the screen of the cores.
6-15
6.5.4. Laying optical fiber cables

Refer to the suppliers instructions for how to lay optical fiber
cables. The requirements the optical fiber cables have to fulfill
from the point of view of the protection are given in Chapter 3
Basic function. Optical fiber cables may never be sharply bent
or pinched. Always observe the minimum permissible bending
radius.
6-16
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C ABB Switzerland Ltd
January 05
7. COMMISSIONING

7.1.1. Assumptions and preconditions ............................................... 7-3
7.1.2. Regulations.............................................................................. 7-3
7.2. General remarks on commissioning the REB500 protection

system ..................................................................................... 7-5
7.3. Commissioning procedure ....................................................... 7-6
7.4. Checks prior to switching on .................................................... 7-7

7.4.1. Record the equipment data...................................................... 7-7
7.4.2. Visually inspect for transport damage ...................................... 7-7
7.4.3. Visually inspect the external wiring and cables........................ 7-7
7.4.4. Check the grounding of cubicles and other units ..................... 7-7
7.4.5. Check the auxiliary DC battery supply ..................................... 7-8
7.4.6. Check the settings ................................................................... 7-9
7.4.7. Check the CT circuits............................................................... 7-9
7.4.8. Check the VT circuits ............................................................. 7-12
7.5. Commissioning the protection system ................................... 7-13

7.5.1. Communicating with the protection system............................ 7-13
7.5.2. Simulation of isolator and circuit-breaker status signals ........ 7-14
7.5.3. Comparison of diagrams........................................................ 7-14
7.5.4. Comparison with the layout of the primary system ................ 7-15
7.5.5. Checking the analog inputs (CTs).......................................... 7-16
7.5.6. Checking the analog inputs (VTs).......................................... 7-16
7.5.7. Checking the binary inputs signals (optocoupler inputs) ........ 7-17
7.5.8. Check auxiliary contacts on the isolators and
circuit-breakers and the CLOSE command ......................... 7-17
7.5.8.1. Wiring the auxiliary contacts .................................................. 7-17
7.5.8.2. Timing sequence ................................................................... 7-18
7.5.8.3. Special version Not CLOSED = OPEN................................ 7-20
7.5.8.4. Checking the isolator and circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts .. 7-21
7.5.8.5. Checking the manual CLOSE command ............................. 7-21
7.5.9. Checking the binary output signals (tripping circuits
and alarms)............................................................................ 7-22
7.5.10. Checking the starting of the breaker failure protection........... 7-24
7.5.11. Checking protection stability .................................................. 7-24
7.5.11.1. Checking through-fault stability with de-energized busbars ... 7-25
7.5.11.2. Checking through-fault stability with load current................... 7-27
7-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. C
7.5.12. Setting the system time.......................................................... 7-28

7.5.13. Viewing traceability data ........................................................ 7-28
7.5.14. Final test and inspection ........................................................ 7-28
7.6. Configuring REB500 to match the layout of the primary plant 7-30
7.6.1. Introduction ............................................................................ 7-30
7.6.2. Procedure .............................................................................. 7-31
7.6.3. Adding a bay to an existing station ........................................ 7-32
7.6.3.1. Activating provisionally configured bays ................................ 7-32
7.6.3.2. Activating central unit modules .............................................. 7-33
7.6.4. Removing a bay from operation............................................. 7-34
7.6.4.1. Deactivating bays .................................................................. 7-34
7.6.4.2. Deactivating central unit modules .......................................... 7-35
7.6.5. Special cases when adding or decommissioning plant .......... 7-35
7.6.5.1. Deactivating (items of plant shorted)...................................... 7-35
7.6.5.2. Activating and deactivating individual items of plant .............. 7-36
7.7. Additional checks for REB500sys .......................................... 7-37

7.7.1. Commissioning a new station without any HV ....................... 7-37
7.7.2. Additions to an existing station .............................................. 7-37
7-2
7. COMMISSIONING
7.1.1. Assumptions and preconditions

It is assumed that the REB500 protection system is already
installed and all the input and output signals that have been
configured are also wired and the optical fiber cables run and
tested.
It must also be assumed that the busbars or sections of them are
in operation and that circuit-breakers and isolators are in the
process of being installed or maintained.
The commissioning engineer requires the operating instructions
and the station diagrams prepared by the engineering depart-
ment.
The protection system may only be commissioned by corre-
spondingly trained commissioning personnel.
7.1.2. Regulations
DANGER: Note that when commissioning REB500sys, the

analog input signals act on the bay protection (BP functions)
as well as the busbar protection and the REB500 functions
(EFP, BFP etc.). Especially when the commissioning
subsequently (e.g. following additions to the system), care must
be taken to prevent part of the system which are already in
operation from mal-operating. Corresponding precautions must
be taken (interrupting tripping circuits, blocking system
functions, disabling auxiliary tripping relays).
DANGER: The greatest care must be taken when testing a

bus-bar protection system on busbars in operation, as the
consequences of tripping a circuit-breaker by mistake when
there is no fault, or not tripping it when there is a fault can be
extremely serious.
7-3
DANGER: Before testing the operation of circuit-breakers or

isolators, check that no maintenance is being carried out on the
circuit-breakers or the busbars. Even with the power switched
off, switching operations with people in the vicinity can cause
accidents and injury.
WARNING: Unnecessary switching operations should be

avoided as far as possible, because switchgear has a limited
number of operations and switching disturbs the normal
operation of the station.
7-4
7.2. General remarks on commissioning the REB500 protection

system
The REB500 protection system operates digitally and is equipped
with a continuous self-supervision and diagnostics function (see
Section 3.6. "Self-supervision"). All the functions are (protection)
algorithms computed by the system software.
ABB exhaustively tests the system software before it is released.
The customers specific data are also recorded in software form
in a database, which is similarly tested by the ABB test depart-
ment before being released.
The self-supervision function is so extensive that only few hard-
ware components are not covered. These include the binary
inputs (optocouplers) and outputs and the analog channels (CT
and VT inputs).
For these reasons, it is superfluous to test the internal func-
tions of the protection by secondary injection. Secondary injec-
tion is therefore restricted to those components which are not
covered by the self-supervision function, i.e.:
binary inputs and outputs and
analog channels
7-5
7.3. Commissioning procedure

The following procedure has proved the best in practice:
Checks prior to switching on
1 Record the equipment data
2 Visually inspect for transport damage
3 Visually inspect the external wiring and cables
4 Check the grounding of cubicles and other units
5 Check the auxiliary DC battery supply
6 Check the settings
7 Check the CT circuits
8 Check the VT circuits
Checks after switching on the protection system

9 Secondary injection tests using the test set
10 Check the binary input signals
11 Check auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-
breakers and the CLOSE command
12 Check the control signal and alarm circuits
13 Check the tripping circuits
14 Check the stability factor
15 Set the system time
16 Record traceability data
17 Final test and inspection
NOTE: Fill in the respective pages of the TEST REPORT in

Section 13.4. Test Report!
7-6
7.4. Checks prior to switching on
7.4.1. Record the equipment data

For purposes of identification and quality assurance, the
following equipment data shall be recorded:
Rated voltage of the primary plant
Busbar configuration (double busbars, 1 breaker scheme etc.)
Type of station (outdoor/indoor, gas insulated)
Cubicle number(s)
Central unit number
Designations and revision indices of the diagrams
7.4.2. Visually inspect for transport damage

Deformed housings, dents and damaged paintwork are an
indication of transport damage. Where such indications are
observed, check the proper function of the respective unit
especially thoroughly. In severe cases, consult the supplier to
assess the best course of action.
Electrical and optical fiber cables must not be bent or pinched.
Check that all the plug-in boards and modules are properly
inserted and secure.
Check that the consignment is complete.
7.4.3. Visually inspect the external wiring and cables

Check that the gauges of all cables are adequate for the current
to be conducted.
Check that the cable screens are properly grounded.
Check the tightness of the connections by exerting moderate
force.
Screened leads must be used for CT and VT circuits as
described in Chapter 6. Erection and Installation.
7.4.4. Check the grounding of cubicles and other units

Cubicles and equipment must be grounded as described in
Chapter 6. Erection and Installation.
7-7
7.4.5. Check the auxiliary DC battery supply

Disconnect the auxiliary supply from the protection equipment
(green connector).
Check the grounding of the battery supply. The battery circuit
can be grounded
at either positive or negative pole
symmetrically via impedances
not at all (ungrounded)
Check for ground faults if the battery circuit is symmetrically
grounded via impedances or ungrounded. A ground fault on the
station battery does not influence the operation of REB500 itself,
but the correct operation of the binary inputs and outputs and
therefore the system as a whole cannot be guaranteed.
Measure the following voltages:
positive to negative
positive to ground
negative to ground
For higher availability, the station may be equipped with
redundant auxiliary supplies. In this case, check the second
battery supply in the same way as the first. The two supplies
must not be connected in parallel at any point.
The battery voltage must be within the permissible range of the
power supply unit(s) in the busbar protection system under all
operating conditions (refer to the technical data of the respective
power supply unit). Check that the battery leads are connected
with the correct polarity.
If all these checks are satisfactory, reinsert the green auxiliary
supply connectors.
NOTE: Make sure that the battery circuits are properly

protected and multiple circuits are not interconnected.

7-8
WARNING: Power supply units may never be inserted or with-

drawn with the auxiliary supply connected. Therefore place the
switch on the front of the power supply unit in the off position
and unplug the green connector on the end of the battery cable.
The other modules may only be inserted or withdrawn when
the switch on the front of the power supply unit in the off position
or there is no power supply unit fitted.
7.4.6. Check the settings

The commissioning engineer does not generally have to
calculate or confirm the calculation of the protection settings. He
only checks and records
whether there appear to be basic or obvious errors
who calculated the settings

7.4.7. Check the CT circuits
DANGER: Never interrupt CT circuits during operation.

Where manipulations in CT circuits are necessary, be sure to
short-circuit them at the shorting and isolating terminals
beforehand. After completing work on the CT circuits, make
sure that they are closed, i.e. no longer interrupted, and switch
the shorting and isolating terminals back to their normal
operation position again.
NOTE: The CT circuits are not normally tested by the protec-

tion commissioning engineer. He only records who checked
them.
Check that the CTs are connected in strict accordance with the
diagram supplied.
Perform the following checks to establish the correctness of the
CTs and CT circuits:
7-9
Polarity
The test circuit is given in Fig. 7.1.
There must be a positive deflection on the voltmeter when the
switch (S) closed. The polarity must be checked at every protec-
tion unit.
This provisionally checks the CT circuit and confirms the polarity
of the CT.
S
+ P1 s1 +
Battery
(e.g. 4.5 V) V
P2 s2
HEST 005040 C
Fig. 7.1 Circuit for checking CT polarity
Ratio and wiring

The CT ratios and wiring are checked by primary injection be-
tween the three phases R, S and T and ground (R-0, S-0 and T-
0) and phase-to-phase (R-S and R-T). The phase and neutral
currents flowing in protection input circuits are tested.
Apart from checking the ratios and wiring, the phase-to-phase
injection also checks that all three phases are connected with
the same polarity.
7-10
Protection
L1
L2
L3
L0
~
HEST 005041 C
Fig. 7.2 Example of primary phase-to-ground injection
Knee-point voltage
This requires the connection of an AC test voltage (HV!) to the
CT secondary and the measurement of current and voltage. The
primary winding must not be short-circuited.
The values recorded indicate whether the CT has a protection or
metering core. A protection core has a relatively high knee-point
voltage (the point at which a 10% reduction of voltage pro-
duces a 50% reduction of current).
NOTE: This check is very important, since swapped protection

and metering cores are only apparent during a power system
fault (possible false tripping of the BBP or failure of the BFP to
trip) not in normal operation.
Fig. 7.3 Recording the magnetizing curve
7-11
Grounding
Every electrically insulated CT circuit must be grounded at one
point (of advantage is a point that is accessible during normal
operation).

7.4.8. Check the VT circuits
NOTE: The VT circuits are not normally tested by the protec-

tion commissioning engineer. He only records who checked
them.
Check that the VTs are connected in strict accordance with the
diagram supplied.
Perform the following checks to establish the correctness of the
VTs and VT circuits:
Polarity
This test is generally performed on the secondary windings.
Ratio
Measure the secondary voltage after switching on.
Grounding
Every electrically insulated VT circuit must be grounded at one
point (of advantage is a point that is accessible during normal
operation).

7-12
7.5. Commissioning the protection system
DANGER: To avoid any possible false tripping due to wiring

mistakes, interrupt all the tripping circuits before switching the
protection on for the first time.
The protection system is switched on by placing the switch on

the power supply units in the ON position. Providing all the bay
units (BUs) are switched on and correctly connected by optical
fiber cables to the central unit (CU), the system is ready for
operation and standing by after the initialization procedure
(about 5 min). The display shows, for example:
Ready Alarm Trip
ABB REB 500 V7.xx (xx = Softwareversion)
V1.50AB 03-11-03
Should this not be the case, follow the procedure given in
Chapter 9 Fault finding.
There should not be any alarms, assuming all the isolators and
return confirmation signals are properly connected and
energized (if not, see Section 7.5.2. 'Simulation of isolator and
circuit-breaker status signals').
Other operations require the connection of a PC (HMI500 pro-
gram) in order to be able to communicate with the protection
system.
7.5.1. Communicating with the protection system
Connecting the PC
The PC is connected to the central unit or bay unit by means of
the optical connecting cable supplied.
Minimum PC requirements
The PC operator program runs on an IBM PC or compatible
running MS Windows. The minimum PC requirements are
described in Section 4.3.1.
Starting the operator program

See Section 4.4. Starting HMI500.
7-13
7.5.2. Simulation of isolator and circuit-breaker status signals

In order to operate, the REB500 protection system requires
signals from the isolators and circuit-breakers indicating their
status. If one or several positions are unknown, the protection
system starts incompletely. The system is only fully operational
and standing by when all the position signals are available.
At the beginning of commissioning, these signals are frequently
incorrectly wired or the supply for the auxiliary contacts is not
switched on. To enable commissioning of the protection system
to proceed in spite of this, the positions of the isolators and
circuit-breakers have to be simulated. This can be achieved
either using jumpers at the terminals or by simulating opto-
coupler positions in the test mode (see Section 4.5.5.1. for the
operation of the test generator). Double click on status field of an
optocoupler input to change its status. The color of the status
field then changes to yellow.
Once this has been done, no alarms with the exception of Test
generator active may be active.
7.5.3. Comparison of diagrams

Check that the binary and analog inputs and binary outputs in
the station diagram conform to the REB500 diagram. Systematic
discrepancies such as a different polarity of all CTs can, of
course, occur and are permissible. The diagrams must then be
corrected accordingly.
7-14
1A
1
5A
L3
L2
L1
IL1
2
N
3
1A
4
5A
IL2
5
N
6
1A
7
5A
IL3
8
N
9
1A
10
5A
IL0
11
N
12
HEST 025002 C
Fig. 7.4 Standard CT wiring diagram
7.5.4. Comparison with the layout of the primary system

Check that the REB500 plant diagram (layout) conforms to the
primary system (see Section 7.6.).
NOTE: Check that the locations of the CTs in the single-line

diagram in the REB500 database (HMI500, menu item Single-
line diagram in the View menu) conforms to the actual primary
system. This check is essential if an end fault protection is
installed, because it influences the tripping logic and none of the
tests discloses an incorrect location.
Should some items of primary system plant not yet be installed,

the have to be masked accordingly (see Section 7.6.).
7-15
7.5.5. Checking the analog inputs (CTs)

Using a test set, SVERKER or ABB MODURES Type XS92b,
inject a current into each of the CT inputs.
The CTs can be checked in one of the following ways:
Reading the injected currents on the local HMI.
(Note: The readings are referred to the primary values.)
Reading the injected currents via HMI500 by selecting
Analog input measurements in the View menu
Protection zone measurements in the View menu
Single-line diagram in the View menu
Increasing the currents until the protection function (e.g.
busbar or end fault protection function) picks up.
Checking usually involves increasing the current until the
protection function picks up, but this is not imperative.

7.5.6. Checking the analog inputs (VTs)

Using a test set, SVERKER or ABB MODURES Type XS92b,
injects a voltage into each of the voltage transformer inputs.
The checks can be executed in different ways:
Reading the injected voltage on the local HMI
Reading the injected voltage via HMI500 by selecting Analog
input measurements in the View menu.
NOTE: Primary values of phase-to-neutral voltages are

displayed.
7-16

7.5.7. Checking the binary inputs signals (optocoupler inputs)

Check the proper function of every binary optocoupler input by
exciting the signal source.
The binary inputs can be checked in one of the following ways:
Reading the statuses on the local control unit
Reading the statuses via the HMI500 by selecting Binary
input/output status in the View menu
Checking the events generated in the event list.
The event list enables the correct assignment of the signals as
well as their operation to be checked.

7.5.8. Check auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-

breakers and the CLOSE command
The function of these signals is described in Sections 3.7.3. and
3.7.4.
7.5.8.1. Wiring the auxiliary contacts
NOTE: The standard wiring of the N/C auxiliary contacts on

L1, L2 and L3 phases of isolators and circuit-breakers is in
series and the N/O contacts in parallel (see Fig. 7.5).
This is reversed in the case of the special version Not CLOSED

= OPEN (see Fig. 7.7).
7-17
Switch Switch CB close

open closed command
CB close command
HEST 005039 C
+
Fig. 7.5 Isolator and circuit-breaker statuses for the

manual CLOSE signal
7.5.8.2. Timing sequence

To be able to operate discriminatively, the protection has to
know the actual configuration of the busbars. For this purpose,
all auxiliary contacts on the isolators and circuit-breakers
must be connected to the binary inputs of the respective bay
units.
Thus every isolator and circuit-breaker has to be equipped with
potentially-free normally open and normally closed contacts for
every phase, the N/O contact signaling that the corresponding
pole is closed and the N/C contact that it is open.
Isolators
During the closing operation of an isolator, the N/O contact must
already signal its closed status before the main contacts reach
their breakdown voltage.
Conversely, during the opening operation, the N/O contact
(CLOSED signal) should not open before the main contacts
have exceeded their breakdown voltage and it is impossible for
an arc to ignite. If this condition cannot be fulfilled, i.e. the N/O
7-18
contact signals that the isolator is open before it has reached its
breakdown voltage, the N/C contact must not close before the
main contact exceeds its breakdown voltage.
Circuit-breakers
In the case of a closed circuit-breaker, the auxiliary contact for
CLOSED simply has to signal CLOSED.
The auxiliary contact for OPEN simply has to signal OPEN
when the circuit-breaker is open.
The auxiliary contacts on a circuit-breaker do not have to take its
breakdown voltage into account (see Fig. 7.6).
The problem is therefore solved using the circuit-breaker
CLOSE command and an adjustable reclaim time (see Section
3.8.7.4.).
NOTE: The minimum duration of the circuit-breaker CLOSE

command must guarantee that the CLOSE auxiliary contact is
definitely closed (must overlap). If necessary this has to be
achieved by configuring an input signal prolongation for the
circuit-breaker CLOSE command.
End position: End position:

Isolator/bus-tie breaker Isolator/bus-tie breaker
open closed
Isolator/bus-tie breaker closing
Isolator/bus-tie breaker opening

Isolator/bus-tie breaker
main contact
Flashover gap
N/O aux.contact signalling
main contact CLOSED
N/O aux.contact signalling

main contact OPEN
Aux. contact must be closed HEST 005036 C

Aux. contact may be closed
Aux. contact must be open
Fig. 7.6 Isolator timing sequence
7-19
The protection system supervises that only one signal is being

generated (i.e. either CLOSED or OPEN), otherwise an
isolator alarm is given after a delay. The alarm can be configured
to block the protection if necessary (see Section 3.7.4.6.).
7.5.8.3. Special version Not CLOSED = OPEN

If the auxiliary contacts do not fulfill the above conditions, the
logic Not CLOSED = OPEN can be used. (This is, however, a
special version and not absolutely necessary. Its application has
to be decided from case to case.) The arrangement must include
an additional input signal which supervises the isolator auxiliary
supply.
ABB principle:
Isolator
open closed open
1
0
1
closed
0
open 1
Current measurement 1
0
not CLOSED = OPEN:
1
0
1
closed
0
1
open
0
Current measurement 1
(When both isolator position 0
inputs are inverted)
HEST 005042 C
Fig. 7.7 Switching sequence of the isolator auxiliary

contacts
Inverting the logic means that local events are generated while a
bay unit is starting that signal a change of input status that did
not take place. Correct operation is nevertheless unimpaired.
7-20
7.5.8.4. Checking the isolator and circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts

Check the timing sequence of the isolator auxiliary contacts by
inspecting the construction of the isolator or assessing it from the
respective data sheet.
Verify the operation of the CLOSED and OPEN contacts
1. according to the circuit diagram and
2. by physically opening and closing the isolator. This can be
accomplished by opening one of the following HMI500 or
local HMI dialogs:
View/Switchgear objects
View/Binary input/output status
View/Single-line diagram (HMI500 only)

7.5.8.5. Checking the manual CLOSE command

Further information on the operation is given in Section 3.8.7.
NOTE: Check for every configured circuit-breaker that its

CLOSED signal (command) is detected by the protection, i.e.
CLOSE commands from local and remote devices, from the
station automation system (SAS) or from the auto-reclosure
equipment.
The local HMI is the best way of checking the circuit-breaker

CLOSE command, because the signal is generated only briefly
and the local HMI is refreshed the quickest. The corresponding
menu item is Measurements/Inputs.
Alternatively the circuit-breaker CLOSE command can be
temporarily configured as and event and its operation observed
in the HMI500 event list.

7-21
7.5.9. Checking the binary output signals (tripping circuits and

alarms)
The contact load and rupture capacity given in Chapter 3. Basic
concept must not be exceeded.
WARNING: Test operations of circuit-breakers and isolators

require the permission of the user and all the prescribed
safety precautions must be observed. Avoid unnecessary
switching operations.
The tripping circuits are tested in the same way as the alarm
circuits by setting them appropriately in the test mode (the
operation of the test generator is described in Section 4.5.5.1.).
Set the HMI500 to the test mode by selecting Test mode from
the Testing menu.

Test (case sensitive) when the program is supplied.
Click on the Unblock all relays button in the test mode dialog.
In the test mode, select Binary input/output status in the View
menu to view the outputs of a binary module. The status of an
output can be changed by double-clicking on the corresponding
field, which then changes to yellow.
7-22
Fig. 7.8 HMI500 dialog Binary input/output status in the

View menu
Check that the correct circuit-breaker tripping coil is tripped by

the correspondingly configured tripping output.
Energizing the output relay checks all the external alarms and
trips.
NOTE: It is recommended to transmit the signals to activate

all the external alarms on the system (annunciator panels,
station automation system etc.) to ensure that an alarm is
always externally signaled. This can also be achieved by
combining several alarms (general alarm).
WARNING: All external relay coils must be fitted with

freewheel diodes or voltage-dependent resistors (VDRs).
Tripping signals are generally interrupted by the circuit-breaker
itself.

7-23
7.5.10. Checking the starting of the breaker failure protection

The breaker failure protection is started by various other
protection functions and therefore its connections to each of
them have to be checked (same procedure as in Section 7.5.7.
Checking the binary inputs signals (optocoupler inputs)).
NOTE: In principle, every protection function that can trip the

circuit-breaker should also start the breaker failure protection.
These are typically:

Busbar protection (when busbar and breaker failure
protection functions are performed by REB500, the
connection between the two is established in the software)
Bay protection (distance or longitudinal differential)
Remote trip from the other end of a line (direct transfer
tripping)
Transformer protection (differential, Buchholz or
overtemperature)
Overcurrent protection trip.
NOTE: Take care that the tripping signals generated by the

bay protection (e.g. distance protection) are used to start the
breaker failure protection and not the starting signals of the bay
protection functions (e.g. distance protection starting signals).
NOTE: Starting has to be single-phase where single-phase

reclosure is being applied, otherwise three-phase starting is
permissible.
7.5.11. Checking protection stability

The stability check verifies that all the CTs are connected with
the correct polarity and have the correct ratio.
All the feeder and bus-tie breaker CTs must be included,
otherwise correct operation of the protection cannot be
guaranteed.
Wherever possible the stability should be checked before the
busbar is energized, because the risk of a busbar fault is
7-24
especially high when it is being energized for the first time

(flashovers, grounding isolators still closed etc.).
7.5.11.1. Checking through-fault stability with de-energized busbars

Inject a current from a primary injection test set (25 % of the CT
rated current is recommended) into two feeders (a reference
feeder and one other feeder, see Fig. 7.9). Any feeder can be
used as reference. Compare each of the other feeders and bus-
tie breaker with the reference feeder.
If a bus-tie breaker is only equipped with one set of CTs, note
that they are used by two busbar sections.
In the case of a bus-tie breaker equipped with two sets of CTs
(see Fig. 7.10), make sure that the set of CTs assigned to the
busbar section under test is checked. The simplest way of
ensuring this is to short-circuit the CTs belonging to the section
not under test directly at the CTs or as close as possible to them.
The feeder currents and the differential current can be read
using HMI500.
NOTE: The comparison with the reference feeder must be con-

ducted for phase and neutral currents for protection schemes
that evaluate the neutral current.
7-25
II
Primary
injection
test set
Reference feeder
Fig. 7.9 Test set-up for checking protection through-fault

stability by primary injection (2 feeders)
I
II
Short-circuit CTs
Primary
injection
test set
Reference feeder
Fig. 7.10 Test set-up for checking protection through-fault

stability by primary injection on busbar I (bus-tie
breaker with two sets of CTs)
Result of the check of Fig. 7.10

BBI and BBII are not conducting differential current.
Repeat the check for the CTs of BBII.
7-26
7.5.11.2. Checking through-fault stability with load current

Where protection stability cannot be tested before the busbar is
energized or in the case of an extension to an existing system, it
has to be tested using load current.
WARNING: For this test, either tripping by the protection has to

be blocked or the tripping circuits have to be interrupted before
the currents are applied to the protection.
In order to carry out the test, all the amplitudes and directions of
the primary currents must be known. Perform one of the following:
Alternative a) Short-circuit the CTs and isolate them from the
protection.
Alternative b) Use the test mode to simulate that all the
isolators are open (this is the simpler method).
In the case of a), connect the infeeds one by one, or in the case
of b), simulate the closure of the isolators one by one. Whichever
method is chosen, check that the differential current increases
as each infeed is connected (either HMI500 or the local HMI in
the central unit). Repeat this procedure with the loads and the
differential current must reduce as each feeder is connected.
NOTE: In the case of systems, which evaluate the neutral

current, the differential current of the neutral measurement must
be checked as well. A neutral current has to be simulated in a
symmetrical power system in order to perform the stability test
(see Fig. 7.11).
7-27
Fig. 7.11 Testing the through-fault stability of the neutral

circuit
WARNING: Take great care not to open-circuit a CT secondary

by mistake.
Any other protection devices in the same CT secondary circuit

must not be influenced in any way (e.g. transformer differential
protection or ground fault relays).

7.5.12. Setting the system time

Set the date and local time by selecting Set system time in the
HMI500 Tools menu.
7.5.13. Viewing traceability data

Refer to Section 4.5.5.2. Testing / Installation mode.
7.5.14. Final test and inspection

Print the report with all the settings and the configuration by
selecting Reports in the Tools menu and checking the Print
all reports checkbox in the dialog that opens (see Section
4.5.6.2. Tools / Reports).
Check all the settings and the configured features such as as-
signment of modules, auxiliary supply values and the assign-
7-28
ment of signals to each optocoupler input and relay output once

again in the report!!
Visually check that all the temporary changes have been re-
moved and the system restored to its operational state. Pay
special attention to:
interrupted tripping circuits
interrupted alarms
interrupted input signals
short-circuited CTs
interrupted VTs
Make sure that the report has been completely filled in.
7-29
7.6. Configuring REB500 to match the layout of the primary

plant
7.6.1. Introduction
If the layout of the primary plant changes, the image of the
station in REB500 has to be reconfigured to suit.
The simplest way of achieving this is activating and deactivating
individual items of plant or groups of items using HMI500.
NOTE: The layout of the station as presented by HMI500

under View/Single-line diagram must always reflect the
actual arrangement of the primary plant.
Reconfiguration can become necessary when:

a bay has been added to the station (see Section 7.6.3.)
a bay is either taken out of service (e.g. a feeder which is no
longer needed is dismantled) or cannot be commissioned
immediately (see Section 7.6.4.)
a bus-tie breaker or longitudinal isolator is planned for the
future and is shorted on the primary side during commis-
sioning (see Section 7.6.5.)
for example, a feeder circuit-breaker has not been installed
yet, but the feeder itself has to be commissioned (see
Section 7.6.5.)
NOTE: All planned additions to the station must be provision-

ally configured when engineering the system.
Provisionally configured bays and items of plant (future addi-

tions) appear white in the single-line diagram presented by
HMI500 under View/Single-line diagram (see Fig. 7.12
View/Single-line diagram).
7-30
Fig. 7.12 View/Single-line diagram
7.6.2. Procedure
The procedure for reconfiguring REB500 is as follows:
1. Activate or deactivate bays and items of plant to correspond
to the actual situation of the station (see Sections 7.6.3.,
7.6.4. and 7.6.5.).
2. Block REB500 by applying a signal to the input Block output
relays on the central unit.
3. If a bay unit has to be deactivated, it must be switched off
from this point on.
4. If modules have to be added to or removed from the central
unit, this has to be done now (see Section 8.5. Replacing
units).
5. Enter the HMI500 installation mode by selecting
Testing/Installation mode and delete the existing REB500
database by selecting Delete database in the protection
system. HMI500 then terminates automatically.
6. In can occur occasionally with CPU 04 that the installation
mode does not correctly delete the database. REB500
cannot then restart and the database has to be deleted a
second time using RebLoad (see Section 8.5.7. Delete
database).
7. Restart HMI500 when Load database appears on the local
HMI of the central unit.
7-31
8. Download the modified database by selecting File/Download

to protection system. REB500 then restarts automatically.
9. If additions to the station have been unmasked, the
corresponding bay units must now be connected and
addresses assigned to them (see Section 8.5.3.).
10. If plant that has been removed from operation is being
recommissioned, this has to be carried out in accordance
with the present Chapter 7. Commissioning.
7.6.3. Adding a bay to an existing station

If a complete bay is being added to a station (e.g. feeder or bus-
tie), then
the bay has to be activated in HMI500 (see Section 7.6.3.1.)
the new hardware (e.g. bay unit) has to be connected in
accordance with the REB500 wiring diagram
7.6.3.1. Activating provisionally configured bays

To activate a provisionally configured bay, select Configuration /
Activate/deactivate device in HMI500 and then click on the
button Activate all (see Fig. 7.13 Configuration -
Activate/deactivate device).
A bay that has been newly activated appears black in the single-
line diagram (see Fig. 7.12 View/Single-line diagram).
Occasionally, it is a condition that although the primary equip-
ment of a bay has not been installed and thus no signals can be
transmitted to the protection, the REB500 bay unit has to be
fitted and in operation. In this case, open the dialog
Activate/deactivate device in the Configuration menu and with
the corresponding bay selected click on the button Activate (no
objects) (see Fig. 7.13).
Bays activated in this mode still appear white, but their
designations are black to show that they are active.
7-32
Fig. 7.13 Configuration - Activate/deactivate device
7.6.3.2. Activating central unit modules

It is necessary to activate central unit modules when:
an additional power supply unit is inserted
an additional bay is connected to a bus segment (node ID)
that is deactivated. All the modules of the bus segment
concerned then have to be activated, i.e. CPU, TRM, MBA
and SCM (see Section 3.2.2.)
Central unit modules are activated by selecting in HMI500 and
clicking on the button Activate (see Fig. 7.14 Configuration -
Activate/deactivate / device modules in the central unit).
7-33
Fig. 7.14 Configuration - Activate/deactivate / device

modules in the central unit
7.6.4. Removing a bay from operation

If a bay (e.g. feeder or bus-tie) in a station is being removed from
operation or not commissioned yet, then
the bay has to be deactivated in HMI500 (see Section
7.6.4.1.)
the deactivated hardware (e.g. bay unit) has to be
disconnected
This can become necessary, for example, when the primary
equipment has been removed or de-energized (including the
auxiliary DC supply) for a long period.
7.6.4.1. Deactivating bays

To deactivate a complete bay, select Configuration /
Activate/deactivate device in HMI500 and then click on the
button Deactivate (all objects open) (see Fig. 7.13
Configuration - Activate/deactivate device).
A bay that has been deactivated appears white in the single-line
diagram (see Fig. 7.12 View/Single-line diagram).
7-34
7.6.4.2. Deactivating central unit modules

It is necessary to deactivate central unit modules when:
an additional power supply unit is removed
after deactivating a bay, a bus segment (node ID) is no
longer needed. All the modules of the bus segment
concerned then have to be deactivated, i.e. CPU, TRM, MBA
and SCM (see Section 3.2.2.)
Central unit modules are deactivated by selecting in HMI500 and
clicking on the button Deactivate (see Fig. 7.14).
7.6.5. Special cases when adding or decommissioning plant

In a very few cases, it may be necessary to activate or deacti-
vate devices in the following manner:
7.6.5.1. Deactivating (items of plant shorted)

Application example:
Where a bus-tie breaker or longitudinal isolator is only planned
for the future and is shorted during commissioning, it is
configured by clicking on the button Deactivate (all objects
closed) (see Fig. 7.15 Shorted longitudinal isolator).
Fig. 7.15 Shorted longitudinal isolator
7-35
7.6.5.2. Activating and deactivating individual items of plant

Application example:
The circuit-breaker of a feeder has not been installed, the feeder,
however, has to be commissioned without it.
This is achieved by selecting Configuration Activate/
deactivate device/System objects and clicking on the button
Deactivate (object closed) (see Fig. 7.16 Deactivating
individual items of plant).
WARNING: Activating and deactivating individual items of

plant such as individual isolators can cause the protection
system to respond in an unexpected manner. Deactivating items
of plant affects the protection intertripping and tripping logic and
may therefore only be carried out following consultation with
ABB.
ABB cannot accept any responsibility for incorrect use of
this function!
Fig. 7.16 Deactivating individual items of plant
7-36
7.7. Additional checks for REB500sys

The following additional checks described below are necessary
to commission the bay protection function.
7.7.1. Commissioning a new station without any HV

When commissioning a new station or a station, which is not
energized, the busbar and breaker failure protection functions
(standard REB500sys functions) and the bay protection function
(line protection options) can be commissioned separately,
although certain tests do overlap and should be coordinated to
save time.
Note also that, for example, injecting current in the analog input
of one feeder can trip other feeders via the intertripping logic.
This can, however, be prevented by taking the appropriate
precautions (interrupting tripping circuits, blocking station
protection functions or blocking tripping relays).
7.7.2. Additions to an existing station

When adding to an existing station protected by REB500sys,
more checks have to be carried out than is the case with
REB500 (e.g. auto-reclosure cycle). To avoid any risk of the
station protection functions (BBP, BFP and EFP) being affected
and possibly mal-operating when performing the additional
checks, the following procedure is recommended. The basic
philosophy is to check the bay unit on its own first (without the
rest of the REB500 system). This is done in the stand-alone bay
unit mode and requires that the setfile be loaded in the bay unit
to be extended beforehand as follows:
Step 1
Interrupt the optical fiber link between the central unit and the by
unit to be commissioned.
Step 2
Switch on the auxiliary supply to the new bay unit.
Step 3
Appropriately update the setfile of the REB500sys in question to
include the new bay unit (activate the feeder, see Section 7.6.)
and download it to the new bay unit. The setfile must include
all the settings needed for the new bay unit.
7-37
Step 4
Check the analog inputs.
Refer to Sections 7.5.5. and 7.5.6.
Measuring the pick-up values of functions (e.g. distance
protection function) is unnecessary, because they are fully
processed by the software and any error would be detected by
the self-supervision function. However, it is normal to measure
the reactances of the various distance measuring zones. This
may be omitted if a suitable test set is not available.
Step 5
Check the binary inputs and outputs.
Refer to Sections 7.5.7., 7.5.8. and 7.5.9.
Step 6
Providing the auto-reclosure function is active, a complete auto-
reclosure cycle with the circuit-breaker should be carried out,
since it depends on various external signals (circuit-breaker
status, spring pressure etc.). The correct processing of these
signals can be verified using the test sequencer (see Chapter
12). An external current or voltage source is not necessary.
Step 7
Block the REB500 system (e.g. using Block output relays on
the central unit).
Step 8
Download the updated setfile to the central unit.
This requires that the PC running HMI500 be connected either
directly to the central unit or a bay unit, which is already
operational.
WARNING: On no account connect the optical fiber link to the

new bay unit before the setfile has been successfully
downloaded to the central unit.
7-38
Step 9
Switch off the bay unit.
Connect the optical fiber cable going to the central unit.
Switch on the bay unit.
Step 10
Perform the busbar protection through-fault stability check (see
Section 7.5.11.).
Step 11
Check the direction of the distance protection function with
load current.
This is achieved by measuring real and apparent power in L1
phase.
The real and apparent power measurements of all the directional
functions can be viewed by selecting View/BP function
monitoring.
The direction Forwards or Backwards is also displayed for
both real and apparent power as soon as a valid measurement
has been made.
The display is influenced by the setting CT Neutral Line
side/Busbar side for the distance protection function.
The default setting of CT Neutral for the distance protection
function is CTs grounded on the busbar side.
Note the following with respect to busbar protection:
The side on which the CTs are grounded is of no consequence
for the busbar protection and does not therefore have a setting.
What is important, however, is that the grounding of all the CTs
on the busbars is the same (and have the same winding sense),
otherwise the differential current will not be correct.
Where this is not the case, the connections to the corresponding
CT inputs on the respective bay units must be reversed (current
phase-angle rotated by 180).
In the feeders in which the current direction has been rotated in
the bay unit by 180, the setting parameter 'CT Neutra' of the
distance function must also be respectively corrected to
corresspond to actual earting direction of the CT.
7-39
Check the direction of the transformer differential protection

function with load current.
The stability check is performed by comparing the incoming and
outgoing current with the differential current.
The differential current should be very small (in the low %
values) in comparison to the throughput current.
The incoming and the outgoing current can be checked in the
display 'Analog input measurements' for the respective feeder.
The circulating current (and the restraining current) are displayed
in the menu 'BP function monitoring' under 'Transformer
differential protection'.
Step 12
Restore REB500 to normal operation.
7-40
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D ABB Switzerland Ltd
August 05
8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
8.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 8-3

8.1.1. Safety instructions ................................................................... 8-4
8.2. Operation ................................................................................. 8-5

8.2.1. Introduction .............................................................................. 8-5
8.2.2. Viewing data on the local HMI ................................................. 8-5
8.2.2.1. Menu structure......................................................................... 8-8
8.2.3. Signaling LEDs and display texts............................................. 8-9
8.2.3.1. Normal operation with no failures ............................................ 8-9
8.2.3.2. Alarm status............................................................................. 8-9
8.2.3.3. Tripped status .......................................................................... 8-9
8.2.3.4. Resetting the protection after a trip ........................................ 8-10
8.2.4. Viewing the event list and disturbance recorder records........ 8-10
8.2.5. Critical switching operations during normal operation............ 8-10
8.3. Maintenance .......................................................................... 8-12

8.3.1. Protection system defect........................................................ 8-12
8.3.1.1. General alarm ........................................................................ 8-12
8.3.1.2. Unexpected restart and start-up phase.................................. 8-12
8.3.1.3. Differential current alarm........................................................ 8-13
8.3.1.4. Isolator alarm ......................................................................... 8-13
8.3.2. Protection blocking functions ................................................. 8-13
8.3.3. Protection tripping .................................................................. 8-15
8.3.4. Special operating modes ....................................................... 8-17
8.3.4.1. Inspection and maintenance .................................................. 8-17
8.3.4.2. Transfer tripping..................................................................... 8-18
8.3.4.3. Isolator auxiliary contact logic Not CLOSED=OPEN ........... 8-18
8.4. Periodic maintenance ............................................................ 8-19

8.4.1. General .................................................................................. 8-19
8.4.2. Examples of maintenance checks ......................................... 8-19
8.4.3. Example: Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker ..... 8-20
8.4.4. Example: Maintenance check on a bus-tie breaker ............... 8-29
8.4.5. Maintenance of bay protection functions (REB500sys only) .. 8-32
8.4.6. Checking the local HMI .......................................................... 8-32
8.5. Replacing units ...................................................................... 8-33

8.5.1. Procedure .............................................................................. 8-33
8.5.2. Replacing modules in the central unit .................................... 8-34
8.5.3. Replacing a bay unit .............................................................. 8-35
8-1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. D
8.5.4. Checking newly installed hardware........................................ 8-37

8.5.5. Report and traceability data ................................................... 8-37
8.5.6. Restoring the system to operation ......................................... 8-37
8.5.7. Delete database..................................................................... 8-38
8.6. Returning modules for repair ................................................. 8-39
8-2
8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
8.1. Introduction
REB500 includes continuous comprehensive self-supervision
and diagnosis of the software and hardware components. By
setting up a proper signaling scheme while commissioning the
system, most failures are signaled externally (see Section 7.5.9.
Checking the binary output signals). They can include internal
REB500 as well as external failures in primary and secondary
systems that influence the response of the protection. Other
failures that are not detected (e.g. interrupted tripping circuit) are
located and cleared while carrying out periodic inspection and
maintenance (see Section 8.4.). Checks and measurements
while the system is in normal operation (no active alarms) are
therefore unnecessary.
NOTE: Normal operation without any faults is also indicated by

the fact that only green LED are lit on he local HMI.
An alarm (external or on the local HMI) can concern a failure in

the REB500 system (e.g. hardware failure) or in the associated
primary plant (e.g. incorrect isolator status signal).
WARNING: Should the system generate an alarm, inform the

trained maintenance personnel responsible.
8-3
8.1.1. Safety instructions
WARNING: Checks and maintenance on the REB500 system

may only be carried out by properly trained personnel.
WARNING: Only properly trained and authorized personnel

should be in possession of the HMI500 password.
8-4
8.2. Operation
8.2.1. Introduction
Operation in the case of the REB500 busbar protection system is
confined to supervising the proper function of the system and
assessing the system data.
There are different ways of viewing operating, disturbance and
tripping data:
local HMI (see Section 8.2.2.)
PC running HMI500 (see Chapter 4)
remote HMI (see Chapter 11)
station automation system (SCS) (see Chapter 11)
8.2.2. Viewing data on the local HMI

The local HMI provides a quick overview of the status of the
protection (normal operation, alarms and trips) without having to
connect a PC.
It is fitted in every central unit and as an option in the bay units.
On the front, it has a four-line display, three LEDs and six
pushbuttons. These enable the equipment to be operated and
controlled simply and conveniently where it is installed. An
interface is also provided, however, for connecting a PC, which
comprises an optoelectrical converter for electrically isolating the
computer from the protection equipment, thus preventing the
ingress of electrical interference.
Whether on the central unit or a bay unit, the local HMI enables
the following to be viewed:
current and voltage measurements
statuses of inputs and outputs
alarms (generated by the respective bay unit)
system (or respective bay unit) settings
settings of all the specific bay unit protection functions
8-5
LEDs: green yellow red
Standby Alarm Trip

X.XX
HEST 005025 C
Optical PC
interface
Fig. 8.1 Local human-machine-interface (LHMI)
LEDs
Each LED can be on one of three conditions: not lit, flashing or
continuously lit. All the LEDs flash while the system is being
initialized.
Green
The green LED does not light before the system has
completed initialization and is standing by. If the green LED is
not lit or flashes, the device is either not switched on or
defective.
Yellow
The yellow LED flashes to signal an alarm condition (e.g.
differential current or isolator alarm). When a button is
pressed or a trip occurs while it is flashing, the LED changes
to being continuously lit.
Red
The red LED indicates a trip. It remains lit until reset by a
binary signal applied to the reset input or by selecting the
HMI Reset latching function.
20 LED signals
20 additional LEDs are provided on the local HMI, each of which
can be assigned to any output signal and configured to latch or
not latch as the case may be.
8-6
LCD
In the event of an alarm or a trip, the functions of the three LEDs
are shown on the top line and the other lines describe the event
that has occurred. The respective information is displayed
according to the location in the menu structure.
If none of the buttons are operated for about 10 minutes, the
display backlight switches of. It switches on again automatically
as soon as a button is pressed. The initial pressing of a button
while the backlight is off does not change the previous display.
Pushbuttons
The six pushbuttons are used primarily to navigate through the
menu structure. Any of them switches the display backlight on
again if it was switched off. If the backlight is switched on, any of
the buttons acknowledges the current HMI display.
Button E
Press button E to go to the next menu down.
Button C
Press button C to return to the main menu. If Reset
latching is the current menu, pressing this button resets
any relays that are latched.
Arrow buttons
The buttons marked and are for scrolling through
displays of information needing more than four lines.
The buttons marked and are for moving through the
menus item by item.
Setting the bay unit ID

See Section 8.5.
Checking the local HMI

See Section 8.4.6.
8-7
8.2.2.1. Menu structure

The menu structures of central unit and bay unit are basically the
same. The central unit has additional menu items for system
settings and specific bay units.
Menu structure of the central unit

Alarms
Trips
Reset
Latching
LEDs (500BU03 only)
Blocking (500BU03 only)
Central unit
Meas. var.
Bus zones
Bus zone 1
Diff. cur. alarm
Bus zone 2
Diff. cur. alarm
... (other bus zones as configured)
Inputs
Slot 16 (where fitted)
Outputs
Global values
Settings
System response
Busbar protection
Phases
Neutral
Module check
Bay units
Bay unit 1
Meas. var.
Currents
Voltages
Inputs
Outputs
Circuit-breakers
Breaker designation
... (where configured)
Settings
BBP
BFP (where configured)
OCDT (where configured)
EFP (where configured)
PDF (where configured)
Bay unit 2
See bay unit 1
... (other bay units as configured)
8-8
Menu structure of the bay unit

Alarms
Trips
Reset
Latching
LEDs (500BU03 only)
Blocking (500BU03 only)
Global values
System response
BBP
Phases
Neutral current
Overcurrent enable
BFP (where configured)
OCDT (where configured)
EFP (where configured)
PDF (where configured)
Measured variables
Currents
Voltages
Inputs
Outputs
Circuit-breakers
Breaker designation
(where configured)
8.2.3. Signaling LEDs and display texts
8.2.3.1. Normal operation with no failures

No action is necessary in normal operation.
Central unit and bay units
HMI text LEDs Event

ABB REB500 V7.xx Green lit -
V1.00A 02-08-05
Table 8.1 Normal operation
8.2.3.2. Alarm status

In the alarm status, the system alarms that have operated can
be viewed in the alarm list.
8.2.3.3. Tripped status

The trips generated by REB500 can be viewed in the trip list
together with the times they occurred and the protection
functions that caused them. The list shows the ten latest trips,
but is deleted when the particular device is switched off.
8-9
8.2.3.4. Resetting the protection after a trip

Provision is made on the local HMI for resetting the protection
system and all the signals. This is done by selecting the menu
item Reset latching and pressing button C.
HMI text LEDs Event

Reset latching - -
C: Reset
E: Quit
Table 8.2 Resetting latched signals and relays
Resetting latched signals and relays by pressing button C on

the local HMI is equivalent an active signal 31810_External
reset (e.g. generated by pressing an external reset button).
8.2.4. Viewing the event list and disturbance recorder records
NOTE: Viewing the event list and disturbance recorder

records is recommended should an alarm occur.
The corresponding procedure is described in Section 4.5.2.7.

View / Disturbance recorder respectively Section 4.5.2.9. View
/ Event list.
8.2.5. Critical switching operations during normal operation
WARNING: Avoid performing switching operations in the

event of the following alarms before the failure has been
analyzed by correspondingly trained personnel.
Isolator alarm
Switch inhibit
Inspection and maintenance
Non-observance of this precaution can cause mal-operation in
normal operation or a failure to trip in response to a fault (see
Section 3.7.4.).
8-10
WARNING: Isolator alarm may only be acknowledged by

correspondingly trained and authorized personnel.
Non-observance of this precaution can cause mal-operation in
normal operation or a failure to trip in response to a fault (see
Section 3.7.4.).
8-11
8.3. Maintenance
WARNING: Strictly observe station procedures in the event of a

defect be it failure to trip or mal-operation.
8.3.1. Protection system defect

This section lists the signals, which occur for the various kinds of
faults.
NOTE: The possible causes of failures and the action to be

taken by maintenance personnel are given in Chapter 9 Fault-
finding.
8.3.1.1. General alarm

HMI text LEDs Event
General alarm Green lit, CU: 41805_Alarm
yellow flashes until
button on the local BU: No event
HMI pressed
Table 8.3 Protection failure
8.3.1.2. Unexpected restart and start-up phase
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
- The three LEDs CU: 41810_In service resets
or flash
CU start-up signals
Table 8.4 Central unit restarts
8-12
Bay units
HMI text LEDs Event
- The three LEDs BU: 21805_In service resets
or flash
BU start-up signals
Table 8.5 Bay unit restarts
8.3.1.3. Differential current alarm
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Diff. cur. alarm Green lit, CU: 41815_Diff. current
yellow flashes until alarm active
button on the local
HMI pressed
Table 8.6 Differential current alarm on the central unit
8.3.1.4. Isolator alarm

HMI text LEDs Event
Isol. alarm Green lit, CU: 41505_Isolator alarm
Feeder name yellow flashes until active
Isol. alarm button on the local
CU: 41830_Switch inhibit
HMI pressed
active
BU: No event
Table 8.7 Isolator alarm
8.3.2. Protection blocking functions

This section lists the signals when the protection is blocked and
the possible causes.

HMI text LEDs Event
<Subsystem> Green lit, CU: 41405_SP blocked active
blocked yellow flashes
BU: 21405_SP blocked active
(Subsystem = BBP, until button on the
BFP, EFP, OCDT, local HMI pressed
PDF, BP)
8-13
HMI text LEDs Event

Contacts blocked Green lit, CU: 41410_Output relays
yellow flashes blocked active
until button on the
BU: 21410_Output relays
local HMI pressed
blocked active
BBP blocked Green lit, CU: 42405_BBP blocked
Feeder yellow flashes active
BBP blocked until button on the
BU: 22405_BBP blocked
local HMI pressed
active
BFP blocked Green lit, CU: 43405_BFP blocked
BFP blocked until button on the
BU: 23405_BFP blocked
local HMI pressed
active
EFP blocked Green lit, CU: 44405_EFP blocked
EFP blocked until button on the
BU: 24405_EFP blocked
local HMI pressed
active
OCDT blocked Green lit, CU: 45405_OCDT blocked
OCDT blocked until button on the
BU: 25405_OCDT blocked
local HMI pressed
active
PDF blocked Green lit, CU: 47405_PDF blocked
PDF blocked until button on the
BU: 27405_PDF blocked
local HMI pressed
active
BP blocked Green lit, CU: 49405_BP blocked active
yellow flashes
BU: 29405_BP blocked active
until button on the
local HMI pressed
Table 8.8 Blocking protection functions
Possible causes
The blocking of a protection function is due to either an active
optocoupler input or an internal alarm, e.g. differential current
alarm.
Corrective action
Corrective action is only necessary if blocking is unintentional. If
this is the case, check whether a voltage is being applied to an
optocoupler input, which would indicate a fault in the external
circuit. If the fault appears to be caused by an internal alarm,
check whether there is a corresponding display and correct the
cause of the alarm. Refer to the instructions for the
corresponding alarm in Section 8.3.1.1.
8-14
8.3.3. Protection tripping

This section lists the signals which occur when the protection
trips.
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Date Time Green lit, CU: 42305_BBP trip
Trip red lit CU: 42310_BBP trip L0
Feeder name CU: 42315_BBP trip L1
Bus zone * CU: 42320_BBP trip L2
CU: 42325_BBP trip L3
Date Time Green lit, CU: 43305_BFP trip t1
BFP trip t1/2 red lit CU: 43310_BFP trip t2
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: 44305_EFP trip
EFP trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: 45305_OCDT trip
OCDT trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: 47305_PDF trip
PDF trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU: None
DIST trip red lit
Feeder name
OCSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, CU None
OCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
DIROCDT trip red lit
Feeder name
DIROCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
OVSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
DIREFGND trip red lit
Feeder name
I0INV trip red lit
Feeder name
8-15
HMI text LEDs Event

OCINST trip red lit
Feeder name
TH trip red lit
Feeder name
DIFTRA trip red lit
Feeder name
Table 8.9 Central unit trips
Bay units
HMI text LEDs Event
Date Time Green lit, BU: 21110_TRIP
BBP TRIP red lit BU: 21115_REMOTE TRIP
BU: 21305_Trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 23105_BFP TRIP
BFP trip t1/2 red lit BU: 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
BU: 23305_BFP trip t1
BU: 23310_BFP trip t2
BU: 23315_BFP TRIP L1
BU: 23335_Trip by BFP
Date Time Green lit, BU: 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
EFP trip red lit BU: 24305_EFP trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 25105_OCDT TRIP
OCDT trip red lit BU: 25305_OCDT trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 27105_PDF TRIP
PDF trip red lit BU: 27305_PDF trip
Date Time Green lit, BU: 2111xx_DIST Trip CB x
DIST trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 212105_OCSTD TRIP
OCSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 213105_OCINV TRIP
OCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 214105_DIROCDT TRIP
DIROCDT trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 215305_DIROCINV TRIP
DIROCINV trip red lit
Feeder name
8-16
HMI text LEDs Event

Date Time Green lit, BU: 216105_OVSTD TRIP
OVSTD trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 220105_DIREFGND TRIP
DIREFGND trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 221105_I0INV TRIP
I0INV trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 224605_CHKI3PH Picked up
CHKI3PH trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 225605_CHKU3PH Picked up
CHKU3PH trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 226105_ OCINST TRIP
OCINST trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU: 228105 TH TRIP
TH trip red lit
Feeder name
Date Time Green lit, BU:
DIFTRA trip red lit
229105_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1L2L3
Feeder name
229110_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1
Table 8.10 Bay unit trips
8.3.4. Special operating modes

This section lists the signals generated in special operating
modes.
8.3.4.1. Inspection and maintenance

The inspection status is signaled when an inspection/main-
tenance input is active (see Section 11.12.).
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event

Insp./Maintenance Green lit, CU: 41825_Inspection/main-
Feeder name yellow flashes until tenance
button on the local
HMI pressed
Table 8.11 Inspection/maintenance on central unit
8-17
Bay units
HMI text LEDs Event
Inspection Green lit, BU: 21815_Inspection/main-
Inspection number yellow flashes until tenance
button on the local
HMI pressed
Maintenance Green lit, BU: 21815_Inspection/main-
yellow flashes until tenance active
button on the local
HMI pressed
Table 8.12 Inspection/maintenance on bay units
8.3.4.2. Transfer tripping

A transfer trip is signaled when a transfer trip input is active (see
Section 11.11.).
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Trip transferred Green lit, Depends on configuration
yellow flashes until
button on the local
HMI pressed
Table 8.13 Transfer trip
8.3.4.3. Isolator auxiliary contact logic Not CLOSED=OPEN

A failure of the isolator image auxiliary supply is signaled when
the isolator auxiliary contact logic Not CLOSED=OPEN is
active (see Section 7.5.8.3.).
Central unit
HMI text LEDs Event
Isol. alarm Green lit, CU: 41505_Isolator alarm
Feeder name yellow flashes until
CU: 41830_Switch inhibit
Isol. alarm button on the local
HMI pressed CU: 41820_Loss of supply
voltage
BU: 21810_Loss of supply
voltage
Table 8.14 Isolator alarm for Not CLOSED=OPEN logic
8-18
8.4. Periodic maintenance
8.4.1. General
Depending on the ambient conditions, we recommend removing
the dust (e.g. with a vacuum cleaner) and wiping the front of the
LCD with a damp cloth (perhaps with a little washing up liquid)
from time to time. Do not use petrol or cleaning agents
containing alcohol.
As explained in Section 8.1. REB500 includes continuous and
comprehensive self-supervision and diagnosis of the software
and hardware components. Since it is in the software that the
protection functions are computed, they do not require any
periodic maintenance.
The protection equipment, however, is only part of the overall
protection system, we recommend periodically checking all the
parts that are not automatically supervised (details of the self-
supervision routines are given in Section 3.6. Self-supervision).
The following components must be tested periodically:
all external circuits (e.g. tripping, BFP starting, CT and VT,
etc.)
all external switching devices (circuit-breakers and isolators)
all REB500 tripping and signaling contacts
all REB500 optocoupler inputs
all REB500 analog inputs
the local HMI
8.4.2. Examples of maintenance checks
NOTE: The following examples illustrate the advantages of the

digital protection system. The protection functions do not require
any testing.
The examples of maintenance checks are based on a double

busbar configuration operating under the following conditions:
1. Maintenance is not performed specifically on the REB500
system, but in combination with the routine maintenance of
the feeder (circuit-breaker) and therefore only applies to the
bay unit.
8-19
2. REB500 must not be blocked while maintenance is being

performed.
3. Maintenance of the REB500 bay unit must not require that
the supply be interrupted.
Since with REB500, its maintenance can be combined with that
of the circuit-breaker, the power supply to consumers is not
interrupted although testing covers 100% of bay equipment.
Protection of the remainder of the station is unimpaired, because
the bay under test is isolated from the system (busbar isolators
and circuit-breaker are open because the bay is isolated for
inspection and maintenance).
WARNING: Maintenance involves opening and closing circuit-

breakers. Make sure that all safety notices are in place and all
the safety precautions taken.
WARNING: REB500 is still fully operational while the

maintenance described below is being carried out and responds
accordingly.
NOTE: A test procedure similar to the examples of Sections

8.4.3 and 8.4.4. must be established for all feeders and
performed at approximately 2 yearly intervals.
8.4.3. Example: Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker
Fig. 8.2 Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker
8-20
Conditions:
The isolator image auxiliary supply must not be switched off
for certain checks.
The feeder must not be grounded for certain checks.
The maintenance procedure must be gone through step by
step.
The feeder is isolated from the busbars during the test and
therefore cannot conduct power.
The maintenance procedure for a feeder connected to double
busbars is illustrated in Fig. 8.3 Steps of the feeder
maintenance procedure.
Fig. 8.3 Steps of the feeder maintenance procedure
8-21
Step 1: Isolate the feeder

The conditions before Step 1 can be seen from Fig. 8.4
Configuration of the feeder before Step 1 (on load).
Fig. 8.4 Configuration of the feeder before Step 1 (on

load)
Connect the PC to the central unit and start HMI500.
Open the circuit-breaker.
Open the isolators.
Check the statuses of the isolators and the circuit-breaker
(providing they are active in the protection system) in HMI500 by
selecting Switchgear objects in the View menu (see Fig. 8.5
Checking the statuses of the switchgear).
Fig. 8.5 Checking the statuses of the switchgear
Interrupt the tripping and transfer tripping circuits.
8-22
Step 2: Check the analog input circuits

The conditions prior to step 2 can be seen from Fig. 8.6
Configuration of the feeder before step 2.
Fig. 8.6 Configuration of the feeder before step 2
Short circuit the main CT leads at the terminals of the

protection cubicle and open the jumper to the protection.
As an extra precaution block the busbar protection
completely for a short period by applying the signal
32205_Block BBP to the central unit (not absolutely
essential because the busbar isolators are open).
Inject a current of 1 x IN and, it there are voltage inputs, a
voltage of 1 x UN into each phase of the analog inputs.
Read the currents and voltages via HMI500 by selecting
Analog input measurements in the View menu (see Fig.
8.7 Checking the signals at the analog inputs and Sections
7.5.5. and 7.5.6.).
Enable the busbar protection again.
8-23
Fig. 8.7 Checking the signals at the analog inputs
Step 3: Check the output circuit using the HMI500 test

generator
Configuration of the feeder before Step 3.
Fig. 8.8 Configuration of the feeder before Step 3
Start the HMI500 test generator in the Test mode dialogue.

This automatically blocks all the output relays (see Section
7.5.9.).
Enable all the relays again so that the system is operating
normally.
8-24
Close the circuit-breaker.

Operated the tripping relay of the trip circuit in question (see
Fig. 8.9 Using the test generator to initiate tripping).
Fig. 8.9 Using the test generator to initiate tripping
Check that the circuit-breaker has tripped.

Note: If tripping is phase by phase and a CB pole
discrepancy function is configured, the latter will trip the other
two poles.
Repeat the last two operations for the other phases and trip
circuits.
Check that the circuit-breaker is open, otherwise open it.
Check the remote tripping function of the breaker failure
protection if configured. The remote circuit-breaker must be
ready to trip before this test. Operate the remote tripping
relay and trip the remote circuit-breaker. Check that this has
indeed happened.
Check the signals to other systems (annunciator panel etc.).
8-25
Step 4: Check that the breaker failure protection starts

The conditions prior to Step 4 can be seen from Fig. 8.10
Configuration of the feeder before Step 4.
Fig. 8.10 Configuration of the feeder before Step 4
Interrupt the transfer tripping circuit.

Initiate a starting signal from the bay protection to the breaker
failure protection (by simulation or secondary injection).
Check that the starting signal has been received from the bay
protection by the breaker failure protection by opening the
Binary input/output status dialogue (see Fig. 8.11 Checking
the binary inputs) or viewing the event list (see Section
7.5.10.).
Restore the transfer tripping circuit.
Step 5: Check the input signals from the circuit-breaker

The following test must also be performed if the busbar image of
the circuit-breaker is being used:
Close and reopen the circuit-breaker.
Check the status of the circuit-breaker in the same way as for
an isolator (see step 7).
Check the close command on the local HMI by opening the
Binary input/output status dialogue, because this input
signal only lasts a short time and the local HMI is refreshed
more frequently (see Section 7.5.8.5.).
8-26
Fig. 8.11 Checking the binary inputs
Step 6: Check the input signals from the isolators

Close and open the isolators to busbars I and II.

Check the statuses of the isolators by opening the Binary
input/output status dialogue (see Fig. 8.11 Checking the
binary inputs and Section 7.5.8.4.).
8-27
Step 7: Recommissioning the bay

Reinsert the jumpers in the CT secondary circuit and remove

the short-circuit from the main CT leads.
Close the isolator to connect the feeder to the desired
busbars.
Close the circuit-breaker.
Step 8: Check the load current

Configuration of the feeder before step 8 (on load).
Fig. 8.14 Configuration of the feeder before step 8 (on load)
Compare the actual load current with the value in the Analog
input measurements dialogue (see Fig. 8.7 Checking the
signals at the analog inputs and Section 7.5.11.2.).
8-28
8.4.4. Example: Maintenance check on a bus-tie breaker
Fig. 8.15 Steps of the bus-tie breaker maintenance

procedure
Conditions:
The isolator image auxiliary supply must not be switched off
for certain checks.
The bus-tie breaker circuit must not be grounded for certain
checks.
The maintenance procedure must be gone through step by
step.
The bus-tie breaker is isolated from the busbars during the
test and therefore cannot conduct power.
The maintenance procedure for a bus-tie breaker connected to
double busbars is illustrated in Fig. 8.15 Steps of the bus-tie
breaker maintenance procedure.
Step 1: Isolate the bus-tie breaker

The conditions prior to maintenance can be seen from Fig. 8.16
Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 1 (on load).
8-29
Fig. 8.16 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 1

(on load)
Connect the PC to the central unit and start HMI500.

Open the bus-tie breaker.
Open the isolators.
Step 2: Check the analog input circuits

Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before step 2.
Fig. 8.17 Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before step 2
Short circuit the main CT leads at the terminals of the

protection cubicle and open the jumper to the protection.
As an extra precaution block the busbar protection
completely for a short period by applying the signal
32205_Block BBP to the central unit (not absolutely
essential because the busbar isolators are open).
Inject a current of 1 x IN and, if there are voltage inputs, a
voltage of 1 x UN into each phase of the analog inputs.
Read the currents and voltages via HMI500 by selecting
Analog input measurements in the View menu (see Fig.
8.7 Checking the signals at the analog inputs and Sections
7.5.5. and 7.5.6.).
Enable the busbar protection again.
8-30
Step 3: Check the output circuit using the HMI500 test

generator
Start the HMI500 test generator in the Test mode dialogue.
This automatically blocks all the output relays (see Section
7.5.9.).
Enable all the relays again so that the system is operating
normally.
Close the bus-tie breaker.
Trip circuit 1, R phase (see Fig. 8.9 Using the test generator
to initiate tripping).
Check that the R phase pole of the circuit-breaker has
tripped.
Repeat the last two operations for the other phases and trip
circuits.
Check that the bus-tie breaker is open, otherwise open it.
Check the signals to other systems.
Step 4: Check that the breaker failure protection starts

Check that the starting signal has been received from the
bus-tie breaker protection by the breaker failure protection by
opening the Binary input/output status dialogue (see Fig.
8.11 Checking the binary inputs and Section 7.5.10.).
Step 5: Check the input signals from the circuit-breaker

Close and reopen the bus-tie breaker.
Check the status of the circuit-breaker as described in
Section 8.4.3 Example: Maintenance check on a feeder
circuit-breaker.
Check the close command as described in Section 8.4.3
Example: Maintenance check on a feeder circuit-breaker.
8-31
Step 6: Check the load current

Configuration of the bus-tie breaker before Step 1 (on load).
Compare the actual load current with the value in the Analog
input measurements dialogue (see Fig. 8.7 Checking the
signals at the analog inputs and Sections 7.5.5. and 7.5.6.).
8.4.5. Maintenance of bay protection functions (REB500sys only)

Before checking the auto-reclosure cycle of the bay protection,
consider the possible effect of, for example, secondary injection
on other protection functions such as the busbar and breaker
failure protection functions.
WARNING: Where there is doubt, block the station protection

functions by applying the input signal 31205_Block SP to the
central unit.
8.4.6. Checking the local HMI

Start the self-testing function of the local HMI by holding buttons
<E> and <C> simultaneously depressed for about 5 seconds.
8-32
8.5. Replacing units
WARNING: Units and modules may only be replaced with

the permission of the engineer responsible for the protection
system.
8.5.1. Procedure
The best time to replace assemblies is when the station is out of
operation, but even in this case, care must be taken that no
unintentional operation of switchgear can take place (danger to
persons close to the item of plant).
While the station is in operation, care must be taken that the
station is still adequately protected when REB500 is switched
off.
WARNING: Power supply units may never be inserted or

withdrawn with the auxiliary supply connected. Therefore place
the switch on the front of the power supply unit in the off position
and unplug the green connector on the end of the battery cable.
It is insufficient to simply switch off the unit. Other modules
may only be withdrawn or inserted when the power supply unit
500PSM03 is switched off.
WARNING: Observe ESD (electrostatic discharge) procedures

when replacing hardware components, otherwise parts sensitive
to ESD may be destroyed.
8-33
8.5.2. Replacing modules in the central unit
Slot on
Module
backplane 500CUB03
500PSM03 1, 20
500CPU05 3, 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, 15, 19
500SCM01 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18
500BIO01 16, 18
500CIM06 19
Table 8.15 Central unit modules
After replacing the 500CMP05 module in slot 3 (CMP), it is

necessary to reload the setfile. Using the TCP/IP link for the
HMI500, reconfigure the new communications parameter.
Procedure:
1. Switch on the CU:

Simon
When this display appears
on the local HMI, press the Press E for
E button. Setup ...

2. The Setup Menu will be

displayed on the HMI. SETUP MENU
With the '' or '' arrows the Change IP Addr.
Delete Database
menu item Change IP Exit
Addr. can be selected.
With the 'E' resp. '' key the
menu item is activated.
3. The IP address is displayed
on the HMI CHANGE IP ADDR.
With the '' or '' arrows the IP Address
Subnet Mask
desired menu item can be Gateway Address
selected.
8-34
4. With the keys ''or '' the

value of an item can be IP ADDRESS
changed, 000.000.000.000

and, move the cursor from E=Save C=Cancel
one value to the other with
the keys '' or ''.
The new values are
displayed, and with 'E' 'C
are stored or cancelled.
5. The Setup Menu is
With the keys '' or '' the Change IP Addr.
Delete Database
menu item 'Exit' is selected. Exit
With the key 'E' resp. '' exit
the Setup Menu.
After confirmation the central unit will be restarted automatically
with the new communication parameters.
8.5.3. Replacing a bay unit

Before replacing a bay unit, check that the new unit contains the
same modules (BU03 and what options are included, see
Section 3.3.).
When connecting a bay unit to a central unit for the first time, for
example, when replacing a defective module, it is necessary to
configure the communications parameters, the node ID and the
device ID as they were on the old unit.
NOTE: The communication parameters that have to be set,

i.e. node ID and device ID (addresses) are given in the draft
report Bus section and device allocation accessed via the
Reports menu item in the HMI500 Tools menu.
WARNING: Incorrect or incorrectly executed settings will

prevent the bay unit from starting and can disable the entire
system.
8-35
The setting procedure is as follows:
1. Switch on the bay unit:

Simon
When this display appears
on the local HMI, press the Press E for
E button. Setup ...


With the '' or '' arrows the Change MVB Addr.
Delete Database
menu item Change MVB Exit
Addr. can be selected.
menu item is activated
3. With the keys '' or '' a
value can be changed, MVB Address
with the keys '' or '' move Node Id = 001
Device Id = 001
from one item to the other. E=Save C=Cancel
The new values are
displayed, and with 'E' 'C
are stored or cancelled.
With the keys '' or '' the Change MVB Addr.
Delete Database
the Setup Menu.
Once the values have been confirmed, the bay unit restarts
automatically with the new communication settings.
8-36
8.5.4. Checking newly installed hardware

Hardware components that are not included in the self-super-
vision system (see Section 8.4.1.) have to be checked according
to Section 8.4. or Section 7.5. Commissioning the protection
system.
8.5.5. Report and traceability data

Record all modules that are replaced in a report and update the
report every time a module is replaced.
The traceability data must also be read (see Section 7.5.13.).
8.5.6. Restoring the system to operation

Refer to Section 8.4. or Section 7.5. Commissioning the
protection system.
WARNING: The protection system may only be restored to

operation with the permission of the engineer responsible for it.
8-37
8.5.7. Delete database

It can occur occasionally with 500CPU05 or the 500BU03 (in
stand-alone operation) that the installation mode does not
correctly delete the database.
REB500 cannot then restart and the database has to be deleted
manually using the local HMI.
The setup procedure:
1. Switch on the CU:

When this display appears on Simon
the local HMI, press the E
Press E for
button. Setup ...


With the '' resp. '' arrows Change IP Addr.
Delete Database
the menu item Delete Exit
Database can be selected.
3. The 'Delete Database' menu
is displayed on the HMI. DELETE DATABASE
With the 'E' key the
E = Delete DB
database is deleted. With C = Cancel
the 'C' key exit the menu
item.
With the keys '' resp. '' the Change IP Addr.
Delete Database
the Setup Menu.
After confirmation the central unit will be restarted
automatically with the new communication parameters.
8-38
8.6. Returning modules for repair

Defective modules should be shipped accompanied by a full
description of the failure, wherever possible in the original
packing or in packing that affords adequate protection from
moisture, vibration and electrostatic discharge to your ABB
company or agent or to the following address:
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Power Systems
Repair Centre, Warenannahme PT-EG
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5401 Baden
8-39
March 07
9. FAULT-FINDING
9.2. Lists of possible faults.............................................................. 9-3

9.2.1. General faults while starting the system .................................. 9-3
9.2.1.1. While starting the central unit................................................... 9-4
9.2.1.2. While starting the bay unit 500BU03........................................ 9-6
9.2.1.3. While starting HMI500.............................................................. 9-8
9.2.2. General faults in operation....................................................... 9-9
9.2.3. System function failures......................................................... 9-12
9.2.3.1. Bay unit faults ........................................................................ 9-12
9.2.3.2. 500CIM06 faults..................................................................... 9-13
9.2.3.3. Busbar protection function faults............................................ 9-14
9.2.3.4. Breaker failure protection faults ............................................. 9-15
9.2.3.5. End fault protection faults ...................................................... 9-16
9.2.3.6. CB pole discrepancy protection faults.................................... 9-16
9.2.3.7. Disturbance recorder faults.................................................... 9-16
9.2.4. HMI500 faults......................................................................... 9-17
9.2.5. Hardware faults...................................................................... 9-19
9.2.5.1. 500CMU05 as CPC module................................................... 9-19
9.2.5.2. 500CPU05 as MBA module ................................................... 9-20
9.2.5.3. 500SCM01............................................................................. 9-21
9-1
9. FAULT-FINDING
WARNING: All work on the REB500 busbar protection

system must be carefully planned. Errors when manipulating
the system cannot only destroy components, they can also
cause false tripping and serious interruption to the power
supply.
Modules that have been replaced may only be repaired by the
manufacturer.
DANGER: Precautions must be taken in the immediate area

when working on the central unit or one of the bay units to
exclude any possibility of persons coming into contact with live
parts.
A danger of electrical shock also exists when measuring cur-
rents and voltages.
DANGER: When replacing electronic modules, take the

necessary precautions to prevent damage to components due
to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
9-2
9.2. Lists of possible faults

The faults are divided into:
faults during start-up
faults during normal operation.
For easier reference, the various steps in the following tables
have an identification code.
9.2.1. General faults while starting the system

Faults are most likely to occur during installation of the protection
system (i.e. while testing and commissioning it).
Code Description Possible causes and corrective action
10 Central unit does not start Possible causes:

1. Hardware.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Table 9.2
20 Bay unit does not start Possible causes:
1. Aux. supply failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Table 9.3
30 System blocks after starting Possible causes:
1. Active isolator alarm during start-up.
2. Invalid event memory because of being
switched off longer than 24 hours or a
defective power reservoir. Uploading to
HMI500 can cause blocking.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the voltage at the opto-
coupler inputs for the busbar image
isolator supervision.
Step 2 Acknowledge isolator alarm and the
system will start.
Step 3 Delete the event memory using
HMI500 and the system will start.
60 System fails to respond. Possible causes:
No caps fitted to unused 1. Process bus failure.
500SCM01 channels
Corrective action:
Step 1 Fit caps on unused 500SCM01 opto-
couplers.
Table 9.1 Starting the protection system
9-3
9.2.1.1. While starting the central unit
10 LED on PSM03 not lit Possible causes:

although system switched 1. Aux. supply failure.
on
2. Fuse blown.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check power supply.
Step 2 Check fuse.
15 Loading database appears Possible causes:
on the display and the 1. DBS (database) corrupted.
system resets immediately
Corrective action:
Step 1 Delete database using local HMI and
download the database to the
protection system again.
Procedure for deleting database:
1) Switch on the CU.
2) As soon as Start MPL appears on the
local HMI, press button E.
3) When the query Clear DB? appears,
press the C button to confirm the
deletion of the database.
4) Once the DB has been created, download
the setfile to the protection using HMI500.
20 The central unit LEDs do Possible causes:
not flash while starting 1. Defective HMI cable.
2. Defective local HMI.
3. Firmware not installed.
4. CPC SiMon monitor active.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the red LEDs on the back of
the rack. If any are lit, the respective
500CPU05 modules are in the
Reset/ Monitor mode. Check that
no external devices (PC or modem)
are connected or communicating
with REB500.
Step 2 Use REBLoad to check the REBSYS
firmware.
Step 3 Check the HMI cable and whether it
is plugged in the right connector.
Step 4 If the HMI overheats, the HMI cable
is the wrong way round in the back
plane connector.
Step 5 The local HMI may also be defective
and have to be replaced.
9-4
40 The bus controllers (MBAs) Possible causes:

fail to run within approx. 2 1. MBA/500SCM01.
minutes
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check MBA according to Table 9.15.
Step 2 Check 500CSM01 according to
Table 9.16.
50 System does not respond Possible causes:
1. Process bus failure.
2. No caps fitted on unused 500SCM01
channels.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Fit caps on unused 500SCM01 opto-
couplers.
60 Invalid 500SCM01 Possible causes:
configuration displayed on 1. Wrong 500SCM01 configuration in the
the local HMI setfile.
2. The 500SCM01 modules are in the
wrong slots in the CU rack.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the 500SCM01 settings.
Step 2 Check that the 500SCM01 is in the
correct slot.
65 System start-up stops as Possible causes:
the SIG subsystem starts 1. CPC or other modules configured but
not inserted.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Either insert the missing module or
deactivate it using HMI500.
70 Load database is Possible causes:
displayed on the HMI 1. No database available.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Download database to the protection
system using HMI500.
80 All the CU subsystems have Possible causes:
initialized, but ITT_Ready 1. 500BIO01 is in the CU rack but
and BBP_Ready do not deactivated.
appear in the event list
Corrective action:
Step 1 Remove 500BIO01.
9-5
100 When the system resets as Possible causes:

soon as it is started. 1. The process bus is not operating.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the 500SCM01 configuration
in the setfile.
Step 2 500CIM06 or CPC module is
inserted but deactivated.
110 The CU 500BIO01s have Possible causes:

initialized, but are not 1. 500BIO01 incorrectly configured.
writing events in the event
list. Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the version of the 500BIO01
firmware using REBLoad.
Step 2 Check that the binary inputs are
calibrated.
Step 3 Check that the auxiliary supply
voltage is as given in the database.
120 CU is ready and the bay Possible causes:

units can be switched on 1. CU is ready.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Switch on the bay units.
Table 9.2 Starting the central unit
9.2.1.2. While starting the bay unit 500BU03

10 LED on PSM not lit although Possible causes:

system switched on 1. Aux. supply failure.
2. Fuse blown.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check power supply.
Step 2 Check fuse.
20 The bay unit LEDs do not Possible causes:
flash while starting 1. Defective local HMI cable.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the HMI cable.
Step 2 The local HMI may also be defective
and have to be replaced. Check in
the CU event list whether it started
successfully.
9-6
30 Bay unit does not start Possible causes:

1. Optical fiber link defective.
2. Defective 500SCM01.
3. Device/node ID incorrect.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the optical fiber link to the
CU.
Step 2 Check that the optical fiber link goes
to the correct MVB segment.
Step 3 Check that the 500SCM01 channel
and bay unit nodes agree.
Step 4 Check the BAP device and node
IDs.
Step 5 Check the 500SCM01.
35 System signals BBP start Possible causes:
failed 1. Probably wrong DSP software version
loaded.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check DSP software (has to be
done by ABB).
40 All the bay units of an MVB Possible causes:
segment do not start 1. Defective MBA.
3. Defective CPC.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Switch off all the bay units on the
respective segment.
Step 2 Switch on the CU and check the
CPU.
Step 3 Check the 500SCM01.
50 A bay unit resets after Possible causes:
starting 1. Wrong device/node ID.
2. BU not calibrated.
3. Feeder deactivated but BU switched on.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the device and node IDs on
other units. Especially if a BU has
been replaced, the device or node
ID may be wrong. Try to read the
available binary and analog inputs
on the BU and verify the results.
Step 2 Calibrate the inputs (has to be done
by ABB).
Step 3 Check that the bay units of
deactivated feeders are switched off.
9-7
60 The bay units generate an Possible causes:

isolator alarm 1. Wrong device/node ID.
2. Isolator/CB incorrectly connected.
3. Incorrectly calibrated binary inputs.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the device and node IDs.
Step 2 Check that the auxiliary supply
voltage is as given in the database.
Step 3 Check that the isolators and circuit-
breakers are correctly connected.
Step 4 Calibrate the binary inputs.
70 Bay unit resets following the Manually delete the database in the bay unit.
message Database is OK Corrective action:
Step 1 As soon as the instruction Start
MPL appears on the local HMI,
press button E.
Step 2 After the query Clear DB? is
displayed, press button C to
confirm the deletion.
Only the database on the respective
bay unit is deleted. The database is
automatically downloaded from the
central unit the next time the bay unit
is started.
Table 9.3 Starting a bay unit
9.2.1.3. While starting HMI500

10 Communication cannot be Possible causes:

established 1. COM port error.
3. Defective serial cable.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check that the correct COM port is
being used.
Step 2 Check that no other application is
already using the COM port (e.g. the
mouse).
Step 3 Check that the right cable is being
used.
Step 4 Check that REB500 is in the Ready
status for the HMI500 link.
9-8
20 No events although Possible causes:

connected on-line 1. HMI sessions.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Delete all sessions.
Step 2 Close HMI500.
Step 3 Restart HMI500.
30 Only events from one bay Possible causes:
unit 1. Probably connected to just one bay unit
Corrective action:
Step 1 Close HMI500.
Step 2 Connect to CU.
Step 3 Restart HMI500.
Table 9.4 Starting the HMI500
9.2.2. General faults in operation

Most alarms and failures during normal operation can be cleared
using the following table:
10 System operating correctly Possible causes:

1. Operating conditions.
Corrective action:
Step 1 No corrective action necessary.
20 The protection has tripped Possible causes:
1. BBP
2. BFP
3. EFP
4. OCDT
5. PDF
6. External trip.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Save events.
Step 2 Save the fault.
Step 3 Reset trips.
Step 4 Inform the engineer responsible.
30 An alarm is generated Possible causes:
1. Isolator image.
2. Differential current.
3. Hardware failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Save events.
Step 2 Save the fault.
Step 3 Proceed to the next failure in the
table.
9-9
40 Differential current alarm Possible causes:

1. CT or CT circuit fault.
2. Busbar image error.
3. Hardware failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the feeder currents (phase
relationship, see Section 8.3.1.3.
Differential current alarm).
Step 2 Compare with the actual load
conditions.
Step 3 Verify the isolator statuses.
Step 4 Check that the correct isolator
contacts are in use and that Q1 and
Q2 are not reversed.
Step 5 Check that both switch positions are
configured.
Step 6 Replace the bay unit.
50 Isolator alarm Possible causes:
1. Incorrect isolator or circuit-breaker
auxiliary contact signals.
2. Auxiliary isolator supply failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the signal voltages at the
binary inputs and the positions of the
isolator auxiliary contacts and
correct as necessary.
60 Only general alarm Possible causes:
generated 1. Auxiliary supply failure.
2. Supervision of fans or external supply.
3. System or hardware failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check auxiliary supply and PSUs.
Step 2 Check fans and external supply.
Step 3 Replace the CPUs.
Step 4 Replace the MBAs.
70 General alarm plus isolator Possible causes:
alarm on a bay unit 1. Communication failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the 500SCM01 according to
Table 9.16.
Step 2 Check the MBAs according to
Table 9.15.
Step 3 Check the bay unit.
9-10
80 General alarm plus isolator Possible causes:

alarms on several bay units 1. Communication failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the 500SCM01 according to
Table 9.16.
Step 2 Check the MBAs according to
Table 9.15.
90 General alarm plus fan Possible causes:

alarm 1. Defective fan.
2. Fan power supply failure.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the fan power supply.
Step 2 Replace the fan.
100 General alarm plus power Possible causes:

supply alarm (redundant 1. Defective power supply unit (PSU).
power supplies only)
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check whether the green LED on
the PSM03 is lit.
Step 2 Check the station battery supply.
Step 3 Check the fuse.
110 System restarts without Possible causes:
reason (yellow LED flashes 1. The self-supervision function detected a
and the main menu is fault and restarted the system or the
displayed on all the units) system detected a supply voltage failure
and restarted itself.
Corrective action:
Table 9.5 General faults in normal operation
9-11
9.2.3. System function failures

The following table gives explanations for most of the system
function failures:
9.2.3.1. Bay unit faults
10 Bay unit fails to trip Possible causes:

1. Function initiating the trip not active on
the particular bay unit.
2. Blocked tripping relay.
3. Tripping blocked by isolator or
differential current alarm.
4. Overcurrent check feature active and
fault current below pick-up.
5. Trip signal not assigned to the particular
bay (bay and bay unit are not
necessarily the same).
6. Bus-tie breaker with 2 CTs and
intertripping failure (both CTs must be
assigned to the same process bus).
7. Blocking inputs are activated. These
may be on a BU or on the CU. Some
block the output relays, others the
protection functions (see Section
5.3.7.3. Bay unit binary inputs).
8. If external enabling signals are
configured as binary inputs, their
enabling conditions must be fulfilled.
9. The overcurrent or undervoltage release
is active and its criterion is not fulfilled.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check that the function initiating
tripping is active on the particular
bay unit.
Step 2 Enable the tripping relays.
Step 3 Check for an active differential
current alarm.
Step 4 Check for an active isolator alarm.
Step 5 Check the overcurrent check
feature.
Step 6 Check that the tripping command
goes to the right bay unit.
Step 7 Check that both sets of CTs on the
bus-tie breaker are assigned to the
same process bus.
Step 8 Check whether and for what reason
the blocking inputs are active.
9-12
Step 9 Check whether and for what reason

the release conditions were not
fulfilled.
Table 9.6 System function faults
9.2.3.2. 500CIM06 faults

30 Time synchronization by the Possible causes:

minute impulse does not 1. Time synchronization via IEC103 or
function LON active (minute impulse
synchronization does not function when
one of the two interbay bus protocols is
configured).
Corrective action:
Step 1 Delete the protocol from the
configuration if minute impulse
synchronization is necessary.
50 500CIM06 resets Possible causes:
sporadically 1. Defective LON.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check LON bus and install properly.
60 500CIM06 appears to start Possible causes:
correctly but communication 1. Defective 500CIM01.
fails
2. Defective 500LBI01 (at LON only).
Corrective action:
Step 1 Replace 500CIM06.
Step 2 Replace 500LBI01.
Table 9.7 500CIM06 faults
9-13
9.2.3.3. Busbar protection function faults

10 Instable differential current Possible causes:

1. Incorrect power system frequency
setting.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the power system frequency
setting using HMI500.
20 Busbar protection fails to Possible causes:
trip 1. BBP function not activated.
2. BBP blocked by Block BBP input.
3. BBP blocked by an alarm.
4. Protection zone without CTs making
busbar protection impossible.
5. REB500 detects the circuit-breaker
status and any configured CLOSE
command and the CB is between the
CTs and the busbars.
6. If external enabling signals are
configured as binary inputs, their
enabling conditions must be fulfilled.
7. The overcurrent or undervoltage release
is active and its criterion is not fulfilled.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check that the BBP is activated.
Step 2 Check the 500BIO01 input on the
CU.
Step 3 Check that the BBP is not blocked
by the differential current alarm.
Step 4 Check that an isolator alarm is not
preventing tripping.
Step 5 Verify the CB status.
30 Protection zone Possible causes:
measurement produces 1. Protection zone without CTs making
invalid values busbar protection impossible.
2. BU not functioning.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check that the protection zone has
CTs.
Step 2 Check the alarm on the CU which
shows which BUs are operating and
which are not.
9-14
40 Phase comparison Possible causes:

measurement fails to block 1. Phase comparison algorithm inactive
BBP because the bay units are detecting less
than 2 currents above the configured
pick-up setting.
If this condition is not fulfilled the phase
comparison algorithm is not activated.
Corrective action:
50 Measurement always active Possible causes:
regardless of whether 1. CB close command not configured and
circuit-breaker is open or therefore interpreted as active whether
closed the aux. contact is open or closed and
the measurement is always active.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Configure the CB close command.
Table 9.8 Busbar protection faults
9.2.3.4. Breaker failure protection faults

30 Trip fails Possible causes:

1. BFP not activated in bay unit.
2. Block output relays is active and BFP
cannot operate.
3. Current below pick-up.
4. No starting signals active for the BFP.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Activate BFP.
Step 2 Check whether Block BFP active.
Step 3 Adjust the pick-up setting.
Step 4 Check why the BFP did not start.
Table 9.9 Breaker failure protection faults
9-15
9.2.3.5. End fault protection faults


1. EFP not activated in bay unit.
2. Block EFP is active and EFP cannot
operate.
3. Current below pick-up.
4. CB close command not configured and
therefore interpreted as active whether
the aux. contact is open or closed and
the EFP function cannot be activated.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Activate EFP.
Step 2 Check whether Block EFP active.
Step 4 Configure the CB close command.
Table 9.10 End fault protection faults
9.2.3.6. CB pole discrepancy protection faults


1. PDF not activated in bay unit.
2. Block PDF is active and PDF cannot
operate.
3. Currents too low.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Activate PDF.
Step 2 Check whether Block PDF active.
Table 9.11 CB pole discrepancy function faults
9.2.3.7. Disturbance recorder faults

50 Disturbance recorder fails to Possible causes:

operate 1. Disturbance recorder deactivated
because last buffer register filled while
reading disturbance recorder data.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Activate disturbance recorder.
Table 9.12 Disturbance recorder faults
9-16
9.2.4. HMI500 faults

HMI500 can malfunction and generate the following error mes-
sages:
102 Write_Session_Exist Possible causes:

1. Same function accessed by a second
PC (e.g. uploading events).
2. Connection between PC and protection
system terminated without closing
HMI500.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Wait until the session of the second
PC has been terminated.
Step 2 Select MMC session manager in
the HMI500 Tools menu, close all
sessions and restart HMI500,
making sure that no other PC is
connected to the protection system.
103 Invalid_Session Possible causes:
1. See Code 102.
Corrective action:
Step 1 See Code 102.
1004 TDB_Protocol_Error Possible causes:
1. Communication failure or internal SW
error.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check the connections to the
protection system.
Step 2 Repeat the operation and consult
ABB should the problem persist.
1006 TDB_Buffer_Error Possible causes:

1. Internal SW error.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Restart PC and HMI500.
Step 2 Repeat the operation and consult
ABB should the problem persist.
2002 TGR_Is_Busy Possible causes:
1. Function not executed.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Repeat execution of function.
2003 TGR_No_Session Possible causes:
1. Forcing statuses only possible in test
mode.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Active test mode.
9-17
2004 TGR_Address_Not_ Possible causes:

Handled 1. Configuration data in database and
actual system configuration do not
agree.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check database using HMI500
(correct station).
2005 TGR_Configuration_Error Possible causes:
1. Invalid data in database.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Download database to the protection
system again.
2006 TGR_Not_Responding Possible causes:
1. No connection between CU and BU.
2. System not ready (during start-up).
3. Addressed unit switched off or
defective.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check optical link between CU and
BU.
Step 2 Wait until system ready.
Step 3 Check unit.
xxxx Possible causes:
1. Internal software error.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Report failure to ABB.
Table 9.13 Error messages generated by HMI500
9-18
9.2.5. Hardware faults
9.2.5.1. 500CMU05 as CPC module

This is the case when a 500CPU05 is inserted in slot 3, 7, 11,
15, 17 or 19.
10 LEDs light as shown below: Possible causes:

1. Unit operating properly.
1 Corrective action:
2 Step 1 No corrective action necessary.
T R
X X

1. CPC module has not started.
1 2. CPC module is in the reset/monitor
2
mode.
T R Corrective action:
X X
Step 1 The respective 500CPU05 is in the
reset/monitor mode. Check that no
external devices (PC or modem) are
connected to or communicating with
REB500.
Step 2 Reset system.
Step 3 Replace unit if above unsuccessful.
30 LEDs do not light at all: Possible causes:
1. CPC module has not started.
1 2. MBA module has not started.
T R
X X
Step 1 Wait till MBA starts. (see MBA
disturbances).
Step 2 Reset system.
Step 3 Replace unit if above unsuccessful.
Table 9.14 CPC faults
9-19
9.2.5.2. 500CPU05 as MBA module

This is the case when a 500CPU05 is inserted in slot 5, 9 or 13.

1. MBA operating properly.
2 Step 1 No corrective action necessary.
T R
X X

1. Busbars using only one bus segment of
the bus controller: MBA operating
1
properly.
2
2. Busbars using both segments (see code
T R
X X
30).

1. Starting of CPCs incomplete.
1
2. Defective MBA.
2
3. Defective backplane.
T R 4. SCM optical fiber connections reversed.
X X
Corrective action:
Step 1 Wait till CPC completely starts.
Step 2 Check the if any of the optical fiber
connections are reversed between
RX and TX.
Step 3 Replace MBA and/or CPC if
unsuccessful.
Step 4 Replace backplane if unsuccessful.
1. Defective MBA.
2 Step 1 Replace module.
T R
X X
50 LEDs do not light: Possible causes:

1. Starting of MBA incomplete.
1
2. Defective MBA.
T R Step 1 Wait till MBA completely starts.
X X
Step 2 Replace module if unsuccessful.
Table 9.15 MBA faults
9-20
9.2.5.3. 500SCM01
10 All 500SCM01 LEDs lit: Possible causes:

1. Protection system operating properly.
1 2
Corrective action:
9 10
20 Only LEDs in left-hand Possible causes:

column lit: 1. Corresponding MBA not operating.
1 2 2. 500SCM01 not configured.
3. 500SCM01 in wrong slot.
4. Associated Tx line interrupted.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check that the MBA is operating.
9 10 Step 2 Configure the 500SCM01.
Step 3 Check the 500SCM01 slot and
correct as necessary.
Step 4 Replace the 500SCM01.
30 Only LEDs in right-hand Possible causes:
column lit: 1. Corresponding channel not used.
1 2 2. Corresponding BU not connected.
3. Corresponding BU switched off.
4. Optical fiber link to BU interrupted.
5. Associated Rx line interrupted.
Corrective action:
Step 1 None, if channel not used.
9 10 Step 2 Check BU connection.
Step 3 Switch BU on.
Step 4 Check the optical fiber link.
Step 5 Try another available Rx channel.
60 A LED flickers Possible causes:
Corrective action:
70 Process bus failure Possible causes:
Caps missing on unused channels.
Corrective action:
Step 1 Check caps on unused opto-
couplers and fit as necessary.
Table 9.16 500SCM01 faults
9-21
January 05
10. STORAGE, DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
10.1. Safety instructions ................................................................. 10-2
10.2. Storage .................................................................................. 10-2
10.3. Decommissioning .................................................................. 10-3

10.3.1. Switching off .......................................................................... 10-3
10.3.2. Disconnecting the instrument transformers............................ 10-3
10.3.3. Disconnecting auxiliary circuits .............................................. 10-4
10.3.4. Dismantling ............................................................................ 10-4
10.4. Disposal ................................................................................. 10-4
10-1
10. STORAGE, DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL
WARNING: Before removing REB500 from operation, make

sure that the station is adequately protected by other protection
devices and systems..
WARNING: After REB500 has been removed from operation,

surrounding items of plant may still be live. Therefore take the
necessary precautions to make the working area safe.
10.2. Storage
The equipment may never be stored outdoors. The protection
cubicle and other components must be stored in a clean, dry,
closed room, which is not subject to wide fluctuations of
temperature.
The equipment packing is designed for a certain maximum
storage period. The original packing must be replaced or at least
the desiccate in the packing checked and replaced if necessary,
should the maximum storage period be exceeded. Special long-
term storage packing includes hygrometers, which are visible
through openings.
The permissible storage temperature range is 40 C to +85 C.
Refer to the general ABB documentation for detailed storage
instructions.
10-2
10.3. Decommissioning
DANGER: When designing the station, it must be taken into

account that the REB500 system can be switched off.
REB500 may also be connected to other protection systems
and the absence of its output signals may cause them to trip
and open circuit-breakers unintentionally.
10.3.1. Switching off

To switch off the REB500 system, place the switches on the
power supply units in the central and bay units in the off position
and withdraw the green power supply connectors.
10.3.2. Disconnecting the instrument transformers
CTs
DANGER: CTs must never be opened. When disconnecting the

REB500 inputs from the CTs, the main CTs must be short-
circuited first at the isolating and shorting terminals.
Even when the whole station is switched off, CTs should never
be left open-circuit.
VTs
DANGER: When the station is in operation, there is a

dangerous voltage across the VTs. Therefore use
appropriately insulated tools to open the VT circuits. The
connections to the VTs must be correspondingly insulated and
may never be short-circuited.
Even when the whole station is switched off, take care when
disconnecting VT circuits and insulate the connections.
10-3
10.3.3. Disconnecting auxiliary circuits

Disconnect the auxiliary circuits (signal inputs and outputs, trip-
ping circuits) one at a time and insulate each one. High voltage
may also be a danger in this case as well (signal voltage range
36 V to 312 V).
10.3.4. Dismantling
The central unit and bay unit equipment racks and housings may
now be removed from the cubicles, after which the cubicles may
also be removed.
DANGER: When the station is in operation, make sure that

there is an adequate safety distance to live parts, especially
as dismantling is often performed by unskilled personnel.
10.4. Disposal
Observe local regulations concerning the disposal of electrical
waste.
We recommend removing the boards from the racks. The
housings and cubicles can then be disposed of as old iron and
only the boards as electrical waste.
10-4
December 08
11. OPTIONS FOR BUSBAR PROTECTION
11.1. Breaker failure protection....................................................... 11-5

11.1.1. Function of the breaker failure protection............................... 11-5
11.1.2. Available signals for the breaker back-up protection ............. 11-7
11.1.3. Configuration of the breaker back-up protection .................... 11-9
11.1.3.1. Breaker failure protection in stations with a bypass busbar . 11-11
11.1.3.2. Trip redirection in conjunction with the BFP function ........... 11-11
11.1.3.3. Current setting ..................................................................... 11-11
11.1.3.4. Time-grading a two-stage breaker failure protection............ 11-14
11.1.3.5. Time-grading a single stage breaker failure protection ........ 11-18
11.1.3.6. Logic type ............................................................................ 11-19
11.2. End fault protection .............................................................. 11-20

11.2.1. Function of end fault protection............................................ 11-20
11.2.2. Available signals for end fault protection.............................. 11-22
11.2.3. Configuration of the end fault protection .............................. 11-23
11.3. Overcurrent protection (def. time) ........................................ 11-25

11.3.1. Overcurrent protection (def. time) function........................... 11-25
11.3.2. Signals provided for overcurrent protection (def. time) ........ 11-25
11.3.3. Configuration of overcurrent protection (def. time)............... 11-27
11.4. Breaker pole discrepancy protection.................................... 11-28

11.4.1. Breaker pole discrepancy protection function ...................... 11-28
11.4.2. Signals available for breaker pole discrepancy protection ... 11-29
11.4.3. Configuration of the breaker pole discrepancy protection .... 11-31
11.5. Check zone protection for release of the busbar protection. 11-32
11.5.1. Function check zone protection ........................................... 11-32
11.5.2. Protection zones .................................................................. 11-32
11.5.3. Measurement principle......................................................... 11-32
11.5.4. Check zone.......................................................................... 11-34
11.5.5. Application of the Check zone protection (CzBBP) .............. 11-35
11.5.6. Substation configuration ...................................................... 11-36
11.5.7. Modification / Maintenance in connection with CzBBP ........ 11-37
11.6. Busbar protection with neutral current measurement........... 11-38
11.7. Expanded disturbance recorder........................................... 11-42
11.8. Configuration - voltage transformer ..................................... 11-43
11-1
11.9. Voltage release function ...................................................... 11-45

11.9.1. VT assignment..................................................................... 11-48
11.10. Enabling tripping commands................................................ 11-50

11.10.1. Overcurrent release of the trip command............................. 11-50
11.10.2. Release logic / matrix........................................................... 11-52
11.10.2.1. Release by 31805_External release BB zone ................... 11-54
11.10.2.2. Release by the internal voltage function .............................. 11-56
11.11. Trip redirection..................................................................... 11-62
11.12. Inspection and maintenance ................................................ 11-64
11.13. Interbay bus (IBB) connection.............................................. 11-67

11.13.1. Introduction .......................................................................... 11-67
11.13.2. Hardware ............................................................................. 11-68
11.13.2.1. Basic components ............................................................... 11-68
11.13.2.2. LON hardware configuration ................................................ 11-69
11.13.2.3. IEC 60870-5-103 hardware configuration ............................ 11-69
11.13.2.4. IEC 61850-8-1 hardware configuration ................................ 11-69
11.13.3. Common IBB functions ........................................................ 11-70
11.13.3.1. Basic IBB configuration........................................................ 11-70
11.13.3.2. Configuring REB500 events................................................. 11-73
11.13.3.3. Transfer of differential current values................................... 11-74
11.13.4. LON ..................................................................................... 11-77
11.13.4.1. Installing a LON node .......................................................... 11-77
11.13.4.2. Addressing........................................................................... 11-77
11.13.4.3. Configuration ....................................................................... 11-79
11.13.4.4. Commands via the LON IBB................................................ 11-81
11.13.4.5. Operation of HMI500 with an SMS530 via a LON IBB ......... 11-81
11.13.4.6. Displaying status information (events) ................................. 11-82
11.13.5. IEC 60870-5-103 ................................................................. 11-87
11.13.5.1. Introduction .......................................................................... 11-87
11.13.5.2. General functions................................................................. 11-87
11.13.5.3. Disturbance recorder ........................................................... 11-92
11.13.5.3.1. ACC actual channel ............................................................. 11-94
11.13.5.4. Generic REB500 functions................................................... 11-94
11.13.5.5. Special information and instructions for configuring
the control system.............................................................. 11-102
11.13.6. IEC 61850-8-1 ................................................................... 11-106
11.13.6.1. Introduction ........................................................................ 11-106
11.13.6.2. Modeling in logical devices ................................................ 11-106
11.13.6.3. Allocation of the REB500 signals to the logical nodes ....... 11-107
11.13.6.4. Differential current.............................................................. 11-115
11.13.6.5. Disturbance recorder ......................................................... 11-115
11.13.6.6. Fault locator RFLO ............................................................ 11-117
11-2
11.13.6.7. Creation of the *.SCD file................................................... 11-117
11.14. Remote HMI....................................................................... 11-118

11.14.1. General information ........................................................... 11-118
11.14.2. Optical fiber connection ..................................................... 11-118
11.14.3. Modem connection ............................................................ 11-119
11.14.3.1. Modem connection ............................................................ 11-120
11.14.3.2. Modem configuration ......................................................... 11-120
11.14.3.3. Operation via a modem link ............................................... 11-121
11.15. Synchronizing using GPS (option) ..................................... 11-122
11.16. 1 breaker schemes and duplex stations.......................... 11-123

11.16.1. T zone protection ............................................................... 11-123
11.16.2. Version 1 (1 breaker zone with 3 CTs per diameter) ...... 11-125
11.16.3. Version 2 (1 breaker scheme with 6 CTs per diameter).. 11-126
11.16.6. Version 5 (1 breaker scheme with only BBP function) .... 11-129
11.16.7. Version 6 (duplex station) .................................................. 11-130
11.16.8. Assignment of bay units..................................................... 11-131
11.17. Applications in complex stations ........................................ 11-132

11.17.1. Busbar and breaker failure protection in stations
with a bypass busbar ......................................................... 11-132
11.17.2. Busbars with bus-ties in series ........................................ 11-132
11.17.3. Switchgear bays that can serve either as bus-tie or
feeder circuit-breaker ......................................................... 11-137
11.17.4. Duplex stations .................................................................. 11-137
11.17.5. Control using 11105_External TRIP ................................ 11-137
11.18. 16.7 Hz railway systems (option) ....................................... 11-140

11.18.1. Protection functions supported .......................................... 11-140
11.18.2. Display ............................................................................... 11-140
11.18.3. Special aspects of breaker failure protection ..................... 11-141
11.18.4. Voltage and current inputs for 16.7 Hz............................... 11-142
11.18.5. Wiring of the analog inputs for 16.7 Hz .............................. 11-143
11.18.6. Special features of the definite time over and
undercurrent protection...................................................... 11-144
11.18.7. Special features of the definite time over and
undervoltage protection ..................................................... 11-144
11.18.8. Special features of the distance protection (DIST)............. 11-144
11.18.8.1. Application and features .................................................... 11-144
11.18.8.2. Analog inputs ..................................................................... 11-145
11.18.8.3. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 11-145
11.18.8.4. Binary outputs.................................................................... 11-145
11-3
11.18.8.5. Measurements ................................................................... 11-145

11.18.8.6. Settings.............................................................................. 11-145
11.18.8.7. Directional measurement ................................................... 11-146
11.18.8.8. VT supervision ................................................................... 11-146
11.18.9. Special aspects of auto-reclosure (AR).............................. 11-146
11.18.10. Special aspects of sensitive earth fault protection for
solidly grounded power systems (EFERDR)..................... 11-146
11.18.10.1. Measurements ................................................................... 11-147
11.18.10.2. Fault duration..................................................................... 11-147
11.18.10.3. Directional comparison with permissive signal................... 11-147
11.19. CT requirements for REB500/REB500sys

1KHL020347-Aen .............................................................. 11-148
11-4
11. OPTIONS AND SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
The following protection functions may already be integrated in

REB500 or REB500sys or available as options for integration:
11.1. Breaker failure protection (option)
11.1.1. Function of the breaker failure protection

The circuit-breaker is the last and most important link in the pro-
tection chain. The purpose of the breaker failure protection is to
take the right action should the circuit-breaker fail to execute a
trip command. This involves tripping the circuit-breakers sur-
rounding the fault, which are mainly in the same station, but may
also include circuit-breakers at the remote ends of lines (inter-
tripping).
The principle of the breaker failure protection function is based
on monitoring the time the fault persists after a trip command
has been issued to the circuit-breaker and the breaker failure
protection has been enabled by the main protection (e.g. feeder
protection).
The breaker failure protection function can be enabled phase-
selectively via two separate inputs. All three phases can be en-
abled via up to 6 different inputs and the currents of all three
phases monitored. Operation of the breaker failure protection
can also be enabled by the internal time-overcurrent and CB
pole discrepancy functions (by selecting the appropriate logic us-
ing HMI500) and a trip command from the busbar protection.
The internal signals are shown on a grey background in the
block diagram of the breaker failure protection (Fig. 11.1). The
inputs are on the left and the outputs on the right. The input sig-
nal is a tripping signal generated by the central unit that was ini-
tiated by the busbar intertripping function (BBP, BFP t2 etc.)
11-5
HEST 025001 V
Fig. 11.1 Block diagram of the breaker failure protection

(logic type 1)
11-6
The following internal REB500 functions can start the breaker

failure function in all three phases:
Busbar protection function
An external trip command
Time-overcurrent, providing logic 3 is configured
Breaker pole discrepancy protection, providing logic 3 is con-
figured
11.1.2. Available signals for the breaker back-up protection
Binary input signals

(Refer to Section 3.5.3. for the signal response in relation to
time)
Remarks Signal Disturb. rec.:

response Trigger? Record?
33210_Block BFP BFP Slow no
Table 11.1 Binary inputs on the central unit
Signal Used for distur-

response bance rec.:
Trigger? Record?
13205_Block BFP fast yes
13605_Trip transferred slow yes
13705_External Start BFP fast yes
13710_Start BFP Lp/x fast yes
1371513735
13740_Start BFP L1L2L3/x fast yes
1374513765
13770_BP Start BFP L1 fast yes
13785_BP Start BFP L1L2L3 fast yes
Table 11.2 Binary inputs on the bay units
11-7
Binary output signals

Display on local Signal Configure Used for distur-
HMI type on n BIO bance rec.:
modules Trigger? Record?
43305_BFP trip t1 <Date / Time> S 2 no
BFP trip t1
Bay unit x
red
43310_BFP trip t2 <Date / Time> S 2 no
BFP trip t2
Bay unit x
red
43405_BFP blocked BFP blocked S 2 no
Flashes yellow
Table 11.3 Binary output signals on the central unit
Protec- Display on Signal Configure Used for

tion local HMI type on n BIO disturb. rec.:
function modules Trigger?
Record?
23105_BFP TRIP BFP <Date / Time> T 2 TR, R
BFP trip t1
Red
23110_BFP REMOTE BFP None S 2 TR, R
TRIP
23305_BFP trip t1 BFP <Date / Time> S 1 TR, R
BFP trip t1
Red
23310_BFP trip t2 BFP <Date / Time> S 1 TR, R
BFP trip t2
red
23315_BFP TRIP L1 BFP BFP trip L1 S 1 TR, R
Red
Red
Red
23330_Trip transferred all None S 1 TR, R
23335_Trip by BFP BFP None T 1 TR, R
23405_BFP blocked BFP BFP blocked S 1 TR, R
Yellow flashing
Table 11.4 Binary outputs on the bay units
11-8
11.1.3. Configuration of the breaker back-up protection

The breaker failure protection has two adjustable timers. At the
end of time t1, a second attempt is made to trip the breaker,
which has failed, to trip; at the end of time t2 the surrounding
breakers are tripped. A transfer-tripping signal to the remote sta-
tion generated either at the end of time t1 or t2 can also be en-
abled using HMI500.
The currents of the three phases are measured individually and
compared with the pick-up setting, which is identical for the three
phases.
The timers can also be started independently of the overcurrent
check and the main protection inputs via an external input (signal
13705_Ext. Start BFP). For safety reasons, a normally-open
auxiliary contact on the circuit-breaker should be connected in
series with the external control signal applied to this input.
Since there are three separate t1 timers for the individual
phases, the REB500 breaker failure protection responds cor-
rectly to an evolving fault.
Logic 4 can be used in stations with 2 redundant REB500 units,
one for busbar and the other for breaker failure protection. In this
case, the special inputs 13760_Start BFP L1L2L3_5 and
13765_Start BFP L1L2L3_6 on the REB500 for breaker failure
protection is used to instantly initiate intertripping after t1 inde-
pendently of the time setting of t2.
If the breaker failure function includes the option Take CB into
account, the timers t1 and t2 are not started when the circuit-
breaker is open, i.e. the breaker failure function is disabled. The
response is as described above when the circuit-breaker is
closed.
The following breaker failure parameters can be set using
HMI500:
11-9

BFP active inactive
Setting 0.1 2.0 1.2 0.1 IN
(per current transformer)
Timer 1 active active
Timer 2 active active
Timer t1 10 5000 100 10 ms
Timer t2 0 5000 150 10 ms
Intertripping pulse dura- 100 2000 200 10 ms
tion
Logic type 1 4 1 1
Table 11.5 Parameters for setting breaker back-up protection
Details
Fig. 11.2 Breaker back-up protection
In the Details view, the breaker back-up protection can be acti-

vated per bay:
Intertripping (remote trip) can be applied after completion of ei-
ther timer t1 or t2.
For a description of the different logic types, see Section.
11.1.3.6 'Logic type'.
11-10
11.1.3.1. Breaker failure protection in stations with a bypass busbar

Refer to Section 11.17.1.
11.1.3.2. Trip redirection in conjunction with the BFP function

The standard trip redirection function is described in Section 11.11.
Additional functions are included for operation with the breaker
failure function.
When the input Trip transferred is active, the breaker failure de-
lays (t1 and t2) are reduced to their minimum (10 ms).
The operating sequence for the example of a line fault is:
1. The gas pressure is too low and the circuit-breaker operation
is blocked and the signal Trip transferred is sent to
REB500.
2. A fault occurs on the line.
3. The line protection detects the fault and sends simultaneous
signals to trip the circuit-breaker and start the breaker failure
protection.
4. Since the circuit-breaker is blocked, it cannot respond.
5. The overcurrent criterion and therefore the starting conditions
for the breaker failure protection are fulfilled.
6. As the input Trip transferred has set the delays t1 and t2 to
10 ms, the breaker failure protection intertripping of the local
circuit-breakers and transfer tripping of remote circuit-
breakers.
7. REB500 thus issues a tripping command to the surrounding
circuit-breakers after about 20 ms to isolate the fault.
The input signal 11105_External TRIP is not then needed (see
Section 11.11.).
11.1.3.3. Current setting

If the pick-up current of the breaker backup function is set too
low there is a risk that the breaker failure protection will not reset
quickly enough after a circuit-breaker has been successfully
tripped. This can be the result of decaying oscillations in the CT
secondary circuit.
Conversely the breaker failure protection may fail to operate if
the setting is too high. This situation could arise, for example,
due to severe CT saturation when the secondary current falls be-
low the setting and the breaker failure protection does not start.
11-11
Recommendations now follow which enable the pick-up current

of the breaker failure protection to be correctly set in relation to
the CT data (n') and the set time.
Basically, the current setting (IE) should be less than the mini-
mum fault current IKmin of the corresponding feeder (approx.
80%, i.e. 0.8). Just to satisfy this condition, the setting would be:
IE 0.8 IK min
=
IN IN
This setting may be too high for conventional iron core CTs be-
cause the measurement may not function correctly even at low
fault currents due to transient components in the fault current. A
failure of the breaker to operate will always be detected, but trip-
ping could be delayed.
Iron core transformers (Class TPX) and transformers with

residual flux air gap (Class TPY)
It is necessary to know the transient overcurrent factor (n*) in or-
der to design a scheme for operation with these CTs. This is cal-
culated from the effective overcurrent factor n' as follows:
PN + PE
n' = n
PB + PE
n'
n* =
1 + 2 f TN
After obtaining the transient overcurrent factor (n*), the settings

are given by:
0.8 IK min
a) Assuming n* < ,
IN
IE
current setting is n*
IN
0.8 IK min
b) Assuming n* > ,
IN
IE 0.8 IKmin
current setting is
IN IN
11-12
NOTE: TPX and TPY transformers differ, in respect of tran-

sient characteristics, by a small remanence in the case of the
TPY type. With regard to transient over-dimensioning, TPX and
TPY hardly differ.
Calculation example
CT data:
Ratio 600/5 A
Rated burden PN 15 VA
Losses PE 7 VA
Rated overcurrent factor n 20
Lead burden: 10 VA
Bay unit burden: <0.1 VA
Rated frequency f: 50 Hz
Power system time constant TN: 80 ms
Minimum fault current IKmin: 450 A
15 VA + 7 VA
n' = 20 = 25.88
10 VA + 7 VA
25.88
n* = = 0.99
1
1 + 2 50 0.08s
s
0.8 IK min 0.8 450 A
Since n* = 0.99 > = = 0. 6 ,
IN 600 A
IE 0.8 IK min
the setting becomes , i.e. IE = 0.5 IN
IN IN
Linearized current transformers (TPZ)

Since these CTs are scarcely subject to saturation, the setting is
only based on the minimum fault current for the feeder:
IE 0.8 IK min
=
IN IN
11-13
11.1.3.4. Time-grading a two-stage breaker failure protection

Timer t1 is started by an overcurrent and a signal from the main
protection. A second attempt is made to trip the circuit-breaker at
the end of the set time t1 plus the internal processing time ta1.
Timer t2 is also started at the end t1. Should the circuit-breaker
again fail to trip within the set time of t2 plus the internal process-
ing time ta2, the breakers surrounding the fault are intertripped.
If a breaker failure function is installed, the circuit-breaker can
respond in one of three ways.
Case 1: Tripping by main protection successful

Overcurrent function and a starting signal from the main protec-
tion start the timer t1. The circuit-breaker successfully interrupts
the fault current before the end of this time and the overcurrent
function resets. A backup tripping command is not generated
(BFP t1).
Fault incicence
Tripping command Successful trip
by main protection by main protection
Case 1: Trip
Ik
tm tCB tv t margin
BFP (t1) t1 ta1
tCB
BFP (t2)
Fig. 11.3 Tripping of the circuit-breaker for case 1
Case 2: Backup trip by the breaker failure protection

tion start the timer t1. The breaker fails, tripping is unsuccessful
and the overcurrent function does not reset. At the end of the ti-
mer setting t1 and the internal processing time ta1, a second at-
tempt is made to trip the same circuit-breaker which trips suc-
cessfully before the end of the timer setting t2 and the current
function resets. Intertripping of the surrounding circuit-
breakers does not take place (BFP t2).
11-14
Fault incidence
Tripping command Tripping command Successful backup
by main protection BFP t1 trip BFP t1
Case 2: Backup trip (BFP t 1)
Ik
tm tCB tv tmargin
BFP (t1) t1 ta1 ta1
tCB
tCB tv tmargin
BFP (t2) t2
Fig. 11.4 Backup tripping of the circuit-breaker for case 2
Case 3: Intertripping of surrounding circuit-breakers by

breaker failure protection
tion start the timer t1. The breaker fails, tripping and backup trip-
ping are unsuccessful and the overcurrent function does not re-
set. At the end of the timer settings t1 + t2 and the internal
processing time ta2 intertripping of the surrounding circuit-
breakers takes place to isolate the fault.
Fault incidence
Tripping command Tripping command Intertripping command
by main protection BFP t1 BFP t 2
Case 3: Intertripping (BFP t 2)
Ik
tm tCB tv tmargin Inter-
-
tripping
BFP (t1) t1 ta1 ta1
tCB
tCB tv tmargin
BFP (t2) t2 ta1 ta2
Fig. 11.5 Intertripping of the circuit-breaker for case 3
Remote tripping of the opposite end of the line can be configured

to take place at the end of time t1 or the end of time t2.
11-15
The settings of timers t1 and t2 can be determined according to

the examples of Cases 1 and 2 above (see Fig. 11.3 and Fig. 11.4).
Timer t1 setting (see Fig. 11.3)

To avoid any risk of a premature tripping command by the
breaker failure protection, the minimum setting of the timer t1
must be longer than the maximum time required for a successful
main protection trip plus the maximum reset time of the overcur-
rent function.
t1 Minimum t1 setting t1 > tCB + tv + tmargin
Example
Minimum t1 setting for a circuit-breaker operating time (tCB) of 40 ms

t1 > tCB + tv + tmargin = 40 ms + 19 ms + 20 ms > 79 ms
Timer t2 setting (see Fig. 11.4)

To avoid any risk of premature intertripping of the surrounding
breakers by the breaker failure protection in the event of a suc-
cessful backup trip at the end of t1, the minimum setting of the
timer t2 must be longer than the maximum time required for a
backup trip plus the maximum reset time of the overcurrent func-
tion.
t2 Minimum t2 setting t2 > ta1 + tCB + tv + tmargin
Example
Minimum t2 setting for a circuit-breaker operating time (tCB) of 40 ms

t2 > tCB + [ta1 + tv] + tmargin = 40 ms + 33 ms + 20 ms > 93 ms
WARNING: Only if the above guidelines for the minimum

settings of the breaker failure timers are strictly observed is
the correct operation of the breaker failure protection assured.
The maximum tripping time can be calculated on the basis of the

settings for t1 and t2, the recommended safety margin and the in-
ternal processing time.
11-16
Maximum time t1max for backup tripping

(at the minimum t1 setting)
te tCB tV tmargin ta1

1
t1max
Backup tripping
t1max Maximum backup tripping time t1max = [te+ta1] + tCB + tv + tmargin
Example
Maximum backup tripping time for a circuit-breaker operating time (tCB) of
40 ms
t1max = [te+ta1] + tCB + tv + tmargin = 24 ms + 40 ms + 19 ms + 20 ms =

103 ms.
Maximum time t2max for intertripping

(at minimum t1 and t2 settings)
te tCB tv tmargin
ta1 tCB tv tmargin ta2
t2max
Intertripping
t2max Max. intertripping time t2max = [te+t a1+ ta2]+ 2*(tCB + tv + tmargin)
Example:
Maximum intertripping time for a circuit-breaker operating time (tCB) of 40 ms
t2max = [te+ta1+ ta2]+ 2*(tCB + tv + tmargin) = 46 ms+ 2*(40 ms+19 ms+20 ms) =
204 ms.
Legend:
t1 Timer t1 Adjustable
t2 Timer t2 Adjustable
tm Operating time of main protection See main prot. data sheet
tCB CB operating time incl. arc extinction See CB data sheet
tv Overcurrent function reset time 19 ms
tmargin Safety margin (If an adequate safety >20 ms (ABB recommenda-
margin is not included, the correct option)
eration of the breaker failure protection
cannot be guaranteed.)
ta1 Internal processing time of t1 stage 14 ms
11-17

te Processing time of input signal [te + ta1] = 24 ms
(see calculation of maximum tripping time t1, t2) [te + ta2] = 32 ms
[te + ta1 + ta2] = 46 ms
The above values apply for 50 and 60 Hz. The corresponding values for
16.7 Hz are given in Section 11.18.3.
11.1.3.5. Time-grading a single stage breaker failure protection

A single stage breaker failure protection is achieved by setting
timer t2 to zero. Providing the starting conditions are fulfilled, the
current check function is picked up and time t1 has expired, a trip
signal goes to the bays own breaker, an intertripping signal to
the surrounding breakers and a transfer tripping signal to the
remote end of the feeder.
The time is set to the value obtained from the calculations and
parameters given in Section 11.1.3.4.
t1 Minimum t1 setting t1 > tCB + tv + tmargin
t1max Maximum backup tripping time t1max = [te+ta1] + tCB + tv + tmargin
It is also possible, to set the timer t1 to the minimum setting value

of 10 ms. Providing there is a starting signal and the current
function has picked up, a second backup attempt to trip the
feeder circuit-breaker is made after the modest delay of t1
(10 ms). Should this attempt fail, the surrounding breakers are
intertripped and a remote tripping signal sent to the opposite end
of the feeder at the end of time t2. Owing to the small time setting
this case is dealt with in the Chapter Single stage breaker fail-
ure protection.
The procedure for setting the timers is given in Section 11.1.3.4.
t2 Minimum t2 setting t2 > ta1 + tCB + tv + tmargin
t2max Max. intertripping time t2max = [te+t a1+ ta2] + (tCB + tv + tmargin)
11-18
11.1.3.6. Logic type

The internal breaker back-up protection can be changed for spe-
cial applications. The breaker back-up protection scheme de-
scribed here is the logic-type 1.
Alternative logics:
2 Reserved for special applications, no description available.
3 The breaker failure protection can also be started by the trip-
ping signals from the time-overcurrent and breaker pole dis-
crepancy protections. Otherwise logic type 3 corresponds to
type 1.
4 The signals 13760_Start BFP L1L2L3_5 and 13765_Start
BFP L1L2L3_6 initiate intertripping after BFP t1 irrespective
of the setting for BFP t2. Otherwise logic type 4 corresponds
to type 1.
11-19
11.2. End fault protection (option)
11.2.1. Function of end fault protection

The end fault protection detects faults between a circuit-breaker
and the CTs which cannot be cleared by the busbar protection
on its own.
11530_Isolator/ Pick-up delay

Breaker t 0
position
CB "OPEN"
CLOSE auxiliary contact & 24305_EFP trip
coil
11505_Close Command CB 44305_EFP trip (CU)

EFP timer
0 (36 ms)
&
2)
Intertripping
1) pulsewidth
CB close
command IL1 > EFP setting
1)
IL2 > EFP setting 1
1)
IL3 > EFP setting
24405_EFP blocked
14205_Block EFP
EFP blocked
34215_Block EFP (CU) 44405_EFP blocked (CU)
1) EFP = end zone fault

Typical setting 1.2 I N when engineering scheme
2) The signal "EFP remote TRIP" is available for transfer tripping. Its duration
can be set using the operator program under Settings/System response.
Fig. 11.6 Block diagram of the end fault protection with the
current transformers on the line side
11-20
1)
IL1 > EFP setting
1)
IL2 > EFP setting 1 24305_EFP trip
1)
I L3 > EFP setting
44305_EFP trip (CU)
EFP timer
0 (36 ms)
11530_Isolator/ Pick-up delay
&
Breaker
Position t 0 EFP intertrip
CB "OPEN"
CLOSE auxiliary contact &
coil
11505_Close
Command CB
24405_EFP blocked
CB close
command 14205_Block EFP
EFP blocked
34215_Block EFP (CU) 44405_EFP blocked (CU)
1) EFP = end zone fault

Typical setting 1.2 IN when engineering scheme
Fig. 11.7 Block diagram of the end fault protection with the
current transformers on the busbar side
To ensure that the end fault protection bases its decision on an

effective image of the circuit-breaker status, the signal circuit-
breaker open is delayed while the circuit-breaker is actually
opening. If a current is measured when the circuit-breaker is
open, a tripping command is issued after a further delay (set to
36 ms). The purpose of this timer is to enable a circuit-breaker
close command to be detected that is subject to internal signal
transit times and breaker contact bounce times.
11-21
11.2.2. Available signals for end fault protection

(Refer to Section 3.5.3. for the signal response in relation to
time.)

Remarks Signal Disturbance rec.:
34215_Block. EFP EFP slow no
Signal Disturbance rec.:

14205_Block. EFP fast yes
Table 11.7 Binary inputs on the bay unit

44305_EFP trip <Date / Time> S 2 no
trip EFP
Bay unit x
Red
44405_EFP blocked EFP blocked ) S 2 no
Flashes yellow
Table 11.8 Binary outputs on the central unit
) In case of local blocking of the protection function, i.e. on the bay unit, the
name(s) of the bay unit(s) are displayed.
11-22
Protection Display on Signal Configure Distur-

function local HMI type on n BIO bance rec.:
modules Trigger?
Record?
24105_EFP EFP <Date / Time> S 2 TR, R
REMOTE EFP trip
TRIP Red
24305_EFP trip EFP <Date / Time> S 1 TR, R
EFP trip
Red
24405_EFP blocked EFP EFP blocked S 1 TR, R
Flashes yellow
11.2.3. Configuration of the end fault protection

The following parameters can be set for the end fault protection
using the HMI500:

EFP active inactive
Pick-up delay 0.1 10.0 0.4 0.1 s
Pick-up setting 0.1 2.0 1.2 0.1 IN
Table 11.10 Parameters for setting end fault protection
To avoid false tripping after the circuit-breaker has opened, the

delay for the end fault protection must be set longer than the
time t1 of the breaker failure protection (see Section 11.1.).
The current pick-up setting can be set the same as for the
breaker failure protection (see Section 11.1.).
All bays are listed in the overview.
11-23
Details
Fig. 11.8 End fault protection
The details view makes provision for activating and setting the
pick-up value and delay of the end fault protection for each bay.
(The pick-up delay is only of consequence when opening the cir-
cuit-breaker.)
11-24
11.3. Overcurrent protection (def. time) (option)
11.3.1. Overcurrent protection (def. time) function

The overcurrent protection (def. time) function operates entirely
independently of the other protection functions in each of the bay
units
45805_OCDT Start (CU)

I L1 > setting
Timer
25105_OCDT TRIP
I L2 > setting 1 S
OCDT delay 25305_OCDT trip
I L3 > setting
1) 43305_OCDT trip (CU)
I L1 < setting * RR
1)
I L2 < setting * RR & R
1)
I L3 < setting * RR
25405_OCDT blocked
15210_Block OCDT
OCDT blocked
35220_Block OCDT (CU) 45405_OCDT blocked (CU)
1) RR = reset ratio (OCDT)

Typical setting 0.95 when engineering scheme
Fig. 11.9 Block diagram of the overcurrent protection (def.

time) function
The overcurrent protection (def. time) function does not intertrip

the respective busbar protection zone.
11.3.2. Signals provided for overcurrent protection (def. time)

(Refer to Section 3.5.3. for signal response in relation to time.)
Remarks Signal re- Disturbance rec.:

sponse Trigger? Record?
35220_ Block OCDT OCDT slow no
11-25
Signal re- Used for distur-

sponse bance rec.:
Trigger? Record?
15210_Block OCDT fast yes

45305_OCDT trip <Date / Time> S 2 no
OCDT trip
Bay unit x
Red
45405_OCDT blocked OCDT blocked ) S 2 no
Flashes yellow
45805_OCDT start None S 2 no
Protection Display on Signal Configure Distur-

function local HMI type on n BIO bance rec.:
modules Trigger?
Record?
25105_OCDT TRIP OCDT <Date / Time> T 2 TR, R
IMAX trip
Red
25305_OCDT trip OCDT <Date / Time> S 1 TR, R
IMAX trip
Red
25405_OCDT OCDT OCDT blocked S 1 TR, R
blocked Flashes yellow
11-26
11.3.3. Configuration of overcurrent protection (def. time)

HMI500 provides the following parameters for setting overcurrent
protection (def time).

OCDT active inactive
Pick-up value 0.1 20.0 2.0 0.1 IN
Delay 0 10000 2000 10 ms
Table 11.15 Parameters for setting overcurrent protection (def.

time)
All bay and current transformer details are shown in the over-
view.
Details
Fig. 11.10 Overcurrent protection (def. time)
In the Details view, the overcurrent protection (def. time) can be

activated per bay and the pick-up setting can be set.
11-27
11.4. Breaker pole discrepancy protection (option)
11.4.1. Breaker pole discrepancy protection function

The breaker pole discrepancy protection is a local protection
function in the bay unit which supervises the three phase cur-
rents to ensure that the three circuit-breaker poles open and
close simultaneously. The tripping condition is fulfilled when at
least one of the phase currents is higher than setting (Imset) and
the difference between the phase currents (discrepancy factor
pdset) exceeds a given minimum for the set time.
I < pdset * Imax
PDF timer
Imax I < pdset * Imax 1
(greatest of t 0
I < pdset * Imax
I L1 , I L2 , I L3) &
Imax > Imset

27305_PDF Trip
47305_PDF Trip
&
17710_Start PDF 27105_PDF TRIP
&
Signal 17710_Start PDF configured?
1
27405_PDF blocked
17205_Block PDF
1 PDF blocked
37205_Block PDF
Fig. 11.11 Block diagram of breaker pole discrepancy protec-

tion
pdset: Pole discrepancy factor e.g. 0.6 Imax

Imset: Pole discrepancy setting e.g. 0.2 IN
To verify a pole discrepancy, the current criteria and the condi-

tion of the circuit-breaker auxiliary contacts, must be taken into
account (external plausibility check). As can be seen from the
Fig. 11.11, the output signal of the function is enabled by the bi-
nary input 17710_Start PDF.
This function is enabled if the input 17710_Start PDF is not set.
The breaker pole discrepancy protection function does not inter-
trip the respective busbar zone.
11-28
17710_Start PDF
R S T CB CLOSE signal
R S T CB OPEN signal
Fig. 11.12 External plausibility check
WARNING: Under certain conditions, the breaker at the remote

end or possibly some other breaker may be involved without a
plausibility check.
11.4.2. Signals available for breaker pole discrepancy protection

(Refer to Section 3.5.3. for signal response in relation to time.)
Remarks Signal Disturbance rec.:

37205_Block PDF PDF slow no
Signal Used for distur-

response bance rec.:
Trigger? Record?
17205_Block PDF fast yes
17710_Start PDF fast yes
11-29

47305_PDF trip <Date / Time> S 2 no
PDF trip
Bay unit x
Red
47405_PDF blocked PDF blocked ) S 2 no
Flashes yellow
Protection Display on Signal Disturbance rec.:

function local HMI type Trigger? Record?
27105_PDF TRIP PDF <Date / Time> T TR, A
PDF trip
Red
27305_PDF trip PDF <Date / Time> M TR, A
PDF trip
Red
27405_PDF blocked PDF PDF blocked M TR, A
Flashes yellow
11-30
11.4.3. Configuration of the breaker pole discrepancy protection

Breaker pole discrepancy protection settings:
Parameters Min. Max. Default Step Unit

PDF enabled Disabled
Setting Imset 0.1 2.0 0.2 0.1 IN
Delay 100 10000 1500 100 ms
Discrepancy factor pdset 0.01 0.99 0.6 0.01 Imax
Table 11.20 Setting parameters of the breaker pole discrep-

ancy protection
Where single-phase auto-reclosure is being applied on a line,

the time delay of the breaker pole discrepancy protection must
be set longer than the total auto-reclosure cycle time. The pick-
up value is given by the maximum current multiplied by the dis-
crepancy factor.
All bays are listed in the overview.
Details
Fig. 11.13 Breaker pole discrepancy protection
11-31
11.5. Check zone protection for release of the busbar protection

(option)
11.5.1. Function check zone protection

The selective zone busbar protection (BBP) can be extended to
form a check zone protection (CzBBP).
This protection function, which is factory configured, is utilized as
release for the trip of the BBP. Similar to the selective zone BBP
the CzBBP is operated as a differential protection.
11.5.2. Protection zones
The check zone comprises all the outgoing feeders of the bus-
bar, whereby the isolator positions are not considered. Funda-
mentally the measurements of the couplings are not included.
Check zone (CzBBP)

BB1
BB2
CzBBP Measurement
Fig. 11.14 Measurement zone of the check zone protection
11.5.3. Measurement principle

The principle of the check zone protection (CzBBP) is based on
a stabilized differential current measurement i.e. on the
differential current (IDiff) and the stabilizing factor (k) (see
Section 3.8.2.1).
m m
IDiff = [Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n =1 n =1
of the check zone
m m
I
[Re(I )] + j [Im(I )]
n =1
Ln
n =1
Ln
k = Diff = m
of the check zone
IHalt
Re(ILn ) + Im(ILn )
n =1
11-32
Before the check zone sends a release signal to the selective

zone busbar protection, the configured values of the check zone
(CzBBP) values IDiff, and k must be attained.
Differential current (IDiff)
The setting of the tripping value of the differential current meas-
urement is based on the minimum short circuit current of the bus
bar and in general is the same setting for CzBBP and BBP.
Stabilisation factor (k)
Depending on the busbar configuration and the position of the
circuit breakers and the isolators it is possible that one busbar
section has a fault, while the other unaffected sections conduct
normal operating current. For the CzBBP, which considers the
complete plant as one bus, this has the effect that simultane-
ously the short circuit current as well as the normal operating
outflow currents are recorded (see Fig. 11.15). The outgoing op-
erating current is further reflected in the calculation of the stabili-
zation factor (k). The setting value of k-factor of the check zone
lies below the zone selective busbar protection and can be ac-
cordingly calculated as per the following example.
Check zone (CzBBP)

SS1
SS2
CzBBP Measurement Ikmin= 1.5 kA IBmax= 2.0 kA IBmax= 2.0 kA
Fig. 11.15 Determination of the stabilizing factors (k)
m m
IDiff
[Re(ILn )] + j [Im(ILn )]
n =1 n =1 1.5 kA + 2.0 kA 2.0 kA
k= = = = 0.27
IHalt m
1.5 kA + 2.0 kA + 2.0 kA
Re(I Ln ) + Im(ILn )
n =1
11-33
In the above example (see Fig. 11.15), the stabilization factor

setting (k) for the check zone (CzBBP) is k = 0.25 (next setting
below the calculated value of k = 0.27). The setting for the selec-
tive zone (BBP) has to be calculated according to Section 3.8.2.1
and is typically k = 0.8.
This results in the following operating characteristic for CzBBP:
Fig. 11.16 Operating characteristic for the stabilized differen-

The region above the thick line is the operating zone.
11.5.4. Check zone

If the check zone (CzBBP) in a REB500/REB500sys protection
system picks up, zone selective tripping of the busbar protection
is permitted in the following cases (see Fig. 11.17):
11-34
a) Trip CzBBP
Release signal from
b) Bay unit(s) in operation CzBBP
c) Signal release CzBBP 1

d) CzBBP activated in the HMI500
e) Differential alarm CzBBP AND "bypass"

Mode
Trip BBP (BB1) & Trip BB1
Trip BBP (BB2) & Trip BB 2
Fig. 11.17 Tripping in check zone enabled

(based on Fig. 11.14)
a. Trip by CzBBP enables tripping of the BBP zone.
b. One or more bay units out of operation (i.e. switched-off, loss of

power, or device error), results in absence of important meas-
urements categories. A complete check zone formation is not
possible and thus leads to a release of the zone trip of the BBP
(i.e. 'the check zone is bypassed').
c. If the binary input signal from a bay unit 12605_Bypass Check

Zone or from a central unit 32605_Bypass Check Zone, has
been actuated, then a release of the BBP zone trip occurs ('the
check zone is bypassed'). An application example is provided in
Section 11.5.6.
d. If in the configuration software HMI500 (i.e. in the configuration

database) the check zone protection is set to not active, then a
permanent release of the BBP zone trip occurs ('the check zone
is bypassed').
e. A differential current of the CzBBP leads to a bypass of the re-

lease of the BBP zone trip, in case the alarm mode Check zone
bypass has also been set in the HMI500.
11.5.5. Application of the Check zone protection (CzBBP)

If an incorrect feedback of the isolators / circuit breakers is pro-
vided to the selective zone busbar protection (BBP), which is not
in accordance to the actual image of the plant, then the results of
the busbar measurement and the calculation of the protection
11-35
criteria do not correspond to the real situation. This adverse

situation could lead to an incorrect tripping.
Especially in plants where the activation current of the differential
current criteria (Idiff) is set below the maximum operating cur-
rents of the individual feeders, the effect of incorrect isolator /
circuit breaker positions has a very adverse effect.
The use of an overall check zone release criteria (CzBBP) which
functions independent of the position of the isolator / circuit
breaker eliminates the danger of undesirable trippings.
Instead of a check zone release criteria (CzBBP) as an alterna-
tive the under voltage release criteria (U<) can also be utilized
(see Section 11.9)
11.5.6. Substation configuration

As is described in the Section 11.5.2, all outgoing feeders of
standard single and double busbar systems can be included in a
check zone (CzBBP) measurement, but exclude the measure-
ments from the couplers.
For complex busbar configurations e.g. 1 - Breaker systems
and complex multi-busbar systems, which measurements have
to be used in the check zone protection will be determined dur-
ing factory-configuration.
NOTE: For substations with transfer busbars, dependent on the

configuration the following section has to be noted.
Substations with a transfer busbar, depending on the configura-

tion, have to be treated separately. If the switching ON off a
transfer busbar isolator would result in the by passing of the CT
of an outgoing feeder, such that the feeder is connected directly
to the busbar (i.e. without measurement see Fig. 11.18) then no
valid check zone measurement (CzBBP) can be implemented. In
this case the binary input signal 12605_Bypass Check Zone
has to be configured for each bay unit associated with such an
outgoing bypass feeder. The presence of the above signal re-
sults in a instantaneous unblocking (see Section 11.5.4), which
should be equated to a bypass of the check zone system. This
binary input should be connected to closing the contact of the
customary selector switch Feeder in bypass operation.
11-36
I
II
Transfer
busbar
Transfer busbar isolator ON
HEST 055 003E C
Fig. 11.18 Double busbar with bypass
11.5.7. Modification / Maintenance in connection with CzBBP

As described in Section 11.12, a signal can be applied to the bi-
nary inputs Inspection and Maintenance which prevents the
test injection current from being included in the differential cur-
rent measurement of the busbar protection (BBP). This function
relies on the position of the isolator concerned being set to 'OFF'
in the busbar image in the REB500.
As described in Section 11.5.2, the check zone protection
(CzBBP) does not take any isolator position into consideration.
This means that the test current of an outgoing feeder bay unit in
the modification or maintenance mode is included in the check
zone calculation. Depending on the level of the test current, the
check zone (CzBBP) may pick up, however the busbar protec-
tion (BBP) is uninfluenced by the differential current and pre-
vents the pick-up of the check zone from having any effect.
If it is desired that the check zone protection be bypassed (en-
abled) in the modification or maintenance mode, the signal
12605_Bypass Check Zone must be activated in addition to the
input 11620_Inspection_1-On or 11660_Maintenance-On.
11-37
11.6. Busbar protection with neutral current measurement (option)
NOTE: Only in cases of impedance grounded networks the

neutral current monitoring will be activated at the clients request
(see Section 3.8.5.).
The neutral current is measured mainly only in impedance

grounded systems. The resistor (or resistors) limits the ground
fault current very often to a value below the sensitivity of the
phase fault measuring units. The relatively high fault impedance
also has the effect that during a ground fault currents may also
flow away from the busbars. The phase fault units of a direc-
tional comparison scheme with current restraint will not trip.
A fourth measuring unit specifically for the neutral current is
therefore used to detect ground faults in impedance grounded
systems. For the best results, this is connected to a core-
balance CT that encompasses all three-phase conductors.
Where CTs of this type are not available, the neutral current is
derived by vectorially adding the three-phase currents (Holm-
green circuit).
Where this solution is chosen, it is necessary to check the per-
formance of the REB500 neutral current measurement with re-
spect to the main CTs, power system time constant, fault current
levels and power transformer inrush current.
The configuration of the busbar protection in impedance
grounded networks must take the following physical conditions
into account:
Limited single-phase to ground fault current levels (Ikmin 1ph
and k-factor values are possibly lower than the operating
range of the phase measurement system).
For a single-phase fault on the busbar, current can also flow
away from the busbar because of the relatively high fault im-
pedance (Ib, see Fig. 11.19). As a consequence, the phase
comparison system may not be able to trip (since the phase-
angle between Ib and Ik + Ib exceeds 74).
In order to detect single-phase faults in impedance grounded

networks and considering the comments made above, a fourth
measuring system for the neutral measurement I0 is included.
11-38
+Ib
Ik = 2Ib
|Ik+Ib-Ib|
k=
|Ik+Ib|+|Ib|
Ik+Ib
k = 0,5
Ik
L1 L2 L3
HEST 985008 C
Fig. 11.19 Impedance grounded network
At a fault current Ik corresponding to twice the load current Ib,

flowing in the affected phase L1, the restraining factor k is only
0.5. Thus the restrained amplitude comparison function cannot
detect the internal fault at the usual k setting of 0.80. Further-
more, the current is flowing away from the busbar so the phase
comparison measures a phase-angle of approximately 180 de-
grees thus preventing the trip command. Therefore the neutral
current I0 has to be measured as well and evaluated together
with the restrained amplitude comparison and the phase com-
parison functions.
The neutral current evaluation is only necessary by phase-to-
ground faults and should only be used for these faults. The
monitoring of the conductor currents serves as the measuring
criteria. Whether it is included in the evaluation or not depends
on the levels of the phase currents. Even if the phase currents
do not drive the CTs into saturation, their ratio errors can still
produce an apparent neutral current on the secondary side. The
neutral current is therefore only evaluated when none of the
phase currents exceeds a set value (typically 5 IN). This prevents
the neutral current from being evaluated for phase-to-phase and
three-phase faults.
Finally, the harmonic level is monitored to ensure that the neutral
current is only evaluated providing the measurement is uninflu-
enced by CT saturation. This feature also prevents the evalua-
tion of the neutral current during transformer inrush currents.
11-39
WARNING: To ensure that the neutral current supervision

function blocks reliably in the event of CT saturation, the
inductive component of the burden must be a minimum.
Therefore the CT secondary circuit must not include electrome-
chanical relays or similar devices.
Detailed site data are essential to accurately engineer and set

the neutral current measuring systems.
For each busbar section

IKS3max max. phase fault current for a three-phase fault
TS3max time constant of the DC component of lS3max
IKS3min min. phase fault current for a three-phase fault
TS3min time constant of the DC component of IKS3min
IKS1max max. fault current for a phase-to-ground fault
TS1max time constant of the DC component of IKS1max
IKS1min min. fault current for a phase-to-ground fault
TS1min time constant of the DC component of IKS1min
For each feeder

IKA1max max. fault current for a phase-to-ground fault
TA1max time constant of the DC component of IKA1max
IBAmax max. load current
INprim rated CT primary current
INsec rated CT secondary current
PN rated CT power in VA
n rated CT overcurrent factor
n effective CT overcurrent factor
UK CT knee-point voltage
PE CT losses
RCT resistance of the CT secondary winding
l single length (not loop) of the CT leads in Ohm
A gauge of CT leads in mm2
PBG total burdens of all connected devices in VA
11-40
RBG total resistive burdens of all connected devices in Ohm
The following points must be checked:

through-fault stability of the l0 measuring system
lowest permissible current (operating current) for the differen-
CT knee-point voltage in relation to the required operating
range of the I0 measuring system (it must not saturate in the
operating range).
Instructions for calculation and the requirements to be fulfilled by
the CTs are given in detail in the application description Ground
fault protection for high voltage busbars (1KHL020319-Aen).
11-41
11.7. Expanded disturbance recorder (option)

The disturbance recorder that is integrated in the busbar protec-
tion can record bay unit currents, internal and external binary
signals and, if specified, also voltages. The following options are
available:
Analog channels Recording time

Choice of sampling rate for
16.7Hz (1), /50Hz (2), /60Hz (3)
Options 4 x current 4 x current or 802 Hz (1) 401 Hz (1) 600 Hz (2)

or 4x/5x 2400 Hz (2) 1200 Hz (2) 720 Hz (3)
9 x current voltage 2880 Hz (3) 1440 Hz (3)
Standard X X 1.5 s 3s 6s
Option 1 X X 6s 12 s 24 s
Option 2 X X 10 s 20 s 40 s
Table 11.21 Recording times of the disturbance recorder options
For the options 1 and 2, if the voltage signals are not recorded
then the maximum available recording time is doubled.
11-42
11.8. Configuration - voltage transformer (REB500 option)

This menu item appears only if voltage transformers have been
fitted. The VT inputs are standard on REB500sys.
The description can be edited in the input field Markings.
The ratio is determined by the primary and secondary ratings en-
tered in the Transformer ratio input field. The VT input is a sin-
gle winding, which is suitable for all the main VT secondary rat-
ings, the effective voltage being set via HMI500 to either 100 V
or 200 V. Other voltages are accommodated by appropriately
setting the scaling factor.
The mode of VT connection (star or delta) and the scaling factor
are entered in the Connection input field. The scaling factor ad-
justs the setting for the rated secondary voltage to equal the ef-
fective rated secondary voltage.
Setting example
VT data:
UN primary = 220 kV / 3
UN secondary = 110 V / 3
Connection to REB500: 3 phases_star
Settings made in HMI500
VT connection: 3 phases_star
Primary voltage: 220,000 V
Secondary voltage: 100 V
Scaling factor: 1.1
11-43
Fig. 11.20 Details dialog after selecting Configuration /

Voltage transformers
NOTE: The scaling factor only applies to the voltage function

in the protection system and not to the distance protection in
REB500sys.
11-44
11.9. Voltage release function (option)

The voltage function is used to enable tripping or other functions
as described below. It forms part of a bay unit equipped with the
corresponding VTs. The internal output signal of the voltage
function is an enabling signal.
NOTE: An enabling logic (matrix) provides facility for assigning

the enabling (release) signal to the respective functions (see
Section 11.10.2.).
NOTE: The enabling signal can be assigned to a feeder, a bus-

tie breaker or a protection zone (see Section 11.9.1.). (Assign-
ment is performed by the ABB engineering department and
cannot be changed subsequently by customer.)
The dialog Voltage release enables the voltage function to be

configured and set.
Overview (see Fig. 11.21) lists the VTs, their assignment to bay
units, any direct assignments to protection zones and also
whether they are active or inactive.
Details (see Fig. 11.22 and Fig. 11.23) enables the voltage func-
tion to be configured to detect under or overvoltage:
Undervoltage
The phase-to-neutral voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3) are measured.
Overvoltage
The neutral voltage is either evaluated and is derived from the
three phase voltages (U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3) or is fed externally
(U0).
Detailed view also provides facility for setting the operating
voltage and activating or deactivating the function.
11-45
NOTE: Should a voltage be interrupted either due to a tripped

m.c.b. or an open-circuit, a voltage function configured for over-
voltage will disable, while one configured for undervoltage will
enable.
NOTE: An open VT circuit connected to an undervoltage

function can be detected by monitoring the signal
28805_Voltage criterion.
Fig. 11.21 Voltage release - Overview
11-46
Fig. 11.22 Voltage release Detailed view
Combined over and undervoltage protection function

The measurement of the undervoltage function is derived from
the phase voltages (UL1, UL2, UL3).
The measurement of the overvoltage function is derived from the
neutral voltage or is calculated from the phase voltages
(U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3) or is fed externally (U0).
In the detailed view the voltage level can be set and the function
activated resp. deactivated
NOTE: In a combination of over- and undervoltage function

(within a bay unit or in the complete system) the overvoltage
function has an affect on the neutral system of the bus bar pro-
tection (SSS_I0), and the undervoltage function of the remaining
functions (see also release matrix in Section 11.10.2.)
11-47
Fig. 11.23 Detail View Combined voltage release
11.9.1. VT assignment
Assignment to a feeder or a bus-tie breaker

Fig. 11.24 shows that VT T5 is assigned to feeder 3 and there-
for measures the feeder voltage.
Assignment to a protection zone

Fig. 11.24 shows that VT T5 (2.2) measures the voltage at bus-
tie breaker 2.1. Both are integrated in the hardware of bay unit 2,
but VT T5 (2.2) measures the voltage on the busbars in protec-
tion zone I.
The same applies to protection zone II, i.e. VT T5 (4.4) is con-
nected at bus-tie breaker 4.1. It is integrated in the hardware of
bay unit 4, but measures the voltage on the busbars in protection
zone II.
11-48
Fig. 11.24 VT assignment
11-49
11.10. Enabling tripping commands
11.10.1. Overcurrent release of the trip command (option)

It is occasionally specified that when tripping a busbar zone only
those feeders are tripped which are actually conducting fault cur-
rent (active feeders), while those which are not (passive feeders)
are left connected. This logic can be achieved by configuring an
additional low current check feature per bay unit, which only en-
ables tripping of feeders that are actually conducting current.
The overcurrent release (low current check feature) is used to
enable tripping and intertripping commands generated by the
busbar, breaker failure and end fault protection functions and/or
trip redirection (configurable). If the measured feeder current lies
below the pick-up setting of the overcurrent release, tripping of
the particular feeder is prevented.
I L1 I L1 >
I L2 I L2 >
1
I L3 I L3 > 21110_Trip
&
BBP trip
BBP trip ITT

BBP trip
1
HEST 005016 C
Fig. 11.25 Principle of the overcurrent release function
Although in the event of a busbar trip and feeder current not ex-
ceeding the pick-up of the low current check feature the feeder
concerned is not tripped, a trip event is generated by the central
unit and displayed on its (see Section 3.7.3. Intertripping/ trans-
fer tripping).
The current pick-up setting can also be used for trip redirection
regardless of whether the low current check feature is configured
or not (see Section 11.11.).

Overcurrent release active inactive
Pick-up setting when active 0.1 4.0 0.7 0.1 IN
11-50
The overcurrent release function is processed independently of

the release logic (see Section 11.10.2.).
Overview
Fig. 11.26 Settings / Overcurrent Release - Overview
Detailed view
Fig. 11.27 Settings / Overcurrent Release - Detailed view
11-51
11.10.2. Release logic / matrix
NOTE: The overcurrent release described in Section 11.10.1

above is completely independent of the functions described in
this section.
The operation of the internal voltage release (option) and the

general enabling inputs for each protection zone is determined
by the configuration of the release logic (matrix). This involves
entering the release criteria in the columns and the protection
functions they affect on the rows.
NOTE: The release criteria can refer to A) bay unit functions or

B) a protection zone.
A) Enabling bay unit functions (column 5)

Checking the boxes in column 5 of Fig. 11.28 subjects tripping of
the functions in the bay concerned to being enabled by the
voltage release. These include breaker failure protection, end
fault protection and bay unit External TRIP signal. The release
condition still applies when the feeder is not assigned to a pro-
tection zone.
B) Enabling protection zone functions (columns 1 to 4)

Checking the boxes in column 1 to 4 of Fig. 11.28 subjects inter-
tripping of protection zones or the functions of bay units switched
onto the respective protection zone to being enabled by the volt-
age release.
Releasing BBP_L1L2L3, BBP_L0, External TRIP BB
Zone (CU) and External TRIP BB Zone (BU) always in-
volves enabling intertripping of the respective protection
zone.
Releasing OCDT and PDF always involves enabling the
respective function and only applies providing the feeder is
connected to the respective protection zone. This is deter-
mined by the intertripping logic.
Releasing BFP and EFP in columns 1 to 4 involves ena-
bling intertripping of these functions (e.g. BFP trip after t2).
11-52
Fig. 11.28 REB500 release criteria
default values
1) can only be selected if the voltage release function is config-

ured
2) can only be selected if input 31805_External release BB-

zone is configured
3) AND logic of the voltage release criterion and the input

31805_External release BB-zone. This can only be selected
if the voltage release criterion and the input 31805_External
release BB-zone are configured.
4) OR logic of the voltage release criterion and the input

31805_External release BB-zone. This can only be selected
if the voltage release criterion and the input 31805_External
release BB-zone are configured.
5) can only be selected providing a corresponding criterion in

columns 1 to 4 is configured.
11-53
11.10.2.1. Release by 31805_External release BB zone

There is a 31805_External release BB zone signal for every
protection zone configured on the central unit (e.g. enable trip-
ping of BB zone 1, enable tripping BB zone 2 etc.).
They are binary inputs and enable intertripping of the busbar
zones by the respective functions (see Fig. 11.28).
If busbar sections are connected (e.g. by a longitudinal isolator),
tripping is only enabled when all the relevant 31805_External
release BB zone (n) are active (AND logic).
Practical example 1:
BBP function tripping enabled by the an external under-
voltage relay
(see Fig. 11.29)
Problem:
In a solidly grounded power system, tripping by the BBP has to
be interlocked by an external undervoltage criterion. Every pro-
tection zone is correspondingly equipped with a VT and under-
voltage function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.30)
The enabling signals from the external undervoltage relays are
connected to the respective 31805_External release BB zone
input signal.
Sequence:
In the event of a fault on a given busbar section (e.g. BB1), the
busbar protection function for BB1 trips, but the tripping signal
has to wait for the enabling signal for BB1. A fault on a busbar
section will normally cause a voltage collapse, which is detected
by the external undervoltage relay for BB1. The undervoltage re-
lay thus also trips and transmits its enabling signal to REB500.
REB500 then trips all the feeders connected to busbar section 1.
11-54
Fig. 11.29 Practical examples 1, 3 and 5: BBP enable
Fig. 11.30 Settings for practical example 1
11-55
11.10.2.2. Release by the internal voltage function (option)
NOTE: When the breaker failure protection is started by a

trip from an external distance protection measuring a re-
mote fault, it is possible that the voltage collapse at the
REB500 location is too little for the undervoltage criterion to
respond. In such cases we do not normally recommend that the
undervoltage function interlocks a breaker failure trip. If this is
done anyway, the undervoltage release setting must be verified
by calculating the power system conditions.
NOTE: Should the voltage measurement be invalid (i.e. the

bay unit is switched off or there is a power supply failure), trip-
ping by the respective bay is enabled since the protection
must not be blocked!
NOTE: The release by the internal undervoltage criterion

can refer to A) bay unit functions or B) a protection zone.
A) Enabling bay unit functions (column 5)
EFP function tripping enabled by the internal undervoltage
function
Problem:
In a solidly grounded power system, transfer tripping by the EFP
has to be interlocked by the internal undervoltage function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.32)
Sequence:
A fault between the open circuit-breaker and the CTs (end fault)
generally causes a voltage collapse which is detected by the in-
ternal undervoltage function. The undervoltage function thus also
trips and transmits its enabling signal to the EFP function in the
same bay unit, which sends a transfer tripping command to the
protection at the remote end of the line.
11-56
Fig. 11.31 Practical example 2: EFP enable
B) Enabling protection zone functions (columns 1 to 4)

All the VTs assigned to a protection zone are evaluated when
enabling tripping of a complete protection zone (see Section
11.9.). Assignment takes place via the intertripping logic, i.e. it
depends on the statuses of the isolators. Tripping is only en-
abled when all the voltage functions assigned to the protection
zone in question generate an enabling signal (AND logic).
11-57
BBP function tripping enabled by the internal undervoltage
function
(see Fig. 11.29 and practical example 1):
Problem:
be interlocked by the internal undervoltage criterion. Every pro-
tection zone is correspondingly equipped with a VT and under-
voltage function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.33)
Sequence:
busbar protection function for BB1 trips. A fault on a busbar sec-
tion will normally cause a voltage collapse, which is detected by
the internal undervoltage function for BB1. The undervoltage
function thus also trips and transmits a signal to enable tripping
of BB1. REB500 then trips all the feeders connected to busbar
section 1.
Fig. 11.33 Settings for practical examples 3 and 4
11-58
BBP function tripping enabled by the internal undervoltage
function without VTs on the busbars
(see Fig. 11.34)
Problem:
be interlocked by the internal undervoltage criterion, but there
are no VTs to measure the voltage on the busbars.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.33)
REB500 evaluates all the VTs assigned to the respective protec-
tion zone (see Section 11.9.). Assignment takes place via the in-
tertripping logic, i.e. it depends on the statuses of the isolators.
Tripping is only enabled when all the voltage functions assigned
to the protection zone in question generate an enabling signal
(AND logic).
This means that an overvoltage function cannot enable tripping
of the protection zone should the voltage be interrupted either
due to a tripped m.c.b. or an open-circuit.
This means that an undervoltage function will enable tripping
of the protection zone should the voltage be interrupted either
due to a tripped m.c.b. or an open-circuit. Since, however, the
other undervoltage functions assigned to the protection zone are
also evaluated, they prevent tripping from taking place.
NOTE: An interruption of the VT circuit can be detected in the

case of an undervoltage function by supervising the bay unit
output signal 28805_Voltage criterion or the central unit output
signal 48805_Voltage criterion.
NOTE: By activating the input signal 18205_Fuse failure

superv. UV a tripped m.c.b. can be configured to enable trip-
ping of the respective protection zone in the case of an over-
voltage function.
11-59
NOTE: REB500 is thus able derive the voltage on the bus-

bars, even if there are no VTs to measure it directly.
Tripping of a protection zone to which no VTs are assigned (e.g.

all the isolators open) is enabled by the voltage function.
Sequence:
busbar protection function for BB1 trips. A fault on a busbar sec-
tion will normally cause a voltage collapse, which in this case is
detected by all the undervoltage functions in all the bay units as-
signed to BB1. Since for all of them the release criterion is ful-
filled, intertripping is enabled and REB500 isolates BB1.
Fig. 11.34 Practical example 4: Enabling tripping by the BBP

function without VTs on the busbars
11-60
BBP neutral measuring system enabled by the internal un-
dervoltage function
(see Fig. 11.29)
Problem:
In stations in which the maximum load current of some feeders
can exceed the minimum fault current of the protection zones
(e.g. ground fault in impedance grounded power systems), an in-
terrupted CT circuit can cause a differential current higher than
the setting of the current comparison circuit.
To guard against this, the internal REB500 undervoltage function
can be configured as an additional neutral current criterion for
the BBP function.
Solution:
(see Fig. 11.35)
Sequence:
In the event of a ground fault on a given busbar section (e.g.
BB1), the neutral measuring system for BB1 trips. A ground fault
on a busbar section will normally cause a voltage collapse,
which is detected by the internal undervoltage function for BB1.
REB500 then isolates BB1.
11-61
11.11. Trip redirection

If a circuit breaker is unable to trip (e.g. air pressure too low),
REB500 receives the signal Trip redirection from it.
When this signal is active and a trip signal being applied to the
circuit-breaker (e.g. External TRIP or BBP TRIP, see
Fig. 11.36) REB500 automatically trips all the circuit-breakers
surrounding the fault.
For this to take place in the event of a trip generated by a device
other than REB500 (e.g. transformer differential protection), the
trip signal generated by the transformer differential protection
must also go to the input External TRIP.
The trip redirection function is basically independent of the
breaker failure protection, but uses the intertripping output sig-
nals 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP and 23335_Trip by BFP.
A low-current check feature can be configured for the trip redi-
rection function so that redirection only takes place when the re-
spective feeder is conducting a given current. The overcurrent
check feature is used for this purpose (regardless of whether it is
otherwise configured or not). Refer to Section 11.10.1. for how to
configure this option.
Providing the trip redirection function is active, a tripping com-
mand is not issued locally to the circuit breaker in question.
23110_BFP intertrip
13605_Trip redirection
& &
23335_Trip by BFP
IL1 IL1 > setting

Intertrip (CU)
IL2 IL2 > setting
IL3 IL3 > setting
BFP Trip (internal)
OCDT Trip (internal)
PDF Trip (internal)
11105_EXT.TRIP
BBP TRIP (internal)
HEST 985035 C
Fig. 11.36 Trip redirection
11-62
NOTE: The trip redirection function is augmented by the

breaker failure protection (see Section 11.1.3.2.). The input
signal External TRIP is not then needed, because the BFP
starting signals perform this function.
11-63
11.12. Inspection and maintenance (option)

During the routine inspection of a bay, the protection and control
devices and the local protection functions in the REB500 bay
unit are also generally checked. Opening the isolators of a bay
undergoing maintenance avoids any risk of test trips in the bay
from intertripping other bay units or an injection current from af-
fecting the differential current measurement of the busbar pro-
tection.
It may also be the case that the bay under test is not generating
any isolator status signals or the signals are disconnected be-
cause engineers are working on them. To prevent REB500 from
operating with an incorrect busbar image in such situations, pro-
vision is made for applying an inspection signal to a bay unit,
which enables one or several isolators or bus-tie breakers to be
set to OPEN.
When all the isolators belonging to a bay are set to OPEN, the
bay current is not assigned to a protection zone and the current
of the corresponding feeder is not included when the busbar pro-
tection algorithm is executed.
A REB500 bay unit has four binary inputs for controlling the in-
spection mode. These are assigned when engineering the sys-
tem to particular isolators or bus-tie breakers.
When an inspection input is set, the output signals 21815_ In-
spection/maintenance on the bay unit concerned and 41825_
Inspection/maintenance on the central unit signal the mainte-
nance status.
NOTE: The definition of the isolator and circuit-breaker

statuses during inspection is determined by ABB when engi-
neering the system and cannot be changed subsequently.
Where inspection inputs are needed, their functions have to be
defined when the system is initially engineered.
WARNING: The maintenance input on a bay unit may only be

activated after the bay has been completely isolated from the
primary system, i.e. the respective isolators are in the OPEN
position.
Interlocking the inspection signal with a key switch is recom-
mended.
11-64
The input signal 11660_Maintenance-On prevents the isolator

positions from changing and signals the status to the central unit.
The protection uses the last set of valid isolator positions and
remains active. A busbar protection trip to the circuit-breaker
concerned will still trip it in spite of it being in the maintenance
mode.
Example of a bay configuration for which it is of advantage to set
the inspection and maintenance input signals:
Feeder
Fig. 11.37 Bay configuration when a maintenance signal is

being applied
The REB500 inspection input signal forces isolators Q1, Q2, Q0

and Q6 into the OPEN position. Isolator Q7, which is closed
while the bay is being inspected to supply the feeder via a by-
pass busbar, is held in this position by the REB500 maintenance
signal.
WARNING: If the bay unit is switched off or reset in this

situation, the information pertaining to the isolator statuses is
lost and the actual positions are used when it starts up again.
This is signaled by the isolator alarm until the maintenance sig-
nal is removed. Thus when the maintenance signal is active, the
isolator alarm means that the isolator positions may have
changed.
11-65
WARNING: If the positions of isolators or circuit-breakers are

simulated during an inspection or maintenance, a mainte-
nance input or an external jumper, the system will always re-
spond according to the simulated statuses.
Therefore take care when employing such manipulations!
11-66
11.13. Interbay bus (IBB) connection
11.13.1. Introduction
An interface is optionally available for connecting the numerical
busbar protection to a station automation system or station moni-
toring system (SCS/SMS).
Network
SCS/SMS Control
LON
IEC 60870-5-103
3)
Modem
2)
Un
B Un
B
E
a
its a
its
RE.58.
y yRE.316
C
C C C
C 1) Network
Un
B Un
B Un
B Un
B Control
E
E E E
its
a a
its a
its a
its
y y y y
HMI500
Fig. 11.38 Overview of REB500 interfaces
Fig. 11.38 Overview of REB500 interfaces shows the commu-

nication interfaces provided on REB500:
1. HMI500 connected to the HMI interface at the front of the
central unit or a bay unit for commissioning, maintenance
etc., of the REB500 system.
2. HMI500 permanently connected via a modem or optical fiber
cable to the interface at the back of the central unit (remote
HMI)
3. Interbay bus interface.
11-67
In contrast to feeder control and protection bay units, REB500 is

equipped with only a single interbay bus interface via which all
the REB500 bay units in the entire station communicate. This
has to be taken into account by the various bus protocols.
11.13.2. Hardware
11.13.2.1. Basic components

REB500 can support a maximum of two IBB interfaces at the
same time and these are configured in the database while engi-
neering the protection scheme. Suitable communication proto-
cols are LON and IEC 60870-5-103. The simultaneous use of
two LON or two IEC 60870-5-103 interfaces is not possible.
Physically, the interface is an extra module 500CIM06, which is
inserted into slot 19 in the central unit.
500CIM06
To enable REB500 to communicate via an interbay bus, a proc-
essor module 500CIM06 has to be inserted in the central unit. In
the case of a LON bus, a sub-module 500LBI02 is also plugged
onto the 500CIM06 module (see Section 11.13.2.2 'LON hard-
ware configuration').
Fig. 11.39 500CIM06
11-68
11.13.2.2. LON hardware configuration

Where LON is being used as the IBB protocol, the following
hardware has to be installed in the central unit:
1 x CIM module (500CIM06)
1 x LON BUS interface (500LBI02)
Assemble the ancillary hardware and insert it into the central
unit.
Use an optical fiber cable with a core diameter of 62.5 m and a
connector Type BFOC/2,5 for the connection between the optical
LON bus interface on the 500CIM06 and the star-coupler or
SCS. The cable cores have to be transposed when inter-
connecting two devices (i.e. the optical LON output Tx on the
500CIM06 must go to the optical input Rx on the star-coupler or
SCS and the optical LON input Rx on the 500CIM06 must come
from the optical output Tx on the star-coupler or SCS).
11.13.2.3. IEC 60870-5-103 hardware configuration

Where IEC 60870-5-103 is being used as the IBB protocol, the
following module has to be installed in the central unit:
1 x CIM module (500CIM06)
The standard interface is an optical fiber connector Type
BFOC/2,5. It is located on the 500CIM06 module in the central
unit.
The data transfer rate can be set to either 9600 Bit/s or
19200 Bit/s.
11.13.2.4. IEC 61850-8-1 hardware configuration

If IEC 61850 is selected as the IBB protocol, the following HW is
required in the central unit:
1 CIM module (500CIM06)
The standard fiber-optic interface (LAN1 optical) utilizes a
BFOC/2,5 connector. The connector is located on the 500CIM06
module in the CU. Optionally an electric interface (LAN1 electri-
cal) with a RJ45 connector can be utilized.
11-69
11.13.3. Common IBB functions
11.13.3.1. Basic IBB configuration

The dialog for configuring the communication is accessed by se-
lecting Communication in the HMI500 Settings menu.
Fig. 11.40 Dialog for configuring the communication
The parameters must be defined when configuring the complete

REB500 system.
The field Sync source defines which protocol is used to syn-
chronize REB500 with an external reference.
11-70
LON:
Setting Significance Default

setting
nv Clock address: Predefined LON network variable. 1023
Does not normally have to be
changed.
nv Clock warning Predefined LON network variable. 1022
address: Does not normally have to be
changed.
Station address: Distinguishes between REB500s, if 1
several are connected to the same
LON segment. The node address can,
but does not have to be identical to the
LON node address {0..63}.
Sync source: When this is active, the REB500 time active
is synchronized via the LON bus (clock
address, clock warning address)
Sync method: This setting must be the same as the Clock
method configured for the SCS or SMS warning
system.
Table 11.22 LON configuration
IEC 60870-5-103
Setting Significance Default

setting
Address: IEC-103 station address (on link layer) 1
{1..254}
Baud rate: Data transfer rate 9600 or 19200 Baud 9600
CAA setting Opens the dialog for the CAA settings -
of central and bay units
Table 11.23 IEC 60870-5-103 configuration
11-71
IEC 61850-8-1:
Setting Significance Default set-
ting
IP address IEC61850-8-1 TCP/IP Address 0.0.0.0
Subnet mask IEC61850-8-1 TCP/IP Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0
Gateway address IEC61850-8-1 TCP/IP Gateway Ad- 0.0.0.0
dress
Electrical/optical Selection of the Ethernet connector on Optical
the 500CIM06 Module
Non-volatile 61850 Report stack transfers volatile None
RCBs or non-volatile report control blocks (for
communication with third-party sys-
tems)
SNTP1 TCP/IP Address of the SNTP time 127.0.0.1
master
SNTP2 TCP/IP Address of the SNTP standby 127.0.0.1
time master
Time zone correc- Time zone setting (hours/minutes) 0.0
tion (h/m)
Summer time Dialog for switching from standard time See below
settings to summertime and vice versa
Generate I/O Automatic generation of the signals See below
signals needed by IEC 61850
Table 11.24 Configuration of the IEC 61850-8-1
Change from standard to summer time

If the system time synchronization according to IEC 61850 is ac-
tivated, then the possibility of switching automatically between
standard and summer time can also available for activation:
Fig. 11.41 Standard/summer time settings
11-72
11.13.3.2. Configuring REB500 events

For changes in status generated by REB500 to be transferred as
events to an SCS/SMS, the corresponding signals must be con-
figured by selecting them in HMI500 Configuration / Binary
module and making the settings in the Event configuration
section of the details dialog (see Table 11.23 IEC 60870-5-103
configuration). To which IBB an event is sent is determined by
selecting the appropriate checkbox IBB 1 or IBB 2 when con-
figuring the signal.
Fig. 11.42 Configuring signals as events
Diagnostic and system events are always available for transfer

whichever protocol is in use and cannot be configured.
If both IBB 1 and IBB 2 are used, an event can be assigned to
both interfaces.
The IEC 60870-5-103 section only appears when the protocol is
configured.
11-73
11.13.3.3. Transfer of differential current values
General description
To keep the load on the IBB as low as possible, the bus zone dif-
ferential currents are checked cyclically, but only actually trans-
ferred via the bus if the value has changed.
Example:
Diff.
Current
Zero limit
0 100 200
Values transferred HEST 005020 C
to the SCS
Fig. 11.43 Transmitted values and the zero limit
To stabilize the display during normal operation, differential cur-

rents below the zero limit (dead band) count as zero and are
transferred as such.
Providing the condition for transmitting a current value is fulfilled,
all the differential currents belonging to the respective zone are
sent to the SCS/SMS.
Detailed description of the delta/dead band algorithm

Conditions to be fulfilled for transmitting differential currents as
events to the SCS:
11-74
Transmit conditions
Int. meas. = Int. meas. + |new current - old current|
if | Int. meas. | > delta
then
Int. meas. = 0
if |new current| < dead band
then
old current = 0, send 0
else
old current = new current, send new current
Delta value: Delta defines how big the integral of the

changes in the value of the measurement
(see condition below) has to be for a new
value to be transferred via the bus.
Dead band value: The dead band on the other hand is simply
the threshold below, which a value counts
as zero.
Int. meas.: Integrated measurement
Configuring the SCS differential current parameter

The precise conditions for sending differential currents to the
SCS can be set by selecting HMI500 Settings / Communication
/ SCS Diff. current parameters.
Fig. 11.44 Settings / Communication / SCS Diff. current pa-

rameters
11-75
HMI500
Settings in this dialog are made for each busbar section (bus
zone) and can be changed after activating the respective field.
The differential current parameters are as follows:
Update period: - Determines how often the
differential current measurement has
to be updated.
- Applies to all bus zones.
Delta L1_L2_L3: - Delta per bus zone for phases
L1, L2 and L3.
Dead band L1_L2_L3: - Dead band per bus zone for
phases L1, L2 and L3.
Delta L0: - Delta per bus zone for the
neutral current L0.
Dead band L0: - Dead Band per bus zone for
the neutral current L0.
Enabled: - Enables polling of the bus zone
differential currents.
The tables below show the interrelationships, units, default set-
tings and the ranges and setting intervals (steps) of the parame-
ters:
Parameter Bus zone 1...n

Update Period (s) Default: 60
Range: 0 - 1000
Step: 1
Table 11.25 Repetition rate setting
Parameter Bus zone 1 Bus zone 2 Bus zone n

Enabled Default: Yes Default: Yes Default: Yes
(yes/no)
Delta L1_L2_L3 (A) Default: 10 Default: 10 Default: 10
Range: 0 - 65535 Range: 0 - 65535 Range: 0 - 65535
Step: 1 Step: 1 Step: 1
Dead band Default: 5 Default: 5 Default: 5
L1_L2_L3 (A)
11-76
Parameter Bus zone 1 Bus zone 2 Bus zone n

Delta L0 (A) Default: 10 Default: 10 Default: 10
Range: 0 - 65535 Range: 0 -65535 Range: 0 - 65535
Dead band L0 (A) Default: 5 Default: 5 Default: 5
Table 11.26 SCS differential current parameters
NOTE: Only bus zone neutral currents L0 are transferred to

the SCS that were correspondingly configured at the time the
scheme was engineered.
WARNING: Delta and Dead band settings that are too low
result in a high data load on the bus. For this reason, care
should be taken to set reasonable values.
11.13.4. LON
11.13.4.1. Installing a LON node

When a LON bus interface is put into operation for the first time,
it is not configured and so the first task is to do so using the LON
network managers program.
A suitable LON network managers program is the LON Network
Tool.
The service telegram to permit configuration to be carried out is
transmitted by the LON bus interface (500LBI01) when the but-
ton marked LON on the 500CIM06 is pressed
11.13.4.2. Addressing
The identification of the REB500 events and the mapping to the
corresponding process objects in the SCS database is done on
the basis of the station address (2 Byte, also referred to as unit
address) and the object address (2 Byte), both of which are in-
cluded with every event telegram.
11-77
Station address (unit address)

In most cases, there will only be one REB500 per substation and
therefore only one IBB connection (to the central unit).
The 2 Byte station address (unit address) is composed as fol-
lows:
HighByte = Physical bus line on the REB500 { 0 1 2 }
LowByte = Node address { 063 }. This address must be
unique on the particular IBB as it is used to construct
the station address (unit address). It may be the
LON node, but does not have to be. Where several
REB500s are connected to an SCS, this address
also distinguishes between them.
The address can be entered using HMI500 (see Section
11.13.3.1).
Object address
The object address defines one REB500 event, a measurement
or a command. It is composed as follows:
The object address is fix allocated per function.
The following address range is reserved for the central unit
1 up to 1073,
and for the bay units
FE_Nr*1074 up to FE_Nr*1074+1073
FE_Nr stands for the number of the bay unit. Provision is made
for exporting object addresses from the configuration tool.
The object address is derived from a basic object address as-
signed to a REB500 signal and an offset determined by the bay
unit.
Object address = Basic object address + Bay unit No. *1074
11-78
11.13.4.3. Configuration
Configuring the LON IBB protocol and time synchronization

Refer to Section 11.13.3.1. for the basic configuration. The sta-
tion address (unit address) is determined by selecting the bus
line and the node address (see Section 11.13.4.2.).
Activating the Sync. Source checkbox (only for a LON IBB)
means that the REB500 time is synchronized via the LON IBB.
Be sure that only one IBB is being used for synchronization.
There are three methods of synchronizing system time via the
LON IBB (see Section 3.7.9. Time synchronization).
Configuration consists in selecting the desired method.
Only in exceptions is it necessary to change the synchronization
method index and it should be done by a specialized LON engi-
neer.
The default indices are:
VATP nv_pattern_time 1020
VATP nv_puls_time 1021
nv_clock_warning 1022
nv_clock 1023
Configuring events for the LON IBB

REB500 generates the following types of events for transfer via
the LON IBB (see Section 11.13.4.2):
1. Signal events (single-point indication)
Format: DMCD type 129 Single-point information without
time tag [LAG 1.4]
DMCD type 130 Single-point information with
time tag [LAG 1.4]
2. Isolator and circuit-breaker position events (double-point indi-
cation)
Format: DMCD type 131 Double-point information with-
out time tag [LAG 1.4]
DMCD type 132 Double-point information with
time tag [LAG 1.4]
3. Diagnostic events and system events
11-79
Format: DMCD type 139 Pulse counter value with time

tag [LAG 1.4]
The LON protocol supports five event filters that can be ad-
dressed by the SCS while communication is being initiated with it
(see SCS manual). The various filters serve the following pur-
poses:
Filter 0: Enables all events that were configured for the LON
IBB including diagnostic events.
IBB excluding diagnostic events.
IBB excluding diagnostic events.
Configuring measurements (differential currents) for the

LON IBB
REB500 makes four differential currents (L0, L1, L2, L3) per bus
zone available for transmission via the LON IBB (see Section
11.13.3.3):
Format: DMCD-type 137 Measured value, short floating point
without time tag
DMCD-type 138 Measured value, short floating point
with time tag
The object addresses for the various differential currents are de-
termined using the relationship given in Section 11.13.4.2.
Distance to fault display for LON IBB

REB500 provides the fault location measured by the distance
protection as an output signal (see Section 12.2.6.1):
Format: DMCD type 138, i.e. measured value, short floating
point with time tag
496 is the basic object address when the fault distance is given
in ohms and 497 when it is given in km.
Object addresses for the fault locator are calculated as de-
scribed in Section 11.13.4.2.
11-80
11.13.4.4. Commands via the LON IBB
Resetting the relays

REB500 makes a command available for resetting latched re-
lays. The same command resets the tripping LEDs on the front-
plate display. The definition of the command is as follows:
Double command DMCD type 46
where S_E = 0 or 3 and SCS = 2 (command qualifier)
Switching parameter sets

A signal made available by REB500 facilitates switching be-
tween parameter sets. Which parameter set has been selected
is stored in a non-volatile memory.
Set point command, Signed integer 32 bit DMCD Type 48
Possible values are 1, 2, 3 and 4.
The object address determines the bay unit (see Section
11.13.4.2).
11.13.4.5. Operation of HMI500 with an SMS530 via a LON IBB

From Version 6.xx onwards, HMI500 includes interfaces that en-
able it to be integrated in the SMS530 platform. HMI500 is then
able to communicate with a REB500/REB500sys protection sys-
tem via its LON interbay bus. This obviates the need for an addi-
tional serial link between the SMS530 PC and the REB500 cen-
tral unit.
The installation and operation of HMI500 in an SMS530 are de-
scribed in the documents SMS530 Installation and Engineering
Manual (1MRB520261-Uen) and SMS530 Operators Manual
(1MRB520263-Uen).
NOTE: It is not permitted to download the database via the LON

interface.
11-81
11.13.4.6. Displaying status information (events)
Diagnostic information
Internal system diagnostic signals are transferred as pulse-
counter type signals (32 Bit = 4 Byte).
Format: DMCD type 139 Pulse counter value with time tag
The significance of the BCR Bytes is as follows:
Byte number Significance
Byte 3 (HB) Always 0
Byte 2 Init = 1
Major error = 2
Minor error = 4
Not ready = 8
Ready = 16
Last wish = 32
Shutdown = 64
No status = 128
Byte 1 Class { 0..40 }, defines the SW subsystem
Byte 0 (LB) Error number { 0..255 }
Table 11.27 BRC Bytes
Class: 0 = BBP 16 = BFP

1 = ITT 17 = DRR
2 = BCF 18 = MPL
3 = DIA 19 = EFP
4 = TGR 20 = PDF
5 = EMI 21 = BOC
6 = LMI 22 = BPP
7 = DAC 23 = DIE
8 = TIM 24 = DRD
9 = DBS 25 = EVA
10 = SIG 26 = GPI
11 = EVR 27 = LAC
12 = RFS 28 = IAC
13 = SPR 29 = CMD
14 = MBA 30 = LPL
15 = OCP 31 = TRC
32 = BP
11-82
Status information
Events for the SCS are configured using either HMI500 or REB-
CON.
To export the communication data contained in the database,
select Tools / Export SCS data and LON IBB and then click on
the Export button.
Fig. 11.45 Exporting SCS data
The application creates a text file (export file) reb<LON NODE

ID>.rco, which contains all the information required.
The file has the following structure:
Lines 1 and 2 = Station, DB versions etc.
Line 3 = Column header
Line 4 onwards = Data
The columns are separated by a semicolon ;.
The LON station (unit) address is on line 2 in column 3 and the
LON object address for the events on line 4 onwards in column
12 of the text file (export file).
11-83
Lines 1 and 2
Module Type of Station HMI500 REBCON DB DB Date Export Date Export Tool Version
IBB Addr. Version Version Version
REB500 LON 257 4.10 4.10 V0.00AR 1998-11-10 98-12-17 AI 98-12-11 V2.10
Station Bay Name Device 4. 5. Signal Technical Signal Event Text Signal Text Signal Type Unit Object LON NV LON NV LON Event Function REB GI
Name Name Field Field Name Identifier Address Index Bit Bay-Bay Filter Nr.
Number Nr.
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 5 500BIO01 11210_Block output 11210_Block output Single 9239 FALSE 15 1 FALSE
2 busbar relays relays Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 0
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 5 500BIO01 11610_External reset 11610_External reset Single 9253 FALSE 15 1 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 5 500BIO01 11620_Inspection_1-On 11620_Inspection_1-On Single 9243 FALSE 15 1 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A3 EVENT BU 3 5 500BIO01 15210_Block OCDT 15210_Block OCDT Single 18189 FALSE 15 5 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A3 EVENT BU 3 5 500BIO01 17205_Block PDF 17205_Block PDF Single 18186 FALSE 15 7 TRUE
2 busbar Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 20 42315_BBP trip L1 42315_BBP trip L1 Single 8975 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar 500BIO01 Point
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack 1 20 42320_BBP trip L2 42320_BBP trip L2 Single 8976 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack 1 20 42325_BBP trip L3 42325_BBP trip L3 Single 8977 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
11-84
Number Nr.
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 19 43305_BFP trip t1 43305_BFP trip t1 Single 8715 FALSE 15 3 TRUE
sections Indication
4 BU Type 2
Test with BBP257 A1 EVENT BU 1 7 500AIP01 AIP(7) AIP(7) System 9728 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 7 CSP(7) CSP(7) System 16640 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar 500CPU02 Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 A2 EVENT BU 2 5 500BIO01 BIO(5) BIO(5) System 17408 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
2 busbar Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 CU EVENT CU Rack1 11 CIM(11) CIM(11) System 57344 FALSE 3 1 FALSE
2 busbar 500CPU02 Diagnosis
sections Monitoring
4 BU (PC)
Test with BBP257 CU MV_DIFF - BZ1.L1 BZ1.L1 Measurement A 8449 FALSE 15 2 TRUE
2 busbar I1 Floating
sections Point
4 BU
11-85
Number Nr.
sections Point
4 BU
sections Point
4 BU
sections Point
4 BU
sections Point
4 BU
sections Point
4 BU
sections Point
4 BU
sections Point
4 BU
Test with BBP257 CU CMD_RES - Command 8577 FALSE 15 1 FALSE
2 busbar ET Type 0
sections
4 BU
Table 11.28 ACCESS export file (example)
11-86
11.13.5. IEC 60870-5-103
11.13.5.1. Introduction
Busbar protection is not one of the types of protection defined in
IEC 60870-5-103. Nevertheless, the commands and signals of
the REB500 system are modeled as far as possible on functions
defined in the IEC recommendation. The functional scope of the
station protocol is therefore reduced. The backup protection
functions breaker failure, time-overcurrent and end fault that are
optionally available with REB500 are also supported.
According to the IEC recommendation, usage of the private
range is only permitted with regard to the compatibility of existing
devices. For this reason, additional REB500 functions that are
not defined in the recommendation were implemented according
to the future-oriented generic part of IEC 60870-5-103.
REB500 also optionally provides a private range.
Refer to IEC 60870-5-103 for an explanation of the various ab-
breviations.
11.13.5.2. General functions

The tables below define the functional scope of REB500 accord-
ing IEC 60870-5-103. The details are to be found in the recom-
mendation itself.
System functions in monitoring direction
INF Description GI TYPE COT

<0> End of general interrogation (polling) 8 10
<0> Time synchronization 6 8
<2> Reset frame control bit (FCB) 5 3
<3> Reset CU 5 4
<4> Start/restart 5 5
<5> Power on 5 6
Table 11.29 System functions in monitoring direction
NOTE: The information number 0 refers to the global function

type and is the same for all system functions.
The information numbers 2 to 5 are used with FUN in relation to
the main function of a protection system.
11-87
Status signals in monitoring direction
INF Description GI TYPE COT REB500 signal configuration

<18> Protection active x 1 1,9 41810_In service (CU output)
21805_In service (BU output)
<19> LED reset 1 11 31810_External reset (CU input)
11610_external reset (BU input)
<20> Blocks the super- x 1 9,11 31215_Block.IEC master_direction
visory equipment (CU input)
Table 11.30 Status signals in monitoring direction
Supervisory signals in monitoring direction
INF Description GI TYPE COT REB500 signal configuration

<47> General alarm x 1 1,9 41805_Alarm (CU output)
Table 11.31 Supervisory signals in monitoring direction
Disturbance signals in monitoring direction
INF Description GI TYPE COT FUN REB500 signal configuration

<68> General trip 2 1 254 42305_BBP trip (CU output)
21110_TRIP (BU output)
21305_TRIP (BU output)
<69> Trip L1 2 1 254 42315_BBP trip L1 (CU output)
23315_BFP TRIP L1 (BU output)
<85> Breaker failure 2 1 254 43305_BFP trip t1 (CU output)

43310_BFP trip t2 (CU output)
23305_BFP trip t1 (BU output)
23310_BFP trip t2 (BU output)
<90> Trip I> 2 1 254 45305_OCDT trip (CU output)
25105_OCDT TRIP (BU output)
25305_OCDT trip (BU output)
<92> Trip IN> 2 1 254 42310_BBP trip L0 (CU output)
Table 11.32 Disturbance signals in monitoring direction
11-88
Disturbance signals in monitoring direction (bay protection)

<64> Start L1 2 1 128 211720_DIST Start L1
<67> Start N 2 1 128 211750_DIST Start E
<68> General trip 2 1 128 211310_DIST Trip L1L2L3
<69> Trip L1 2 1 128 211105_DIST TRIP LS L1
<72> O/C trip (backup 2 1 128 211330_DIST Trip O/C
mode)
<74> Fault forwards 2 1 128 211850_DIST Meas Fward
(line)
<75> Fault backwards 2 1 128 211855_DIST Meas Bward
(busbars)
<76> PLC send 2 1 128 211880_DIST Com Send
<78> Time step 1 2 1 128 211815_DIST Delay 1
<82> Time step 5 2 1 128 211835_DIST Delay Def
<84> General start 2 1 128 211710_DIST Start L1L2L3
11-89

<68> General trip 2 1 160 212105_OCSTD TRIP
213105_OCINV TRIP
221105_I0INV TRIP
214105_DIROCDT TRIP
215305_DIROCINV TRIP
226105_OCINST TRIP
<84> General start 2 1 160 212705_OCSTD Start
213705_OCINV Start
221705_I0INV Start
214705_DIROCDT Start
215705_DIROCINV Start
<64> Start L1 2 1 160 214710_DIROCDT Start L1
215710_DIROCINV Start L1
<74> Fault forwards 2 1 160 214805_DIROCDT Meas Fward
(line)
215805_DIROCINV Meas Fward
<75> Fault backwards - 2 1 160 214810_DIROCDT Meas Bward
(busbars)
215810_DIROCINV Meas Bward
<68> General trip - 2 1 176 229105_DIFTRA TRIP CB
L1L2L3
<69> Trip L1 - 2 1 176 229110_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1
Table 11.33 Disturbance signals in monitoring direction (bay

protection)
Measurements in monitoring direction (bay protection)
INF Description GI TYP COT FUN REB500 signal configuration

<73> Fault distance - 4 1 128 Ohms
Table 11.34 Measurements in monitoring direction (bay protec-

tion)
11-90
Types of function
FUN Description
<128> Distance protection
<160> O/C protection
<176> Transformer differential protection
<254> Generic
Table 11.35 Types of function
Generic functions in monitoring direction
INF Description GI TYPE COT

<240> Read headings of all defined 10 42,43
groups
<241> Read values or attributes of 10 42,43
all entries of one group
<242> Not used
<243> Read the directory of a sin- 11 42,43
gle entry
<244> Read the value or attribute (x) 10 1,2,9,11,12,42,43
of a single entry
Table 11.36 Generic functions in monitoring direction
Generic functions in control direction
INF Description TYPE COT

<240> Read headings of all defined 21 42
groups
<241> Read values or attributes of 21 42
all entries of one group
<242> Not used
<243> Read the directory of a sin- 21 42
gle entry
<244> Read the value or attribute 21 42
of a single entry
Table 11.37 Generic functions in control direction
11-91
Commands in control direction

INF Description TYP COT FUN CAA
<19> LED reset 20 20 254 Central unit
<23> Characteristic 1 20 20 128 Bay unit
Table 11.38 Commands in control direction
11.13.5.3. Disturbance recorder

Disturbance data are uploaded and displayed in accordance with
the IEC recommendation with the following exceptions:
a) REB500 supports a maximum of 15 records per bay unit, but

only the first (oldest) eight in the queue can be displayed in
accordance with the recommendation.
b) Of the records that are displayed, only the oldest can be de-
leted or uploaded. This is determined by the REB500 princi-
ple.
c) The time stamp invalid bit (IV) in a disturbance record is al-
ways set, because the CIM module is unaware of the syn-
chronization status at the instant of the record.
Creating an export file
HMI500 provides facility for exporting the IEC 60870-5-103
communication data contained in the system database in the
form of a text file (export file). To do this, select Tools / Export
SCS data and IEC 60870-5-103 IBB and then click on the Ex-
port button.
The application creates a text file (export file) iec103exp.lst,
which contains all the information required.
The file has the following structure:
1. Disturbance recorder signal configuration
2. IEC 60870-5-103 events
The columns are separated by a semicolon ;. The following is
an example of an export file generated by HMI500:
11-92
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IEC 60870-5-103 Disturbance Recorder signals
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAA;ABB ref.;Feeder;Station number;Signal ID;Signal text
0;CU;-;Null;Null;Null
2;BU2;BU2;2;1;Trip
2;BU2;BU2;2;2;In service
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
IEC 60870-5-103 events and private Information Object Identifier settings
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
CAA;ABB ref.;Feeder;Signal text;IEC FUN;IEC INF
0;CU;BU2;41810_In service;254;18
2;BU1;BU1;23310_BFP trip t2;254;85
2;BU1;BU1;221105_I0INV Trip Si;160;67
2;BU1;BU1;211880_DIST Com Send.2;128;76
The significance of the columns is as follows:

Common Address ASDU: Sub-address for identifying a bay
unit at the application level
ABB ref.: - ABBs designation for the bay unit
Feeder: - Users designation for the respec-
tive bay
Station Number: - Disturbance recorder number
Signal ID: - Consecutive signal number
Signal Text: - Users signal description
IEC FUN: - Assigned IEC function type
IEC INF: - Assigned IEC information number
The above Signal Id and Signal Text assignment for a specific
bay unit can also be made via HMI500 providing a COMTRADE
file for the bay unit disturbance recorder is uploaded. The file
<DATEINAME>.cfg generated by the PC contains the same in-
formation as the list generated by the export tool.
The assignment can change when the disturbance recorder con-
figuration changes, for example, by deleting or adding signals.
The above list then has to be recreated and possibly corrected
by the control system.
11-93
11.13.5.3.1. ACC actual channel

The REB500 bay unit 500BU03 supports five voltage channels.
Since, however, the compatible range of the standard only lists
four voltage channels, the fifth channel is transferred to the pri-
vate domain.
Assignment of REB500 channels to IEC 60870-5-103 channel
numbers:
REB500 channel REB500 IEC 60870-5-103 channel desig-
designation application nation ACC (actual channel)
I1 I L1 1 = I L1
I2 I L2 2 = I L2
I3 I L3 3 = I L3
I4 I L0 or I L0P 4 = V L1
I4 I L1_2 65 = private
U1 U L1 5 = V L1E
U2 U L2 6 = V L3
U3 U L3 7 = V 0E
U4 U L0 or U S2 8 = U L1
U5 U S1 64 = private
Table 11.39 IEC 60870-5-103 analog channel assignment
11.13.5.4. Generic REB500 functions
Displaying status information (events)
Diagnostic information
Status and diagnostic information is generated by the various
REB500 application software modules and transferred spontane-
ously as events every time the status changes. A separate group
exists for diagnostic information with an entry for every subsys-
tem of the REB500 system software REBSYS.
11-94
Diagnostic event group:

ENTRY No. Group 64 (0x40)
0 (Heading) Diagnostic information
1 BBP (Busbar protection)
2 ITT (Intertripping)
3 BCF (Binary input and output configuration facility)
4 DIA (Diagnostic)
5 TGR (Test generator)
6 EMI (External man/machine interface)
7 LMI (Local man/machine interface)
8 DAC (Data access)
9 TIM (Time management)
10 DBS (Database system)
11 SIG (Signal processor)
12 EVR (Event recording)
13 RFS (Remote file system)
14 SPR (Signal pre-processing and recording)
15 MBA (Multi-function bus administrator)
16 OCP (Overcurrent protection)
17 BFP (Breaker failure protection)
18 DRR (Disturbance recorder)
19 MPL (Multi functional process bus library)
20 EFP (End-fault protection)
21 PDF (Pole discrepancy function)
22 BOC (Binary input/output control)
23 BPP (Binary pre-processing)
24 DIE (Diagnostic extensions)
25 DRD (Disturbance recorder dispatcher)
26 EVA (Event and alarm handling)
27 GPI (General purpose interface)
28 LAC (LON application converter)
29 IAC (IAC application converter)
30 CMD (Command processor)
31 LPL (LON protocol layer)
32 TRC (Traceability)
33 BP (Bay protection)
Table 11.40 Diagnostic event
The ASDU 10 Generic data is used with the following attributes:

CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION 1 Spontaneous
COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU 0 / 1..60 REB500 CU / REB500 BU
FUNCTION TYPE 254 GENeric function type
With the exception of the header (entry 0), the current values of
the entries are not available on request. The response to the cor-
responding generic read command is therefore COT 43 invalid
data response to generic read command.
11-95
The current value of the group header (entry 0) corresponds to

the number of subsystems in the REB500 system software.
COD Data type Length Number Value / Significance
<10> Description <1> OS8ASCII 21 1 Diagnostic information

<1> Current value <3> UI 1 1 Number of SW subsystems
Table 11.41 Directory entry for GIN 0x4000 (header)
All the other entries in this group consist of the following attrib-
utes that are needed to describe a diagnostic event generated
by one of the software subsystems.
The status of a diagnostic event is indicated by an ASCII string,
which can have one of the following values:
Initializing
Major error
Minor error
Not ready
Ready
Last wish
Shutdown
No status
The error code is assigned by the application when the status
changes and precisely describes the cause of the error.
<10> Description <1> OS8ASCII 3 1 BBP (example)

<1> Current value <23> DATASTRUCTURE 29 1 (Includes the following three
definitions)
<1> OS8ASCII 12 1 Status

<3> UI 1 1 Error code
<14> BINARY TIME 7 1 Time stamp (CP56Time2a)
Table 11.42 Directory entry for GIN 0x40 (xx)
11-96
The following table gives an example of the ASDU 10 Generic

Data that is transferred spontaneously for a diagnostic event.
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 Type Identification 10 DATA UNIT

1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Variable Structure Qualifier SQ=1, SQ_No.= 1 IDENTIFIER
Spontaneous <1> Cause Of Transmission COT
REB500 CU/BU No. Common Address of ASDU <0 .. 60>
GEN <254> Function type FUN INFORMATION
Read value of single entry <244> Information number INF OBJECT
<0> Return information identifier RII
{1, 0, 0} Number of generic data sets NGD {NO, COUNT, CONT}
40 H Generic identification number GIN
01 H Example
Current value <1> Kind of description KOD
DATA STRUCTURE <23> DATA TYPE
29 DATA SIZE GDD
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
<1> OS8ASCII DATA TYPE
12 DATA SIZE GDD 1
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
Major Error GID 1 (example)
<3> UI DATA TYPE
1 DATA SIZE GDD 2
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
Error code (UI1) GID 2
<14> BINARY TIME DATA TYPE
7 DATA SIZE GDD 3
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
Time stamp (CP56Time2a) GID 3
Table 11.43 TYPE IDENTIFICATION: Generic data
Status information
All the status information relating to binary input and output sig-
nals, internal signals (single-point indications - SPI) and switch-
gear positions (double-point indications - DPI) that are con-
figured in REB500 for transfer via IEC60870-5-103, but are not
covered by the compatible part of the IEC recommendation are
transferred as generic data. An entry is made in the table for
every event configured using HMI500 or REBCON for transfer
via IEC 60870-5-103. Since there can be more events per type
(SPI or DPI) than the maximum number of entries a group can
have (255), the system reserves additional groups as necessary.
By this means, up to 1020 events per event type can be defined
in the generic part.
11-97
Entry No. Group No. 66 (0x42) to Group No. 70 (0x46) to

Group No. 69 (0x45) Group No. 73 (0x49)
0 (Heading) Single-point indications Double-point indications
1 Indication #1 Indication #1

Table 11.44 Group for displaying status information

(SPI and DPI)
The ASDU 10 Generic data is used with the following attrib-

utes:
COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU 0 / 1..60 REB500 CU / REB500 BU
With the exception of the header (entry 0), the current values of
the entries are not available on request. The response to the cor-
responding generic read command is therefore COT 43 invalid
data response to generic read command.
Entries for single-point indications
<10> Description <1> OS8ASCII 24 1 "Single-point indications

<1> Current value <3> UI 1 1 Number of SPI defined in this group
<10> Description <1> os8ascii 20 1 Event text defined by user

<1> Current value <23> data struc- 14 1 (Includes the following two definitions)
ture
<9> Double Point 1 1 OFF (1) / ON (2)
Information
<14> binary time 7 1 Time stamp (CP56Time2a)
11-98

Data that is transferred spontaneously for a single-point indica-
tion.
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Variable Structure SQ=1, SQ_No.= 1 IDENTIFIER
Qualifier
REB500 CU/BU No. Common Address of ASDU <0 .. 60>
42 H Generic identification number Group <46H .. 49H>
01 H Entry <1 .. 255>
14 DATA SIZE GDD
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
<9> DOUBLE-POINT INFORMATION DATA TYPE
1 DATA SIZE GDD 1
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
0 0 0 0 0 0 <0 .. 3> GID 1
7 DATA SIZE GDD 2
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
Entries for double-point indications
<10> Description <1> OS8ASCII 24 1 "Double-point Indications

<1>Current value <3> UI 1 1 Number of DPI defined in this
group.
<10> Description <1> os8ascii 20 1 Event text defined by user

<1> Current value <23> data structure 14 1 (Includes the following two defini-
tions)
<9> Double Point IN- 1 1 TRANSIENT (0) /
FORMATION WITH OFF (1) / ON (2) /
TRANSIENT AND ER- ERROR (3)
ROR
11-99

Data that is transferred spontaneously for a double-point indica-
tion.

46 H Generic identification number Group <46H .. 49H>
01 H Entry <1 .. 255>
14 DATA SIZE GDD
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
<11> DOUBLE POINT INFORMATION WITH TRANSIENT DATA TYPE
AND ERROR
1 DATA SIZE GDD 1
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
0 0 0 0 0 0 <0 .. 3> GID 1
7 DATA SIZE GDD 2
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
Display of busbar differential currents

The differential currents are displayed for each corresponding
busbar zone (1..32) (see transfer of differential currents).
The ASDU 10 Generic data is used with the following attributes:
COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU 0 REB500 CU
The group number 75 (0x4B) is used to display busbar differen-
tial currents and is therefore only assigned to the central unit
(CAA = 0).
<10> Description <1> OS8ASCII 21 1 "Differential currents

<1> Current value <3> UI 1 1 Number of valid entries
Table 11.51 Directory entry for GIN 0x4B00 (header)
11-100
The number of valid entries corresponds to the number of bus-

bar zones and thus limited to the range [132].
Each of the entries 132 in the group relates to a given busbar
zone.
<10> Description <1> os8ascii 3 1 BBI example

<1> Current value <23> data structure 2 1 (Includes the following two defini-
tions)
<12> Measured vari- 2 3,4 Field with 3 / 4 measurements
able with quality de- CP16 {OV,ER,RES,MVAL}
scriptor
<9> Unit <1> os8ascii 1 1 A
<6> Factor <6> I 4 1 32 Bit integer
Table 11.52 Directory entry for GIN 0x4B (xx)
The description has a maximum length of 16 characters.

The current value is a field with three (L1, L2, L3) or four (L1, L2,
L3, L0) measurements and the associated time stamp. The ef-
fective number of measurements is determined by how the
REB500 is configured.
OV Overflow This Bit is set to <1> whenever an overflow
occurs or the measurement is not assigned. It
is normally therefore set to <0>.
ER Error flag This Bit indicates whether a measurement is
valid or not (measurement valid <0>, meas-
urement invalid <1>).
RES Reserved Spare for future use.
MVAL Contains the actual measurement in fixed
decimal point format.
The factor is a 32 Bit integer for scaling to the original value.
11-101

Data that is transferred spontaneously for displaying the differ-
ential currents of a given bus zone.
REB500 CU Common Address of ASDU <0>
GEN <254> Function Type FUN INFORMATION
4B H Generic identification number Group
01 H Entry <1 .. 32>
21 DATA SIZE GDD
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
<12> MEASUREMENT WITH QUALITY DESCRIPTOR DATA TYPE
2 DATA SIZE GDD 1
3,0 NUMBER, CONT 3 or 4 (including measurement L0)
OV ER RES MVAL (4..8) GID 1a
MVAL (9..16)
OV ER RES MVAL (4..8) GID 1b
MVAL (9..16)
OV ER RES MVAL (4..8) GID 1c
MVAL (9..16)
<14> BINARY TIME DATATYPE
7 DATASIZE GDD 2
1,0 NUMBER, CONT
11.13.5.5. Special information and instructions for configuring the

control system
Private range
Provision is made in the event configuration (see Section
11.13.3.2.) for the user to enter his own private IEC 60870-5-103
definition for each REB500 signal.
The input fields for REB500 signals covered by the public part of
the standard (see Section 11.13.5.2.) have a bright yellow back-
ground their default setting 0 for both IEC function type and in-
formation number. All other signals receive the presetting 0 for
the IEC function type and the information number. A signal de-
fined for protocol 60870-5-103 that is not in the public range and
has 0 set for function type and information number is transmit-
ted via the generic part of the protocol.
11-102
A private IEC 60870-5-103 definition can be entered for every

REB500 signal in this dialog. The Set default button is enabled
for a signal in the public range of the protocol so that the ABB
default setting can be restored at any time.
The limitations specified in the standard must be observed when
assigning information numbers. The latter must be within the fol-
lowing ranges:
16-52; 73; 128-130; 64-72; 74-93
Fig. 11.46 Private IEC 60870-5-103 definition
Common Address of ASDU

The fourth octet in the DATA UNIT IDENTIFICATION FIELD of
an ASDU determines the COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU. It
normally has to be the same as the station address on the link
layer. Exceptions are permitted where additional COMMON
ASDU ADDRESSES are needed because of multiple instances
of functions.
In the case of REB500, this exception allowed in the IEC rec-
ommendation is used in order to be able to address the central
unit and the bay units via a single physical connection.
Common Address of ASDU CAA
Basic setting:
0 Central unit
160 Bay unit
255 Global address
Upon choosing the IEC 60870-5-103 interface in the SCS con-
figuration dialog, a button CAA setting appears. This opens
another dialog for changing the CAA configuration for central
and bay units should it be necessary.
11-103
Fig. 11.47 CAA Setting
Disturbance recorder, binary signal transfer

Binary signals transmitted in disturbance records only have
numbers and no designation. The assignment of numbers to
signal names is given in the COMTRADE file <filename>.CFG,
which can be uploaded, for example, from a bay unit using
HMI500.
Signal configuration instructions

Should the same logical signal be configured on two different
BIO modules in a bay unit, only one of them should be relayed to
the IEC 60870-5-103 bus. A configuration that is duplicated pro-
duces two indistinguishable events, which can cause some con-
fusion. The response is reflected by HMI500, which also gener-
ates two events.
Cause of transmission
With the exception of 42 (generic writing command), all the pos-
sible causes of transmission are supported in the command di-
rection.
In the supervisory direction, they are all supported with the ex-
ception of 7 (test mode), 12 (local HMI) and 44 (return confir-
mation of a generic write command).
11-104
Type identification
The type identification defines the type of ASDU that has been
transferred.
TYPE Description
<1> time-tagged message
<2> time-tagged message with relative time
<5> Identification
<6> Time synchronization
<8> General interrogation termination
<10> Generic data
<11> Generic identification
<23> List of recorded disturbances
<26> Ready for transmission of disturbance data
<27> Ready for transmission of a channel
<28> Ready for transmission of tags
<29> Transmission of tags
<30> Transmission of disturbance values
<31> End of Transmission
Table 11.54 Information in the supervisory direction
TYPE Description
<6> Time synchronization
<7> General interrogation (polling)
<10> Generic data
<20> General command
<21> Generic command
<24> Order for disturbance data transmission
<25> Acknowledgement for disturbance data
transmission
Table 11.55 Information in the command direction
Timeouts
1. Protocol time-out <50 ms as defined in the IEC recommen-
dation applies for the protocol.
2. When a command to upload the disturbance recorder data is
issued, the data have to be transferred from the bay unit to
the central unit first before they are transferred via the IEC
bus. The timeout from the instant the upload command is is-
11-105
sued to the receipt of the data varies in relation to the length

of the disturbance record. The following applies:
STP timeout <2.5 minutes per 1 second of disturbance re-
cord data (4I+4U, 2400 Hz).
3. Once the transfer of disturbance recorder data has started,
the timeout changes to:
Transfer timeout <1 Minute.
11.13.6. IEC 61850-8-1
11.13.6.1. Introduction
The REB500 can be integrated into a station network confirming
to the IEC 61850-8-1. The IEC 61850-8-1 configuration is largely
automatic. The event signals need to be configured in order that
they can be transmitted over the IEC 61850 protocol. The alloca-
tion of signals to the IEC 61850 is done automatically, and is ex-
ported as SCD file.
In message transmission, all the REB500 signals are provided
via the IEC 61850. In the ideal case these are allocated to the
predefined logic nodes, however, if this is not the case they can
be transmitted as generic data (PTRC).
In the command direction, only the resetting of LEDs, trip relays,
disturbance recorders and the switching of parameter sets is
planned.
REB500 supports the transfer of disturbance records confirming
to IEC 61850 in the compressed COMTRADE format.
11.13.6.2. Modeling in logical devices

REB500/REB500sys utilizes a physical IEC 61850 connector for
the complete REB500 system.
All logical nodes are integrated into a logical device. All REB500
bay units, as well as the Central Unit are defined as one logical
device.
The designation of the logical device are based on the associ-
ated ABB reference for the bay resp. central unit (see Sec-
tion 5.3.6)
11-106
11.13.6.3. Allocation of the REB500 signals to the logical nodes

The REB500 signals are associated with the logical nodes of the
IEC 61850 model. The allocation of the signals to the logical
nodes is shown in the following table.
REB500 Basic 61850 ABB designations for 61850 data
signal names logical nodes 61850 logical nodes attributes
11530_Isolator/Breaker position CSWI Switch pos.stVal
21105_EXTERNAL TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr6
21110_TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr1
21115_REMOTE TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr7
21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr13
23105_BFP TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr8
23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr9
23305_BFP trip t1 RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.general
23310_BFP trip t2 RBRF BFP_BU OpEx.general
23315_BFP TRIP L1 RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.PhsA
23320_BFP TRIP L2 RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.PhsB
23325_BFP TRIP L3 RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.PhsC
24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr10
25105_OCDT TRIP PTOC OCP Op
27105_PDF TRIP PTRC Trip_BU Tr11
41305_Trip BB zone PDIF BusZone Op
41505_Isolator alarm CALH Alarm GrpAlm1
41805_Alarm LLN0 LLN0_CU Health
41815_Diff. current alarm CALH Alarm GrpAlm2
41390_Bay Unit In Service LPHD PhysicalDevice_BU PhyHealth
42305_BBP trip PTRC Trip_CU Tr1
42310_BBP trip L0 PTRC Trip_CU Tr2
43305_BFP trip t1 RBRF BFP_CU OpIn.general
43310_BFP trip t2 RBRF BFP_CU OpEx.general
44305_EFP trip PTRC Trip_CU Tr6
45305_OCDT trip PTRC Trip_CU Tr8
47305_PDF trip PTRC Trip_CU Tr7
211105_DIST TRIP CB L1 PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.phsA
211110_DIST TRIP CB L2 PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.phsB
211115_DIST TRIP CB L3 PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.phsC
211310_DIST Trip L1L2L3 PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.general
211330_DIST Trip O/C PTOC Distance_OC_DT Op.general
211335_DIST Trip SOTF PSCH Distance_Scheme Op2.general
211345_DIST Trip Stub PTOC Distance_OC_DT Op1.general
11-107

211405_DIST Blocked RPSB PSB BlkZn.stVal
211705_DIST Start L1+L2+L3 PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.general
211720_DIST Start L1 PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.phsA
211730_DIST Start L2 PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.phsB
211740_DIST Start L3 PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.phsC
211750_DIST Start E PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.neut
211760_DIST Start I0 PSCH Distance_Scheme Str4.general
211770_DIST Start O/C PSCH Distance_Scheme Str2.general
211785_DIST Start OC PTOC Distance_OC_DT Str.general
211790_DIST Start UZ PSCH Distance_Scheme Str1.general
211810_DIST Delay >= 2 PSCH Distance_Scheme Str3.general
211815_DIST Delay 1 PDIS Distance_Z1 Str.general
211835_DIST Delay Def PDIS Distance_Z5 Str.general
211840_DIST Meas Main PSCH Distance_Scheme Ind2.stVal
211845_DIST Meas Oreach PSCH Distance_Scheme Ind3.stVal
211850_DIST Meas Fward RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral
211860_DIST Weak Infeed PSCH Distance_Scheme WeiOp.general
211865_DIST Power Swing RPSB PSB Str.general
211870_DIST VT Sup TVTR Distance_TVTR FuFail.stVal
211875_DIST VT Sup Delay TVTR Distance_TVTR Ind1.stVal
211880_DIST Com Send PSCH Distance_Scheme ProTx.stVal
211885_DIST Com Boost PSCH Distance_Scheme Ind1.stVal
211890_DIST Freq Dev PDIS Distance_Z1 Alm1.stVal
PTUC/ Undercurrent_DT/
212105_OCDT TRIP Op.general
PTOC Overcurrent_DT
212705_OCDT Start Str.general
PTOF Overcurrent_DT
213105_OCINV TRIP PTOC OC_Inv Op.general
213705_OCINV Start PTOC OC_Inv Str.general
214105_DIROCDT TRIP PTOC Dir_OC_DT Op.general
214705_DIROCDT Start PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.general
214710_DIROCDT Start L1 PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.phsA
214715_DIROCDT Start L2 PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.phsB
214720_DIROCDT Start L3 PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.phsC
214805_DIROCDT MeasFwd RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral
215305_DIROCINV TRIP PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Op.general
215705_DIROCINV Start PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.general
215710_DIROCINV Start L1 PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.phsA
215715_DIROCINV Start L2 PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.phsB
215720_DIROCINV Start L3 PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.phsC
11-108

215805_DIROCINV MeasFwd RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral
PTUV/ Undervoltage_DT/
216105_OVDT TRIP Op.general
PTOV Overvoltage_DT
216705_OVDT Start Str.general
PTOV Overvoltage_DT
217105_SYNC Permit to Close RSYN Synchrocheck Rel.stVal
217405_SYNC Blocked RSYN Synchrocheck Ind1.stVal
217410_SYNC Trig.Blocked RSYN Synchrocheck Ind2.stVal
217705_SYNC Start RSYN Synchrocheck SynPrg.stval
217805_SYNC Override RSYN Synchrocheck Ind3.stVal
217810_SYNC Ampl. Diff. OK RSYN Synchrocheck VInd.stVal
217815_SYNC Phase Diff. OK RSYN Synchrocheck AngInd.stVal
217820_SYNC Freq. Diff. OK RSYN Synchrocheck HzInd.stVal
218605_AR Close CB RREC Autoreclosure Op.general
218310_AR Trip 3-Pol RREC Autoreclosure Ind1.stVal
218315_AR Def. Trip RREC Autoreclosure Ind2.stval
218410_AR Blocked RREC Autoreclosure BlkRec.stVal
218415_AR Block to Flwr. RREC Autoreclosure Ind10.stVal
218810_AR In Progress RREC Autoreclosure AutoRecSt.stVal
218815_AR First AR 1P RREC Autoreclosure Ind4.stVal
218820_AR First AR 3P RREC Autoreclosure Ind3.stVal
218825_AR Second AR RREC Autoreclosure Ind5.stVal
218830_AR Third AR RREC Autoreclosure Ind6.stVal
218835_AR Fourth AR RREC Autoreclosure Ind7.stVal
218840_AR Delay Flwr. RREC Autoreclosure Ind9.stVal
218845_AR Z Extension RREC Autoreclosure Ind8.stVal
219105_DIREFISOL TRIP PTOC Dir_EF_DT_Sensitive Op.general
219705_DIREFISOL Start PTOC Dir_EF_DT_Sensitive Str.general
220105_DIREFGND TRIP PTOC Dir_EF_DT Op.general
220405_DIREFGND Receive Inh. PSCH Dir_EF_Scheme Ind1.stVal
220705_DIREFGND Start PTOC Dir_EF_DT Str.general
220805_DIREFGND Meas. Forward RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral
220815_DIREFGND Send PSCH Dir_EF_Scheme ProTx.stVal
221105_I0INV TRIP PTOC EF_Inv Op.general
221705_I0INV Start PTOC EF_Inv Str.general
224605_CHKI3PH Picked Up PTOC Check_I Op.general
225605_CHKU3PH Picked Up PTOV Check_U Op.general
PTUC/ Undercurrent_Inst/
226105_OCINST TRIP Op.general
PTOC Overcurrent_Inst
226705_OCINST Start Str.general
PTUV/ Undervoltage_Inst/
227105_OVINST TRIP Op.general
PTOV Overvoltage_Inst
227705_OVINST Start Str.general
11-109

228105_TH TRIP PTTR Overtemp Op.general
228705_TH Start PTTR Overtemp Str.general
229105_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1L2L3 PDIF Diff-Transf Op.general
229110_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1 PDIF Diff-Transf Op1.phsA
229115_DIFTRA TRIP CB L2 PDIF Diff-Transf Op1.phsB
229120_DIFTRA TRIP CB L3 PDIF Diff-Transf Op1.phsC
229805_DIFTRA Inrush PDIF Diff-Transf Str.general
229810_DIFTRA Stabilizing PDIF Diff-Transf Ind1.stVal
230105_U/fDT TRIP PVPH Overflux_DT Op.general
230705_U/fDT Start PVPH Overflux_DT Str.general
231105_U/fINV TRIP PVPH Overflux_Inv Op.general
231705_U/fINV Start PVPH Overflux_Inv Str.general
233105_df/dt TRIP PFRC DF_DT Oper.general
233405_df/dt Blocked (<U) PFRC DF_DT Blk.stVal
PTUF/ Under_Freq/
234105_Freq TRIP Op.general
PTOF Over_Freq
PTUF/ Under_Freq/
234705_Freq Start Str.general
PTOF Over_Freq
PTUF/ Under_Freq/
234405_Freq Blocked (<U) Blk.stVal
PTOF Over_Freq
PDUP/ Underpower/
235105_P TRIP Op.general
PDOP Overpower
PDUP/ Underpower/
235705_P Start Str.general
PDOP Overpower
Table 11.56 Relationship between REB500 and IEC 61850

signals
11-110
Basic 61850 ABB designations for 61850 data REB500

logical nodes 61850 logical nodes attributes signal names
CALH Alarm GrpAlm1 41505_Isolator alarm
CALH Alarm GrpAlm2 41815_Diff. current alarm
CSWI Switch pos.stVal 11530_Isolator/Breaker position
LLN0 LLN0_CU Health 41805_Alarm
LPHD PhysicalDevice_BU PhyHealth 41390_Bay Unit In Service
PDIF BusZone Op 41305_Trip BB zone
PDIF Diff-Transf Ind1.stVal 229810_DIFTRA Stabilizing
PDIF Diff-Transf Op.general 229105_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1L2L3
PDIF Diff-Transf Op1.phsA 229110_DIFTRA TRIP CB L1
PDIF Diff-Transf Op1.phsB 229115_DIFTRA TRIP CB L2
PDIF Diff-Transf Op1.phsC 229120_DIFTRA TRIP CB L3
PDIF Diff-Transf Str.general 229805_DIFTRA Inrush
PDIS Distance_Z1 Alm1.stVal 211890_DIST Freq Dev
PDIS Distance_Z1 Str.general 211815_DIST Delay 1
PDIS Distance_Z5 Str.general 211835_DIST Delay Def
PDUP/ Underpower/
Op.general 235105_P TRIP
PDOP Overpower
PDUP/ Underpower/
Str.general 235705_P Start
PDOP Overpower
PFRC DF_DT Blk.stVal 233405_df/dt Blocked (<U)
PFRC DF_DT Oper.general 233105_df/dt TRIP
PSCH Dir_EF_Scheme Ind1.stVal 220405_DIREFGND Receive Inh.
PSCH Dir_EF_Scheme ProTx.stVal 220815_DIREFGND Send
PSCH Distance_Scheme Ind1.stVal 211885_DIST Com Boost
PSCH Distance_Scheme Ind2.stVal 211840_DIST Meas Main
PSCH Distance_Scheme Ind3.stVal 211845_DIST Meas Oreach
PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.general 211310_DIST Trip L1L2L3
PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.phsA 211105_DIST TRIP CB L1
PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.phsB 211110_DIST TRIP CB L2
PSCH Distance_Scheme Op.phsC 211115_DIST TRIP CB L3
PSCH Distance_Scheme Op2.general 211335_DIST Trip SOTF
PSCH Distance_Scheme ProTx.stVal 211880_DIST Com Send
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.general 211705_DIST Start L1+L2+L3
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.neut 211750_DIST Start E
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.phsA 211720_DIST Start L1
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.phsB 211730_DIST Start L2
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str.phsC 211740_DIST Start L3
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str1.general 211790_DIST Start UZ
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str2.general 211770_DIST Start O/C
PSCH Distance_Scheme Str3.general 211810_DIST Delay >= 2
11-111

PSCH Distance_Scheme Str4.general 211760_DIST Start I0
PSCH Distance_Scheme WeiOp.general 211860_DIST Weak Infeed
PTOC Check_I Op.general 224605_CHKI3PH Picked Up
PTOC Dir_EF_DT Op.general 220105_DIREFGND TRIP
PTOC Dir_EF_DT Str.general 220705_DIREFGND Start
PTOC Dir_EF_DT_Sensitive Op.general 219105_DIREFISOL TRIP
PTOC Dir_EF_DT_Sensitive Str.general 219705_DIREFISOL Start
PTOC Dir_OC_DT Op.general 214105_DIROCDT TRIP
PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.general 214705_DIROCDT Start
PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.phsA 214710_DIROCDT Start L1
PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.phsB 214715_DIROCDT Start L2
PTOC Dir_OC_DT Str.phsC 214720_DIROCDT Start L3
PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Op.general 215305_DIROCINV TRIP
PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.general 215705_DIROCINV Start
PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.phsA 215710_DIROCINV Start L1
PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.phsB 215715_DIROCINV Start L2
PTOC Dir_OC_Inv Str.phsC 215720_DIROCINV Start L3
PTOC Distance_OC_DT Op.general 211330_DIST Trip O/C
PTOC Distance_OC_DT Op1.general 211345_DIST Trip Stub
PTOC Distance_OC_DT Str.general 211785_DIST Start OC
PTOC EF_Inv Op.general 221105_I0INV TRIP
PTOC EF_Inv Str.general 221705_I0INV Start
PTOC OC_Inv Op.general 213105_OCINV TRIP
PTOC OC_Inv Str.general 213705_OCINV Start
PTOC OCP Op 25105_OCDT TRIP
PTOV Check_U Op.general 225605_CHKU3PH Picked Up
PTRC Trip_BU Tr1 21110_TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr10 24105_EFP REMOTE TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr11 27105_PDF TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr13 21120_EXT_TEST_TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr6 21105_EXTERNAL TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr7 21115_REMOTE TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr8 23105_BFP TRIP
PTRC Trip_BU Tr9 23110_BFP REMOTE TRIP
PTRC Trip_CU Tr1 42305_BBP trip
PTRC Trip_CU Tr2 42310_BBP trip L0
PTRC Trip_CU Tr6 44305_EFP trip
PTRC Trip_CU Tr7 47305_PDF trip
PTRC Trip_CU Tr8 45305_OCDT trip
11-112

PTTR Overtemp Op.general 228105_TH TRIP
PTTR Overtemp Str.general 228705_TH Start
Op.general 212105_OCDT TRIP
PTOC Overcurrent_DT
Op.general 226105_OCINST TRIP
Str.general 226705_OCINST Start
Str.general 212705_OCDT Start
PTOF Overcurrent_DT
PTUF/ Under_Freq/
Blk.stVal 234405_Freq Blocked (<U)
PTOF Over_Freq
PTUF/ Under_Freq/
Op.general 234105_Freq TRIP
PTOF Over_Freq
PTUF/ Under_Freq/
Str.general 234705_Freq Start
PTOF Over_Freq
Op.general 216105_OVDT TRIP
PTOV Overvoltage_DT
Str.general 216705_OVDT Start
PTOV Overvoltage_DT
Op.general 227105_OVINST TRIP
Str.general 227705_OVINST Start
PVPH Overflux_DT Op.general 230105_U/fDT TRIP
PVPH Overflux_DT Str.general 230705_U/fDT Start
PVPH Overflux_Inv Op.general 231105_U/fINV TRIP
PVPH Overflux_Inv Str.general 231705_U/fINV Start
RBRF BFP_BU OpEx.general 23310_BFP trip t2
RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.general 23305_BFP trip t1
RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.PhsA 23315_BFP TRIP L1
RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.PhsB 23320_BFP TRIP L2
RBRF BFP_BU OpIn.PhsC 23325_BFP TRIP L3
RBRF BFP_CU OpEx.general 43310_BFP trip t2
RBRF BFP_CU OpIn.general 43305_BFP trip t1
RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral 211850_DIST Meas Fward
RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral 214805_DIROCDT MeasFwd
RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral 215805_DIROCINV MeasFwd
RDIR Direction Dir.dirGeneral 220805_DIREFGND Meas. Forward
RPSB PSB BlkZn.stVal 211405_DIST Blocked
RPSB PSB Str.general 211865_DIST Power Swing
RREC Autoreclosure AutoRecSt.stVal 218810_AR In Progress
RREC Autoreclosure BlkRec.stVal 218410_AR Blocked
RREC Autoreclosure Ind1.stVal 218310_AR Trip 3-Pol
RREC Autoreclosure Ind10.stVal 218415_AR Block to Flwr.
RREC Autoreclosure Ind2.stval 218315_AR Def. Trip
RREC Autoreclosure Ind3.stVal 218820_AR First AR 3P
RREC Autoreclosure Ind4.stVal 218815_AR First AR 1P
11-113

RREC Autoreclosure Ind5.stVal 218825_AR Second AR
RREC Autoreclosure Ind6.stVal 218830_AR Third AR
RREC Autoreclosure Ind7.stVal 218835_AR Fourth AR
RREC Autoreclosure Ind8.stVal 218845_AR Z Extension
RREC Autoreclosure Ind9.stVal 218840_AR Delay Flwr.
RREC Autoreclosure Op.general 218605_AR Close CB
RSYN Synchrocheck AngInd.stVal 217815_SYNC Phase Diff. OK
RSYN Synchrocheck HzInd.stVal 217820_SYNC Freq. Diff. OK
RSYN Synchrocheck Ind1.stVal 217405_SYNC Blocked
RSYN Synchrocheck Ind2.stVal 217410_SYNC Trig.Blocked
RSYN Synchrocheck Ind3.stVal 217805_SYNC Override
RSYN Synchrocheck Rel.stVal 217105_SYNC Permit to Close
RSYN Synchrocheck SynPrg.stval 217705_SYNC Start
RSYN Synchrocheck VInd.stVal 217810_SYNC Ampl. Diff. OK
TVTR Distance_TVTR FuFail.stVal 211870_DIST VT Sup
TVTR Distance_TVTR Ind1.stVal 211875_DIST VT Sup Delay
Table 11.57 Relationship between IEC 61850 and REB500

signals
NOTE: In order that a signal is correctly transmitted via IEC

61850 it must be configured and allocated as an event to the
IEC 61850 interface (see Section 5.3.7.2, Fig. 5.14).
Signals, which are not in the above table, can be configured as
events for IEC 61850 and transmitted as generic data. A
maximum of 40 inputs and 80 outputs can be transmitted as
generic data pro logical device.
By pressing the button "Generate I/O Signals" (see Table 11.24)

the output signals, which are relevant for 61850 are configured
with an appropriate event configuration. This configuration is
made for the station protection functions (busbar protection,
breaker failure protection, pole discrepancy, overcurrent and end
fault protection), provided that the signals are not already config-
ured.
11-114
11.13.6.4. Differential current

The differential currents are available for each bus zone in the
logical node PDIF. They are assigned in the central units logical.
The parameters to be transmitted have to be configured in the
menu SCS differential current parameter (see Sec-
tion 11.13.3.3).
REB500 data ABB designations Basic IEC 61850 IEC 61850

for IEC 61850 logi- logical node data attributes
cal node
DifAClc.phsA.mag.f
Differential- DifAClc.phsB.mag.f
BusZone PDIF
currents DifAClc.phsC.mag.f
DifAClc.neut.mag.f
11.13.6.5. Disturbance recorder

The logical node RDRE of each bay unit provides a signal indi-
cating the status of the disturbance recorder and the commands
for deleting the memory.
REB500 Data ABB designations Basic IEC 61850 IEC 61850

for IEC 61850 logi- logical node data attributes
cal nodes
Fault number Disturbance Rec RDRE FltNum
Memory used Disturbance Rec RDRE MemUsed
Command delete memory Disturbance Rec RDRE MemCls
Command Clear memory and

reset fault number Disturbance Rec RDRE MemRs
Disturbance record created Disturbance Rec RDRE RCDMade
FltNum This number is incremented by one for every

disturbance recorder created. When the de-
vice is restarted it is reset to zero.
MemUsed This attribute displays the utilized value of the
memory as a percentage.
RCDMade The attribute changes from False to True
when a new disturbance record is generated.
11-115
The disturbance records are read out of the bay units with the
MMS file transfer protocol. The disturbances are available in
zipped COMTRADE format. The file name has the following
structure:
LD/ld/COMTRADE/DRyyyymmddhhmmssfff.ZIP
ld Identification of the logical device
yyyy Year of the recording (Trigger time)
mm Month of the recording (Trigger time)
dd Day of the recording (Trigger time)
hh Hour of the recording (Trigger time)
mm Minute of the recording (Trigger time)
ss Second of the recording (Trigger time)
fff Millisecond of the recording (Trigger time)
NOTE: The disturbance recorder must be set to Overwrite

oldest records (FIFO) to prevent memory overflow.
NOTE: A disturbance record can be read with IEC 61850 pro-

tocol a few seconds after a recording is stored in a bay unit.
NOTE: A maximum of 15 records can be stored in each bay

unit.
Only the oldest records can be deleted from the listed re-
cordings.
11-116
11.13.6.6. Fault locator RFLO

The distance measured by the distance protection can be de-
termined via the logical node RFLO (for details about determina-
tion of the fault distance see Section 12.2.6.1).
REB500 IEC 61850 IEC 61850 IEC 61850

data Logical node Logical node Data attributes
ABB type Basic type
Fault Fault locator RFLO FltZ
distance FltDiskm
11.13.6.7. Creation of the *.SCD file

All the IEC relevant data can be exported in SCL format for fur-
ther processing with IEC conformant system configuration tools.
See HMI Section 4.5.6.3.
11-117
11.14. Remote HMI (option)

In addition to the optical interface on the front of the local HMI
provision is made for connecting REB500 to a PC via a serial in-
terface at the rear. This is recommended for communication with
the protection over a long distance via an optical fiber link or
modem.
11.14.1. General information

Both modem and optical fiber cables are connected to the con-
nector marked SERIAL 1 on the MBA in slot 5. The interface pa-
rameters are permanently set to 9600 Baud, 8 Bit, no parity and
1 stop bit.
For security reasons, it is only possible for either the interface on
the front of the local HMI or the remote connection via MBA at
the rear of the unit to be used for the communication with
HMI500 at any one time. When REB500 is initialized after start-
ing the system, both interfaces are standing by. As soon as
HMI500 is started on the PC, which is connected to one of the
interfaces, the other interface becomes inactive and remains so
until the first connection is closed (HMI500 closed on the PC).
Both interfaces are then once again in the stand-by state, waiting
for HMI500 to establish connection.
11.14.2. Optical fiber connection

Two electro-to-optical converters as well as two optical fiber ca-
bles are needed for the connection between REB500 and a PC
running HMI500. Depending on the distance involved, either op-
tical cable with a synthetic or with a glass core is used.
Complete adapter kits (2 converters complete with optical fiber
cable) can be ordered as accessories under the following num-
bers:
Type Ordering Number

YX216a-1 (4 m) HESG448522 R1
YX216a-1 (10 m) HESG448522 R2
YX216a-1 (30 m) HESG448522 R3
For distances greater than 30 m, we recommend optical fiber

cables with glass cores 62,5/125 m and commercially available
converters e.g. Hirschmann OZDV 2451 G (Hirschmann order
number 943 299-021).
11-118
The converter at the REB500 should be configured as DCE, and

the converter at the PC as DTE.
In addition an adaptor cable with an adaptor connector for RJ45
to DB9
Type Order number

Adaptor cable RJ45 1MRB380081R0001
and an adaptor for DB9 to DB25 is necessary.
Type Order number

Adaptor 9F/25M HESG448087P0001
11.14.3. Modem connection

A modem is required at both ends to enable a PC running
HMI500 to communicate with REB500 via a telephone line. ABB
does not supply these as accessories and therefore commer-
cially available modems have to be obtained. We recommend
that you study the modem suppliers manual carefully to ensure
that commissioning and subsequent operation go smoothly.
A modem with automatic call-back is recommended at the
REB500 end, because the caller has to identify him or herself by
password. Providing the password is verified, the connection is
interrupted and the REB500 modem calls back on the number
that belongs to the password. This procedure ensures that only
authorized people can communicate with the protection. The
passwords and their associated numbers are entered in advance
when configuring the modem. Refer to the modem suppliers
manual for the corresponding AT instructions. (Generally, soft-
ware is supplied with the modem that enables these settings to
be accomplished without difficulty.)
Finally, the changes have to be saved using the corresponding
AT instruction in the modem manual.
11-119
11.14.3.1. Modem connection

The modem is connected to the connector marked SERIAL 1 on
the MBA in slot 5.
WARNING: To exclude EMC interference, the modem may

only be connected via a commercially available electrically insu-
lated RS232 adapter.
11.14.3.2. Modem configuration

A terminal simulation program has to be installed on the PC to
configure the modem (e.g. the standard Terminal program in-
cluded with all versions of Microsoft Windows). This program
must be configured to use the COM port to which the modem is
connected (e.g. COM 1).
Both modems:
Firstly, check the correct functioning of the modems by enter-
ing the command AT<Enter>, to which the modem should
respond with OK (or 0).
The communication parameters must be set to 9600 Baud,
8 Bit, no parity and 1 stop bit.
Disable both software and hardware handshakes. The corre-
sponding AT command is to be found in the modem manual.
REB500 modem:
This modem should be set to the Automatic call-back mode.
The command used by most modems is AT SO=3, 3 repre-
senting the number of call attempts.
PC modem:
The signal DTR (data transmission ready) must be disabled
in the modem at the PC end. This is necessary to facilitate
changing from the terminal mode to the HMI500 mode with-
out interrupting the connection. The corresponding AT com-
mands are to be found in the modem manual.
11-120
11.14.3.3. Operation via a modem link

1. Start the terminal program on the PC.
2. Dial the REB500 telephone number, i.e. of the modem con-
nected to the PC.
3. Wait until communication has been established. If the PC
modem is set to the call-back mode, enter your password
and wait for the PC modem to call back.
4. Close the terminal program and start HMI500.
5. To interrupt or terminate communication, close HMI500 in the
prescribed manner and then either switch off the modem or
shut down the communication link using the terminal pro-
gram.
11-121
11.15. Synchronizing using GPS (option)

The user can activate and configure the optional GPS synchro-
nizing facility. Settings are provided for the Baud rate and the
GPS synchronizing rate.
The present version of the software supports only the Meinberg
protocol and setting of the parameters in the dialog.
Fig. 11.48 GPS synchronization
The synchronizing signal is connected to SERIAL 1 on the CMP

in slot 3.
11-122
11.16. 1 breaker schemes and duplex stations

This Section describes the application of the busbar, breaker
failure and end fault protection functions in 1 breaker schemes
and duplex stations.
The description is based on typical station layouts.
1 breaker schemes can be divided into five main groups (ver-
sions 1 to 5) which from the point of view of discrimination have
to be considered separately.
Version 6 concerns the application of REB500 to duplex stations.
The advantage of REB500 in the case of a 1 breaker scheme
is that the so-called T zone is fully protected.
11.16.1. T zone protection
General
The T zone is the section of busbar between the CTs plus the
line T up to the open line isolator (see Fig. 11.49 T zone pro-
tection, version 1). The bay protection (distance protection)
does not detect faults in this zone correctly, because the voltage
measured is the wrong one (open line isolator).
This zone is normally protected by an overcurrent function in-
cluded in the line protection. This reacts, however, to CT satura-
tion during through-faults (e.g. busbar faults) and could mal-
operate.
REB500 uses its current restrained differential protection and
phase comparison functions to protect this zone. The corre-
sponding algorithm operates discriminately even if CTs saturate.
Application
Busbar protection systems are generally used to discriminatively
protect main busbars. In addition to this, however, REB500 is
also able to effectively protect the T zone of a 1 breaker
scheme (see tables for versions 16), because it creates an
image of the topology of the entire station with up to 32 inde-
pendent protection zones, each processed by the busbar protec-
tion algorithms (current restrained differential and phase com-
parison protection).
11-123
For REB500 to protect the T zone, its image of the station must
include all the components of the 1 breaker scheme (circuit-
breakers, CTs and line isolator).
The same applies when applying the breaker failure and end
fault options.
The T zone protection relies on the image of the station to
measure (current restrained differential and phase comparison)
at the correct points and to intertrip the correct breakers after it
has detected an internal fault (both breakers limiting the T zone).
Breaker failure and end fault protection

The breaker failure and end fault functions use the REB500 im-
age of the station to intertrip the correct breakers, respectively to
transfer trip the correct remote breaker (tripping signal to the re-
mote end of a line, i.e. signal 21115_REMOTE TRIP).
Incoming transfer trip signal

In the reverse direction, transfer trip signals from the remote end
of a line are distributed to the bay units of the appropriate feed-
ers (signal 11105_External TRIP). An active External trip input
signal trips the circuit-breakers limiting the T zone via the
REB500 tripping contacts and starts the appropriate breaker fail-
ure function.
11-124
11.16.2. Version 1 (1 breaker zone with 3 CTs per diameter)

1 breaker scheme diameter Number of CTs 3
Number of REB500 bay units 3
BU BU BU (BU1-3)
1 2 3 Number of BFP functions in 3
S1 S2 REB500
X Number of EFP functions in 3
Y
REB500
Number of T zones protected by 1
REB500
Q6 Q6 Number of bay protection devices 2
LP: Line protection

e.g. distance protection
TP: Transformer protection
LP TP e.g. differential protection
Incidence of the frequent X
A1 A2 version:
occasional
infrequent
Fig. 11.49 T zone protection, version 1
T zone protection with isolator Q6 closed

When the line isolator Q6 is closed, faults in the T zones (X and
Y) are detected and tripped by the feeder protection (line protec-
tion or transformer protection). The T zones are considered to be
part of the line or the transformer feeder.
T zone protection (line) with isolator Q6 open

If the VT on A1 is on the line side of the isolator Q6, the distance
protection is unable to protect the T zone (X) when the isolator
Q6 is open, because the voltage it needs for measurement is ei-
ther missing altogether or is wrong.
In conventional systems an overcurrent function activated by the
isolator status signal Q6 protects the T zone.
In stations equipped with REB500, there is the possibility of it
taking over the protection of the T zone. To this end, the status
signal for isolator Q6 is connected to the bay unit (BU1) and
when the isolator is open, a measuring system specifically for
the T zone (X) is activated in REB500. As in the case of the main
busbars, measurement is based on the current restrained differ-
ential and phase comparison busbar protection algorithms,
which are considerably more stable during through-faults with
CT saturation than overcurrent protection and therefore to be
preferred.
11-125
T zone protection (transformer feeder) with isolator Q6 open

The transformer feeder is normally protected by a differential
scheme that continues to protect the T zone even when the iso-
lator Q6 is open. Connecting the isolator Q6 status signal to
REB500 is therefore unnecessary.
Each diameter in version 1 is equipped with three CTs. This ar-
rangement means that in relation to the circuit-breakers the pro-
tection zones cannot overlap and the three short zones be-
tween the circuit-breakers and the respective CTs need to be
protected by an optional end fault function in each of the bay
units BU1BU3.
11.16.3. Version 2 (1 breaker scheme with 6 CTs per diameter)

(BU1-3)
BU BU BU
S1 S2 REB500
X Y Number of EFP functions in 0
REB500
REB500
Q6 Q6 Number of bay protection devices 2
LP: Line protection

Incidence of the frequent X
A1 A2 version:
occasional
infrequent
With the exception of the end fault function, the same conditions
and considerations apply to version 2 as to version 1. Since
each diameter is equipped with 6 CTs, the protection zones can
be arranged to overlap and an additional end fault protection is
not needed.
11-126

(BU1-5)
BU BU BU
S1 S2 REB500
Number of EFP functions in 3
X Y REB500
REB500
Number of bay protection devices 2
BU BU
LP: Line protection
4 5
S Incidence of the frequent
version:
A1 A2 occasional X
infrequent
Because of the additional CTs in the feeders, a clear distinction

can be made between T zone and line on the one hand and T
zone and transformer feeder on the other. Regardless of the lo-
cation of any line isolator, the T zones are always protected.
In conventional systems, the T zones in this case are normally
protected by high-impedance (circulating current) schemes, i.e.
each T zone has its own high-impedance protection.
REB500 can protect the T zones in this kind of arrangement as
well. To this end, a REB500 bay unit is installed for each T zone
which is also connected to the line CT, respectively the trans-
former feeder CT As in the case of the main busbars, measure-
ment is based on the current restrained differential and phase
comparison busbar protection algorithms and always effectively
protects the T zones in all operating modes.
The three short zones between the circuit-breakers and the re-
spective CTs need to be protected by an optional end fault func-
tion in each of the bay units BU1BU3.
In this arrangement of the primary plant, REB500 treats the three
circuit-breakers and associated CTs as bus-tie breakers:
11-127
Bus-tie breaker 1 (BU1) Zone (S1) Zone (X)

Bus-tie breaker 2 (BU2) Zone (X) Zone (Y)
Bus-tie breaker 3 (BU3) Zone (Y) Zone (S2)
REB500 provides the following advantages with regard to the

protection of the T zone compared with a conventional high-
impedance scheme:
Only one additional bay unit is needed per T zone instead of
a complete high-impedance scheme.
Compared with a high-impedance scheme, REB500 does not
require the main CTs to fulfill such high demands.
Less wiring because busbar, breaker failure, end fault and T
zone protection functions are all in the same unit.

(BU1-8)
BU BU BU BU BU BU
1 2 3 4 5 6 Number of BFP functions in 3
S1 S2 REB500
X Y REB500
REB500
BU BU
LP: Line protection
7 8
Incidence of the frequent
version:
A1 A2 occasional
infrequent X
With the exception of the end fault function, the same conditions
and considerations apply to Version 4 as to Version 3.
The three extra CTs (3 bay units) in each diameter create bus-
tie breakers each with two sets of CTs. By overlapping the
zones, faults between the sets of CTs can be tripped without de-
lay.
11-128
11.16.6. Version 5 (1 breaker scheme with only BBP function)

1 breaker scheme Number of CTs per diameter *
Number of REB500 bay units per 2
diameter (BU)
Number of BFP functions in 0
S1 S1
REB500
BU BU BU REB500
1 2 3
REB500
Number of bay protection devices *
S2 LP: Line protection

BU
4
BU
5
BU
6
e.g. differential protection
S2
version:
occasional X
infrequent
* Of no consequence for the configuration of REB500
Where REB500 is only acting as busbar protection (i.e. T zone,

breaker failure and end fault protection functions are not re-
quired), an image of the T zone is not created in REB500. In this
case, a 1 breaker scheme is considered as two single busbars.
Generally, all the REB500 bay units are connected to the same
central unit for this type of configuration. Both busbars S1 and
S2 belong then to the same protection system.
On occasions, the user specifies that busbars S1 and S2 shall
be protected by independent systems, in which case, two central
units are needed and the bay units of one busbar assigned to
one and the bay units of the other busbar to the other. The ad-
vantage is that the failure of a system or during maintenance
only one protection system is affected. Safe operation of the sta-
tion can be maintained by transferring all the feeders conducting
load current to the busbar system, which is still operating.
11-129
11.16.7. Version 6 (duplex station)

The possibility of protecting small ancillary sections of busbar in
addition to the main busbars is not limited to 1 breaker
schemes. Based on the locations and CTs and isolators, com-
plex bus-tie or feeder layouts can frequently be broken down into
sections of busbar. Fig. 11.54 shows an example of this.
Duplex station Number of CTs 2
S1 Number of REB500 bay units (BU) 2
Number of BFP functions in 2
REB500
S2 Number of EFP functions in 2
REB500
Number of T-zones protected in 2
REB500
Q1 Q2
Q6 LP Line protection
X Y e.g. distance protection
TP Transformer protection
e.g. differential protection
version:
occasional
BU BU
1 2 infrequent X
LP TP
A1 A2
Fig. 11.54 Version 6
Those busbar protection measuring systems are activated in

REB500 that are needed to reflect the prevailing operating con-
ditions (isolator statuses).
Isolator statuses Active REB500 BBP systems
Q1 Q2 Q6
1 closed closed open S1//X S2//Y -
2 closed closed closed S1// X//Y//S2 - -
3 closed open closed S1//X//Y S2 -
4 open closed closed S1 S2//X//Y -
5 open open closed S1 S2 X//Y
// Measuring systems determined by the isolator statuses which are linked to form a single meas-
uring system, e.g. X//Y
For operating mode 5, the feeder isolators Q1 and Q2 are open

and isolator Q6 is closed and therefore a single measuring sys-
tem X//Y is formed that discriminatively protects zone X-Y.
11-130
11.16.8. Assignment of bay units

The number of bay units needed in a particular station is given in
most cases by the simple relationship:
n bay units = the greater of the total number of circuit-breakers
or the total number of CTs in the REB500 image
The example of Fig. 11.55 Assignment of bay units below

shows the assignment of bays to bay units based on version 1 of
the T zone protection (Section 11.16.2.). The two feeder bays
which contain neither circuit-breakers nor CTs are each as-
signed to the bay unit for the CT and circuit-breaker going to the
busbar on their side. The circuit-breaker and CT in the center are
assigned to a bay unit of their own.
If there are CTs in the feeders or on both sides of the circuit-
breakers and these are included in the busbar protection, the
number of bay units needed increases in accordance with the
above relationship.
ABB Netw or k Par tn er REB
ABB Netw or k Par tn er REB ABB Netw or k Par tn er REB
AG 500 AG 500
AG 500
BU 1 BU 2 BU 3
C C C
E E E
Bay Un it
Bay Un it
Bay Un it
Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 Bay 4 Bay 5

S1 S2
X Y
Q6 Q6
A1 A2
Fig. 11.55 Assignment of bay units
11-131
11.17. Applications in complex stations

The operation of the busbar protection function for simple busbar
configurations is described in Section 3. In practice, however,
complex bus-tie arrangements are frequently necessary to meet
all the requirements with respect to reliability of supply and
switching adaptability to suit operating circumstances.
The operation of the busbar protection in more complex stations
is described in the following sections.
11.17.1. Busbar and breaker failure protection in stations with a by-

pass busbar
If the breaker failure function in BU_0 is started by an external
device when operating via the bypass busbar, the entire busbar
2 is tripped instead of just circuit-breaker Q9.
This can be prevented if circuit-breaker Q9 in BU_9 is equipped
with its own CT, thus enabling an additional protection zone to
be defined for the busbar protection.
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Q0 Q9
Bypass busbar
BU_0 BU_9
Fig. 11.56 Operation via a bypass busbar
11.17.2. Busbars with bus-ties in series

The term series tie is used when referring to the connection of
busbars or busbar sections via two or more bus-tie breakers in
series. A typical example of a series tie is a 1 breaker scheme
(see Fig. 11.57). In an arrangement of this kind, each circuit-
breaker/CT pair is treated as a bus-tie breaker (bus-tie A S1-Sx ,
bus-tie B Sx-Sy , bus-tie C Sy-S2). When all three breakers are
closed, busbars S1 and S2 are connected via a series tie
A-B-C.
11-132
Providing all the feeders are part of a 1 breaker scheme, the

necessity to block a bus-tie breaker when there is a parallel con-
nection between the busbars as discussed previously is irrele-
vant, because there are no feeders with isolators to each of the
main busbars and therefore no possibility of the 1 breaker di-
ameters being paralleled.
S1
S2
A C
SX SY
B
Fig. 11.57 1 breaker scheme
Ik11
S1
S2
Ik12
Q Q
A Ik12 C
SX SY
B
Ik2 Ik3 Ik1
Fig. 11.58 1 breaker scheme with parallel connection be-

tween the busbars
In a mixed system (see Fig. 11.58), the response of the system

with respect to the parallel connection has to be considered.
When there is a parallel connection between the busbars (Q1
and Q2 closed), the busbar protection measuring systems S1
and S2 are combined to form a single measuring system
(S1/S2).
11-133
Assuming the three circuit-breakers of the diameter are closed,

the current of a busbar fault (Ik1) divides into a direct portion
(Ik11) and a portion via the series tie A-B-C (Ik12). The T zone
feeders Sx and Sy can also make fault current contributions (Ik2)
and (Ik3). In relation to the main busbars (S1 and S2) in parallel,
the current (Ik12) flows out through bus-tie C and back through
bus-tie A. For a fault on the busbars, the combined measuring
system (S1/S2) is thus presented with two opposing current vec-
tors indicating an external fault and the phase comparison blocks
tripping.
To overcome this possibility, REB500 has a special blocking
logic which can be configured for series ties. This consists in de-
fining the starting and finishing points of series ties and not
evaluating measurements between them when both are in the
same measuring zone.
In the example shown in Fig. 11.58, the starting point (busbar
connection to bus-tie A) and the finishing point (busbar connec-
tion to bus-tie C) belong to the same measuring zone (S1/S2)
and therefore the measurements of the three bus-tie breakers A,
B and C are not evaluated.
In normal operation, i.e. when the main busbars are not in paral-
lel, the two T zones Sx and Sy treated discriminatively as inde-
pendent protection zones. When the busbars are paralleled and
the series ties excluded from evaluation, the feeder currents (Ik2
and Ik3) are still measured, but not those into and out of the two
T zones through their respective bus-ties. The T zone measure-
ments are therefore invalid. For this reason, not only are the
measurements of the series tie excluded from evaluation, but in
addition the diameter CTs are short-circuited. This means that
the two T zones Sx and Sy are connected to the main busbars
S1/S2 and a measuring zone S1/Sx/Sy/S2 is created, which cor-
rectly includes the two feeder currents (Ik2, Ik3).
11-134
Application of the extended bus-tie blocking logic is only possible

providing the feeders in the T zones are equipped with protection
CT cores connected to REB500 bay units.
It can only be configured for a bus-tie breaker during initial engi-
neering of the system. By opening the HMI500 Configuration
menu and selecting Circuit-breakers, it is possible to see
whether the logic is active for a particular bus-tie breaker or not,
but the setting cannot be changed.
Fig. 11.59 Status of the bus-tie blocking logic
Further examples of applying the additional bus-tie logic are

given in Fig. 11.60 and Fig. 11.61.
Fig. 11.60 shows a reduced 1 breaker scheme. With the addi-
tional bus-tie logic, the measurements of bus-ties A and B are
excluded from evaluation and their CTs short-circuited while the
main busbars S1 and S2 are connected in parallel (Q1 and Q2
closed). A combined measuring zone S1/Sx/S2 is created in
which all faults are correctly detected.
Fig. 11.61 shows a multiple busbar configuration in which the
bus-ties A and B count as series ties from the point of view of
busbars S1 and S3. With the additional bus-tie logic, the meas-
urements of bus-ties A and B are excluded from evaluation and
their CTs short-circuited while the main busbars S1 and S3 are
connected in parallel (Q1 and Q3 closed). A combined measur-
ing zone S1/S2/S3 is created in which all faults are correctly de-
tected. A drawback, however, is that discrimination is lost for
busbar S2 while S1 and S3 are in parallel.
11-135
Ik11
S1
S2
Ik12
Q1 Q2
A Ik12 B
SX
Ik2 Ik1
Fig. 11.60 Reduced 1 breaker scheme with parallel con-

nection between the busbars
Ik11
S1
S2
S3
Ik13 Q1 Q2 Q3
Ik13 Ik13
Ik1
Fig. 11.61 Multiple busbars with parallel connection between

the busbars
Excluding the bus-tie measurement only functions absolutely re-

liably providing the auxiliary contacts reliably reflect the statuses
of the bus-tie breakers, which necessarily be assumed unless
the auxiliary contacts have a fail-safe mechanical linkage.
11-136
11.17.3. Switchgear bays that can serve either as bus-tie or feeder

circuit-breaker
Some circuit-breakers are designed to be used both as a bus-tie
and feeder circuit-breaker.
Fig. 11.62 Example of a bus-tie breaker that can also serve

as a feeder circuit-breaker
Bus-tie breaker
Q1 or Q2, Q0 and Q7 closed, Q20 open

Feeder circuit-breaker
Exclusion of the measurement of one or both protection zones is
made selective when engineering the system, i.e. the one that is
not excluded remains active.
11.17.4. Duplex stations

(Refer to Section 11.16.7.)
11.17.5. Control using 11105_External TRIP

This signal is generated when an external protection device trips
(including one in the remote station) and isolates fault on trans-
mission lines or transformer feeders by operating the REB500
tripping contact.
On normal feeders, the External TRIP signal only trips the cir-
cuit-breaker of the respective feeder. Its effect for special con-
figurations is as follows:
11-137
1 breaker scheme
Both circuit-breakers controlling the feeder are tripped (see Sec-
tion 11.16.3.).
Bypass mode
An External TRIP signal applied to circuit-breaker Q0 control-
ling busbar feeder 1 does not isolate the fault when isolator Q7 is
closed (bypass mode). For this reason, circuit-breaker Q0 con-
trolling busbar feeder 2 is automatically opened. Through-faults
can now be correctly tripped.
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Busbar 3
Bypass busbar
Q7
Q0 Q0
Busbar feeder 1 Busbar feeder 2
Fig. 11.63 Bypass busbar
Bypass isolator
The External TRIP signal trips circuit-breaker Q0 of busbar
feeder 1, but the fault is still not cleared because the bypass iso-
lator Q7 is closed. The busbar protection then intertrips busbar 3
to finally clear the fault.
11-138
Busbar 1
Busbar 2
Busbar 3
Q0 Q7
Busbar feeder 1
Fig. 11.64 Bypass isolator
11-139
11.18. 16.7 Hz railway systems (option)

REB500 can also protect railway supply systems operating at
16.7 Hz. Standard REB500 hardware (50/60 Hz) is used for
16.7 Hz railway systems.
However, some special aspects have to be observed and these
are described below.
11.18.1. Protection functions supported

Table 11.58 lists those protection functions that are supported
when operating at a power system frequency of 16.7 Hz.
Station protection functions

Busbar BBP
Breaker failure BFP
End fault EFP
Time overcurrent O/C
Pole discrepancy PDF
Bay protection functions
Definite time overcurrent (O/C, 51)
Definite time over/undervoltage (59 / 27)
Distance (DIST, 21)
Autoreclosure (79)
Sensitive directional earth fault for grounded power systems (EFERDR,
67N)
Table 11.58 Protection functions supported at 16.7 Hz
11.18.2. Display
The settings are still marked as in a three-phase system, i.e. L1,
L2 and L3.
The sampling rates used by the disturbance recorder are 401 Hz
and 802 Hz.
Three windows L1, L2 and L3 are displayed for analog values
and three traces L1, L2 and L3 generated by the disturbance re-
corder.
11-140
For comparison the analog displays for 16.7 Hz (left) and 50 Hz

(right) are shown below:
Fig. 11.65 Analog input displays for 16.7 Hz and 50 Hz
11.18.3. Special aspects of breaker failure protection

When carrying out the setting procedure for time-grading the
breaker failure protection described in Sections 11.1.3.4. and
11.1.3.5. uses the following settings for 16.7 Hz railway systems:
tv Overcurrent function reset time 38 ms
tmargin Safety margin >30 ms (ABB recommen-

dation)
te Processing time of input signal [ te+ ta1 ] =36 ms

(see calculation of maximum tripping [ te+ ta2 ] =46 ms
time t1, t2)
WARNING: The proper operation of the breaker failure function

can only be guaranteed if the minimum time settings given
above are strictly observed.
11-141
11.18.4. Voltage and current inputs for 16.7 Hz
Primary voltage Bay unit voltage inputs Display on HMI500,

local HMI and DRR
UL1 VT in series U1
U L2 VT in series U2
U L0 VT ** U4*
Primary current* Bay unit current inputs Display on HMI500,

local HMI and DRR
I1 I1 I1
I2 I2 I2
I0 I4 I4
* Input I3 cannot be used.
** The secondary voltage of U4 is permanently set to 100V.
11-142
11.18.5. Wiring of the analog inputs for 16.7 Hz

Fig. 11.66 below shows the wiring of a REB500 bay unit to a
two-phase power system.
Bay unit
1 1
2
I1
5
3 0
4 1
5 5
I2
6 0
L1 L2 7 1
8
I3
5
9 0
10 1
11
I4
5
12 0
1
F1
2 0
U1
F2 4
5 0
U2
L1 L2 U3
8 0
10
11 0
U4
13
14 0
U5
Fig. 11.66 Wiring of the analog inputs for 16.7 Hz
11-143
11.18.6. Special features of the definite time over and undercurrent

protection
MaxMin setting:
The three-phase minimum or maximum functions measure in
two phases.
A three-phase measurement is reduced to two phases:
For current channel CT I1-I3, only currents I1 and I2 are
measured.
Single-phase measurement:
Only CT I1, I2 or I4 can be measured (channel 3 is disabled).
11.18.7. Special features of the definite time over and undervoltage

protection
MaxMin setting:
The three-phase minimum or maximum functions measure in
two phases.
A three-phase measurement is reduced to two phases:
Only voltages U1, U2 and U4 are measured (channels U3
and U5 are disabled).
Overvoltage settings (U-Setting)
The setting depends on the type of VT connection chosen for
the voltage channel.
If two phase-to-phase voltages are measure, the setting is a
phase-to-phase voltage * scaling factor (see Section 11.8).
If the VT is connected in star, i.e. phase-to-ground, the set-
ting is the phase-to-ground voltage * scaling factor. In a two
conductor power system (16 Hz), the phase-to-ground volt-
age is half the rated phase-to-phase voltage.
11.18.8. Special features of the distance protection (DIST)
11.18.8.1. Application and features

The distance protection function is only suitable for solidly
grounded power systems at a power system frequency of
16 Hz.
The internal power swing blocking function is disabled.
11-144
The three loops L1E, L2E and L1L2 are calculated in parallel.
All three-phase signals and expressions refer in 16 Hz power
systems to two phases (i.e. also in those cases where in
50/60 Hz power systems three-phases are needed to fulfill a
conditions, two phases suffice in 16 Hz power systems).
11.18.8.2. Analog inputs

2 phase currents
2 phase voltages
Neutral current of the two phases
No neutral current input for a parallel line (I0P)

All binary inputs are enabled excepting the following:
Power swing blocking

All binary outputs are enabled excepting the following:
Start L3 (Start L3)
Start I> (Start I>)
Trip L3 (Trip L3)
Power swing blocking (Power swing)
The flowing binary output refers to two phases:
Three-phase tripping (Trip CB 3P)
11.18.8.5. Measurements
Only the following measurements are enabled:
Impedance loop L1E
Impedance loop L2E
Impedance loop L1L2
11.18.8.6. Settings
The following settings differ from the version for 50/60 Hz power
systems:
I0P input Disabled
3I0min Two phase neutral current setting
3U0min Two phase neutral voltage setting
tPSBlock Power swing blocking is disabled
StartMode Only underimpedance start enabled
11-145
PhaseSelMode Only solidly grounded (SolidGround) en-

abled
E/FDet Only I0, (I0 or U0), (I0 and U0) enabled
VTSupMode Only zero-sequence (Off, Zero Seq) possi-
ble; I2 and U2 cannot be used
11.18.8.7. Directional measurement

Fault direction is determined in the same way as in the 50/60 Hz
version. However, if the voltage being measure is lower than
UminFault (minimum fault voltage), the following reference volt-
age Uref is used in 16 Hz power systems:
Uref = [ UL1 + 1/8 * UL1L2mem ] -63 (L1-E loop)
Uref = [ UL1L2 + 1/8 * UL1L2mem ] -63 (L1-L2 loop)
11.18.8.8. VT supervision
The VT supervision function determines the zero-sequence
components of the voltages and currents:
U0 = ( UL1 + UL2 ) / 2
I0 = ( IL1 + IL2 ) / 2
and compares them with the settings U0 SpgWdlbw [UNLE]
and I0 VTSup [IN] and sets the corresponding binary signals U0
and I0 to logical 0 or 1. The logical processing is otherwise the
same as in the 50/60 Hz version.
11.18.9. Special aspects of auto-reclosure (AR)

The function performs both single and three-phase auto-
reclosure in 16 Hz power systems (all three-phase signals and
expressions refer to two phases).
11.18.10. Special aspects of sensitive earth fault protection for solidly

grounded power systems (EFERDR)
This function is based on the evaluation of neutral current and
voltage.
The designations of neutral current and voltage are the same as
for 50/60 Hz power systems, i.e. 3I0 and 3U0.
11-146
Neutral voltage (3U0)
Neutral current (3I0)
Real power component (nicht rotated) of the neutral power
(3U0 3I0)
Reactive power component (nicht rotated) of the neutral
power (3U0 3I0)
Neutral power direction (forwards or backwards); this meas-
urement is only valid if the binary input SchaltEin is enabled.
11.18.10.2. Fault duration

The fault duration determines the time available for directional
comparison and thus the type of communication channel. The
setting of 3 s in 16 Hz power systems cannot be varied.
NOTE: When setting this function, it must be taken into consid-

eration that the directional comparison function only functions
during the fixed fault duration setting of 3 s. The function is dis-
abled after this time. The fault duration starts to run at the end of
the basic time.
11.18.10.3. Directional comparison with permissive signal

The duration of the echo is limited to 450 ms in 16 Hz power
systems.
11-147
11.19. CT requirements for REB500/REB500sys

1KHL020347-Aen
11-148
1KHL020347-Aen
REB500 / REB500sys Edition June 2008
CT requirements for REB500 / REB500sys
Application Note
Baden/Switzerland
4th Edition
Version 7.20 and higher
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and registration of other in-
dustrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorized use, in particular reproduction or making avail-
able to third parties without our explicit consent in writing is prohibited.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of this the reader find an
error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a warranty of perform-
ance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our customers in mind that we constantly strive to
improve our products and keep them abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to
discrepancies between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
REB500/ REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Contents
1. Introduction.................................................................................................2
2. Terms / Abbreviations.................................................................................2
3. Symbols......................................................................................................2
4. Requirements on current transformers .......................................................3

4.1. Type of current transformers (protection core) ...........................................3
4.2. Requirements for the current transformer ratio...........................................4
4.2.1. Busbar protection .......................................................................................4
4.2.2. Distance protection.....................................................................................4
4.2.3. Transformer differential protection..............................................................4
4.3. Conditions for the current transformer requirements ..................................5
4.3.2. Distance protection.....................................................................................6
4.3.3. Transformer differential protection..............................................................6
4.4. Accuracy limiting factor...............................................................................7
4.4.1. Determination of the accuracy limiting factor (n).........................................7
4.4.2. Calculation of the effective accuracy limiting factor (n)
[universally valid CT calculation].................................................................9
4.5. Required accuracy limiting factor for REB500 / REB500sys
(CT performance check).............................................................................9
4.5.2. Distance protection...................................................................................10
4.5.3. Transformer differential protection............................................................11
4.5.4. General remarks for the CT performance check ......................................12
5. Calculation example .................................................................................13

5.1. Data per bus section.................................................................................13
5.2. Data per bay.............................................................................................13
5.3. Calculation-check .....................................................................................14
1
ABB Switzerland Ltd 1KHL020347-Aen REB500/ REB500sys
1. Introduction
The operation of any protection scheme is influenced by distortion in the measuring quantities. The
currents to the protection device are distorted, when the current transformer is saturated. In most
cases it is not possible to avoid current transformer saturation for all fault conditions. Therefore
measures are taken in the protection schemes of REB500/REB500sys to allow for current trans-
former saturation while maintained proper operation. REB500/REB500sys can allow for relatively
heavy current transformer saturation, but not unlimited. The demands on the current transformers
and the appropriate calculation checks are the main constituents of this document. Furthermore, the
most common CT types used for protection applications, the corresponding CT standards and the
conversion of the characteristic values from one type to another are illustrated.
2. Terms / Abbreviations
BBP Busbar Protection
Z> Line Protection -> Distance protection function
DIFTRA Transformer Differential Protection
CT Current Transformer
HMI Human-Machine-Interface
BS British Standards
ANSI American National Standards Institute
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
1-ph-g Single phase to ground fault
3-ph Three phase fault
3. Symbols
Electrical conductivity
N Power system time constant for a busbar fault or a fault close to the busbar
Z1 Power system time constant for fault at zone-1 reach
A Cross section of the current transformer wiring
a Amplitude compensation factor (transformer differential protection setting)
B Magnetic induction
b Parameter b of the characteristic (transformer differential protection setting)
fN Fundamental frequency
IBAmax Maximal load current
IKSmax Maximal fault current for a busbar fault or a fault close to the busbar
IKSBmax Max current through distance protection CT for a busbar fault
IKSLmax Max current through distance protection CT for a fault on line side of the CT
IKS Z1max Maximal fault current for a fault at zone-1 reach
INprim CT nominal current primary side
INsec CT nominal current secondary side
kssc CT rated symmetrical short circuit current factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
ktd CT transient dimensioning factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
l Length of the current transformer wiring (single length from main CT to REB500 bay unit)
n CT nominal over current factor (related to a CT 5Px)
n CT effective over current factor
n10P CT nominal over current factor (related to a CT 10Px for the conversion to 5Px see Table 2)
PB Total burden connected to the CT
PBG Sum of the burden of all connected devices
PE CT losses
PN CT rated power
RBG Sum of the burden resistors of all connected devices
Rct CT resistance of the secondary winding
Uk CT knee-point voltage
UN Nominal voltage (phase to phase) on primary side
2
4. Requirements on current transformers
4.1. Type of current transformers (protection core)

The following table specifies the most common current transformer protection cores and their practi-
cability for REB500/ REB500sys.
Applicable for According to

Type Features Application area REB500/ REB500sys *) Standard
BBP Z> DIFTRA
IEC basis types

5Px Closed core Suitable for most protec- IEC60044-1
(composite error 5 resp. 10%) tion schemes
10Px
x = accuracy limiting factor
5PRx Core with anti-remanence air Line protection with auto- IEC60044-1
gaps reclosure
10PRx
(composite error 5 resp. 10%)
x = accuracy limiting factor
PX Closed core High impedance BBP IEC60044-1
Low leakage flux Also suitable for most other
Corresponding to BS class X protection schemes
IEC alternative types

TPX Closed core Suitable for most protec- IEC60044-6
tion schemes
TPY Core with anti-remanence air Line protection with auto IEC60044-6
gaps reclosure
TPZ Core with considerable air Special applications (e.g. IEC60044-6
gaps, linearised core differential protection of 1 2 3
large generators)
TPS Closed core High impedance BBP IEC60044-6
Low leakage flux Also suitable for most other
Similar to PX and BS class X protection schemes
Other alternative types

Class X Closed core High impedance BBP BS 3938
Low leakage flux Also suitable for most other superseded
(old defi-
protection schemes by
nition)
IEC60044-1
(PX)
Class C Corresponding to IEC accu- Ref. to 10Px ANSI
C100,C200, racy class 10P20 C57.13-1
C400, C800
Table 1: Specification of CT protection cores (different standards)
Remarks for Table 1:
Applicable
Applicable, mixtures between CTs of type TPZ and other CT-types can result in a differential current measured by
1
the BBP system. This is because the phase displacement of the TPZ-CT (up to 3). This differential current has to
be taken into account for the setting of the pick-up level of BBP differential alarm.
Applicable, the use of the linearized current transformer type TPZ results only in a turn (anticlockwise) of the relay
2
characteristic of some degrees. Possibly ABB Switzerland can be contacted for confirmation that the actual type can
be used.
Applicable, TPZ leads only to a small phase angle shift and can be used for DIFTRA, if the same type is on all sides
3
of the transformer.
*) The distance protection function Z> and transformer differential function DIFTRA is available for REB500sys only.
3
4.2. Requirements for the current transformer ratio
4.2.1. Busbar protection
The CTs of the different bays connected to a REB500 / REB500sys system can have different CT-
ratios. Any differences between the CT-ratios are compensated by appropriately configuring the set-
ting of the respective bay units (using the HMI-software).
4.2.2. Distance protection
The current transformer ratio should be selected such that the primary is about 120% of the ex-
pected full load current and the current to the protection is larger than the minimum operating value
for all faults to be detected. The minimum operating current for the distance protection in REB500sys
is 10% of the nominal current.
4.2.3. Transformer differential protection
The CTS of the different transformer-sides connected to a REB500 / REB500sys system can have
different CT-ratios. Any differences between the CT-ratios are compensated by appropriately config-
uring the setting of the respective bay units (using the HMI-software).
The differences between the rated currents of the protected object (the transformer) and the CTS
can be compensated by the setting factors a1,a2 and a3 (a3 for three-winding and auto-transformers
only). An appropriate adjustment of these factors ensures, that a nominal current flow in the pro-
tected object will cause a nominal current in the protection relay.
The current transformer ratio should be selected so that the current to the protection is larger than
the minimum operating value. This principle must apply to all faults that shall be detected. The mini-
mum operating current of the DIFTRA-function is 10% of the nominal current.
4
4.3. Conditions for the current transformer requirements

The requirements for REB500/REB500sys are a result of tests performed with a network simulation
program. The tests have been performed with a digital current transformer model.
The setting of the current transformer model was representative for :
BBP current transformers type TPX/TPY/TPZ

DIFTRA current transformers type TPX/TPY/TPZ
TPZ leads only to a small phase angle shift and
can be used for DIFTRA, if the same type is on
all sides of the transformer.
This recommendation is also appropriate for TPY
CTs, particularly for small basic settings of DIFTRA.
Z> current transformers type TPX
The performance was checked:
With symmetrical fault currents / fully asymmetrical fault currents
For phase-to-ground faults / phase-to-phase / three-phase faults
With regard to directionality
Z> with security to trip and overreach for Z> only
BBP and DIFTRA 0 and 50% remanence-flux in the current transformer core.
Fault current
The current transformer requirements are based on the maximum fault current for faults in different
positions. The maximum fault current is reached for three-phase faults or single phase to ground
faults. The current for a single phase to ground fault exceeds the current for a three phase fault
when the zero-sequence impedance in the total fault loop is less than the positive-sequence imped-
ance.
When calculating the current transformer requirements, the maximum fault current should be used
and therefore both fault types have to be considered (see Section 4.5.4.).
The algorithms and stabilization features used in REB500 / REB500sys make the busbar protection
largely insensitive to current transformer saturation phenomena, result in a relatively low CT per-
formance needed and make it possible to share protection cores with other protection devices.
For CTs of class TPZ (linearized type), it has to be ensured that the linearity is guaranteed over the
complete range of possible short circuit currents ( means no saturation up to Iksmax). This is a gen-
eral requirement, since if a linear is applied in a protection system it is not recommended to operate
it outside the linear area.
5
Remanence flux
It is difficult to give general recommendations for additional margins for remanence flux. This de-
pends on the demands of reliability and economy.
When current transformers of type TPY are used, practically no additional margin is needed due to
the anti-remanence air gap. For current transformer of the type TPX, the small probability of a fully
asymmetrical fault together with maximum remanence flux in the same direction as the flux gener-
ated by the fault has to be kept in mind for the decision of an additional margin. A fully asymmetrical
fault current will be reached when the fault occurs at zero voltage (0). Investigations have proved
that 95% of the faults in the network occurs when the voltage is between 40 and 90.
Cable resistance and additional load

The current transformer saturation is directly affected by the voltage at the current transformer sec-
ondary terminals. This voltage, for a ground fault, is developed in a loop containing the phase and
neutral conductor and additional load in this loop. For three phase faults, the neutral current is zero,
and only the phase conductor and additional phase load have to be considered.
In the calculation, the loop resistance should be used for phase to ground faults and the phase resis-
tance for three phase faults.
DC time constants
The requirements assume 20 to 120 msec maximum DC time constant for the network and 100%
DC offset.
Remanence flux
See under 4.3.2 Distance protection item Remanence flux.
Cable resistance and additional load
See under 4.3.2 Distance protection item Cable resistance and additional load.
DC time constants
The current requirements were tested with DC time constants from 40 to 300 msec.
6
4.4. Accuracy limiting factor

The CT performance necessary for REB500/REB500sys is specified mainly by the effective accu-
racy limiting factor (n), which has to exceed a required (calculated) value.
4.4.1. Determination of the accuracy limiting factor (n)
The following section provides an overview about how to determine the accuracy factor for the differ-
ent CT types (different standards).
Determination 5Px, 5PRx 10Px, 10PRx TPX ,TPY ,TPZ Class C PX, TPS, Class X
of accuracy C100,C200,
limiting factor C400,C800
Direct determi- e.g. CT core

nation
5P20
n = 20
Corresponding Corresponding
with other CT quantities of IEC
type accuracy class
C100 PN=25 VA
C200 PN=50 VA
C400 PN=100 VA
C800 PN=200 VA
10P20 1
Conversion e.g. CT core 10P20

from
10Px to 5Px, or
n10P = 20 n10P = 20
10PRx to 5PRx
n = n10p 0.94 n = n10p 0.94
n = 18.8 2
n = 18.8 2
Determination e.g.CT core TPY

by the factors kssc = 5, ktd = 4.5
Kssc and Ktd
n k ssc k td
n = 22.5 4
Conversion Class X:
from knee-point
voltage U K I Nsec
n= 1. 3 3
(PX,TPS, class PN + PE
x,) to the
accuracy e.g. CT class X
limiting factor
Uk = 450 V, Insec = 1 A
(IEC, 5Px)
PN = 20 VA, PE = 4 VA
n = 24.4
Table 2: Determination of the accuracy limiting factor (n)
7
Remarks for Table 2:
1 ANSI C57.13-1 With a transformer in the C100 accuracy class, for example, the ratio error will not exceed 10% be-
tween 1 and 20 times nominal secondary current if the burden does not exceed the nominal burden.
1 x 5 A x 20 = 100 V (nominal burden C100 B-1 = 1, C200 B-2 = 2 , C400 B-4 = 4 , C800 B-8 = 8 )
For the determination of the CT- losses [PE], the resistance of the secondary winding related to the connected CT- ratio
should be present (The resistance for each ratio is normally indicated on the CT type-label).
According to the technical literature, the corresponding IEC60044-1 - accuracy class for a CT class C is 10P20. The
conversion made under Table 2 is based on this assumption.
2 The voltage U (10P) linked to the accuracy limiting factor of a CT 10Px is
above the voltage U(5P) linked to the accuracy limiting factor of a CT 5Px.
These voltages are each linked to an induction level.
Induction levels commonly used for CT manufacturing (example only):
corresponding induction level U (10P) =1.7 Tesla, U(5P) =1.6 Tesla
Usec ~ B
The conversion of the accuracy limiting factor from 10Px to 5Px can be
easily obtained by multiplication with the reversed induction level ratio U(10P)
1.6T / 1.7T = 0.94 . U(5P)
UK
Of course, the induction levels vary from one manufacturer to another.
IEC
The knee point voltage UK of a CT class X linked to the point from which 5Px
3
an increase in the voltage of 10% needs a 50% increase in the magnetiz- BS IEC
ing current is below the voltage U(5P) linked to the accuracy limiting factor Class X 10Px
of a CT 5Px. These voltages are each linked to an induction level.
ANSI
Induction levels commonly used for CT manufacturing (example only): Class
corresponding induction level UK =1.2 Tesla, U(5P) =1.6 Tesla C100-C800
The conversion of the accuracy limiting factor from Class X to 5Px can be
approx. obtained by multiplication with the induction level ratio Im
1.6T/ 1.2T = 1.3
The rated CT power [PN] is a parameter which is not used (necessary) for
the specification of a CT class X . In the conversion formula for determina-
tion of the accuracy limiting factor [n] , any typical value [PN] of a CT class Fig. 1: CT accuracy classes, definition
5P20 can be inserted. As an alternative method, the effective accuracy points
limiting factor [n] can be directly calculated, without using the term [PN]
(ref. to Section 5.3).
4 The overcurrent factor n can be calculated approximately, by using the following CT characteristic values:
Kssc CT rated symmetrical short circuit current factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
Ktd CT transient dimensioning factor (Standard IEC60044-6)
8
4.4.2. Calculation of the effective accuracy limiting factor (n) [universally valid CT calculation]
The effective accuracy limiting (n) is derived from the nominal accuracy factor (n) of the CT protec-
tion core (see Section 4.4.1.), considering the relation between the nominal burden and the con-
nected burden.
Calculation of the effective over current factor n:
Calculation of the total burden PB :

P + PE
n' = n N
PB + PE PB = PBG + l 2 I 2
A Nsec
or if RBG is given :
l
PB = R BG + 2 I 2
A Nsec
If RCT is given instead of PE :
P E = R CT I 2Nsec
UK ( to be used if UK, RB and RCT are given)

Alternative calculation method n' =
(R B + R CT) I N sec
4.5. Required accuracy limiting factor for REB500 / REB500sys

(CT performance check)
For each bay, the performance of the current transformer has to be checked and two conditions have
to be fulfilled.
Condition 1
I
n' > KS max
5*I
N prim
Condition 2 (taking the primary power system time constant into account)
n' 10 for 120 ms

N
or
n' 20 for 120 ms < N 300 ms
9
For each line bay utilized with REB500sys distance protection, the performance of the current trans-
former has to be checked and two conditions have to be fulfilled.
Condition 1
Line fault close to busbar (close to relay location)
The short circuit currents IKSBmax and IKSLmax have to be calculated.
IKSBmax : Max current through distance protection CT for a busbar fault

IKSLmax : Max current through distance protection CT for a fault on line side of the CT
IKSmax : The higher of IKSBmax and IKSLmax
6
(50Hz)
5 (60Hz)
I 4
n' > a KS max
I a 3
N prim
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Power system time constant TN [ms]
Condition 2
Line fault at zone 1 reach (near remote end of line)
14
(50Hz)
12 (60Hz)
10
I
KS Z1max 8
n' > k k
I
Nprim 6
4
2
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
Power system time constant TZ1 [ms]
10
For each transformer bay utilized with REB500sys Transformer differential protection, the perform-
ance of the current transformers on each transformer-side has to be checked and two conditions
have to be fulfilled.
Condition 1
n' 15
and
Condition 2
For each winding of the transformer the CTs have to meet the following conditions.
transformer winding Delta connection 0 .8 b

n' ( * + 1)
a N
all other connections 1 .4 b

n' ( * N + 1)
a
For fault currents 3 * INprim , the CTS shall not saturate
250
Condition 1 200
and
Condition 2 150
n'
Condition 1
100
Condition 2
Slope of the
50 curve accord-
35 ing calculation
30
25
20 0
15 0 50 100 150 200 250 300
10 Power system time constant TN [ms]
5
0
0 10 20 30
11
4.5.4. General remarks for the CT performance check
Since the short circuit currents and the network time constants can be quite different for a single
phase to ground fault (1-ph-g) and a three phase fault (3-ph), the CT performance test has to cover
both fault situations. A CT performance check, which is based on the three phase fault data only is
not sufficient, if the single phase to ground fault current and/or the associated network time constant
exceeds the three phase fault values.
Table 3 below gives an overview about the CT performance test conditions and the associated fault
parameter to be checked for 1-ph-g and 3-ph faults.
Fault situation Single ph to ground (1-ph-g) Three phase (3-ph) Maximal value (1-ph-g) or (3-ph)
CT test condition IKSmax IKS Z1max TN TZ1 IKSmax IKS Z1max TN TZ1 IKSmax IKS Z1max TN TZ1
4.5.1. BBP Condition 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.1. BBP Condition 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.2. Z> Condition 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.2. Z> Condition 1 - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.2. Z> Condition 2 - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.2. Z> Condition 2 - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.3. DIFTRA Condition 1 - - - - - - - - - - -
4.5.3 DIFTRA Condition 2 - - - - - - - - - - -
Table 3 : CT- performance check considering different fault parameters for 1-ph-g and 3-ph faults
12
5. Calculation example
This is an example of a CT performance check for a REB500sys system mounted in a 220 kV-
station. The station contains three different types of CTs connected to one busbar protection system.
Such a mixture of CTs is not usual, but it discloses an illustrative calculation example. This calcula-
tion example is based on the simplified assumption, that roughly the same short circuit values are
prevail for single phase to ground and phase to phase faults (see topic under Section 4.5.4.).
5.1. Data per bus section
5.2. Data per bay

Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3
if Line bay if Trafo bay
(both CTS identical )
CT type - Class X C400 TPY 5P20
INprim A 2000 1000 2000 2000
IN sec A 1 5 1 1
IBAmax A 1800 900 1800 1800
IK S Z1max kA - - 20 39
zone 1 ms - - 27 -
PN VA 30 100 (B-4) 30 30
n - not specified 20 - 20
kssc - - - 5 -
ktd - - - 6.4 -
UK V 600 - - -
PE VA 4 15 (Rct = 0.6) 1.5 1.5
l m 300 200 300 300
(copper) m 56 56 56 56
mm 2
2
A mm 6 6 6 6
PBG VA 3 0 3 3
BBP - Yes Yes Yes Yes
Z> - No No Yes No
DIFTRA - No No No Yes
b - - - - 1.5
a - - - - 1 (both sides)
Winding conn. - - - - Y (both sides)
13
5.3. Calculation-check
Calculation See Bay 1 Bay 2 Bay 3 if.. Remarks
section
Line Trafo
Determination of the accuracy limiting factors (n) and (n)

Direct determination of n 4.4.1. - - - - 20 -
UK INsec 4.4.1. - 23 - - - While calculating the effective

n= 1.3
PN + PE accuracy limiting factor of a CT
class X, the term containing the
nominal power PN is striked out
automatically.
U K I Nsec P + PE
n' = 1 .3 N
PN + PE PB + PE
n = n10P 0.84 4.4.1. - - 16.8 - - Corresponding to IEC accuracy

class 10P20
n = k ssc K td 4.4.1. - - - 32 - -
l
P B = P BG +

* 2 * I 2Nsec 4.4.2. VA 4.79 1.19 4.79 4.79 -
* A
P N + P E
4.4.2. - 89 119 160 100 Class x: see calculation above
n' = n
P B + PE
U I Nsec
n' = K
1 .3
PB + PE
CT performance check Busbar Protection

I
KS max 4.5.1. - 3.9 7.8 3.9 3.9 -
5* I
N prim
I
KS max 4.5.1. - o.k. o.k. o.k. o.k. Condition 1 Check passed!
n' >
5*I ?
N prim
n'10 for N 120ms ? 4.5.1. - o.k. o.k. o.k. o.k. Condition 2 Check passed!
CT performance check Line Protection

I
KS max 4.5.2. - - - 88 - Condition 1 close up line fault
a
I
N prim a = 4.5, since TN = 40 ms (50Hz)
I
4.5.2. - - - o.k. - Condition 1 Check passed!
n' > a * KS max
I ?
N prim
I 4.5.2. - - - 72 - Condition 2 zone 1 line fault

KS Z 1 max
k K = 7.2, since TZ1 =27 ms (50Hz)
I
N prim
I
KS Z 1 max 4.5.2. - - - o.k. - Condition 2 Check passed!
n'> k ?
I
N prim
CT performance check Transformer Protection

n' 15 4.5.3 - - - - o.k. Condition 1 Check passed!
?
1.4 b 4.5.3 - - - - o.k. Condition 2 Check passed!

n' *( *N +1)
a ?
Final conclusion
Results from the - The CTs installed in this station fulfill the All checks passed!
CT checks CT-requirements of the used protection
functions without any restrictions.
? Check criterion
14
IMPORTANT NOTICE!
The busbar protection REB500 / REB500sys may only be installed, operated and maintained
by trained personnel.
Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is assured, providing the infor-
mation and recommendations contained in the Operating Instructions.
It is scarcely possible for the instructions (inclusive this application note) to cover every
eventuality that can occur when using technical devices and systems. We would therefore
request the user to notify us directly or our agent of any unusual observations or of in-
stances, in which these instructions provide no or insufficient information.
In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations and safety procedures must
always be strictly observed both when connecting up and commissioning this equipment.
Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or setting resistors, which may be
necessary, may only be performed by appropriately qualified personnel.
We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage, which may result from incorrect
operation of this equipment, even if no reference is made to the particular situation in the
Operating Instructions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Power Technology Systems
Brown Boveri Strasse 6
CH-5400 Baden / Switzerland
Phone +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77
E-mail substation.automation@ch.abb.com
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Printed in Switzerland (08-07-0000-0)

December 08
12. OPTIONS FOR BAY PROTECTION
12.1. Application description 1MRB520295-Aen............................. 12-9

12.1.1. Configuring the bay protection using HMI500 ...................... 12-11
12.1.1.1. Overview.............................................................................. 12-11
12.1.1.2. Bay protection...................................................................... 12-11
12.1.1.3. Binary signal configuration................................................... 12-16
12.1.2. Protection function settings.................................................. 12-24
12.1.3. Viewing primary system measurements .............................. 12-25
12.1.4. Test sequencer .................................................................... 12-26
12.1.4.1. Starting the test sequencer .................................................. 12-26
12.1.4.2. Test sequencer operation .................................................... 12-27
12.1.4.3. Test sequence without trigger.............................................. 12-30
12.1.4.4. Test sequence with trigger................................................... 12-30
12.1.4.5. Example for unsuccessful autoreclosure ............................. 12-31
12.1.4.6. Executing sequences........................................................... 12-32
12.1.5. CT neutral grounding ........................................................... 12-33
12.2. Distance protection (DIST)................................................... 12-34

12.2.1. Application ........................................................................... 12-34
12.2.2. Features............................................................................... 12-34
12.2.3. Inputs and outputs ............................................................... 12-35
12.2.3.1. CT/VT inputs........................................................................ 12-35
12.2.3.2. Binary inputs ........................................................................ 12-35
12.2.3.3. Binary outputs...................................................................... 12-35
12.2.3.4. Measurements ..................................................................... 12-36
12.2.4. Distance protection function settings ................................... 12-37
12.2.4.1. General ................................................................................ 12-37
12.2.4.2. Starting ................................................................................ 12-37
12.2.4.3. Measurement....................................................................... 12-38
12.2.4.4. VT supervision ..................................................................... 12-39
12.2.4.5. Binary inputs ........................................................................ 12-39
12.2.4.6. Binary outputs...................................................................... 12-40
12.2.4.7. Trip schemes ....................................................................... 12-41
12.2.5. Explanation of parameters ................................................... 12-42
12.2.5.1. General ................................................................................ 12-42
12.2.5.2. Starting ................................................................................ 12-43
12.2.5.3. Measurement....................................................................... 12-44
12.2.5.4. VT supervision ..................................................................... 12-48
12.2.5.5. Binary inputs ........................................................................ 12-48
12.2.5.6. Binary outputs...................................................................... 12-51
12.2.5.7. Trip schemes ....................................................................... 12-53
12-1
12.2.6. Setting instructions............................................................... 12-55

12.2.6.1. General ................................................................................ 12-55
12.2.6.2. Starters ................................................................................ 12-55
12.2.6.3. Measurement....................................................................... 12-60
12.2.6.4. Definitive zone (Def) ............................................................ 12-68
12.2.6.5. Backup overcurrent unit (O/C Backup Protection) ............... 12-69
12.2.6.6. VT supervision ..................................................................... 12-69
12.2.6.7. Tripping logic ....................................................................... 12-70
12.2.6.8. Power-swing blocking .......................................................... 12-72
12.2.6.9. Assignment of binary inputs................................................. 12-72
12.2.7. Technical description ........................................................... 12-74
12.2.7.1. Starters ................................................................................ 12-74
12.2.7.2. Distance measurement ........................................................ 12-82
12.2.7.3. VT supervision ..................................................................... 12-89
12.2.7.4. Backup overcurrent function (O/C Backup).......................... 12-93
12.2.7.5. System logic ........................................................................ 12-94
12.2.7.6. Power swing blocking ........................................................ 12-123
12.3. Definite time over- and undercurrent protection (U/OCDT) 12-125

12.3.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-125
12.3.2. Features............................................................................. 12-125
12.3.3. Inputs and outputs ............................................................. 12-125
12.3.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-125
12.3.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-125
12.3.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-125
12.3.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-125
12.3.4. Definite time current function settings ................................ 12-126
12.3.5. Explanation of parameters ................................................. 12-126
12.3.6. Setting instructions............................................................. 12-127
12.4. Inverse time overcurrent protection (OC)........................... 12-130

12.4.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-130
12.4.2. Features............................................................................. 12-130
12.4.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-130
12.4.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-130
12.4.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-130
12.4.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-130
12.4.4. Inverse time overcurrent settings....................................... 12-131
12.5. Directional overcurrent definite time protection

(DIROCDT) ........................................................................ 12-136
12.5.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-136
12.5.2. Features............................................................................. 12-136
12-2

12.5.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-136
12.5.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-136
12.5.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-136
12.5.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-136
12.5.4. Directional overcurrent settings ......................................... 12-137
12.6. Directional overcurrent inverse time protection

(DIROCINV)....................................................................... 12-143
12.6.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-143
12.6.2. Features............................................................................. 12-143
12.6.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-143
12.6.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-143
12.6.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-143
12.6.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-143
12.6.4. Function settings................................................................ 12-144
12.7. Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection (EFOCDT). 12-152

12.7.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-152
12.7.2. Features............................................................................. 12-152
12.7.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-152
12.7.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-152
12.7.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-152
12.7.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-152
12.7.4. IDMT function settings ....................................................... 12-153
12.8. Definite time over- and undervoltage protection (U/OVDT) 12-157

12.8.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-157
12.8.2. Features............................................................................. 12-157
12.8.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-157
12.8.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-157
12.8.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-157
12.8.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-157
12.8.4. Definite time voltage function settings................................ 12-157
12-3
12.9. Direct. sensitive EF prot. for grounded systems

(DIREFGND)...................................................................... 12-161
12.9.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-161
12.9.2. Features............................................................................. 12-161
12.9.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-161
12.9.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-161
12.9.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-161
12.9.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-162
12.9.4. Sensitive ground fault protection settings .......................... 12-162
12.9.6.1. Coordination with the distance protection .......................... 12-165
12.9.6.2. Choice of operating mode.................................................. 12-166
12.9.6.3. Choice of transfer tripping scheme .................................... 12-166
12.9.6.4. Setting the enabling pick-up levels .................................... 12-171
12.9.6.5. Setting the characteristic angle.......................................... 12-172
12.9.6.6. Setting the basic time tBasic ............................................ 12-172
12.9.6.7. Circuit-breaker delay.......................................................... 12-173
12.9.6.8. The comparison time ......................................................... 12-173
12.9.6.9. Setting the waiting time tWait ........................................... 12-173
12.9.6.10. Setting the transient blocking time t TransBlk .................. 12-173
12.9.6.11. CT/VT inputs of the function .............................................. 12-174
12.9.6.12. Binary inputs of the function............................................... 12-174
12.10. Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded or

compensated networks (DIREFISOL)................................ 12-176
12.10.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-176
12.10.2. Features............................................................................. 12-176
12.10.3.1. CT/VT inputs:..................................................................... 12-176
12.10.3.2. Binary inputs: ..................................................................... 12-176
12.10.3.3. Binary outputs:................................................................... 12-176
12.10.3.4. Measured variables:........................................................... 12-176
12.10.4. Sensitive earth fault protection settings - DIREFISOL. ...... 12-177
12.10.5. Explanation of the parameters ........................................... 12-177
12.10.6. Setting instruction .............................................................. 12-178
12.10.6.1. Settings:............................................................................. 12-178
12.11. Three-phase current plausibility (I3PH).............................. 12-183

12.11.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-183
12.11.2. Features............................................................................. 12-183
12.11.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-183
12.11.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-183
12.11.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-183
12-4
12.11.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-183

12.11.4. Current plausibility function settings................................... 12-184
12.12. Three-phase voltage plausibility (U3PH)............................ 12-185

12.12.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-185
12.12.2. Features............................................................................. 12-185
12.12.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-185
12.12.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-185
12.12.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-185
12.12.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-185
12.12.4. Voltage plausibility function settings .................................. 12-186
12.13. Synchrocheck (SYNC) ....................................................... 12-187

12.13.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-187
12.13.2. Features............................................................................. 12-187
12.13.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-187
12.13.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-187
12.13.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-188
12.13.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-188
12.13.4. Synchrocheck function settings ......................................... 12-189
12.13.6.1. General .............................................................................. 12-195
12.13.6.2. Settings.............................................................................. 12-197
12.13.6.3. Binary inputs of the function............................................... 12-204
12.14. Autoreclosure (AR) ............................................................ 12-207

12.14.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-207
12.14.2. Features............................................................................. 12-207
12.14.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-207
12.14.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-207
12.14.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-208
12.14.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-209
12.14.4. Autoreclosure settings ....................................................... 12-209
12.14.5. Explanations of parameters ............................................... 12-211
12.14.6.1. General .............................................................................. 12-219
12.14.6.2. Connections between autoreclosure and distance
functions ............................................................................ 12-219
12.14.6.3. Connections between autoreclosure and overcurrent
functions ............................................................................ 12-221
12-5
12.14.6.4. Coordinating autoreclosure (AR) with first and second

main protections ................................................................ 12-222
12.14.6.5. Timers................................................................................ 12-224
12.14.6.6. External binary inputs ........................................................ 12-227
12.14.6.7. Close CB and signaling outputs......................................... 12-230
12.14.7. Timing diagrams ................................................................ 12-233
12.14.8. Checking the dead times ................................................... 12-240
12.15. Logic/Trip Logic (Logic)...................................................... 12-242

12.15.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-242
12.15.2. Features............................................................................. 12-242
12.15.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-242
12.15.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-242
12.15.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-242
12.15.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-242
12.15.4. Logic function settings ....................................................... 12-243
12.16. Delay / integrator (DELAY) ................................................ 12-245

12.16.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-245
12.16.2. Features............................................................................. 12-245
12.16.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-245
12.16.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-245
12.16.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-245
12.16.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-245
12.16.4. Delay/integrator function settings....................................... 12-246
12.16.6.1. Operation of the function without integration...................... 12-247
12.16.6.2. Operation of the function with integration........................... 12-248
12.17. Peak value overcurrent protection (OCINST) .................... 12-249

12.17.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-249
12.17.2. Features............................................................................. 12-249
12.17.3.1. CT inputs: .......................................................................... 12-249
12.17.3.2. Binary inputs: ..................................................................... 12-249
12.17.3.3. Binary outputs:................................................................... 12-249
12.17.3.4. Measurements: .................................................................. 12-249
12.17.4. Peak value current function settings - Current-Inst ............ 12-250
12.18. Peak value overvoltage protection (OVINST) .................... 12-253
12-6
12.18.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-253

12.18.2. Features............................................................................. 12-253
12.18.3.1. VT inputs............................................................................ 12-253
12.18.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-253
12.18.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-253
12.18.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-253
12.18.4. Peak value voltage function settings.................................. 12-254
12.19. Overtemperature protection (Overtemp.) .......................... 12-256

12.19.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-256
12.19.2. Features............................................................................. 12-256
12.19.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-256
12.19.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-256
12.19.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-256
12.19.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-256
12.19.4. Overtemperature protection settings.................................. 12-257
12.20. Transformer differential protection function (DIFTRA) ...... 12-263

12.20.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-263
12.20.2. Features............................................................................. 12-263
12.20.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-263
12.20.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-263
12.20.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-263
12.20.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-264
12.20.4. Transformer differential protection settings........................ 12-264
12.20.5. Explanation of Parameters................................................. 12-265
12.21. Frequency protection (Frequency) ..................................... 12-287

12.21.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-287
12.21.2. Features............................................................................. 12-287
12.21.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-287
12.21.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-287
12.21.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-287
12.21.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-287
12.21.4. Frequency function settings - Frequency ........................... 12-287
12-7
12.22. Rate-of-change of frequency protection (df/dt) ................. 12-290

12.22.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-290
12.22.2. Features............................................................................. 12-290
12.22.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-290
12.22.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-290
12.22.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-290
12.22.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-290
12.22.4. Rate-of-change frequency settings df/dt ......................... 12-291
12.23. Definite time overfluxing protection (U/fDT) ...................... 12-293

12.23.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-293
12.23.2. Features............................................................................. 12-293
12.23.4. Overfluxing function settings.............................................. 12-294
12.23.5. Explanation of parameters: ................................................ 12-294
12.24. Inverse time overfluxing (U/fINV) ...................................... 12-296

12.24.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-296
12.24.2. Features............................................................................. 12-296
12.24.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-296
12.24.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-296
12.24.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-296
12.24.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-296
12.24.4. Inverse time overfluxing function settings .......................... 12-297
12.25. Power protection (P) ......................................................... 12-301

12.25.1. Application ......................................................................... 12-301
12.25.2. Features............................................................................. 12-301
12.25.3.1. CT/VT inputs...................................................................... 12-301
12.25.3.2. Binary inputs ...................................................................... 12-301
12.25.3.3. Binary outputs.................................................................... 12-301
12.25.3.4. Measurements ................................................................... 12-301
12.25.4. Power function settings...................................................... 12-302
12-8
12. BAY PROTECTION
This section of the Operating Instructions only applies to

REB500sys.
12.1. Application description 1MRB520295-Aen
12-9
12-10
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen
Edition June 2008
Numerical Station Protection System

Busbar Protection with integrated Breaker Failure,
Line and Transformer Protection
AppAppicationp
Application Description
Baden/Switzerland
7th Edition
Applies for software version 7.50
All rights with respect to this document, including applications for patent and
registration of other industrial property rights, are reserved. Unauthorised use,
in particular reproduction or making available to third parties without our explicit
consent in writing, is prohibited.
This document has been carefully prepared and reviewed. Should in spite of
this the reader find an error, he is requested to inform us at his earliest
convenience.
The data contained herein purport solely to describe the product and are not a
warranty of performance or characteristic. It is with the best interest of our cus-
tomers in mind that we constantly strive to improve our products and keep them
abreast of advances in technology. This may, however, lead to discrepancies
between a product and its Technical Description or Operating Instructions.
REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen ABB Switzerland Ltd
Table of contents
1. INTRODUCTION ........................................................................ 3
1.1. Line protection variants............................................................... 3
1.2. Transformer protection variants .................................................. 4
2. STRUCTURE OF PROTECTION FUNCTION SOFTWARE....... 8
3. DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION VARIANTS.................. 11

3.1. Line protection variants............................................................. 11
3.1.1. L-V1 Line Variant 1 (Basic functionality)............................... 11
3.1.1.1. Typical protection scheme ........................................................ 11
3.1.1.2. Purpose and requirements........................................................ 11
3.1.1.3. Connections.............................................................................. 12
3.1.2. L-V2 Line Variant 2 (Basic funct. with function group 1)....... 13
3.1.2.3. Connections.............................................................................. 14
3.1.3.3. Connections.............................................................................. 17
3.1.4.3. Connections.............................................................................. 20
3.1.5.3. Connections.............................................................................. 23
3.2. Transformer protection variants ................................................ 25
3.2.1. T-V1 Transformer Variant 1 (basic funct. with Group1 prot.) 25
3.2.1.3. Connections.............................................................................. 26
3.2.2. T-V2 Transformer Variant 2.................................................. 28
3.2.2.3. Connections.............................................................................. 29
3.2.3. T-V3 Transformer Variant 3 (basic funct. with Group1 prot.) 31
3.2.3.3. Connections.............................................................................. 33
3.2.4. T-V4 Transformer Variant 4.................................................. 35
1
ABB Switzerland Ltd REB500sys 1MRB520295-Aen

3.2.4.3. Connections.............................................................................. 36
4. DOCUMENTATION .................................................................. 39
4.1. Connection diagrams Line protection variants ....................... 40
4.2. Connection diagrams Transformer protection variants .......... 50
2
1. INTRODUCTION
1.1. Line protection variants

The line protection arrangements (Line Variant 1 to Variant 5)
are widely encountered in HV and EHV networks:
Double busbar / main and transfer buses
One-and-half breaker
Single busbar
The circuit breakers, whether AIS or GIS, are mostly single-pole

mechanisms.
Application variants are introduced due to the need for
redundant main protection, complementary directional ground
fault (with/without communication), overcurrent, over-/
undervoltage protection etc., as well as variations in the physical
arrangements of the primary equipment itself.
The autoreclosure and synchrocheck functions, which are asso-
ciated with the breaker, can be located in independent terminals
or configured within the numerical line protection equipment.
This results in a large number of possible combinations.
Based on past experience and common practice, five variants
have been created for REB500sys, each containing a group of
protection functions. Table 1.1 shows which protection functions
are included in which variant (L-V1 to L-V5).
More than one instance of functions is available and may be
configured (e.g. two instances of the OCDT function)
Abbreviation of the Function no.

Function Function IEEE /ANSI L-V1 L-V2 L-V3 L-V4 L-V5
Definite time over and undercurrent protection OCDT 51 x x x x x
Inverse time overcurrent protection OCINV 51 x x x x x
Directional overcurrent definite time protection DIROCDT 67 x x x x x
Directional overcurrent inverse time protection DIROCINV 67 x x x x x
Definite time over and undervoltage protection OVDT 59/27 x x x x x
Direct. sensitive EF prot. for grounded systems DIREFGND 67N x x x x x
Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection I0INV 51N x x x x x
Logic LOGIC - x x x x x
Delay / integrator DELAY - x x x x x
Three phase current plausibility CHKI3PH 46 x x x x x
Three phase voltage plausibility CHKU3PH 47 x x x x x
Distance protection DIST 21 x x x
Autoreclosure AR 79 x x x
Synchrocheck SYNC 25 x x
Table 1.1 Bay Protection functions contained in the Line

Variants 1 to 5 depending on specific requirements
3
For each of these variants, a typical configuration (for single or

double busbar substations) has been selected and described in
this document.
These configurations can be treated as ABB preferred solutions,

optimizing the usage of optocoupler inputs and trip/signaling
outputs to meet application requirements.
Minor alterations to these standard configurations might be
necessary to tailor the engineering for specific needs. For
example, if dedicated alarm contacts are essential, it may be
necessary to use a common communication channel for the
distance and directional earth fault protection, along with a single
remote trip channel instead of the segregated channels shown in
these standard configurations.
In addition to the so-called bay level protection (BP) functions
(Table 1.1), each Variant L-V1 to L-V5 contains the following
station level protection (SP) functions:
BBP (Busbar Protection)

BFP (Breaker-Failure Protection)
EFP (End Fault Protection)
It may be noted that the EFP is recommended, if faults between

a circuit breaker and the CT (end-zone), can not be cleared by
busbar or bay protection.
1.2. Transformer protection variants

The protection arrangements (Transformer Variant 1 to 4) are
widely encountered in MV, HV and EHV networks:
Double busbar
One-and-half breaker
Single busbar
The circuit breakers, whether AIS or GIS, are mostly three-pole
mechanisms.
4
Functionalities to protect transformers fall under the following

categories:
a) Differential, biased or un-biased
b) Current based ( Ex: O/c, Thermal Overload)
c) Voltage based ( Ex: OV, Overflux)
d) Voltage and current based ( Ex: Directional O/c)
Protection philosophies broadly follow the outlined concepts:
Complementary, Group 1 and Group 2

wherein:
Functionalities of a) are distributed between Group 1 and 2
Functionalities of b) are in Group 2 and/or in Group 1
Functionalities of c) are in Group 2
Functionalities of d) are normally in Group 2
Main and Back-up

wherein:
Functionalities of a) are in Main
Functionalities of b) are in Back-up and/or in Main
Functionalities of c) are in Main
Functionalities of d) are in Back-up (if needed)
The variants treated herein are such that all the above
combinations can be realized for single and double bus stations
and with limitations in 1-1/2 breaker stations.
The transformer variants 1 to 3 provide transformer differential

protection, thermal overload protection and back-up protection
functions. The Variant 4 provides back-up protection functions,
including thermal overload protection.
Based on past experience, common practice and the scope of
protection functions available, 4 variants have been created for
REB500sys, containing a group of protection functions.
Table 1.2 shows which protection functions are included in which
variant (T-V1 to T-V4).
5
Abbreviation of the Function no.

Function Function IEEE /ANSI T-V1 T-V2 T-V3 T-V4
Definite time over and undercurrent protection OCDT 51 x x x x
Inverse time overcurrent protection OCINV 51 x x x x
Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection I0INV 51N x x x x
Three phase current plausibility CHKI3PH 46 x x x x
Peak value over and undercurrent protection OCINST 50 x x x x
Thermal overload TH 49 x x x x
Logic LOGIC - x x x x
Delay / integrator DELAY - x x x x
Definite time overfluxing protection U/fDT 24 x x x
Inverse time overfluxing protection U/fINV 24 x x x
Transformer differential protection DIFTRA 87T x x x
Directional overcurrent definite time protection DIROCDT 67 x x
Directional overcurrent inverse time protection DIROCINV 67 x x
Definite time over and undervoltage protection OVDT 59/27 x x
Direct. sensitive EF prot. for grounded systems DIREFGND 67N x x
Three phase voltage plausibility CHKU3PH 47 x x
Peak value over and undervoltage protection OVINST 59 x x
Rate of change frequency protection df/dt 81 x x
Frequency Freq 81 x x
Power P 32 x x
Distance protection DIST 21 x
Table 1.2 Protection functions contained in Transformer

Variants 1 to 4
In the transformer variant 1, a typical configuration for a three

winding transformer or an autotransformer in a single or double
busbar substation has been selected and described in the
document. The protection logic scheme is arranged in a way that
it can be easily reduced to a two winding transformer
configuration.
In the transformer variants 2-4, typical configurations for a two
winding transformer in a single or double busbar substation has
been selected and described.
These configurations can be treated as ABB preferred solutions,
optimizing the usage of optocoupler inputs and trip/signaling
outputs to meet application requirements.
Minor alterations to this standard configuration might be
necessary to tailor the engineering for specific needs.
Within this document, the following abbreviations for the
transformer sides are used.
Transformer primary side A-Side
Transformer secondary side B-Side
Transformer tertiary side C-Side (if existing)
The protection functions in REB500sys together with functions in
Group 2 or Back-up terminals along with mechanical protection
guard units are arranged to form a tripping concept which
encompasses breakers on different voltage levels. Certain
functions in station protection (SP) also have to trip surrounding
breakers.
6
Tripping methodologies are not unique and are based on

existing practices which vary geographically. As an example,
one particular methodology has been considered and
corresponding comprehensive trip circuits depicted for each
Variant in Fig. 4.13, Fig. 4.16, Fig. 4.19 and Fig. 4.22.
All tripping schemes shown in this document are typical
diagrams, which are intended for information purposes.
In addition to the so-called bay level protection (BP) functions
(Table 1.2), the Transformer Variants 1 to 4 contain the following
station level protection (SP) functions (SP functions for the A-
Side of the transformer):
BBP (Busbar Protection)
BFP (Breaker-Failure Protection)
EFP (End Fault Protection)
It may be noted that the EFP is recommended, if faults between
a circuit breaker and the CT (end-zone), can not be cleared by
busbar or bay protection.
7
2. STRUCTURE OF PROTECTION FUNCTION

SOFTWARE
Fig. 2.1 and the following tables give an overview of the structure
of the station and bay level protection functions in the bay unit
500BU03 (also shown here as BU03). The line protection
functionalities that vary in each of the configurations are
accessed through so-called bay protection (BP) input and BP
output blocks. These are software blocks and can accommodate
up to 20 input and 120 output signals respectively.
It is to be noted that all signals that are to be mapped to the
output contacts, substation automation systems SAS (via LON or
IEC 60870-5-103 bus) or LEDs have first to be programmed onto
the BP output block.
Fig. 2.1 Structure of protection function software in a bay

unit 500BU03, containing station and bay level
protection functions
8
Signal Name Definition Remark

1 OC input Optocoupler input of bay 20 binary inputs per bay unit
unit BU03
2 CR output Relay (contact) output of 16 binary outputs per bay unit
bay unit BU03
3 U, I input Analog input of bay unit Assignment to SP functions is
fixed.
Assignment to BP functions is
partly configurable.
4 BP input Logical input of BP part 20 logical inputs per bay unit
BU03
5 BP output Logical output of BP part 120 logical outputs per bay
unit BU03
Table 2.1 Explanations to inputs / outputs
Signal Name Definition Remark

6 SP Station protection part Contains station protection
functions
SP function Station protection function Available functions ref. to [1]
Section 3, Table 3.3
e.g. BBP, BFP, EFP
7 BP Bay protection part Contains bay protection func-
tions
BP function Bay protection function Available functions ref. to [1]
Section 3, Table 3.7
e.g. DIST, OCDT
[1] Operating Instructions REB500sys, 1MRB520292-Uen
Table 2.2 Explanations to function execution part
9
Signal Definition Remark

8 OC input assigned to SP function Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. 13710_Start BFP_L1_1 input
9 SP function assigned to CR output Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. 23105_BFP TRIP
10 OC input assigned to BP input Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. 111205_Ext Block DIST
11 BP input assigned to BP function Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. 111205_Ext Block DIST
12 BP function assigned to BP output Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. 211880_Carr Send
13 BP-output assigned to CR output Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. 211880_Carr Send
14 BP-output assigned to SP function Assignment via software HMI500
e.g. Trip_DIST Start_BFP
15 SP-function assigned to BP input Assignment via software HMI500
16 OC-input assigned to SP function Assignment via software HMI500
and BP input
e.g. 11530/ 118515_Q0 Open and CB
OPEN
17 SP function and BP output as- Assignment via software HMI500
signed to CR output
e.g. 21110/ 220815_TRIP
18 Internal connections between BP- Assignment via software HMI500
functions
19 Internal connections between SP- Automatic assignment done by
functions REB500 ITT-system (ITT =
intertripping)
Table 2.3 Explanations to signal connections
Note: Signals from the SP functions have 5-digit numbers,

as in REB500.
Signals from the BP functions have 6-digit numbers.
10
3. DESCRIPTION OF CONFIGURATION VARIANTS
The 6 standard variants are described below. Fig. 4.1 to Fig.

4.10 contain the corresponding schematic drawings for Line
Protection, Fig. 4.11 to Fig. 4.22 that for Transformer Protection.
The corresponding functions for the variants must be licensed by
ABB.
3.1. Line protection variants
3.1.1. L-V1 Line Variant 1 (Basic functionality)

3.1.1.1. Typical protection scheme
Line Bay REB500sys Bay Unit Line Variant 1 (L-V1)
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
C.B.
Back-Up
I
OCDT I0INV
C.T.
U
V.T.
DIROCDT
CHKI3PH
Fig. 3.1 Typical protection scheme Line Variant 1
3.1.1.2. Purpose and requirements

This variant shall be used, where main 1 and main 2 protections
are in separate devices, independent of REB500sys. The
autoreclosure and synchrocheck functions could be located in
the main 1 and / or main 2 hardware or elsewhere.
The REB500sys would also contain the back-up. While delayed
back-up protection would be carried out by OCDT (Definite time
over- and undercurrent protection) and I0INV (Inverse time earth
fault overcurrent protection) functions, a fast back-up through the
DIROCDT (Directional overcurrent definite time protection) is
11
also possible with a carrier communication scheme. Without the

carrier scheme, the DIROCDT would operate as a delayed back-
up protection.
When an external autoreclosure function is in service, it is
recommended to operate the DIROCDT only as a delayed back-
up in single-pole applications.
Broken CT conductor can be detected with the CHKI3PH (Three
phase current plausibility) function which shall be used to initiate
an alarm.
In addition to these protection functions, the license variant L-V1
contains the functions OCINV, DIROCINV, OVDT, CHKU3PH
and DIREFGND (licensed functions ref. to Table 1.1), which can
be used to extend to protection scheme.
3.1.1.3. Connections
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.1.
For ease of understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the Oper-
ating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (isolator positions Q1 and Q2)
are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs 17, 18
and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are used for
the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the inputs 01 to
04 for the starting signals (phase segregated as well as 3 phase)
from both main 1 and main 2 protections.
The back-up protections start the BFP function internally via
dedicated signals through the BP output block.
The Carrier Receive signal required for the DIROCDT function
is taken in from input 05 through BP input 03.
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip coil 1
and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segregated. Output 02 is used
for interlocking the manual close command to the circuit-breaker.
Outputs 04 and 06 serve the purpose of sending remote trips to
the other end of the line.
Output 05 is used for the carrier send of the DIROCDT function.
12
While the station level function signals TRIP (21110) and BFP
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the line protection
trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
All the REB500sys line protection functions shall trip 3-pole.
Further, these are arranged to activate both trip coils since they
share the same hardware as the station level functions, which
have to trip both the coils.
3.1.2. L-V2 Line Variant 2 (Basic funct. with function group 1)
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
Line protection
C.B.
DIST
I
C.T.
DIREFGND
U
V.T.
Line back-up protection

OCDT I0INV
CHKI3PH

This variant shall be used, where main 2 protection is included in
the REB500sys terminal with main 1 in a separate device.
Autoreclosure and synchrocheck functions could be in an inde-
pendent hardware, for example REC316*4.
The REB500sys would then contain the main 2 DIST (distance
protection) along with the DIREFGND (Directional ground fault
protection).
The REB500sys would also contain the back-up protection. De-
layed back-up would be carried out by OCDT (Definite time over-
and undercurrent protection) and I0INV (Inverse time earth fault
overcurrent protection) functions.
13
The distance function in REB500sys would operate with an ex-

ternal autoreclosure function. Broken CT conductor can be de-
tected with the CHKI3PH (Three phase current plausibility)
function which shall be used to initiate an alarm.
contains the functions OCINV, DIROCDT, DIROCINV, OVDT
and CHKU3PH (licensed functions ref. to Table 1.1), which can
signals.
Detailed descriptions of all functions are contained in the
Operating Instructions 1MRB520292-Uen.
Inputs
from main 1 protection.
The distance function in REB500sys starts the BFP function,
phase segregated, while the back-up protections start the BFP
function 3-pole, internally via dedicated signals through the BP
output block.
The Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP input
01 to block the distance function, while input 19 through BP input
09 brings in the Prepare 1-pole trip signal from the
autoreclosure function to the main 2 distance protection.
The carrier receive signals required for the DIST and
DIREFGND functions are taken in from inputs 05 and 06 through
BP inputs 03 and 04 respectively.
The DIREFGND function takes in the Breaker All Poles Closed
condition to activate itself from input 11 through BP input 05.
The Manual Close command is used for the switch-onto-fault
feature within the distance function, taken from input 08 via BP
input 02.
The overcurrent function OCDT is kept blocked when the dis-
tance function is operational.
14
Outputs
for close block interlock purposes. Outputs 04 and 06 serve the
purpose of sending remote trips to the other end of the line.
Outputs 05 and 07 are used for the Carrier Send of the DIST
and DIREFGND functions. It is also possible to have a common
communication channel for DIST and DIREFGND functions.
Outputs 08 to 10 are used for interaction with the autoreclosure
function. The autoreclosure functionality of the REL316*4 would
necessitate these signals. The signal Start SOTF would not be
required if the Manual Close command is used to block the
autoreclosure function.
trip outputs shall be in self reset mode. The distance function
shall trip single-pole while all other line protection functions shall
trip 3-pole. Further, these are arranged to activate both trip coils
since they share the same hardware as the station level func-
tions, which have to trip both the coils.
15
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
Line protection
C.B.
DIST
I
C.T. AR
U DIREFGND
V.T.

OCDT I0INV
CHKI3PH

This variant shall be used, where main 2 protections are
included in the REB500sys terminal with main 1 in a separate
device. Further, an autoreclosure function would be introduced in
both main 1 and main 2 protection terminals, but without the
synchrocheck function. In some instances, the autoreclosure is
carried out without the synchrocheck release criterion.
The REB500sys would then contain the main 2 DIST (Distance
protection) along with the DIREFGND (Directional sensitive EF
prot. for grounded systems).
The REB500sys would also contain the back-up protection.
Delayed back-up would be carried out by OCDT (Definite time
fault overcurrent protection) functions.
In order to ensure that at any time, only one autoreclosure
function is in operation, the following philosophy is implemented:
Normally, the autoreclosure function in main 1 is active. It
interacts with the distance protections of both main 1 and main 2
16
terminals. When the main 1 terminal is out of service or is in test

mode, the blocking input on the autoreclosure function in main 2
terminal is automatically removed.
Only the distance function in REB500sys would then operate
with the autoreclosure function internally.
an alarm.
signals.
Inputs
The distance function in REB500sys starts the BFP function,
phase segregated while the back-up protections start the BFP
output block.
The Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP input
01 to block the distance function, while input 19 through BP input
09 brings in the Prepare 1-pole trip signal from the
autoreclosure function in main 1 to the main 2 distance protec-
tion.
The Carrier Receive signals required for the DIST and
17
The autoreclosure function takes in the signal OCO Ready

from input 12 through BP input 08 and the signal main 1
Healthy/Test mode to block itself from input 20 through BP input
10. In addition the busbar and breaker-failure protection can
block the autoreclosure internally via the OR gate 12.
The Manual Close command is used for the switch-onto-fault
feature within the distance function, taken from input 08 via BP
input 02. The close command also blocks the autoreclosure
function. The CB Open input to block the autoreclosure is also
taken internally through BP input 07.
The three inputs Start, Trip CB and Trip CB 3P needed for
the autoreclosure function are taken internally from the distance
function.
When the autoreclosure in REB500sys is operational, the zone
extension logic is also available and is controlled by the
autoreclosure function as shown.
The overcurrent function OCDT is kept blocked when the dis-
tance function is operational.
Outputs
function in main 1 terminal. The autoreclosure functionality of the
REL316*4 would necessitate these signals. It shall however be
ensured that the manual close command is used to block the AR
function in main 1 terminal as well.
The close command from the autoreclosure function is issued
via output 03.
The distance function shall trip single-pole while all other line
protection functions shall trip 3-pole.
18
Furthermore, these are arranged to trip both trip coils since they
share the same hardware as the station level functions which
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
U BB2
UBB1 Line protection

C.B.
DIST
I
C.T. AR
UL
SYNC
V.T.
DIREFGND

OCDT I0INV
CHKI3PH

This variant shall be used, where main 2 protection is included in
the REB500sys terminal with main 1 in a separate device.
Further, the autoreclosure and synchrocheck functions would be
introduced in both main 1 and main 2 protection terminals.
The REB500sys would then contain the main 2 DIST (Distance
protection) along with the DIREFGND (Directional sensitive EF
prot. for grounded systems) function. The REB500sys would
also contain the back-up protection. Delayed back-up would be
carried out by OCDT (Definite time over- and undercurrent
protection) and I0INV (Inverse time earth fault overcurrent
protection) functions.
In order to ensure that at any time, only one autoreclosure
function is in operation, the following philosophy is implemented:
19
Normally, the autoreclosure function in main 1 is active. It

interacts with the distance protections of both main 1 and main 2
terminals. When the main 1 terminal is out of service or is in test
mode, the blocking input on the autoreclosure function in main 2
terminal is automatically removed. Only the distance function in
REB500sys would then operate with the autoreclosure function
internally.
Synchrocheck is only used with 3-pole autoreclosure. The oper-
ating mode (e.g. dead-bus, live-line) is selected via a setting
parameter in the function. The inputs for remotely selecting the
operating mode are not used here.
an alarm.
signals.
Inputs
The distance function in REB500sys starts the BFP function
phase segregated, while the back-up protections start the BFP
output block.
The signal Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP
input 01 to block the distance function and through BP input 11
to block the synchrocheck function. Input 19 through BP input 09
brings in the Prepare 1-pole trip signal from the autoreclosure
function in main 1 to the main 2 distance protection.
20
The Carrier Receive signals required for the DIST and

The autoreclosure function takes in the signal OCO Ready from
input 12 through BP input 08 and the signal Main 1 Healthy/Test
mode to block itself from input 20 through BP input 10.
Inputs 07 and 08 are the Bus VT MCB Fail signals to block the
synchrocheck function taken in through BP inputs 12 and 13 re-
spectively.
Instead of taking the Manual Close command the SOTF feature
of the DIST function will be started internally by SOTF MODE
NONDIR. For the autoreclosure function it is replaced by the
CondBLK AR connected internally to Start SOTF of the DIST
function. The CB Open input to block the autoreclosure is also
taken internally through BP input 07.
The three inputs Start, Trip CB and Trip CB 3P needed for the
autoreclosure function are taken internally from the DIST
function.
The voltage selection for the synchrocheck function is done
using the bus isolator positions taken in internally through BP in-
puts 14 and 15.
When the autoreclosure in REB500sys is operational, the zone
extension logic is also possible and is controlled by the auto-
reclosure function as shown.
Further, bus and BFP trips also block autoreclosure through OR
gate 12.
The overcurrent function OCDT is kept blocked when the
distance function is operational.
Outputs
21

function in main 1 terminal. The autoreclosure functionality of the
REL316*4 would necessitate these signals. It shall however be
ensured that the manual close command is used to block the AR
function in main 1 terminal as well.
The close command from the autoreclosure function is issued
via output 03.
The distance function shall trip single-pole while all other line
protection functions shall trip 3-pole.
Further, these are arranged to activate both trip coils since they
BB - I
Station Protection
BB - II
BBP BFP EFP
Bay Protection
UBB2
UBB1 Line protection (functions to complement the external

C.B.
Main 1/ Main 2 protetcion)
AR
I
C.T. SYNC
UL OVDT
V.T.
OCDT I0INV
DIROCDT
CHKI3PH
22

This variant shall be used, where main 1 and main 2 protections
are included in separate device, independent of REB500sys.
However, the autoreclosure and synchrocheck functions shall be
in the REB500sys protection terminal.
The REB500sys would then have the back-up protection. While
delayed back-up would be carried out by OCDT (Definite time
fault overcurrent protection) functions, a fast back-up through the
DIROCDT (Directional overcurrent definite time protection) is
also possible with a carrier communication scheme. Without the
carrier scheme, the DIROCDT would operate as a delayed back-
up protection.
When the autoreclosure function is in service, it is recommended
to operate the DIROCDT only as a delayed back-up in single-
pole applications.
For long line applications, an OVDT (Definite time overvoltage
and undervoltage protection) function is also introduced.
The inputs 10 and 11 (protection start and trip inputs to the
autoreclosure) are connected to the corresponding output
contacts from the main 1 and main 2 protection devices.
Synchrocheck is only used with 3-pole autoreclosure. The
operating mode (e.g. dead-bus, live-line) is selected via a setting
parameter in the function. The inputs for remotely selecting the
operating mode are not used here.
alarm.
contains the functions OCINV, DIROCINV, CHKU3PH and
DIREFGND (licensed functions ref. to Table 1.1), which can be
used to extend to protection scheme.
signals.
23
Inputs
from main 1 protection. The back-up protections start the BFP
output block.
The signal Line VT MCB Fail is taken in via input 10 through BP
input 11 to block the synchrocheck function.
The Carrier Receive signal required for the DIROCDT function
is taken in from input 05 through BP input 03.
The autoreclosure function takes in the signal OCO Ready
from input 19 through BP input 08.
Inputs 07 and 08 are the Bus VT MCB Fail signals to block the
synchrocheck function taken in through BP inputs 12 and 13 re-
spectively.
The manual close command is used to block the autoreclosure
function. It is taken form the input 06. The CB Open input to
block the autoreclosure is taken internally through BP input 07.
The three inputs Start, Trip CB and Trip CB 3P from both
main 1 and main 2 protections needed for the autoreclosure
function are taken from the inputs 10 to 12.
The voltage selection for the synchrocheck function is done
using the bus isolator positions taken in internally through BP in-
puts 14 and 15.
Furthermore, busbar and breaker-failure protection trips also
block autoreclosure through OR gate 12.
Outputs
for close block interlock purposes. The outputs 04 and 06 serve
the purpose of sending remote trip to the other end of the line.
Output 05 is used for the Carrier Send of the DIROCDT func-
tion.
Outputs 08 and 07 are used to issue the Prepare 3 Pole trip
commands to both main 1 and main 2.
24
The close Command from the autoreclosure function is issued

via output 03.
All line protection functions shall trip 3-pole.
Further, these are arranged to activate both trip coils, since they
3.2. Transformer protection variants
3.2.1. T-V1 Transformer Variant 1 (basic funct. with Group1 prot.)
Transformer Bay 2wdg. / 3 wdg. Transf. REB500sys Bay Unit Transformer Variant 1 (T-V1)
BB - A - I
Station Protection A - Side
BB - A - II
BBP BFP EFP
Transformer Bay Auto-Transf.
BB - A - I Bay Protection
BB - A - II DIFTRA
C.B. A
A - Side
IA
C.T. A TH OCINST OCDT OCINV I0INV
A = primary side
C.B. A B = secondary side B - Side

T1
C = tertiary side OCDT OCINV I0INV
IA
C.T. A
A = primary side
IB
T1 C - Side (if existing)
B = secondary side
C = tertiary side IC OCDT OCINV I0INV
C.T. B C.T. C
CHKI3PH A - Side
C.B. B C.B. C
IC
CHKI3PH B - Side
IB
C.T. C CHKI3PH C - Side (if existing)
BB - B BB - C (If existing)
C.T. B
C.B. C C.B. B
BB - C BB - B
Fig. 3.6 Typical protection scheme Transformer Variant 1

This variant shall be used for three winding transformer or auto-
transformer, where Group 1 functionalities are realized in the
REB500sys and Group 2 protection as well as supplemental
25
back-up protection functions (if existing) are in separate devices,

independent of REB500sys.
The DIFFTRA (Biased Transformer differential protection)
provides protection for short circuit types of faults in
transformers. It compares the current from the CTs around the
transformer, usually located close to the CBs. In order to
complement the oil and winding temperature devices the TH
(Thermal overload) function shall be used. The OCINST (Peak
value over- and undercurrent protection) function processes
instantaneous values and is therefore largely independent of
frequency.
Current-based protection is carried out by the functions:

OCDT (Definite time over- and undercurrent protection)
OCINV (Inverse time overcurrent protection)
I0INV (Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection)
Current plausibility check is carried out with:

CHKI3PH (Three phase current plausibility) broken CT
conductor can be detected with this function. It
shall be used to initiate an alarm.
signals.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 13 to 16 (A-Side, isolator positions Q1
and Q2) are used for the replica of the BBP function. The inputs
17, 18 and 09 (breaker positions and closing command) are
used for the EFP function, while the BFP function takes in the
inputs 01 and 03 for the starting signals (3 phase starting from
protection Group 2 and external back up protection).
The optocoupler inputs 5 to 8 are used for the connection of the
mechanical protection inputs. Each input can be assigned to the
REB500sys inherent event and disturbance recording. The
tripping inputs (optocoupler input 5 mechanic prot. trip 1 and
optocoupler input 7 mechanic prot. trip 2) are routed to the
26
REB500sys Transformer protection trip 1 and 2 (output 03 and

07). In addition the mechanical protection trip and the breaker
position (Q0-ON auxiliary contact input 18) are connected to
the inputs of an AND-Gate. The output of this gate is connected
to the External start input of the BFP protection. While the
circuit breaker Q0 is closed a mechanical protection trip will start
(External start) the BFP regardless of the current amplitude in
the bay concerned. The Q0-ON input ensures, that the BFP will
be reset, when the CB opens.
The optocoupler inputs 10 to 12 are inputs of the DIFFTRA
function. Input 10 is used, to block the protection function. The
input 11 activates the inrush restraint feature, although the
transformer is already energized (e.g. energizing a parallel
transformer -condition), while input 12 activates the high-set
setting instead of the basic setting which is normally used.
The optocoupler inputs 02, 04, 19 and 20 are not used and free
for configuration accordingly.
Outputs
The outputs 11 to 13 and 14 to 16 are used to activate trip circuit
breaker A-side coil 1 and trip coil 2 respectively, phase segre-
gated. Output 02 is used for interlocking the manual close
command to this circuit-breaker.
The outputs 3 and 7 are used to activate the transformer
protection tripping relays 94-1 and 94-2, in order to trip the circuit
breakers around the transformer, if the REB500sys transformer
protection has picked-up.
TRIP (23105) shall be set in latched mode, the transformer
protection trip outputs shall be in self reset mode.
The outputs 06 and 08 serve the purpose of sending remote trip
to the transformers B- side and output 09 the C-side (if existing).
In parallel to a REB500sys transformer protection tripping-
command, which will trip all CBs around the transformer, a
starting command for the A-Side BFP (integrated in the
REB500sys) is activated internally and starting commands are
sent through the outputs 10 and 04 to BFP on B-Side and C-
Side (if existing).
The outputs 04 could be used for a hardwired alarm, if there is
no BFP on C-Side.
The output 05 is not used and free for configuration accordingly.
27
3.2.2. T-V2 Transformer Variant 2

(basic funct. with Group1 or Main prot.)

This variant shall be used for two winding transformer, where
functionalities of either Gorup1 in the complementing or Main
protection in the Main & Back-up approach are realized in the
REB500sys and Group 2 protection as well as supplemental
back-up protection functions (if existing) are in separate devices,
independent of REB500sys. In this variant, one voltage input is
available which can be assigned to overexcitation protection.
frequency.
28

Voltage-based protection is carried out by the functions:

Overfluxing protection
U/fDT (Definite time overfluxing protection)
U/fINV (Inverse time overfluxing protection)

CHKI3PH (Three phase current plausibility) Broken CT
signals.
Inputs
REB500sys inherent event and disturbance recording.
The tripping inputs (optocoupler input 5 mechanic prot. trip 1
and optocoupler input 7 mechanic prot. trip 2) are routed to
the REB500sys Transformer protection trip 1 and 2 (output 03
and 07). In addition the mechanical protection trip and the
breaker position (Q0-ON auxiliary contact input 18) are
29
connected to the inputs of an AND-Gate. The output of this gate

is connected to the External start input of the BFP protection.
While the circuit breaker Q0 is closed a mechanical protection
trip will start (External start) the BFP regardless of the current
amplitude in the bay concerned. The Q0-ON input ensures, that
the BFP will be reset, when the CB opens.
The optocoupler input 20 is a common blocking input connected
to the voltage functions.
The optocoupler inputs 02, 04 and 19 are not used and free for
configuration accordingly.
Outputs
to the transformers B- side.
REB500sys) is activated internally while a starting command is
sent through the output 10 to BFP on B-Side.
The outputs 04, 05 and 09 are not used and free for
30
3.2.3. T-V3 Transformer Variant 3 (basic funct. with Group1 prot.)

functionalities of Group 1 are realized in the REB500sys and
Group 2 protection as well as supplemental back-up protection
functions (if existing) are in separate devices, independent of
REB500sys. In this variant, three voltage input are available
which can be assigned to voltage related functions.
frequency.

31
Current and Voltage -based protection is carried out by the

functions:
DIROCDT (Directional overcurrent definite time protection)
DIROCINV (Directional overcurrent inverse time protection)
DIREFGND (Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded
systems)

OVDT (Definite time over- and undervoltage protection)
OVINST (Peak value over- and undervoltage protection)
Frequency protection/ Load shedding functions

FREQ (Frequency)
df/dt (Rate of change frequency protection)
Power monitoring is carried out by the function:

P (Power)

CHKI3PH (Three phase current plausibility) BrokenCT
Voltage plausibility check is carried out with:

CHKU3PH (Three phase voltage plausibility) is connected to
block the directional (phase-) overcurrent
functions and to initiate an alarm.
In addition to these protection functions, the license variant T-V3

contains the function DIST (Distance Protection), which can be
used to extend the protection scheme (licensed transformer
protection functions ref. to Table 1.2).
32
signals.
Inputs
The optocoupler inputs 02, 04 and 19 are not used and free for
33
Outputs
to the transformers B- side.
sent through the outputs 10 to BFP on B-Side.
34
3.2.4. T-V4 Transformer Variant 4

(basic funct. of transformer Back-Up prot.)

functionalities of transformer Back-up protection are realized in
the REB500sys and Group 1 or Main protection functions are in
separate devices, independent of REB500sys.
In order to complement the oil and winding temperature devices
the TH (Thermal overload) function shall be used if not
available in separate devices, independent of REB500sys. The
OCINST (Peak value over- and undercurrent protection)
function processes instantaneous values and is therefore largely
independent of frequency.

35
Current and voltage-based protection is carried out by the

functions:
DIROCDT (Directional overcurrent definite time protection)
DIROCINV (Directional overcurrent inverse time protection)
DIREFGND (Directional sensitive EF protection for grounded
systems)

OVDT (Definite time over- and undervoltage protection)
OVINST (Peak value over- and undervoltage protection)
Frequency protection/ Load shedding functions

FREQ (Frequency)
df/dt (Rate of change frequency protection)
Power monitoring is carried out by the function:

P (Power)

CHKI3PH (Three phase current plausibility) BrokenCT
Voltage plausibility check is carried out with:

CHKU3PH (Three phase voltage plausibility) is connected to
block the directional (phase-) overcurrent
functions and to initiate an alarm.
The connection diagram is shown in Fig. 4.20. For ease of
understanding, the texts are indicated for all relevant signals.
36
Inputs
protection Group 1 / Group 2 and external back up protection).
The optocoupler inputs 02, 04, 10, 11, 12 and 19 are not used
and free for configuration accordingly.
Outputs
Back-Up protection has picked-up.
to the transformers B-side.
37
In parallel to a REB500sys transformer Back-Up protection

tripping-command, which will trip all CBs around the transformer,
a starting command for the A-Side BFP (integrated in the
sent through the outputs 10 to BFP on B-Side.
38
4. DOCUMENTATION
Data Sheet REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520308-Ben

Operating Instructions REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen
Brochure REB500sys 1KHA-000726-SEN
CT requirements for REB500sys 1KHL020347-Aen
39
4.1. Connection diagrams Line protection variants

OC Inputs HV/EHV, Double Bus, 1-Pole Breaker, Line Variant 1 (L-V1) CR Outputs
Q1 OFF
11530 C TRIP
Q1 ON 21110 11
11530 D
Q2 OFF
11530 C BBP
Q2 ON 12
11530 D
13
Q0 OFF
11530 A 14
Q0 ON
11530 B SP ITT
Q0 Manual Close Command + AR CLOSE Command EFP Rem TRIP
11505 24105
15
Start L1 (Main 1/ Main 2)
13710
13720 16
13730
Start L1L2L3
13740 BFP
02
BFP TRIP
23105
Rem TRIP
13785 23110 04
06
BP Default Output
In Service
21805
Start
L1L2L3
Blk part Alarm CU
BP Configurable 01
BP Input Output
Trip CB
214105 01
Start L1
214710 15
Carr. Rec. Start L2
03 114805 214715 16
Start L3
214720 17
Carr. Send
214805 04 05
DIROCDT OR
09
212105 Trip 07
OCDT
221105 Trip 08
I0INV
224105 Trip 09
CHKI3Ph
03
(Spare)
07
(Spare)
08
(Spare) (Spare)
09
(Spare) (Spare)
10
(Spare) (Spare)
(Spare)
11
(Spare)
12
(Spare)
19
(Spare)
(Spare)
Fig. 4.1 Configuration Line Variant 1
40
Binary inputs Binary outputs

Line Variant 1 Line Variant 1
1 1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C
2 C R01 2 In service
OC 02
Start BFP Phase L2 3
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03 C R02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC 04 6
7
7
8
9
C R03 8 Spare
Carrier recei ve, dir. O/C p rot. OC 05
10 9
Spare OC 06
11 10
C R04 Remote tri p, channel 1
12 11
13 C R05
12
Carrier send, dir. O/C prot.
OC 07
14 13
OC 08
Manual close command 15 C R06 Remote trip, channel 2
14
16 C R07 Spare
15
Q0 Manual Close comm and 17
OC 09
+ AR Close command 18
1
1
Spare OC 10 B D
2
2
Spare OC 11 C R08 3
Spare
3
Spare 4
OC 12 C R09
4
Spare
5 C R10 Spare
5
6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC 13 6
7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC 14 7
8 C R11
8 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC 15
9 C R12 Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
9
10
C R13 10
Trip phase L3, trip coil 1
11
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC 16
11
12
Breaker Q 0 open OC 17 12
13
Breaker Q 0 closed OC 18 C R14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
14
15 C R15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
16 C R16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
Spare OC 19
17
Spare 18
OC 20
Fig. 4.2 Bay unit: connections of binary inputs and outputs

Line Variant 1
41
42

1 1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C
2 C R 01 2 In service
OC 02
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03 C R 02 5 Block close command
6
7
7
8
9
C R 03 8 Spare
Carrier receive, distance prot. OC 05
9
10
Carrier recei ve, DEF prot. 11
OC 06
10
C R 04 Remote trip, channel 1
12 11
13
C R 05
12
Carrier send, distance prot.
Spare OC 07
14 13
OC 08
Manual Close Command 15 C R 06 Remote tri p, channel 2
14
16 C R 07 15 Carrier send, DEF prot.
Q0 Manual Command + 17
OC 09
AR CLOSE Command 18
1
1
Line V T MCB fail OC 10 B D 2
2
CB all poles closed, DEF prot. OC 11 C R 08 3 Start L1L2L3 to AR
3
Spare OC 12 C R 09
4
Trip CB 3-pol e to AR
4
5
C R 10 Trip CB to AR
5
6 6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC 13
7 7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC 14
C R 11 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
8 8
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open 9
OC 15
C R 12 Trip phase L2, trip coil 1
9
10 C R 13 10
11
12
12
Breaker Q 0 open OC 17
13
OC 18 C R 14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
Breaker Q 0 closed 14
C R 15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
15
C R 16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
16
Prepare 1-pol e trip from mai n 1 OC 19
17
Spare 18
OC 20

Line Variant 2
43
Q1 OFF TRIP
13 11530 C
Q1 ON 21110 11
14 11530 D
Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP
16
Q2 ON
11530 D 12
13
Q0 OFF SP
17 11530 A ITT 14
Q0 ON
18 11530 B EFP
Q0 Manual Close Command + AR CLOSE Command Rem TRIP
09 11505 24105
15
Start L1 (Main 1)
01 13710
Start L2 (Main 1)
02 13720
03
Start L3 ( Main 1)
13730 16
Start L1L2L3
04 13740
13770 BFP 02
13775
BFP TRIP
13780 23105
Rem TRIP
13785 23110 04
06
BP Default Output
Strt.L1
Strt.L2
21805 Strt.L3
(In Service)
SL1L2L3
Blk part Alarm CU
BP Configurable
BP Input Output
01
Ext Blk Dist
10 01 111205 211105 Trip CB L1 01
Manual Close Command
08 02 111505 211110 Trip CB L2 02
Carr. Rec.
05 03 111815 211115 Trip CB L3 03
Prep1PTrip M1 AR
19 09 111825 211880 Carr. Send 04 05
OR
DIST 211710
Start L1L2L3/
11 TripCB 3Ph/
211320 Trip CB
Z Extension AR
111830 211305 OR
DistBlckd
211405 09
Carr. Rec. Carr. Send

06 04 120805 220815 05 07
CB All Poles Closed
11 05 120505 220105 Trip
06
DIREFGND
Block O/c Trip
(Inverted) 112205 212105 07
OCDT
Trip
221105 08
I0INV OR
09
Trip
224105 09
CHKI3Ph Start L1L2L3
13 08
Trip CB 3Ph
Z Extension
14 09
Trip CB
15 10
Prep. 3P Trip
CB Open
07 118515 218310
16 118535 218845
OCO
12 08 118505
21110 118205(Ext Blk AR)
M1 Healthy/Service Mode OR
20 10 12
23105
Permit to close
07 17 118820 AR Definitive Trip
218315 11
Close Command
Start L1L2L3 218605 12 03
118705 AR Ready
Trip CB 3P 218805 16
118305
Trip CB
118310
44

1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C 1
2
OC 02
CR 01 2 In service
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03
CR 02 5 Block close command
6
7
8 7
9 CR 03 8 AR close command
Carrier recei ve, distance prot. OC 05
10 9
Carrier recei ve, DEF prot. 11
OC 06
10
12 CR 04 Remote tri p, channel 1

11
13 CR 05 Carrier send, distance prot.
Permit to close OC 07 12
14 13
Manual Close Command OC 08
15 CR 06 Remote tri p, channel 2
14
16
CR 07 15 Carrier send, DEF prot.
Q0 Manual Close Comm and + 17
OC 09
AR CLOSE Command 18
1 1
OC 10 B D
Line V T MCB fail 2
2
OC 11
CB all poles closed, DEF prot. CR 08 3 Start L1L2L3 to AR in main 1
3
OCO ready for AR release OC 12
4 CR 09
4
Trip CB 3-pole to AR in main 1
5 CR 10 Trip CB to AR in main 1
5
6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC 13 6
7
8 CR 11 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
OC 15 8
CR 12
10
CR 13 10
11
OC 16
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed 11
12
OC 17
Breaker Q 0 open 13
12
OC 18
Breaker Q 0 closed 14 CR 14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
15 CR 15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
Prepare 1-pole trip from main 1 OC 19 CR 16 15
17
Main 1 healthy/in service mode (Blk. AR) OC 20
18

Line Variant 3
45
OC Inputs CR Outputs
HV/EHV, Double Bus, 1-Pole Breaker, Line Variant 4 (L-V4)
Q1 OFF TRIP
13 11530 C
Q1 ON 21110 11
14 11530 D
Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP
Q2 ON 12
16 11530 D
13
Q0 OFF SP
17 11530 A ITT 14
Q0 ON
18 11530 B EFP
Q0 Manual Close + AR Close Command CB Rem TRIP
09 11505 24105
15
Start L1 (Main 1)
01 13710
Start L2 (Main 1)
02 13720
Start L3 ( Main 1) 16
03 13730
Start L1L2L3
04 13740
13770 BFP 02
13775
BFP TRIP
13780 23105
Rem TRIP
13785 23110 04
06
BP Default Output
Strt.L1
Strt.L2
21805
(In Service) Strt.L3
SL1L2L3
Blk part Alarm CU
BP Configurable
BP Input Output
01
Ext Blk Dist Trip CB L1
01 111205 211105 01
Trip CB L2
211110 02
Carr. Rec. Trip CB L3
05 03 111815 211115 03
Prep1PTrip M1 AR Carr. Send
19 09 OR
111825 211880 04 05
DIST 211710 TripCB 3Ph/
Start L1L2L3/
11
211320 Trip CB
Z Extension AR
111830 211305 OR
DistBlckd
211405 09
211780
Start SOTF
Carr. Rec. Carr. Send

06 04 120805 220815 05 07
CB All Poles Closed
11 05 120505 220105 Trip
06
DIREFGND
Block O/c Trip
(Inverted) 112205 212105 07
OCDT
Trip
221105 08
I0INV OR
09
Trip
224105 09
CHKI3Ph Start L1L2L3
13 08
Trip CB 3Ph
Z Extension
14 09
Trip CB
15 10
Prep. 3P Trip
CB Open
07 118515 218310
Start SOTF
118210 218845
OCO
12 08 118505
21110 118205(Ext Blk AR)
M1 Healthy/Service Mode OR
20 10 12
118820
23105
AR Definitive Trip
218315 11
Close Command
Start L1L2L3 218605 12 03
118705 218805 AR Ready
16
Trip CB 3P
118305
Trip CB
118310
Permit To Close
Blk Trig L
10 11 117225 217410
Blk Trig B1
07 12 117215 217105 17
Blk Trig B2
08 13 117220
B1 Act
14 117805
B2 Act
15 117810
SYNC
46

1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC01 A C 1
2
OC02
CR01 2 In service
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC03
CR02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC04 6
7
8 7
9 CR03 8 AR close command

Carrie r receive, distance prot. OC05
10 9
Carrier receive, DEF prot. OC06
11 10
12 CR04
11
Remote tri p, channel 1
13 CR05
12 Carrier send, distance prot.
Bus 1 VT MCB fail OC07
14
OC08 13
Bus 2 VT MCB fail 15
CR06 Remote trip, channel 2
14
16
CR07
15 Carrier send, DEF prot.
Q0 Manual Close Comm and + 17
OC09
AR CLOSE Command CB 18
1 1
Line V T MCB fail OC10 B D
2 2
CB all poles closed, DEF prot. OC11
CR08 Start L1L2L3 to AR in main 1
3
3
OCO ready for AR release OC12
CR09 Trip CB 3-pol e to AR in main 1
4 4
5 CR10 Trip CB to AR in main 1
5
OC13 6
OC14 7
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open 8 CR11 Trip phase L1, trip coil 1
OC15 8
9
CR12
10
CR13 10
11
Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
Breaker Q 0 open OC17
12
13
Breaker Q 0 closed 14
OC18
CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip coil 2
15 CR15 14 Trip phase L2, trip coil 2
16
Prepare 1-pol e trip from mai n 1 OC19 CR16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
17
Main 1 healthy/in service mode (Blk. AR) OC20
18

Line Variant 4
47
Q1 OFF
13 11530 C 21110
TRIP
11
Q1 ON
14 11530 D
Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP 12
Q2 ON
16 11530 D
13
Q0 OFF
17 11530 A 14
Q0 ON SP ITT
18 11530 B EFP
Q0 Manual Close Command + AR CLOSE Command Rem TRIP
09 11505 24105
15
01 13710
02
13720 16
03 Start L1L2L3
13730
04 13740
BFP
02
BFP TRIP
23105
13785 23110 Rem TRIP
04
06
BP Default Output
21805
In Service
Start
L1L2L3
Blk part Alarm CU
BP Configurable 01
BP Input Output
Trip CB
214105 01
Start L1
214710 15
05 03 Carr. Rec.
114805 214715 Start L2
16
Start L3
214720 17
Carr. Send
214805 04 05
DIROCDT
OR
09
Trip
216105 05
OVDT
Trip
212105 07
OCTD
221105 Trip
08
I0INV
Trip
224105 09
CHKI3Ph
Prep. 3P Trip M1/M2 Prep. 3P Trip M1

CB Open
07 118515 218310 10 08
06 16 118535 Prep. 3P Trip M2
OCO 07
19 08 118505
21110 118205(Ext Blk AR)
OR
12
118820
23105
Gen Start M1/M2
10 17 118705 AR
3 P Trip M1/M2
12 18 118305 218315 Definitive Trip
12
Gen Trip M1/M2 Close Command
11 19 118310 218605 13 03
218805 AR Ready
30 LED 19
Permit To Close
09
(Spare)
Blk Trig L
20 11 117225 10
Blk Trig B1
07 12 117215 217105 17 LED 20
(Spare)
Blk Trig B2
08 13 117220
B1 Act
14 117805
B2 Act
15 117810
SYNC
48

1
Start BFP Phase L1 OC 01 A C 1
2 CR01 2 In service
OC 02
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L3 OC 03
CR02 5 Block close command
6
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 OC 04
6
7
8 7
CR03 8
9 AR close command
Carrier receive, dir. O/C prot. OC 05
10 9
Manual Close Command 11
OC 06
10
12 CR04
11
Remote trip, channel 1
13 CR05 Carrier send, dir. O/C prot.
Bus 1 VT MCB fail OC 07 12
14
OC 08 13
Bus 2 VT MCB fail 15 Remote trip, channel 2
CR06
14
16
CR07
15 Prepare 3-pol e trip to main 2
Q0 Manual Close Comm and + 17 OC 09
AR CLOSE Command 18
1 1
Start L1L2L3 from main 1/m ain 2 OC 10 B D
2
2
Trip CB from m ain 1/main 2 OC 11
CR08 Prepare 3-pole trip to main 1
3
3
Trip CB 3-pol e from main 1/m ain 2 4
OC 12 CR09 Spare
4
5 CR10 Spare
5
6
OC 13 6
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open
7
OC 14 7
Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed
8
OC 15
CR11
CR12
9
10
CR13 10
11
OC 16
11
OC 17
12
Breaker Q 0 open 13
OC 18
Breaker Q 0 closed
16
OC 19 CR16 15 Trip phase L3, trip coil 2
OCO ready for AR release
17
Line V T MCB fail 18
OC 20

Line Variant 5
49
4.2. Connection diagrams Transformer protection variants
Fig. 4.11 Configuration Transformer Variant 1
50

Transformer Transformer
Variant 1 Variant 1
1
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 f rom Prot. Group 2 TR IP OC01 A C 1
2 CR01 2
External start BFP f rom Mechanic Prot. TR IP OC02
3 In serv ice
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 f rom Back-Up Prot. TR IP OC03
CR02 5 Block close com m and Breaker Q0 A-Side
6
Spare OC04
7 6
8 7
9 CR03 8
Mechanic Protection TRIP 1 OC05
Transf . Prot. TR IP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
OC06 Tripping rel ay (94-1) Trip CB A/B/CSide *)
Mechanic Protection Alarm 1
11 10
12 CR04
11 Transf . Prot.Trip Start BFP on C-Side *)
13 CR05
Mechanic Protection TRIP 2 OC07 12
14
OC08 13
15 CR06
14 Rem ote Trip 2 to B-Side
16
CR07 Transf . Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
17 Tripping rel ay (94-2) Trip CB A/B/CSide *)
A-Side Breaker Q0 Manual Close Com m and OC09
18
1 1
Block Transf orm er Diff. Protection OC10 B D
2
2
Transf orm er Diff. Inrush input OC11
CR08 3
3 Rem ote Trip 1 to B-Side
Transf orm er Diff. high set OC12 CR09
4 4 Rem ote Trip 1 to C-Side *)
5 CR10
5 Transf . Prot.Trip Start BFP on B-Side
6
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 open OC13 6
7
A-Side Bus 1 Isolator Q1 closed OC14 7
8 CR11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 open OC15 8 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
9
CR12
9 Trip phase L2, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
10
CR13 10 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 1 A-Side
11
A-Side Bus 2 Isolator Q2 closed OC16
11
12
A-Side Breaker Q0 ope n OC17
12
13
A-Side Breaker Q0 closed OC18
14 CR14 13 Trip phase L1, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side

16 CR16 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side
Spare OC19 15
17
Spare OC20
18
Legend:
A-Side Transf orm er prim ary side

B-Side Transf orm er secondary side
C-Side Transf orm er tertiary side *)
*) C-Side, if existing

Transformer Variant 1
51
Fig. 4.13 Typical tripping / breaker failure starting scheme

52
Double Bus, 2 wdg. Transformer Variant 2 (T-V2)

OC Inputs A - Side CR Outputs
A-Side Q1 OFF
13 11530 C TRIP
A-Side Q1 ON 21110 Trip L1 CB A-Side coil 1
14 11530 D 11
A-Side Q2 OFF
15 11530 C BBP Trip L2 CB A-Side coil 1
A-Side Q2 ON 12
16 11530 D
Trip L3 CB A-Side coil 1
13
A-Side Q0 OFF Trip L1 CB A-Side coil 2

17 11530 A SP ITT 14
A-Side Q0 ON
18 11530 B EFP Trip L2 CB A-Side coil 2
A-Side Q0 Manual Close Command 15
09 + AR CLOSE Command 11505 24105
16
Start L1L2L3_1 by Group 2 protection terminal
01 13740
Block close command CB A-Side
02 not used 13790 02
03 Start L1L2L3_2
(if existing)
by Back-Up protection terminal
13745
BFP BFP TRIP
23105
04 not used EFP Rem TRIP
Remote trip 1 to B - Side
BFP Rem TRIP 08
13785 23110
Remote trip 2 to B - side
06
BP Start BFP L1L2L3 In Service
BP External Start BFP by logic: TRIP mech prot AND CB-ON 21805 01
BP Default Output
AND
Ext.Start
39
Start Start BFP on B - Side
BP Input L1L2L3 10
2 wdg. Transf. A-B -Side Alarm
Q0 ON Blk part
11
OR
37
Central Unit
Block Differential prot. DIFTRA Block
10 01 129205 Trafo Prot.
Inrush Input DIFTRA TRIP BP Output (configurable)
DIFTRA Inrush TRIP to
11 High Set Input
02 129605 229105
L1L2L3
01
DIFTRA High Set DIFTRA TRIP L1
12 03 129610
DIFTRA 229110
DIFTRA TRIP L2
02 Group1 Group2
Mech. prot TRIP 1 Mech
229115
DIFTRA TRIP L3
03 (94-1) (94-2)
05 17 229120 04
TRIP1
229805 DIFTRA Inrush
05 03
DIFTRA Stabiliz.
Mech. prot Alarm 1 229810 06
06 18 OR not used 04
11840_GP_IN_1 35
38 not used 05
OR
36
07 19 A- Side
TRIP2
TH Block TH TRIP
07
128205 228105 07
Mech. prot Alarm 2
20 TH TH Start not used 09
08 228705 08
11845_GP_IN_2 OR
28 09
OCINST Block OCINST TRIP
126205 226105 10
04 OCINST 226705
OCINST Start
11
OCDT Block OCDT TRIP
112205 212105 12
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
13
OCINV Block OCINV TRIP
113205 213105 14
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
15
I0INV Block I0INV TRIP
121205 221105 16
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
17
OR
29
05 A- Side Neutral grounding (if existing)

112205 212105 18
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
19
I0INV Block OCINV TRIP
121205 221105 20
I0INV 221705
OCINV Start
21
55
B- Side Neutral grounding (if existing)
112205 212105 22
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
23
06 121205 221105 24
I0INV 221705 I0INV Start
25
I0INV Block
OR
35
B- Side
OR
30

112205 212105 26
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
27
07
113205 213105 28
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
29
I0INV TRIP
121205 221105 30
19 not used I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
31
U/fDT Block U/fDT TRIP

127205 227105 47
U/fDT 227705
U/fDT Start
48
20 10
U/fINV Block U/fINV TRIP
131205 213105 49
U/fINV 213705
U/fINV Start
50
OR
34
CHKI3PH
A-Side 224605 picked up 56
CHKI3PH
Legend :
CHKI3PH A =Transformer primary side

B-Side 224605 picked up
57
CHKI3PH
B = Transformer secondary side
53

Variant 2 Variant 2
1
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 from Prot. Group 2 TRIP OC01 A C 1
2 CR01 2
External start BFP from Mechanic Prot. TRIP OC02
3 In service
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 from Back-Up Prot. TRIP OC03
CR02 5 Block close command Breaker Q0 A-Side
6
Spare OC04
7 6
8 7
9 CR03 8
Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
OC06 Tripping relay (94-1) Trip CB A/BSide
11 10
12 CR04
11 Spare
13 CR05
Mechanic Protection TRIP 2 OC07 12 Spare
14
OC08 13
Mechanic Protection Alarm 2 15 CR06
14 Remote Trip 2 to B-Side
16
CR07 Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
17 Tripping relay (94-2) Trip CB A/BSide
A-Side Breaker Q0 Manual Close Command OC09
18
1 1
Block Transformer Diff. Protection OC10 B D
2
2
Transformer Diff. Inrush input OC11
CR08 3 Remote Trip 1 to B-Side
3
Transformer Diff. high set OC12 CR09
4 4 Spare
5 CR10
5 Transf. Prot.Trip Start BFP on B-Side
6
7
8 CR11
9
CR12
10
11
11
12
A-Side Breaker Q0 open OC17
12
13

16
Spare OC19 CR16 15 Trip phase L3, trip Breaker Q0 coil 2 A-Side
17
Block Voltage functions OC20
18
Legend:
A-Side Transformer primary side

B-Side Transformer secondary side

54

55

A-Side Q1 OFF
13 11530 C TRIP
14 11530 D 11
A-Side Q2 OFF
A-Side Q2 ON 12
16 11530 D
13

17 11530 A SP ITT 14
A-Side Q0 ON
16
01 13740
02 not used 13790 02
Start L1L2L3_2 by Back-Up protection terminal
03 (if existing) 13745
BFP BFP TRIP
23105
BFP Rem TRIP 08
13785 23110
06
BP Default Output
AND
Ext.Start
39
BP Input L1L2L3 10
Q0 ON
2 wdg. Transf. A-B -Side Alarm
Blk part
11
OR
37
Central Unit
Block Differential prot. DIFTRA Block
10 01 129205 Trafo Prot.
Inrush Input DIFTRA TRIP BP Output (configurable)
DIFTRA Inrush TRIP to
11 High Set Input
02 129605 229105
L1L2L3
01
DIFTRA High Set DIFTRA TRIP L1
12 03 129610
DIFTRA 229110
DIFTRA TRIP L2
02 Group1 Group2
229115
DIFTRA TRIP L3
03 (94-1) (94-2)
05 17 229120 04
TRIP1
229805 DIFTRA Inrush
05 03
DIFTRA Stabiliz.
Mech. prot Alarm 1 229810 06
06 18 OR not used 04
11840_GP_IN_1 35
38 not used 05
OR
36
07 19 A- Side
TRIP2
TH Block TH TRIP
07
128205 228105 07
Mech. prot Alarm 2
20 TH TH Start not used 09
08 228705 08
11845_GP_IN_2 OR
28 09
126205 226105 10
04 OCINST 226705
OCINST Start
11
112205 212105 12
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
13
113205 213105 14
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
15
05 121205 221105 16
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
17
55
OR
35
OR
30
B- Side
112205 212105 26
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
27
07
113205 213105 28
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
29
06 121205 221105 30
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
31
OR
31
DIROCDT Block DIROCDT TRIP

OR
DIROCDT
40 114205 214105 DIROCDT Start
32
12 Carr. Rec.
114805 DIROCDT 214705 DIROCDT Carr.
33
08 214805 Send 34
DIROCINV OR DIROCINV TRIP
Block 41 115205 215105 DIROCINV Start
35
DIROCINV 215705 36
13 Carr. Rec.
115805 DIROCINV 215805 DIROCINV Carr.
Send 37
DIREFGND Block DIREFGND TRIP
120205 220105 38
19 not used 14 DIREFGND Carr.Rec.
120805 220705
DIREFGND Start
39
DIREFGND DIREFGND 220805 DIREFGND Carr.
15 C.B. all Poles closed 120505 Send 40
Power TRIP
16 Power Block
135205 235105 41
Power 235705
Power Start
42
OR
32
OVDT Block OVDT TRIP

116205 216105 43
OVDT 216705
OVDT Start
44
OVINV Block OVINST TRIP
121205 221105 45
OVINST 221705
OVINST Start
46
127205 227105 47
Block Voltage funct. U/fDT 227705
U/fDT Start
48
20 09
131205 213105 49
U/fINV 213705
U/fINV Start
50
df/dt Block df/dt TRIP
133205 233105 51
df/dt 233705
df/dt Start
52
Freq Block Freq TRIP
134205 234105 53
Freq 234705
Freq Start
54
OR
34
OR
33
Block by CHKU3PH picked up
CHKI3PH
CHKI3PH
CHKI3PH
57
CHKI3PH
Legend :
CHKU3PH
225605 picked up 58
CHKU3PH A =Transformer primary side
56

Variant 3 Variant 3
1
2 CR01 2
3 In service
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 from Back-Up Prot. TRIP OC03
6
Spare OC04
7 6
8 7
9 CR03 8
Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
11 10
12 CR04
11 Spare
13 CR05
14
OC08 13
16
CR07 Transf. Prot. TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
18
1 1
Block Transformer Diff. Protection OC10 B D
2
2
Transformer Diff. Inrush input OC11
3
Transformer Diff. high set OC12 CR09
4 4 Spare
5 CR10
6
7
8 CR11
9
CR12
10
11
11
12
12
13

16
17
18

57

58

A-Side Q1 OFF
13 11530 C TRIP
14 11530 D 11
A-Side Q2 OFF
A-Side Q2 ON 12
16 11530 D
13

17 11530 A SP ITT 14
A-Side Q0 ON
16
01 13740
02 not used 13790 02
03 13745
BFP BFP TRIP
23105
BFP Rem TRIP 08
13785 23110
06
BP Default Output
Ext.Start

10 not used BP Input L1L2L3 10
Alarm
11 not used Blk part
OR
Q0 ON
37
11 AND Central Unit
Trafo Prot.
12 not used 39 BP Output (configurable)
Mech. prot TRIP 1
Back-Up TRIP to
Mech
05 17 TRIP1 (94-1) (94-2)
03
Mech. prot Alarm 1
06 18 OR
11840_GP_IN_1
38
35
07 19 TRIP2 not used 04
Mech. prot Alarm 2 not used 05
08 20
OR
36
A- Side
11845_GP_IN_2
TH Block TH TRIP
07
128205 228105 07
TH 228705
TH Start
08 not used 09
OR
28 09
126205 226105 10
04 OCINST 226705
OCINST Start
11
112205 212105 12
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
13
113205 213105 14
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
15
05 121205 221105 16
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
17
55
OR
35
OR
30
B- Side
112205 212105 26
OCDT 212705
OCDT Start
27
07
113205 213105 28
OCINV 213705
OCINV Start
29
06 121205 221105 30
I0INV 221705
I0INV Start
31
OR
31
DIROCDT Block DIROCDT TRIP

OR
40 114205 214105 DIROCDT Start
32
DIROCDT
12 Carr. Rec.
114805 DIROCDT 214705 DIROCDT Carr.
33
08 214805 Send 34
DIROCINV OR DIROCINV TRIP
Block 41 115205 215105 DIROCINV Start
35
DIROCINV
13 Carr. Rec.
115805 215705 DIROCINV Carr.
36
DIROCINV 215805 Send 37
DIREFGND Block DIREFGND TRIP
120205 220105 38
19 not used 14 DIREFGND Carr. Rec.
120805 220705
DIREFGND Start
39
DIREFGND C.B. DIREFGND 220805 DIREFGND Carr.
15 all Poles closed
120505 Send 40
Power Block Power TRIP
16 135205 235105 41
Power 235705
Power Start
42
OR
32
OVDT Block OVDT TRIP

116205 216105 43
Block Voltage funct. OVDT 216705
OVDT Start
44
09
OVINV Block OVINST TRIP
121205 221105 45
OVINST 221705
OVINST Start
46
127205 227105 47
U/fDT 227705
U/fDT Start
48
20 10
131205 213105 49
U/fINV 213705
U/fINV Start
50
df/dt Block df/dt TRIP
133205 233105 51
df/dt 233705
df/dt Start
52
11
Freq Block Freq TRIP
134205 234105 53
Freq 234705
Freq Start
54
OR
34
OR
33
Block by CHKU3PH picked up
CHKI3PH
CHKI3PH
CHKI3PH
57
CHKI3PH
Legend :
CHKU3PH
225605 picked up 58
CHKU3PH A =Transformer primary side
59

Variant 4 Variant 4
1
2 CR01 2
3 In service
3
4
4
5
Start BFP Phase L1L2L3 from Group 1 TRIP OC03
6
Spare OC04
7 6
8 7
9 CR03 8
Transf. Back-Up. TRIP L1L2L3 - 1
10 9
11 10
12 CR04
11 Spare
13 CR05
14
OC08 13
16
CR07 Transf. Back-Up TRIP L1L2L3 - 2
15
18
1 1
Spare OC10 B D
2
2
Spare OC11
3
Spare OC12 CR09
4 4 Spare
5 CR10
6
7
8 CR11
9
CR12
10
11
11
12
12
13

16
17
18
Legend:
A-Side Transformer primary side

B-Side Transformer secondary side

60

61
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Power Systems
Brown Boveri Strasse 72
Phone +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77
Printed in Switzerland (0806-0000-0)

12.1.1. Configuring the bay protection using HMI500

To configure and set the bay protection function, open the
HMI500 menu Settings and select the menu item Bay
protection.
12.1.1.1. Overview
The Bay protection - Configuration dialog lists all the bay units,
which are licensed for bay protection functions. The list does not
therefore include bay units that are only used for busbar
protection.
Fig. 12.1 Overview
Click the left mouse button on a bay unit to select it and then the
Continue button or simply double click on the bay unit. This
opens the dialog Select protection function - <Name> for the
respective bay.
12.1.1.2. Bay protection

This dialog is divided into the following parts:
The protection functions available for configuration are listed on
the left. Its contents are determined by the ABB licenses
obtained by the user for the particular bay unit (see
Section 12.1. Application description ).
12-11
There are buttons on the right for each of the actually available
protection functions. The first is always the binary output function
BP output (see Section 12.1.1.3.4)
Fig. 12.2 Inserting a new protection function
The columns of the ParSet 14 tab are:

No. Unique instance number
Func. Symbol representing the protection function of the
instance
P1 .. P 4 Parameter set in which the protection function
occurs. Switching between parameter sets is
accomplished using the bay unit binary input
signals 19605 (19610, 19615) Activation BP
ParSet_X (see Section 5.3.7.3.9.).
Copy of Instance No. of the original function, where the
instance is a copy of a function that already exists.
If the number of function instances exceeds the size of the
display area, a scroll bar automatically appears on the right. The
maximum number of instances per bay unit is limited in this
version to 128.
12-12
There are a number of tabs, which can be selected in this part of

the dialog. The first tab (ParSet 1..4) lists all the functions. It has
to be selected to change functions and determine the instances
where they occur. The tabs ParSet 1 to ParSet 4 list the
functions configured for a particular parameter set and are
merely for information.
12.1.1.2.1. Creating instances of protection functions

An instance of a protection function is created by selecting it in
the list on the left of the dialog using the left mouse button and
while keeping the button depressed dragging it onto the area of
the first tab (ParSet 1..4) (drag and drop). It is not possible to
drop the function while the symbol
is being shown. The instance of the protection function is created

when the mouse cursor changes to an arrow and the mouse
button is released.
12.1.1.2.2. Assigning protection functions to parameter sets

Every instance of a protection function can be assigned to a
particular parameter set. REB500sys runs the protection
functions in the currently selected parameter set. The active
parameter set is changed by setting the appropriate binary input
on the bay unit.
To assign the instance of a protection function to a parameter

set, simply check the corresponding box using the left mouse
button.
12-13
12.1.1.2.3. Using the context menu

To open the context menu for a particular protection function,
first select the function by clicking the left mouse button on its
symbol and then clicking the right mouse button.
Copy
Creates a copy of the protection function according to the
following rules:
A copy cannot be in the same parameter set as the original.
The input signals of a copy are the same as those of the
original and cannot be changed.
Only defined parameters of a copy can be configured. All
other parameters are taken from the original.
Delete
The instance of the specific protection function is deleted
together with all the settings that the user has made up to that
point.
If the function being deleted has connections to other protection
functions, an error message appears instructing you to first
delete the connections.
Fig. 12.3 Delete function - Error
Thus an instance can only be deleted after all its

interconnections have been deleted.
Properties
This opens a dialog with all the functions settings. Double
clicking on the functions symbol opens the same dialog.
12-14
12.1.1.2.4. Status indicator

On the left of each instance number and function symbol there is
a status indicator which signals the validity of the parameters
entered.
Green indicates that the configuration is correct and valid while

red indicates that the setting procedure has not been completed.
This generally means in the case of a single-phase function that
a analog channel has not yet been assigned to it.
The Bay protection dialog cannot be closed by clicking on OK
until all the status indicators are green.
12.1.1.2.5. Statistical evaluation

Double clicking with the right mouse button with the cursor in the
dialog below the area of the tabs opens a window with statistics
and status information on the bay protection functions.
The version number of the bay protection configuration module

is shown in the bottom left-hand corner.
Fig. 12.4 Bay protection statistics
12-15
Mode
Currently active mode.
Configuration: The dialog is in the protection function
configuration or setting mode.
Measurements: The dialog was started in the measurement
display mode.
Test: Not implemented in this version.
Read-Write: The user can edit and save settings.
Read only: The user cannot edit settings.
Statistics
Configured functions: Number of instances created by the
user for this bay unit. The maximum
number is 128.
Available parameters: The number of memory locations
available for protection function
settings in the entire system.
Used parameters: Number of protection function settings
used by the present bay unit.
12.1.1.3. Binary signal configuration
12.1.1.3.1. Configuring binary input signals

Each REB500sys bay protection function has a defined number
of binary input signals. These are described for each of the
protection functions in Sections 12.2. to 12.14.
In the dialogs for setting protection functions, a binary input
signal is described in plain text and has a button.
12-16
NOTE: The following can be assigned to the binary input signals

of each BP function:
BP internal: - an output signal from another BP function
- Signal status Always FALSE or
Always TRUE
BP external: - System optocoupler inputs
- Predefined outputs of a station protection
function
Assignment of internal BP input signals

Click the left mouse button on the status button of the desired
signal to open the dialog for configuring the status of the
particular binary input signal.
The dialog has two tabs, the first of which provides facility for
setting the status to TRUE or FALSE.
Fig. 12.5 Configuring binary inputs (TRUE/FALSE)
The second tab enables the output of an existing instance of a

protection function to be connected to the particular signal input.
12-17
The Output from function tab lists all the protection function
instances set for the particular bay unit together with the number
of the instance. Upon selecting a protection function in the list on
the left by clicking the left mouse button on it, its binary output
signals appear on the right of the dialog.
The columns in the list of output signals signify the following:
Channel: Unique No. of the output signal
Inv.: Check this box to invert the signal
Signal text: Output signal name
Fig. 12.6 Configuring binary inputs (Output from function)
Assignment of external BP input signals

External BP input signals have to be assigned using the binary
input function (see Section 12.1.1.3.2. below).
12-18
12.1.1.3.2. Exception: Binary input function

The system automatically creates an instance of the binary input
function. It thus always heads the list of binary inputs. As far as
the instances of protection functions are concerned, the logical
input signal block also provides binary outputs such as, for
example, a busbar protection function output.
NOTE: A configuration list is not presented for the binary input

function. The latter only appears for the user in the dialog
Binary module in the Configuration menu.
If you select Binary input, the right-hand half of the dialog

presents two tabs Default and General purpose.
The Default tab lists station protection default outputs, which
can only be changed by the ABB engineering department. Any
binary input signal of a BP function can be linked to these to
enable signals to be exchanged between station protection and
the bay protection sections (e.g. BBP trip to Block AR).
Fig. 12.7 Binary input (Default)
12-19
The General tab provides facility for defining up to 20 user

signals. To this end, select a signal number with the left mouse
button. A text field appears in which the user can write a signal
name.
The signal name entered must conform to REB500 signal
conventions. Valid names are given in the respective Sections of
these bay protection instructions (e.g. Ext. UZ Blk for external
blocking of the underimpedance starting module).
Once defined, new signals can be assigned to an optocoupler
input by selecting Binary module in the Configuration menu.
Fig. 12.8 Binary input (General purpose)
12.1.1.3.3. Configuring binary output signals

Each REB500sys bay protection function has a defined number
of binary output signals. These are described for each of the
protection functions in Sections 12.2. to 12.14.
In the dialogs for setting protection functions, a binary output
signal is described in plain text and has a field, which lists the
input signals assigned to the respective output.
12-20
The list shows the input signals assigned to the respective

output. For each signal in the list, the instance number and an
abbreviation of the function are given.
NOTE:. Output signals are assigned when configuring either the

binary output function (see Section 12.1.1.3.4.) or BP protection
input signal function (see Section 12.1.1.3.1.).
12.1.1.3.4. Exception: Binary output function

The binary output function has to be included in all sets of
parameters and that is why the function is automatically selected
for all of them and the setting cannot be changed by the user.
The configuration of the binary output function is basically the

same as for the other protection functions. Open the
configuration dialog by double clicking with the left mouse button
on the symbol or via the context menu.
The signals of the binary output function are its input signals and
are treated accordingly.
They are divided into two groups for Default and General
purpose outputs.
NOTE: The default groups are signals which are exchanged

between bay and station protection functions (e.g. distance
protection trip for starting the breaker failure protection). The
station protection input signals are all predefined and can only
be changed by the ABB engineering department. Choice of the
bay protection output signals, on the other hand, is unrestricted.
12-21
Fig. 12.9 BP output (Default)
NOTE: The BP output signals are assigned to an output of the

binary output function.
There are no restrictions on the assignment of bay protection

output signals to the 120 outputs of the binary output function.
Fig. 12.10 BP output (General purpose)
12-22
Click on the respective Edit button to assign a Default or

General purpose signal. This opens the dialog Select binary
input. The remaining procedure is as described above for binary
input signals.
NOTE: Only bay protection output signals that are configured

for connection to outputs of the binary output function can be
assigned to an output relay by selecting Binary module in the
Configuration menu.
12.1.1.3.5. Recording a binary signal as an event

Only bay protection binary signals can be configured to be
recorded as events that are also configured via Binary module
in the Configuration menu (output signals do not necessarily
have to be assigned to output relays).
12.1.1.3.6. Disturbance recording of a binary signal

Binary output signals generated by bay protection functions
can be configured for disturbance recording, providing they are
configured in the General purpose dialog for the binary output
function (see Section 12.1.1.3.4.).
Binary input signals of the bay protection functions can be
configured for disturbance recording, providing they are
configured in the General purpose dialog for the binary input
function (see Section 12.1.1.3.2.) and also as a binary input via
Binary module in the Configuration menu.
12-23
12.1.2. Protection function settings

The appropriate dialog for setting a protection function is opened
by double clicking the left mouse button on the respective
symbol or via the context menu.
Fig. 12.11 Protection function settings
The settings in the dialog for each protection function are

described in detail in Sections 12.2. to 12.14.
12-24
12.1.3. Viewing primary system measurements

To view the primary system values being measured by the
protection functions select BP function monitoring in the View
menu and then the desired bay unit.
Fig. 12.12 Primary system measurements
The primary system values are needed, for example, for

checking the measuring direction of the distance protection
function while commissioning the protection.
12-25
12.1.4. Test sequencer

The test function provides facility for checking the operation of
the bay protection functions. To this end it simulates the analog
and binary input signals. Up to seven test sequences can be
configured which are then processed consecutively.
12.1.4.1. Starting the test sequencer

The test sequencer is started by activating the test mode and
selecting BP function monitoring in the View menu and then
clicking on Sequencer button in the dialog which appears.
Starts the sequencer
Fig. 12.13 Starting the test sequencer
12-26
This opens the following dialog:
Loads sequences from a file Saves sequences in a file
For changing parameter settings Runs the sequences on a

bay unit
Fig. 12.14 Main test sequencer dialog
12.1.4.2. Test sequencer operation

In addition to the general settings, the following can be set for
each of the seven sequences:
Current amplitudes in [A] for simulating the bay unit input
currents
Input current phase-angle: -360 <= <= +360
Voltage amplitudes in [V] for simulating the bay unit input
voltages
Input voltage phase-angle: -360 <= <= +360
Maximum sequence duration: 0 .. 99999 sec
Trigger input for terminating the sequence and signal polarity
(active 1 or active 0)
Trigger delay
12-27
Binary input status:

1. Optocoupler input signal used (status = none)
2. Active 1 (True) is simulated (status = active)
3. Active 0 (False) is simulated (status = Inactive)
Clicking on the Execute button in the test sequencer main

dialog transfers the settings to the bay unit and runs the
sequence.
12.1.4.2.1. General settings
Where CTs grounded (line or

busbar side)
Neutral current: Enable/disable physical

Sum of IL1, IL2, IL3 outputs
Individually adjustable IL4
Fig. 12.15 General settings
12-28
12.1.4.2.2. Setting test sequences
Binary inputs:
None = no simulation
Active = True simulated
Inactive = False simulated
Amplitude and phase-

angle
Trigger selection: Active trigger Max. sequence End of se-

Signals from functions edge length quence after
Binary inputs n seconds
Fig. 12.16 Test sequence parameters
12-29
12.1.4.3. Test sequence without trigger
T1 T2 T3 T4
T5 T6 T7
Fig. 12.17 Sequences of fixed duration
The seven sequences are active during the maximum time set
for Max. length [s].
12.1.4.4. Test sequence with trigger
Delay after
trigger
Sequence 0 Trigger Sequence 0

starts stops and
Sequence 1
starts
Fig. 12.18 Triggering and trigger delay
12-30
Following the trigger impulse, the sequence lasts for the time set
for Delay after trigger [s]. This delay setting permits the
simulation of, for example, circuit-breaker operating times.
12.1.4.5. Example for unsuccessful autoreclosure
Sequences 6 and 7:
Sequence 1: Off-load voltage
Off-load voltage
Sequence 5:
CB poles L1, L2, L3 open
Sequence 2: Trigger:
Ground fault L1E Auto-reclosure Close CB
Trigger:
Distance prot. Trip CB 1P Sequence 4:
Ground fault L1E
Trigger:
Distance prot. Trip CB 3P
Sequence 3:
CB pole L1 open
Trigger:
Auto-reclosure Close CB
Fig. 12.19 Simulation of an unsuccessful reclosure attempt
12-31
12.1.4.6. Executing sequences
Closes dialogue (does not

influence simulation in
progress)
Load new simulation Sequence 1 stops at the

data and start simulation. maximum sequence length
setting ( O.K.)
Sequences 2 to 5 stop after

trigger signal ( O.K.)
Simulation
status
Sequences 6 and 7 stop at the
maximum sequence length
setting ( O.K.)
Sequences not
executed
Simulation results:
GREEN: Trigger configured and operated.
RED: Trigger configured but has not
Sequences stopped operated.
by the trigger signal BLUE: Simulation (sequence) not executed.
Sequences stopped
because of timeout
Fig. 12.20 Test sequence control dialog
12-32
12.1.5. CT neutral grounding

The location at which the CT neutrals are grounded (line or
busbar side) is of consequence to directional protection functions
(distance protection, directional definite time-overcurrent
protection, directional IDMT protection, sensitive ground fault
protection for solidly ground power systems).
The following table lists the functions with provision for
configuring the location of the CT neutral ground:
Protection function Provision for configuring

the CT ground?
Distance protection yes
Sensitive ground fault protection for solidly yes
grounded power systems
Directional definite time-overcurrent no
protection
Directional IDMT overcurrent protection no
The default setting for the last two functions (directional definite
time overcurrrent and directional IDMT) is busbar side, but if a
distance protection function has been configured, its setting (line
or busbar side) applies for the directional overcurrent functions
as well.
12-33
12.2. Distance protection (DIST)
12.2.1. Application
Distance protection for the high-speed discriminative protection
of long or short overhead lines or cables, double-circuit lines,
heavily loaded lines, lines with weak infeeds and what are re-
ferred to as short-zone lines.
The protection is applicable to solidly or low-resistance grounded
systems, systems with Petersen coils or to ungrounded systems.
All kinds of faults are detected including close-in three-phase
faults, cross-country faults, evolving faults and high-resistance
ground faults.
The protection remains stable in the presence of power swings
and reversal of energy direction. Switching onto an existing fault
results in instantaneous tripping of the circuit-breaker.
The distance function can also act as backup protection for the
power transformer and neighboring lines. Most of the logic
described in this Section (e.g. the transmission of signals) is not
used for these applications.
12.2.2. Features
Overcurrent or underimpedance starters (polygon charac-
teristic)
Directional or non-directional (configurable) underimpedance
starters
5 distance stages (independently set polygon characteristics)
Polygon characteristic with adjustable load discrimination
6 concurrently computed measuring loops
(L1E, L2E, L3E, L1L2, L2L3, L3L1)
Definite time overcurrent backup protection also applicable
for protecting short zones (T zone in 1 breaker schemes)
VT supervision
Power-swing blocking
Tripping logics for:
Switch-onto-fault protection
Overreaching zone
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed and communications channel failure)
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (also for weak
infeed, communications channel failure and reversal of
energy direction)
Blocking scheme (also for reversal of energy direction)
12-34
12.2.3. Inputs and outputs
12.2.3.1. CT/VT inputs

Three-phase currents
Three-phase voltages
Neutral current

Reversal of measuring direction
Distance function blocking
Underimpedance starter blocking
Overcurrent backup blocking (O/C backup)
Dead line
Manual CB close
Zone extension
Isolator open
Communication receive
Communication channel failure
Single-phase autoreclosure ready
Tripping condition blocking for the switch-onto-fault protection
Incoming PLC blocking signal
First zone blocking

L1+L2+L3 starters
L1L2L3 starter
L1 starter
L2 starter
L3 starter
E starter
I0 starter
U0 starter
I> starter
Z< starter
Overcurrent backup starter (O/C backup)
Switch-onto-fault starter
Single-phase starter
CB trip
L1L2L3 trip
L1 trip
L2 trip
L3 trip
Three-phase trip
12-35
Single-phase trip
Overcurrent backup trip (O/C backup)
Switch-onto-fault trip
Trip with transfer trip signal
Short-zone protection trip
Time 2nd step
Timer
Zone 2 time
Zone 3 time
Zone 4 time
Final zone time
Measurement
Overreaching measurement
Forwards measurement
Reverse measurement
Weak infeed trip
Distance protection blocked
VT supervision
Delayed VT supervision
Communication send
PLC boost
Memory frequency deviation
Impedance loop L1E
Impedance loop L2E
Impedance loop L3E
Impedance loop L1L2
Impedance loop L2L3
Impedance loop L3L1
12-36
12.2.4. Distance protection function settings
12.2.4.1. General
Text Unit Default Min Max Step Setting

ParSet 1..4 P1 (Select) X
CT Neutral Bus side (Select) X
Ref. Length ohm/phase 01.000 0.01 30.000 0.001 X
U input CT/VT-Addr. 5 5 5 0
I input CT/VT-Addr. 1 1 1 0
I0 input CT/VT-Addr. 0 0 4 4 X 1)
I0P input CT/VT-Addr. 0 0 4 4 X 1)
I O/C backup IN 000.00 0 10 0.01 X

Delay O/C backup s 005.00 0 10 0.01 X
Time PS block s 000.00 0 10 0.01 X
1) Either one or other of these two inputs (I0, I0P) can be used but not both.
12.2.4.2. Starting

StartMode UZ (Select) X
PhaseSelMode solid ground (Select) X
GndFaultMode I0 (Select) X
IStart IN 001.00 0.5 10 0.01 X 1)
Imin IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01 X

3I0min IN 000.20 0.1 2 0.01 X
3U0min UN 000.00 0 2 0.01 X
XA ohm/phase 020.0 0 999 0.1 X
XB ohm/phase -010.0 -999 0 0.1 X
RA ohm/phase 015.0 0 999 0.1 X
RB ohm/phase -010.0 -999 0 0.1 X
RLoad ohm/phase 008.0 0 999 0.1 X
AngleLoad deg 40 15 65 1 X
Uweak UN 000.00 0 2 0.01 X
1) IStart is only effective for StartMode = I>
12-37
12.2.4.3. Measurement

Del (Def) s 002.00 0 10 0.01 X
K0m 1 000.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0m Angle deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01 X
ILoad IN 00.50 0 2 0.10 X
Umin Fault UN 000.05 0.01 2 0.01 X
MemDirMode Trip (Select) X
DefDirMode non-dir (Select) X
BlockZ1 off (Select) X
X(1) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(1) ohm/phase 001.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(1) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(1) ohm/phase 004.00 -300 300 0.01 X
k0(1) 1 000.00 0 8 0.01 X
k0 Angle(1) deg 000.00 -90 90 0.01 X
Delay(1) s 002.00 0 10 0.01 X
X(2) ohm/phase 006.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(2) ohm/phase 002.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(2) ohm/phase 006.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(2) ohm/phase 008.00 -300 300 0.01 X
K0(2) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0 Angle(2) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X
Delay(2) s 000.50 0 10 0.01 X
X(3) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(3) ohm/phase 003.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(3) ohm/phase 008.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(3) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X
K0(3) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0 Angle(3) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X
Delay(3) s 001.00 0 10 0.01 X
X(4/OR) ohm/phase 015.00 -300 300 0.01 X
R(4/OR) ohm/phase 004.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RR(4/OR) ohm/phase 010.00 -300 300 0.01 X
RRE(4/OR) ohm/phase 012.00 -300 300 0.01 X
K0(4/OR) 1 001.00 0 8 0.01 X
K0Angle(4/OR) deg 000.00 -180 180 0.01 X
Delay(4/OR) s 001.50 0 10 0.01 X
12-38

X(Back) ohm/phase -006.00 -300 0 0.01 X
R(Back) ohm/phase -002.00 -300 0 0.01 X
RR(Back) ohm/phase -006.00 -300 0 0.01 X
RRE(Back) ohm/phase -008.00 -300 0 0.01 X

VT Sup Mode off (Select) X
VT Blk Del off (Select) X
VT Sup Deb Del off (Select) X
U0 minVTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
U2 minVTSup UN 000.20 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
I0 minVTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
I2 minVTSup IN 000.07 0.01 0.5 0.01 X
Text Default Setting

ChgMeasDir FALSE X
Ext Blk Dist FALSE X
ExtUZBlk FALSE X
Ext Blk PSB TRUE X
Ext Blk O/C FALSE X
DeadLine FALSE X
Manual Close FALSE X
ZExtension FALSE X
Isolator Open FALSE X
Com Rec FALSE X
Com Fail FALSE X
1PolAR TRUE X
ExtBlkSOTF FALSE X
ExtBlkHF FALSE X
ZExtensionAR FALSE X
ExtBlock Z1 FALSE X
12-39

(No settings)
Text
Start L1+L2+L3
Start L1L2L3
Start L1L2L3 Aux
Start L1
Start L1 Aux
Start L2
Start L2 Aux
Start L3
Start L3 Aux
Start E
Start E Aux
Start I0
Start U0
Start OC
Start UZ
Start O/C
Start SOTF
Start 1ph
Trip CB
Trip L1L2L3
Trip L1L2L3 Aux
Trip CB L1
Trip CB L2
Trip CB L3
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB 1P
Trip O/C
Trip SOTF
Trip Com
Trip Stub
Delay >=2
Delay 1
Delay 2
Delay 3
Delay 4
12-40
Text
Delay Def
Meas Main
Meas Oreach
Meas Fward
Meas Bward
Weak Infeed
Dist Blocked
DelDistBlk
Power Swing
VTSup
VTSup Delay
Com Send
Com Boost
Freq dev
12.2.4.7. Trip schemes

ComMode off (Select) X
TripMode 1Ph trip (Select) X
SOTFMode off (Select) X
SOTF10sec off (Select) X
Weak off (Select) X
Unblock off (Select) X
Echo off (Select) X
TransBl off (Select) X
t1Block s 000.07 0 0.25 0.01 X
t1TransBl s 000.05 0 0.25 0.01 X
t2TransBl s 003.00 0 10 0.01 X
t1EvolFaults s 003.00 0 10 0.01 X
12-41
12.2.5. Explanation of parameters
12.2.5.1. General
Text Explanation
ParSet 1..4 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a
particular function is active.
CT Neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current
direction):
Choice: Bus side
Line side
Ref. Length Reactance (secondary value) to be used as reference
length of the line.
U input Indicates the first VT input assigned to the three phase
voltages. Fixed setting Channel 5 of the A/D module.
I input Indicates the first CT input assigned to the three phase
currents. Fixed setting Channel 1 of the A/D module.
I0 input, Indicates the CT input assigned to the neutral current.
This is used for
I0P input
the external acquisition of the neutral current of the line
or
the neutral current of the parallel circuit of a double-
circuit line. Fixed setting Channel 4 of the analog input
module.
I O/C backup Phase current pick-up setting of the backup overcurrent
unit. The function is blocked when set to zero.
Delay O/C Tripping delay of the O/C backup function.
backup
Time PS block Determines the maximum blocking time of the power
swing blocking function. The power swing blocking
function is blocked when set to zero.
12-42
12.2.5.2. Starting
Text Explanation
StartMode Choice: UZ (underimpedance)
I > (overcurrent)
PhaseSelMode Phase preference for cross-country faults in systems with
Petersen coils and ungrounded systems:
Choice: Solidly grounded
L1L3L2 (L1) cyclic
L3L1L2 (L3) cyclic
L1L3L2 acyclic
L1L2L3 acyclic
L3L2L1 acyclic
L3L1L2 acyclic
L2L1L3 acyclic
L2L3L1 acyclic
Directional OR
GndFaultMode Method of detecting ground faults:
Choice: I0 (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax)
I0 OR U0 (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.25 Imax)
OR (UE>3U0min)
I0(I2) (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2)
I0(I2) OR U0 (IE>3I0min) AND (IE>0.23 I2)
OR (UE>3U0min)
IStart Pick-up setting of the overcurrent starters (only effective
providing starting mode set to I>)
Imin Setting of the low current check feature for enabling the
protection.
3I0min Neutral current (3I0) setting for detecting ground faults.
3U0min Neutral voltage (3U0) setting for detecting ground faults.
XA Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the
tripping direction.
XB Reactive reach of the impedance characteristic in the re-
straint direction.
RA Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the trip-
ping direction.
RB Resistive reach of the impedance characteristic in the re-
straint direction.
RLoad Resistive reach for avoiding load encroachment.
AngleLoad Limit phase-angle for avoiding load encroachment.
Uweak Phase-to-neutral setting for detecting a weak infeed or a
dead line for enabling manually energizing the line.
The function is blocked when set to zero.
12-43
27
XA
Direc-
tional
OR
Load angle
RLoad
-RLoad RA
R
-RB 27
Directional
(tripping direction)
-XB
Fig. 12.21 Underimpedance starter settings
Text Explanation
Del (Def) Operating time of the final stage (starter).
K0m Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for a
parallel circuit (ratio of the mutual impedance to three
times the positive-sequence impedance);
Z m0 /( 3 x Z1 ) . The mutual impedance is not taken into
account for a setting of zero.
K0mAngle Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor
for a parallel circuit Arg Z m0 /( 3x Z1 ) .
ILoad The inclination of the characteristic changes from 7 to
14 when the load current exceeds the setting of ILoad.
ILoad = 0.01..1.99 IN Switches as described
ILoad = 0 Constant inclination of 14
ILoad = 2 Constant inclination of 7
UminFault Minimum voltage at which the fault voltage is used for
determining fault direction.
12-44
Text Explanation
MemDirMode Procedure to be followed after decay of the memory
voltage and no voltage is available for measurement:
Blocks
Trips
Conditional trip;
Only trips, if the directions during the present and the
preceding times steps are in opposition.
DefDirMode Response at the end of the final time step (definitive
time):
Non-direct.: Trips for faults in both directions
Forwards: Trips only for faults in the forwards
direction
BlockZ1 Zone 1 measurement blocking:
off
on
X(n) Pick-up line reactance for Zone (n):
X < 0 for restraint direction
X = 0 disables the zone (Zone 1 cannot be disabled)
R(n) Pick-up line resistance for Zone (n); the sign must be the
same as for X (n).
RR(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for
phase faults; the sign must be the same as for X (n).
RRE(n) Resistive reach (incl. arc resistance) of Zone (n) for
ground faults; the sign must be the same as for X (n).
K0(n) Value of the zero-sequence compensation factor for
E/F's in Zone (n); (Z 0 Z1 )/(3x Z1 ) .
K0Angle(n) Phase-angle of the zero-sequence compensation factor
for E/F's in Zone (n); Arg (Z 0 Z1 )/(3x Z1 ) .
Delay(n) Operating time for Zone (n).
X(BACK) Pick-up line reactance for the reverse zone:
X = 0 Zone disabled.
R(BACK) Pick-up line resistance for the reverse zone.
RR(BACK) Resistive reach for phase faults in the reverse zone.
RRE(BACK) Resistive reach for ground faults in the reverse zone.
12-45
27
X(n)
7
14
-X(n)/8 R(n) RR(n) RRE(n)

R
-RR(n)/2 27
-RRE(n)/2
Fig. 12.22 Distance measurement settings
12-46
RRE(BACK)/2
27
RR(BACK)/2
X(BACK)/8
R
-RRE(BACK) -RR(BACK) -R(BACK)
14
-X(BACK)
27
Fig. 12.23 Reverse zone settings
Starter, resp. Final zone (Delay (Def))
S4
S3
S2
S1
SR
Fig. 12.24 Starting and distance measurement characteristic
12-47
Text Explanation
VTSupBlkMode off Function disabled
ZeroSeq [U0 I0 ]
NegSeq [U2 I2 ]
Zero NegSeq [(U0 I0 )+(U2 I2 )]
Special [U2 (I0 +I2 )]
VTSupBlkDel Delayed blocking of the distance function (12 s) for
operation of the VT supervision.
off - immediate blocking
on - delayed blocking
VTSupDebDel Delay (1 s) for resetting blocking by the VT supervision.
off - immediate reset
on - delayed reset
U0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral voltage (U0) for VT
supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/3 or
200/3.
U2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the negative sequence voltage (U2) for
VT supervision referred to the rated VT voltage 100/3 or
200/3.
I0min VTSup Pick-up setting of the neutral current (I0) for VT
supervision.
I2min VTSup Pick-up setting of the NPS current (I2) for VT supervision.
Text Explanation
ChgMeasDir Input for changing the direction of measurement.
Ext Blk Dist Input for disabling the distance protection function:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions).
Ext UZ Blk Input for blocking the underimpedance starters:
F: - underimpedance starters enabled
T: - underimpedance starters disabled
12-48
Text Explanation
Ext Blk PSB External disable for the power-swing blocking function:
F: - power-switch blocking enabled
T: - power-switch blocking disabled
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Blk O/C External disable of the backup overcurrent function:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
DeadLine Line de-energized signal (auxiliary contact on the circuit-
breaker when the VTs are on the busbar):
F: - input not used
Manual close Circuit-breaker manual close signal:
F: - input not used
ZExtension External zone extension control signal:
F: - external zone extension disabled
Isol Open Isolator open signal for activating the short-zone logic
and protection (T section in 1 breaker schemes):
F: - disabled
Com Rec Input for PLC signal from the remote station:
F: - input not used
Com Fail Input for PLC failure signal:
F: - input not used
1PolAR Single-phase trip enable (used in conjunction with the
autoreclosure function):
F: - three-phase trip only
T: - single and three-phase trip (depending on type of
fault)
12-49
Text Explanation
ExtBlkSOTF Input for blocking the tripping condition for the switch-onto-
fault logic:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
NOTE: The input does not disable the switch-onto-fault
starting signal.
ExtBlkHF Input for blocking a received PLC signal (controlled, for
example, by a sensitive E/F scheme using the same PLC
channel):
F: - input not used
ZExtensionAR Input for enabling the overreaching zone by the
autoreclosure function:
F: - zone extension by the autoreclosure function
disabled
ExtBlock Z1 Input for blocking measurement in the first zone:
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
12-50
Text Explanation
Start L1+L2+L3 General distance protection starting signal (OR logic for
all starting signals excepting weak infeed').
Start L1L2L3 General distance protection starting signal (OR logic for
all starting signals including weak infeed').
Start L1L2L3 Aux
Start L1 Distance protection L1 phase starting signal
(including weak infeed').
Start L1 Aux
Start L2 Aux
Start L3 Aux
Start E Distance protection E/F starting signal (U0 or I0). Only
generated together with a phase starter.
Start E Aux
Start I0 Neutral current starting signal (I0).
Start U0 Neutral voltage starting signal (U0).
Start OC Overcurrent starting signal.
Start UZ Underimpedance starting signal.
Start O/C Backup overcurrent pick-up signal.
Start SOTF Enabling signal for the switch-onto-fault protection.
Start 1ph Indicates that the distance protection was started by a
single phase.
Trip CB General circuit-breaker tripping signal. This signal is
disabled while a blocking signal is being applied with the
exception of a trip by the backup overcurrent protection.
Trip L1L2L3 General tripping signal. This signal is not disabled while
a blocking signal is being applied.
Trip L1L2L3 Aux
Trip CB L1 Circuit-breaker L1 phase trip signal.
This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being
applied with the exception of a trip by the backup
overcurrent protection.
12-51
Text Explanation
Trip CB 3P Three-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a
blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a
trip by the backup overcurrent protection.
Trip CB 1P Single-phase trip signal. This signal is disabled while a
blocking signal is being applied with the exception of a
trip by the backup overcurrent protection.
Trip O/C Backup overcurrent trip signal.
Trip SOTF Switch-onto-fault trip signal.
Trip Com Signal for tripping either enabled by the receipt of a
permissive signal or the non-receipt of a blocking signal.
(This signal is disabled while a blocking signal is being
applied.)
Trip Stub 'Short-zone protection trip signal.
Delay >= 2 Signal for starting in Zone 2 or higher.
Delay 1 Signal for starting in Zone 1.
Delay 4 Signal for starting in Zone 4 (excepting when Zone 4 is
being used as an overreaching zone).
Delay Def Signal for starting in the final zone.
Meas Main Measurement by the distance function (Zones 1, 2, 3, 4
or the final zone).
Meas Oreach Measurement in the distance protection overreach zone.
Meas Fward Measurement by the distance protection in the forwards
direction.
Meas Bward Measurement by the distance protection in the reverse
direction (reverse zone).
Weak Infeed Tripping by the weak infeed function.
Dist Blocked Signal indicating that the distance protection is blocked.
DelDistBlk Signal delayed by 12 s indicating that the distance
protection is blocked.
Power Swing Power-swing blocking function picked up.
VTSup VT supervision picked up.
VTSup Delay Delayed operation of the VT supervision after 12 s.
Com Send Signal generated when a transfer trip signal is
transmitted.
Com Boost Signal for boosting PLC transmitting power.
Freq dev Signal indicating a deviation of the memory voltage fre-
quency.
12-52
12.2.5.7. Trip schemes
Text Explanation
ComMode Type of transfer tripping scheme:
off
PUTT NONDIR
PUTT FWD
PUTT OR2
POTT
BLOCK OR
TripMode Type of tripping (single or three-phase):
1PhTrip - single-phase tripping (for single-
phase autoreclosure)
3PhTrip - three-phase tripping in all cases
3PhTripDel3 - single-phase tripping (for single-
phase autoreclosure) up to the end
of Delay (3) then three-phase
tripping
SOTFMode Operating mode of the switch-onto-fault function:
off
Non-dir - non-directional underimpedance
starting (recommended setting)
Forward OR2 - directional with overreaching (Zone
2, if overreaching disabled) or
- non-directional after decay of any
memory voltage
SOTF10sec Enables the 10 s delay for the switch-onto-fault function:
off (t = 200 ms)
on (t = 10 s)
Weak Enables Weak infeed logic for the PUTT or POTT
transfer tripping modes (Uweak must also be set):
off
on
Unblock Enables deblocking logic:
off
on (only suitable for PLC)
Echo Echo logic enable for the POTT transfer tripping mode:
off
on
12-53
Text Explanation
TransBl Enables Transient blocking logic (stabilization for
reversal of power direction on double-circuit lines) for the
POTT and BLOCK OR (overreaching blocking scheme)
transfer tripping modes:
off
on
t1Block Waiting time for signal receive for the BLOCK OR
(overreaching blocking scheme).
t1TransBl Time 1 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode.
Delay for faults after a fault was detected in the reverse
direction.
t2TransBl Time 2 for the TRANSBL (transient blocking) mode. The
logic remains enabled for the time t2 after a fault was
detected in the reverse direction.
t1EvolFaults Time for discriminating evolving faults (three-phase trip
for evolving faults during this time setting)
12-54
12.2.6. Setting instructions
12.2.6.1. General
The first parameter in the sub-menu General is Ref length. It is
used to display the fault distance when the function trips and has
no influence of the protection function itself. The parameter
states the reactance of the reference length (in secondary /ph
per unit length) and may be set to display km, miles, percent line
length etc., i.e.
Xmeas.
Distance =
ref. length
e.g.:
a) To display fault distance in km
Secondary reactance per km 0.2 /phase
Ref. length = 0.2 /phase
b) To display fault distance in % of line length

Secondary reactance of the line 25 /phase
(1% 0.25 /phase)
Ref. length = 0.25 /Phase
The setting of the parameter CT neutral depends on whether

the star-point of the main CTs is on the line side or the busbar
side. There are thus two possible settings Bus side or Line
side. The Line side option is the one to choose, providing the
protection is connected according to the wiring diagram in the
appendix.
The parameter Analog inputs determines whether the
neutral current is connected to an analog input (setting I0
input) or is derived internally.
12.2.6.2. Starters
The distance function provides for two methods of starting, i.e.
overcurrent or underimpedance. The desired method is selected
by appropriately setting the parameter StartMode in the
STARTERS sub-menu.
Depending on the setting of the parameter DefDirMode, a
starter can also trip on its own after the time Delay (Def).
12-55
12.2.6.2.1. Overcurrent starters

The overcurrent starters are enabled by selecting OC for the
parameter StartMode. The pick-up level of the overcurrent
starters is determined by the setting of the parameter IStart.
The corresponding setting range is from 0.5 to 10 IN, in steps of
0.01 IN. The setting of IStart must be sufficiently above the
maximum load current to avoid any risk of mal-operation under
normal load conditions. NOTE that all currents greater than 80 %
of the highest phase current (and also the enabling current Imin)
are taken into account by the phase selection function. When
determining the maximum load current it must be considered
that
in the case of a double-circuit line, the load current IB can
briefly reach double its normal value when one circuit is
tripped
ground faults can cause additional balancing currents IA in
the healthy phases.
It is equally important for an overcurrent starter, which has

picked up, to reliably reset at the maximum load current IBmax, if
for example the fault is tripped by a downstream protection.
Taking due account of the reset ratio of 0.95, the lowest per-
missible setting is given by:
IB max + IA
(Istart )min > 1.25
0.95 IN
The maximum setting (IStart)max is derived from the minimum

fault current IK for a fault at the end of the next section of line:
(Istart)max < IK min / IN
Should the above relationships result in (IStart)max being lower

than (IStart)min, the underimpedance starters must be used
instead.
12-56
12.2.6.2.2. Underimpedance starters

The underimpedance starters are enabled by selecting UZ as
the StartMode parameter. The following parameters then have
to be set:
XA
XB
RA
RB
RLoad
AngleLoad
The parameters RLoad and AngleLoad define the permissible

load area.
XA
AngleLoad
- R
RLoad R
RB RLoad
XB
Fig. 12.25 Underimpedance starting characteristic
Because of the method used to represent impedances by the

processor program, the impedance settings should not be set
higher than absolutely necessary, otherwise the resolution for
low impedances will be reduced.
Minimum permissible reach of the starters

The starting units must reliably pick-up for a fault towards the
end of the next section of line (backup zone). Should backup
12-57
protection of the adjacent section of line not be necessary, the

starters must be set to at least 1.3 times the impedance of the
protected line. In the case of short lines, fault resistance be-
comes a factor to be taken into account.
Maximum permissible reach of the starters

The setting must take account of the considerable increase in
the load current of the healthy circuit of a double-circuit line,
when a fault on one circuit is tripped.
To ensure that the phase selection is correct for single-phase
autoreclosure, the starters in the healthy phases must not
pick up for a ground fault on one of the phases (in spite of
any balancing currents which may occur).
The resulting limits are as follows:
Solidly grounded systems
U
Z set /ph
2x(IB max +IA )
Ungrounded systems or system with Petersen coils

Uv
Z set /ph
2 IB max 1.25
where:
Zset maximum value of the impedance, i.e. the maximum
value of the expression:
XA 2 + RA 2 or XB2 + RB2
U lowest phase voltage of the healthy phases for an
ground fault on one phase (U = 0.85 x min. system
voltage). The factor 0.85 takes account of a negligibly
small zero sequence source impedance.
Uv lowest phase-to-phase system voltage
1.25 safety factor
2 factor, which takes account of the fact that phase cur-
rents and not phase-to-phase currents are used.
12-58
These requirements are generally fulfilled for most applications.

Should, however, the first inequality not be satisfied, the right-
hand side must be expressed vectorially and compared with the
underimpedance starting characteristic in relation to the setting
RLoad etc.
The healthy phases must be checked for the case of a ground
fault.
12.2.6.2.3. Current release (low-current check)

For a phase to be included in phase selection, it must be con-
ducting a current higher than Imin. A typical setting is 0.2 IN.
12.2.6.2.4. Ground fault detector

There are five alternative methods of detecting ground faults, the
desired one being chosen by the setting of the parameter
GndFaultMode. The neutral current can either be used on its
own or in conjunction with the neutral voltage. The following
operating modes are available:
I0 (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)
I0 OR U0 (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)
OR (UE > 3U0min)
I0 AND U0 (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.25 Imax)
OR (UE > 3 U0min)
I0(I2) (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.23 I2)
I0(I2) OR U0 (IE > 3I0min) AND (IE > 0.23 I2)
OR (UE > 3U0min)
The criterion for the highest 3I0min' setting is:

The ground fault detector must pick up for all ground faults
within the reach of the underimpedance starters in solidly
grounded power systems and all cross-country faults in
ungrounded or impedance grounded power systems.
The criteria for the lowest 3I0min' setting are:
the ground fault detector must not pick up for a ground fault
on ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils
the ground fault detector must not pick up for phase faults,
although CT errors can cause false neutral currents.
12-59
The recommended setting is 3I0min = 0.5 IN.

Should it not be possible to find a setting, which satisfies both
these conditions, the neutral voltage (3U0min) must be used for
measurement in addition to the neutral current.
12.2.6.2.5. Phase preference logic

The desired phase preference logic for cross-country faults is
chosen with the aid of the parameter PhaseSelMode.
In solidly grounded systems, the PhaseSelMode parameter is
disabled by setting it to Solid ground or Forward OR.
It is essential for all the relays in ungrounded systems and sys-
tems with Petersen coils to be set to the same phase preference
logic. The logic in use in a system must therefore be known be-
fore one of the 8 alternative schemes can be selected:
L1L3L2(L1) cyclic
L3L1L2(L3) cyclic
L1L3L2 acyclic
L1L2L3 acyclic
L3L2L1 acyclic
L3L1L2 acyclic
L2L1L3 acyclic
L2L3L1 acyclic
12.2.6.2.6. Undervoltage starters (Uweak)

The undervoltage starters are used in conjunction with the
switch-onto-fault function and the transfer tripping schemes
('POTT' and 'PUTT NONDIR'). The corresponding pick-up value
is set in relation to the rated voltage with the aid of the parameter
Uweak, which has a setting range of 0 to 2 UN in steps of 0.01.
All the settings for the impedance measuring zones are to be
found in the MEASUREMENT sub-menu.
12.2.6.3.1. Determining the distance zones

Before it is possible to determine the reaches of the distance
zones, the impedances and phase-angles of the line sections
during faults must be known. Typical settings for the various
zone reaches along the line are given below:
12-60
Z 3 = 0.85 (a + k b2 )
Z2 = 0.85 (a + k b1 )
b2
Z 1 = 0.85 a
b1
Z R = 1.2 a
a b
A B C
Fig. 12.26 Typical settings for the reaches of distance relay

zones
where:
Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4 impedance reach of the various zones
(/ph)
ZOR impedance reach of the overreaching zone
(/ph)
k1 factor to take the apparent increase of line im-
pedance seen by a relay due to an intermedi-
ate infeed into account
a, b impedance of the corresponding section of line
()
Example for calculating k:

Check the overreach for k > 1 if the infeed B is not in operation.
A B IA' + IB' C
1 2 3 4
D
5
~ IA'
~
Fig. 12.27 Calculating k
12-61
IA ' + IB '
k= 1
IA
where:
IA' maximum fault current possible
IB' minimum fault current possible
1...5 distance relays
Calculating the secondary line impedances

The primary values calculated from the grading table for the line
impedances have to be converted to secondary values. These
are obtained by applying the following relationship:
Z Lp Z Lp
Z Ls = =
KU KZ

KI
where:
ZLp primary positive-sequence line impedance
ZLs secondary positive-sequence line impedance
KU main VT ratio
KI main CT ratio
KZ impedance ratio
The same applies to the conversion of the resistances and

reactances.
The impedance characteristic is defined independently for each
of the four distance zones (Zone 4 is used alternatively for the
overreaching zone) by the following parameters (i = 1 to 4):
X (i)
R (i)
RR (i)
RRE (i)
k0 (i)
K0Ang (i)
Delay (i)
12-62
27
7
14
-X/8 R RR RRE
R
-RR/2
27
-RRE/2
Fig. 12.28 Distance measuring characteristic
Impedance setting ranges:

X -10 to 20 ohm/phase in steps of 0.01
R -300 to 300 ohm/phase in steps of 0.01
RR -10 to 15 ohm/phase in steps of 0.01
RRE -10 to 15 ohm/phase in steps of 0.01
When X of a zone is set to zero, regardless of the settings of its

other parameters, this zone and all following zones with the
exception of the final zone are blocked. For example if zone X
(3) is set to zero, zones 3 and 4 are blocked. If in the present
example the user wants to block just zone 3, this can be
achieved indirectly by setting zone 3 to all the settings
determined for zone 4 and blocking zone 4 by setting X (4) = 0
(i.e. zone 3 functions as zone 4). Zone 1 can only be disabled by
the parameter Block Z1 or the binary input ExtBlock Z1.
The direction of measurement is reversed for negative settings
of X, R, RR and RRE.
12-63
Allowing for arc resistance

The settings RRE and RR make provision for fault resistance
in ground fault and phase-to-phase fault loops. The setting takes
the ground fault resistance comprising the arc resistance and the
pylon footing resistance in relation to the line resistance into
account.
Typical settings lie in the range RR(E)/X = 0.5...3.
The arc resistance RB can be calculated according to A.R. van
C. Warrington as follows:
28700 d
RB =
I1.4
where:
d length of arc in m
I current in A
RB arc resistance in
Since the unit is /ph, the fault resistance appears differently in

the impedance plane according to the type of fault. Where the
value of the fault resistance RF in is known, it has to be
entered in the R/X diagram as follows:
phase-to-ground fault: R = RF / (1 + k 0 )
phase-to-phase fault: R = RF / 2
three-phase fault: R = RF / 3
It is for this reason that fault resistance is compensated

individually the parameters RRE and RR. The parameter RR
will generally be set lower than RRE, because the phase-to-
phase fault resistance is normally very low.
R
F
R R
R F F
F
R
F
Phase-to-ground Phase-to-phase Three-phase

fault fault fault
Fig. 12.29 Faults with arc resistance
12-64
Load discrimination
The load area defined by the underimpedance parameters
RLoad and AngleLoad is taken into account by starting and
measuring characteristics. The distance function can only trip, if
the fault impedance lies within the underimpedance starting
characteristic.
X
S4
S3
S2
S1
SR
Starting
Fig. 12.30 Load discrimination
NOTE that the load impedance area is only formed when the
underimpedance starter (UZ) is in operation. It does not exist
when starting is provided by the overcurrent starter (OC).
Zero-sequence compensation of the protected line

The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence
compensation factor are set individually for each zone using
parameters k0 and k0Ang. The k0 factors are calculated from
the positive-sequence impedance ZL and the zero-sequence
impedance Z0L of the line:
( Z 0L Z L )
k 0 =1/ 3x k 0 =1/ 3x ( Z 0L Z L ) / Z L )
ZL
Range: 0 to 8 in steps of 0.01
k 0 Ang = arctan ( X 0L X L ) /(R 0L RL ) arctan ( X L / RL )
Range: -180 to +90 in steps of 0.01
12-65
Zero-sequence compensation of double-circuit lines

The magnitude and phase-angle of the zero-sequence
compensation factor for a double-circuit line are set using
parameters k0m and k0mAng. This compensation only applies
to Zones 1 and 2, the overreaching zone and the reverse zone.
12.2.6.3.2. Directional unit

Each distance zone has its own directional measuring unit. The
voltage used for measurement depends on the amplitude of the
fault voltage in relation to the parameter UminFault. The fault
voltage is used, providing it is higher than the setting of
UminFault and a voltage derived from the healthy voltage and
the memory voltage is used when it falls below. The
recommended settings are 0.1 UN for conventional VTs.
Should correct determination of direction not be possible
(reference voltage too low or memory voltage decayed), the
setting of the parameter MemDirMode determines whether the
protection blocks or trips:
Block Protection blocks all zones
(definitive zone only if directional)
Trip Protection trips
Cond. trip Protection blocks unless the instantaneous and
preceding zones are in opposite directions, in
which case the protection trips.
12.2.6.3.3. Overreaching zone (OR)

The settings including the designation 4/OR (X (4/OR) ... delay
(4/OR)) can be used either for a fourth measuring zone or a
completely independent overreaching zone (but not for both at
the same time) by appropriately setting the parameter Delay
(4/OR) (see Section 12.2.6.3.5.).
In applications requiring a fourth zone, the measuring unit of the
second zone is used for overreaching.
An overreaching zone is necessary for the switch-onto-fault and
zone extension logics and for overreaching transfer tripping
schemes.
12-66
12.2.6.3.4. Reverse zone (BACK)

A reverse measuring zone is used in a blocking scheme and
also the logic for detecting a reversal of fault energy direction. It
is set using the parameters X (BACK), R (BACK), RR (BACK)
and RRE (BACK) which have setting ranges from 0 to
-300 /ph.
NOTE that:
for underimpedance starting (UZ):
With the exception of the load discrimination defined by the
parameters RLoad and AngleLoad, the reverse zone
operates independently of the starters.
for overcurrent starting (OC):
The reverse zone is only in operation when an overcurrent
starter (IStart) has picked up.
the binary input (Ext Blk UZ) blocks operation regardless of
the starter mode for the reverse zone.
Signal output: Meas Bward.
Measurement of the reverse zone only takes place while the
first zone is active, i.e. the Meas Bward signal resets at the
latest at the end the second time step.
12.2.6.3.5. Time steps (Delay)

The operating time of every activated distance zone (parameter
X <> 0) is determined by the parameter Delay, which has a
setting range of 0 to 10 s in steps of 0.01. The parameter
Delay (4/OR) is also associated with a logic, which determines
whether it applies to Zone 4 or to the overreaching zone, i.e. if
Delay (4/OR) < Delay (2), it applies to the overreaching zone,
otherwise to Zone 4.
The set times must satisfy the following relationships:
Delay (1) < Delay (2) < Delay (3) < Delay (4) < Delay(Def),
Delay (OR) < Delay (2).
When grading the operating times of several distance relays, the
minimum grading time should not be less than the sum of the
circuit-breaker operating time plus 150 ms (reset time +
operating time of the measuring system + safety margin).
Recommended timer settings:
Zone 1: normally instantaneous
12-67
Zone 2: Delay (2) is normally set to the sum of relay and

circuit-breaker operating times, arc extinction time,
signal transmission time and a tolerance margin,
which amounts to about 0.25 to 0.5 s. The
tolerance includes an allowance for sequential
tripping.
Zone 3: Delay (3) is set to about 2 Delay (2).
Zone 4: Delay (4) or Delay(Def) is normally set to at least
4 Delay (2).
Special cases may require settings, which deviate considerably
from the above recommendations.
The time steps of zones (1 to 4) must have settings less than
Delay(Def).
12.2.6.4. Definitive zone (Def)

The definitive (or fifth) zone is subject to the same parameters as
the underimpedance starters (i.e. XA, XB, RA, RB, RLoad and
AngleLoad).
The corresponding time step is defined by the parameter Delay
(Def).
X
27
XA
Load angle
-RLoad RLoad RA
R
-RB 27 (In tripping
direction)
-XB
Fig. 12.31 Definitive zone characteristic
The parameter DefDirMode determines the response at the end

of the definitive time. It can be set to be either directional (in
tripping direction) or non-directional.
12-68
NOTE: There is still a definitive zone even using the overcurrent

starter (OC), but only with respect to the parameters Delay
(Def) and DefDirMode.
12.2.6.5. Backup overcurrent unit (O/C Backup Protection)

The settings for the backup overcurrent unit are made via the
sub-menu O/C BACKUP PROTECTION. The setting of the
parameter I O/C determines the pick-up level, which can be
chosen in steps of 0.1 IN between 0 and 10 IN. The associated
time delay is set in steps of 0.1 s between 0 and 10 s by means
of the parameter Delay O/C.
The pick-up signal of the overcurrent unit is also used by the
STUB protection. If the function is being used for this purpose,
i.e. the binary I/P Isol open is at logical 1, the tripping time is
fixed at 25 ms.
The parameters for setting the VT supervision function are
located in the sub-menu VT SUPERVISON. One of four
different operating modes can be chosen using VTSupMode.
The function processes zero and negative-sequence
components, which are either used on their own ('ZeroSeq and
NegSeq') or combined ('Zero*NegSeq and Spec').
ZeroSeq [U I ]
0 0
NegSeq [U I ]
2 2
Zero*NegSeq [(U I )+ (U I )]
0 0 2 2
Spec [U (I + I ) ]
2 0 2
The four pick-up values are the settings of the parameters

U0min VTSup, U2min VTSup, I0min VTSup and
I2min VTSup. They can be set between 0 and 2 UN (or IN) in
steps of 0.01. The basic settings are 0.2 UN for the voltage and
0.07 IN for the current.
Only the NegSeq or Spec options are available in ungrounded
systems.
12-69
Upon operating, the VT supervision function is normally required

to immediately block the distance protection function. Provision
is made, however, for blocking the distance function after a delay
of 12 s by setting the parameter VTSupBlkDel. This parameter
is normally set in cases where only the overcurrent starters are
in use.
If the VT supervision function remains picked up for longer than
12 s, it resets only after a delay (1 s). Should a fault give rise to
zero or negative-sequence current components, it resets im-
mediately.
The parameter VTSupDebDel (deblocking) enables the reset
delay to be continuously enabled regardless of current.
Recommended setting
Parameter Grounded system Ungrounded system

VTSupDebDel enabled disabled
The signal VTSup indicates that the distance function is being

blocked by the VT supervision and VTSupDel that the 12 s de-
lay is running.
12.2.6.7. Tripping logic

The Trip Schemes tab gives access to the parameters for
determining the tripping logic.
The various transfer tripping schemes are selected by setting the
parameter ComMode (3 x PUTT, POTT and OVERREACHING
BLOCKING schemes). The possible settings are given below.
The settings for the respective scheme only appear after the
appropriate communication mode has been selected.
PUTT NONDIR
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (non-directional)
Weak enables the weak infeed logic.
PUTT FWD
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (in line direction)
No other parameters.
12-70
PUTT OR2
Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (overreaching
zone/Zone 2)
Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications
channel failure.
POTT
Permissive overreaching transfer tripping
Weak enables the weak infeed logic.
Unblock selects the enabling logic for communications
channel failure.
Echo enables the echo logic.
TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy
direction logic.
t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy
direction logic.
BLOCK OR
Blocking scheme
TransBl enables the logic for reversal of fault energy
t1Block time allowed for the receipt of a PLC signal
t1TransBl tripping signal duration by the wrong energy
direction logic.
t2TransBl max. operating time of the wrong energy
direction logic.
TripMode
Depending on the setting of the parameter TripMode, tripping is
either phase-selective, controlled by the binary input 1PolAR
(for 1phTrip), always three-phase (for 3phTrip) or three-phase
after the time Delay (3) (for 3phTripDel3).
SOTF Mode
Access is gained to the switch-onto-fault logic settings by
selecting the parameter SOTF Mode. The alternatives
presented are whether the switch-onto-fault logic should trip on
the basis of the non-directional underimpedance starters or the
overreaching zone.
12-71
This logic is enabled either by the undervoltage function delayed

by 10 s or 200 ms or the binary inputs Deadline and Manual
close.
Two signaling outputs Start SOTF and Trip SOTF are
associated with the switch-onto-fault logic. Start SOTF is
intended for blocking the autoreclosure function and Trip SOTF
signals that tripping was by the switch-onto-fault logic.
SOTF 10 sec
The parameter SOTF10sec determines whether the
undervoltage function and the binary input Deadline are
enabled after 10 s (on) or 200 ms (off). off indicates switching
onto a fault after fast autoreclosure (Fast AR). Tripping in this
case is thus based on the decisions of the starters alone.
t1EvolFaults
The setting of the parameter t1EvolFaults determines the time
during which the detection of an evolving fault causes a three-
phase trip.
12.2.6.8. Power-swing blocking

Only the parameter tPSblbock for the time during which the
power-swing blocking signal is maintained has to be set in the
POWER-SWING BLOCKING sub-menu. The setting range is 0
to 10 s in steps of 0.01. Tripping is enabled again at the latest at
the end of this time.
The power-swing blocking function is disabled when tPSblock is
set to zero or a logical 1 is applied to the binary input Ext Blk
PSB.
12.2.6.9. Assignment of binary inputs

The BINARY INPUTS tab gives access to the parameters for
assigning binary inputs.
All binary inputs can be assigned to external signals or the out-
puts of other functions.
ChgMeasDir
Applying a signal to this input reverses the direction of meas-
urement for the entire distance protection function (all zones).
12-72
Ext Blk Dist

This input blocks the entire distance protection function. Blocking
is signaled by Dist blocked and after 12 s by DelDistBlk. Only
the backup overcurrent protection (I O/C) then remains active.
Ext UZ Blk
This input blocks the underimpedance starters, the neutral
voltage starter (U0), the measurement for Weak and the reverse
measurement. The overcurrent starters (OC) remain in
operation.
Ext Blk PSB

This input blocks the power-swing blocking function.
Ext Blk O/C backup

This input blocks the backup overcurrent protection (O/C Backup
Protection).
Deadline
The signal applied to this input is needed by the switch-onto-fault
logic to indicate to the distance function that the line is dead
before the circuit-breaker is closed. It is used for the switch-onto-
fault logic providing the VTs are on the busbars.
Manual Close
Prior to manually closing the circuit-breaker, this signal enables
the switch-onto-fault logic and blocks the VT supervision
function.
ZExtension, ZExtensionAR
The overreaching logic permits instantaneous tripping within the
overreaching zone. It is enabled via the binary input ZExtension
or ZExtensionAR.
For this purpose, the output ZExtension of the autoreclosure
function is connected to the input ZExtensionAR.
Isol open
This input is required by the STUB protection to ascertain
whether an isolator is open or not.
12-73
ComRec
This input is needed for the external signal ComRec (signal
received by PLC, optical fiber link or point-to-point radio).
ComFail
This input signals to the protection that the PLC channel has
failed.
1PolAR
This input permits single-phase tripping to take place and is used
in conjunction with single or three-phase autoreclosure schemes.
Refer to the Section Autoreclosure for the connection to the
ExtBlkSOTF
This input is needed in cases where the switch-onto-fault logic is
not enabled after an autoreclosure.
Refer to the Section Autoreclosure for the connection to the
ExtBlkHF
This input blocks the reception of an intertripping signal. It is
used for coordinating communication channel signals when in a
solidly grounded system, the distance protection and the E/F
protection use the same channel. It must be connected to the
RecBlk signal of the ground fault function.
ExtBlock Z1
This input blocks measurement in zone 1.
12.2.7. Technical description
12.2.7.1. Starters
12.2.7.1.1. Starting procedure

The REB500sys distance function is equipped with either
overcurrent or underimpedance starters. The setting of the
parameter StartMode determines which of the two is active.
12-74
A starter must pick up at least twice before its signal is

processed (for phase selection, starting timers, signaling etc.).
Should a starter pick up only sporadically, only the backwards
measuring system and ancillary functions such as displaying
measurements etc. are enabled.
Starting signals do not reset unless all the starters have reset.
12.2.7.1.2. Overcurrent starters (Istart)

The variables at the inputs of the overcurrent starters are the
phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 and the residual current IE (3I0),
respectively the neutral voltage UE (3U0). Firstly a logic
determines Imax, i.e. the highest of the three phase currents IR, IS
and IT.
If the value of Imax exceeds the setting of the parameter IStart
(overcurrent starters), each of the phase currents Iph is checked
to determine whether it exceeds the setting of the parameter
Imin (current enable) and also 80 % of Imax.
In the case of the ground current IE, it is checked whether it
exceeds the setting of the parameter 3I0min and also 25 % of
Imax. Depending on the setting of the parameter Gnd Fault
Mode (I0, I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), it is checked at the same time
whether the residual voltage UE has exceeded the setting of the
parameter 3U0min (neutral voltage enable).
The logical signals L1, L2, L3 and E are accordingly set to logical
0 or logical 1. The kind of fault and the phases involved are
thus determined. This information is needed for
phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)
signaling the kind of fault (signaling relays, LEDs etc.)
enabling signals for tripping and for starting the timers for the
measuring zones
The starting signals reset if after measurement, the impedances
of all six loops lie outside the final impedance zone. (If only the
overcurrent starters are in operation, there is no
underimpedance starting characteristic and relay response is
determined by the setting of the overcurrent starter IStart.)
12-75
START
IL1, IL2, IL3, IE, UE
Imax = highest
value of
IL1, IL2, IL3
N
Imax > Istart
(Iph > Imin) N

AND
(Iph > 0.8 Imax)
Y
set log.
signal "ph" (L1, L2, L3)
all
N
phase currents
IL1, IL2, IL3
[(IE 3I0min)
AND (IE 0.25 Imax)] N
AND/OR
(UE 3U0min)
set log.
signal "E"
HEST 955038 FL
END
Fig. 12.32 Overcurrent starters (IStart)
12-76
12.2.7.1.3. Underimpedance starters (UZ) up to initial pick-up

The variables at the I/Ps of the underimpedance starters are the
phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3 and the residual current IE (3I0)
and the phase-to-neutral voltages UL1, UL2, UL3 and the neutral
voltage UE (3U0).
START
UL1, UL2, UL3, UE,

IL1, IL2, IL3, IE
(IE > 3I0min) AND

(IE>0.25Imax) AND/OR
(UE>3U0 min)
(Iph1 > Imin) N

N AND
(Iph > Imin (Iph2 > Imin
Y
Y
Uph1 Uph2
UPh Z = ---------------------
Z = ----------- Iph1 Iph2
2 x IPh
N Z < Z Start
Z < Z Start
J
Y
Set temp.
Set temp. signals Ph1,
signals Ph, Ph2
E
N
N All Ph-Ph
All Ph-0 loops
loops
Y
Y
Loop = Selectivity
Phase selection conditions
Uph Uph1 Uph2

Set
Z = ------------------- or Z = ------------------- log. signals
1x Iph + 1 x IE Iph1 Iph2
N
Z < ZStart
Log.signals =
temp.signals
END
Fig. 12.33 Underimpedance starters (UZ)
12-77
Depending on the setting of the parameter Gnd Fault Mode (I0,

I0 AND U0, I0 OR U0), the function determines initially whether
one or both of the ground fault criteria are fulfilled, i.e. whether
the residual current IE exceeds the setting of the parameter
3I0min and/or the residual voltage UE the setting of the
parameter 3U0min. Should this be the case, the three phase-to-
ground loops are measured first, otherwise just the three phase-
to-phase loops.
The three phase-to-ground loops are processed as follows:

If IR (or IS, or IT) is greater than Imin, the corresponding loops
are enabled and the loop impedances calculated as follows:
UR
ZR = (uncompensated)
2 IR
US
ZS = (uncompensated)
2 IS
UT
ZT = (uncompensated)
2 IT
All uncompensated impedances ZL1, ZL2 and ZL3 are compared

with the starting characteristic and temporarily set the logical
signals Ph and E (no display). An impedance loop is selected
on the basis of these signals (loop = selected phase).
If it is a Phase-Null-Loop, then the impedance is calculated with
a compensation k0 = 1:
UPh0 UL1
Z Ph0 = e.g.: ZL10 =
IPh + 1 IE IL1 + 1 IE
If a phase-to-phase loop is concerned, the impedance is

calculated using phase-to-phase variables:
UPhPh UL1 UL2
Z PhPh = e.g.: ZL1L2 =
IPhPh IL1 IL2
If the impedance (Z) calculated for the loop determined by the

phase selection logic lies within the underimpedance starting
characteristic (Zstart), the loop is used for measurement.
12-78
The logical signals are needed for

enabling signals for tripping
starting the timers for the measuring zones
The three phase-to-phase loops are processed as follows:

Providing Iph1 and Iph2 (IL1 and IL2, IL2 and IL3, or IL3 and IL1) are
higher than Imin, the corresponding loops are enabled and the
impedances are calculated as follows:
UL1 UL 2
ZL1L 2 =
IL1 IL 2
UL 2 UL 3
ZL 2L 3 =
IL 2 IL 3
UL 3 UL1
ZL 3L1 =
IL 3 IL1
Comparison of the three starting impedances eliminates the

healthy loops (selectivity condition).
If just one of the loop impedances lies within the underimped-
ance starting characteristic (Zstart), only the signals (L1 and L2),
or (L2 and L3), or (L3 and L1) would be set to logical 1.
If more than one of the loop impedances lie within the under-
impedance starting characteristic, the signals L1 and L2 and L3
are set to logical 1.
The kind of fault is thus determined, information which is needed
for
phase selection (determination of the loop to be measured)
enabling signals for tripping
starting the timers
12-79
12.2.7.1.4. Phase selection

The phase selection logic determines the loop
for the underimpedance starting measurement when an
ground fault has been detected
to be measured in the first period (max. 20 ms) after starting
to be measured during the time the function is in the picked-
up state when a ground fault has been detected on an
ungrounded system or system with Petersen coils (phase
selection solidly grounded)
In a solidly grounded system (parameter PhaseSelMode set to
solid gr.), the loop to be measured is determined according to
the following table:
Starters Loop measured

Phase-to-ground fault L1, E L1E
Phase-to-phase fault L1, L2 L1L2
Phase-to-phase fault L3, L1 L3R
Phase-to-phase-to-ground fault L1, L2, E L1L2
Three-phase fault L1, L2, L3 L3L1 (L1L2) (L2L3)
In a solidly grounded system, both phases involved in a phase-

to-phase-to-ground fault have to trip, which is not the case in
ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils. The phase-
to-phase loops are measured.
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils (para-
meter PhaseSelMode set to cyclic/acyclic phase selection), the
loop to be measured is determined according to the following
table:
12-80
Starters Loop measured

Three-phase fault L1, L2, L3 L3L1 (L1L2) (L2L3)
Cross-country fault *) L1, L2, E
Cross-country fault *) L2, L3, E according to phase
Cross-country fault *) L3, L1, E selection logic
*) two ground faults at different locations
In ungrounded systems or systems with Petersen coils, it is

usual for just one of the two ground faults of a cross-country fault
to be tripped, so that as much of the system remains in operation
as possible.
This is achieved by arranging for all the distance relays on the
system to measure the same ground fault loop and this is the
purpose of the phase selection function.
The logic of the phase selection function provides a choice of the
following sequences:
Starters Fault loop measure in relation to PhaseSelMode

L1L3 L3L1 L1L3 L1L2 L3L2 L3L1 L2L1 L2L3
L2L1 L2L3 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L1
cycl. cycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl. acycl.
L1, L2, E L2E L1E L1E L1E L2E L1E L2E L2E
L1L3L2L1 cyclic (L1 before L3, L3 before L2, L2 before L1)

means, for example, that for a cross-country fault L3-L1-E, L1
phase (the L1-E loop) is measured rather than L3 phase, for a
cross-country fault L2-L3-E, L3 phase (the L3-E loop) rather than
L2 phase and for a cross-country fault L1-L2-E, L2 phase (the
L2-E loop) rather than L1 phase.
L1L3L2 acyclic (L1 before L3 before L2) means, for example,
that for a cross-country fault L3-L1-E, L1 phase (the L1-E loop)
is measured rather than L3 phase, for a cross-country fault L2-
L3-E, L3 phase (the L3-E loop) rather than L2 phase and for a
cross-country fault L1-L2-E, L1 phase (the L1-E loop) rather than
L2 phase.
12-81
12.2.7.2. Distance measurement
12.2.7.2.1. Measurement procedure

The distance measurement of a fault is enabled after one of the
two starting functions, overcurrent or underimpedance, has
picked up twice.
Initially the fault loop determined by the phase selection function
is measured. This is called processing period I and lasts until a
trip signal is generated in the first zone or a maximum of one
period of the power system frequency.
At the latest after one period of the power system frequency, all
six impedance loops are measured. This is called processing
period II, during which the three phase-to-ground loops and the
three phase-to-phase loops are measured alternately.
Comparison of the results of the six measurements eliminates
those impedance loops, which are not involved in the fault
(selectivity conditions).
The timer started by the starting units controls the comparison of
the measured impedances with the polygon characteristic.
12.2.7.2.2. Measurement during processing period I

Processing period I lasts from the instant a starter picks up until
the first tripping signal is generated, but is restricted to a maxi-
mum of one period of the power system frequency. The input
signals are the phase currents IL1, IL2, IL3, the residual current IE
(3I0), the residual current of any parallel circuit IEm (3I0m), the
neutral current IEm of any parallel circuit of a double-circuit line
(3I0m) and the three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 and UL3.
All are sampled, analog and digitally filtered and broken down
into their component vectors.
If the overcurrent starters are in operation and have picked up,
the phase selection function is performed and the loop to be
measured determined. Should this not be the case, the loop
determined by the underimpedance starters is measured.
The impedance of a phase-to-ground loop, e.g. L1-E is calcu-
lated using the equation:
UL1
ZR = (compensated)
IL1 + k 0 IE + k 0m IEm
where
k0: zero-sequence compensation factor for Z0
k 0 = (Z 0 Z 1 ) 3Z 1
12-82
k0m: zero-sequence compensation factor for the mutual im-

pedance Z0m of double-circuit line
k 0m = Z 0m 3 Z 1
The mutual zero-sequence impedance of a double-circuit line

(k0m IEm) is only compensated for the 1st, 2nd and
overreaching zones, and in the latter two cases, only if their
direction of measurement is the same as that of the 1st zone. In
this respect, a reverse measuring zone is treated in the same
manner as an overreaching zone.
The mutual zero-sequence impedance (k0m IEm) is not com-
pensated, should IEm exceed 1.25 IE or the direction of IEm not
be the same as that of IE. This prevents a healthy parallel cir-
cuit from being adversely influenced by a fault relatively close to
the relay location of the faulted circuit.
Assuming a fault between L1 and L2, the impedance of the

phase-to-phase loop is calculated using the equation:
UL1 UL 2
ZRS =
IL1 IL 2
It is determined almost simultaneously, whether the impedance

measured lies within the characteristic and whether it is in the di-
rection of the 1st. zone and overreaching zone, or in the direc-
tion of the reverse measuring zone. The corresponding tripping
and other signals are processed by the system logic. Tripping
of the circuit-breaker, however, only takes place after a
measuring unit has operated twice.
12-83
START
UR, US, UT, UE

IR, IS, IT, IE
Overcurrent
starter
Overcurrent N
starter
Loop =
phase selection
Z calculation
(ph-0 compensated)
Z Start , Z 1-4 , (Z OR ),
Z Back , direction
N
Trip
Signalling,
fault location,
Z(loop)
N
t > 1 periode
Stoping
the timers
Y
Change to
processing
Change to periode II
processing
periode II
END
HEST 955035 FL
Fig. 12.34 Processing period I
12-84
12.2.7.2.3. Measurement during processing period II

Processing period II commences after the first tripping signal or
at the latest one period of the system frequency after a starter
picks up. The variables measured are the same as those already
processed during processing period I.
Only in the case of a cross-country fault in an ungrounded sys-
tem or system with Petersen coils is measurement restricted
during processing period II to just the impedance loop deter-
mined by the phase selection logic, otherwise all the phase-to-
ground and phase-to-phase impedance loops are continuously
processed in sequence, providing the enabling and ground fault
criteria are fulfilled.
The equations used to calculate the loop impedances are the
same as those in the preceding Section.
It is then determined whether the impedance measured lies
within the characteristic and whether it is in the direction of the
zone being measured. The overreaching zone and reverse
measuring zone are evaluated as part of the measurement of the
1st zone. The corresponding tripping and other signals are
processed by the system logic. Tripping of the circuit-breaker,
however, only takes place after a measuring unit has
operated twice.
12-85
START
UL1, UL2, UL3, UE

IL1, IL2, IL3, IE
Istart, UZ starters
Solidly grounded N
system AND
(I > starting active) Select phases
Calculat six Z N
(Ph-0 compensated) Ph-E
Y
Selectivity
conditions Calculat three
Calculate Z Ph-0 Z Ph-Ph
ZStart, Z1-4, (ZOR),

ZBack, direction
Reset Y
conditions
Signals Reset signals
N
Trip
Signals,
Fault location,
Z(loop)
Stop timers
END
Fig. 12.35 Processing period II
12-86
12.2.7.2.4. Directional decision

Before deciding the direction of a fault, the fault voltage (used as
reference voltage) is checked to determine whether it is higher
than the setting of the parameter UKmin (minimum fault
voltage). Providing this is the case, the phase-angle of the
impedance, i.e. between fault current and voltage, is determined:
U
arg Z = arg
I
arg Z = arg U - arg I
where
arg: argument of the complex number (angle)
U : fault voltage
U = UL1 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)
U = UL1 UL2 (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)
I : fault current
I = IL1 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)
I = IL1 IL2 (phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)
arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be desig-
nated a forwards fault:
-27 < arg Z < +117
arg Z must lie within the following limits for the fault to be desig-
nated a reverse fault:
+153 < arg Z < -63
Z is the impedance measured by the protection, which corre-
sponds to the line impedance ZL. By using the fault voltage as
reference voltage for determining direction, the measurement is
independent of source impedance.
If the fault voltage is less than the setting of the parameter
Umin (minimum fault voltage), the impedance is determined
from the fault current and a separate reference voltage:
Uref
arg Z ref = arg = arg Uref - arg I
I
where
arg: angle (argument) of the complex number
12-87
Uref: reference voltage

Uref = (UL2 UL3) . 27 (phase-to-ground loop L1-E)
Uref = (UL1 - UL3) + 1/8 . (UL1mem UL3mem)
(phase-to-phase loop L1-L2)
I : fault current
I = IL1 (phase-to-ground loop, e.g. L1-E)
I = IL1 - IL2 (phase-to-phase loop, e.g. L1-L2)
The reference voltage Uref is derived from the phase voltages
not involved in the fault. In the case of a phase-to-phase loop,
the reference voltage also includes a proportion of the memory
voltage Umem. The duration of the memory voltage is limited to
between 5 and 15 periods of the power system frequency,
depending on the discrepancy between the measured frequency
and the rated power system frequency, i.e. the memory voltage
is used for 15 periods at rated system frequency and for a
proportionally reduced number of periods as the frequency
deviates from rated power system frequency.
As long as the reference voltage Uref is greater than 0.5% of
rated voltage, it is used to determine fault direction.
In this case, a forwards fault satisfies the condition:
-90 < arg Zref < +90
A reverse fault satisfies the condition:
+90 < arg Zref < -90
Zref is the impedance measured by the protection, which
contains a component of the source impedance ZS in addition to
the line impedance ZL. The operating characteristic has to be
mathematically transformed in order to make the influence of the
source impedance visible. If the reference voltage is less than
0.5% of rated voltage, direction is not taken into account for the
phase-to-ground loop and tripping is blocked. In the case of the
phase-to-phase loops, tripping is either enabled or blocked,
depending on the setting of the parameter MemDirMode.
12-88
The purpose of the VT supervision function is to monitor the VT
leads with respect to asymmetrical short-circuits and open-
circuits. An m.c.b. can be included for three-phase VT short-
circuits and arranged to block the protection via a separate
optocoupler input.
The input variables monitored by the VT supervision function are
the three voltages UR, US, and UT and the three currents IL1, IL2,
IL2. The zero-sequence (U0, I0) and negative-sequence (U2, I2)
components are calculated for both the three-phase voltage and
three-phase current systems.
3U0 = UL1 + UL2 + UL3
3
3U2 = UL1 + UL2 a2 + UL3 a a = 0 . 5 + j = 1/ 120
2
3I0 = IL1 + IL2 + IL3
3I2 = IL1 + IL2 a2 + IL3 a
L1
L2
L3
3I0 >0 I2 >0 3I0 =0 I2 >0

3U0 > 0 U2 > 0 3U0 > 0 U2 > 0
U0 and not I0 U2 and not I2
L1 L1
L2 L2
L3 L3
3I0 > 0 I2 > 0

3U0 > 0 U2 > 0
U2 and not I2
Fig. 12.36 VT supervision
12-89
The measurement has to be performed using the negative-

sequence component, whenever there is no source of residual
current behind the relay, i.e. no grounded transformer neutrals.
The parameter VTSupMode (operating mode) must be set
accordingly.
The zero and/or negative-sequence components of currents and
voltages are compared with the settings of the parameters
U0min VTSup [U0_VTSUP], I0min VTSup [I0_VTSUP],
U2min VTSup [U2_VTSUP] and I2min VTSup [I2_VTSUP]
and the associated binary signals U0, U2, I0 and I2 are then set to
logical 1 or left at logical 0.
The signals U0 and U2 are delayed by 5 ms as a precaution
against incorrect blocking as a result of discrepancies between
the operating times of the three circuit-breaker poles.
Depending on the operating mode selected, one of the following
four conditions is monitored:
U0 . not I0 residual voltage, but no residual
current
U2 . not I2 NPS voltage, but no NPS current
(U0 . not I0) + (U2 . not I2) condition 1 or 2
U2 . not (I0 + I2) NPS voltage, but neither residual
current nor NPS current.
Blocking by the VT supervision function is delayed for 12 s
following manual closing of the circuit-breaker, an external
blocking signal (m.c.b. via an optocoupler input), a transfer
tripping signal from the opposite station or the generation of a
local tripping signal.
Should U0 (or U2) and I0 (or I2) pick-up during this delay,
operation of the VT supervision function remains blocked until U0
(or U2) resets. This measure prevents unwanted blocking during
single-phase autoreclosure.
The signal generated by the VT supervision function
VTSupMode instantly blocks the distance protection function.
Resetting the parameter VTSupMode [VTSUP_BLKDEL]
enables the distance function to be blocked after delay of 12 s.
From 12 s after the VT supervision circuit has picked up,
resetting of blocking is delayed by 1 s. Standard m.c.bs can
therefore be used, providing their main contacts do not close
before their auxiliary contacts.
12-90
Blocking by the VT supervision circuit resets the instant a fault

with zero and negative-sequence components occurs.
The parameter VTSupDebDel [VTSUP_DEBDEL] (deblocking)
provides facility for setting the 1 s reset delay permanently
regardless of current.
The blocking signal issued by the VT supervision function does
not influence the back-up overcurrent function.
12-91
Fig. 12.37 VTSUP
12-92
Signal In Out Source Drain

U2_VTSUP X U2 > U2 VT Sup
U0_VTSUP X U0 > U0 VT Sup
D_L1L2L3 X Binary output:
Trip L1L2L3
MANCL_DIST X Binary input:
Manual Close
HFREC X Binary input:
Com Rec
EXTBLK_DIST X Binary input:
Ext Blk Dist
I2_VTSUP X I2 > I2 VT Sup:
I0_VTSUP X I0 > I0 VT Sup:
VTSUP_BLKDEL X Input parameter:
Sup Blk Del
On = 1; Off = 0
VTSUP_DEBDEL X Input parameter:
Sup Deb Del
On = 1; Off = 0
VTFAIL_IU2 X Internal logic signal
VTFAIL_IU0 X Internal logic signal
VTFAIL_DLY X Binary output:
VT Sup
VTFAIL X Binary output:
VT Sup Del
12.2.7.4. Backup overcurrent function (O/C Backup)

The distance protection function includes a definite time overcur-
rent unit as backup protection. A starting signal Start O/C is set
to logical 1, when one or more of the currents IR, IS, and IT
exceed the setting of I O/C. After the time O/C Delay, the
tripping signal Trip O/C to the system logic is set to logical 1.
Blocking signals generated by the distance, underimpedance
starting, power swing blocking or VT supervision functions do not
influence the backup overcurrent function.
The overcurrent function is independent of the distance
protection starters and, not having to perform phase selection,
can have a more sensitive setting.
12-93
12.2.7.5. System logic
12.2.7.5.1. Structure of the system logic

The system logic processes the binary input signals from
external plant (optocoupler inputs) and all the binary signals of
the distance protection function.
VTSUP
SUPBL
SOTF
Binary input data of the distance protection function and the input/output unit
Binary output data to disturbance recorder and the input/output unit

STUB
ZE
TRANSB
UNBLOC
PUTTRE
PUTSEN
POTTRE
POTSEN
BLOCRE
BLOSEN
HFSEN
TRIP
HEST 915 022 FL
Fig. 12.38 System logic in the distance protection function
The system logic outputs are binary signals for controlling a

disturbance recorder, LED signals and auxiliary tripping and
signaling relays.
12-94
12.2.7.5.2. Enabling and disabling logic (SUPBL)

The logic of the VT supervision function (VTSUP segment) has
already been described in the relevant Section. The external
blocking signals for distance protection [EXTBL_DIST]
(optocoupler inputs), the power swing blocking [PS_BLOCK] and
the VT supervision [VT_BLOCK] functions received by the
SUPBL segment block all the distance protection functions
[DISTBL] with the exception of the backup overcurrent function.
EXTBLK_DIST
100
>=1 DISTBL
PSBBLOCK
VTFAIL
Fig. 12.39 SUPBL segment

EXTBLK_DIST X Binary input: Ext Blk Dist
PSBBLOCK X Binary output: Ext Blk PSB
VTFAIL X Binary output: VT Sup Delay
DISTBL X Binary output: Dist Block
12-95
12.2.7.5.3. Switch-onto-fault logic (SOTF)

Uweak_L1 X Starter: UL1 < Umin
CREL_L1 X Starter: IL1 > Imin (current release)
DeadLine X Binary input: DeadLine
SOTF_10S X Setting: SOFT 10sec
(On=1 / Off=0)
MANCL_DIST X Binary input: Manual Close
SOTF_INI X Always = 0,
when SOFT = Off
when SOFT = Non-directional
SOTF_INI = (Starter! = 0)
when SOFT = Forwards OR
SOTF_INI = (Starter! = 0) &
(fault in overreach zone)
START_SOTF X Binary signal:
SOFT picked
up
SOTF X Binary signal:
SOFT starting
signal
12-96
Uweak_L1
Uweak_L2
&
Uweak_L3T
CREL_L1
CREL_L2
CREL_L3
>=1
DeadLine
& 10000
SOTF_10S
>=1
&
200
MANCL_DIST
START_SOTF
1000
& SOTF
SOTF_INI
Fig. 12.40 SOTF segment
When a circuit-breaker is closed onto and existing three-phase

fault anywhere in the power system, instantaneous three-phase
tripping takes place.
The fault detectors in this case are the non-directional starters
(overcurrent or underimpedance units) or optionally the
overreaching zone, but this is only used in the following special
cases:
Power transformer with high inrush currents at the remote
end of the line. In such cases, fault detection involving the
distance measuring units is safer.
Close faults with complete voltage collapse may possibly not
otherwise be detected, in which case the parameter
MemDirMode has to be set to Trip.
The switch-onto-fault logic can be activated and the switch-onto-
fault signal [SOTF] set to logical 1 in one of three ways:
1. by an auxiliary contact on the CB control switch when closing
the CB (optocoupler input Manual close [MANCL_DIST])
12-97
2. by an auxiliary contact on the CB when opening the CB

(optocoupler input Dead line [DEADLINE])
3. by prolonged undervoltage (U weak) on all three phases and
no current enable which corresponds to a dead line
[UWEAK_L1, L2, L3]
Alternative 2) is used, if the VTs are connected to the busbars
and alternative 1) is not possible. The criteria of alternatives 2)
and 3) are only effective after either 200 ms or 10 s [SOTF_10S]
(setting), depending on whether the switch-onto-fault logic is re-
quired to operate after autoreclosure (200 ms) or not (10 s). For
dead times longer than 10 s (autoreclosure function) there is the
possibility of using the blocking input Ext Blk SOTF. This is a
binary input which is interlocked by [P_SOTF_INIT] via an AND
gate.
Combining undervoltage and a missing current enable signal
[CREL_L1, L2, L3] as in alternative 3) prevents mal-operation of
the logic after 200 ms, respectively 10 s, in cases of system
faults with low fault current contribution detected in the higher
distance zones.
Resetting of the signal SOTF [START_SOTF] is delayed by
1 s, i.e. every distance protection start within a time of 1 s after
one of the three switch-onto-fault criteria was fulfilled gives rise
to three-phase tripping [SOTF] of the circuit-breaker.
12.2.7.5.4. Short-zone logic (STUB)

ISOL_OPEN
&
TRIP_OC_L1L2L3
TRIP_STUB
25
Fig. 12.41 STUB segment

ISOL_OPEN X Binary input: Isolator open
TRIP_OC_L1L2L3 X Binary signal: Trip O/C
TRIP_STUB X Binary signal:
Trip Stub
12-98
In 1 breaker schemes, the short zone between the two circuit-

breakers and the line isolator can be protected by the backup
overcurrent function by permitting its instantaneous pick-up sig-
nal [TRIP_OC_L1L2L3] to trip the circuit-breakers [TRIP_STUB]
after 25 ms whenever the line isolator is open (signal applied to
the optocoupler input Isolator open).
This arrangement is only necessary, if the VTs are installed on
the line side of the isolator and the CTs are in the bars between
the circuit-breakers.
12.2.7.5.5. Zone extension logic (ZE)
ZE_FOR_DIST
>=1
AR_ZE
&
RSFF
S
START_L1L2L3 BIT_TRIP_ZE
R Q
Fig. 12.42 ZE segment

ZE_FR_DIST X Binary input: ZExtension
AR_ZE X Binary input: ZExtensionAR
START_L1L2L3 X Binary signal: Start L1+L2+L3
BIT_TRIP_ZE X Internal
signal to trip
logic (TRIP3)
This logic enables a signal from another function or an external

signal to switch the reach of the first distance zone from the
underreaching to overreaching [BIT_TRIP_ZE].
Such a signal can originate, for example, from the internal
autoreclosure function (binary input ZExtensionAR [AR_ZE])
or from an optocoupler input (binary input ZExtension
[ZE_FOR_ DIST]).
The internal autoreclosure function issues an overreach signal
[AR_ZE] when all the autoreclosure conditions are fulfilled.
12-99
12.2.7.5.6. Communication channel failure (UNBLOCK)

This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive under-
reaching transfer tripping scheme (PUTT OR2) or a permissive
overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT).
The logic causes the communication channel failure signal from
the communication equipment (optocoupler input Com Fail) to
be interpreted as a receive signal for 100 ms. This enables
tripping [BIT_UNBL] to take place in PUTT OR2 or POTT
schemes in cases where the PLC receive signal is attenuated by
the primary system fault on the line.
P_UNBLOCK
&
HFREC
&
20 BIT_UNBL
HFFAIL
20
Fig. 12.43 UNBLOCK segment

P_UNBLOCK X Setting: Unblock
On = 1; Off = 0
HFREC X Binary input: Com Rec
HFFAIL X Binary signal:
Com Fail
BIT_UNBL X Internal signal to
the POTT or PUTT
logic.
12-100
12.2.7.5.7. Permissive underreaching transfer tripping (PUTT)

The criteria for tripping and transmission of a transfer trip signal
by the distance protection function in a PUTT scheme are given
in the table below.
t = Delay (1) Trip = Meas Main
= 0 sec : Send = Meas Main
t = Com Rec : Trip (PUTT NONDIR) = Com Rec * (Start L1+L2+L3 + Weak)
Trip (PUTT FWD) = Com Rec * Meas Fward
Trip (PUTT OR2) = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach
Send = Meas Main
t = Delay (2) : Trip = Meas Main

Send = Meas Main
t = Delay (3) : Trip = Meas Main

Send = "0"
t = Delay (Def) : Trip = Start L1+L2+L3 (dir/nondir)

Send = "0"
12.2.7.5.8. PUTT transmit logic (PUTT_SEND)

The logic (PUTT_SEND) transfers its output signals to a
common transmit logic for PUTT, POTT and BLOCK OR
schemes.
PUTT_NONDIR
>=1
PUTT_ON
PUTT_FWD
PUTT_OR
&
DELAY3
PUTT_SEND
MEAS_MAIN
START_L1L2L3
Fig. 12.44 PUTSEND
12-101

PUTT_NONDIR X Setting: Com Mode
PUTT_FWD PUTT non-directional
PUTT_NONDIR = 1
PUTT_OR
PUTT Forwards
PUTT_FWD = 1
PUTT OR2 PUTT_BWD = 1
DELAY3 X Binary output: Delay 3
MEAS_MAIN X Binary output:
Meas Main
START_L1L2L3 X Binary output:
Start L1+L2+L3
PUTT_ON X Internal signal to
the distance
function transmit
logic (SENDLOGIC)
PUTT_SEND X Internal signal to
the distance
function transmit
logic
The transmission criteria are fulfilled when the local measuring

unit trips, the starters have picked up and the third time step has
not started.
12.2.7.5.9. PUTT receive logic (PUTT_REC)

The receive logic (PUTT_REC) transfers its output signals to the
tripping logic. Account is taken of a weak infeed (Weak)
[UWEAK_L1, L2, L3] or a short enable signal in the event of
failure of the communication channel (Unblock) [BIT_UNBL].
Provision is made for applying the tripping criterion to the entire
underimpedance starting characteristic (PUTT non-directional)
[PUTT_NONDIR], starting in forwards direction (PUTT
Forwards) [PUTT_FWD] or the overreaching of 2nd zone (PUTT
OR2) [PUTT_OR2].
12-102

PUTT_NONDIR X Setting: Com Mode
PUTT_FWD PUTT non-directional
PUTT_NONDIR = 1
PUTT_OR
PUTT Forwards PUTT_FWD = 1
PUTT OR2 PUTT_BWD = 1
M_OWN X Internal logic signal (TRIP2)
START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
UZ_FWD X Binary output: Meas Fward
MEAS OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
BIT_UNBL X Internal logic signal (UNBLOCK)
P_WEAK X Setting: Weak
On = 1; Off = 0
UWEAK_L1 X UL1 < Umin
TRIP_PUTT X Internal signal to
tripping logic (TRIP2),
where it is compared
with all the tripping
conditions to generate
the binary signals
Trip L1, Trip L2 etc.
UWEAK_PUTT X Internal signal to
tripping logic (TRIP1)
UWEAK_L1_PUTT X Internal signal to
12-103
PUTT_NONDIR
&
>= 1
START_L1L2L3
&
PUTT_FWD
UZ_FWD
PUTT_OR
& &
MEAS_OR2
DELAY2
>= 1
M_OWN
BIT_UNBL >= 1
HFREC >= 1
TRIP_PUTT
& &
P_WEAK
100
000
100 >= 1 UWEAK_PUTT

UWEAK_L1 000
UWEAK_L1_PUTT
&
UWEAK_L2
UWEAK_L2_PUTT
&
UWEAK_L3
>= 1
5000 UWEAK_L3_PUTT
Fig. 12.45 UTREC
12.2.7.5.10. Permissive overreaching transfer tripping (POTT)

The POTT logic is divided into a receive logic (POTT_REC) and
a transmit logic (POTT_SEND).
The receive logic (POTT_REC) transfers its output signals to the
tripping logic. Account is taken of any weak infeed (Weak)
[UWEAK_L1, L2, L3], a short enable signal in the event of failure
of the communication channel (Unblock) [BIT_UNBL] or transient
blocking (Transbl) [BIT_TBE] signal.
12-104
The logic (POTT_SEND) transfers its output signals to a

schemes, while taking account of any echo signal received in the
event of a weak infeed.
The criteria for tripping [TRIP_POTT] and transmission
[SEND_POTT] of a transfer trip signal by the distance protection
function in a POTT scheme are given in the table below.
t = Delay (1) Trip = Meas

= 0 sec Send = Meas Oreach *
t = Com Rec Trip = (Com Rec + Unblock) * Meas Oreach *
Trip = Com Rec * Weak * notMeas Bward * notMeas
Send = Meas Oreach *
Send = Com Rec * notMeas
Send = "0"
Send = "0"
t = Delay (Def) Trip = Start L1+L2+L3

Send = "0"
12.2.7.5.11. POTT transmit logic (POTT_SEND)

POTT_ON
P_POTT
&
MEAS_OR2 >=1
BIT_TBE
DELAY2
POTT_SEND
&
&
P_ECHO
MEAS_BWD >= 1
100
M_OWN
&
EXTBLK_HF
HFREC
&
150
&
Fig. 12.46 POTTSEND
12-105

P_POTT X Setting: Com Mode
POTT P_POTT= 1
MEAS_OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
BIT_TBE X Internal logic signal TRANSBL
P_ECHO X Setting: Echo
On = 1; Off = 0
MEAS_BWD X Binary output: Meas Bward
EXTBLK_HF X Binary input: Com Rec
HFREC X Binary input: Ext Block HF
POTT_ON X Internal signal to the
distance function
transmit logic
POTT_SEND X Internal signal to the
distance function
transmit logic
12-106
12.2.7.5.12. POTT receive logic (POTT_REC)

TBA_POTT
MEAS_OR2
&
BIT_UNBL >=1 &
HFREC
BIT_TBE
DELAY2
>=1
TRIP_POTT
M_OWN >= 1
EXTBLK_HF
MEAS_BWD
200 &
UWEAK_L1
20 >= 1 UWEAK_POTT
200
P_WEAK
UWEAK_L1_POTT
UWEAK_L2 >= 1
5000
UWEAK_L3
&
UWEAK_L2_POTT
&
UWEAK_L3_POTT
Fig. 12.47 POTTREC
12-107

BIT_UNBL X Internal logic signal (UNBLOCK)
P_WEAK X Setting: Weak
On = 1; Off = 0
TBA_POTT X Internal logic signal
TRANSBL
TRIP_POTT X Internal signal to
tripping logic
(TRIP2), where it is
compared with all the
tripping conditions to
generate the binary
signals Trip L1, Trip
L2 etc.
UWEAK_POTT X Internal signal to
UWEAK_L1_POTT X Internal signal to
12-108
12.2.7.5.13. Overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR)

The BLOCK OR logic is divided into a receive logic
(BLOC_REC) and a transmit logic (BLOC_SEND).
The output signals from the receive logic (BLOC_REC) are
transferred to the tripping logic, while taking account of any
transient blocking due to reversal of energy direction
(TRANSBL).
The output signals from the transmit logic are transferred to the
schemes.
The tripping and transmit criteria can be seen from the following
table.

= 0 sec Send = Meas
t = t1Block Trip = Meas Oreach * notComRec *
Send = Meas Bward +
Send = "0"
Send = "0"
t = Delay (Def) Trip = Start L1+L2+L3

Send = "0"
12.2.7.5.14. Block transmit logic BLOC_SEND
P_BLOCK BLOCK_ON
&
HFFAIL
&
DELAY2
>=1
MEAS_OR2
MEAS_BWD BLOCK_SEND
100
BIT_TBE &
Fig. 12.48 BLOCSEND
12-109

P_BLOCK X Setting: Com Mode
BLOCK OR P_BLOCK= 1
HFFAIL X Binary input Com Fail
BLOCK_ON X Internal signal to
the distance
function transmit
logic
BLOCK_SEND X Internal signal to
the distance
function transmit
logic
12.2.7.5.15. BLOCK receive logic (BLOC_REC)
P_BLOCK &
HFFAIL
MEAS_OR2
T1 & TRIP_BLOCK
P_T1_BLOCK
HFREC
DELAY2 >= 1
M_OWN
BIT_TBE
TBA_BLOCK
&
Fig. 12.49 BLOCREC
12-110

P_BLOCK X Setting: Com Mode
BLOCK OR. P_BLOCK= 1
HFFAIL X Binary input Com Fail
P_T1_BLOCK Setting: t1Block
TRIP_BLOCK X Internal signal to tripping
logic (TRIP2), where it is
compared with all the
tripping conditions to
generate the binary
signals Trip L1, Trip L2
etc.
TBA_BLOCK X Internal logic signal
TRANSBL
12.2.7.5.16. Reversal of power direction (TRANSBL)

This logic is only used in conjunction with a permissive over-
reaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT) or an overreaching
blocking scheme (BLOCK OR) on double-circuit lines with
infeeds from both ends and a high mutual zero-sequence imped-
ance (both circuits on the same pylons). A blocking scheme
does not require this logic, providing the waiting time is set suf-
ficiently long.
12-111
The logic solves the following problem:
A1 B1 t = 0 s: Relays A1, B1 and B2 detect the fault in

the overreach zone and send a signal to
the remote end. Relay A2 detects a
backward fault.
~ ~
A2 B2
A1 B1 t = signal received: Relays A1, B1 and A2 receive a

signal from the remote end.
~ ~
A2 B2
A1 B1 t = CB open: CB A1 opens before CB B1 opens. Relay

A2 detects the fault in the overreach
zone, but still receives a signal from the
remote end, i.e. it trips the healthy line.
~ ~
A2 B2
Fig. 12.50 Reversal of power direction
12-112
The operation of the logic is as follows:

(POTT solution)
t = 0 s:
A1 B1 TBA_BLOCK
>= 1
T1
TBA_POTT
&
~ ~ MEAS_BWD
BIT_TBE
>= 1
T2 100
A2 B2
t = signal received
A1 B1 TBA_BLOCK
>= 1
T1
TBA_POTT
&
~ ~ MEAS_BWD
BIT_TBE
>= 1
T2 100
A2 B2
t = CB open:
TBA_BLOCK
>= 1
A1 B1 TBA_POTT
T1
&
MEAS_BWD
>= 1 BIT_TBE
~ ~
T2 100
A2 B2
Fig. 12.51 Solutions to combat reversal of power direction
BIT_TBA = (ComRec + Unblock) * MeasOreach

BIT_TBE blocks TRIP_POTT (see POTT receive logic)
12-113
The critical relay A2 cannot trip, because the reverse measure-

ment signal [MEAS_BWD] is maintained for at least T1 (setting
t1TransBl) and resets at the latest after T2 (setting
t2TransBl). The purpose of T2 is to ensure that blocking is
maintained should there be autoreclosure of the faulted circuit.
T1 allows time for the incorrect Com Rec signal to reset. Its
setting is thus given by the reset time of relay B2 and the reset
time of the communication channel. The receiver signal must not
be prolonged.
Tripping takes place instantaneously, if the tripping condition
TBA is still fulfilled after the time T1.
Tripping always causes the logic to reset, after which it remains
inactive for 100 ms. The faulted circuit will therefore be
immediately tripped, for example, in the case of an unsuccessful
autoreclosure attempt.
12.2.7.5.17. Transmit logic

The task of the transmit logic is to boost (Com Boost) the PLC
transmitter and transmit a signal (signaling relay output Com
Send) [HFSEND] to the opposite end of the line (signaling relay
O/P Com Boost) [HFBOOST].
General rules are:
The underreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive
underreaching transfer tripping scheme (PUTT).
The overreaching zone transmits the signal in a permissive
overreaching transfer tripping scheme (POTT).
The reverse measuring zone transmits the blocking signal in an
overreaching blocking scheme (BLOCK OR).
12-114
PUTT_ON
>=1
BIT_HF_ON
POTT_ON
BLOCK_ON
&
PUTT_SEND
>=1
POTT_SEND
BLOCK_SEND
HF_SEND
DISTBL
UWEAK_L1
>=1 &
UWEAK_L2
&
UWEAK_L3
2000
>=1
HF_BOOST
START_L1L2L3
Fig. 12.52 TRANSBL

PUTT_ON X PUTT logic
POTT_ON X POTT logic
BLOCK_ON X BLOCK logic
PUTT_SEND X PUTT logic
POTT_SEND X POTT logic
BLOCK_SEND X BLOCK logic
DISTBL X Enabling logic SUPBL
START_L1L2T X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
BIT_HF_ON X
HF_SEND X Binary output: Com Send
HF_BOOST X Binary output: Com Boost
12-115
12.2.7.5.18. Tripping logic

The main purpose of the tripping logic is coordination of single
and three-phase tripping of the circuit-breaker (heavy-duty
tripping relay outputs). It also provides additional starting and
tripping signals.
Single or three-phase tripping is initiated when the following
conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
starter picked up, i.e. underimpedance start or overcurrent
start or undervoltage start (Weak) [UWEAK_L1, L2, L3] from
the POTT or PUTT receive logic.
trip by the relays own measuring unit, the back-up
overcurrent unit, the short-zone (STUB) logic, the switch-
onto-fault (SOFT) logic, the zone extension logic or by the
PUTT, POTT or BLOCK OR receive logic.
no blocking signal is being generated by the enable and
blocking logic. (This signal cannot block tripping by the back-
up overcurrent unit or short-zone logic.)
Only single-phase tripping will take place when:
Trip Mode is set to 1 Ph Trip
the starter of just one phase has picked up
none of the conditions for three-phase tripping is fulfilled
Any of the following conditions results in three-phase tripping:
Trip Mode set to 3 Ph Trip.
The starters of more than one phase have picked up.
The autoreclosure function commands the distance function
to trip all three-phases.
Either the back-up overcurrent function or the short-zone
logic has tripped.
Operation of the switch-onto-fault logic
A second trip occurs (e.g. evolving fault), for example, during
the autoreclosure dead time.
The parameter Trip Mode is set to 3 Ph Trip Del 3 and the
zone 3 time has expired (autoreclosure in the 2nd zone as
well).
12-116
12.2.7.5.19. TRIP 1
PHSEL_L1
>=1 BIT_L1
UWEAK_L1_PUTT
UWEAK_L1_POTT
>=1 SIG_L1
START_L1
PHSEL_L2
>=1 BIT_L2
UWEAK_L2_PUTT
UWEAK_L2_POTT
>=1
SIG_L2
START_L2
PHSEL_L3
>=1 BIT_L3
UWEAK_L3_PUTT
UWEAK_L3_POTT
>=1
SIG_L3
START_L3
>=1
P_L1L2L3
OC_L1L2L3
Fig. 12.53 TRIP1

PHSEL_L1 X Phase sel L1
UWEAK_L1_PUTT X PUTT
UWEAK_L1_POTT X POTT
START_L1 X Start L1
UWEAK_R_POTT X POTT
START_L2 X Start L2
UWEAK_L3_POTT X POTT
START_L3 X Start L3
OC_L1SL3 X Start O/C Backup
BIT_L1 X TRIP3, TRIP2
12-117

SIG_L1 X Binary output Start L1
P_L1L2L3 X Binary output Start
L1L2L3
12-118
12.2.7.5.20. TRIP2
BIT_L1
&
BIT_L2 >=1
BIT_L2
&
BIT_L3
BIT_L3
&
BIT_L1
P_L1L2L3
&
&
DL1L2T
P_T1_TRIP Tim
&
4 BIT_3P
>=1
&
OC_D
SOTF
TRIP_STUB
TRIP_3PH
AR_1POL_IN
Fig. 12.54 TRIP2

BIT_L1 X TRIP1
BIT_L2 X TRIP1
BIT_L3 X TRIP1
P_L1L2L3 X TRIP1
DL1L2L3 X Binary output: TRIP L1L2L3
P_T1_TRIP X Setting: t1 Evol Faults
OC_D X Binary output: Trip O/C
SOTF X Binary output: Trip CB
TRIP_STUB X STUB
TRIP_3PH X Setting: Trip Mode
AR_1POL_IN X Binary input: 1 pol AR
BIT_3P X TRIP3
12-119
12.2.7.5.21. TRIP3
SOTF
>=1
ZE_FOR_DIST >=1
AR_ZE
&
RSFF
MEAS_OR2 S
START_L1L2L3
R Q
TRIP_STUB
OC_D
MEAS_MAIN 100 M_OWN
TRIP_PUTT >=1 >=1
TRIP_POTT
TRIP_BLOCK &
&
HF_OFF
50ms >=1
BIT_3P >=1
BIT_L1
>=1 & D
50ms
BIT_L2
>=1 &
50ms
BIT_L3
&
DL1
&
DL2
&
& DL3
DISTBL
REL_DH
Fig. 12.55 TRIP3
12-120

SOTF X SOTF
ZE_FOR_DIST X Binary input: ZExtension
AR_ZE X Binary input: ZExtensionarAR
MEAS_OR2 X Binary output: Meas Oreach
START_L1L2L3 X Binary output: Start L1+L2+L3
TRIP_STUB X STUB
OC_D X Binary output: Trip O/C
MEAS_MAIN X Binary output: Meas Main
TRIP_PUTT X PUTT
TRIP_POTT X POTT
TRIP_BLOCK X BLOCK
HF_OFF X Setting: Com Mode
Trip HF_OFF = 1
BIT_3P X TRIP2
BIT_L1 X TRIP1
BIT_L2 X TRIP1
BIT_L3 X TRIP1
DISTBL X SUPBL
M_OWN X BLOCK, POTT, PUTT
D X Binary output: TRIP CB
DL1 X Binary output: TRIP CB L1
12-121
12.2.7.5.22. TRIP4
REL_DH
&
DH
DL1 >=1 DL1L2L3
DL2
DL3
D3PH
&
&
>=1
&
8 D1PH
&
Fig. 12.56 TRIP4

REL_DH X TRIP3
DH X Binary output: Trip Com Rec
DL1L2L3 X Binary output: TRIP L1L2L3
D3PH X Binary output: Trip CB 3PH
D1PH X Binary output: Trip CB 1PH
12-122
12.2.7.6. Power swing blocking

The purpose of the power swing blocking function is to prevent
unwanted tripping of the distance protection function in response
to power system instability with oscillatory fluctuations of power
(power swings) or loss of synchronism (out-of-step). The power
swing blocking function does not influence the operation of the
back-up overcurrent function.
When power swings occur, the electrical parameters of the sys-
tem vary at a slower or faster rate in relation to the angle be-
tween the voltage vectors of the energy sources in different parts
of the system. In the case of a fault on the other hand, step
changes of these parameters take place. The parameters, which
regardless of location are subject to appreciable variation in the
general region around phase opposition ( = 180), are the re-
sistance R and the voltage component U cos. The value of
corresponds to the angle between phase voltage and current.
E1 U E2
U cos
U U cos
I

E1 E2
Independent of: - relay location

- relay characteristics
- relay settings
Fig. 12.57 Power swing blocking
The voltage and current input variables are passed on to the

evaluation system. The criterion for pick-up of the power swing
12-123
blocking function is the continuous variation of (U cos), which

corresponds to the variation of real power in relation to current
amplitude (P = I U cos). The value of (U cos) is
determined after every zero-crossing of the current. A blocking
signal is generated, as soon as a repetitive variation of the value
of (U cos) is detected, i.e. a variation must be detected at
least three times to count as a power swing.
Two periods are needed to detect the faster power swings up to
a frequency of 8 Hz. The power swing blocking function does not
pick up during a fault, because the variation of (U cos) in
relation to time only occurs once and at a much higher rate than
the functions operating range.
Slow swings are evaluated over five periods by a second sys-
tem. At its lowest operating limit, this system detects a frequency
of 0.2 Hz.
Together the two systems cover a range from 0.2 to 8 Hz and no
setting is required during commissioning.
The blocking signal PSB is maintained for as long as the dis-
tance protection function is in the picked-up state. The power
swing blocking function is only effective for the symmetrical
three-phase condition and cannot block the distance function for
asymmetrical faults (phase-to-ground and phase-to-phase
faults).
A blocking signal is not issued, if the zero-crossings of the cur-
rent signal occur at relatively irregular intervals, because con-
siderable differences between the zero-crossing intervals are a
clear indication of a fault on the power system. Phase jumps in
the current wave form occur at the incidence of a fault, as a
consequence of incorrect switching and when CT saturation
takes place. Since the currents during power swings are
sinusoidal and do not contain a DC component, it is permissible
to assume that the problem of CT saturation does not arise.
Zero-crossings resulting from the slip are in any event excluded
by the current enable setting of Imin.
12-124
12.3. Definite time over- and undercurrent protection (U/OCDT)
12.3.1. Application
General purpose over- and undercurrent function for
phase fault protection
backup protection or
for monitoring a minimum current.
12.3.2. Features
Insensitive to DC component
Insensitive to harmonics
Single or three-phase measurement
Maximum respectively minimum value detection in the three-
phase mode
Detection of inrush currents

Current

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Current amplitude
12-125
12.3.4. Definite time current function settings
Text Unit Default Min. Max. Step

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select)
Delay s 01.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
I-Setting IN 02.00 0.02 20.00 0.01
MaxMin MAX (1ph) (Select)
NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr 0
BlockInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr

Text Explanation
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a par-
ticular function is active.
Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping.
I-Setting Pick-up current setting.
Forbidden settings:
>2.8 IN (when supplied from metering CT cores)
MaxMin Defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent or with

inrush blocking.
Settings:
MIN (3ph): Undercurrent.
Three-phase functions detect the highest
phase current.
Not permitted for single-phase functions.
MIN (1ph): Undercurrent.
Three-phase functions detect the lowest
phase current.
MAX (3ph): Overcurrent.
phase current.
MAX (1ph): Overcurrent.
phase current.
MAX-Inrush: Blocks during inrush currents if one phase
exceeds setting.
NrOfPhases Defines whether single or three-phase measurement.
12-126
Text Explanation
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel.
All current I/P's may be selected.
BlockInp Input for blocking the function.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
Trip Tripping signal
Start Pick-up signal

Settings
Setting I-Setting
Delay Delay
Over- or undercurrent MaxMin
Number of phases NrOfPhases
Setting I-Setting
The current setting I-Setting must be sufficiently high to avoid
any risk of false tripping or false signals under normal load
conditions, but should be low enough to detect the lowest fault
current that can occur. The margin which has to be allowed
between the maximum short-time load current and the setting
must allow for:
the tolerance on the current setting
the reset ratio
The maximum short-time load current has to be determined
according to the power system conditions and must take
switching operations and load surges into account.
12-127
I-Setting
IN
Delay
0 t
Fig. 12.58 Operating characteristic of the definite time over-

current function
Compensating any difference between the rated currents of CT

IN1 and protected unit IGN is recommended. This is achieved with
the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or by correcting
the overcurrent setting.
For example, for IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting for a
pick-up current of 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would have to be
IGN 800 A
1. 5 = 1 .5 = 1 .2
IN1 1000 A
CurrentInp
An interposing CT in the input is essential for current settings
lower than 0.2 IN.
Delay
The delay is used to achieve discrimination of the overcurrent
function. It is set according to the grading table for all the over-
current units on the power system. The zone of protection of the
overcurrent function under consideration extends to the location
of the next downstream overcurrent relay.
Should the downstream relay fail to clear a fault, the overcurrent
function trips slightly later in a backup role.
12-128
Setting MaxMin
This parameter enables the following operating modes to be
selected:
MIN (3ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current also
falls below the setting. This setting is not per-
mitted for single-phase measurement.
MIN (1ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current falls
below the setting.
MAX (3ph): Pick-up when the lowest phase current also
exceeds the setting. This setting is not permitted
for single-phase measurement.
MAX (1ph): Pick-up when the highest phase current exceeds
the setting.
MAX-Inrush: Blocking of inrush currents when a phase current
exceeds the setting.
Operation of the inrush blocking feature (parameter MaxMin

set to MAX-Inrush)
The inrush detector picks up and blocks operation of the function
when the amplitude of the fundamental component of the current
exceeds the current function setting.
The inrush detector is based on the evaluation of the second
harmonic component of the current I2h in relation to the funda-
mental frequency component I1h (evaluation of the amplitudes).
The output of the function is disabled when the ratio I2h/I1h ex-
ceeds 10% and enabled again when it falls below 8%.
There is no setting for the peak value of I2h/I1h.
The function can operate with inrush blocking in both the single
and three-phase mode (parameter 'NrOfPhase').
In the three-phase mode, the phase used for evaluation is the
one with the highest amplitude at rated frequency (pick-up and
inrush detection).
12-129
12.4. Inverse time overcurrent protection (OC)
12.4.1. Application
Overcurrent function with time delay inversely proportional to the
current and definite minimum tripping time.
12.4.2. Features
Operating characteristics according to British Standard 142:
c = 0.02 : normal inverse
c=1 : very inverse and long time earth fault
c=2 : extremely inverse
Detection of the highest phase value in the three-phase
mode
Wider setting range than specified in BS 142

Current

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Current amplitude
12-130
12.4.4. Inverse time overcurrent settings

ParSet4..1 P1 (Select)
c-Setting 1.00 (Select)
k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01
IStart IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
t-min s 00.00 0.0 10.0 0.1
NrOfPhases 1 1 3 2
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
Text Explanation
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a par-
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating
characteristic according to BS 142 or for selecting the
RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic
(time grading).
IStart Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes
effective.
t-min Definite minimum tripping time.
NrOfPhases Defines the number of phases measured.
All current I/P's may be selected.
IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated cur-
rent IN.
BlockInp Defines the input for an external blocking signal.
F: - not used
T: - function always blocked
Trip Tripping signal.
Start Pick-up signal.
12-131

Settings:
Base current IB-Setting
Characteristic enabling current IStart
Type of characteristic c-Setting
Multiplier k1-Setting
The IDMT overcurrent function is used to protect transformers,
feeders and loads of the auxiliaries supply system against phase
and earth faults. The function responds largely only to the fun-
damental component of the fault current.

An IDMT relay does not have a fixed current setting above which
it operates and below which it does not, as does a definite time-
overcurrent relay. Instead, its operating characteristic is chosen
such that it is always above the load current. To this end, the
relay has a reference current IB that is set the same as the load
current of the protected unit IB1. The reference current IB
determines the relative position of the relay characteristic which
is enabled when the current exceeds the reference current by a
given amount (IStart). By setting the reference current IB to
equal the load current of the protected unit IB1 instead of its rated
current, for
IB1 < IN of the protected unit : the protection is more sensitive

IB1 > IN of the protected unit : the protection permits
maximum utilization of the
thermal capability of the
protected unit
12-132
Example:
Load current of protected unit IB1 = 800 A
CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A
IN2 = 5A
Relay rated current IN = 5A
Relay reference current IB-Setting:
IN2 5A
IB = IB1 = 800 A =4A
IN1 1000 A
Setting
IB 4 A
= = 0. 8
IN 5 A
An alternative is to adjust the position of the IDMT characteristic

to match the rated load of the protected unit and set the
reference current to its rated current instead of its load current.
Enabling the characteristic IStart

The IDMT characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds
the setting IStart. A typical setting for IStart is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic c-Setting

The constant c-Setting determines the shape of the IDMT
characteristic.
The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142
are:
normal inverse: c = 0.02
very inverse and long time earth fault: c = 1.00
extremely inverse: c = 2.00
12-133
k1
t=
c
I
1
IB
IStart
IB
t t
min
Fig. 12.59 Operating characteristic of the IDMT overcurrent

function
c-Setting can also be set to RXIDG, in which case the

functions inverse characteristic corresponds to that of the relay
type RXIDG:
t [s] = 5.8 - 1.35 LN (I / IB)
The parameter k1-Setting has no influence in this case.
The multiplier k1-Setting enables the IDMT characteristic to be
shifted. This is used for grading a series of IDMT relays along a
line to achieve discrimination.
For example, in the case of the very inverse characteristic, the
constant c = 1 and the factor k1 13.5. The operating time t is
given by the equation
k1
t=
I
1
IB
Assuming a grading time of 0.5 s at 6 times the base current IB is
required, the factor k1 for each of the relays is given by
k1 = 5 t
For operating times between 0.5 and 2.5 s, this results in the
following settings for k1:
12-134
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2,5 12.5
The characteristics according to BS 142 are set as follows:

normal inverse : k1 = 0.14 s
very inverse : k1 = 13.5 s
extremely inverse : k1 = 80 s
long time earth fault : k1 = 120 s
Typical settings
IB-Setting corresponding to load current of the protected
unit
IStart 1.1 IB
c-Setting according to desired characteristic for the
protected unit
k1-Setting according to the time grading calculation
tmin 0.00
12-135
12.5. Directional overcurrent definite time protection (DIROCDT)
12.5.1. Application
Directional overcurrent function for
detecting phase faults on ring lines
detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at
one end
backup protection for a distance protection scheme
12.5.2. Features
Directional phase fault protection
Voltage memory feature for close faults

Current
Voltage

Blocking
PLC receive

Start
Start L1
Start L2
Start L3
Backwards measurement
Tripping
Current amplitude
of the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
Active power
A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction
(IL1 * UL2L3, IS * UL3L1, IL3 * UL1L2)
Voltage amplitude
Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages
(UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)
12-136
12.5.4. Directional overcurrent settings

CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT I1-I3
VoltageInp CT/VT-Addr VT U1-U3
I-Setting IN 2.00 0.20 20.00 0.01
Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15
Delay s 1.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
MemDirMode Select Trip (Select)
MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Receive BinaryAddr Always on
Ext Block BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
Start L1 SignalAddr
Start L2 SignalAddr
Start L3 SignalAddr
MeasFwd SignalAddr
MeasBwd SignalAddr

Text Explanation
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a par-
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be
set.
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be
set.
I-Setting Pick-up setting for tripping.
Angle Characteristic angle.
Delay Delay between pick-up and tripping.
tWait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received
from the opposite end in a blocking scheme.
MemDirMode Determines the response of the protection after the time set
for memorizing power direction:
trip
block
MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined
remains valid.
12-137
Text Explanation
Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
T: not used
xx: all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
Ext Block F: not blocked
Start L1 L1 phase pick-up signal
MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction.
Settings:
Pick-up current I-Setting
Characteristic angle Angle
Delay Delay
Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait
Response at the end of the
memorized power direction time MemDirMode
Time during which the memorized
direction is valid MemDuration
Pick-up value I-Setting

I-Setting must be chosen high enough to prevent false tripping
or alarms from taking place and low enough to reliably detect the
minimum fault current. The setting must be sufficiently above the
maximum transient load current and allow for:
CT and relay inaccuracies
the reset ratio
12-138
The maximum transient load current has to be determined

according to the power system operating conditions and take
account of switching operations and load surges.
I- S e t t in g
IN
D e la y
0 t
Fig. 12.60 Operating characteristic of the definite time

overcurrent detector
Where the rated CT current IN1 differs from the rated current IGN
of the protected unit, compensating the measurement to achieve
a match is recommended. This is done by correcting either the
reference value of the A/D input or the setting.
For example, assuming IGN = 800 A and IN1 = 1000 A, the setting
to pick up at 1.5 IGN = 1200 A would be
IGN 800 A
1 .5 = 1 .5 = 1. 2
IN1 1000 A
Characteristic angle
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an
additional criterion for preserving discrimination compared with
non-directional overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity
is 180 in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in
12-139
UL1
IL1 L
IL1
Max. sensitivity
=45

Restraint: UL2L3
cos ( - ) < 0
UL3 UL2L3 UL Operation:
cos ( - ) > 0
= phase-angle between current and voltage

(positive angle)
= Characteristic angle
L = Border line between operating and restraint areas
a) Definition of current b) Operating characteristic

and voltage
Fig. 12.61 Directional characteristic
The function determines the power direction by measuring the

phase-angle of the current in relation to the opposite phase-to-
phase voltage. Which current is compared with which voltage
can be seen from the following table.
Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage

IL1 UL2, UL3 UL2T = UL2 - UL3
IL2 UL3, UL1 UL3L1 = UL3 - UL1
The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group

of connection of the VTs. For example, the phase-to-phase
values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), while
the input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT
type UTD).
12-140
Delay
The delay enables the protection to be graded with other time-
overcurrent relays to achieve discrimination. Its setting is thus
chosen in relation to the timer settings of upstream and
downstream protective devices. The zone of protection covered
by the overcurrent protection extends to the next overcurrent
protection device.
Should in the event of a fault in the next downstream zone, the
protection for that zone fail, this protection function takes over
after the time set for Delay and clears the fault in a backup role.
Time allowed for a signal to be received

Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals,
each can send a signal from its MeasBwd output to the
Receive input of the function at the opposite end of the line
(e.g. via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the
reverse direction. This signal prevents the respective directional
overcurrent function from tripping, because the fault cannot be in
the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow
time, i.e. the wait time, for the signal from the opposite line
terminal to be received. If none is received within tWait, the
circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends.
The time set for Delay acts in this kind of scheme as a backup
which does not rely on the communication channel. Thus when
the Receive input is being used, the setting for Delay must be
longer than the setting for tWait:
Delay > tWait
Response after decay of the memorized voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to
almost zero for a close fault and make determining direction
unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltage
memory feature which for the first 200 milliseconds after the start
of an overcurrent memorizes the voltage measured immediately
before it and this is used as reference to determine fault
direction.
After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable
period (see next paragraph).
MemDirMode provides facility for setting how the protection
must respond after this time or in the event that the circuit-
breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be
12-141
memorized beforehand. The two possible settings are the

protection can trip or it can block.
Time during which the memorized direction is valid

The MemDuration setting determines how long the last valid
direction measurement shall be used. The setting should be as
short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used as
backup for a distance function in an HV power system, because
an actually measured voltage is only available during this time
and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal of direction
during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power
direction is used instead of the actually memorized voltage.
12-142
12.6. Directional overcurrent inverse time protection (DIROCINV)
12.6.1. Application
Directional inverse time overcurrent function for
detecting phase faults on ring lines
detecting phase faults on double-circuit lines with an infeed at
one end
backup protection for a distance protection scheme
12.6.2. Features
Directionally sensitive three-phase phase fault protection
Operating characteristics according to British Standard
BS 142:
c=2 : extremely inverse.
Voltage memory feature for close faults

Current
Voltage

Blocking
PLC receive

Start
Start L1
Start L2
Start L3
Backwards measurement
Tripping
Current amplitude
of the three phase currents (IL1, IL2, IL3)
12-143
Active power
A positive measurement indicates the forwards direction
(IL1 UL2L3, IL2 UL3L1, IL3 UL1L2)
Voltage amplitude
Amplitudes of the phase-to-phase voltages
(UL2L3, UL3L1, UL1L2)
12.6.4. Function settings

Text Unit Default Min Max Step
IStart IN 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
Angle Deg 45 -180 +180 15
k1-Setting s 13.5 0.01 200.00 0.01
tmin s 0.00 0.00 10.00 0.01
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
tWait s 0.20 0.02 20.00 0.01
MemDirMode Trip (Select)
MemDuration s 2.00 0.20 60.00 0.01
Receive BinaryAddr Always on
Ext Block BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
Start L1 SignalAddr
Start L2 SignalAddr
Start L3 SignalAddr
MeasFwd SignalAddr
MeasBwd SignalAddr
12-144

Text Explanation
ParSet4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. Only three-phase CTs can be
set.
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. Only three-phase VTs can be
set.
I-Setting Pick-up current at which the characteristic becomes
effective.
Angle Characteristic angle.
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the operating
characteristic according to BS 142.
k1-Setting Constant determining the parallel shift of the characteristic
(time grading).
t-min Definite minimum operating time, operating characteristic
constant.
IB-Setting Base current for taking account of differences of rated
current IN.
tWait Time allowed for the directional decision to be received from
the opposite site.
MemDirMode determines the response of the protection after the time set
for memorizing power direction:
trip
block
MemDuration Time during which the power direction last determined
remains valid.
Receive Input for the signal from the opposite end of the line:
T: not used
Ext Block F: not blocked
MeasFwd Signals measurement in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd Signals measurement in the backwards direction.
12-145

Settings:
Characteristic enabling current IStart
Type of characteristic c-Setting
Time allowed for receipt of signal tWait
Response at the end of the
memorized power direction time MemDirMode
Time during which the memorized
direction is valid MemDuration

A tripping current is not set on an IDMT overcurrent function as it
is on a definite time overcurrent function. Instead the position of
the characteristic is chosen such that it is above the load current.
The function, however, has a base current setting which is set
to the full load current IB1 of the protected unit. The base current
setting determines the position of the basic characteristic. The
characteristic is enabled when the base current is exceeded by a
preset amount (IStart). The adjustment of the base current IB to
the load current IB1 of the protected unit instead of its rated
current enables for
IB1 < rated current of prot. unit : more sensitive protection
IB1 > rated current of prot. unit : maximum utilization of the
thermal capability of the
protected unit
Example
Load current of the protected unit IB1 = 800 A
CT rated current IN1 = 1000 A
IN2 =5A
Protection rated current IN =5A
Protection base current
IN2 5A
IB = IB1 = 800 A =4 A
IN1 1000 A
12-146
Setting
IB 4A
= = 0 .8
IN 5A
An alternative is to adjust the position of the IDMT characteristic

to match the rated load of the protected unit and set the base
current to its rated current instead of its load current.
Enabling the characteristic IStart

The IDMT characteristic is enabled when the current exceeds
the setting IStart. A typical setting for IStart is 1.1 IB.
Choice of characteristic c-Setting

The constant c-Setting determines the shape of the IDMT
characteristic.
The settings for the standard characteristics according to BS 142
are:
normal inverse : c = 0.02
very inverse and long time earth fault : c = 1.00
extremely inverse : c = 2.00
I
k1
t=
c
I
1
IB
IStart
IB
t t
min
Fig. 12.62 Operating characteristic of the directional IDMT

overcurrent function
12-147
k1
t=
I
1
IB

k1 = 5 t.
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5

12-148
Determining the phase-angle of the current provides an
additional criterion for preserving discrimination compared with
non-directional overcurrent protection. The directional sensitivity
is 180 in relation to the reference voltage. This is illustrated in
UL1
IL1 L
IL1
Max. sensitivity
=45

Restraint: UL2L3
cos ( - ) < 0
UL3 UL2L3 UL2 Operation:
cos ( - ) > 0
Fig. 12.63 Directional characteristic
The function determines the power direction by measuring the

phase-angle of the current in relation to the opposite phase-to-
phase voltage. Which current is compared with which voltage
can be seen from the following table.
Current input Phase-to-neutral voltage Calculated voltage

The voltage measurement automatically compensates the group

of connection of the VTs. For example, the phase-to-phase
values are calculated for Y-connected VTs (VT type UTS), while
the input voltages are used directly for delta-connected VTs (VT
type UTD).
12-149
Time allowed for a signal to be received

Where directional functions are configured in both line terminals,
each can send a signal from its MeasBwd output to the
Receive input of the function at the opposite end of the line
(e.g. via a PLC channel) when it is measuring a fault in the
reverse direction. This signal prevents the respective directional
overcurrent function from tripping, because the fault cannot be in
the zone between them. The functions therefore have to allow
time, i.e. the wait time, for the signal from the opposite line
terminal to be received. If none is received within tWait, the
circuit-breakers are tripped at both ends.
The time set for Delay acts in this kind of scheme as a backup
which does not rely on the communication channel. Thus when
the Receive input is being used, the setting for Delay must be
longer than the setting for tWait:
Delay > tWait.
Response after decay of the memorized voltage

The voltage measured by the protection can quickly decay to
almost zero for a close fault and make determining direction
unreliable. For this reason, the function includes a voltage
memory feature and for the first 200 milliseconds after the
incidence of an overcurrent, the voltage measured immediately
before the fault is used as reference to determine fault direction.
After this time, the last valid direction is used for an adjustable
period (see next paragraph).
MemDirMode provides facility for setting how the protection
must respond after this time or in the event that the circuit-
breaker is closed onto a fault and no voltage could be
memorized beforehand. The two possible settings are the
protection can trip or it can block.
12-150
Time during which the memorized direction is valid

The MemDuration setting determines how long the last valid
direction measurement shall be used. The setting should be as
short as possible (200 ms) when the function is being used as
backup for a distance function in an HV power system, because
an actually measured voltage is only available during this time
and therefore it is only possible to detect a reversal of direction
during this time. For longer settings, the last valid power
direction is used instead of the actually memorized voltage.
12-151
12.7. Inverse time earth fault overcurrent protection (EFOCDT)
12.7.1. Application
Overcurrent function with IDMT characteristic. A typical applica-
tion is as back-up for the ground fault protection function, in
which case it measures 3 I0 either supplied from an external
source or internally derived.
12.7.2. Features
Tripping characteristic according to British Standard 142:
c=2 : extremely inverse
External 3 I0 signal or 3 I0 internally derived from the three
phase currents
Wider setting range than specified in BS 142

Current

Blocking

Starting
Tripping
Neutral current
12-152
12.7.4. IDMT function settings

k1-Setting s 013.5 0.01 200.0 0.01
IStart IB 1.10 1.00 4.00 0.01
tmin s 00.0 00.0 10.0 0.1
NrOfPhases 1 1 3 2
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.04 2.50 0.01
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr

Text Explanation
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. All the current channels
are available for selection.
c-Setting Setting for the exponential factor determining the shape
of the operating characteristic according to BS 142 or for
selecting the RXIDG characteristic.
k1-Setting Tripping characteristic constant
IStart Pick-up setting (initiates the tripping characteristic).
tmin Definite minimum time of the tripping characteristic.
NrOfPhases Number of phases evaluated for measurement:
1: neutral current direct from an CT input
3: neutral current derived internally from the three
phases
IB-Setting Reference current to take account of discrepancies with
respect to IN.
BlockingInp I/P for the external blocking signal.
F: - unused
T: - function always blocked
xx: - all binary I/P's (or O/P's of protection functions)
12-153
Protection function enable IStart

The IDMT function starts to run when the current applied to the
function exceeds the setting IStart. IStart is normally set to
1.1 IB.
Choice of tripping characteristic c-Setting

The shape of the IDMT characteristic is determined by the con-
stant c.
The standard IDMT characteristics according to BS 142 are:
normal inverse : c = 0.02
very inverse and long time earth fault : c = 1.00
extremely inverse : c = 2.00
k1
t=
c
I
1
IB
IStart
IB
tmin t
Fig. 12.64 IDMT tripping characteristic for I0-Invers
c-Setting can also be set to RXIDG, in which case the func-

tions inverse characteristic corresponds to that of the relay Type
RXIDG:
t [s] = 5.8 - 1.35 Ln (I / IB)
The parameter k1-Setting has no influence in this case.
12-154
Time multiplier k1-Setting

k1
t=
3 I0
1
IB
k1 = 5 t
t [s] k1 [s]
0.5 2.5
1 5
1.5 7.5
2 10
2.5 12.5

Definite minimum time tmin

Where the IDMT function is being applied as backup protection
for a directional ground fault protection, the definite minimum
time tmin must be set as follows
12-155
tmin = tbasic + tcomp

tbasic = basic time of the ground fault function
tcomp = comparison time of the ground fault function (1 s)
Interconnections between IDMT and directional E/F func-

tions
The IDMT protection is non-directional.
Directional operation can, however, be achieved by linking the
directional signal (MeasFwd, i.e. fault in forwards direction) from
the ground fault protection to the blocking input of the IDMT
function. The input must be inverted so that blocking of the IDMT
function is cancelled by an active forwards signal.
When using this arrangement, it must be NOTEd that, when
MeasFwd does not pick up, the I0-Invers function cannot trip
when the reference voltage of the ground fault function is too
low. If tripping is required for this case, the directional ground
fault signal MeasBwd must be applied to the blocking input.
Applications with single-phase reclosure

In schemes involving single-phase reclosure, the I0-Invers
function has to be blocked for the time that one pole of a circuit-
breakers is open if the minimum tripping time tmin is set less
than the single-phase dead time. This avoids false three-phase
tripping due to the load currents in the healthy phases.
Typical settings
IB to be calculated
IStart 1.1 IB
c depends on the protected unit
k1 to be calculated
tmin 0.00
12-156
12.8. Definite time over- and undervoltage protection (U/OVDT)
12.8.1. Application
Standard voltage applications (overvoltage and undervoltage
function)
12.8.2. Features
Single or three-phase voltage measurement
Maximum value, respectively minimum value detection in the
three-phase mode

Voltage

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Voltage amplitude
12.8.4. Definite time voltage function settings

Delay s 02.00 0.02 60.00 0.01
V-setting UN 1.200 0.010 2.000 0.002
MaxMin MAX (1ph) (Select)
NrOfPhases 001 1 3 2
VoltageInp AnalogAddr 0
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
12-157

Text Explanation
Delay Time delay between the function picking up and tripping.
V-setting Voltage setting for tripping.
MaxMin Over- or undervoltage mode selection:
Settings:
MIN (3ph): Undervoltage.
phase voltage.
MIN (1ph): Undervoltage.
phase voltage.
MAX (3ph): Overvoltage.
phase voltage.
MAX (1ph): Overvoltage.
phase voltage.
NrOfPhases Number of phases included in the measurement.
VoltageInp Analog input channel.
All the voltage channels are available for selection.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
12-158
Settings
Setting V-setting
Delay Delay
Over- or undervoltage MaxMin
Number of phases NrOfPhases
Two of these functions are frequently applied in a two-stage
scheme. The first stage detects lower prolonged overvoltages
while the second guards against higher overvoltages, which
have to be cleared quickly.
Pick-up voltage (V-setting)

Single-phase VT:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V at
the input of the VT
Y connected three-phase VTs:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up voltage of 130 V / 3
at the input of the VT(phase-to-neutral voltage).
Compensating any difference between the rated voltages of VTs
UN1 and protected unit UGN is recommended. This is achieved
with the aid of the reference value of the A/D channel or by
correcting the voltage setting.
For example, for UGN = 12 kV and UN1 = 15 kV, the setting for a
pick-up voltage of 1.4 UGN would have to be
UGN 12 kV
1,4 = 1 .4 = 1.12
UN1 15 kV
MaxMin
This parameter provides a choice of the following settings:
MIN (3ph) : Protection picks up when all three phase
voltages have fallen below setting.
MIN (1ph) : Protection picks up when the lowest of the phase
voltages falls below setting.
MAX (3ph) : Protection picks up when all three phase
voltages have exceeded setting.
MAX (1ph) : Protection picks up when the highest of the
phase voltages exceeds setting.
12-159
Operating characteristic of a two-stage overvoltage

protection
(UN = rated relay voltage)
V-Setting
Stage 2
V-Setting
Stage 1
UN
Delay Delay
t
Fig. 12.65 Operating characteristic of a two-stage

overvoltage protection
Typical settings
1st stage
V-setting 1.15 UN
Delay 2s
MaxMin MAX (1ph)
2nd stage
V-setting 1.4 UN
Delay 0.1 s
MaxMin MAX (1ph)
12-160
12.9. Direct. sensitive EF prot. for grounded systems (DIREFGND)
12.9.1. Application
High-resistance ground faults, which cannot be detected by the
distance protection, can still cause appreciable problems in spite
of the relatively low fault currents involved.
The sensitive ground fault protection function has been included
to complement the main line protection function and cover the
low ground fault current range. The protection processes the
zero-sequence components 3I0 and 3U0.
12.9.2. Features
Directional measurement of zero-sequence components
(derived either internally or externally)
Current pick-up enabling level
Reference voltage enabling level
Adjustable characteristic angle
Permissive and blocking transfer tripping schemes
Echo logic for weak infeed and open circuit-breaker
Transient blocking logic for reversal of energy direction

Voltage
Current

External blocking
Receive
CB closed
VT supervision
Starting and tripping by the distance function

Pick-up
Trip
Fault forwards
Fault backwards
Transmit
Block distance protection receive
12-161
Neutral voltage (3U0)
Neutral current (3I0)
Real power component of neutral power (3U0 x 3I0, not
rotated)
Apparent power component of neutral power (3U0 x 3I0, not
rotated)
Fault direction (1 = forwards, -1 = backwards; this variable
only applies when the binary input CB closed is active)
12.9.4. Sensitive ground fault protection settings

CTneutral Line side (Select)
I-Setting IN 0.100 0.100 1.000 0.01
V-setting UN 0.200 0.003 1.000 0.001
Angle deg 60.0 -90.0 90.0 5
ComMode Permissive (Select)
SendMode MeasBwd (Select)
1 Channel off (Select)
Echo off (Select)
tBasic s 0.050 0.000 1.000 0.001
tWait s 0.050 0.000 0.500 0.001
tTransBlk s 0.100 0.000 0.500 0.001
Ext block BinaryAddr Always off
Receive BinaryAddr Always off
CB closed BinaryAddr Always off
VT Superv BinaryAddr Always off
Ext Start L1 BinaryAddr Always off
ExtTrip 3P BinaryAddr Always off
ExtTrip BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
MeasFwd SignalAddr
MeasBwd SignalAddr
12-162

Send SignalAddr
Recve Inh. SignalAddr

Text Explanation
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel. All the VT input channels
CurrentInp Defines the CT input channel. All the CT input channels
CT neutral Side of the CTs on which the star-point is formed (current
direction):
line
busbar (reversed connection)
I-Setting Current pick-up setting
V-setting Reference voltage pick-up setting
Angle Characteristic angle setting
ComMode Kind of transfer tripping scheme:
permissive
blocking
SendMode For what system condition a signal is transmitted in an
intertripping scheme:
forwards measurement (only permissive scheme)
non-directional (only blocking scheme)
backwards measurement (only blocking scheme)
1 Channel Supplementary logic needed for coordinating ground fault
and distance protections when using the same
communications channel for a permissive scheme.
off
on
Echo Echo logic for weak infeed and open CB:
off Echo logic disabled
Weak Echo only for weak infeed
Bkr Echo only when CB open
Weak & Bkr Echo for weak infeed or CB open
tBasic Basic time setting
tWait Time allowed for a blocking signal to be transferred and

for the directional comparison to be made.
12-163
Text Explanation
tTransBlk Blocking time after a reversal of fault energy direction
(transient blocking).
Ext Block I/P for an external blocking signal.
F: enabled
T: disabled
Receive PLC receive input.
F: - no PLC receive signal
CB closed CB position indicator input.
F: - function disabled
T: - function enabled
VT Superv supervision input.
F: - tripping enabled
T: - tripping disabled
Ext Start L1 Inputs for the distance function signals Start L1, Start
L2, Start L3, Trip CB 3P and Trip CB for coordinating
Ext Start L2
operation.
Ext Start L3
F: - not connected
Ext Trip 3P
Ext Trip
Start Output for signaling that the protection has picked up, i.e.
the current has exceeded the enabling setting (I-Setting).
MeasFwd O/P for signaling a fault in the forwards direction.
MeasBwd O/P for signaling a fault in the backwards direction.
Send PLC transmit signal.
12-164
12.9.6.1. Coordination with the distance protection
Directional ground fault function as ancillary to the distance

function
Compared with a stand-alone ground fault function, the ground
fault function integrated in the distance function needs certain
starting and tripping signals generated by the distance function
and the E/F protection is blocked in the following situations:
starting of more than one distance phase
three-phase tripping
any trip (single and three-phase), if 1 Channel is set to on
Scheme with independent communication channels

Apart from the added security of redundancy, independent
communication channels enable different transfer tripping
schemes to be used for ground fault and distance protections.
Providing the distance protection can detect a fault, it should trip
before the ground fault protection picks up. For this reason, the
basic operating time tBasic for the ground fault protection must be
set longer than the longest response time to be expected of the
distance protection.
Scheme with a common communication channel

Where ground fault and distance protections use the same
communication channel, the transfer tripping schemes must be
either both permissive or both blocking. In the case of permissive
schemes, in which the distance protection operates with non-
directional criteria at one end for a weak infeed, a supplementary
logic must be enabled by appropriately setting the parameter
1 Channel.
This supplementary logic interlocks the distance relays receive
signal at the end of the ground fault functions basic time or
when it picks up in the backwards direction. To this end, the
signal RecveInh is connected to the distance protection input
ExtBlkHF. Thus the communication channel is initially available
for use by the distance protection and only made available to the
ground fault protection at the end of the basic time. The basic
time setting must allow adequate time for the distance protection
to detect and clear a fault if it can.
12-165
Independent directional ground fault protection

The ground fault function can also be applied as a stand-alone
function, but only in MV and HV systems.
The coordination of ground fault and distance protections in this
case is achieved by appropriately setting the parameter tBasic.
If this time is too short, there is a likelihood that the ground fault
protection will issue a three-phase trip before the circuit-breaker
has opened for faults that have been correctly detected by the
distance protection.
The basic time of the ground fault protection must therefore be
long enough to ensure that the distance protection can trip
phase-selectively.
No facility is provided for using the distance relay starters to
achieve phase-selective tripping by the directional ground fault
function.
An independent directional ground fault function requires its own
communication channel, which must be entirely independent of
the distance protection.
12.9.6.2. Choice of operating mode

It is assumed that the ground fault protection settings at both
ends of the protected line are the same. This applies especially
to the basic time, the blocking time, the transfer tripping scheme
in use and options.
12.9.6.3. Choice of transfer tripping scheme

In the case of a permissive directional comparison scheme, the
amount of fault resistance, which can be detected, reduces
towards the remote end of the line, because the enabling current
must be exceeded at both ends. Without additional precautions,
the use of a permissive scheme would be limited on lines with a
weak infeed at one end.
It was possible to eliminate this disadvantage by providing the
directional ground fault protection with its own echo logic for
weak infeeds, which can be switched in and out as required.
12-166
NOTE: The protection only operates in a comparison mode

during the comparison time (1 s) and is blocked at the end of
this time. The comparison time starts at the end of the basic
time.
On the other hand, a directional comparison scheme using a

blocking signal is able to detect high-resistance ground faults
along the whole length of the line, because the protection at the
strong infeed end is always able to trip although the current at
the weak infeed end does not reach the enabling level.
Permissive directional comparison scheme

In this scheme, each of the protection functions has to receive a
signal from the opposite end of line in order to be able to trip. A
protection function sends a permissive signal when its current
exceeds the enabling level I-setting, the basic time tBasic has
expired and the fault detected is in the forwards direction.
Options:
Echo Bkr:
Providing this parameter is active, a permissive signal (echo)
is sent to the opposite end of the line, if the local circuit-
breaker is open and a signal is received. Tripping is thus
possible at the infeed end.
The duration of the echo signal is limited to 150 ms.
Non-directional echo Weak infeed:
If the directional ground fault function at the weak infeed end
of a line cannot measure, because the reference voltage is
too low or the current does not reach the enabling level, a
signal is returned to the opposite end of the line if one is
received.
This enables tripping to take place at the end with the
stronger infeed.
12-167
tBasic tBasic
Start Start
I-Setting & & I-Setting
Send Send
MeasFwd MeasFwd
Receive Receive
& &
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
A1 A2 HEST 925 020 FL
Fig. 12.66 Principle of a permissive directional comparison

scheme
where:
Start : current higher than the enabling level I-setting
tBasic : basic time
MeasFwd : fault in forwards direction
I0
Tx: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic
T: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic Rx
TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk
I-Setting
<Tx: MeasBwd Rx>

TB: MeasBwd t TransBlk
I-dir
<Tx: MeasBwd Rx> Iasymm
V-Setting U0
Basic functions
Echo and Transient blocking
Echo
Fig. 12.67 Principle of a permissive directional comparison

scheme
12-168
where:
<...> : optional function
Rx : receive
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction including Transient
blocking
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction
I-dir : current enable for directional measurement
(= 0.7 I-Setting)
I-Setting : current enabling level
Iasymm : asymmetrical currents under normal load conditions
Tx : send
T : trip
TB : transient blocking
t TransBlk : blocking time
tBasic : basic time
tWait : waiting time
V-setting : reference voltage
Blocking directional comparison scheme

Providing the conditions for directional measurement are fulfilled
i.e. the current higher than I-dir and the voltage higher than its
enabling level V-setting, a protection function transmits a
blocking signal to the remote station immediately when a fault is
detected in the backward direction.
NOTE I-dir = 0.7 I-Setting
A protection function measuring a fault in the direction of the
protected line trips at the end of the adjustable waiting time
t wait, providing a blocking signal is not received beforehand.
Options:
SendMode: non-directional
A blocking signal is transmitted in this mode, if the current is
higher than I dir, the basic time has expired and no fault is
detected in the forwards direction (including situations when
a direction measurement is impossible, because 3U0 < U-
Setting).
12-169
tBasic tBasic
I-dir I-dir
tBasic & & tBasic

I-Setting I-Setting
Send Send
MeasBwd MeasBwd
MeasFwd Receive Receive MeasFwd
& &
tWait tWait
Rel. 1 Rel. 2
A1 A2
HEST 045 003 V
Fig. 12.68 Principle of a blocking scheme
where:
I-Setting
: current enabling level
I-dir : current enable for directional measurement
(= 0.7 I-Setting)
tBasic : basic time
tWait : waiting time
MeasBwd : fault in backwards direction
I0 Tx: I-dir MeasBwd tBasic

<S: I-dir <+I-dir MeasFwd tBasic>
MeasFwd tBasic> D: I-Setting MeasFwd tBasic R tWait
TB: MeasBwd tTransBl

I-Setting
Tx: I-dir MeasBwd tBasic

<+I-dir MeasFwd tBasic>
TB: MeasBwd tTransBl

I-dir
Iasymm
V-Setting U0
Basic functions
Non-directional transmission
Fig. 12.69 Operation of a directional comparison blocking

scheme
12-170
12.9.6.4. Setting the enabling pick-up levels

The setting of the current enabling I dir must take account of the
zero-sequence component in normal operation arising from
system asymmetries.
The pick-up setting for the voltage enabling signal V-setting is
determined by the level of asymmetries on the secondary side
(VT tolerances, asymmetrical burdens etc.).
The ability to read voltage and current values on the relay is a
useful aid for determining these settings.
For example, if the enabling current setting I-Setting is too low,
the pick-up signal lights continuously (current circuit enabled).
Since a ground fault causes asymmetrical voltages in the vicinity
of the fault, the current flowing via the system capacitances also
has a zero-sequence component. A capacitive current of this
kind on a long line lies within the setting range of the sensitive
ground fault protection function.
The pick-up level I dir of the current circuit for the directional
measurement has a fixed setting of 0.7 I-Setting to take
account of influences such as CT errors and the capacitive
charging currents of the line.
The following procedure is recommended for setting the pick-up
levels:
The enabling current for the directional measurement must
be set to at least twice the maximum possible asymmetrical
current, which can occur in normal operation.
Iasymm
I - Setting = 2.0
IN
The voltage pick-up must be set to 1.6 times the level of the
spurious voltages, which can occur due to asymmetries in the
VT secondary circuit.
Usec.asymm
U - Setting = 1.6
UN 3
where:
V-setting : setting of the enabling voltage for the directional
measurement
Usec.asymm : voltage component 3U0 caused by asymmetries
in the VT secondary circuit (e.g. VT errors)
12-171
UN : 100 V or 200 V according to VT unit in use

I-Setting : setting of the enabling current
Iasymm : current component 3I0 caused by asymmetrical
load currents
IN : primary CT rated current
12.9.6.5. Setting the characteristic angle

The line marking the reversal of direction lies at 90 in relation
to the reference voltage.
In order to achieve symmetrical operation of the directional
element in spite of this, the characteristic angle should equal that
of the zero-sequence impedance of the source.
12.9.6.6. Setting the basic time tBasic

The basic time is the period between pick-up of the protection
and the earliest possible trip.
The operation of the protection function can be coordinated with
others on the same line by judiciously setting the basic time.
The basic time is also used to achieve coordination between the
ground fault function (three-phase tripping) and the distance
function (phase-selective tripping). The ground fault protection is
delayed to allow time for the distance protection to respond to a
fault if it can.
The basic time is normally set to:
tBasic > max. tripping time of the phase-selective distance
protection (taking account of signal transmission
time and sequential tripping)
+ CB operating time
+ aux. contact time (input CB closed)
+ safety margin
The sum of these times is usually about 100 to 200 ms.
12-172
12.9.6.7. Circuit-breaker delay

To avoid operation of the enabling current detector during the
transient oscillations, which occur following the closing of the
circuit-breaker, it is blocked for 50 ms upon receiving the corre-
sponding signal from the CB.
12.9.6.8. The comparison time

The comparison time (German: Wirkzeit) is the time allowed for
the directional comparison to be made and is therefore
dependent on the type of transfer tripping scheme.
The comparison time has a fixed setting of 1 s.
12.9.6.9. Setting the waiting time tWait

The waiting time is also started at the end of the basic time, but
is only effective in a blocking scheme.
In a blocking scheme, tripping is delayed by the setting of tWait
to allow time for the protection at the remote end to decide on
the direction of the fault and to transmit a corresponding blocking
signal if necessary.
tWait should be set at least as long as the measuring time (about
30 ms) plus the longest possible signal transmission time.
12.9.6.10. Setting the transient blocking time t TransBlk

The protection function includes a "transient blocking logic" to
prevent any mal-operation during the course of tripping a fault or
autoreclosure on double-circuit lines, when there is a likelihood
of the flow of energy reversing direction. The time setting can be
selected in a wide range to suit the prevailing conditions.
For example, after a fault has been detected in the backwards
direction, a second directional decision in the forwards direction
is inhibited for the setting of t TransBlk .
The time chosen is determined largely by the time required for
the measurement to reset and the transfer tripping scheme in
use.
The recommended setting is 60 ms plus the reset time of the
communication channel.
12-173
12.9.6.11. CT/VT inputs of the function

Where the zero-sequence components of the voltages and the
currents are derived internally, the CT and VT inputs must be
connected precisely as shown in the wiring diagram. The neutral
of the CTs in this case is formed on the line side and the
parameter CT neutral must be set to line side.
12.9.6.12. Binary inputs of the function
Ext Block
Applying a signal to the Ext. Block input disables the entire
protection function.
Receive
The signal transmitted by the protection at the remote end is
connected to this input.
CB closed
The CB closed input is intended for the position indicator signal
from the circuit-breaker and has a fixed pick-up delay of 50 ms.
The protection function is only enabled when this signal is
received to confirm that the CB is closed. The corresponding
auxiliary contacts for the three phases must be connected in
series to ensure that the protection does not operate during
single-phase reclosure.
The echo logic is enabled 100 ms after the circuit-breaker is
opened.
VT Supervision
The VT Superv input is needed to block the echo logic. It can
be excited either by the VTSup signal from the internal distance
protection function or an auxiliary contact on the m.c.b. via a
binary input.
If this input is not needed, it must be set to F.
Ext Start L1, Ext Start L2, Ext Start L3, Ext Trip 3P, Ext Trip
These inputs are for coordinating operation with the distance
protection function. To them are connected the distance function
signals Start R, Start S, Start T, Trip CB 3P and Trip CB.
They must be set to F if an independent directional ground fault
scheme is in use.
12-174
12.9.6.12.1. Outputs
Trip
There are two Trip signals, one for energizing the tripping relay
via the tripping logic and the other for controlling LEDs and
signaling contacts.
Start
An active "Start" output signals that the zero-sequence current
has exceeded the pick-up setting I-Setting. This signal is only
generated providing the function is not blocked.
MeasFwd
MeasFwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault
in the forwards direction, i.e. the settings of I dir and V-setting
have been exceeded.
MeasBwd
MeasBwd is active when the measuring element detects a fault
in the backwards direction, i.e. the settings of I dir and V-
setting have been exceeded.
Send
The Send output is the signal sent to the remote end of the line.
Receive Inhibit
The Recve Inh signal prevents the distance function from
receiving a PLC signal (see Section 12.9.6.1. Coordination with
the distance protection). It is only generated when the
parameter 1 Channel is set, the basic time has expired or the
ground fault protection picks up for a reverse fault.
The signal Recve Inh must be connected to the distance func-
tion input ExtBlkHF.
12-175
12.10. Sensitive earth fault protection for ungrounded or

compensated networks (DIREFISOL)
12.10.1. Application
The sensitive earth fault (E/F) protection detects E/Fs on
overhead lines and in radial systems. It is suitable for application
in ungrounded systems, systems with Petersen coils and in
resistance grounded MV and HV power systems. The protection
scheme monitors the neutral voltage and current of the protected
line. Depending on the characteristic angle chosen, it responds
to either the real or apparent value of the neutral power.
NOTE: The protection function requires a CT for the current

measurement. Therefore the bay unit variant 500BU03-5 or
500BU03-6 must be used.
12.10.2. Features
Compensation of CT phase errors
Suppression of DC component in voltage and current signals
Suppression of harmonics in voltage and current signals
12.10.3.1. CT/VT inputs:

Neutral current
Neutral voltage
12.10.3.2. Binary inputs:

Blocking signal
12.10.3.3. Binary outputs:

Tripping signal
Starting signal
12.10.3.4. Measured variables:

Neutral power
12-176
12.10.4. Sensitive earth fault protection settings - DIREFISOL.
Text Units Default Min. Max. Step

ParSet 4..1 P1
P setting PN 0.050 0.005 0.100 0.001
Angle Grad 0.00 -180.00 180.00 0.01
Drop ratio % 60 30 95 1
Delay S 0.50 0.05 60.00 0.01
PN UN*IN 1.000 0.500 2.500 0.001
Phi-Comp Grad 0.00 -5.00 5.00 0.01
CurrentInp CT Addr 0
VoltageInp VT Addr 0
Block BinaryAddr Always off
TRIP SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
12.10.5. Explanation of the parameters

Text Explanation
ParSet 4..1 The setting of this parameter determines in which
parameter set the function is active.
P setting Pick-up power setting
Angle Characteristic angle for the power measurement.
Angle = 0 for real power meas. forward
Angle = 180 for real power meas. reverse
Angle = 90 for apparent power meas. forwards
Angle = 90 for apparent power meas. reverse
Setting value is possible between -180 and +180.
Drop ratio Reset time of the trigger
Delay Delay between the TRIP and Start of a trip command
The delay influences the reset time of the function.
For t > 100 ms, the reset time is 50 ms, otherwise the
reset time is not delayed.
PN Rated power as per UN*IN.
Phi-Comp Compensation for CT / VT errors. This refers to the
difference between the CT and VT error.
CurrentInp Defines the CT input for the neutral current. Only single-
phase CT inputs can be configured.
VoltageInp Defines the VT input for the neutral voltage. Only single-
phase VT inputs can be configured.
12-177
Text Explanation
Block Input for the 'Blocking the function'.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs from protection function)
TRIP Tripping signal
Start Start signal
12.10.6. Setting instruction
12.10.6.1. Settings:
Pick-up power setting P Setting
Reset ratio Drop-Ratio
Trip Delay Delay
Phase error compensation Phi-Comp.
Rated power PN
The value entered for 'P Setting' is the power at which the
function picks up with reference to rated power ' PN'. The
parameter 'P Setting' has a setting range of 0.005 to 0.100 in
steps of 0.001.
The setting of the parameter 'Angle' determines the
characteristic angle of the measurement, which is described
below under 'Real power' and 'Apparent power'.
The desired reset ratio of the pick-up value in percent can be
adjusted with the parameter 'Drop-Ratio'. To ensure that the
reset ratio is adequate for low values of 'P Setting', the following
condition must be checked:
50
' Drop - Ratio' < 100
100 ' P Setting' + 1
The angle value to compensate for relative phase errors of CTs

and VTs can be set with the parameter 'Phi-Comp'. The effective
characteristic angle is the sum of the parameters 'Angle' and
'Phi-Comp'.
The setting for the rated power is PN = 1.000.
12-178
If the rated voltage is other than 100 V, then the corresponding

reference value has to be set in the 'Voltage Transformers' ->
'Details' -> 'Transformer Ratio' menu.
Active power
In Petersen coil compensated network and high-resistance
grounded network, the real power component of the neutral
power is used for detecting faults (real power component =
proportion of real power current x displacement voltage). The
current produced by the ground capacitance in the healthy
phases and the inductive current from the Petersen coil flow
together into the fault location, and via the faulted phase back
into the source.
Every transmission line has a relay installed at both ends. For
stub lines a relay at the source end is adequate. If the active E/F
current has to be increased, then on the occurrence of E/F a
star-point grounding resistor is switched on by an overvoltage
relay connected to the displacement voltage. In order to avoid a
mal-operation during the switching on of the grounding resistor,
the power relay is actuated after a short delay. The faulted
section of the line is determined by comparison of the relay
signals.
The active component of the E/F current is a result of the sum of
the resistive losses of the lines, the Petersen coils and the
grounding resistors. The charging current of overhead lines can
be estimated to be about 2.5 A / 10 kV and 100 km, for cables
this can be determined from the cable data. The minimum active
component of the current at the minimum voltage, at which the
power relay has to operate, can be determined as above. The
power at which the relay must pick up should be set somewhat
lower to allow for phase and ratio errors of the CTs.
To measure the active component of the neutral power, the
parameter 'Angle' must be set to 0 in the forward direction,
respectively 180 for the reverse direction and the connections
are made as per the connection diagram (see Fig. 12.70).
Example of how to determine the setting
Assuming an overhead line system with an E/F current (sum of
all three phase currents) of 30 A and a real current component of
5 A. The available measuring CT has a ratio of 125:1. The VT for
the conversion of the star-point displacement voltage has a
secondary voltage of 100 V for a solid E/F at the terminals.
Therefore:
PN = 1 A 100 V = 100 VA
12-179
It is required that E/Fs down to 50 % of the displacement voltage

are detected. The E/F current flows only from one side, therefore
no apportionment has to be reckoned with.
The real component of the current of 5 A results in a secondary
current of:
IW = 5 A 1/125 = 0.04 A at maximum displacement
voltage resp.
IW = 0.04 A 0.5 = 0.02 A at 50 % displacement voltage
The required pick-up power is thus:
P = 0.02 A 50 V = 1 VA
This corresponds to 1 % of the rated power PN at 100 VA.
A setting of 0.5 % PN is possible, but the accuracy of the CTs
must be checked before deciding whether such a sensitive
setting is permissible. Additional grounding resistor can increase
the real power.
Reactive power
In ungrounded and isolated radial networks the reactive
component of the neutral is utilized for fault determination. Every
feeder is equipped with a relay. During an E/F, the capacitive
E/F current of the entire system, but not the capacitive E/F
current of the faulted line, flows into the faulted line. Thereby,
only the relay of the faulted line indicates power flowing into its
line.
The minimum available capacitive E/F current to operate the
relays is the result of the total capacitive E/F current of the whole
system for the smallest expected net configuration. The
capacitive E/F current of the affected feeder has to be extracted.
From this acquired value, only a percentage value has to be
reckoned, which corresponds to the minimum displacement
voltage, at which the protection is still required to operate. If
there are any double-circuit lines, the distribution of current
between the circuits must also be taken into account.
With respect to CT errors at such low current levels, the pick-up
value of the relay must be less than the product of the above-
acquired minimum current and the minimum voltage.
To measure the reactive component of the neutral power, the
parameter 'Angle' must be set to -90 in the forward direction,
respectively +90 for the reverse direction and the connections
are made as per the connection diagram (see Fig. 12.70).
12-180
Time delay
With the parameter 'Delay', the delay required between picking
up of the relay ('Start' signal) and tripping ('Trip' signal) can be
set. The setting range provided is 0.05 to 60 s in steps of 0.01.
CT/VT inputs
The two CT and VT input channels 'CurrentInp' (current) and
'VoltageInp' (voltage) have to be configured for the purpose. The
current input channel may only be allocated to a single-phase
measuring CT and the voltage channel to a single-phase VT.
Binary inputs and outputs
The function can be blocked with the binary input 'Block'.
12-181
Connection diagram
L1 L2 L3
REB500 Bay unit
e 10
U4
11
n
1 (1A)
2 (5A)
I1
3
4 (1A)
5 (5A)
I2 SSS, SVS, ....

6
7 (1A)
8 (5A)
I3
9
3 I0 with
Holmgreen
winding
10 (1A)
11 (5A)
I4 DIREFISOL
12
or 3Io
with core
balanced CT
Fig. 12.70 Connection diagram DIREFISOL
12-182
12.11. Three-phase current plausibility (I3PH)
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase current inputs for
monitoring the symmetry of the three-phase system
detection of a residual current
supervision of the CT input channels
12.11.2. Features
Evaluation of
the sum of the three phase currents
the sequence of the three phase currents
adjustment of residual current amplitude
blocking at high currents (higher than 2 IN)
blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low currents
(below 0.05 IN)
insensitive to DC components
insensitive to harmonics

Phase currents
Blocking

Tripping
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase
currents
12-183
12.11.4. Current plausibility function settings

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select) (Select)
I-Setting IN 0.20 0.05 1.00 0.05
Delay s 10.00 0.1 60.0 0.1
CT-Compens 01.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr CT-I1-I3
Trip SignalAddr

Text Explanation
I-Setting Current setting for tripping
Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal
at the output.
Forbidden settings:
= 1 s for current settings = 0.2 IN
CT-Compens Amplitude compensation factor for the residual current
input, enabling different transformation ratios of the main
CTs for phase and residual currents to be equalized.
The polarity of the residual current can be reversed by
entering negative values.
CurrentInp Defines the current input channel.
Any of the three-phase current inputs may be selected.
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
NOTE: If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place

regardless of setting (I-Setting).
12-184
12.12. Three-phase voltage plausibility (U3PH)
Checking the plausibility of the three-phase voltage inputs for
detection of residual voltage
monitoring the asymmetry of the three-phase voltage system
due to the zero-sequence component
supervision of the VT input channels
12.12.2. Features
Evaluation of
the sum of the three phase voltages
the sequence of the three phase voltages
Provision for comparing the sum of the three phase voltages
with a residual voltage input
Adjustment of residual voltage amplitude
Blocking at high voltages (higher than 1.2 UN)
Blocking of phase-sequence monitoring at low voltages
(below 0.4 UN phase-to-phase)
Insensitive to DC components
Evaluation of the phase voltages is only possible in the case of Y
connected input transformers, otherwise the residual component
cannot be detected.

Phase voltages
Neutral voltage (optional)

Blocking

Tripping
Difference between the vector sum of the three phase
voltages and the neutral voltage
12-185
12.12.4. Voltage plausibility function settings

ParSet 4..1 P1 (Select) (Select)
V-setting UN 0.20 0.05 1.20 0.05
Delay s 10.00 0.1 60.0 0.1
VT-Compens 01.00 -2.00 2.00 0.01
SumInp CT/VT-Addr 0
Trip Signaladdr

Text Explanation
V-setting Voltage setting for tripping
Delay Time between start signal at the I/P and the tripping signal
at the output.
Forbidden setting:
= 1 s for voltage settings = 0.2 UN
VT-Compens Amplitude compensation factor for the residual voltage
input, enabling different transformation ratios of the main
VTs for phase and residual voltages to be equalized.
The polarity of the residual voltage can be reversed by
entering negative values.
VoltageInp Defines the voltage input channel.
Any of the three-phase voltage inputs may be selected.
Not applicable with delta connected VTs.
SumInp Defines the neutral voltage input channel.
Any of the single-phase voltage inputs may be selected.
Blocking Input for blocking the function.
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
NOTE: If the phase sequence is incorrect, tripping takes place

regardless of setting (V-setting).
12-186
12.13. Synchrocheck (SYNC)
Checking the synchronization criteria (amplitudes, phase-shift
and frequency difference) of two electrical systems and, provid-
ing the corresponding limits are satisfied, enabling them to be
connected in parallel.
12.13.2. Features
Monitoring synchronism:
Single-phase voltage measurement.
Comparison of the voltages (dU), phase-shift (dPh) and fre-
quencies (df) of two voltage vectors. Calculation of the corre-
sponding differences between the voltage vectors in the
complex plane.
Evaluation of the fundamental frequency components of the
voltage signals (after filtering of harmonic and DC compo-
nents).
Monitoring voltage:
Single or three-phase voltage measurement.
Evaluation of instantaneous values (non-digitally filtered
analog signals) resulting in a large permissible frequency
range. Detection of the largest and smallest of the three
phase voltages in the case of three-phase measurement.
No filtering of harmonics or DC component.
Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on busbar and line
sides (for amplitude and phase-angle adjustment).
Additional voltage input (for use in double busbar stations)
with provision for remote switchover.
Provision for remote selecting the operating mode.

Voltages (2 or 3 single or three-phase inputs for uBusInput1,
uBusInput2 and uLineInput)

2 inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function
(ReleaseInp1 and ReleaseInp2)
3 inputs for interlocking the synchrocheck O/Ps
(BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2 and BlckTrigLine)
12-187
1 input for bypassing the synchrocheck function

(OverridSync)
2 inputs for remotely selecting operating mode
(OpModeInp1 and OpModeInp2)
2 inputs for remotely switching voltage channels in double
busbar stations (uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ)

Function pick-up (Start)
Circuit-breaker closing enable signal (PermitToClos)
Function disabled signal (SyncBlockd)
Enable output blocked signal (TrigBlockd)
Synchrocheck bypassed signal (OverridSync)
Amplitude difference in permissible range (AmplDifOK)
Phase-shift in permissible range (PhaseDifOK)
Frequency difference in permissible range (FreqDifOK)
Busbars energized (LiveBus)
Busbars de-energized (DeadBus)
Line energized (LiveLine)
Line de-energized (DeadLine)
Synchronism check (single-phase)

Voltage amplitude difference
(dU) = UBus - ULine
Phase-shift
(dPh) = PhBusbar - PhLine
Frequency difference
(df) = fBus - fLine
Voltage check (single or three-phase)

Max. busbar voltage (MaxuBus)
Min. busbar voltage (MinuBus)
Max. line voltage (MaxuLine)
Min. line voltage (MinuLine)
[Single-phase: max. voltage = min. voltage
Three-phase: max. voltage = max. phase-to-phase voltage
min. voltage = min. phase-to-phase voltage]
12-188
12.13.4. Synchrocheck function settings

maxVoltDif UN 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
maxPhaseDif deg 10.0 05.0 80.0 05.0
maxFreqDif Hz 0.20 0.05 0.40 0.05
minVoltage UN 0.70 0.60 1.00 0.05
maxVoltage UN 0.30 0.10 1.00 0.05
Operat.-Mode only SynChck (Select)
supervisTime s 0.20 0.05 5.00 0.05
t-Reset s 0.05 0.00 1.00 0.05
uBusInp-Ph 1ph R-S (Select)
uBusInput1 AnalogAddr 0
uBusInput2 AnalogAddr 0
uLineInp-Ph 1ph R-S (Select)
uLineInput AnalogAddr 0
uBus1Activ BinaryAddr Always on
uBus2Activ BinaryAddr Always off
ReleaseInp1 BinaryAddr Always on
ReleaseInp2 BinaryAddr Always off
BlckTrigBus1 BinaryAddr Always off
BlckTrigBus2 BinaryAddr Always off
BlckTrigLine BinaryAddr Always off
OverridSync BinaryAddr Always off
OpModeInp1 BinaryAddr Always off
OpModeInp2 BinaryAddr Always off
PermitToClos SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
SyncBlockd SignalAddr
TrigBlockd SignalAddr
SyncOverrid SignalAddr
AmplDifOK SignalAddr
PhaseDifOK SignalAddr
FreqDifOK SignalAddr
LiveBus SignalAddr
DeadBus SignalAddr
LiveLine SignalAddr
DeadLine SignalAddr
12-189

Text Explanation
maxVoltDif Max. permissible voltage difference dU between the
phases used for checking synchronism.
maxPhaseDif Max. permissible phase-shift dPh between the voltages
of the phases used for checking synchronism.
maxFreqDif Max. permissible difference of frequency df between
the phases used for checking synchronism.
minVoltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and line
being live (lowest phase voltage in the case of three-
phase measurement).
maxVoltage Voltage level for discriminating between busbar and line
being dead (highest phase voltage in the case of three-
phase measurement).
Operat.-Mode Possible synchrocheck operating modes:
SynChck only: Synchrocheck
[Synchrocheck conditions fulfilled
AND (bus live AND line live)]
BusD & LineL: Synchrocheck OR
(bus dead AND line live)
BusL & LineD: Synchrocheck OR
(bus live AND line dead)
BusD XOR Synchrocheck OR
LineD: (bus dead AND line live) OR
BusD & LineD: Synchrocheck OR
(bus dead AND line dead)
BusD OR LineD: Synchrocheck OR
(bus dead OR line dead)
BusD: Synchrocheck OR
(bus dead)
LineD: Synchrocheck OR
(line dead)
12-190
Text Explanation
supervisTime Period between the function picking up and it issuing the
CB close enable (PermitToClos).
All the conditions for synchronism must remain fulfilled
during this time, otherwise the function is reset.
t-Reset Reset time following the non-fulfillment of one or more
synchronism conditions.
uBusInp-Ph Choice of phase I/P on the busbar side.
Possible settings:
1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3 ph Y; 3
ph
The phase chosen must agree with the voltage input
channel selected (i.e. uBusInput1 and, if selected,
uBusInput2).
uBusInput1 1st voltage I/P channel on the busbar side.
This must agree with the phase chosen (uBusInp-Ph).
uBusInput2 2nd voltage input channel (if applicable) on the busbar
side.
This must agree with the chosen phase (uBusInp-Ph). If
a second input is not configured, the function only takes
account of the 1st. voltage I/P channel (uBusInput1).
uLineInp-Ph Choice of phase input on the line side.
Possible settings:
1 ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1 ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3 ph Y; 3
ph
The phase chosen must agree with the voltage I/P
channel selected (i.e. uLineInput).
uLineInput Voltage input channel on the line side.
This must agree with the chosen phase (uLineInp-Ph).
uBus1Activ, Binary inputs for remote switching between voltage input
uBus2Activ channels connected to double busbars (mimic busbar).
These inputs are only active providing the second busbar
input channel has been configured (uBusInput2).
1)
F: - input disabled
T: - input enabled
12-191
Text Explanation
ReleaseInp1 Binary inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function
(internal OR gate, i.e. at least one of the inputs has to be
ReleaseInp2
set to TRUE (T) or controlled by a binary input to enable
the output). If both inputs are FALSE (F), the
function does not run, i.e. the supervision algorithm is
NOT processed.
These inputs are used where the synchrocheck function is
only needed at certain times (e.g. in autoreclosure
schemes).
F: - synchrocheck function disabled
T: - synchrocheck function enabled
BlkSynchBus1 Binary inputs for interlocking the enabling signals at the
output of the synchrocheck function.
BlkSynchBus2
These would be typically controlled by fuse failure
BlkSynchLine
equipment (m.c.bs) monitoring the VT circuits.
F: - blocking input disabled
T: - blocking input continuously enabled
2)
OverridSync Binary input for bypassing the synchrocheck function.
This permits an enabling signal (PermitToClose)
regardless of whether the synchronism conditions are
fulfilled or not.
It overrides the functions blocking and other enabling
inputs.
F: - input not used
T: - SC enabling output (PermitToClose) continuously
active
OpModeInp1 Binary inputs for remotely selecting the operating mode:
OpModeInp2 F: - input disabled
T: - input continuously enabled
3) xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection functions)
PermitToClose Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is
enabling closure of the circuit-breaker.
It is generated at the end of the measuring period
(supervisTime) and remains active for as long as the
synchronism conditions are fulfilled, or until a blocking
signal is received, or the synchrocheck function resets.
Start Signal generated at the instant the conditions for synchro-
nism are fulfilled for the first time.
12-192
Text Explanation
SyncBlockd Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is
disabled, i.e. both the inputs synchEnable1 and
synchEnable2 are set to FALSE (F), and that the
synchrocheck algorithm has been discontinued.
TrigBlockd The CB close enabling inputs are blocked (one or more
blocking I/Ps are at logical 1), but the synchrocheck
algorithm continues to run.
SyncOverrid Signal indicating that the synchrocheck function is
bypassed and a CB close enabling signal is being
generated (PermitToClose) regardless of whether the
synchronism conditions are fulfilled or not.
AmplDifOK Signal indicating that the voltage difference dU between
the phases used for checking synchronism has fallen
below the value of the parameter maxVoltDif.
PhaseDifOK Signal indicating that the phase-shift dPh between the
phases used for checking synchronism has fallen below
the value of the setting of maxPhaseDif.
FreqDifOK Signal indicating that the difference of frequency df
between the phases used for checking synchronism has
fallen below the value of the setting of maxFreqDif.
LiveBus Signal indicating that the busbar is energized.
(U > minVoltage)
DeadBus Signal indicating that the busbar is de-energized.
(U < maxVoltage)
LiveLine Signal indicating that the line is energized.
(U > minVoltage)
DeadLine Signal indicating that the line is de-energized.
(U < maxVoltage)
1)
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Selected voltage input

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE uBusInput1 active
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE uBusInput2 active
Other conditions The previous blocking input remains active
2)
Parts of the function effected by the blocking inputs:
Assuming that both busbar input channels have been configured
(double busbars), the active blocking input depends on the
statuses of the binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ:
12-193
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Selected voltage input

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BlckTrigBus1 and BlckTrigLine
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BlckTrigBus2 and BlckTrigLine
Other conditions The previous blocking inputs remain active.
Assuming that only the first busbar input channel has been
configured, all the blocking inputs are active regardless of the
statuses of the binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ.
The active blocking inputs are connected internally to an OR
gate and the CB close enabling outputs are blocked, if one of
them is set to TRUE (T).
3)
I/P1 mode I/P2 mode Synchrocheck mode

(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode specified in the control program
(Operat.-Mode)
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE Synchrocheck OR
(T) TRUE (T) TRUE Synchrocheck OR
OR
12-194
12.13.6.1. General
It is only permissible to connect two energized parts of a power
system, if the difference between the amplitudes of their voltages
and the phase-shift between them are within acceptable limits.
The purpose of the synchrocheck function is to determine these
parameters and decide whether it is permissible to connect the
systems in parallel.
The function thus issues an enable signal (PermitToClose),
providing the voltages of the two systems are higher than the set
minimum voltage (minVoltage) and
the difference between the voltage amplitudes dU
the phase-shift dPh
the difference between the frequencies df
do not exceed the limits set for the parameters maxVoltDif,
maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif for the adjustable time
supervisTime.
According to the operating mode (Operat.-Mode) selected, the
function also permits de-energized parts of a power system to be
coupled.
Provision is also made for switching between voltage inputs be-
longing to the busbars of a double busbar station by appropri-
ately controlling two binary inputs (uBus1Activ and
uBus2Activ).
NOTE that the function can only check the synchronism of two
voltages at any one time, that of one of the busbars and that of
the line.
The synchrocheck function is therefore used mainly
to connect infeeds in parallel and to connect outgoing feeders
to the system
to interconnect two synchronous or asynchronous parts of a
power system
in autoreclosure schemes
as a safety check when carrying out manual switching op-
erations.
12-195
Application example: Feeder connected to double busbars

SS1
SS2
T1
CB
Line
VT Line
T2
Closing
command
Switching
unit
Permit to Close
uBus2Activ
uLine Input
uBus1Activ
VT SS2
uBusInput2 Synchrocheck BlckTrigLine
BlckTrigBus2
VT SS1
uBusInput1
BlckTrigBus1
HEST 925 025 FL
Fig. 12.71 Principle of synchrocheck scheme for determining

the instant when it is permissible to connect a
feeder to the power system. (The voltages of
busbar SS2 and the line are monitored.)
where:
SS1, SS2 : busbar 1, busbar 2
VT SS1, VT SS2, VT Line : VTs on busbar 1, busbar 2 and
line
T1, T2 : isolators on busbars 1 and 2
CB : circuit-breaker
uBusInput1, uBusInput2 : voltage input channels on the
busbar side
uLineInput : voltage input channel on the
line side
12-196
BlckTrigBus1, BlckTrigBus2, : inputs for blocking the synchro-

BlSyncLine check function by the VT fuse
failure equipment.
uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ : Binary inputs for switching
between the analog busbar
voltage inputs in accordance
with the configuration of the
isolators (mimic busbar).
12.13.6.2. Settings
Max. voltage difference dU maxVoltDif
Max. phase-shift dPh maxPhaseDif
Max. frequency difference df maxFreqDif
Minimum voltage level for monitoring minVoltage
(determination of whether plant is energized)
Maximum voltage level for monitoring maxVoltage
(determination of whether plant is de-energized)
Choice of operating mode Operat.-Mode
Measuring period (delay before issuing supervisTime
enable)
Reset delay t-Reset
Choice of phase for monitoring on the uBusInp-Ph
busbar side
Choice of phase for monitoring on the uLineInp-Ph
line side
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism (maxVoltDif,

maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif)
The determination of voltage difference, phase-shift and
frequency difference is performed for just one of the phases of
the three-phase system. For this purpose, the analog values are
first filtered by a digital Fourier bandpass filter (to obtain the
fundamentals) and then the orthogonal components UBus and
ULine are derived.
The phase-shift dPh between the voltages and the difference
between their amplitudes dU are calculated from the
corresponding vector diagram in the complex plane.
12-197
Synchrocheck function:
Monitoring the conditions for synchronism
Apparent
dU
L ULine B
UBus
dPhi
PhiB
PhiL
Real
Fig. 12.72 Monitoring the conditions for synchronism
where:
UBus, ULine : complex vectors for UBus and ULine
B, L : angular velocities for U bus and U line
dU = U bus U line
dPhi = PhiB PhiL
The frequency difference df is obtained by determining the rate

at which the phase-shift between the voltage vectors varies:
d
df (dPhi) (B L )
df
The conditions for synchronism are fulfilled, providing the values
of the resulting variables are within the limits set for maxVoltDif,
maxPhaseDif and maxFreqDif.
12-198
Typical values
maxVoltDif: 0.2 UN
maxPhaseDif: 10
maxFreqDif: - 50 mHz for connecting largely synchronous
parts of a stable closely meshed
system or where high demands with
regard to synchronism have to be
fulfilled.
- 100 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with long
dead times (e.g. three-phase slow
reclosure) or for autoreclosure of short
transmission lines
- 200 mHz in autoreclosure schemes with short
dead times, but where high slip
frequencies are to be expected
NOTE: The setting of the synchronism measuring period

(supervisTime) must be chosen to correspond to the settings for
the maximum phase-shift and maximum frequency difference.
Monitoring the voltage in two power systems

(minVoltage, maxVoltage)
The determination of voltage amplitude can be either based on
monitoring a single phase or all three phases depending on how
the particular AnalogAddr is configured. If the three phases are
included, then the highest voltage of the three is detected for the
maximum limit, respectively the lowest of the three for the
minimum limit.
In order to be able to monitor the voltages in a wide frequency
range, instantaneous values are measured (instead of digitally
filtered analog voltages).
The voltage detectors may be used to determine whether a
system is de-energized or energized:
A system is considered to be de-energized, if its voltage
(highest of the three phases in the case of three-phase
measurement) falls below the setting of the parameter
maxVoltage.
12-199
A system is considered to be energized, if its voltage

(lowest of the three phases in the case of three-phase
measurement) exceeds the setting of the parameter
minVoltage.
On no account will an enable signal permitting closure of the
circuit-breaker be issued, should the voltage lie between the
limits of maxVoltage and minVoltage.
Typical values
minVoltage 0.70 UN
maxVoltage 0.30 UN
Choosing the operating mode of the synchrocheck function

(Operat.-Mode)
Basically, an enable signal will always be issued, if the
conditions for synchronism (dU, dPh and df) are fulfilled for
the prescribed period and both systems, i.e. busbar and line, are
energized (voltage > 'minVoltage').
In cases where closure of the circuit-breaker should also be
enabled when one system is de-energized (voltage <
maxVoltage), e.g. connection of a radial feeder, this can be
achieved by appropriately setting the parameter Operat.-Mode':
Operat.-Mode Closure enabled when:

Only SyncChk Synchronism conditions fulfilled AND
(busbar > minVoltage AND
line > minVoltage)
BusD & LineL Only SyncChk OR
(busbar < maxVoltage AND
line > minVoltage)
BusL & LineD Only SyncChck OR
line < maxVoltage)
BusD | LineD Only SyncChk OR
line > minVoltage)
OR
line < maxVoltage)
BusD & LineD Only SyncChk OR
line < maxVoltage)
12-200
Remote operating mode selection

Four of the five operating modes can be selected by external
signals applied to two of the functions binary inputs
(OpModeInp1 and OpModeInp2).
Binary input signals Mode (see above)

OpModeInp1 OpModeInp2
(F) FALSE (F) FALSE Mode set in the control program

(Operat.-Mode)
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BusD & LineL
(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BusL & LineD
(T) TRUE (T) TRUE BusD | LineD
Choice of phase for the voltage inputs on the busbar and

line sides (uBusInp-Ph, uLineInp-Ph)
The phase voltage (uBusInp-Ph, uLineInp-Ph) to be used for
determining synchronism can be entered separately for busbar
and line inputs (to facilitate individual adjustment of phase-angle
and amplitude).
All single and three-phase voltages are available for setting
(1ph L1L2, L2L3 or L3L1; 1ph L1E, L2E or L3E; 3ph Y; 3ph ),
but the ones chosen must agree with the setting for the
corresponding input channels (see Section 12.13.4
Synchrocheck function settings.
Where both busbar inputs are in use, the definition of the phase
(uBusInp-Ph) applies to both busbars.
Notes:
A phase-to-phase measurement is to be preferred for a
single-phase voltage measurement.
If a single-phase input has to be chosen on both sides, the
same phase should be used wherever possible.
If a three-phase Y connection is selected, phase-to-phase
voltages are formed internally. This reduces the harmonic
content and enables the function to continue to be used in
ungrounded systems, which are required to remain in service
with a single ground fault.
According to the setting for uBusInp-Ph and uLineInp-Ph,
either just one phase or all three phases are monitored.
Whether or not the conditions for synchronism (dU, dPh
12-201
and df) are fulfilled is determined on the basis of a single

phase, whereby the following apply:
Where three phases are monitored on busbar and line
sides, the phase-to-phase potential URS is the one
extracted for further processing.
Should a three-phase measurement be defined on one
side and a single-phase on the other, then the single-
phase voltage set for the single-phase input is used on
both sides.
The measuring period (supervisTime), reset time (t-Reset)

and the operating time of the function and also the dead
time of any autoreclosure function
Measuring period (supervisTime):
This adjustable delay time, which is initiated at the end of the
pick-up time, is the period during which all the conditions for
synchronism must be continuously fulfilled to permit closure of
the circuit-breaker. The timer is reset should one of the parame-
ters move out of the permissible range.
Providing they all remain within their preset ranges, the enable
signal (PermitToClose) is issued at the end of the measuring
period.
Especially in autoreclosure applications, it is of advantage to set
the measuring period (supervisTime) in relation to the settings
for Phase diff. and maxFreqDif. It also provides facility for
allowing for the operating time of the circuit-breaker:
2 (' PhaseDiff ' )[]
' supervisTim e' [s] ( tv + ts) [s]
(' FreqDiff ' ) [Hz] 360
where:
ts: circuit-breaker operating time
Typical range: 0 ... 100 ms
tv: time required by the function to pick up
(response by the function to transient phenomena in the in-
put voltage and timer tolerances):
typically 60... 80 ms for values of supervisTime <200 ms
typically 80... 100 ms for values of supervisTime 200 ms
The above setting for the measuring period ensures that for a
constant frequency difference df within the setting of
maxFreqDif, the phase-shift dPh will still be inside the set
12-202
permissible angular range (- maxPhaseDif to + maxPhaseDif)

at the end of the time supervisTime.
Typical values
For a phase-shift setting (maxPhaseDif) of 10:
maxFreqDif supervisTime
200 mHz 100... 200 ms
100 mHz 250... 450 ms
50 mHz 600...1000 ms
Minimum function operating time

The minimum operating time achieved by the function, i.e. the
shortest possible time between the instant the synchronism
conditions are fulfilled for the first time and the generation of the
signal enabling the circuit-breaker to be closed PermitToClose,
is given by the sum of the measuring time setting supervisTime
and the pick-up response time tv of the function.
Minimum operating time = (supervisTime) + tv
Autoreclosure dead time

In an autoreclosure scheme, the dead time set for the
autoreclosure function must be at least as long as the minimum
operating time of the synchrocheck function given above in order
to permit the synchrocheck function to issue an enable signal
(PermitToClose) within the dead time:
Dead time minimum operating time = (supervisTime) + tv
Reset time (t-Reset)

From the instant that one or more of the synchronism conditions
are no longer fulfilled, the enabling signal output
(PermitToClose) and the pick-up signal reset after the time set
for t-Reset.
This ensures a CB closing signal can be maintained for a certain
minimum time.
Typical value
t-Reset 50 ms
NOTE: Where high slip frequencies df are to be expected, t-

Reset must be short enough to prevent the phase-shift from
exceeding the set permissible range of phase-angles
(-'PhaseDif to +PhaseDif) during the reset time.
12-203
12.13.6.3. Binary inputs of the function
Inputs for switching between analog busbar inputs

(uBus1Activ, uBus2Activ)
Where the two busbar inputs (Bus I/P1 and Bus I/P2) have
been configured for a double busbar installation, the
measurement can be switched from one busbar to the other by
signals corresponding to the isolator positions applied to the
inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ':
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Analog inputs for synchronization

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE uBusInput1 and uLineInput
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE uBusInput2 and uLineInput
Other combinations of the states of these two inputs do not

result in any switching of the AnalogAddr channels and the
prevailing situation is maintained.
Notes
The function (timer, all measuring elements and the
associated outputs) is automatically reinitialized when busbar
inputs are switched. This procedure takes about 60 ms
(internal response times). The function then begins to
evaluate the new busbar voltage and from this instant
onwards the generation of an enable signal (PermitToClose)
relating to the new system configuration is possible.
the two binary inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ are
inactivated in configurations in which only one busbar input
(uBusInput1) is defined.
Blocking inputs for preventing the synchrocheck function

from issuing an enable signal (BlckTrigBus1,
BlckTrigBus2, BlckTrigLine)
These are assigned to the corresponding voltage inputs and
used mainly when the VT circuit can be interrupted by fuse-
failure equipment (miniature circuit-breakers). In such cases, the
blocking inputs are connected to auxiliary contacts on the fuse-
failure equipment. This precaution eliminates any risk of the
synchrocheck function permitting the closure of a circuit-breaker
onto a line it considers to be de-energized, which in reality is
under voltage.
12-204
Function of the blocking inputs

Both busbar voltage inputs have been configured:
Which of the blocking inputs is enabled depends on which of
the busbar inputs uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ is active, i.e.
on which voltage input is active:
uBus1Activ uBus2Activ Active blocking inputs

(T) TRUE (F) FALSE BlckSyncBus1 and BlckSyncLine
(F) FALSE (T) TRUE BlckSyncBus2 and BlckSyncLine
Other combinations of the states of these two inputs do not

influence the blocking inputs and the prevailing situation is
maintained.
If only one busbar voltage input is configured, all the blocking
I/Ps (BlkSyncBus1, BlkSyncBus2 and BlckTrigLine) are
enabled regardless of the states of the binary I/Ps
uBus1Activ and uBus2Activ.
The active blocking inputs are connected to an OR function so
that a logical 1 from any one of them causes all the measuring
elements and the associated outputs (start, AmplDifOK,
PhaseDifOK, FreqDifOK, LiveBus, LiveLine, DeadBus and
DeadLine) and also the enabling output (PermitToClose) to
reset. The algorithm of the synchrocheck function, however,
continues to run.
Inputs for enabling the synchrocheck function

(ReleaseInp1, ReleaseInp2)
Since the synchrocheck function is only required during the rele-
vant switching operations and autoreclosure cycles, it may be
blocked at all other times to save processor time. The binary
inputs ReleaseInp1 and ReleaseInp2 are used for this
purpose. Internally they are the inputs of an OR gate, so that at
least one must be active before the synchrocheck program will
run.
If neither of the two enabling signals is at logical 1, processing
of the algorithm ceases. All the functions measuring element
outputs also reset immediately and any circuit-breaker close
enabling signal (PermitToClose) resets after the time set for
t-Reset.
12-205
Conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function is especially

recommended, where it has to operate in conjunction with other
functions in the same unit such as distance protection, which are
critical from the operating time point of view, so as not to
adversely influence their tripping times.
Application example
The scheme below shows a synchrocheck function in the same
unit as the distance protection and autoreclosure functions. The
synchrocheck function is only required during the dead times of
the autoreclosure function. This is achieved by connecting the
inverted output signal AR ready generated by the autoreclosure
function to the binary I/P ReleaseInp1 (or ReleaseInp2) of the
synchrocheck unit.
Start
Distance Auto- AR ready Synchro-
function reclosure check
Trip CB function
ReleasInp1
Trip CB 3P Close CB
SynchroChck
PermitToClose
Binary
circle
HEST 925 019 FL
Fig. 12.73 Block diagram showing the interconnections

between the functions for a scheme with
conditional enabling of the synchrocheck function
Input for bypassing the synchrocheck function

(OverridSync)
A signal applied to this binary input causes a PermitToClose
signal to be generated immediately regardless of whether the
conditions for synchronism are fulfilled or not.
This input overrides all other blocking or enabling inputs.
12-206
12.14. Autoreclosure (AR)
The function can be configured for single or three-phase
autoreclosure.
The unit can operate in conjunction with either of the two
protection functions (distance and overcurrent protection) and
either an internal or external synchrocheck function.
12.14.2. Features
Up to 4 fast or slow reclosure attempts
First cycle with up to 4 individually configurable single and/or
three-phase reclosure attempts
Independent operating indicators for each reclosure cycle
Wide dead time setting range
Provision to control bypassing of the synchrocheck unit and
extending the dead time for the first zone by external signals
Clearly defined response to changing fault conditions during
the dead time (evolving faults)

None

Start (Start)
Redundant start (Start 2) *)
Redundant start (Start 3) *)
Three-phase trip (Trip CB 3P)
Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB2 3P) *)
Redundant three-phase trip (Trip CB3 3P) *)
General trip (Trip CB )
Redundant general trip (Trip CB2) *)
Redundant general trip (Trip CB3) *)
CB ready for open/close/open cycle (CB ready)
CB2 ready for open/close/open cycle (CB2 ready) **)
CB ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready)
CB2 ready for close/open cycle (CO Ready 2) **)
*) 2 and 3 denote the inputs of protection functions 2 and 3 or relays 2 and 3

in a redundant protection scheme.
**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
12-207
CB open (CB open)

CB2 open (CB2 open **)
CB2 preferred circuit-breaker (CB2 Priority) **)
Synchrocheck (SynchroChck)
Synchrocheck 2 (SynchroChck2) **)
Dead line (Dead Line)
Dead line 2 (Dead Line2) **)
External blocking input (ExtBlkAR)
Conditional blocking input (CondBlkAR)
Manual close blocking input (Manual Close)
External synchrocheck bypass (Ext.SCBypas)
External extension of dead time (Extend t1)
Delay from master CB (MasterDel)
Block from master CB (MasterUnsucc)
Block reclosure by follower (Inhibit Inp)
(redundant scheme)
External 1P-1P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P_1P)
External 1P-3P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P_3P)
External 1P3P-3P selector for 1st. AR (MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P)
Ext. 1P3P-1P3P select. for 1st. AR (MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P)

CB close signal (Close CB)
CB2 close signal (Close CB2) **)
Overreach switching signal (ZExtension)

Definitive trip (Def. Trip)
Prepare trip of all three phases (Trip 3-Pol)
Block Follower CB (BlkFlwr)
Delay Follower CB (DelFlwr)
Block for Follower recloser (Inhibit Outp)
Reclosure function ready (AR Ready)
Reclosure function blocked (AR Blocked)
Reclosure cycle running (AR in prog.)
1st single-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 1P)
1st three-phase reclosure in progress (First AR 3P)
2nd Reclosure in progress (Second AR)
3rd reclosure in progress (Third AR)
4th reclosure in progress (Fourth AR)
**) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
12-208
None
12.14.4. Autoreclosure settings

1. AR Mode 1P3P-1P3P (Select)
2..4. AR Mode off (Select)
t Dead1 1P s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead1 3P s 000.60 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead1 Ext. s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead2 s 001.20 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead3 s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Dead4 s 060.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Oper s 000.50 0.05 300 0.01
t Inhibit s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
t Close s 000.25 0.05 300 0.01
t Discrim.1P s 000.60 0.10 300 0.01
t Discrim.3P s 000.30 0.10 300 0.01
t Timeout s 001.00 0.05 300 0.01
t AR Block s 005.00 0.05 300 0.01
Start BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB 3P BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB BinaryAddr Always off
Start 2 BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB2 3P BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB2 BinaryAddr Always off
Start 3 BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB3 3P BinaryAddr Always off
Trip CB3 BinaryAddr Always off
CB Ready BinaryAddr Always off
CO Ready BinaryAddr Always off
CB Open BinaryAddr Always off
Dead line BinaryAddr Always off
Ext. Blk AR BinaryAddr Always off
Cond.Blk AR BinaryAddr Always off
Manual Close BinaryAddr Always off
Inhibit Inp. BinaryAddr Always off
12-209

Extend t1 BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P 1P BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P 3P BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P3P 3P BinaryAddr Always off
MD1 EXT 1P3P 1P3P BinaryAddr Always off
Close CB SignalAddr
Trip 3-Pol SignalAddr
Def. Trip SignalAddr
AR Ready SignalAddr
AR in Prog. SignalAddr
AR Blocked SignalAddr
First AR 3P SignalAddr
First AR 1P SignalAddr
Second AR SignalAddr
Third AR SignalAddr
Fourth AR SignalAddr
Inhibit Outp SignalAddr
SCBypas 1P off (Select)
SCBypas 1P3P off (Select)
Ext.SCBypas BinaryAddr off (F)
SynchroChck BinaryAddr off (F)
ZE Prefault on (Select)
ZE 1. AR off (Select)
ZExtension SignalAddr
Master mode off (Select)
MasterDelay BinaryAddr Always off
Mast.noSucc BinaryAddr Always off
DelayFlwr. SignalAddr
Blk.toFlwr. SignalAddr
CB2 Ready BinaryAddr Always off
CO Ready 2 BinaryAddr Always off
CB2 open BinaryAddr Always off
SynchroChck2 BinaryAddr Always off
Dead line 2 BinaryAddr Always off
12-210

Close CB2 SignalAddr
CB2 Priority BinaryAddr Always off
Remarks on the signal designations:

The input and output signals specifically for redundant or duplex
schemes include the figure 2, respectively 3 in their
designations.
The signals belonging to the basic configuration (1 protection
function and 1 autoreclosure function) do not necessarily include
the figure 1 in their designations.
12.14.5. Explanations of parameters

Text Explanation
1. AR Mode 1. 1P-1P single-phase trip and reclosure for
ground faults (single-phase dead time),
no reclosure for phase faults
1. 1P-3P single-phase trip followed by three phase
trip after approx. 20 ms, three-phase
reclosure for ground faults (three-phase
dead time initiated by single-phase trip),
no reclosure for phase faults
1. 1P3P-3P three-phase trip and reclosure for earth
and phase faults (three-phase dead time)
1. 1P3P-1P3P single-phase trip and reclosure for

ground faults (single-phase dead time),
three-phase trip and reclosure for phase
faults (three-phase dead time)
Ext. Wahl External selection by the binary inputs
MD1_EXT_1P_1P, MD1_EXT_1P_3P,
MD1_EXT_1P3P_3P and
MD1_EX_1P3P_1P3P
24AR Mode Maximum number of reclosure attempts (all three-phase)
off no 2nd, 3rd or 4th reclosure
2 AR 2 reclosures
3 AR 3 reclosures
4 AR 4 reclosures
t Dead1 1P Dead time for first single-phase reclosure
t Dead1 3P Dead time for first three-phase reclosure
12-211
Text Explanation
t Dead1 Ext. Extension of 1st dead time for single or three-phase

reclosure Effective as long as a logical 1 (pulse or
continuous) is applied to the Extend t1 I/P before the
dead time finishes (falling edge).
t Dead2 2nd dead time
t Dead3 3rd dead time
t Dead4 4th dead time
t Oper Maximum duration of a fault for AR

t Inhibit Period (CB recovery time) from the falling edge of the
last reclosure attempt during which the autoreclosure
function is blocked and after which the function is reset.
In the event of an evolving fault between discrimination
and dead times, the period commences at the instant of
another trip occurring between the two times.
The inhibit timer is also started if the protection trips after
the fault duration time t Oper has elapsed.
t Close Duration of CB close signal
t Discrim.1P Evolving fault discrimination time for single-phase

reclosure
t Discrim.3P Evolving fault discrimination time for three-phase
reclosure
t Timeout Period following the dead time during which the CB
close signal has to occur. If it does not, the Def. Trip
signal is generated.
t AR Block Time during which reclosure is blocked. t AR Block is
started by every blocking signal (Ext.Blk AR, Cond.Blk.
AR, Manual Close, Inhibit Inp and MasternoSucc).
Start Input for signaling the start of a reclosure cycle.
1) This I/P is connected to the General start signal of a
protection function.
Trip CB 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.
1) The three-phase trip from a protection function is
Trip CB I/P for the general trip signal.
The general trip from a protection function is connected
to this input.
Set to off (F or False), if not needed.
1) For the autoreclosure function to operate correctly, at least the 'Start' and
'Trip CB 3P' inputs must be connected to a protection function or via a
binary I/P to an external protection relay.
12-212
Text Explanation
Start 2 Input for the AR start signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general start
signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this input.
Trip CB2 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general tripping
signal from the 2nd protection is connected to this input.
Trip CB2 Input for the general trip signal.
In redundant protection schemes, the general trip signal
from the 2nd protection is connected to this input.
Start 3 Input for the AR start signal.
The general start signal from the 3rd protection can be
Trip CB3 3P Input for the three-phase trip signal.
The three-phase tripping signal from the 3rd protection
can be connected to this input.
Trip CB3 Input for the general trip signal.
The general trip signal from the 3rd protection can be
CB Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready
(open/close/open).
Set to on (T or True), if not needed or not fitted.
Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 ready'
In a duplex scheme, either an active CB ready or CB2
ready I/P enables an autoreclosure cycle.
Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
12-213
Text Explanation
CO Ready Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is ready for
a close/open cycle.
Set to on (T or True) if not needed, not fitted and
Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.
Input logic for enabling the closing command:
[(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR Dead line OR
ExtSCBypas].
CB Open Input excited by a signal from the CB when it is open.
To avoid the operation of fast circuit-breakers from being
blocked unintentionally, the effect of this input is delayed
internally by 100 ms.
Dead line Input indicating that the line is de-energized (CB open
input if the VTs are on the busbar side).
An active input overrides the following logical
relationship of the inputs: synchrocheck AND CO
Ready'.
Ext. Blk AR Input for blocking the internal autoreclosure function.
Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is
immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input.
The output signals Trip 3 Pol and Def Trip are
generated and a three-phase definitive trip takes place.
Cond. Blk. AR Input for a conditional blocking signal.
Blocking only when AR cycle is not in progress.
When tripping is by the distance protection SOTF logic
or a directional ground fault PLC signal, the
corresponding signals can be connected to this input to
prevent autoreclosure.
Manual Close Blocking input excited by the manual CB close signal.
Even an autoreclosure cycle that is in progress is
immediately blocked by a signal applied to this input.
Inhibit Inp. Input for blocking the follower reclosure function in a
redundant scheme. The follower is blocked from the end
of the master closing signal until the end of the reclaim
time.
12-214
Text Explanation
Extend t1 Input for conditionally extending the dead time (single
and three-phase) for the first (fast) reclosure.
MD1_EXT_1P_1P Inputs for externally selecting the mode for the first
reclosure. They are only effective when the parameter
MD1_EXT_1P_3P
1. AR Mode is set to Ext. select.
MD1_EXT_1P3P_
Unused inputs must be set to off (F or False). If a
3P
signal is applied to more than one input, the next mode
MD1_EXT_1P3P_ in the list is the one that is active. The autoreclosure
1P3P function is blocked if none of the inputs is used.
Close CB CB close signal
Trip 3-Pol Signal to the distance function so that it can only carry
out a three-phase trip.
This signal is inverted and connected to the distance
protection I/P 1P AR.
This signal is active in many situations, but particularly
when the AR function is blocked, the CB is not ready for
AR, the CB is open, the single-phase discrimination time
t 1P Discrim finishes or the output signal First AR 3P is
active.
It resets at the end of reclaim time.
Def. Trip Signal initiating definitive tripping of the CB.
This signal is normally active when the protection trips
again after the last programmed reclosing shot or trips
while the AR function is blocked. The signal resets after
a fixed time of 500 ms.
AR Ready Signal AR function ready for a reclosure cycle. This
signal is active when the AR function is ON and standing
by and also during the closing command.
AR in Prog. Signal indicating that a reclosure cycle is in progress.
This signal is active from the beginning of the dead time
until the end of the last reclosure attempt.
AR Blocked Signal indicating that the autoreclosure relay is blocked.
First AR 3P Signal 1st three-phase reclosure attempt in progress.
First AR 1P Signal 1st single-phase reclosure attempt in progress.
Second AR Signal 2nd reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).
Third AR Signal 3rd reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).
Fourth AR Signal 4th reclosure attempt in progress (three-phase).

Inhibit Outp Signal for blocking the follower AR function in a
redundant scheme.
This signal is active from the end of the master AR close
command to the end of the reclaim time.
12-215
Text Explanation
SCBypas 1P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready
signals for the first single-phase reclosure:
on' First single-phase reclosure not enabled by
synchrocheck and close/open ready signals
(bypass always active).
off' First single-phase reclosure enabled by the
synchrocheck and close/open ready signals
(bypass inactive).
SCBypas1P3P Bypass of the synchrocheck and close/open ready
signals for the first single or three-phase reclosure:
on' First reclosure not enabled by synchrocheck
and close/open ready signals
(bypass always active).
off' First reclosure enabled by synchrocheck and
close/open ready signals
(bypass inactive).
Ext.SCBypas Bypasses the synchroChck and CO Ready signals.
Input logic for enabling the close command:
[(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR Dead line OR
Ext.SCBypas].
[(synchroChk2 AND CO Ready 2) OR Dead line OR
Ext.SCBypas].
SynchroChck Input for a signal from a synchrocheck relay.
Set to on (T or True), if not needed, not fitted and
Dead line or ExtSCBypas not used.
Input logic: [(synchrocheck AND CO Ready) OR
Dead line OR Ext.SCBypas'].
ZE Prefault Distance relay reach setting before the first fault:
on overreaching (ZExtension signal active)
off' underreaching (ZExtension signal inactive)
ZE 1. AR Distance relay reach after the 1st reclosure attempt:
ZE 2. AR Distance relay reach after the 2nd reclosure attempt:
12-216
Text Explanation
ZE 3. AR Distance relay reach after the 3rd reclosure attempt:
ZE 4. AR Distance relay reach after the 4th reclosure attempt:
ZExtension Signal to the distance function to switch it to overreach
or enable an overcurrent function with a short delay.
Master Mode (For 1 breaker and redundant schemes.)
Selection of an autoreclosure function to be Master:
on Master output signals transmitted
off Master outputs blocked
MasterDelay Input for a signal delaying the closing command from the
follower reclosure function.
This signal picks up when the dead time of the master
reclosure function starts and is reset either by a new trip
after the last reclosure of the cycle or at the end of the
wait time following successful reclosure by the master.
Mast.noSucc Input for a blocking signal from the master CB.
This signal is triggered by the rising edge of the
Def.Trip output from the master reclosure function and
resets after a fixed time of 500 ms.
DelayFlwr. Signal to delay the follower CB for as long as the master
circuit-breaker has not completed its autoreclosure
cycle.
The signal picks up at the start of master AR dead time
and is reset either by the rising edge of the Def.Trip
output or the falling edge of the Close CB output after
the time tClose.
Blk.toFlwr Signal to block the follower CB as long as reclosure of
the master CB is unsuccessful.
The excursion of this signal is the same as for the
Def.Trip output.
12-217
Text Explanation
CB2 Ready Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready
(open/close/open).
Set to off (F or False), if not needed or not fitted.
Input logic: CB ready OR CB2 ready
In a duplex scheme, the autoreclosure cycle is enabled
either by an active CB ready or CB2 ready input.
Resetting of this input is delayed internally by 100 ms.
CO Ready 2 Input excited by a signal from CB2 when it is ready for a
close/open operation.
Dead line 2 is not used.
[(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) OR Dead line 2
OR ExtSCBypas].
CB2 open I/P excited by a signal from CB2 when it is open.
Set to on (T or True), if not needed. Observe the
information given for the duplex logic in a duplex
scheme.
SynchroChck2 Input for a signal from a synchrocheck function
belonging to CB2.
Dead line 2 or ExtSCBypas not used.
[(synchrocheck2 AND CO Ready 2) OR Dead line 2
OR ExtSCBypas].
Dead line 2 Input indicating that line 2 is de-energized (CB2 open
and VTs 2 on the busbar side).
An active input overrides the following logical
relationship of the inputs: synchrocheck 2 AND CO
Ready 2.
Close CB2 Heavy duty relay output for the CB2 close command
Close CB2 Auxiliary relay output for the CB2 close signal
CB2 Priority Input for determining the preferred circuit-breaker:
off (F or False) CB1 is preferred circuit-breaker
on (T or True) CB2 is preferred circuit-breaker
If both circuit-breakers are closed before a fault, only the
preferred circuit-breaker performs the entire
autoreclosure cycle. The other circuit-breaker closes
either after successful autoreclosure or when the close
command to the preferred circuit-breaker is not enabled
(missing CO Ready or Synchrocheck).
12-218
12.14.6.1. General
The autoreclosure function can perform from 1 to 4
autoreclosure attempts. The first attempt can be either single or
three-phase while the subsequent attempts are always three-
phase. The type and number are determined by the parameters
1. AR Mode (4 different modes for the 1st reclosure cycle) and
2..4 AR Mode.
The function can operate in conjunction with either an external
distance protection relay or other internal protection functions.
It can also operate in a scheme comprising two or more protec-
tion functions.
12.14.6.2. Connections between autoreclosure and distance functions

The autoreclosure function determines from the states of the
input signals start, Trip CB and Trip CB 3P, whether the dis-
tance protection has picked up and whether it has performed a
single or a three-phase trip. Only the Trip CB signal is
generated for a single-phase trip, whereas both the Trip CB and
Trip CB 3P signals are generated for a three-phase trip.
The external distance relay or internal distance function decides
whether single or three-phase tripping should take place.
The autoreclosure function can send two signals to the distance
protection. The Trip 3-Pol signal informs the distance protection
whether it should perform a single or a three-phase trip. The
ZExtension signal switches the distance protections overreach-
ing zone on and off.
Where the SOTF logic is not required to operate during
autoreclosure, connect the AR in prog. signal to the
ExtBlkSOTF binary input of the distance function. The
SOTF 10 s timer in the distance functions SOTF logic is
normally activated for dead times <10 s and in this case the
above connection is not necessary.
12-219
If the SOTF logic initiates tripping, an autoreclosure cycle can be

inhibited by connecting the start SOTF from the distance
function to the CondBlkAR input of the autoreclosure function.
REB500sys
UZ Start L1L2L3 Start AR
Trip CB Trip CB
Trip CB 3P Trip CB 3P
CB Manual Close
1PolAR Trip 3P
CO ready
Close CB
CB open
ZExtension ZExtension
Fig. 12.74 Distance and autoreclosure functions in the same

unit
REB500sys
UZ Start L1L2L3 Start AR
Trip CB Trip CB
CB Manual Close
1pol AR Trip 3P
CO ready
CB open
CB close
Fig. 12.75 Distance protection and autoreclosure functions in

different units
12-220
12.14.6.3. Connections between autoreclosure and overcurrent

functions
To prevent the discrimination timer from operating, connect the
overcurrent Trip signal to the two inputs Start and Trip CB 3P
of the autoreclosure function.
The time t Close must be set longer than the maximum
operating time of the activated (graded) overcurrent functions:
tClose from AR function > tmax. overcurrent time delay
In cases where the zone extension signal is used in conjunction
with overcurrent functions (see zone extension settings), the
terms overreach and underreach have the following meanings:
overreach : enabling of an overcurrent function having a
short (non-graded) time delay.
underreach : enabling of an overcurrent function having a long
(graded) time delay.
O/C (Logic)
REB500sys
Trip >= 1
Start AR
I1>, t1
Trip CB 3P
O/C
Trip
CB Manual
I2>, t2
CO ready
Close CB
CB open
Block ZExtension
Cl
Fig. 12.76 Overcurrent and autoreclosure functions in the

same unit
where:
t1 standard delay (0.5 ... 1.5 s)
t2 short delay (0.02 ... 0.2 s)
I1>, I2> pick-up value I set for Trip'
12-221
12.14.6.4. Coordinating autoreclosure (AR) with first and second main

protections
Provision is made for coordinating the operation of the
autoreclosure function of main protection 1 with main protection
2.
To avoid any risk of mal-operation due to differing timer
tolerances, precautions are necessary to ensure that only one
autoreclosure function is active per line terminal at any one time.
Main protection 1 (external device) and main protection 2
(REB500sys) are completely independent protection systems
and if each has its own autoreclosure function (Fig. 12.74), their
operation has to be coordinated. As long as the AR function for
main protection 1 is in operation, that of main protection 2 is
blocked. To this end, main protection 1 output CO Ready is
connected to input 118205_Ext. Blk AR on the REB500sys bay
unit. The starting signals (Start L1L2L3) and tripping signals
(Trip CB and Trip CB 3P) generated by the REB500sys
distance function UZ(2) are connected to their own autoreclosure
function AR(2) as well as to the autoreclosure function AR(1).
The corresponding signals from the external distance protection
UZ(1) are only connected to the external autoreclosure device
AR(1). On the other hand, the signal from AR(1) instructing the
distance protection only to perform a three-phase trip (Trip CB
3P) goes to both distance protection functions UZ(1) and UZ(2).
The same signal from AR(2) only goes to distance protection
UZ(2).
The autoreclosure unit AR(1) and the two distance protection
functions UZ(1) and UZ(2) are active in normal operation. An
autoreclosure cycle can be initiated by either UZ(1) or UZ(2) as
both communicate with the autoreclosure device AR(1).
Whenever autoreclosure device AR(1) is in the not-ready state,
autoreclosure device AR(2) is activated and communicates with
distance protection function UZ(2). AR(1) is generally fitted in the
same bay unit as distance protection UZ(1) and a not ready
status applies to both functions. This means that distance
protection and autoreclosure of the line are performed by main
protection 2 (REB500sys).
12-222
REB500sys
UZ(2) Start RST Start AR(2)
Trip CB Trip CB
Trip 3-Pol
1PolAR >1
=
CB Manual Close
Ext. Blk. AR
CO Ready
Close CB
CB open
CB Manual Close
CO Ready
Close CB
CB open
AR Ready
UZ(1)
>1
= Start
Start RST
Trip CB
>1
= Trip CB
>
=1 Trip CB 3P
Trip CB 3P
1PolAR Trip 3-Pol AR(1)

ZExtensionAR ZExtension
Fig. 12.77 Coordinating autoreclosure of main protection 1

with main protection 2
12-223
12.14.6.5. Timers
The timers have setting ranges extending up to 300 s in steps of
10 ms.
The purpose of each of the timers is described below.
Dead times t Dead1 1P to t Dead 4

Provided the trip signal is issued before t Oper elapses, the
dead time is the period between the tripping signal (Trip CB)
and the close signal (Close CB).
The required dead time must be entered separately for each re-
closure cycle. This necessitates setting the following parameters:
't Dead1 1P, t Dead1 3P, t Dead 2, t Dead 3 and t Dead 4.
Provision is made for externally switching the dead times
t Dead1 1P and t Dead1 3P for the first (fast) reclosure attempt
to a second setting. The corresponding additional time period
can be set with the aid of the parameter t Dead 1 Ext and
activated via the binary I/P Extend t1.
The 2nd, 3rd and 4th reclosure attempts are always three-phase.
Extended dead time t Dead 1 Ext

This time provides facility for extending the dead time (e.g. should
the communications channel be defective or for a redundant
scheme with 2 autoreclosure functions). The extended dead time
is enabled by the binary input Extend t1.
Maximum fault duration for a reclosure attempt t Oper

If a fault has persisted for some time, the probability of a suc-
cessful reclosure reduces. The likelihood of the power system
becoming unstable is also greater for an unsuccessful
autoreclosure attempt following a fault which has persisted for a
long period. It is for these reasons that the time after the
inception of a fault during which reclosure can be initiated is
limited. The fault duration is set using parameter t Oper.
The timer for the fault duration is started by the pick-up signal
from the protection function (Start). Faults resulting in tripping
after t Oper are locked out (Def. Trip) and reclosure does not
take place.
Should the fault duration time expire before the protection trips,
autoreclosure is blocked and the reclaim time is started.
12-224
Example:
Time T Oper < Delay(2) of the distance function means that
autoreclosure only takes place for faults in the first distance zone
(Delay(1)).
This function is not required for schemes that only use current
functions. The binary inputs Start and Trip CB 3P are
connected together (see Section 12.14.6.3.).
Reclaim time t inhibit

One purpose of the inhibit time is to permit the circuit-breaker to
recover its full voltage withstand. To this end, it disables the
autoreclosure function for the time set for parameter t inhibit
after one of the following events:
the last reclosing attempt
a definitive trip resulting from a protection trip after the fault
duration time t Oper
a reocurring trip between discrimination time and dead time
(evolving fault, see output signal Def. Trip).
Close signal duration t Close

The maximum duration of the circuit-breaker close signal
(command output Close CB) is determined by the parameter
t Close. Any tripping signal which occurs during this time
overrides the close signal. A second, third or fourth reclosure
attempt can only take place, if the next trip occurs within the time
t Close.
Discrimination times t 1P discrim. and t 3P discrim.

The discrimination time determines the procedure in the event of
a different kind of fault occurring during the dead time (evolving
fault), i.e. one of the other two phases also picks up or the trip-
ping signal resets and picks up again. The discrimination time is
started together with the dead time. Should a tripping signal
recur due to an evolving fault between the expiry of the
discrimination time and before the end of the dead time, the
reclaim timer is started and a definitive trip (Def. Trip) initiated.
The dead time is also discontinued and the signal AR in prog.
reset.
If the first fault was initially an earth fault and evolves during the
time t Dead1 1P, but before the end of the discrimination time t
Discrim 1P, the dead time t Dead1 3P is started and three-
phase reclosure takes place.
12-225
The discrimination time t Discrim 3P is also needed for 2 or 1

breaker schemes, where each circuit-breaker has its own
A typical setting for the parameters t Discrim 1P or t Discrim
3P for single and three-phase reclosure is 50 % of the shortest
dead time.
The minimum permissible setting for the discrimination time is:
100 ms + CB time
NOTE: The time t1EvolFaults during which a subsequent fault

has to be detected (evolving or unsuccessful reclosure) is a
distance function setting.
The distance protection parameter t1EvolFaults enables the

time to be set during which a subsequent fault (evolving or
unsuccessful reclosure) results in a three-phase trip, i.e. every
second trip by the distance protection function trips all three
phases. The autoreclosure function also signals the switchover
to three-phase tripping by exciting the signal Trip 3-Pol at the
end of the fault discrimination time t Discrim. 1P.
It is advisable to set the time t1EvolFaults longer than the
autoreclosure dead time t Dead1 1P.
't Timeout
The parameter t Timeout determines the period after the dead
time within which the close signal must be issued, otherwise a
Def.Trip is generated and no further reclosure attempt is made.
Before a close command is issued at the end of every dead time,
the logic [(synchroChck AND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR
ExtSCBypas)] is checked and the command only enabled
providing all the criteria are correct within the setting of
t Timeout.
Blocking time t AR Block

The autoreclosure function can be enabled or disabled by the
following binary input signals:
ExtBlkAR - also blocks during the reclosure cycle
Manual close - also blocks during the reclosure cycle
Inhibit Inp - also blocks during the reclosure cycle
12-226
CB Ready - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle

CB2 Ready - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle )
CO Ready - blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after
expiry of the time t time-out
CO Ready 2 - blocks at the end of the reclosure cycle after
expiry of the time t time-out )
Mast.noSucc - blocks the follower CB after an unsuccessful
reclosure attempt by the master
CondBlkAR - blocks excepting during the reclosure cycle
Should a CondBlkAR signal occur during a reclosure cycle (i.e.
the AR in prog. signal is active), it only becomes effective from
the end of the current reclosure cycle and providing it is still
active.
A reclosure cycle remains blocked for the duration of the set
blocking time t AR Block after the last binary input has been en-
abled. Blocking also takes place during initialization of the
protection relay when its auxiliary supply is switched on or the
parameter settings are being loaded.
12.14.6.6. External binary inputs
Starting and tripping signals from the protection function:

Start (Start 2, Start 3), Trip CB and Trip CB 3P
(Trip CB2, Trip CB3, Trip CB2 3P, Trip CB3 3P)
In order to control the autoreclosure function, it is necessary to
configure the three input signals Trip CB (general trip), Trip CB
3P (three-phase trip) and Start. The normal procedure to
achieve this is to select the distance protection signals via the
sub-menu OUTPUT FROM FUNCTION. Since the
autoreclosure function is completely independent, signals from
other functions may also be selected.
) 2 denotes the inputs for CB2 in a duplex scheme.
12-227
Circuit-breaker ready signals: CB ready and CO Ready

(CB2 ready and CO Ready 2)
The inputs for the parameters CO Ready and CB ready (or
CO Ready 2 and CB2 ready in a duplex scheme) must be con-
nected to the circuit-breakers in order to signal that they are
ready to perform a complete reclosure cycle. In cases where one
of the inputs is not used, it must be set to TRUE.
An active CB ready signal informs the autoreclosure function
that reclosure is permissible (i.e. sufficient energy is available for
a full open/close/open cycle).
Once a reclosure cycle has started, this signal is ignored (be-
cause the pressure varies during a reclosure cycle of an air-blast
breaker).
Resetting of this signal is internally delayed by 100 ms.
The CO Ready signal (close-open cycle can be carried out) is
only effective during a reclosure cycle, i.e. during the dead time.
Should there be insufficient energy to open the circuit-breaker
again following closure, the close signal is disabled and a Def.
Trip (definitive trip) is generated.
This input is only used in conjunction with circuit-breakers, which
provide the corresponding information (C-O query), e.g. spring-
charged and air-blast circuit-breakers with two switching energy
levels.
Circuit-breaker open CB open (CB2 open)

It is also necessary to include the initial status of the circuit-
breakers to prevent one from receiving a close signal, which was
already open before the fault occurred.
The binary input CB open (and CB2 open in a duplex scheme)
is thus provided to determine the initial status of a circuit-
breaker.
The pick-up of these signals is delayed by 100 ms to prevent any
unwanted blocking of fast circuit-breakers.
A circuit-breaker which was already open before the Start signal
was received (CB open at logical 1) is not closed by the
Where a circuit-breaker does not provide the necessary infor-
mation (CB open signal), the input must be permanently set to
off (F or False). Providing the scheme is also not a duplex
scheme (i.e. only one CB), the binary input CB2 open must also
be permanently set to on (T or True).
12-228
Accordingly, these are the default settings for CB open and

CB2 open.
The AR function can then operate with a single circuit-breaker
without a CB open signal or superfluous close signal.
De-energized line Dead Line (Dead Line 2) with checking

of synchronism synchroChck (synchroChck2)
Before the Close CB (or Close CB2) instruction can be issued,
either the Dead line or the synchroChck I/P (or Dead line 2 or
synchroChck2 in a duplex scheme) must be at logical 1.
Logic: [(synchroChck AND CO ready) OR Dead Line OR
ExtSCBypas']
Logic: [(synchroChck2 AND CO ready 2) OR Dead Line 2 OR
ExtSCBypas']
External blocking ExtBlkAR and CondBlkAR'
The reclosure function is always blocked by an active ExtBlkAR
input.
An active CondBlkAR input will only block the function,
providing a reclosure cycle is not running (i.e. the AR in prog.
signal is at logical 0).
The Cond.Blk AR signal is needed to prevent a reclosure cycle,
when no reclosure is wanted for a first trip that occurs during t
Oper. This is the case, for example, for trips by the switch-onto-
fault (SOTF) protection or by a directional ground fault protection
via PLC.
To prevent the SOFT from initiating autoreclosure, the distance
protection SOFT start signal must be connected to the
CondBlkAR input.
Manual close
The reclosure function is immediately blocked (for the blocking
time t AR Block) by a Manual close signal. This signal is also
needed for the overreaching logic to switch the ZExtension sig-
nal to on.
External synchrocheck bypass signal ExtSCBypas

This input provides facility for bypassing the synchroChck and
CO Ready (or SynchroChck2 and CO Ready 2 for CB2) ena-
bling inputs.
It is only active for the first fast three-phase or single-phase
reclosure attempt.
12-229
External extension of the dead time Extend t1

A logical 1 at the Extend t1 input extends the dead times t Dead1
1P and t Dead1 3P by the setting t Dead1 Ext for the first
(fast) reclosure attempt. This could be necessary, for example, in
the event of a communication channel failure or in a redundant
scheme.
12.14.6.7. Close CB and signaling outputs

The most important autoreclosure output is the Close CB
command which must be assigned to a heavy-duty auxiliary
output relay. This and 14 other heavy-duty and signaling O/Ps
are provided.
This signal picks up when the closing command is issued and
resets at the end of the time t Close or earlier if there is a
tripping occurs upon reclosing.
Status of the autoreclosure function (AR Ready and AR

Blocked)
The signal AR Ready is generated when the autoreclosure
function is ready to perform a reclosure cycle and the signal AR
Blocked when it is blocked.
The AR Ready signal is active providing a reclosure cycle is not
blocked (no AR Blocked signal) and a dead time is not running.
The AR Ready signal is active during a reclose command for
purposes of enabling the synchrocheck function (see Fig. 12.73
in Section Synchrocheck).
Autoreclosure cycle in progress

There are six signals which show that a reclosure cycle is run-
ning and what stage has been reached:
AR in prog. reclosure cycle in progress
First AR 1P first single-phase reclosure attempt
First AR 3P first three-phase reclosure attempt
Second AR second reclosure attempt
Third AR third reclosure attempt
Fourth AR fourth reclosure attempt
The signal AR in prog picks up at the start of the dead time and
is reset by the falling edge of the last reclose command.
Circuit-breaker closing signals Close CB and Close CB2'

The CB closing command is normally assigned to a heavy-duty
auxiliary output relay by correspondingly configuring the
12-230
parameter Close CB (also Close CB2 in a duplex scheme). It

is also possible to assign the same signal to a signaling output
under the same parameter name.
A trip subsequent to a close command during the time t Close
+300 ms switches the dead time step (second, third and fourth
AR) or initiates a lock-out trip (depending on the setting). A close
command is reset immediately after a trip.
Definitive trip Def. Trip

The Def. Trip signal indicates that the circuit-breaker will remain
tripped and no further reclosure attempts will be made. The fol-
lowing conditions can cause a definitive trip:
All reclosure attempts were unsuccessful.
A starting or tripping signal was generated after the dis-
crimination time and before dead time.
Tripping takes place while a reclosure cycle is blocked (either
via the blocking input or by the reclaim time).
The synchroChck (or Dead line) and/or CO Ready inputs
were not enabled during t Timeout due to lack of syn-
chronism.
The CB open signal is still active 300 ms after the close signal
has reset (i.e. the CB has not responded to the close signal).
The trip signal that followed the start signal occurred after the
fault duration time t Oper.
Tripping occurred for a phase fault and the mode selected for
the first reclosure cycle is 1P-1P or 1P-3P.
Perform three-phase trip Trip 3-Pol

The Trip 3-Pol output instructs the line protection to trip all three
phases.
The signal can be externally or internally connected.
This signal is generated automatically, if reclosure is blocked,
CB Ready is inactive, the CB is open, the single-phase
discrimination time t1P Discrim has elapsed or the signal First
AR 3P is active.
Zone extension ZExtension

The setting of the autoreclosure parameter ZE Prefault deter-
mines the pre-fault reach of the distance protection when the
autoreclosure function is inactive (before the first fault), i.e. set-
ting ZE Prefault to on activates the output signal ZExtension
which then switches the distance function to overreach.
12-231
The parameters ZE 1. AR reach to ZE 4. AR reach provide fa-

cility for individually switching the reach for each reclosure at-
tempt. Setting one of these parameters to on means that the
ZExtension output is at logical 1 and the distance relay is
switched to overreach either before fault occurrence or for the
following reclosure attempt, otherwise the distance relay is set to
underreach.
With the exception of its first change of state when providing
ZEPrefault is set to ON it resets together with the signal Trip
CB or Trip CB 3P, this signal picks up and resets together with
the Close CB signal.
The distance relay is switched to overreaching for a Manual
close.
It is switched to underreaching when the autoreclosure function
is blocked.
NOTE also that the ZExtension signal is connected to the
binary input ZEMode AR of the zone extension logic in the
distance protection function.
12-232
12.14.7. Timing diagrams

The time relationship between the various signals during opera-
tion of the autoreclosure function can be seen from the following
diagrams.
Successful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
300 ms
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t Inhibit.
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Fig. 12.78 Timing diagram for a single or double busbar

arrangement with 1 distance and 1 AR function.
Response for ground fault
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P-1P or 1P3P-1P3P,
'2..4. AR Mode' = 'off', ZE Prefault = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-233
Successful AR (evolving fault during t Discrim1P)

time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
First AR 3P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
300 ms
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t Inhibit.
Unsuccessful AR (evolving fault within t Dead1 1P,

but after t Discrim1P)
time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P

Response for an ground fault which evolves
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P, '2..4. AR Mode' = 'off',
ZE Prefault = on, ZE 1. AR = off.
12-234
Successful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 3P
Second AR
300 ms
Third AR
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3 t Inhibit.
Unsuccessful AR
time < t Oper.
Trip CB 3P
Trip CB
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 3P
Second AR
Third AR
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 3P t Dead2 t Dead3

Response for phase faults.
Settings:
1. AR Mode = 1P3P-1P3P,
2..4. AR Mode = 3AR, ZE Prefault = on,
ZE 1. AR = off, ZE 2. AR = on and ZE 3. AR = off.
12-235
Main protection 1, AR ready

time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t close
Close CB
ZExtension
300 ms
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t inhibit.
Main protection 2, AR blocked (because main protection 1 ready)
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Fig. 12.81 Timing diagram for scheme with main protections

1 and 2 (REB500sys), both equipped with an
autoreclosure function. Main protection 1 is in
operation. Response for successful autoreclosure.
Settings:
2..4. AR Mode = off, Zextension = on,
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-236
Main protection 1, AR not ready
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Main protection 2, AR active (because main protection1 not ready)

time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
t Close
Close CB
ZExtension
300 ms
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P t inhibit.

autoreclosure function Main protection 1 not in
operation. Response for successful autoreclosure.
Settings:
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-237
Main protection 1, AR ready

time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P
Main protection 2, AR blocked (because main protection 1 ready)
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked

autoreclosure function Main protection 1 in
operation. Response for unsuccessful
autoreclosure.
Settings:
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-238
Main protection 1 not ready
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
Main protection 2, AR active (because main protection 1 not ready)

time < t Oper.
Trip CB
Trip CB 3P
Start
Def. Trip
Close CB
ZExtension
First AR 1P
t Discrim. 1P
Trip 3-Pol
AR in Prog.
AR Ready
AR Blocked
t Dead1 1P

autoreclosure function Main protection 1 not in
operation. Response for unsuccessful
autoreclosure.
Settings:
ZE 1. AR = off.
12-239
12.14.8. Checking the dead times

When commissioning the autoreclosure function, it is not suffi-
cient to check the combined operation of protection function,
autoreclosure function and circuit-breaker, the resulting dead
times must also be determined.
Since the dead time settings do not correspond to the effective
total dead times, especially in a scheme with two circuit-breakers
(see Fig. 12.85), the period during which the circuit-breaker is
actually open must be measured. This entails adjusting the dead
time until the measured breaker time minus arcing and pre-
ignition times and the inevitable CB tolerances result in an
adequate composite dead time.
Providing the circuit-breakers at both ends of the line are of the
same type and thus permit the same tolerances to be assumed
at both ends, the same dead time tp can be set in the two
terminal stations. Where this is not the case, the tripping and
closing times of the two circuit-breakers must also be measured
in addition to the dead times. The dead times set for the two
autoreclosure functions must then ensure that a sufficiently long
overlapping dead time exists to enable the circuit-breakers to
deionize.
12-240
A B
tS
tW
tP
0 1
C
6
2
A 5
3
O 4
t1 t2
t3 t4 t5
t6
t7
0 1
C
2
6
B 5
3
4
O
(t)
A: circuit-breaker 1 B: circuit-breaker 2
C: "closed" position O: "open" position
0: start 1: trip signal
2: contacts part 3: current interrupted
4: close signal 5: current flows again
6: contacts make
t1: tripping time t2: reclosing time t3: arc extinction time
t4: dead time t5: pre-ignition time t6: duration of interruption
t7: resulting dead time
tp: dead time ts: inhibit time tw: fault duration
Fig. 12.85 Resulting composite dead time

(Source: Guidelines for autoreclosure in electrical
power systems published by the German
Association of Power Utilities VDEW)
12-241
12.15. Logic/Trip Logic (Logic)
Logical combination of binary input signals or of output signals
from the protection functions, e.g. for
specific signals required by the application
supplementary protection functions.
12.15.2. Features
Binary input channels assignable to
binary input signals
protection function output signals
All input channels can be inverted
Following logic functions available for selection:
OR gate with 4 inputs
AND gate with 4 inputs
R/S flip-flop with 2 inputs for setting and 2 inputs for reset-
ting:
The output is 0, if at least one of the reset inputs is
1.
The output is 1, if at least one of the set inputs is 1
AND none of the reset inputs is 1.
The output status is sustained when all the inputs are
at 0.
Every logic has an additional blocking input, which when acti-
vated switches the output to 0.

None

4 logic inputs
Blocking

Signal (Logic)
Tripping (Trip Logic)
None
12-242
12.15.4. Logic function settings

Logic Mode OR (Select)
BinOutput SignalAddr
BinInp1 (R1) BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp2 (R2) BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp3 (S1) BinaryAddr Always off
BinInp4 (S2) BinaryAddr Always off
12-243

Text Explanation
Logic Mode Definition of the logic function to be performed by the 4 bi-
nary inputs.
Possible settings:
OR: OR gate with all 4 binary inputs
AND: AND gate with all 4 binary inputs
R/S flip-flop: Flip-flop with 2 set inputs (S1 and S2) and 2
reset inputs (R1 and R2). The output is set or
reset when at least one of the corresponding
inputs is at logical 1 (OR gate).
Reset inputs take priority over the set inputs.
BinOutput Output for signaling a trip (logic) resp. tripping (trip logic)
BlockInp Input for blocking the function
F: - not used
The output is always at logical 0 when the blocking input
is at logical 1.
The blocking input acts as a reset input for the flip-flop
function.
BinInp (R1) Binary inputs 1 to 4 (AND or OR function)
BinInp2 (R2) Reset inputs 1 and 2 and set inputs 1 and 2 (RS flip-flop)
BinInp3 (S1) F: - not used (OR logic or RS flip-flop in logic mode)
BinInp4 (S2) T: - not used (AND logic in logic mode)
12-244
12.16. Delay / integrator (DELAY)
General purpose timer for
integration of pulsating binary signals to obtain a continuous
signal, e.g. output of the loss-of-excitation function (out-of-
step protection) or reverse power protection
extension of short I/P signals (pulse prolongation)
simple time delay.
12.16.2. Features
Input channel and blocking input assignable to
binary input signals
protection function output signals
Input channel and blocking input can be inverted.
Adjustable reset time
2 types of time delay
Integration: Only the time during which the input signal is
at logical 1 counts at the end of the time delay.
No integration: The total time from the instant the timer
starts until it is either reset or expires counts.

None

Input signal
Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Time from the instant the timer starts
12-245
12.16.4. Delay/integrator function settings

Trip-Delay s 01.00 00.00 300.00 0.01
Reset-Delay s 00.01 00.00 300.00 0.01
Integration 0/1 0 0 1 1
BinaryInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr

Text Explanation
ParSet 4..1 Parameter for determining in which set of parameters a par-
Trip-Delay Time between start signal at the input and the tripping
signal at the output.
Reset-Delay Time required for the timer to reset after the input signal
has disappeared.
Integration Determination of the response of the function in the
presence of a pulsating input signal:
0: The delay continues to run, providing the input signal
does not disappear for longer than the reset time.
1: The time during which the input is at logical 1 is inte-
grated, i.e. tripping does not take place until the sum of
logical 1 time equals the set delay time.
BinaryInp Timer input
BlockInp Input for blocking the function
F: - enabled
T: - disabled
12-246
12.16.6.1. Operation of the function without integration
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Impulse
prolongation
0 t 0 t
tA tA
(No (No
tripping) tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Impulse
prolongation
0 t 0 t
tA tA
(No
tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
HEST 935 019 FL
NOTE: Tripping only takes place, if a start also occurs within the time tR.
tA tripping time ("Trip-Delay")
tR reset time ("Reset-Delay")
Fig. 12.86 Operation of the delay function without integration
12-247
12.16.6.2. Operation of the function with integration
tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Setting
Setting
tint tint
Integration
0 t 0 t
(No (No
tripping) tripping)
Tripping
0 t 0 t
tR tR tR tR
Start
0 t 0 t
Setting
Setting
tint tint
Integration
0 t 0 t
Tripping
0 t 0 t
HEST 935 020 FL
tint integrated time for tripping

tR reset time ("Reset-Delay")
Setting "Trip-Delay"
Fig. 12.87 Operation of the delay function with integration
12-248
12.17. Peak value overcurrent protection (OCINST)
General current monitoring with instantaneous response
(over- and undercurrent)
Current monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is
required (over- and undercurrent).
12.17.2. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and
largely independent of frequency
Stores the peak value following pick-up
No suppression of DC component
No suppression of harmonics
Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode
Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
12.17.3.1. CT inputs:
Current
12.17.3.2. Binary inputs:

Blocking
12.17.3.3. Binary outputs:

Pick-up
Tripping
12.17.3.4. Measurements:
Current amplitude (only available if function trips)
12-249
12.17.4. Peak value current function settings - Current-Inst

Summary of parameters:

ParSet ..1 P1 (Select)
Delay s 0.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
I-Setting IN 4.0 0.1 20 0.1
f-min Hz 40 2 50 1
NrOfPhases 1 Ph (Select)
CurrentInp CT-Addr 0
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr

Text Explanation
I-Setting Pick-up current setting.
Setting restrictions:
> 1,6 IN (when supplied from metering cores)
< 0,2 IN (when supplied from protection cores)
f-min Defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is
required.
Setting restriction:
< 40 Hz (when supplied from metering cores)
MaxMin Defines operation as overcurrent or undercurrent.
Settings:
MAX: overcurrent
MIN: undercurrent
NrOfPhases Defines whether single or three-phase measurement.
All current inputs may be selected.
BlockInp Binary address used as blocking input.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
Trip Output for signaling tripping
Start Output for signaling pick-up.
12-250
Settings:
Current pick-up I-Setting
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency f-min
Over- or undercurrent MaxMin
The instantaneous overcurrent function is a high-speed

protection which operates in a wide frequency range. It is
intended primarily for two applications.
A protection measuring peak value is necessary for protecting
units, for which the influence of DC component and harmonics
may not be neglected. This is especially the case where
rectifiers with semiconductors are involved.
Due to very small frequency sensitivity and with the peak value
acquisition the protection can covers a large frequency range.
The measuring principle of the function is relatively insensitive to
frequency and operates in a range extending from 4 to 120 % of
rated frequency. It is therefore able to protect units with
synchronous starting equipment during the starting sequence
before reaching system frequency (e.g. gas turbine sets with
solid-state starters).
The function detects when the instantaneous value of the input
current exceeds the peak value corresponding to the setting. For
example, for a setting of 10 IN, it will pick up when the input
current exceeds 10 2 IN = 14.14 IN (see Fig. 12.88). A fault
current of 6 1.8 2 IN = 15.27 IN could reach this level as a
consequence of a DC component.
The minimum frequency must be entered for every application,
because it determines the reset time. A low minimum frequency
means a long reset delay and since a good protection is
expected to have a quick response, the reset time should be as
short as possible, i.e. the minimum frequency setting should not
be lower than absolutely necessary.
12-251
i 15
IN 14.14
10
Setting current
10 I N
0 t
Output signal
0 t
HEST 905 028 C
Fig. 12.88 Operation of the peak value overcurrent function
Typical settings:
Peak value phase fault protection
I-Setting according to application
Delay 0.01 s
f-min 40 Hz
12-252
12.18. Peak value overvoltage protection (OVINST)
Instantaneous voltage monitoring (over- and undervoltage)
Voltage monitoring where insensitivity to frequency is
required (over- and undervoltage).
12.18.2. Features
Processes instantaneous values and is therefore fast and
largely independent of frequency
Stores the peak value following pick-up
No suppression of DC component
No suppression of harmonics
Maximum value detection in the three-phase mode
Adjustable lower frequency limit fmin
12.18.3.1. VT inputs
Voltage

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Voltage amplitude (only available if function trips)
12-253
12.18.4. Peak value voltage function settings

Delay s 0.01 0.00 60.00 0.01
V-setting UN 1.40 0.01 2.00 0.01
f-min Hz 40 25 50 1
Max / Min Max (Select)
NrOfPhases 1 Ph (Select) 2
VoltageInp VT-Addr 0
TRIP SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr

Text Explanation
V-setting Pick-up voltage setting.
f-min Defines the minimum frequency for which measurement is
required.
MaxMin Defines operation as overvoltage or undervoltage.
Settings:
MAX: overvoltage
MIN: undervoltage
NrOfPhases Defines the number of phases monitored.
VoltageInp Defines the VT input channel.
All voltage inputs may be selected.
In the case of a three-phase measurement, the first
channel (R phase) of the group of three must be selected.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
Trip Output for signaling tripping
12-254
Settings:
Voltage pick-up V-setting
Delay Delay
Minimum frequency f-min
Over- or undervoltage Max / Min
The instantaneous overvoltage function is a high-speed
protection which operates in a wide frequency range. It is
intended for the following applications:
Overvoltage protection which is largely uninfluenced by
frequency fluctuations especially in the range f > fN.
At frequencies f < fN the limited capability of the input VTs
must be taken into consideration.
High-speed overvoltage protection because the
instantaneous voltage is detected. Since neither DC nor
harmonic components are suppressed, there is no delay due
to digital filtering.
Compared with the standard voltage protection function, the
instantaneous function has a slightly higher pick-up value
tolerance and it should therefore only be used for the
applications recommended above.
Since the measuring principle is the same as for the overcurrent
protection with peak value detection, please refer to that Section
for its description and the minimum frequency f-min data.
Overvoltage setting (V-setting)

Either a single-phase VT or three delta-connected VTs:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up setting of 130 V at
the VT input(s).
Three Y-connected VTs:
A setting of 1.3 UN corresponds to a pick-up setting of 130 V/ 3
at the VT inputs (phase-to-neutral).
Typical settings:
V-setting according to application
Delay according to application
f-min 40 Hz
12-255
12.19. Overtemperature protection (Overtemp.)
Overtemperature protection with accurate thermal image of
the protected unit.
12.19.2. Features
1st order thermal model
Alarm and tripping stages
Adjustable initial temperature
DC component filter
Harmonic filter
Single or three-phase current measurement
Maximum value detection for three-phase measurement
Temperature rise calculated 40 times for each thermal time
constant setting

Current

Blocking

Alarm
Tripping
Temperature rise
Power dissipation
Current
12-256
12.19.4. Overtemperature protection settings
Text Units Default Min. Max. Step

Theta-Begin % 100 000 100 001
Theta-Warn % 105 050 200 001
Theta-Trip % 110 050 200 001
IB-Setting IN 1.00 0.50 2.50 0.01
TimeConstant min 5.0 1.0 500.0 0.1
NrOfPhases 1 Ph (Select)
CurrentInp CT/VT-Addr Always off
BlockInp BinaryAddr F
Warning SignalAddr
Trip SignalAddr

Text Explanation
Theta-Begin Initial temperature rise. This temperature rise is set every
time the function is initiated, e.g. when the protection is
switched on or settings are changed.
Theta-Warn Temperature rise at which alarm is given.
Theta- Trip Temperature rise at which tripping takes place.
NrOfPhases No. of phase currents measured.
CurrentInp Defines CT input channel.
All the current channels are available for selection.
IB-Setting Reference current: Normal operating current of the
protected unit referred to the rated current of the protection.
BlockInp I/P for blocking the function
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
xx: - all binary I/Ps (or O/Ps of protection functions)
Warning Alarm signal
TimeConstant Thermal time constant for calculating the temperature rise.
Settings < 2 minutes are not permitted.
12-257
Settings:
Initial temperature rise Theta-Begin
Temperature rise for alarm Theta-Warn
Temperature rise for tripping Theta-Trip
No. of phase currents measured NrOfPhases
Reference current IB-Setting
Thermal time constant TimeConstant
The overtemperature function guards against inadmissible
temperature rise caused by overcurrents. The temperature rise
is modeled on the basis of the influence of the current flowing
through the protected unit on a thermal image of the protected
unit. In contrast to the overload protection, this function can
protect units of any power rating and thermal capacity. It
monitors the temperature rise and not the absolute temperature.
It takes account therefore neither of the ambient temperature nor
the effectiveness of a cooling system.
The protection operates with a thermal image of the temperature
rise. A current change causes the temperature of the protected
unit to rise from an initial value to a final value according to one
or several exponential functions. The various influences on the
temperature rise are the thermal response of, for example in the
case of a power transformer, the cooling water, the oil, the
windings etc. One exponential function such as that of the
transformer oil is always more dominant than the others. The
thermal image used in the protection for modeling the transient
temperature rise operates according to an exponential function.
The excursion of the temperature rise modeled by the protection
is determined by the following:
the final steady-state temperature corresponding to the
current
the increased temperature rise due to the transfer functions
The protection assumes that at the rated current IGN of the
protected unit, the temperature rise represents 100 %.
Neglecting any compensation of the A/D channel or the base
current IB, the protection measures a current IR determined by
the rated current of the CTs:
IN2
IR = IGN
IN1
12-258
where
IGN : rated current of the protected unit
IN1, IN2 : rated primary and secondary CT currents.
The current referred to the rated current IN of the protection is:
IR IGN IN2
IR = =
IN IN IN1
The steady-state temperature rise becomes:

2
I I
W = GN N2 100 %
IN IN1
At a constant current, the tripping time is:

2

[%] 100 I
0 I
t = ln B
2
I
[%] 100
IB
where
0 : initial temperature rise
: pick-up temperature rise
: thermal time constant
The variables in the submenu 'DISPLAY OPERATING VALUES'
are the calculated temperature rise, the power dissipation and
the current. The first two are mean values over the period of
calculation (= / 40).
The values shown in the event list is the power dissipation at the
instant of tripping.
Example:
Rated current of the protected unit IGN = 8000 A
CT ratings IN1 = 10000 A
IN2 = 5 A
Rated relay current IN = 5 A
12-259
The temperature rise measured by the protection at a rated

current of IGN is:
2
8000 5
W = 100% = 64 %
5 10000
The settings for overtemperatures of 5 % and 10 % respectively

are:
Theta-Warn = 67 %
Theta-Trip = 70 %
Normally the protection is configured such that the initial
temperature rise is 100 % ('Theta-Begin' = 100 %).
With IB adjusted, the settings become:
IB IGN IN2 8000 5
Base current: = = = 0 .8
IN IN IN1 5 10000
The settings for alarm and tripping are then:

Theta-Warn = 105 %
Theta-Trip = 110 %
Transformers have two distinct exponential functions, one for the
oil and one for the winding. The corresponding mean values are:
Oil : oil = 50 K oil =120 min
Winding : W oil = 10 K W = 10 min
The total temperature rise of the winding is thus W = 60 K
Since however the model operates with just a single exponential
function, its temperature rise has to follow the best possible
equivalent exponential function as shown in Fig. 12.89. The
steady-state temperature rise of this equivalent function is
identical to the total temperature rise of the winding, i.e. W =
60 K in the example above. Its time constant, however, is
typically 60 to 80% of the temperature rise of the oil (see Fig.
12.90).
12-260
1,5
nw = 100C nw = 60C
1,0
i = in Oil = 90C Oil = 50C
w = 10 min tOil = 120 min
0 t
w ( t = )
[C] 160
l ( t = ) w
140
Oil
120
nw
100
Oil Oil
80
60
40
w Oil
20
w Oil
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 t [min]
HEST 905 035 C
Fig. 12.89 Temperature rise of a transformer winding
12-261

=126.4C
140
Winding temperature
Thermal image temperature
120
130
[C] [%]
120
110
Overload i = 1.2
Temperature rise at rated nw n oil = 10C w = 10 min
110 current
n oil = 50C oil = 120 min
Thermal time constant setting = 90 min
100 100
0 100 200 300 400 500
t [min]
HEST 905 036 C
Fig. 12.90 Actual temperature rise of the winding compared

to the temperature rise of the thermal image
Typical settings:
IB-Setting to be calculated
Theta-Begin 100 %
Theta-Warn 105 %
Theta-Trip 110 %
12-262
12.20. Transformer differential protection function (DIFTRA)
Differential protection of two and three-winding power
transformers generator/transformer units.
12.20.2. Features
Non-linear, current-dependent operating characteristic
(see Fig. 12.92)
High stability during through-faults and in the presence of CT
saturation
Short tripping times
Three-phase measurement
Inrush current restraint
using the second harmonic
detection of the highest phase current
detection of the load current to determine whether the
transformer is energized or not
Compensation of phase group
Compensation of CT ratio
Scheme for three-winding transformers
phase-by-phase comparison of the highest winding
current with the sum of the currents of the other two
windings
DC current component filter
harmonic filter

Current (2 or 3 sets of 3 inputs)

Blocking

Tripping
L1 phase trip
L2 phase trip
L3 phase trip
12-263
L1 phase summation current
L1 phase restraining current
12.20.4. Transformer differential protection settings

g IN 0.2 0.1 0.5 0.1
v 0.50 0.25 0.50 0.25
b IN 1.50 1.25 5.00 0.25
g-High IN 2.00 0.50 2.50 0.25
I-Inst IN 10 3 15 1
InrushRatio % 10 6 20 1
InrushTime s 5 0 90 1
a1 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s1 Y (Select)
CurrentInp1 CT/VT-Addr 0
a2 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s2 y0 (Select)
a3 1.00 0.05 2.20 0.01
s3 y0 (Select)
InrushInp BinaryAddr Always off
HighSetInp BinaryAddr Always off
Trip SignalAddr
Trip-R SignalAddr
Trip-S SignalAddr
Trip-T SignalAddr
Inrush SignalAddr
Stabilizing SignalAddr
12-264
12.20.5. Explanation of Parameters

Text Explanation
g Defines the basic setting g of the operating characteristic.
v Defines the pick-up ratio v of the operating characteristic.
b defines the value b of the operating characteristic.
This should be set to approx. 1.5 times rated current.
g-High High-set Basic setting which replaces the normal basic
setting when activated by the HighSetInp input.
It is used to prevent false tripping due, for example, to
excessive flux (overfluxing).
I-Inst Differential current, above which tripping takes place
regardless of whether the protected unit has just been
energized or not.
This enables the time required to trip to be shortened for
high internal fault currents.
InrushRatio Ratio of 2nd harmonic current content to fundamental
current above which an inrush condition is detected.
InrushTime Time during which the inrush detection function is active
following initial energisation or an external fault.
a1 Amplitude compensation factor for winding 1.
s1 Connection of winding 1 (primary)
Settings provided:
Y: star-connected
D: delta-connected
CurrentInp1 Defines the CT input channel for winding 1.
s2 Vector group for winding 2.
Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with
Designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag)
Phase-angle adjustment of the winding 2 voltage in relation
to the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30.
12-265
Text Explanation
s3 Vector group for winding 3.
Settings provided: All usual groups of connection with
Designation of the circuit (y = star, d = delta, z = zigzag)
Phase-angle adjustment of the winding 3 voltage in relation
to the winding 1 voltage in multiples of 30.
The protection operates in a two-winding mode, if no third
input is selected.
F: - not blocked
T: - blocked
InrushInp Activates the inrush restraint.
This enables, for example, the inrush current resulting from
energizing a parallel transformer to be detected and
compensated.
F: - not used
HighSetInp Determines whether the normal or high-set Basic setting g
is used.
F: - not used
Trip Output for the signaling tripping
Trip-L1 Output for signaling tripping by L1 phase.
Inrush Output for signaling inrush current.
Stabilizing Output for signaling IH > b during through-faults.
12-266
I
IN
3
Operation for
I'1
<b
Operation IN
2 or
I'2
<b
IN
1
v Restraint
g
1 b 2 3 IH
IN
Protected I2
I1 unit
I3 HEST 965 007 C
I = I1 + I2 + I3 Operating
(differential) current
I' I' cos for cos 0

IH = 1 2 Restraint current
0 for cos < 0
whereI'1 = greatest of I1 ,I 2 ,I 3
I' 2 = I1 + I 2 + I 3 I'1
= (I'1; I' 2 )
Fig. 12.91 Operating characteristic: Diff-Transf
12-267

Basic setting g
Pick-up ratio v
Operating characteristic switching point b
Increased basic setting g-High
Pick-up differential current
(uninfluenced by inrush detection) I-Inst
Pick-up ratio of the inrush detector InrushRatio
Inrush detection time InrushTime
Amplitude compensation factors a1, a2, a3
Connection of winding 1 s1
Vector groups of windings 2 and 3 s2, s3
The purpose of the transformer differential protection is to detect
phase faults in the protected zone. It may also detect earth faults
and interturn faults. The protection is sensitive, fast and
absolutely discriminative.
Basic setting g
The basic setting 'g' defines the pick-up setting of the differential
protection for internal faults.
The lowest possible value should be chosen for 'g' (high
sensitivity) to enable it to detect transformer earth faults and
internal faults in addition to phase faults.
The setting of 'g' must not be too low, however, to avoid the
danger of false tripping due to:
CT errors
the maximum off-load transformer current at the maximum
short-time system voltage
tap-changer range
The off-load current (magnetizing current) of a modern power
transformer is very low, usually between 0.3 and 0.5 % of rated
current at rated voltage. During short-time voltage peaks, e.g.
following load shedding, the off-load current can reach as much
as 10 % or more.
The tap-changer voltage range is usually between 5 % and
10 %, but ranges of 20 % and more occur. Its influence has to
be taken into account regardless of whether the tap-changer is
manually operated or controlled by a voltage regulator.
12-268
All three of these influences cause a differential current, which

flows during normal system conditions. The setting for 'g' must
be chosen above the level of this differential current. A typical
setting is g = 0.3 IN (i.e. 30 % IN).
Pick-up ratio v
The pick-up ratio 'v' is decisive for the stability of the protection
during external phase and earth faults, i.e. in the presence of
high through-fault currents.
The value of 'v' defines the ratio of the operating current to
restraint current. The setting should be such that when operating
under load conditions, weak faults causing only a low differential
current can still be detected, but at the same time there is no risk
of false tripping during through-faults. A typical setting is v = 0.5.
Restraint current b
The restraint current b defines the point at which the
characteristic is switched.
The sloped section of the characteristic ensures that the relay
remains stable during through-faults with CT saturation.
The ability to switch between two different slopes enables the
characteristic to adapt to different conditions.
The recommended setting for 'b' is 1.5. This provides high
stability during high through-fault currents and sufficient
sensitivity to detect fault currents in the region of the operating
current.
Factors a2 and a3
The full setting range for the factors a2 and a3 for compensating
current amplitude only applies, if the reference value for the CT
input channels is set to 1.000. At all other settings, the
permissible upper limit reduces in proportion to the ratio of the
CT input channel reference values (transformer winding
1/winding 2, respectively winding 3/winding 1).
12-269
The restraint current in the case of a three-winding power
transformer is derived from the currents of two windings and not
three. In the interest of the best possible through-fault stability,
the two largest currents of the three windings are used for this
purpose.
The restrain current is either defined by the equation
IH = I1 I2 cos for -90 < < 90
or is zero
IH = 0 for 90 < < 270
The angle
= (I1, I2 )
The following vector diagram of the current on primary and

secondary sides and of the differential current measured for a
transformer on load was assumed.
I2 I1

I2
I HEST 905 003a C
The following vector diagrams then result for a through-fault

I2 I1
= 0
I I2
HEST 905 003b C
and an internal fault
I2 I1 I2
= 180
HEST 905003c C
12-270
According to the equation for the restrain current, IH becomes:

for through-faults ( = 0): IH = I1 x I2
and for internal faults
a) fed from on side (I2 = 0) : IH = 0
b) fed from both sides ( = 180) : IH = 0
High through-fault currents can cause CT saturation and for this
reason, the gradient of the characteristic is switched to infinity for
IH/IN > b.
When measuring the operating characteristic, it should be noted
that the gradient of the characteristic is only switched to infinity, if
apart from IH, I1 and I2 are also higher than b.
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 0,5 1 1,5 IN
HEST 905 003d C
Fig. 12.92 Operating characteristic of the transformer differ-

ential protection for high through-fault currents
This characteristic, however, would scarcely be able to detect

faults in the protected zone at through currents as low as the
load current. Therefore if one of the windings is conducting a
current which is less than the setting of 'b', i.e.
I1 I
or 2 < b
IN IN
the characteristic is switched back to the gradient according to

'v'.
12-271
I
IN
0,75
0,5
0,25
g b
IH
0 1 2 IN
HEST 905 003e C
Fig. 12.93 Operating characteristic of the transformer differ-

ential protection for low through-fault currents
This characteristic provides higher sensitivity for the detection of

faults in the protection zone.
Example:
Internal fault and rated current flowing through the transformer:
I1 I
= 4 2 =1 = 0
IN IN
-I 2
I1
I I2 HEST 905 003f C
I = I1 + I2 = 4 IN IN = 3 IN
IH = I1 I2 cos = 4 IN 1IN 1 = 2 IN
Internal faults will thus be reliably detected when a through-cur-

rent is flowing even at the highest setting for 'v'.
Increased basic setting g-High

The increased basic setting g-High has been provided as a
means of preventing false tripping under particular operating
conditions. It is activated by an external signal.
12-272
Situations occur during normal system operation which cause a

higher differential current, e.g.
increased magnetizing current as a consequence of a higher
system voltage (switching operations, following load
shedding, generator regulator faults etc.)
large variation of current ratio (tap-changer at the end of its
range)
Providing special conditions of this kind are detected by a
voltage relay or a saturation relay, the corresponding signal can
be used to switch the differential function from 'g' to 'g-High'. The
recommended setting is g-High = 0.75 IN.
The reset ratio following a trip remains unchanged at 0.8 g.
Differential current I-Inst

The differential current setting I-Inst. facilitates fast tripping of
high internal fault currents (inhibits the detection of an inrush
current).
The setting must be higher than any normal inrush current to be
expected.
A typical value for power transformers of low to medium power is
I-Inst = 12 IN.
Pick-up ratio for detecting inrush

The setting of this ratio determines the sensitivity of the function
for detecting inrush.
Generally the ratio of 2nd harmonic to fundamental is greater
than 15 %. Allowing a margin to ensure that an inrush condition
is detected, a setting of 10 % is recommended.
Duration of active inrush detection

The setting for how long the inrush detection function should be
active depends on how long the danger of false tripping due to
an inrush current, which only flows through one winding, exists.
A typical setting is 5 s.
12-273
Amplitude compensation factors a1, a2, a3

Factors a1, a2 and a3 facilitate compensating differences
between the rated currents of the protected unit and the CTs.
The 'a' factors are defined by the ratio of the CT rated current to
the reference current.
In the case of a two-winding transformer, both windings have the
same rated power and the rated current of the transformer is
taken as the reference current. Providing the factor 'a' is
correctly set, all the settings of g, v, b, g-High and I-Inst. are
referred to the rated current of the transformer and not to the
rated primary current of the CT
250/5 A
1
110 kV 131 A
25 MVA
20 kV 722 A
2
1000/5 A
HEST 905 004a C
ICT1 250
IB1 = ITN1 = 131 A a1 = = = 1.91
ITN1 131
ICT 2 1000
IB2 = ITN2 = 722 A a1 = = = 1.38
ITN2 722
The reference current is only chosen to be different from the

transformer rated current, if this should be necessary because of
the setting range of factors a1 and a2.
Differences between the rated currents of the CTs and a two-
winding transformer may also be compensated by adjusting the
reference values of the A/D channels. In this case and assuming
the power ratings of the two windings to be the same, the factors
are set to a1 = a2 = 1. The reference values in the case of the
above example are:
ITN1 131 ITN2 722
= = 0.524 = = 0.722
ICT1 250 ICT 2 1000
12-274
A further difference lies in the fact that the 'a' factors only effect
the differential protection, whilst changing the reference values
of the A/D channels effects the currents for the entire protection
system (all functions and measured variables).
The windings of a three-winding transformer normally have
different power ratings and a reference power has to be chosen,
which is used for all three windings. All the settings of the
protection are then referred to the reference currents calculated
from the reference power.
250/5 A
25 MVA 110 kV 131 A
1 500/5 A
3
2
5 MVA 6,3 kV 458 A

600/5 A
20 MVA 20 kV 577 A HEST 905 004b C
Assuming the reference power SB to be 25 MVA, the reference

currents IB and the 'a' factors become:
SB 25 ICT1 250
IB1 = = 131 A a1 = = = 1.91
3 UTN1 3 110 IB1 131
SB 25 ICT 2 600
IB 2 = = 722 A a2 = = = 0.83
3 UTN2 3 20 IB 2 722
SB 25 ICT 3 500
IB3 = = 2291 A a3 = = = 0.22
3 UTN3 3 6.3 IB3 2291
12-275
The same results are obtained by applying the formulas with the
reference power SB:
UTN1 ICT1 3 110 250 3
a1 = = = 1.905
SB 25000
UTN2 ICT 2 3 20 600 3

a2 = = = 0.83
SB 25000
UTN3 ICT 3 3 6.3 500 3

a3 = = = 0.218
SB 25000
A further possibility of compensating different rated powers in the

case of three-winding transformers is to use
the reference values of the A/D channels to match the
protection to the different rated currents of CTs and
transformer
factors a1, a2 and a3 to compensate the different powers of
the windings.
The 'a' factors compensate the signals at the inputs of the
differential protection.
If the reference values of the A/D channels are changed, the
changes apply to the entire protection system (i.e. all functions
and measured variables).
This can be seen from the following example.
Reference values:
ITN1 131
Winding 1: Reference value = = = 0.524
ICT1 250
ITN2 577
ICT 2 600
ITN3 458
ICT 3 500
Factors a1, a2 and a3:

ITN1 131
a1 = = =1
IB1 131
ITN2 577
a2 = = = 0.799
IB 2 722
12-276
ITN3 458
a3 = = = 0.200
IB3 2291
CTs in the unit transformer feeder

When designing the overall differential protection for a
generator/transformer unit, there are the following alternative
methods of taking account of the CTs or lack of CTs in the unit
transformer feeder (Fig. 12.94).
Alternative No. 1: No CTs in the unit transformer feeder
This alternative is mainly needed for hydroelectric power plants,
which have a relatively low auxiliaries requirement. The
disadvantage is that the zone of protection is unlimited in the
direction of the unit transformer feeder with the possible hazard
of false tripping for a fault on the unit auxiliaries supply system.
This hazard can be avoided by correspondingly setting 'g'.
i F2
Unit S aux. sys.

transformer
i F
G S GN
i F
HEST 905 009 C
A fault on the unit auxiliaries supply system causes a current iF

(in p.u.) to flow to the generator star-point.
Saux.sys.
iF = iF2
SGN
Saux.sys.
Example: iF2 = 10; = 0.03
SGN
iF = 10 0.03 = 0.3
12-277
It follows from this that 'g' must be set higher than 0.3 to avoid
the possibility of a false trip.
Alternative No. 2: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder
on the generator side of the unit transformer (Fig. 12.94). These
CTs usually have the same ratio as the generator CTs although
the rating of the unit transformer is much less. The reason is the
high fault level on the generator side of the unit transformer and
the consequentially high thermal and dynamic stress on the CTs.
The reference value of the CT channel of the protection is
determined by the rated current of the generator and not of the
unit transformer.
Alternative No. 3: CTs installed in the unit transformer feeder
on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer (Fig. 12.94). In this
case, the CTs are specified according to the rated current of the
unit transformer.
Advantages:
clearly defined zone of protection
reduced performance required of the CTs, which are
therefore cheaper
Disadvantages:
Interposing CTs may be necessary
reduced sensitivity of the protection for faults in the protected
zone, but on the auxiliaries side of the unit transformer
12-278
800/5 A
3000/5 A
300 MVA
GT 220/18 kV
30 MVA
0.8/10 kA 10/1 A
UT 18/6 kV
1/3 kA
10000/5 A
I>
300 MVA
G 18 kV
10 kA
10000/5 A
HEST 905 054 C
Fig. 12.94 The overall differential protection of a genera-

tor/transformer unit
12-279
Group of connection of a three-phase transformer s1, s2, s3

Factor s1 defines the connection of the three phase windings 1.
Factors s2 and s3 define the group of connection of windings 2
and windings 3 respectively, i.e. they define firstly how the
windings are connected and secondly their phase-angle referred
to windings 1.
The following arrangement is an example for two generators with
a common step-up transformer:
d11 d11
2 3
HEST 905 004c C
The factors are correspondingly:

s1 = Y
s2 = d11
s3 = d11
Factors s2 and s3 are defined according to their phase shift in
relation to the HV side, i.e. to windings 1.
Note:
This setting for the vector group (s2 = d11, s3 = d11) assumes
that in relation to the protected unit, the star-point is symmetri-
cally formed and grounded on the secondary side of the main
CTs.
Should this not be possible for some reason (e.g. plant
requirements), the group of connection has to be compensated.
12-280
Compensation for group of connection

Phase-to-phase currents are measured in order to compare
primary and secondary currents without regard to the circuit of
the transformer. The combination of these currents internally in
the protection takes account, however, of their phase
relationships. The relationships between the current vectors for
different groups of connection can be seen from the following
illustrations.
For example, for a Yd5 connected transformer
I
L1
1L1
I Star-connected primary
I 2L1
L1
L2
1L2
I 2L2 Delta-connected secondary
I 1L3 L2
L3 I 2L3 Phase-angle between the currents of
L3
the same phase on both sides
I
1L1
5 x 30 = 150
150
IF
1L1 (compensat ed) = 1/ 3 ( I1L1 + I1L2 )

I I1FL2 (compensat ed) = I2L1
2L1 HEST 905 005 C

Yy0 Yy6
1 2 I1L1 I2L1 1 2 I
1L1
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I
2L1
Yd1 Yd5
1 2 I1L1 I 1 2 I 1L1
2L1
L1 L1 L1
L1
L2 L2 L2
L2
L3 L3 L3
L3
I
2L1
Yd7 Yd11
1 2 I 1L1 1 2 I1L1
I
L1 2L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1 HEST 905 006 C
12-281
Yz1 Yz5
1 2 I1L1 I 2L1 1 2 I1L1
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
Yz7 Yz11
1 2 I 1L1 1 2
L1 I
L1 I2L1 1L1
L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
1L1
Dy1 Dy5
I1L1 I 2L1 1 2
1 2
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
Dy7 Dy11
1 2 I 1 2
1L1
L1 I2L1 I1L1
L1 L1
L2 L1
L2 L2
L3 L2
L3 L3 L3
I 2L1
Dd0 Dd6
1 2 I I 1 2 I1L1
1L1 2L1
L1
L1 L1 L1
L2
L2 L2 L2
L3
L3 L3 L3
I2L1
HEST 905 007 C
12-282
Dz0 Dz2
1 2 I 1L1 I 2L1 1 2 I
1L1
L1 L1 L1 I2L1
L1
L2 L2 L2
L2
L3 L3 L3
L3
Dz4 Dz6
1 2 I 1 2 I1L1
L1 1L1
L1 L1
S L1
S L2
L3 L2
L3 L3
L3
I
2L1
I2L1
Dz8 Dz10
1 2 I1L1 1 2 I
1L1
L1 L1 L1 I2L1
L1
L2 L2 L2
L2
L3 L3 L3
L3
I 2L1
HEST 905 008 C
List of all the compensation matrices for L1 phase

(L2 and L3 phases cyclically rotated):
Compensation matrices Amplitude factor

(L1 phase)
A = ( 1 0 0) 1
B = (-1 0 0) 1
C = ( 1 -1 0) 1/ 3
D = (-1 1 0) 1/ 3
E = ( 1 0 -1) 1/ 3
F = (-1 0 1) 1/ 3
G = ( 2 -1 -1) 1/3
H = (-2 1 1) 1/3
J = (-1 2 -1) 1/3
K = ( 1 -2 1) 1/3
L = (-1 -1 2) 1/3
M = ( 1 1 -2) 1/3
N = ( 0 1 0) 1
O = ( 0 -1 0) 1
Table 12.1 Compensation matrices and associated amplitude

factors
12-283
a) Star connection on winding 1

Two-winding transformer:
Group Comp. matrix Comp. matrix
Winding 1 Winding 2
Yy0 E E
Yy6 E F
Yd1 E A
Yd5 C B
Yd7 E B
Yd11 C A
Yz1 E G
Yz5 C H
Yz7 E H
Yz11 C G
Three-winding transformer:
Compensation matrix winding 1
X X X
Compensation matrix winding 2 Compensation matrix winding 3
s3 y0 y6 d1 d5 d7 d11 z1 z5 z7 z11
s2
y0 EEE EEF EEA CCB EEB CCA EEG CCH EEH CCG
y6 EFE EFF EFA CDB EFB CDA EFG CDH EFH CDG
d1 EAE EAF EAA COB EAB COA EAG COH EAH COG
d5 CBC CBD CBO CBB CBN CBA CBK CBH CBJ CBG
d7 EBE EBF EBA CNB EBB CNA EBG CNH EBH CNG
d11 CAC CAD CAO CAB CAN CAA CAK CAH CAJ CAG
z1 EGE EGF EGA CKB EGB CKA EGG CKH EGH CKG
z5 CHC HD CHO CHB CHN CHA CHK CHH CHJ CHG
z7 EHE EHF EHA CJB EHB CJA EHG CJH EHH CJG
z11 CGC CGD CGO CGB CGN CGA CGK CGH CGJ CGG
Table 12.2 Summary of the compensation matrices for a

three-winding transformer with a star connection
on winding 1
12-284
b) Delta connection on winding 1

Applies for two and three-winding transformers:
Group Comp. matrix Comp. matrix
Winding 1 Winding 2 (and 3)
Dy1 A C
Dy5 A F
Dy7 A D
Dy11 A E
Dd0 A A
Dd6 A B
Dz0 A G
Dz2 A K
Dz4 A L
Dz6 A H
Dz8 A J
Dz10 A M
Example:
The compensation for the currents of a three-winding
transformer Yd5y0 is as follows:
s1 = Y
s2 = d5 CBC results from Table 12.2, i.e. the
s3 = y0
compensation matrix = C = (1 -1 0) (see Table 12.1)

for winding 1 with an amplitude factor of 1 / 3
compensation matrix = B = (-1 0 0) (see Table 12.1)

for winding 2 with an amplitude factor of 1
compensation matrix = C = (1 -1 0) (see Table 12.1)

for winding 3 with an amplitude factor of 1/ 3
12-285
The function currents then become:
Function currents (calculated)

Currents measured at
the CTs
IFL1 / 1 1 1 0 IL1/ 1
1
IFL 2 / 1 = 0 1 1 IL 2 / 1
Winding 1: F 3 1 0 1 IL 3 / 1
IL 3 / 1
ILF1/ 2 1 0 0 IL1 / 2

Winding 2: IFL 2 / 2 = 1 0 1 0 IL 2 / 2
F 0 0 1 I
IL 3 / 2 L 3 / 2
ILF1 / 3 1 1 0 IL1 / 3
1
IFL 2 / 3 = 0 1 1 IL 2 / 3
Winding 3: F 1 0 1 IL 3 / 3
3
IL 3 / 3
Typical values:
g 0.3 IN
v 0.5
b 1.5
g-High 0.75 IN
I-Inst. 12 IN
InrushRatio 10 %
InrushTime 5s
a1, a2, a3 to be calculated
s1, s2, s3 project related
12-286
12.21. Frequency protection (Frequency)
Under- and overfrequency
Load-shedding
12.21.2. Features
Measurement of one voltage
Frequency calculation based on the complex voltage vector
Undervoltage blocking

Voltage

Blocking

Start
Trip
Frequency
Voltage
12.21.4. Frequency function settings - Frequency

Trip P1 (Select)
Frequency Hz 48.00 40.00 65.00 0.01
BlockVoltage UN 0.2 0.2 0.8 0.1
Delay s 1.00 0.10 60.00 0.01
MaxMin Min (Select)
Voltage Inp. Chan. CT/VT-Addr VT U1
Blocked (U<) Signal SignalAddr
Trip SignalAddr
Start SignalAddr
12-287

Text Explanation
Frequency Pick-up frequency setting
Setting restrictions:
underfrequency not fN
overfrequency not fN
Block voltage Peak value of the voltage for blocking
(reset ration approx. 1.05)
Max / Min defines operation as overfrequency or underfrequency.

Settings:
Max: Overfrequency
Min: Underfrequency
Voltage Inp. defines the voltage input channel.
Chan.
Blocking Input for blocking the operation of the function.
Always off : - not used
Always on : - operation always blocked
xx: - all binary inputs (or outputs of protection
functions)
Blocked (U<) Signals blocking of the function due to undervoltage.
Signal
TRIP Output for signaling tripping.

There are often several stages of frequency protection using
several single-stage relays.
Settings:
Frequency Frequency
Delay Delay
Undervoltage blocking Block Voltage
Under or over frequency Max / Min
Frequency protection is used either to protect synchronous
machines and prime-movers against the effects of operating at
under or overfrequency or for load-shedding in the event of an
overload.
12-288
The frequency function protects:

synchronous machines from excessive temperature rise due
to iron and other losses
synchronous machines and prime movers from mechanical
vibration
Some synchronous machines are subject to severe vibration if
the speed deviates from its rated value.
Vibration occurs more frequently at speeds below rated
frequency, but can occur both above and below. A complete
scheme often comprises therefore 4 stages, two for alarm and
tripping for overfrequency and two for alarm and tripping for
underfrequency. Tripping is delayed to avoid the risk of
maloperation during transients.
Typical settings:
1. Protection of machines
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage

Alarm Tripping Alarm Tripping
Frequency 51.0 52.0 49.0 48.0
Delay (s) 1.5 3 1.5 3
Block Voltage 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Max / Min Max Max Min Min
Table 12.3 Typical settings for alarm and tripping stages
2. Load-shedding
1st stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage
Alarm Load-shed. Alarm Load-shed. Load-shed.
Frequency (Hz) 49.8 49.0 48.7 48.8 47.5

Delay (s) 0.5 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Block Voltage 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.6
Max / Min Min Min Min Min Min
Table 12.4 Typical settings for alarm and tripping stages
12-289
12.22. Rate-of-change of frequency protection (df/dt)
Static, dynamic and adaptive load shedding in power utility and
industrial distribution systems.
12.22.2. Features
One phase voltage as input variable
Supervises the rate-of-change df/dt of the frequency
Provision for enabling by absolute frequency
Insensitive to harmonics and other high-frequency signals

Voltage

Blocking

Blocked by undervoltage
Tripping
Rate-of-change of frequency
Absolute frequency
Voltage amplitude
12-290
12.22.4. Rate-of-change frequency settings df/dt

df/dt Hz/s -1.0 -10.0 10.0 0.1
Frequency Hz 48.00 40.00 65.00 0.01
Block Voltage UN 0.2 0.2 0.8 0.1
Delay s 0.10 0.10 60.00 0.01
Voltage Inp. Chan. CT/VT-Addr. VT U1
Blocking BinaryAddr Always off
Blocked (U<) Signal SignalAddr
TRIP SignalAddr
Text Explanation
df/dt Rate-of-change of frequency pick-up setting.
Inadmissible settings:
df/dt = 0
df/dt > 0 for absolute frequency settings < fN
df/dt < 0 for absolute frequency settings > fN
Frequency Setting of the absolute frequency enabling criterion.
(active Operation for overfrequency or underfrequency is
/inactive) determined by the absolute frequency setting:
Underfrequency for frequency settings < fN
Overfrequency for frequency settings > fN
The absolute frequency criterion is enabled when set to

active and disabled when set to inactive.
In the latter case, the operation of the protection is only
dependent on the rate-of-change df/dt.
Frequency = fN
Frequency < fN 10 Hz
Frequency > fN + 5 Hz
Block voltage Pick-up setting for undervoltage blocking (reset ratio
approx. 1.05, reset time approx. 0.1 s).
Delay Delay from the instant the function picks up to the
generation of a tripping command.
12-291
Text Explanation
functions)
Blocked (U<) signals when the function is blocked by the undervoltage
signal criterion.

Several rate-of-change of frequency stages are often needed
and the additional stages are achieved by configuring the
function as many times as is necessary.
Settings:
Rate-of-change of frequency df/dt
Absolute frequency Frequency
Undervoltage Block Voltage
Delay Delay
The rate-of-change of frequency function only trips when the
rate-of-change is higher than setting, the absolute frequency
criterion picks up and the voltage is not lower than the
undervoltage setting.
The additional absolute frequency criterion prevents unwanted
operation of the rate-of-change function during power system
transients. Where it is desired that the rate-of-change function
should operate without regard to the absolute frequency, the
Frequency knob must be set to inactive.
12-292
12.23. Definite time overfluxing protection (U/fDT)
Protection of power transformers against excessive flux.
12.23.2. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio
Single-phase measurement
Definite time delay
Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector
Over- or underexcitation mode
CT/VT inputs
Voltage
Binary inputs
Blocking
Binary outputs
Pick-up
Tripping
Measurements
Voltage/frequency
Frequency
12-293
12.23.4. Overfluxing function settings

Delay s 1.00 0.10 60.00 0.01
U/f-Setting UN/fN 1.20 0.20 2.00 0.01
Max / Min Max (Select)
Voltage input CT/VT-Addr VT U1
TRIP SignalAddr
Pick-up SignalAddr
12.23.5. Explanation of parameters:
Text Explanation
Delay Delay from the instant the function picks up to the
generation of a tripping command.
U/f-Setting Setting of the voltage/frequency ratio for tripping.
Max / Min defines operation as overfluxing or underfluxing.
Settings:
Max: Overfluxing
Min: Underfluxing
Voltage input defines the voltage VT input.
All voltage inputs may be specified.
functions)
Pick-up Output for signaling pick-up.
12-294
Settings:
Magnetic flux U/f-Setting
Delay Delay
Over-/underfluxing Max / Min
The overfluxing function is primarily intended to protect the iron

cores of power transformers. Tripping by the function is delayed
to avoid false operation during system transients such as load
shedding.
The magnetic flux is not measured directly. Instead the
voltage/frequency ratio which is proportional to the flux and
easier to measure is monitored.
Overfluxing can result from either an increase of system voltage
or a reduction of system frequency.
For example, 10 % overfluxing at constant frequency is
equivalent to increasing the value of the U/f ratio to 1.1 UN/fN.
Typical settings:
U/f-Setting 1.1 UN/fN
Delay 5s
Max / Min Max
12-295
12.24. Inverse time overfluxing (U/fINV)
Protection of power transformers against excessive flux,
especially in heavily loaded non-laminated metal parts, and the
associated excessive heating of the unit.
12.24.2. Features
Evaluation of the voltage/frequency ratio
Single-phase measurement
Inverse time delay according to U/f ratio
Determination of frequency from the complex voltage vector
Delay determined by integrating function response
Input of delay table facilitates matching the operating
characteristic to a specific machine according to IEEE
Guideline
C 37.91-1985

Voltage

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Voltage/frequency
Frequency
12-296
12.24.4. Inverse time overfluxing function settings

U/f-Start UN/fN 1.10 1.05 1.20 0.01
t-Min min 0.20 0.01 2.00 0.01
t-Max min 60.0 5.0 100 0.1
t[U/f=1.05] min 70.00 0.01 100 0.01
t[U/f=1.10] min 70.00 0.01 100 0.01
t[U/f=1.15] min 6.00 0.01 100 0.01
t[U/f=1.20] min 1.00 0.01 100 0.01
t[U/f=1.25] min 0.480 0.010 30.000 0.001
t[U/f=1.30] min 0.300 0.010 30.000 0.001
t[U/f=1.35] min 0.220 0.010 30.000 0.001
t[U/f=1.40] min 0.170 0.010 30.000 0.001
t[U/f=1.45] min 0.140 0.010 30.000 0.001
t[U/f=1.50] min 0.140 0.010 30.000 0.001
UB-Setting UN 1.00 0.80 1.20 0.01
TRIP SignalAddr
Pick-up SignalAddr

Text Explanation
U/f-Start defines the pick-up value for the voltage/frequency ration
referred to UN / fN.
t-Min Minimum operating time after being enabled regardless of
inverse characteristic. Operating characteristic constant.
t-Max Maximum operating time after being enabled regardless of
inverse characteristic. Operating characteristic constant.
t[U/f = 1.05] Table of 10 values (data input) for defining a specific

inverse operating characteristic.
to
t[U/f = 1.50]
UB-Setting Reference (base) voltage for compensating a difference
between the VT rating and the rating of the generator or
transformer.
Voltage input defines the VT input channel.
12-297
Text Explanation
functions)
Pick-up Output for signaling pick-up.
Settings:
Magnetic flux for enabling char. U/f-Setting
Reference value UB-Setting
Minimum operating time t-Min
Maximum operating time t-Max
10 values defining the inverse t[U/f = 1.05] ... t[U/f = 1.50]
time operating characteristic
The overfluxing function protects the iron cores of power

transformers against excessive flux.
The magnetic flux is not measured directly. Instead the
voltage/frequency ratio which is proportional to the flux and
easier to measure is monitored.
Overfluxing can result from either an increase of system voltage
or a reduction of system frequency.
For example, 10 % overfluxing at constant frequency is
equivalent to increasing the value of the U/f ratio to 1.1 UN/fN.
The limit curve for the maximum magnetic flux (U/f) permissible
for electrical machines is defined in
standards
data supplied by manufacturers
The limit curve for Westinghouse machines is given in Fig.

12.95.
12-298
The operating characteristic of the U/f-INV protection function

should be selected to be just below the short-time limit curve for
overfluxing. The time limits t-min and t-max must also be set.
It must also be noted that depending on the standard or
specification, the units are also designed for a continuous level
of overfluxing apart from the short-time level. The choice of
characteristic must also take the continuous level of overfluxing
into consideration.
The reference voltage UB for the protection is calculated from
transformer rated voltage UTN and the VT rated voltages UN1
and UN2 as follows (providing compensation using the reference
value of the A/D channel has not been made):
UN2
UB = UTN
UN1
The setting is the ratio UB/UN, where UN is the rated voltage of

the protection, otherwise UB-Setting would be 1.0 UN.
The overfluxing curve of the generator must be known in order to
set the times t-min and t-max and enter the table of 10 values
t [U/f = 1.05] ... t [U/f = 1.50].
Typical settings:
U/f-Setting 1.1 UB/fN
UB-Setting according to protected unit
t-min 0.2 min
t-max 60 min
t [U/f = 1.05...1.50] according to protected unit
A typical Westinghouse characteristic is given in Fig. 12.96

below.
12-299
A - Westinghouse power transformers

B - Westinghouse generators
140
135
Permissible overfluxing [%]

130
125
A
120
B
115
110 110%
105 105%
continuous
100
.1 .2 .5 1.0 2 5 10 20 50 100 200
t [min]
HEST 935 004 FL
Fig. 12.95 Permissible overfluxing when off-load
ANWENDUNGEN
POWER FR LEISTUNGSTRANSFORMATOREN
TRANSFORMER (IEEE C37.91-1985)
APPLICATIONS (IEEE C37.91-1985)
150
140
1
2
% 130
V
VOLTS/Hz [%]
O
L
T 120
/
H
z
110
100
CONSULT THE INDIVIDUAL
EINZELNE FABRIKANTEN MANUFACTURERS
MSSEN WITH
BEZGLICH BER-
RESPECT TO OVERFLUXING
ERREGUNGSGRENZEN LIMITS
KONSULTIERT WERDEN
90
0.01 0.1 1.0 10 100 1000
MINUTEN
MINUTES
HEST 935 025 C
Fig. 12.96 Overfluxing limits for power transformers

(data provided by three manufacturers)
12-300
12.25. Power protection (P)
Power function for monitoring:
reverse power
active power
reactive power
power direction
12.25.2. Features
Definite time delay
Over- or underpower
Provision for correction of phase errors caused by the input
circuit
One or three-phase measurement
Wide range of applications (see Fig. 12.98 and Fig. 12.99)
Correction of CT and VT phase errors
Insensitive to DC components in voltage and current
Insensitive to harmonics in voltage and current

Current
Voltage

Blocking

Pick-up
Tripping
Power
12-301
12.25.4. Power function settings

P-Setting PN -0.050 -0.100 1.200 0.005
Angle deg 0.0 -180.0 180.0 5.0
Reset ratio % 60 30 170 1
Delay s 0.50 0.05 60.00 0.01
Max / Min Min (Select)
Power factor deg 0.0 -5.0 5.0 0.1
comp. (Phi)
PN UN*IN 1.000 0.500 2.500 0.001
Number of phases 1 Ph (Select) 1
Current input CT/VT-Addr CT I1
TRIP SignalAddr
Pick-up SignalAddr

Text Explanation
P-Setting Power setting for tripping.
P < 0.005 PN when connected to metering cores
P < 0.020 PN when connected to protection cores
In view of the required accuracy, the use of metering cores
is recommended for settings 0.2 PN.
Angle Characteristic angle between voltage and current for
maximum sensitivity.
Angle = 0, i.e. active power measurement
Angle = 90, i.e. reactive power measurement (inductive)
Settings between these limits are possible, e.g. for
directional measurements at locations on the power
system.
The correction of phase errors caused by the input circuit is
also possible.
12-302
Text Explanation
Reset ratio Reset value in relation to the pick-up value.
Depending on the sign of the pick-up value, the setting of
the reset ratio must be greater or less than 100 %.
Inadmissible settings :
Reset ratio > 100 % for Max and P-Setting >0
Reset ratio < 100 % for Min and P-Setting >0
Reset ratio > 100 % for Min and P-Setting <0
A large hysteresis must be selected for low pick-up settings
and a small one for high pick-up settings (see Fig. 12.1).
Inadmissible hysteresis settings (=100% - reset ratio):
0.5 % / (P-Setting/PN + 0.01) (upper limit)
10% / P-Setting/PN (lower limit)
These conditions are fulfilled by setting, for example:
P - Setting
for from 0.2 to 1, i.e. 95 %
PN
and
P - Setting
for from 0.02 to 0.2, i.e. 60 %
PN
(see dotted lines in Fig. 12.97)
Delay Time between the function picking up and tripping. The time
the function takes to reset is also influenced by the delay
set for operation, i.e.:
for t > 100 ms, the function resets after 50 ms, otherwise
resetting is instantaneous.
Max / Min defines the operating mode as:
Max: overpower
Min: underpower
Caution:
The number and its sign are relevant and not just the value,
i.e. Min must be set for reverse power, because tripping
takes place for a power less than zero (P Setting < 0).
Power factor Input of an angle to compensate CT and VT errors in the
com. (Phi) case of highly accurate power measurements.
The setting is determined by the difference between CT
and VT errors.
PN Rated power as given by UN x IN. This enables the
amplitude of the power being measured to be
compensated, e.g. to the rated power factor of a generator.
12-303
Text Explanation
Number of Number of phases measured:
phases
single-phase measurement
three-phase measurement
P = UR IR cos + US IS cos + UT IT cos
(with Y-connected VTs)
P = URS IR cos + UST IS cos + UTR IT cos
(The measurement is only correct with delta-connected
VTs providing the three voltages are symmetrical.)
Current input defines the CT input.
All inputs may be selected.
In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel
of the group of three (R phase) must be selected.
Voltage input defines the VT input.
All inputs may be selected.
In the case of multi-phase measurement, the first channel
of the group of three (R phase) must be selected.
Blocking Input for an external function to block the function.
Always off: - not used
Always on: - operation always blocked
functions)
TRIP Signals tripping
Pick-up Signals pick-up
12-304
1
Reset ratio 95%
Reset ratio
60%
0.5
0 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.75

1
Setting PP
N
HEST 935 022 C
Fig. 12.97 Permissible reset ratio settings
Settings:
Reference power PN
Setting P - Setting
Reset ratio Reset ratio
Over-/underpower Max / Min
Phase error compensation Phi compensation
Tripping delay Delay
The power function can be used for many applications. Some
examples are given in Fig. 12.98 and Fig. 12.99. The angles
given apply for connection according to the diagram in the
appendix.
12-305
Q Q
Restrains Operates Operates Restrains
0 P 0 P
Active overpower settings: Active underpower settings:
- P-Setting >0 - P-Setting >0

- Max/Min MAX - Max/Min MIN
- Drop-Ratio <100% - Drop-Ratio >100%
- Angle 0 (30 ) *) *)
- Angle 0 (30 )
HEST 965 017 C
Fig. 12.98 Power function settings for different applications
*) The values in bracket apply for a single-phase measurement and a phase-to-phase VT

connection (e.g. current IR and voltage URS) or a three-phase measurement and delta-
connected VTs.
12-306
Q Q
Operates Restrains Operates
Restrains
0 P 0 P
Reserve power settings: Reactive overpower settings:
- P-Setting <0 - P-Setting >0

- Max/Min MIN - Max/Min MAX
- Drop-Ratio <100% - Drop-Ratio <100%
- Angle 0 (30 ) *) - Angle 90 (120 ) *)
Q
Restrains
0 60
P
Operates
Directional power settings:
- P-Setting <0
- Max/Min MIN
- Drop-Ratio <100%
- Angle 60 (90 ) *)
HEST 965 018 C
Fig. 12.99 Power function settings for different applications
*) The values in bracket apply for a single-phase measurement and a phase-to-phase VT

connection (e.g. current IR and voltage URS) or a three-phase measurement and delta-
connected VTs.
12-307
Determining the settings

Where the rated currents and possibly also rated voltages of
CTs, VTs and the protected unit differ, it is of advantage to refer
the setting to the rated power of the protected unit. This
necessitates adjusting the sensitivity of the protection using the
setting for PN.
Setting the reference power PN:
PN SGN SGN = 3 UGN IGN

=
UN IN 3 UN1 IN1 PGN = SGN cosGN
where:
SGN, PGN, UGN, IGN, cosGN: ratings of the protected unit
UN1, IN1: primary VT and CT ratings
PN, UN, IN: protection ratings
Example 1
Transformer: 96 MVA, 13.8 kV, 4 kA, cos = 0.8
Power factor: cos = 0.8
14.4 100
VTs / CTs: kV / V; 5 kA / 5 A
3 3
Protection: 100 V; 5 A
Reverse power: 0.5 % PGN
Alternative 1: No adjustment of PN
Settings:
PN
Reference power: = 1 .0
UN IN
Reverse power:
P U I 13.8 4
= 0.005 GN GN cos GN = 0.005 0.8 = 0.003
PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
12-308
Alternative 2: Adjustment according to cosGN

Settings:
PN P
Reference power: = GN = cos GN = 0.8
UN IN SGN
P U I 13.8 4
Reverse power: = 0.005 GN GN = 0.005 = 0.004
PN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
Alternative 3: Adjustment according to cosGN and CT/VT

data
Settings:
Reference power:
PN U I 13.8 4
= GN GN cos GN = 0.8 = 0.614
UN IN UN1 IN1 14.4 5
P
Reverse power: = 0.005
PN
The power function is connected to the phase currents and a
phase-to-neutral or phase-to-phase voltage. The purpose of the
phase compensation is twofold:
to compensate the phase difference between the phase
voltage and the any measured phase-to-phase voltage
to determine whether the function responds to active or
reactive power
The following table summarizes the most important operating
modes to simplify setting the corresponding parameters correctly.
The angles given apply for connection according to the diagram
in the appendix.
The phase compensation also provides facility for changing the
direction of measurement or to compensate incorrect VT or CT
polarity.
12-309
Function "MaxMi n" "Dro p-Ra ti o" "P-Setting " "Ang le" * )
max Max
12-310
< 10 0%
Active pow er >0 +3 0
Fig. 12.100
min Min > 10 0%
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Re verse pow er max Min < 10 0% <0 +3 0
voltage URS
max Max < 10 0%
Indu cti ve
rea cti ve p owe r >0 +1 20
min Min > 10 0%
max Min < 10 0%

Ca pazitive
rea cti ve p owe r <0 +1 20
min Max > 10 0%
Settings different applications when measuring

*) Appl icab le for a sing le or three-p hase me asure ment usin g pha se-to-ph ase vol tag es (th e setti ng is 30 HEST 9 65 0 19 C
phase R current in relation to the phase-to-phase

less for a th ree-p hase me asureme nt w ith Y con nected VTs)
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. G
Phase compensation
This setting is for correcting the phase error between the VTs
and CTs which have a considerable adverse influence on the
measurement of active power at low power factors.
Example 2
The active power error at rated current and a power factor of
cos = 0 for a total phase error of 10' is
P = 0.03 = 0.03 10 = 0.3 % [%; 1; min]
This is an error is not negligible at a setting of 0.5 %.
The total error corresponds to the difference between the VT and
CT errors. The case considered in this example of full reactive
current (100%) would scarcely occur in practice, but reactive
current components from about 80% are possible.
NOTE:
The following must be set for a 'Minimum forward power' scheme
according to Anglo-Saxon practice:
P Setting >0
MaxMin Min
Reset ratio 150 %
12-311
December 08
13. APPENDICES
13.1. Glossary................................................................................. 13-2
13.2. External REB500 connections (example) .............................. 13-8
13.3. Test reports.......................................................................... 13-12
13-1
13. APPENDICES
13.1. Glossary
Terms and Meaning
abbreviations
Phase shift (phase comparison)
max Tripping phase shift (phase comparison)
A Output
ALG_ General signal
ASIC Application specific integrated circuit
Backplane PCB or panel at the rear of an electronic
equipment rack with the connectors
between the modules.
BB Busbar
BB zone Section of busbar bounded by circuit-
breakers which can be isolated by the
protection
BBP Busbar protection
BBP_ Busbar protection signal
BFP Breaker failure protection
BFP_ Breaker failure protection signal
BP Bay protection
This includes all the functions that do
not form part of the station protection,
e.g. distance protection, directional
overcurrent etc.
The bay protection functions are
described in Chapter 12.
BPD Breaker pole discrepancy protection
BU Bay Unit
Bus board PCB interconnecting plug-in modules
Bus segment Independently operating section of the
process bus with its own CPU.
COMTRADE Data format for disturbance recorder
according to IEEE C 37.111
13-2
Terms and Meaning

abbreviations
CPU Central processing unit
CR Reduction factor due to the time
constant of the power system
CT Current transformer
CU Central unit
Current comparison Comparison of differential and restraint
currents i.e. the energy flowing towards
and away from a protected unit
DAC Data accessor
Default Setting used if no other setting chosen
Device_Id ID of a communication unit (PCB)
connected to an MVB segment
DIA Diagnosis
Differential current Geometric sum of all the currents of a
Idiff busbar section
DSP Digital signal processor
E Input
E_wineve ABB disturbance recorder data
evaluation program
EFS Earth (ground) fault protection
EFS_ Earth fault protection signal
EFS_CPL Earth fault protection pick-up setting
Engineering System design and configuration by
ABB Switzerland Ltd., or another
authorized ABB company. Some
parameters cannot be changed
subsequently by the user (e.g. activation
of licensed software options).
Event memory Records changes in the status of binary
signals
EVR Event recorder
f Power system frequency
13-3
Terms and Meaning

abbreviations
Faster signal input Internal signals processed in
approximately 8 ms instead of the 13 ms
for slower signals
FE German designation for bay unit
Front-plane Interconnecting PCB with bases for
plug-in modules
HMI Human-machine interface (control unit)
HMI500 REB500 configuration and control
program installed on a PC (formerly
REBWIN)
Ib Load current
Idiff Differential current
IE Current level setting
IK Fault current
IKmin Minimum fault current of a feeder
IKMS Minimum fault current on a busbar
IKR Reduced fault current
IN Rated current
Increment Count forwards
INT Internal
Interbay bus Station bus
IQ Loop current
IR Through current
Irstnt Restraint current
ITT Intertripping
Jumper Bridge
k Stabilizing factor
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LHMI Local human machine interface
LON Interbay bus protocol
13-4
Terms and Meaning

abbreviations
Mask/unmask A part of the REB500 system or item of
plant that has been basically configured
using HMI500, but is currently inactive
(appears dimly in the diagram), e.g.
planned future additions to the station.
Master Main control unit
Maximal Algorithm patented by ABB Switzerland
prolongation Ltd., for compensating input currents
distorted due to CT saturation.
Minimum fault Fault current from the weakest source
current IKmin at point for a fault at point A
A
MMI Man-machine interface. Older
expression for HMI.
MPB Multifunction process bus
N Rated
n' Effective overcurrent factor
Neutral current I0 Geometric sum of the three phase
currents or the current measured by a
core balance CT
Node_ID Number of the MVB bus segments
within REB500 (16)
OCDT Time-overcurrent protection
OCDT_ Time-overcurrent protection signal
OFC Optical fiber cable
PB CT burden at IN
PC Personal computer
PE CT losses
Perturbograph Records currents, voltages and signals
Phase comparison Phase relationship between currents
measured in the same phase at different
locations
PN Rated power
13-5
Terms and Meaning

abbreviations
REBWIN REB500 configuration and control
program installed on a PC (now
HMI500)
Restraint current Absolute sum of all the currents of a bus
RV Reset ratio (overcurrent)
Signal setting Signal display followed by the
corresponding event
Slave Subordinate unit controlled by the
master
Slow signal input Signal duration >128 ms plus contact
bounce filter time
SPD Breaker pole discrepancy protection
SP Station protection
The station protection part of REB500
consists of:
BBP Busbar protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
EFS Earth fault protection
OCDT Time-overcurrent protection *
BPD Breaker pole discrepancy pro-
tection
* This protection function shouldnt be used in
REB500sys, it exists only for compatibility
reasons.
Stabilization factor k Quotient of differential (operating) and

restraint currents
STS Disturbance recorder
STS_ Disturbance recorder signal
SVS Breaker failure protection
SVS_ Breaker failure protection signal
SYS_ System signal
System wide In the central unit and all bay units
t1 Delay t1 (SVS)
t1d Timer t1 tolerance (SVS)
t2 Delay t2 (SVS)
13-6
Terms and Meaning

abbreviations
t2d Timer t2 tolerance (SVS)
ta Rise time (maximum prolongation)
tCB Circuit-breaker opening time
te Contact bounce filter and internal
processing time
th Prolongation time (maximum)
Time stamp Date and time
TN Power system time constant at the
busbar
to Operating time (maximum prolongation)
tRes Backup time
Trigger Event that starts the disturbance
recorder
tV Reset time (SVS current measurement)
UMZ German designation for time-
overcurrent protection
UMZ_ German designation for time-
overcurrent protection signal
VT Voltage transformer
13-7
13.2. External REB500 connections (example)

The REB500 wiring diagrams are drawn specifically for each
function and conform to present standards, i.e. plus at the top
and minus at the bottom.
The diagrams below show the correlation between the external
connections. There are also a number of (non-binding) recom-
mendations. The CT connections frequently give rise to ques-
tions. Designations such as P1, P2 etc., are of no consequence.
Special attention should be paid to the connection of the bus-tie
breaker CTs and an example of this is given.
An example is also given of the station battery wiring to circuits
connected to REB500, including recommendations for how they
should be protected.
Further connection diagrams can be found in Data sheet
REB500 / REB500sys, 1MRB520308-Ben.
L1
L2
L3
L1 L2 L3
+U
Batt.
Q0
Close command
-U Batt.
T1
Q0 Open Q0 Closed Q0 (Close command)
Bay unit
-F391 A9 A10 A13 A14
OC05 OC06 OC07 OC08
GROUP 3 A11 A12 GROUP 4 A15
-U Batt.
HEST 005049 C
Fig. 13.1 Typical connection diagram for a circuit-breaker

image
13-8
L1 L1
I L2 L2 I
L3 L3
L1 L1
II L2 L2 II
L3 L3
+U
Batt.
In case the ground connection of the
Fig. 13.2
-T1
current transformers face the
circuit breaker.
Then the C.T. connections to the bay
unit must be reversed
GND
L1 L2 L3 Q1 Q2
See CB-Image
See CB-Image
L1 L2 L3
(version with two CTs)

GND
-T1
REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen/Rev. E
*2. Bay unit only required

With couplers having two C.T.s Q1 Open Q1 Closed Q2 Open Q2 Closed
Bay unit
Feeder
-F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 -F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12 -F391 A1 A2 A5 A6 -F391 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 I6 I7 I8 I9 I10 I11 I12
1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N 1A 5A N
HEST 005046 C
OC01 OC02 OC03 OC04
IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0 IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0 IL1 IL2 IL3 IL0
for a feeder and a bus-tie breaker with one CT

GROUP 1 A3 A4 GROUP 2 A7 A8
Typical connection diagram (isolators and CTs)

Bay unit Bay unit
(Coupler bus-section II*) Coupler bus-section I + II
(Coupler bus-section I*) -U Batt.
13-9
ABB Switzerland Ltd
DC supply short Wiring Redundant Power Supply (Option)

Station DC supply 1,5mm2
Short circuit protection circuit protection
25A 10A
Central unit
1 Power supply (2)
+ Battery Battery +
B1 B2
- 10A -
Bay unit
1 BU1 (2)
Power supply
1 BU2 (2)
1 BU3 (2)
1 BU4 (2)
Upto 6 BU's
10A
Next 6 BU's
Trip circuit Coil 1

BU1 + other protection
Trip circuit Coil 2

Trip circuit Coil 1

BU2
Trip circuit Coil 2

BU2
Isolator image
BU1
If B1 fails during operation, then the
last isolator image will be valid as
long as the image does not change.
Isolator image
BU2
+ If B1 fails during operation then the

Battery B3 Indication indications are still available from the
-
B3 power supply.
Information!!
HEST 005048 C
Fig. 13.3 Typical DC distribution diagram (station battery) for

a centralized REB500
13-10
Wiring Redundant Power Supply (Option)

DC supply short 1,5mm2
Station DC supply
circuit protection
short circuit protection
10A
Central unit
1 (2)
+ Battery Battery +
B1 B2
- 4A -
Bay unit
1 Bu1 (2)
Power supply
Other
Protection
4A
BU2 (2)
1
Power supply
4A
BU3
1 (2)
Power supply
BU4
1 (2)
Power supply
Other BU's
Trip circuit Coil 1

Trip circuit Coil 2

Trip circuit Coil 1

BU2
Trip circuit Coil 2

BU2
Isolator image
BU1
If B1 fails during operation the isolator
image last know will be valid as
long as the image does not change
Isolator image
BU2
If B1 fails during operation then

+ the indications are still available
Battery B3 Indications from the B3 power supply.
- Information!!
HEST 005047 C
Fig. 13.4 Typical DC distribution diagram (station battery) for

a decentralized REB500
13-11
13.3. Test reports

Test Report Type REB500 (test bay)
(subject to change without notice)
Test Report Type REB500 (commissioning)

(subject to change without notice)
13-12
We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB
Switzerland Ltd; 2006. Fr dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegenstand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfltigungen, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines
Inhalts sind ohne unsere ausdrckliche Zustimmung verboten. ABB Schweiz AG; 2006.
PROTECTION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS / SCHUTZ UND STEUERSYSTEME

Busbar Protection System REB 500
Final Customer / Endkunde :
Purchaser / Auftraggeber :
Installation / Anlage :
Protected Object / Schutzobjekt :
ABB Order-No. / ABB Bestell-Nr. :
Order Pos. / Bestell Pos. :
Equipment No. / Gerte-LNr. :
Diagram No. / Zeichnungs-Nr. :
Serial No. CU / Serie Nr. ZE :
Tested / Geprft : Released / Freigegeben : Testdate

Prfdatum :
/ PSAT4 2006-mm-dd
Factory Acceptance Test Signature Date of FAT

Werkabnahme Unterschrift : Abnahmedatum :
Based on: 1KHF 060431, Rev. S External doc. no.
Prep. : PSAT4, J. Hegetschweiler Date: 2005-06-02 Project
Appr. : PSAT4, G. Meier Date: 2005-06-03

Doc. Kind Test Report / Doc. Ref. des
des.
Title Busbar Protection System REB500
Resp. dept. PSAT4
Doc. no. Lang. Rev. Ind. Page 1
ABB Switzerland Ltd EN/DE
- - REB No. of p. 5
Filename: Reb5sys-E1302.doc, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:50:00, Saved :30/10/2006 10:51:00
Switzerland Ltd. 2006. Fr dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegenstand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfltigungen, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines
Serial-No CU / Serie-Nr. ZE.

Table of content / Inhaltsverzeichnis
1. Terms and Abbreviations used / Verwendete Begriffe und Abkrzungen ....................... 2

2. Document Reference List, Test Instructions / Dokumentenverweis, Prfanweisungen . 2
3. Test Equipment used / Bentzte Prfmittel ........................................................................ 3
4. Nominal Data / Nenndaten .................................................................................................... 3
5. List of Equipment / Gerteliste............................................................................................. 3
6. Standard Tests / Standardprfungen .................................................................................. 4
7. Specific Functional Tests / Spezifische Funktionsprfungen........................................... 5
8. Enclosures / Beilagen ........................................................................................................... 5
9. General Remarks / Allgemeine Bemerkungen .................................................................... 5
1. Terms and Abbreviations used / Verwendete Begriffe und Abkrzungen

BBP Bus Bar Protection
BFP Breaker Fail Protection
EFP End Fault Protection
PDF Pole Discrepancy Function
OCDT Definite Time Overcurrent Protection
DRR Disturbance Recorder
CU Central Unit
BU Bay Unit
MMI, HMI Human Machine Interface
SW, FW Software, Firmware
BIO Binary In/Out Card
FAT Factory Acceptance Test
SCS Station Control System
SSS Sammelschienenschutz
SVS Schalterversagerschutz
EFS Endfehlerschutz
SPD Schalterpol-Diskrepanzschutz
UMZ Ueberstromzeitschutz
BAL Betriebsanleitung
2. Document Reference List, Test Instructions / Dokumentenverweis, Prfanweisungen
Designation Test instruction no. Index

Bezeichnung Prfvorschrift-Nr. nd.
Standard-Prfanweisung 1MRB060020 E
Standard Test Instruction 1MRB060020-EN E
Test Instruction REB 500 1KHF060324 -
Test Instruction REB 500sys 1KHF060334 -
Doc. kind Test Report/ Prfprotokoll Project

Doc. no. Lang. Rev. ind. Page
2
- - REB No. of p.
5

3. Test Equipment used / Bentzte Prfmittel
Designation Type Inventory-No. Remark

Bezeichnung Typ Inventar-Nr. Bemerkung
REB500 Test Equipment 1 VISTAR 110481
REB500 Test Equipment 2 VISTAR 110425
Omicron Test Equipment CMC256-6 111001
Relay Test Set + Timer Harald Programma 110477
High Voltage Tester HA2000E 111000
High Voltage Tester. P 6S 023320
Protective ground Tester PI 3301-D 111011
Multimeter Ana. Unigor 3n 032320
Multimeter Dig. Fluke 85 029929
Timer TM200 110475
Timer TM200 110476
Multimeter Dig. Fluke 8024A 018999
Multimeter Dig. MA 5D 016887
Timer TM 2 026334
Multimeter Dig. M2032 019515
4. Nominal Data / Nenndaten

Nominal current A Nominal voltage V
Nennstrom Nennspannung
Nominal frequency Hz Mains voltage VAC

Nennfrequenz Netzspannung
Auxiliary voltage VDC Input signal voltage VDC

Hilfsgleichspannung Spannung Eing.-Befehle
5. Traceability Data, List of Equipment / Identifikationsdaten, Gerteliste

Traceability data read out and saved in the setfile. The list of equipment is included in the setfile ..................
Identifikationsdaten ausgelesen und im Setfile abgespeichert. Die Gerteliste ist im Setfile enthalten

3
- - REB No. of p.
5

6. Standard Tests / Standardprfungen
According to 1MRB060020 / Gemss 1MRB060020
6.1. Conformity with the working documents ..........................................................................................

bereinstimmung mit den Arbeitsdokumenten
6.2. Mechanical checks / Mechanische Kontrolle ...................................................................................
6.3. Protective earthing / Anlageerdung..................................................................................................
6.4. Relays and plug-in units / Relais und Einschbe.............................................................................
6.5.1. Dielectric tests carried out in other test departments, according to IEC 60255-5, (2000):
Dielectric test of the protection cubicle, according to enclosed test record .....................................
Hochspannungsprfung des Schutzschrankes gemss beiliegendem Protokoll
Dielectric tests carried out by Enics Ltd according to enclosed Specific test report
Hochspannungstests durchgefhrt durch Enics AG gemss beiliegendem Werkprfzeugnis
6.5.2. Dielectric tests carried out in our test department:

Dielectric test, tested according to IEC 60255-5, (2000) ............................................. CU..............
Hochspannungstest, geprft gemss IEC 60255-5 (2000).......................................... BU ..............
Cubicle.......
Test voltage / Prfspannung:
2 kV AC, 1 Min; or 2.2 kV AC 1 Sec; or 2.8 kV DC 1 Min; or 3.2 kV DC 1 Sec
Circuit High voltage

Kreis Hochspannung
1 AC-current / Wechselstrom
2 AC-voltage / Wechselspannung
3 DC-circuit / Gleichspannungskreise
4 Tripping and signals / Ausg. Signale
5 Input commands / Eingangsbefehle
6 Mains voltage / Netzeingang
6.6.1 Test of protective ground, according to IEC 60204-1, test record enclosed ..................................
Schutzleiterprfung, gemss IEC 60204-1, Prfprotokoll beiliegend
6.6.2 Test of protective ground, according to IEC 60204-1 ....................................................................

Schutzleiterprfung, gemss IEC 60204-1
Test current / Prfstrom : 25 A AC
Test voltage / Prfspannung : max. 12 V AC
Ground resistance / Erdwiderstand : 6 mm2
6.7. Test of lighting, heating, door switch / Prfung von Beleuchtung, Heizung, Trschalter.................
6.8. Supply / Speisung ............................................................................................................................
6.9. Accessory and spare part / Zubehr und Reservematerial..............................................................
6.10. Final checks / Schlusskontrollen ......................................................................................................

4
- - REB No. of p.
5
7. Specific Functional Tests / Spezifische Funktionsprfungen

The operational tests were carried out according to the test instruction REB500 / REB500sys. The tests are
documented on the enclosures listed below.
Die Funktionsprfungen wurden gemss Prfanweisung REB500 / REB500sys durchgefhrt. Die Prfungen sind
auf den untenstehend aufgelisteten Beilagen dokumentiert.
8. Enclosures / Beilagen
Nr. Beilage Anz. Seiten Bemerkung
No. Enclosure No. of pages Remark
Total number of pages / Total Anzahl Bltter
9. General Remarks / Allgemeine Bemerkungen

Der Abgang XXX wurde mit einer Feldeinheit (BU) aus dem Bestand des Prffelds getestet.
Die Abgnge XXX wurden mit Feldeinheiten (BU) aus dem Bestand des Prffelds getestet.
The feeder XXX has been tested with a bay unit (BU) from the testroom stock.
The feeders XXX have been tested with bay units (BU) from the testroom stock.
Die bersetzung des Abgangs / der Abgnge XXX wurde fr die berprfung der Auslsezeiten und der
Kupplungsfunktion temporr auf 5000/5A 1000/1A gendert.
Die nderung war notwendig, da das Prfgert den fr den Test notwendigen Strom bei gegebener bersetzung
nicht liefern kann.
During the verification of the tripping time and the function of the bus coupler, the ratio of the feeder / feeders XXX
was temporarily changed to 5000/5A 1000/1A.
This change was necessary, since for the given ratio, the test source is not designed to supply the necessary
injection current.

5
- - REB No. of p.
5
REB500
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite 1/1
Configuration / Konfiguration:
Functions configured / Konfigurierte Funktionen:
Busbar protection BBP / Sammelschienenschutz SSS.........................................................................................
L0 measurement / L0-Messung.............................................................................................................................
Check zone protection / Checkzonenschutz .........................................................................................................
Overcurrent release / berstromfreigabe..............................................................................................................
Undervoltage release / Unterspannungsfreigabe..................................................................................................
Overvoltage release / Ueberspannungsfreigabe...................................................................................................
Breaker failure protection BFP / Schalterversagerschutz SVS .............................................................................
End fault protection EFP / Endfehlerschutz EFS...................................................................................................
Time-overcurrent protection OCDT / berstromzeitschutz UMZ ..........................................................................
CB pole discrepancy function PDF / Schalterpol-Diskrepanz-Schutz SPD ..........................................................
Disturbance recorder DRR / Strschreiber STS ...................................................................................................
Interface - IBB protocol................................................... LON IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 60870-5-103
Bay protection functions / Abgangsschutz-Funktionen .........................................................................................
-/-............................................................................................................................................................................
Software versions / Softwareversionen:
REBWIN (MMI) ................................................................................................................................................
REBCON (Config.-SW) ...................................................................................................................................
REBSYS (Firmware) ........................................................................................... ...........................................
SiMon (Base-SW) ............................................................................................... .......... ............
CPU BIO BU03
BB configuration / SS-Konfiguration:
Number of buses / Anzahl Schienen .........................................................................0 ...........................................0
active / aktiv inactive / inaktiv
Number of feeders / Anzahl Abgnge .......................................................................0 ...........................................0
Number of section isolators / Anzahl Lngstrenner ..................................................0 ...........................................0
Number of coupler 0ct / Anzahl Kupplungen 0ct .......................................................0 ...........................................0
Diameter ....................................................................................................................0 ...........................................0
REB500 setting / REB500 Aufstellung ................................................................... .........................................
Centralised / Zentral Decentralised / Dezentral
Grounding / Erdung .................................................................................................................................................
Structure of CU / Aufbau ZE:

Redundant power supply CU / Redundante Speisung ZE ....................................................................................
BIO in CU / BIO in ZE ..............................................................................................................................................1
Delivered BU / Gelieferte FE:

.............................................................................................................................................. ...............
Stand alone Classic
Setfile /Konfigurationsdatei:
Name / Name........................................................................................................................................... .mdb
CU=Central Unit ZE=Zentraleinheit BU=Bay Unit FE= Feldeinheit BB=Busbar SS=Sammelschiene
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1303.doc, Prep : E.Wiederkehr 24.02.03, Rev. L, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:51:00, Saved :30/10/2006 10:53:00
REB500
CT/VT ratios / Strom-/Spannungswandler-bersetzung
Feeder Ratio Connection Tested Remark

Abgang bersetzung Verbindung Geprft Bemerkung
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
Additional functions / Zustzliche Funktionalitten:
Ext. Trip / Ext. Auslsung ......................................................................................................................................

configured and tested
Transfer trip / Auslseumleitung............................................................................................................................

Remote trip BBP / Fernauslsung SSS.................................................................................................................

Trip BB zones / Zonen Auslsung .........................................................................................................................

Isolator alarm / Trenneralarm ................................................................................................................................

Switch inhibit / Schaltverbot...................................................................................................................................

Inspection, maintenance / Revision, Wartung .......................................................................................................

Blockings / Blockierungen .....................................................................................................................................

Delay / Verzgerung..............................................................................................................................................
Logic / Logik...........................................................................................................................................................
Supervision aux. voltage / Hilfsspannungsberwachung......................................................................................

General tests / Allgemeine Tests:
Checking of output relays / Ueberprfen der Ausgangsrelais ..............................................................................

tested
Checking of optical coupler inputs / Ueberprfen der Optokoppler Eingnge .....................................................

tested
Testing of pick-up and drop off voltage of optical coupler inputs ( 80% / 60% ) ...................................................
Prfen der Anzug- und Abfallspannung der Optokopplereingnge ( 80% / 60% ) tested
Settings BBP / Einstellungen SSS:
Phase fault current / Kurzschlusstrom Ikmin ........................................................................................................ - A

Phase fault current L0 / Kurzschlusstrom L0 Ikmin .............................................................................................. - A
k-factor / k-Faktor .....................................................................................................................................................-
Differentialcurrent alarm / Differenzstromalarm Idiff ........................................................................................... - %
Time delay Idiff / Zeitverzgerung Idiff ......................................................................................................................- s
Isolator running time / Trennerlaufzeit...................................................................................................................- s

Remote trip impulse width / Fernauslsung Impulsdauer ............................................................................200 ms
-/-............................................................................................................................................................................- -
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1305.doc, Prep : J. Hegetschweiler 03.06.2005, Rev. Q, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:51:00, Saved :30/10/2006 10:56:00
REB500
Intertripping / Mitnahme:
Busbar Ref. feeder Feeder / Coupler Internal fault External fault Remark
sect. Ref. Abgang Abgang / Kupplung Fehler intern Fehler extern Bemerkung
Schienenteil
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
Trip no Trip
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
Tripping times / Auslsezeiten:
L1, L2, L3 Idiff / Ikmin >5 --> 22-30 ms
Feeder / Coupler Idiff L1 (R) L2 (S) L3 (T) Remark

Abgang / Kupplung Bemerkung
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
A ms ms ms
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
Blocking of the coupler / Kupplungsblockierung:
Coupler Breaker open Isolators Trenner Feeder Parallel operation Remark

Kupplung Schalter offen Abgang Parallelbetrieb Bemerkung
ABB Switzerland Ltd

We reserve all rights in this document and in the information contained therein. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties without express authority is strictly forbidden. ABB Switzerland
Ltd; 2002. Fr dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegenstand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfltigungen, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhalts sind ohne
unsere ausdrckliche Zustimmung verboten. ABB Schweiz AG; 2002.
REB500
Coupler function / Kupplungsfunktion:
External fault / Externer Fehler......................................................................... .........................................

Coupler / Kupplung No trip / Keine Auslsung
Close command CB / Schalter-Ein-Befehl ............................................................................................................

konfiguriert und geprft
Coupler with 1/2 ct / Kupplung mit 1/2 Wandler:
Fault
BB1
Description of diagram / Diagrammbeschreibung
BB2 BB1: ............
BB2: ............
Feeder 1: ....
Coupler
Feeder 2: ....
Feeder1 Feeder2
Coupler: ......
Faulty busbar trips immediatly / Fehlerhafter Schienenteil lst unverzgert aus..................................................

Intertriping on surrounding busbars / Mitnahme auf umliegende Schienenteile ...................................................
Coupler reclaim time / Kupplungsnachholzeit ....................................................... ms ms
set / eingestellt measured / gemessen
Fault
Description of diagram / Diagrammbeschreibung
BB1
BB2
BB1: ............
BB2: ............
Feeder 1: ....
Coupler Feeder 2: ....

Feeder1 Feeder2
Coupler: ......
Faulty busbar trips immediatly / Fehlerhafter Schienenteil lst unverzgert aus..................................................

Intertriping on surrounding busbars / Mitnahme auf umliegende Schienenteile ...................................................
Coupler reclaim time / Kupplungsnachholzeit ....................................................... ms ms
set / eingestellt measured / gemessen
Coupler with 2 cts / Kupplung mit 2 Wandler:
Fault between cts / Fehler zwischen Wandlern ........................................................................................

Coupler / Kupplung immediate trip both sides / sofortige Ausl. beide Seiten
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1309.doc, Prep : A. Amrein 21.10.05, Rev. M, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:49:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:02:00
REB500
Breaker failure protection BFP / Schalterversager-Schutz SVS
Tests BFP / Prfung SVS:
Ext. start / Ext. Anregung.......................................................................................................................................

Ext. start without current / Ext. Anregung ohne Strom ..........................................................................................

Trip BFP after T1 / Auslsung SVS nach T1.........................................................................................................

Trip BFP after T2 / Auslsung SVS nach T2.........................................................................................................

Remote trip BFP / Fernauslsung SVS.................................................................................................................

Block BFP / Blockierung SVS................................................................................................................................

Signalisation BFP / Signalisierung SVS ................................................................................................................

Active for circuit breaker open / Aktiv bei geffnetem Schalter...................................................................... yes / ja
Settings BFP / Einstellungen SVS:
BFP active in feeder / SVS aktiv in Feld.......................................................................................................all / alle
Time delay / Verzgerungszeit T1................................................................100 ms .........................................

active / aktiv
Time delay / Verzgerungszeit T2................................................................120 ms .........................................

active / aktiv
Current setting BFP / Ansprechwert SVS...................................................................................................... 1.2 x IN
Remote trip configured after / Fernauslsung konfiguriert nach ............................ .........................................

T1 T2
Logic type / Logik Typ............................................................................................. .......... .......... ...........

1 2 3 4
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1310.doc, Prep : E.Wiederkehr 24.02.03, Rev. K, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:54:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:02:00
REB500
End fault protection / Endfehler-Schutz:
Tests EFP / Prfung EFS:
Intertrip EFP / Mitnahme EFS ...........................................................................................................................................

Remote trip EFP / Fernauslsung EFS ...........................................................................................................................

Block EFP / Blockierung EFS ................................................................................................................................

Signalisation EFP / Signalisierung EFS...........................................................................................................................

Close command CB / Einbefehl Leistungsschalter ...............................................................................................

Block EFP during bypass operation / Blockierung EFS bei Umgehungsbetrieb...................................................

Settings EFP / Einstellungen EFS:
EFP active in feeder / EFS aktiv in Feld .......................................................................................................all / alle
Pick-up value / Ansprechwert ........................................................................................................................ 1.2 x IN
Pick-up value time delay on opening cb / Ansprechverzgerung bei Schalterffnung ............................. ms
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1311.doc, Prep : E.Wiederkehr 24.02.03, Rev. M, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:54:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:03:00
REB500
Overcurrent protection / berstrom-Schutz:
Tests OCDT / Prfung UMZ:
Trip OCDT / Auslsung UMZ.................................................................................................................................

Block OCDT / Blockierung UMZ ............................................................................................................................

Signalisation OCDT / Signalisierung UMZ ............................................................................................................

Settings OCDT / Einstellungen UMZ:
OCDT active in feeder / UMZ aktiv in Feld...................................................................................................all / alle
Time delay / Zeitverzgerung .................................................................................................................... ms
Pick-up value / Ansprechwert ................................................................................................................... x IN
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
CB pole discrepancy function / Schalterpol-Diskrepanz-Schutz:
Tests PDF / Prfung SPD:
Trip PDF / Auslsung SPD ....................................................................................................................................

Block PDF / Blockierung SPD ...............................................................................................................................

Signalisation PDF / Signalisierung SPD................................................................................................................

Settings PDF / Einstellungen SPD:
PDF active in feeder / SPD aktiv in Feld ......................................................................................................all / alle

Time delay / Zeitverzgerung .................................................................................................................... ms
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
Checkzone protection function (CzBBP)/ Checkzonenschutzfunktion (CzSSS):
CzBBP active / CzSSS ist aktive ...........................................................................................................................

Ext. CzBBP bypass from the Central Unit / Ext. CzSSS-berbrckung von der Central Einheit .........................
Ext. CzBBP bypass from the Bay Units / Ext. CzSSS-berbrckung von der Feldeinheit..................................
CzBBP bypass by fiber optic cable interruption or BU failure /

CzSSS-berbrckung bei LWL Unterbruch oder BU-Ausfall ...............................................................................
tested
geprft
CzBBP bypass by a differetial current alarm and bypass mode /

CzSSS-berbrckung bei einem Differenzialstromalarm und Mode berbrcken ............................................
Ext. CzBBP bypass signalisation / Ext. CzBBP-berbrckung Signalisation .......................................................

Picture 1: CzBBP Principle / Zeichnung 1:CzSSS Prinzip
A I diff BB A > Ikmin / I diff SS A > Ikmin Case 1 with I1 + I2:

Also the currents I1 and I2 are above the Ikmin setting the busbar
B I diff BB B > Ikmin / I diff SS B > Ikmin protection doesnt trip by opposite current direction (I1 and I2) due to
the ceckzone protection (The checkzone protection blocks the BBP
in this case).
CB CB Case 2 with I1 + I2:
Fall 1 mit I1 + I2:

CT1 I1 CT2 Obwohl sich die Strme I1 und I2 ber dem Ikmin Einstellwert
I2 I2
befinden lst der Sammelschienenschutz, bei oppositioneller
Stromrichtung (I1 und I2), auf Grund des Checkzonenschutzes nicht
aus.(Der Checkzonenschutz blockiert in diesem Fall den SSS).
Fall 2 mit I1 + I2:
CT: current transformer / Stromwandler
Da die Strme I1 + I2 dieselbe Richtung aufweisen gibt der CZS
CB: circuit breaker / Schalter
den SSS frei.
I1 (I2): > Ikmin busbar / I1 (I2): > Ikmin Sammelschiene
Settings CzBBP / Einstellungen CzSSS:
Phase fault current / Kurzschlusstrom Ikmin ........................................................................................................ - A

k-factor / k-Faktor .....................................................................................................................................................-
Differentialcurrent alarm / Differenzstromalarm Idiff ........................................................................................... - %
Time delay Idiff / Zeitverzgerung Idiff ......................................................................................................................- s
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1314.doc, Prep : A. Amrein 20.09.2005, Rev. A, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:57:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:04:00
REB500
Check zone protection(CzBBP) stability test / Checkzonenschutz (CzSSS) Stabilittstest:
For further explanation see also enclosure checkzone protection function (CzBBP) picture 1.
Fr weitere Erklrungen siehe auch Beilage Checkzonenschutzfunktion (CzSSS) Bild 1
Ref. feeder Feeder used by CzBBP Internal fault External fault Remark
Ref. Abgang Abgang gebraucht bei CzSSS Fehler intern Fehler extern Bemerkung
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
Release no Release
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
External release / Externe Freigabe:

Ext. release BB zone / Ext. Freigabe SS-Zone ...............................................................................................
Internal undervoltage release / Interne Unterspannungs Freigabe:

U< active in zone / U< aktiv in Zone.............................................................................................................all / alle
Pick-up value U< / Ansprechwert U< .............................................................................................................. - x UN
Internal overvoltage release / Interne Ueberspannungs Freigabe:

U> active in zone / U> aktiv in Zone.............................................................................................................all / alle
Pick-up value U> / Ansprechwert U> .............................................................................................................. - x UN
Settings / Einstellungen
Trip condition
Release criterion / Freigabe Kriterien
Auslsebedingungen
External release U AND external U OR external Release
U only
input only release input release input corresponding
BU function
Nur externe U UND externe U ODER externe Freigabe der

Nur U
Freigabe SS Freigabe SS Freigabe SS dazugehrigen
Feld-Funktion
BBP L1L2L3 U<

BBP L0 U>
BFP
EFP
OCP
PDF
Ext TRIP zone CU
Ext TRIP zone BU
Ext TRIP
External voltage release / Externe Spannungs Freigabe:

Undervoltage relay, Combiflex XR 401934-CA
Unterspannungsrelais, Combiflex XR 401934-CA ................................................................................................
tested / geprft
Negative sequence voltage relay, Combiflex XR 401934-CB
Gegenspannungsrelais, Combiflex XR 401934-CB ..............................................................................................
tested / geprft
Zero sequence voltage relay, Combiflex XR 401934-CC
Nullspannungsrelais, Combiflex XR 401934-CC ..................................................................................................
tested / geprft
Remarks / Bemerkungen
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
Disturbance recorder / Strschreiber:
Configured / Konfiguriert........................................................................................................................................
Settings / Einstellungen
Number of records / Anzahl Aufzeichnungen..........................................................................................................2
In case of event overflow / Bei Speicherberlauf ................................................... .........................................

FIX FIFO
Main frequency / Grundfrequenz ........................................ .............................. .........................................

50 Hz 60 Hz 16.7 Hz
2 Bay Units: Analog channels / Analoge Kanle............................................... .........................................

4 x Current / Strom 4 / 5 x Voltage / Spannung
Binary trigger signals / Binre Triggersignale..............................................................................
tested
geprft
0 Bay Units: Analog channels / Analoge Kanle............................................... .........................................

4 x Current / Strom 4 / 5 x Voltage / Spannung
Binary trigger signals / Binre Triggersignale..............................................................................
tested
geprft
Sampling frequency / Abtastrate
Main frequency 50 Hz 60 Hz 16.7 Hz

Grundfrequenz
Sampling rate 600 Hz 1200 Hz 2400 Hz 720 Hz 1440 Hz 2880 Hz 201 Hz 401 Hz 802 Hz
Abtastrate
Total record
duration
Totale
Aufzeichnungs
Dauer
1.5 s st st st
3s st st st
6s st o1 st o1 st o1
10 s o2 o2 o2
12 s o1 o1 o1
20 s o2 o2 o2
24 s o1 o1 o1
40 s o2 o2 o2
st = Standard o1 = Option 1 o2 = Option 2
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
LON communication / LON Kommunikation
Activation / Aktivierung ........................................................................................... .........................................

IBB 1 IBB 2
LON Station Address ......................................................................................................................................
VATS nv_pattern_time index .............. VATS nv_pulse_time index...............
nv_clock_warning index ..................... nv_clock index...............
Sync. method:
Clock with warning ........ VATS bit pattern -based........ VATS pulse-based ........
Communication tested / Kommunikation geprft...................................................................................................
IEC 61850-8-1 interface / IEC 61850-8-1 Schnittstelle

IBB 1 IBB 2
IP-Address ..................... Subnet Mask............... Gateway Address ...............
Interface Typ......................... .......................... Redundant

Electrical Optical
SNTP Server 1................................ SNTP Server 2..........................................
Time zone correction / Zeitzonenkorrektur h min
Protocol stack options / Protokollstackoptionen: ........................................................................RCBs buffered
IED name: ..................................................... Sync. source...........
IEC 60870-5-103 interface / IEC 60870-5-103 Schnittstelle

IBB 1 IBB 2
IEC-103 address.................. Baudrate ....................... Sync. source...........
Remark / Bemerkung:
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1318.doc, Prep : A. Amrein 01.09.05, Rev. N, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:58:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:06:00
REB500sys
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite: 1/5
Bay Protection Functions, Default Settings for the Test

Abgangssschutz Funktionen, Einstellungen fr die Prfung:
Protection Functions / Schutzfunktionen Variant / Variante:

1 2 3 4 5
Distance DIST X X X
Sensitive Earth Fault (GND) DIREFGND X X X
Definite Time Overcurrent OCDT X X X X X
Standard Variants
InverseTime Earth Fault IOINV X X X X X

Autoreclosure AR X X X
Synchrocheck SYNC X X
Three Phase Current Plausability CHKI3PH X X X X X
Directional Overcurrent DIROCDT X X
Over / Undervoltage OVDT X
Logic LOGIC X X X X X
InverseTime Overcurrent OCINV X X X X X
Directional Inverse Time O/C DIROCINV X X X X X
Options
Sensitive Earth Fault (Isol. Netw.) DIREFISOL X X X X X

Three Phase Voltage Plausability CHKU3PH X X X X X
Delay DELAY X X X X X
Distance Function / Distanz Funktion (DIST)
Parameter 100 V / 1 A 100 V / 5 A 200 V / 1 A 200 V / 5 A

Reference Length 1 1 1 1 (/Ph)
Parameters
CT Neutral Bus Side Bus Side Bus Side Bus Side

General
I O/C 0 0 0 0 (In)
Delay O/C 5 5 5 5 (s)
Time PS Block 3 3 3 3 (s)
Start Mode UZ UZ UZ UZ
Phase Sel Mode Solid Ground Solid Ground Solid Ground Solid Ground
I Start 4 4 4 4 (In)
I Min 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 (In)
3Io Min 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 (In)
3 Uo Min 0 0 0 0 (Un)
Starting
Xa 50.0 10.0 100.0 20.0 (/Ph)

XB -10.0 -2.0 -20.0 -4.0 (/Ph)
RA 40.0 8.0 80.0 16.0 (/Ph)
RB -30.0 -6.0 -60.0 -12.0 (/Ph)
Rload 20.0 4.0 40.0 8.0 (/Ph)
Angle Load 45 Deg 45 Deg 45 Deg 45 Deg (Deg)
Uweak 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 (Un)
X(1) 3.0 0.6 6.0 1.2 (/Ph)
Measurement
R(1) 1.0 0.2 2.0 0.4 (/Ph)

RR(1) 3.0 0.6 6.0 1.2 (/Ph)
RRE(1) 4.0 0.8 8.0 1.6 (/Ph)
ko(1) 1 1 1 1
ko Angle (1) 0 0 0 0 (Deg)
Delay (1) 0 0 0 0 (s)
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1319.doc, Prep : J. Hegetschweiler, Rev. B, 24.02.03 Printed : 05/02/2007 10:59:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:07:00
Page / Seite: 2/5
Parameter 100 V / 1 A 100 V / 5 A 200 V / 1 A 200 V / 5 A

X(2) 6.0 1.2 12.0 2.4 (/Ph)
R(2) 2.0 0.4 4.0 0.8 (/Ph)
RR(2) 6.0 1.2 12.0 2.4 (/Ph)
RRE(2) 8.0 1.6 16.0 3.2 (/Ph)
ko(2) 1 1 1 1
ko Angle (2) 0 0 0 0 (Deg)
Delay (2) 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 (s)
X(3) 10.0 2.0 20.0 4.0 (/Ph)
R(3) 3.0 0.6 6.0 1.2 (/Ph)
RR(3) 8.0 1.6 16.0 3.2 (/Ph)
RRE(3) 10.0 2.0 20.0 4 (/Ph)
ko(3) 1 1 1 1
ko Angle (3) 0 0 0 0 (Deg)
Delay (3) 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 (s)
Measurement
X(4/OR) 15.0 3.0 30.0 6.0 (/Ph)

R(4/OR) 4.0 0.8 8.0 1.6 (/Ph)
RR(4/OR) 10.0 2.0 20.0 4.0 (/Ph)
RRE(4/OR) 12.0 2.4 24.0 4.8 (/Ph)
ko(4/OR) 1 1 1 1
ko Angle (4/OR) 0 0 0 0 (Deg)
Delay (4/OR) 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5 (s)
X(Back) 0 0 0 0 (/Ph)
R(Back) 0 0 0 0 (/Ph)
RR(Back) 0 0 0 0 (/Ph)
RRE(Back) 0 0 0 0 (/Ph)
Delay (Def) 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 (s)
kom 0 0 0 0
kom Angle 0 0 0 0 (Deg)
I Load 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 I(n)
U min Fault 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 (Un)
Mem Dir Mode Trip Trip Trip Trip
Def Dir Mode Nondir Nondir Nondir Nondir
Block Z1 Off Off Off Off
Com Mode PUTT nondir PUTT nondir PUTT nondir PUTT nondir
Trip Mode 1 Ph Trip 1 Ph Trip 1 Ph Trip 1 Ph Trip
SOTF Mode Nondir Nondir Nondir Nondir
SOTF 10s On On On On
Trip Schemes
Weak Off Off Off Off

Unblock Off Off Off Off
Echo Off Off Off Off
Trans Block Off Off Off Off
t1 Block 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 (s)
t1 Trans Block 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 (s)
t2 Trans Block 3 3 3 3 (s)
t1 Evolv Faults 3 3 3 3 (s)
VT Sup Mode Zero Seq Zero Seq Zero Seq Zero Seq
VT Supervision
VT Sup Blk Del Off Off Off Off

VT Sup Deb Del On On On On
Uo min VT Sup 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 (Un)
Io min VT Sup 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07 (In)
U2 min VT Sup 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 (Un)
I2 min VT Sup 0.07 0.07 0.07 0.07 (In)
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Page / Seite: 3/5

Sensitive Earth Fault for Grounded Systems (DIREFGND)
Empfindlicher Erdschluss Schutz fr starr geerdete Netze
Parameter
V-Setting 0.2 (Un)
I-Setting 0.1 (In)
Angle 60 (Deg)
t Basic 0.2 (s)
t Wait 0.05 (s)
t Trans Block 0.1 (s)
CT Neutral Bus Side
Communication Mode Permissive
Send Mode Meas. Fwd
1 channel On
Echo Mode Off
Definite Time Overcurrent / Unabhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCDT)
Parameter
Delay 1.0 (s)
I-Setting 2.3 (In)
Max /Min Max (1Ph)
Number of Phases 3 Ph
Inverse Time Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCINV)
Parameter
c - Setting 1 Very Inverse (BS142)
K1 - Setting 13.5 (In)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
Min. Tripping Time 0 (S)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV)
Parameter
c - Setting 0.02 Normal Inverse (BS142)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Page / Seite: 4/5
Definite Time Over- and Undervoltage (OVDT)

Unabhngig verzgerter Uebers und Unterspannungsschutz
Parameter
Delay 1.0 (s)
U-Setting 1.2 (Un)
Max / Min Max (1Ph)
Voltage Input Channel VT U1
Three Phase Current Plausability / Plausibilitt Strom dreiphasig (CHKI3PH)
Parameter
I-Setting 0.2 (In)
Delay 20 (Sec)
CT - Compensation 1
Directional Definite Time Overcurrent (DIROCDT)

Unabhngig verzgerter Ueberstromrichtungsschutz
Parameter
I-Setting 2.0 (In)
Angle 45 (Deg) Version 6.xx: -135 Deg
Delay 1.0 (s)
t-Wait 0.2 (s)
Mem Dir Mode Trip
Mem Duration 2 (s)
Directional Sensitive Earth Fault Protection for Ungrounded or Compensated Systems (DIREFISOL)
Empfindlicher Erdschluss Richtungs-Schutz fr ungeerdete ode kompensierte Netze
Parameter
P-Setting 0.05 (Pn)
Angle -90 (Deg)
Drop-Ratio 60 (%)
Delay 0.5 (s)
Pn 1 (Un*In
)
Phi-Comp 0 (Deg)
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Page / Seite: 5/5

Autoreclosure / Wiedereinschaltung (AR)
Parameter
1. AR Mode 1P3P - 1P3P
General
2.-4. AR Mode Off
t dead 1P 1.2 (s)
Timers
t dead 3P 0.6 (s)
t dead 1 Ext 1 (s)
t dead 2 1.2 (s)
t dead 3 5.0 (s)
t dead 4 60.0 (s)
t Operation 0.5 (s)
t Inhibit 5.0 (s)
t Close 0.25 (s)
t Discrim 1P 0.6 (s)
t Discrim 3P 0.3 (s)
t Timeout 1 (s)
t AR Block 5.0 (s)
SC Bypass 1P On
Synchrocheck
SC Bypass 1P3P Off
ZE Prefault Off
Zone Extension
ZE 1. AR - ZE 4. AR Off
Master Follower Logic Master Mode Off
Binary Input CO Ready True
Synchrocheck / Synchrocheck (SYNC)
Parameter
Max. Volt Diff 0.2 (Un)
General Parameters
Max. Phase Diff 10 (Deg)
Max. Frequency Diff 0.2 (Hz)
Minimum Voltage 0.7 (Un)
Maximum Voltage 0.3 (Un)
Operation Mode Synchck only
Supervising Time 0.2 (s)
t - Reset 0.05 (s)
Voltage Busbar Input Phase 1 Ph R-S
Analog Input
Voltage Line Input Phase 3 Ph Star
ABB Switzerland Ltd

REB500
Feeder / Abgang
Bay Protection Functions / Abgangssschutz Funktionen : Variant / Variante:
Distance Protection / Distanzschutz (DIST) ........................................................................................................

Sensitive Earth Fault for grounded networks / Empf. Erdschlussrichtungsschutz geerd. Netze (DIREFGND)...
Sensitive Earth Fault for isol. networks / Empf. Erdschlussrichtungsschutz isol. Netze (DIREFISOL) ..............
Definite Time Overcurrent / Unabhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCDT) .............................................

InverseTime Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (I0INV) ..............
Three Phase Current Plausability / Plausibilitt Strom dreiphasig (CHKI3PH)...................................................

Autoreclosure / Wiedereinschaltung (AR) ...........................................................................................................

Synchrocheck / Synchrocheck (SYNC)...............................................................................................................

Directional Definite Time Overcurrent / Unabhngig verzgerter Ueberstromrichtungsschutz (DIROCDT) ......

Directional Inverse Time Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter gerichteteter Ueberstromschutz (DIROCINV) ...
Definite Time Over-/Undervoltage / Unabhngig verzgerter Ueber-/Unterspannungsschutz (OVDT) .............

Inverse Time Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCINV).................................................

Three Phase Voltage Plausability / Plausibilitt Spannung dreiphasig (CHKU3PH) ..........................................

Logic / Logik (LOGIC)..........................................................................................................................................

Delay / Verzgerung (DELAY).............................................................................................................................

ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1320.doc, Prep : J. Hegetschweiler 20.04.2003, Rev. B, Printed : 05/02/2007 10:59:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:09:00
Page 1/3
ABB Switzerland Ltd Test Report: REB500sys

Power Systems Enclosure:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________
CU Serial No : Tested with :
Bay Designation : Test Program :
Station : Tested by :
Variant : Date :
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Distance Status:
Under Impedance Starting
|Fault Type |Angle |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Deg |Ohm |Ohm |% |% | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L2 | 90 | | | | | |
|L3-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L1-L2 | 90 | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | 90 | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | 90 | | | | | |
Measuring System Zone 1

| |Deg |Ohm |Ohm |% |% | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L2-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L3-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L1-E | 68 | | | | | |
|L1-E | 48 | | | | | |
|L1-E | 36 | | | | | |
|L1-E | 0 | | | | | |
|L2-E | 0 | | | | | |
|L3-E | 0 | | | | | |
Measuring System Zone 2, 3, 4

| |Deg |Ohm |Ohm |% |% | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | | |
Tripping Time Zone 1

|Fault Type |Angle |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance | Status |
| |Deg |Sec |Sec |< Sec | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | |
|L2-E | 90 | | | | |
|L3-E | 90 | | | | |
|L1-L2 | 90 | | | | |
|L2-L3 | 90 | | | | |
|L3-L1 | 90 | | | | |
Tripping Time Zone 2, 3, 4, 5

|Fault Type |Angle |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Status |
| |Deg |Sec |Sec |Sec | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | |
|L1-E | 90 | | | | |
Page 2/3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Directional Earth Fault Status:
I-Value Tested at 0.25 Un

|Fault Type |Nom.Value |Meas.Value |Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Amp |Amp |% |% | |
|Earth Fault| | | | | |
Char. Angle
|Fault Type |Nom.Value |Meas.Value |Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Deg |Deg |Deg |Deg | |
|Earth Fault| | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Over Current Status:

|Fault Type |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |
| |Amp |Amp |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | |
| |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |

| |Sec |Sec |Sec |Sec | |
|Trip.Time | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Earth Fault Status:
Normal Inverse K1 = 0.14 c = 0.02
|Fault Type |Current |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |

| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Over Voltage Status:

| |Volt |Volt |% |% | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |
| | | | | | |

| | | | | | |
Page 3/3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Autoreclosure Status:
| |Fault Type|Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance |Error | Status |
| | |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|Pause 1Ph |L1-E | | | | | |
|Pause 3Ph |L1-L2 | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Synchrocheck Status:
| Test Condition |Fault Type| Expected Function | Status |
| 8 Deg Phase Diff |L1-L2 | Synchrocheck permits Autoreclosure | |
|12 Deg Phase Diff |L1-L2 | Synchrocheck blocks Autoreclosure | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Directional Over Current Status:

| | | |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | |
Char. Angle
| |Deg |Deg |Deg |Deg | |
| | | | | | |

|Trip.Time | | | | | |
REB500sys
Serial-no CU / Serie-Nr ZE Enclosure / Beilage: ; Page / Seite: 1/2
Transformer Protection Functions, Default Settings for the Test

Trafosschutz Funktionen, Einstellungen fr die Prfung:
Variant / Variante:
T-V1
Transformer Differential Protection DIFTRA X
Thermal Overload THF X
Peak Overcurrent Protection OCINST X
Definite Time Overcurrent Protection OCDT X
InverseTime Overcurrent Protection OCINV X
InverseTime Earth Fault Overcurrent IOINV X
Three Phase Current Plausability CHKI3PH X
Logic LOGIC X
Delay DELAY X
Option
Transformer Differential Function / Trafo differentialschutz Funktion (DIFTRA)
Parameter
g-Setting 0.2 (In)
v-Setting 0.5
b-Setting 1.5 (In)
g-High 2.0 (In)
I-Inst 10 (In)
Inrush Ratio 10 (%)
Inrush Time 5 (s)
a1 1
s1 Y
a2 1
s2 y0
a3 1
s3 d1
Thermal Overload Function / Uebertemperaturschutz Funktion (TH)
Parameter
Theta Begin 100 (%)
Theta Warning 105 (%)
Theta Trip 110 (%)
Ib-Setting 1.0 (In)
Time Constant 5 (Min)
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1322.doc, Prep : J. Hegetschweiler, Rev. A, 2005-06-03 Printed : 05/02/2007 11:00:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:10:00
Page / Seite: 2/2

Peak Overcurrent Function / Maximal Ueberstromschutz (OCINST)
Parameter
Delay 0.01 (s)
I-Setting 4 (In)
Min. Frequency 40 (Hz)
Definite Time Overcurrent Function / Unabhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCSTD)
Parameter
Delay 1.0 (s)
I-Setting 2.3 (In)
Max /Min Max (1Ph)
Inverse Time Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCINV)
Parameter
c - Setting 1 Very Inverse (BS142)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV)
Parameter
c - Setting 0.02 Normal Inverse (BS142)
I-Start 1.1 (IB)
IB - Setting 1 (In)
Three Phase Current Plausability / Plausibilitt Strom dreiphasig (CHKI3PH)
Parameter
I-Setting 0.2 (In)
Delay 20 (Sec)
CT - Compensation 1
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Filename: Reb5sys-E1322.doc, Prep : J. Hegetschweiler, Rev. A, 2005-06-03 Printed : 05/02/2007 11:00:00, Saved :30/10/2006 11:10:00
REB500sys
Feeder / Abgang
Transformer Protection Functions / Transformatorschutz Funktionen : Variant / Variante:
A-Side / Seite A
Transformer Differential Function (DIFTRA) /

Trafo-Differentialschutz Funktion (DIFTRA) ..........................................................................................................
Thermal Overload Function / Uebertemperaturschutz Funktion (TH).................................................................

Peak Overcurrent Function / Maximal Ueberstromschutz (OCINST) .................................................................

Definite Time Overcurrent Function / Unabhngig verzgerter Ueberstromschutz (OCSTD)............................


Inverse Time Earth Fault Overcurrent / Abhngig verzgerter Erdschluss Ueberstromschutz (IOINV).............

B-Side / Seite B



ABB Switzerland Ltd

Page / Seite 2/2
C-Side / Seite-C



Common / Gemeinsam
Logic / Logik...........................................................................................................................................................
Delay / Verzgerung ..............................................................................................................................................

Remark / Bemerkung:
A + B Side: 2 Windig Transformer /

A + B Seite: 2 Wicklungs-Transformator
A + B + C Side: 3 Windign Transformer /

A + B + C Seite: 3 Wicklungs-Transformator
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Page 1/3

________________________________________________________________________________________________________
CU Serial No : Tested with :
Bay Designation : Test Program :
Station : Tested by :
Variant : Date :
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Transformer Differential Status Side A+B:

Status Side A+C:
| |Amp |Amp |% |% | |
|L1-E Side A | | | | | |
|L2-E Side A | | | | | |
|L3-E Side A | | | | | |
|L1-E Side B | | | | | |
|L2-E Side B | | | | | |
|L3-E Side B | | | | | |
|L1-E Side C | | | | | |
|L2-E Side C | | | | | |
|L3-E Side C | | | | | |
| |Nom.Value |Meas.Value|Tolerance | Status |

| |Sec |Sec |< Sec | |
|Trip.Time | | | | |
Stability Test
External 3-Ph fault, Side A - B: No trip Status:
Internal 3-Ph fault, Side A - B: Trip Status:
External 3-Ph fault, Side A - C: No trip Status:
Internal 3-Ph fault, Side A - C: Trip Status:
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Over Current A-Side Status:

| |Amp |Amp |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | |

|Trip.Time | | | | | |
Page 2/3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Over Current A-Side Status:

Very Inverse K1 = 13.5 c = 1
| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-L2 | | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | | | | | | |
|L1-L2 | | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Earth Fault A-Side Status:

| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Over Current B-Side Status:

| |Amp |Amp |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | |

|Trip.Time | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Over Current B-Side Status:

| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-L2 | | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | | | | | | |
|L1-L2 | | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | | | | | | |
Page 3/3

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Earth Fault B-Side Status:

| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Over Current C-Side Status:

| |Amp |Amp |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | |

|Trip.Time | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Over Current C-Side Status:

| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-L2 | | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | | | | | | |
|L1-L2 | | | | | | |
|L2-L3 | | | | | | |
|L3-L1 | | | | | | |
__________________________________________________________________________________________________________
Inverse Time Earth Fault C-Side Status:

| |Amp |Sec |Sec |% |% | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
|L1-E | | | | | | |
|L2-E | | | | | | |
|L3-E | | | | | | |
Fr dieses Dokument und den darin dargestellten Gegenstand behalten wir uns alle Rechte vor. Vervielfltigungen, Bekanntgabe an Dritte oder Verwertung seines Inhalts sind ohne unsere
ausdrckliche Zustimmung verboten. ABB Schweiz AG; 2005
Sammelschienen- & Schalterversagerschutz REB500

Sammelschienen-, Schalterversager- & Abgangsschutz REB500sys
Endkunde :
Anlage :
Auftraggeber :
ABB Bestell-Nr. :
Geprft: Prfdatum:
Visum:
Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll
Abt. PTUSX
Sprache Seite
1
ABB ABB Schweiz AG DE
2005-08
ABB Inbetriebsetzungs-Protokoll Seite:
Anlage: 2005-08
Sammelschienenschutz Typ REB500/REB500sys
Checkliste
Art der Kontrolle Bemerkungen Seite
Sichtkontrolle auf Transportschden
Sichtkontrolle der externen Verdrahtung
Kontrolle der Schrank-/Gerteerdung
Kontrolle der Speisespannung (DC)

s. sep.
Kontrolle der Einstellungen (berechnet von ....) Ausdruck
Kontrolle der Stromwandlerkreise
Kontrolle der Spannungswandlerkreise
Kontrolle der Bussegment und Device Zuordnung
Sekundreinspeisung mit Prfgert Typ ......
Trennerhilfskontakte (Trennerabbild)
Schalterhilfskontakte / Hand-Ein
Integrierter Schalterreserveschutz
Anregung (externer) Schalterreserveschutz
Kontrolle der HF Kreise
HF - "End to End" Test
Kontrolle der Eingangssignale
Kontrolle der Signalkreise / Alarme
Kontrolle der Auslsekreise
Kontrolle der Wiedereinschaltung
Richtungskontrolle Distanzschutz
Stabilittskontrolle Sammelschienenschutz
Stabilittskontrolle Trafodifferenzialschutz
Systemzeit setzen
Traceability Daten aktualisieren
Index MDB-File anpassen (neuer Index)
Schlusskontrolle
Kunde
Datum: Visum: Datum: Visum:
Anlage: 2005-08
Allgemeine Angaben
Nennspannung der geschtzten Anlage ............... kV
Art der Anlage (Doppelschiene, 1 System ...) ...................................................................................

Freiluft ...................................................................................
Gasisoliert ...................................................................................
Softwareversionen ...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
Setfile (MDB-File) ...................................................................................
Verwendete Schemen ...................................................................................

(Bezeichnung, Nr. und nderungsindex) ...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
...................................................................................
Kontrolle der Speisespannung
Art der Batterieerdung ...................................................................................

(Minus geerdet, isoliert, ...................................................................................
hochohmig symmetrisch geerdet ...)
Gemessene Spannungen:
Erste Batterie: Zweite Batterie: nicht vorhanden

Plus gegen Minus ............... V Plus gegen Minus ............... V
Plus gegen Erde ............... V Plus gegen Erde ............... V
Erde gegen Minus ............... V Erde gegen Minus ............... V
Kontrolle der Trennerhilfskontakte
Trennerendstellung "AUS" Trennerendstellung "EIN" Bedingung der Trenner-Schaltsequenz erfllt:

Ja Nein
Isolationsabstand
EIN Hilfskontakt
(Schliesser) Bemerkungen:
....................................................................................
AUS Hilfskontakt
(ffner) ....................................................................................
....................................................................................
Hilfskontakt muss geschlossen sein
....................................................................................
Hilfskontakt kann geschlossen sein ....................................................................................
Hilfskontakt muss offen sein ....................................................................................
....................................................................................
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Binres Ein-/Ausgabemodul 500BIO01
Zentraleinheit Steckplatz (physik.) ..........
Binre Eingnge Funktion/Bemerkung geprft
OC01 ..................................................................................................
1
OC01
2 OC02 ..................................................................................................
OC02
3 OC03 ..................................................................................................
OC03
4
OC04 5 OC04 ..................................................................................................
6
7
OC05 OC05 ..................................................................................................
8
OC06
9 OC06 ..................................................................................................
OC07
10 OC07 ..................................................................................................
OC08 11
12
13 OC08 ..................................................................................................
OC09
14
OC10 OC09 ..................................................................................................
15
OC11
16 OC10 ...................................................................................................
OC12 17
18
OC11 ..................................................................................................
OC12 ..................................................................................................
Auslse- und Meldekontakte
1 CR01 ..................................................................................................
2
CR01 3 CR02 ..................................................................................................
CR02 4
CR03 5 CR03 ..................................................................................................
6
CR04 7
CR04 ..................................................................................................
8
9
CR05 ..................................................................................................
CR05 10
11
12
CR06 ..................................................................................................
CR06 13
14 CR07 ..................................................................................................
15
CR07 16 CR08 ..................................................................................................
CR08 17
CR09 18 CR09 ..................................................................................................
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Feldeinheit 500BU03
Abgang ..
Binre Eingnge Funktion/Bemerkung geprft
A 1
OC01
OC01 ..................................................................................................
2
3
OC02 OC02 ..................................................................................................
5
OC03 OC03 ..................................................................................................
6
OC04
7 OC04 ..................................................................................................
8
9
OC05 OC05 ..................................................................................................
10
OC06
11 OC06 ..................................................................................................
12
13
OC07
OC07 ..................................................................................................
14
OC08
15
OC08 ..................................................................................................
16
17
OC09
18 OC09 ..................................................................................................
B 1
OC10 OC10 ...................................................................................................
2
OC11
OC11 ..................................................................................................
3
OC12
4
OC12 ..................................................................................................
5
6
OC13 OC13 ..................................................................................................
7
OC14
OC14 ..................................................................................................
8
OC15
9 OC15 ..................................................................................................
10
11
OC16 OC16 ...................................................................................................
12
OC17
OC17 ...................................................................................................
13
OC18
14
OC18 ...................................................................................................
15
16
OC19
OC19 ...................................................................................................
17
OC20
18 OC20 ...................................................................................................
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Feldeinheit 500BU03
Abgang ..
Auslse- und Meldekontakte Funktion/Bemerkung geprft
1 C
CR01 2
CR01 ..................................................................................................
3
CR02 5 CR02 ..................................................................................................

6
CR03 8
CR03 ..................................................................................................
9
10
CR04 CR04 ..................................................................................................
11
CR05 12 CR05 ..................................................................................................
13
CR06
14 CR06 ..................................................................................................
CR07 15
CR07 ..................................................................................................
1 D
2
CR08 ..................................................................................................
CR08 3
CR09
4
CR09 ..................................................................................................
CR10
5 CR10 ..................................................................................................
6
7 CR11 ..................................................................................................
CR11 8
CR12
9 CR12 ..................................................................................................
CR13 10
CR13 ..................................................................................................
11
12
CR14 ..................................................................................................
CR14 13
CR15 14 CR15 ..................................................................................................

CR16 15
CR16 ..................................................................................................
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Sekundreinspeisung: Kontrolle der Eingangsstromwandler
Messung des Ansprechwertes IKmin
Einstellung: Ikmin L1, L2, L3 ............... A Ikmin L0 ............... A
Jeder Eingangsstromwandler ist einmal zu messen

Abgang Stromwandler- Einspeisung Sollwert [A] Messwert [A]
bersetzung [A/A] auf Schiene
[ABB Nr.] IL1,I L2,I L3 IL0 IL1,I L2,I L3 IL0 IL1 I L2 I L3 I L0
Bemerkungen:
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Sekundreinspeisung: Kontrolle der Eingangsspannungswandler
Abgang Spannungswandler- Eingespeiste Anzeige LMI / MMK

bersetzung [kV/V] Sekundrspannung [V] Spannung [kV]
[ABB Nr.] U 1-3 U4 U5 U 1-3 U4 U5 U1 U2 U3 U4 U5
Bemerkungen:
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Stabilittskontrolle Sammelschienenschutz mit Primreinspeisung mit Betriebsstrmen
Schiene / Schienenteil ...............

Abgang Primrer Anzeige LMI / MMK Anzeige LMI / MMK
Abgangsstrom [A] Abgangsstrom [A] Differenzstrom [A]
[ABB Nr.] L1 L2 L3 L1 L2 L3 L0 L1 L2 L3 L0
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
..... -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- .....
auf Schiene ..... -- ..... -- -- ..... -- ..... -- ..... -- .....
offen -- -- ..... -- -- ..... ..... -- -- ..... .....
Bemerkungen:
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Abgangsschutz (Leitungsschutz)
Abgang ..
Primre Leitungsdaten
Lnge ..................... km
Mitimpedanz ..................... /Ph Winkel ....................
Nullimpedanz ..................... /Ph Winkel ....................
Sekundreinspeisung
Impedanzfunktion Erdschlussfunktion "ErdFehlerIsol"

Sollwert Messwert [/Ph] Sollwert Messwert
[/Ph] L1 L2 L3 [VA] [V * A = VA]
X (1) Vorwrts
X (2) --- --- Rckwrts
X (3) --- --- Erdschlussfunktion "ErdFehlGeerdet2"
X (4/R) --- --- I-Wert [A] U-Wert [V]
XA --- --- Sollwert Messwert Sollwert Messwert
XB --- ---
Synchrocheckfunktion
Parallele Einspeisung (1phasig) von "uEingLeitung" und "uEingSchien1" bzw. "uEingSchien2"
"uEingLeitung" parallel "uEingSchien1" "uEingLeitung" parallel "uEingSchien2"
Differenzspannung Differenzwinkel Differenzspannung Differenzwinkel
Spg. Usoll Uist * soll ist * Usoll Uist * soll ist *
[V] [UN] [UN] [Grad] [Grad] [UN] [UN] [Grad] [Grad]
* Aus Men "Ansicht AS Funktions Monitoring" ablesen; Synchrocheckfunktion muss aktiv sein
Weitere Funktionen Resultat

............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
Kunde
Anlage: 2005-08
Abgangsschutz (Trafoschutz)
Abgang ..
Daten des Transformators
Hersteller ............................................... Typ der Khlung ....................

Typ ............................................... (ONAN, ONAF etc.)
Nennleistung .............../.............../............... MVA Schaltgruppe ....................
Primrwicklung OS Sekundrwicklung US Tertirwicklung TS

Nennspannung .................... kV .................... kV .................... kV .................... kV
Nennstrom .................... A .................... A .................... A
Kurzschluss- OS-US .................... % bei .................... MVA

spannungen OS-TS .................... % bei .................... MVA
US-TS .................... % bei .................... MVA
Primrwandler-bersetzungen
Analogeingnge I1 - I3 ...................../................... A/A
Sekundreinspeisung
Differentialfunktion
Messen der Grundeinstellung g
Primrwicklung OS (A) Sekundrwicklung US (B) Tertirwicklung TS (C)
Phase Sollwert [A]* Messwert [A] Sollwert [A]* Messwert [A] Sollwert [A]* Messwert [A]
L1
L2
L3
* Sollwert bei einphasiger Einspeisung = g * (1/a) * IN * k
k = 3 fr Sternschaltung; k = 1 fr Dreieckschaltung; k = 1.5 fr Zickzackschaltung
Weitere Funktionen Resultat

............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
............................................................................................................................................ ..............
Kunde
Notification Form for Errors in this Document
Dear User,
We are always endeavoring to improve the quality of our technical publications and
would like to hear your suggestions and comments. Would you therefore please fill in
this questionnaire and return it to the address given below.
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Power Systems
Technical Publications Dept. PS-BD
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5401 Baden
Fax +41 58 585 35 82
Concerns publication: 1MRB520292-Uen (REB500/REB500sys V7.50)
Have you discovered any mistakes in this publication? If so, please note here the
pages, sections etc.
Do you find the publication readily understandable and logically structured? Can you
make any suggestions to improve it?
Is the information sufficient for the purpose of the publication? If not, what is missing
and where should it be included?
Name: Date:
Company:
Postal code: Town: Country:

Notification Form for Equipment Faults and Problems
Dear User,
Should you be obliged to call on our repair service, we kindly as you to attach a note
to the unit describing the fault as precisely as possible. This will assist us to carry out
the repair swiftly and reliably and you will gain the benefit.
Please attach a completed form to every unit and forward them to the address below.
ABB Switzerland Ltd

Power Systems
Repair Center
Warenannahme Terminal CA
Bruggerstrasse 72
CH-5401 Baden
Equipment data:
Unit type:
Serial No.: HE ..................................
In operation since:
Reason for return: (tick where applicable)
Overfunction
No function
Outside tolerance
Abnormal operating temperature
Sporadic error
Unit for checking
Remarks/Description of fault:
Customer: Date:
Address:
Please contact: Phone: Fax:

Notification Form for Software Errors and Problems
Dear User,
It is common experience that software does not always function as expected for all
applications. A precise description of the problem and observations will help us to
improve and maintain the software to your benefit. Please complete this form and
send it together with any supporting information or documents to the address below.
ABB Power Technologies AB

Substation Automation
Product Support, Supportline
SE-721 59 Vsters
Sweden
Telefax +46 21 14 69 18
E-mail: sa-t.supportline@se.abb.com
Unit: REB500 SW version: Operator program (PC) SW version:
REB500sys SW version:
Problem: Program error (unit/system) Program error (HMI / PC)

Manual error Suggestion for improvement
other:
Can the error be reproduced at will? yes no
Particulars of hardware and software (system configuration, type of PC etc.):
Problem located? yes no

Suggested changes enclosed? yes no
The following are enclosed (floppy with settings etc.):
Floppy Unit/system settings, file name:

other:
Description of problem:
Customer: Date:
Address:
Please contact: Phone: Fax:

DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM: (continuation)
ACTION (internal use of ABB Sweden only)
Received by: Date:

Answered by: Date:
Problem solved? yes no
Week: Name: Position: Consequence:

IMPORTANT NOTICE!
The busbar resp. station protection REB500/REB500sys may

only be installed, operated and maintained by trained personnel.
Experience has shown that reliable operation of our products is

assured, providing the information and recommendations
contained in these Operating Instructions are adhered to.
It is scarcely possible for the instructions to cover every

eventuality that can occur when using technical devices and
systems. We would therefore request the user to notify us di-
rectly or our agent of any unusual observations or of instances, in
which these instructions provide no or insufficient information.
In addition to these instructions, any applicable local regulations

and safety procedures must always be strictly observed both
when connecting up and commissioning this equipment.
Any work such as insertion or removal of soldered jumpers or

setting resistors, which may be necessary, may only be
performed by appropriately qualified personnel.
We expressly accept no responsibility for any direct damage,

which may result from incorrect operation of this equipment, even
if no reference is made to the particular situation in the Operating
Instructions.
ABB Switzerland Ltd
Power Systems
Bruggerstrasse 72
Phone +41 58 585 77 44
Fax +41 58 585 55 77
Printed in Switzerland (0812-0000-0)

Reb500 User Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Reb500 User Manual PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

REB500/REB500sys 1MRB520292-Uen

Edition December 2008

Numerical Station Protection System

Applies for software version V7.50

4. External operator program (HMI500) F

5. Configuration and settings G

6. Erection and installation A

8. Operation and maintenance D

10. Storage, decommissioning and disposal A

11. Options for busbar protection G

12. Option for bay protection G

1.1. REB500/REB500sys................................................................ 1-2

1.2. Application ............................................................................... 1-2

1.3. Main features ........................................................................... 1-3

1.4. Options .................................................................................... 1-4

1.5. Line and feeder options (REB500sys only).............................. 1-5

1.6. Using these operating instructions........................................... 1-6

It is thus able to protect all busbar layouts, whether a single set

NOTE: Because of their limited number of inputs and outputs,

The protection system REB500 detects phase and ground faults

1.3. Main features

Short operating time irrespective of station size and

Communication with station control and supervision systems

1.5. Line and feeder options (REB500sys only)

Rate-of-change of frequency protection

1.6. Using these operating instructions

Chapter 8 describes the system operating procedures in normal

2.1. Safety instruction flags............................................................. 2-2

2.2. General rules ........................................................................... 2-2

2.3. General safety instructions ...................................................... 2-3

2.4. Instructions for the specific product ......................................... 2-4

2.1. Safety instruction flags

DANGER: This symbol indicates immediate danger due to high

WARNING: This symbol draws attention to a dangerous situa-

NOTE: An important instruction that must be observed.

2.2. General rules

2.3. General safety instructions

DANGER: Live electrical equipment is in the immediate vicinity

DANGER: The busbar protection system REB500/REB500sys

DANGER: Strictly observe all safety precautions (interlocks,

CAUTION: Only properly authorized, professionally qualified

2.4. Instructions for the specific product

DANGER: Take care never to open the secondary circuits of

DANGER: There is a danger of contact with live parts when

NOTE: Electrostatic discharge can destroy components in the

NOTE: Other safety instructions pertaining to particular

3.1. Application and system capacity.............................................. 3-3

3.2. System structure ...................................................................... 3-6

3.3. Hardware modules................................................................. 3-12

3.4. Software................................................................................. 3-33

3.5. Signal acquisition and processing.......................................... 3-35

3.6. Self-supervision ..................................................................... 3-44

3.6.2.3. Plausibility check ................................................................... 3-51

3.7. Basic functions of the protection system................................ 3-53

3.8. Busbar protection function ..................................................... 3-71

3.9. Technical specification........................................................... 3-91

3.1. Application and system capacity

NOTE: The protection system can be used either with bay

NOTE: The application of the protection system in complex

The following are examples of the principal busbar configura-

HEST 055 001 C

Fig. 3.1 Single busbar

HEST 055 002 C